JP7435404B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and controls such as switching the gaming state based on the establishment of predetermined conditions are performed to control the progress of the game. Devices that perform various types of switching are known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-81853

Here, in the gaming machines and the like exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in performing predetermined switching regarding game progress .

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform predetermined switching regarding game progress .

The present invention
a firing means capable of firing a game ball based on a predetermined firing operation;
a specific determination means that executes a specific determination based on establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
a benefit granting means capable of granting a predetermined benefit to the player based on the result of the specific determination;
A display means capable of variably displaying a pattern;
A game round is performed by starting variable display of symbols on the display means based on the specific determination, and displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the specific determination as one game round. a game time control means for controlling the game time so that the game time is played;
Equipped with
It has a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
a transition means capable of transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state without passing through the provision of the predetermined benefit when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
means for enabling the stop display period during which the stop display is performed in a predetermined game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied to be longer than the stop display period in a specific game round in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied;
Equipped with
A game in which a game ball is fired by a first firing operation in the first game state is recommended, and a game in which a game ball is fired by a second firing operation different from the first firing operation in the second game state is recommended. It is configured as follows.
The transition means enables the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state to be performed at a first timing before the end of the stop display in the predetermined gaming round ,
It is characterized by comprising means for enabling specific notification corresponding to the second firing operation to be executed at a second timing after the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. shall be.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform predetermined switching regarding game progress .

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board. (a) is a schematic diagram of the second operating port when it is in a closed state, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the second operating port when it is in an open state. (a) is a sectional view of the variable winning device in the closed state, and (b) is a sectional view of the variable winning device in the open state. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a figure for explaining the display content on the display screen of a pattern display device. It is a figure for explaining the display content on the display screen of a pattern display device. It is a figure for explaining the display content on the display screen of a pattern display device. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/losing lottery and the like. It is a figure showing an example of a validity table. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot type table for the first special symbol, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot type table for the second special symbol. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table for a jackpot, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table for a loss. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing in the MPU of the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing the winning process for the operating port. It is a flowchart which shows information acquisition processing. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. 7 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the time of the end of opening/closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows pending prefetch processing. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the production control device and its peripheral equipment. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing in MPU of a production control device. 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. It is a figure showing the composition of a storage area for reservation. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a suspension notice performance, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining suspension change points during a game round. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for a pending notice. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining production mode. It is a diagram showing an example of a final display mode lottery table. It is a figure showing an example of a production scenario lottery table. (a) is a flowchart showing the first execution process of a pending notice, and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of a display mode storage area. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a change suggestion performance. (a) is a flowchart showing processing corresponding to commands at the time of shift, and (b) is a diagram for explaining shift processing of a pending image. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special figure fluctuation display. It is a flowchart which shows processing for production mode switching. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process for returning with advance notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd execution of a suspension notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 3rd execution of a suspension notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process for promotion of a pending notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for promotion determination. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing according to Modification 1 of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows processing for production mode switching. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd setting process for a reservation notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special figure fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a flow chart which shows processing for production mode switching concerning modification 2 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for return determination. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a figure which shows an example of the variable display time table based on the modification 3 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for a pending notice. It is a diagram showing an example of a final display mode lottery table. It is a diagram showing an example of a final display mode lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for opening/closing execution modes. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process for returning with advance notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for return determination. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. (a) is a flowchart showing information acquisition processing according to modification 4 of the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing suspension command setting processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st pending prefetch process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for opening/closing execution modes. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd pending prefetching process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process for returning with advance notice. It is a figure which shows an example of an upper limit display mode table. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration according to modification 5 of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in MPU of a performance control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a process for restoring a pending notice. 3 is a flowchart illustrating display mode setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special figure fluctuation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 4th execution of a suspension notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process for promotion of a pending notice. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. (a) is a flowchart showing main processing according to modification 6 of the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows production setting processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating display mode setting processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a flow chart which shows processing for production mode switching concerning modification 7 of a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows mode switching determination processing. It is a figure which shows the aspect of switching restriction of a production mode. It is a figure which shows the switching aspect of the production mode based on the modification 8 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows processing for production mode switching. 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd setting process for a reservation notice. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for a lottery of winnings and the like according to the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a validity table for low probability mode, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a validity table for high probability mode. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot type table for the first special figure, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot type table for the second special figure, and (c) is an example of the second time-saving game state. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the accessory opening/closing game. It is a diagram. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the winning process for the operating port. It is a flowchart which shows information acquisition processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing special figure game time control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. 7 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. It is a figure which shows an example of a variable display time table. It is a figure which shows an example of a variable display time table. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the time of the end of opening/closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows high probability mode update/termination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing a process for updating and terminating high-frequency support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a 2nd time-saving game state transition. (a) is a flowchart showing a process for starting a finalized display, and (b) is a flowchart showing a process for ending a finalized display. It is a flowchart showing the normal figure game times control process. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows accessory opening and closing processing. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the production control device and its peripheral equipment. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing in MPU of a production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for 1st transition. It is a figure showing an example of a display of a pattern display device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for a 2nd transition. It is a figure showing an example of a display of a pattern display device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for an end. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special figure fluctuation display. (a) is a flowchart showing the process for updating the remaining number of times display, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process for updating the number of misses display. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the second time-saving game state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the second time-saving game state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the second time-saving game state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the second time-saving game state of Modification 1 according to the second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display of a pattern display device. It is a figure for explaining the 2nd time-saving game state based on modification 2 of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a 2nd time-saving game state transition. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the second time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the validity table based on the modification 3 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a type table for jackpot. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a type table for special winnings, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a third time-saving game state. It is a flowchart showing special figure game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a variable display time table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a 3rd time-saving game state transition. 7 is a flowchart illustrating processing for starting final display. It is a flowchart which shows production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special figure fluctuation display. It is a flowchart which shows processing for a fluctuation start. It is a figure showing an example of a display of a pattern display device. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the third time-saving game state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the third time-saving game state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the common figure game round in the final game round. It is a figure which shows an example of the validity table based on the modification 4 of the said 2nd Embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a type table for jackpot, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a third time-saving game state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a 3rd time-saving game state transition. It is a figure which shows an example of a variable display time table. It is a figure which shows an example of a variable display time table. It is a flowchart which shows production setting processing. (a) is a flowchart showing the first transition performance setting process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a game repeat performance for the first time-saving game state. (a) is a flowchart showing the performance setting process for the third transition, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the game repeat performance for the third time-saving game state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special figure fluctuation display. (a) is a flowchart showing a process for starting a fluctuation, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between a fluctuation display pattern and a game repeat performance. It is a diagram showing an example of specific effects A to E. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the validity table based on the modification 5 of 2nd Embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a type table for jackpot, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a third time-saving game state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a 3rd time-saving game state transition. It is a figure which shows an example of a variable display time table. It is a figure which shows an example of a variable display time table. It is a figure showing an example of a display of a pattern display device. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the validity table based on the modification 6 of 2nd Embodiment. (a), (b) are diagrams showing an example of the type table for jackpot, (c) are diagrams showing an example of the second time-saving game state, and (d) are diagrams showing an example of the third time-saving game state. . It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the time of the end of opening/closing execution mode. It is a flowchart showing special figure game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a variable display time table. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a process for updating a high-frequency support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the transition determination process of the 2nd time-saving game state. It is a flowchart which shows the transition determination process of the 3rd time-saving game state. 3 is a flowchart showing a process for ending high-frequency support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for time-saving game state transition. 7 is a flowchart illustrating processing for starting final display. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. 12 is a flowchart showing a variation start process according to modification 7 of the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transition determination process of the 3rd time-saving game state. It is a flowchart which shows the transition determination process of the 2nd time-saving game state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a type table for special losing according to modification 8 of the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a third time-saving game state. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart showing process B for transition determination of the third time-saving game state. It is a flowchart showing process B for determining transition to the second time-saving gaming state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for time-saving game state transition. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. 12 is a flowchart showing a variation start process according to modification example 9 of the second embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a variation start process according to Modification 10 of the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transition determination process of the 2nd time-saving game state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external signal according to Modification 11 of the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external signal according to modification 12 of the second embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external signal. (a) is a diagram for explaining connection terminals, and (b) is a diagram for explaining characteristics of external signals.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 seen from the front side, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 developed. In addition, in FIG. 2, the configuration within the gaming area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting plate materials on four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. Note that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility of a game parlor.

The gaming machine main body 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in an openable and closable state. Specifically, an upper supporting metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion of the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. A side support fitting 18 is provided. These upper support metal fittings 17 and lower support metal fittings 18 constitute a support mechanism, and the support mechanism allows the gaming machine main body 12 to rotate on the left side with respect to the outer frame 11 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the right side as the rotation tip side (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit disposed behind the inner frame 13. 15. Note that an inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. In addition, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. (see Figure 3).

Next, the front door frame 14 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a frame body 20 made of synthetic resin whose outer shape is almost the same as the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. There is. A generally elliptical window 21 is formed in the center of the frame 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE, which will be described later, can be viewed from the front. It is closed from the back side of the front door frame 14.

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition section that partitions the holding area of the glass panel 23 into front and rear sections, and both glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear directions with the partition section in between. In other words, by securing a predetermined gap between both glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the gaming area PE is covered twice from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

Note that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to make these glass panels face each other front and back with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to use a transparent synthetic resin panel member in place of the glass panel.

As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, a lamp section (annular illumination section) 26 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window section 21 . The lamp section 26 lights up or flashes in response to changes in the gaming state, such as when hitting a jackpot or reaching a predetermined reach. In addition, an error display lamp section 27 is provided at the center of the lamp section 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, which lights up in the event of a predetermined error, and furthermore, on the left and right sides of the error display lamp section 27, prize ball lamps that light up while prize balls are being paid out are provided. A section 28 is provided. Further, a speaker section 29 is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28, which outputs sound effects and the like according to the game state.

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge portion 31 and a lower bulge portion 32 that bulge toward the front are vertically arranged in parallel. An upper tray 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 32. The upper tray 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls put out from a payout device described later, and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism side described later while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33.

Further, on the upper surface of the upper bulging portion 31, there is provided an effect operation section 36 (specifically, a push operation button) that is manually operated by the player. For example, by manually operating the performance operation unit 36 in accordance with a suggestion displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, which will be described later, the performance content on the display screen G etc. changes to a predetermined performance content corresponding to the same operation. Become.

A game ball firing handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball firing handle 41, a game ball is fired from a game ball firing mechanism which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back side of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin, and has a front door-side upper plate passage communicating with the upper plate 33 and a front door-side lower plate passage communicating with the lower plate 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a socket part that protrudes rearward and is open upward is formed in the upper corner thereof, and by partitioning the socket part into left and right sides by a partition wall, the entrance of the upper tray passage on the front door side is formed. section and an entrance section of the front door side lower plate passage are formed into sections. Game balls entering the upper tray passage on the front door side are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls entering the lower tray passage on the front door side are guided to the lower tray 34.

On the rear side of the front door frame 14 on the rotation base end side, protruding shafts are provided at the upper and lower ends thereof. These protruding shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, on the rear side of the front door frame 14, a plurality of hook fittings 49 are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. These hooks 49 constitute a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be explained in detail based on FIGS. 2 and 3. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11. The height of the resin base 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height of the outer frame 11. Further, the resin base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain board is arranged below the resin base 50 (specifically, its lower end), and when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 rests on the curtain board. .

Support fittings 51 and 52 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the front surface of the resin base 50 on the rotation base end side. The support fittings 51 and 52 have shaft holes formed therein, and by inserting the protruding shafts of the front door frame 14 into these shaft holes, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. ing.

Insertion holes for inserting hook fittings 49 provided on the back side of the front door frame 14 are provided on the front side of the resin base 50 on the rotation tip side. In this pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 3, a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is arranged hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, the front door frame 14 is locked with respect to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened by locking the hook fitting 49 with the locking device 55 (specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole. Further, the locking device 55 has a plurality of inner frame hook members 57 extending toward the rear of the inner frame 13. When these inner frame hook members 57 are caught on the hook receiving members 19 of the outer frame 11, the game machine main body 12 is locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed at the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated into the locking device 55, and when the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned clockwise, the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right. The locking device 55 is configured so that when the key is turned to the left, the inner frame 13 is unlocked from the outer frame 11.

A generally elliptical window hole 54 is formed in the center of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is closed from the rear by a game board 60 mounted on the resin base 50. The game board 60 includes a wooden plywood and a sheet material covering the front surface of the plywood, and the front surface thereof is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. In this exposed portion, that is, on the front side of the game board 60, a game area PE is formed in which the game balls flow down. Note that the game board 60 is not limited to being made of wood, but may also be made of synthetic resin.

Hereinafter, the game board 60 (particularly the various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be explained based on FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

The game board 60 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings that pass through the game board 60 in its thickness direction (back and forth direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 61, a first operating opening 62, a second operating opening 63, a through gate 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display unit 67, and the like.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 61, variable winning device 65, first operating opening 62, and second operating opening 63, it is detected by the winning sensor (detection sensor), and based on the detection result, a predetermined number of balls are entered. Benefits such as payout of prize balls are given to the player. In this case, when a ball enters the general winning hole 61, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the variable winning device 65, 15 game balls are paid out. is executed. Furthermore, when a ball enters the first operating port 62, three game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the second operating port 63, one game ball is put out. is executed. Incidentally, even if a ball enters the through gate 64, the game ball is not put out.

Note that the number of these prize balls is arbitrary; for example, the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 62 and the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 63 may be the same, or the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 63 may be the same. The number of prize balls related to this may be larger than the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 62. Further, the number of prize balls related to the variable winning device 65 may be the same as or smaller than the number of prize balls related to other operating ports or the like. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when a ball enters the through gate 64.

An out port 68 is provided at the bottom of the game board 60, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry sections are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and includes not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the gaming area PE after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball passes through the opening. It also includes a mode in which it is not later ejected from the game area PE. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish the ball entering the out port 68 from the ball entering the general winning port 61, the operating ports 62, 63, the variable winning device 65, or the through gate 64, Also expressed as winning a prize.

In addition, a large number of nails 69 are planted on the game board 60 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling path of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged. The flow of game balls is diversified by various configurations such as these nails 69 and windmills, and adjustments are made so that winnings in the above-mentioned general prize opening 61 etc. occur with a moderate probability.

At the center of the game board 60, the variable display unit 67 is arranged. The variable display unit 67 is installed on the back side of the game board 60 (FIG. 3), and the display screen G can be viewed through an opening provided in the center of the game board 60. A frame-shaped center frame 76 is attached to the front surface of the game board 60 so as to correspond to the peripheral edge of the opening.

The center frame 76 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 60, and the gap between the front surface of the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This prevents the game balls flowing down the game area PE from flowing into the inner area of the center frame 76 and coming into contact with the display screen G. In addition, the center frame 76 disperses the flow paths of the game balls in the game area PE to the left and right, forming a left route passing through the left side of the center frame 76 and a right route passing through the right side.

Whether the game ball flows down (passes) the left route or the right route is determined by the amount of rotational operation of the game ball launch handle 41, that is, the launch force of the game ball. Since the fired game ball enters the game area PE from the upper left side of the game board 60, the stronger the firing force of the game ball, the easier the game ball will flow down the right route.

Specifically, when the player performs a rotational operation of the game ball firing handle 41 as a first firing operation with a rotational operation amount in a first range that is greater than or equal to a predetermined rotational amount and less than a reference rotational amount, the fired game ball When the ball flows down the left route and the player performs a rotation operation of the game ball launch handle 41 with a rotation operation amount in the second range that is greater than or equal to the reference rotation amount as a second launch operation, the fired game ball Flow down the right route. The predetermined amount of rotation is the amount of rotation operation that allows the fired game ball to pass through the guide rail 100 (described later) and enter the game area PE, and the reference amount of rotation is the amount of rotation operation that allows the launched game ball to pass through the guide rail 100 (described later) and enter the game area PE. This is the amount of rotational operation to fire the game ball with an attainable firing force.

A first operating port 62 that is open upward is arranged below the center frame 76 (variable display unit 67). The first operating port 62 is located at the left and right center of the game board 60, but a game component such as a nail 69 is provided to prevent a game ball flowing down the right route from entering the first operating port 62. That is, only game balls flowing down the left route can enter the first operating port 62 to win. Therefore, when a player aims to win a prize at the first operating port 62, he or she plays the game by shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left route. The first operating port 62 is provided with a first operating port winning sensor 62a (FIG. 7), and the game ball that has won in the first operating port 62 is detected by the winning sensor 62a.

A second operating port 63 is arranged on the right side of the center frame 76 (variable display unit 67). The configuration of the second operating port 63 will be explained with reference to FIG. 5.

The second actuating port 63 is provided with a general electric accessory 63a (variable receiving means) as a guide piece (support piece) consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. Specifically, the pair of movable pieces supported so as to be rotatable in the left-right direction are arranged so as to sandwich the opening serving as the second operating port 63 from both left and right sides.

By rotating each movable piece, the closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) shown in FIG. 5(a) and the open state (support state or guide state) shown in FIG. 5(b) are achieved. It is possible to switch to. Specifically, a protrusion 63d is provided at the upper part of the second operating port 63 so as to protrude forward, and when the movable piece is in the upright position as shown in FIG. 5(a), The gap between each movable piece and the protrusion 63d becomes less than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball is prevented from flowing into the second operating port 63. On the other hand, when the movable piece rotates to be inclined outward as shown in FIG. 5(b), an opening large enough to allow the game ball to pass through is formed between it and the protrusion 63d. , the game ball is allowed to flow into the second operating port 63. The second operating port 63 is provided with a second operating port winning sensor 63c, and the game ball that has won in the second operating port 63 is detected by the winning sensor 63c.

Moreover, the general electric accessory 63a is provided with a drive part 63b that drives each movable piece. Each movable piece is switched between an open state (tilted position) and a closed state (erected position) by being driven by the driving portion 63b through a link mechanism (not shown). Incidentally, the first actuating port 62 is not provided with a general electrical accessory (opening/closing structure).

Note that in the above configuration, when the second operating port 63 is in the closed state, winning is not possible, but it may be configured to allow winning. That is, although it is possible to win a prize through the second operating port 63 when the opening is in the closed state, it may be configured such that winning is more difficult (it becomes difficult to win) than in the open state. In short, it is sufficient that the ease of entering the second operating port 63 is different between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary. In addition, the configuration of the utility appliance 63a is not limited to the above, and for example, the movable piece rotates back and forth or slides back and forth or left and right to open and close the second operating port 63. It may be something that does.

As shown in FIG. 4, a through gate 64 is arranged above (upstream side) of the second operating port 63 in the right route. The through gate 64 has a through hole (not shown) that penetrates in the vertical direction, and the game ball that enters the through gate 64 passes through the through gate 64 and flows down the game area PE again. Therefore, the game ball that enters the through gate 64 can also enter the second operating port 63. The through gate 64 is provided with a through prize sensor 64a (FIG. 7), and the game ball that has won the through gate 64 is detected by the prize winning sensor 64a.

The through gate 64 serves as a trigger for opening the general electric accessory 63a provided at the second operating port 63. Specifically, an internal lottery is held when a prize is won in the through gate 64, and when the result of the internal lottery becomes an opening result (support winning), the utility power utility object 63a is changed from a closed state to an open state, Thereafter, an accessory opening/closing game (support execution mode) for returning to the closed state is executed.

In the right route, a variable prize winning device 65 is arranged below (downstream side) the second operating port 63. The configuration of the variable prize winning device 65 will be explained with reference to FIG.

The variable winning device 65 includes a large winning opening 65a that opens forward, and an opening/closing door 65b that opens and closes the large winning opening 65a. The big prize opening 65a has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is large enough to allow a plurality of game balls to win at the same time. The grand prize opening 65a communicates with a guide passage 65e provided on the back side of the game board 60, and is configured so that all game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 65a are guided to the guiding passage 65e. A winning sensor 65c for the big winning hole is provided in the guide passage 65e, and the game ball that has won the big winning hole 65a is detected by the winning sensor 65c.

Further, the variable winning device 65 is provided with a drive section 65d that drives the opening/closing door 65b. The opening/closing door 65b is driven by the drive unit 65d through a link mechanism (not shown), so that a closed state in which no game ball can enter the grand prize opening 65a (FIG. 6(a)) and a closed state in which no game ball can enter the grand prize opening 65a are established. The state is switched to an open state (FIG. 6(b)) in which prizes can be won. Specifically, the opening/closing door 65b is normally in a closed state, and is switched to an open state when a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game) is won in an internal lottery.

The opening/closing execution mode is a mode to which the player enters when a jackpot is won. The opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail later. The opening mode of the variable prize winning device 65 is variable, with the passage of a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) or the winning of a predetermined number of prizes (e.g., 10) as one round in the case of a jackpot, and multiple rounds (e.g., 10 rounds) as the upper limit. There is a mode in which the winning device 65 is repeatedly opened.

In addition, in the above-mentioned structure, when it is in the closed state, it is not possible to win a prize in the grand prize opening 65a, but it may be configured to allow a prize to be won. That is, although it is possible to win the big prize opening 65a when it is in the closed state, it may be configured such that it is more difficult to win (it becomes difficult to win) than when it is in the open state. In short, it is sufficient that the ease of entering the big prize opening 65a is different between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

Here, only the game ball flowing down the right route can win the second operating port 63, the through gate 64, and the variable prize winning device 65. Therefore, when a player aims to win a prize in the second operating port 63, through gate 64, or variable prize winning device 65, the player plays the game by shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right route.

As shown in FIG. 4, a main display unit 81 is provided below the variable winning device 65. The main display unit 81 is arranged along the lower outer edge of the game area PE, and protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 60. On the front side of the main display unit 81, there are provided a special figure display section 43 and a regular figure display section 44 on which predetermined patterns and the like are displayed. Each of these display sections 43 and 44 is visible from the front through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14. Note that the gap between the front surface of the main display unit 81 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball is prevented from passing in front of the main display unit 81, and the visibility of the various display sections 43 and 44 is ensured.

The special figure display section 43 includes a first special figure display section AS that displays the lottery results based on winnings to the first operating port 62, and a first special drawing display section AS that displays the lottery results based on winnings to the second operating port 63. A second special symbol display section BS for displaying the lottery results is provided.

In the first special figure display section AS, a variable display of symbols is performed using a prize winning to the first operating port 62 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, a symbol is displayed based on a winning to the first operating port 62. The results of the internal lottery will be clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the prize entered into the first operation port 62 is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the variable display is stopped on the first special symbol display section AS, and a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stop result. After being displayed, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the second special figure display section BS, a variable display of symbols is performed using a prize winning to the second operating port 63 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, a symbol is displayed based on a winning to the second operating port 63. The results of the internal lottery will be clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the prize entered into the second actuating port 63 is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the variable display is stopped on the second special symbol display section BS, and a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stopping result. After being displayed, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the following, in order to distinguish between the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner when a winning is made to the first operating port 62 and the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner that is triggered by a winning that is made to the second operating port 63, the former is referred to as the first special symbol. Alternatively, it is called the first special pattern, and the latter is sometimes called the second special pattern or the second special pattern.

Here, based on winning to either of the actuating ports 62, 63, a variable display is started in the corresponding special figure display section AS, BS, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the above-mentioned variable display is stopped. corresponds to one game time on the special figure display sections AS and BS. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, for example, a single display area is provided, and even if a winning occurs in either of the operating ports 62, 63, that single display area is displayed. In a configuration in which a variable display is performed in a display area, one gaming session is the time from when the variable display starts in the single display area until the variable display is stopped while displaying a predetermined stop result. shall be.

Further, the main display unit 81 is provided with a special figure reservation number display section AM. The number of times a game ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 is reserved up to four times, and the special figure reservation number display section AM shows the first special figure (first actuation port 63). The number of reservations for the opening 62) and the number of reservations for the second special figure (second operation opening 63) can be displayed separately.

The general figure display section 44 is a display section for clearly indicating the result of an internal lottery conducted based on winnings in the through gate 64. In this case, in the general figure display section 44, the winning pattern in the through gate 64 is used as a trigger to display the symbols in a variable manner, and as a result of the stoppage of the variable display, an internal lottery is performed based on the winning in the through gate 64. The results are clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning through gate 64 is a winning result that corresponds to the transition to the support state in which the general public utility object 63a is opened, a predetermined stop result will be displayed on the general public figure display section 44. is displayed and the fluctuation display is stopped, then it moves to the support state. Note that the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner upon winning the through gate 64 are sometimes referred to as ordinary symbols or common symbols.

Here, based on the winning in the through gate 64, a variable display is started on the display section 44 for ordinary figures, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and until the above-mentioned variable display is stopped, the display section 44 for ordinary figures This corresponds to one game time in . In the following, in order to distinguish between the game times on the normal pattern display section 44 and the game times on the special pattern display sections AS and BS, the former may be referred to as a normal pattern game period, and the latter may be referred to as a special pattern game period.

Further, the display section 44 for ordinary figures is provided with a reserved number display section FM for ordinary figures. The number of times a game ball enters the through gate 64 can be held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held general drawings (through gate 64) can be displayed on the normal drawing holding number display section FM. .

The special figure display section 43 and the regular figure display section 44 are configured by a segment display device having a plurality of segments, but are not limited to this, and may be configured by other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device. It's okay.

In addition, although not shown, the main display unit 81 is provided with a round display section for clearly indicating the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode. The round display section starts displaying the number of rounds when or when the opening/closing execution mode is started. This display continues without changing the display content while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, and ends when or when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be explained. The variable display unit 67 is provided with a symbol display device 75 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) a symbol, which is a type of symbol.

The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. Note that the symbol display device 75 is not limited to being a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the symbol display device 75, symbols are displayed side by side, for example, at the top, middle, and bottom, and these symbols are scrolled in the left-right direction so as to be displayed variably. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 75 is started based on the winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. That is, when a variable display is performed on the special figure display section 43, a variable display is also performed on the symbol display device 75 accordingly. When the variable winning device 65 shifts to the jackpot game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable winning device 65 is in the open state, the symbol display device 75 stops displaying a predetermined symbol combination on a preset active line. .

Further, on the symbol display device 75, a pending display corresponding to the first special symbol display section AS and the second special symbol display section BS is performed. In this hold display, a predetermined hold image is displayed, and the number of displayed images indicates the number of hold images of each operating port 63, 64. Note that the number of reservations is not limited to that shown by the above-mentioned reservation image, and may be indicated by a numerical display. In addition, it is not limited to the symbol display device 75, and for example, a display section provided on the game board 60 separately from the symbol display device 75 (a display section separate from each pending number display section AM, FM of the main display unit 81). Alternatively, the configuration may include a light emitting section (reservation lamp section) or the like.

The configuration of the inner frame 13 will be explained with reference to FIG. 2 again. A game ball firing mechanism 110 is provided below the mounting area of the game board 60 on the resin base 50. The game ball firing mechanism 110 fires game balls toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball firing handle 41. The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game ball that launches the game ball at the launch standby position. The main components include a ball feeding device 113 that supplies the ball, and a base plate 114 on which the various components 111 to 113 are attached. The base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50, so that the game ball firing mechanism 110 is integrated with the resin base 50.

The firing rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an obliquely inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 60 side. A ball stopper is provided at a position near the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the firing rail 112 for stopping the game balls supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the above-mentioned firing standby position. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source and a launch control device, which will be described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion and contraction direction based on the output of the electric signal from the power supply and the firing control device, so that the game ball placed in the firing standby position is moved to the game board 60 side, more specifically, the game ball It is launched toward the guide rail 100 attached to the board 60.

As shown in FIG. 4, the guide rail 100 divides the gaming area PE so that the outer shape of the gaming area PE is approximately circular. Further, the guide rail 100 consists of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 that are arranged to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide path 103 is defined by both rails 101 and 102. It is formed. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion open to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion located above the game area PE. The game ball fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112 → the guide rail 100 (entrance part → exit part).

In addition, on the forward side of the exit part of the game board 60, more specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, a return prevention member 106 is attached to prevent the game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning to the guide path 103. This prevents the game ball that has reached the game area PE first from hindering the launch of the subsequent game ball.

As shown in FIG. 2, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip end portion of the launch rail 112 diagonally face each other across the lower edge of the game board 60. . That is, both of the rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are shifted from side to side near the lower edge of the game board 60. This allows both rails 100 and 112 to approach the lower edge of the game board 60, while forming a gap at a predetermined interval between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the firing rail 112.

A foul ball passage 46 is provided below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 46 is integrally formed with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return inside the guide path 103 as foul balls, those foul balls will enter the foul ball path 46 through the above-mentioned gap. becomes. The foul ball passage 46 communicates with the lower tray passage on the front door side, and the game balls that have entered the foul ball passage 46 are discharged to the lower tray 34. As a result, the foul ball is returned to the player while interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be fired is suppressed.

In the resin base 50, a through hole is formed on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, on the side supporting the front door frame 14) that penetrates the resin base 50 in the front and back direction, and a passage forming member is inserted into this through hole. 121 are arranged. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50 and has a main body side upper plate passage and a main body side lower plate passage. The upstream sides of the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage communicate with a game ball distribution section to be described later. Further, a socket portion of a passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and a front door side upper tray passage is arranged below the main body side upper tray passage. A front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage.

An opening/closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the resin base 50. The opening/closing member 124 is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction by a support shaft provided at its lower end, and further includes a biasing member that biases the opening/closing member 124 to a forward position that closes the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage. It is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening/closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure and closes the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage. Thereby, when the front door frame 14 is opened with game balls stored in the main body side upper tray passage or the main body side lower tray passage, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of the stored balls falling out. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open by the socket provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 against the urging force. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage and the front door side upper plate passage are in communication, and the main body side lower plate passage and the front door side lower plate passage are in communication.

Next, the back structure of the inner frame 13 (resin base 50 and game board 60) will be explained based on FIG.

Bearing fittings 132 are arranged vertically in parallel on the rotation base end side of the back surface of the resin base 50. Bearing parts are formed in the bearing fitting 132 at vertically spaced intervals, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing parts.

A plurality of locking metal fittings are provided on the back surface of the resin base 50, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by these locking metal fittings. Here, the configuration of the back side of the game board 60 will be explained.

A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67 arranged in the center of the game board 60 so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A production control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap with the display control device. The production control device unit 142 is configured to include a production control device 143 and a mounting base 144, and the production control device 143 is mounted on the mounting base 144.

The production control device 143 includes a production control board that controls audio, lamp displays, and the display control device according to instructions from a main control device to be described later, and the production control board includes a board box 145 made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed and configured.

On the back side of the game board 60, as shown in FIG. 3, a collection board 150 is provided below the variable display unit 67. The gathering board 150 is provided with a game ball collection mechanism that collects game balls that have won into various winning holes, a detection mechanism that detects the entry of game balls into various winning holes, and the like.

To explain the game ball collection mechanism, the collection board 150 is provided with collection passages that individually correspond to various ball entry parts such as the general prize opening 61. These recovery passages descend from the ball entry portions along the back side of the game board 60, and define the falling paths of the game balls. Each collection path joins near the lower end of the game board 60, and all the game balls that have passed through the ball entry part such as the general prize opening 61 gather at the bottom of the game board 60 via the collection path. Become. The exit portion of each collection path is open downward, and a discharge path is provided on the forward side (specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls gathered below the game board 60 by the collection path are led out to the discharge path. It should be noted that the out port 68 similarly communicates with the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are also led out to the discharge passage through the out port 68.

To explain the detection mechanism, the collection board 150 is provided with winning sensors (detection sensors) that individually correspond to various ball entry parts such as the general winning opening 61. These various winning sensors are placed in the middle of each collection path that connects to the ball entry section such as the general winning opening 61, and are used to detect game balls when the falling path of the game ball is defined in the collection path. Detect passage. That is, when the game ball passes through a detection area provided in the middle of each collection path, entry of the ball into the ball entry opening, such as the general prize winning opening 61, is detected. The winning sensor is composed of, for example, a magnetic sensor that detects changes in the magnetic field that occur when a game ball passes through a detection area.

These various winning sensors are electrically connected to a main controller unit 160 (more specifically, the main controller) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and detection signals from these winning sensors are sent to the main controller unit 160 (more specifically, the main controller). The configuration is such that it is output as follows. The main controller unit 160 and its associated configuration will be described below.

The main controller unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the collection board 150 from the rear side, and is composed of a synthetic resin mounting base 161 and a main controller 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. has been done. The main control device 162 is equipped with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game, and the main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like. There is.

The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing portion serving as a sealing means, thereby sealing the board box 163. A plurality of sealing parts are provided on the long sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing part as long as it connects the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner; It is intended to be irrevocably bound. The sealing process performed by the sealing section is to prevent unauthorized opening after the seal has been sealed, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, it will be possible to detect this situation early and easily. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pawl into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of sealing parts. When opening the board box 163, such as when a problem occurs with the housed main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connecting part between the sealing part in which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing part is removed. disconnect. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, if the sealing process is to be performed again, insert the locking claw into the long hole of the other sealing part. If a history indicating that the board box 163 has been opened is left in the board box 163, it can be easily discovered by looking at the board box 163 that the board box 163 has been opened in an unauthorized manner.

A plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one short side of the board box 163 so as to protrude laterally. These joining pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of pieces to be joined formed on the mounting base 161, and the sealing process is performed between the board box 163 and the mounting base 161 by the joining pieces and the joined pieces. be exposed.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be explained based on FIGS. 2 and 3.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by a back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, to which a dispensing mechanism section 202, a discharge passage board 203, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 3, it includes a base part 211 to which the payout mechanism part 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover part 212 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. and has. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the top surface are closed, and only the bottom surface is open, and has a size sufficient to at least surround the variable display unit 67.

An external output terminal 213 is provided on the upper right side of the base portion 211. The external output terminal 213 is provided with various output terminals, and various signals are outputted to the hall computer HC (management control device) on the gaming hall side through these output terminals. In addition, a pair of upper and lower latching pins are provided on the right end of the base portion 211 when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the latching pins are inserted into a bearing fitting 132 (specifically, a bearing portion) provided on the inner frame 13. By doing so, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. Further, a fastener for fastening to a fastened hole provided in the inner frame 13 is provided at the rotating tip of the base portion 211, and by fitting the fastening tool into the fastened hole. A back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

The dispensing mechanism section 202 is disposed on the base section 211 so as to bypass the protective cover section 212. The payout mechanism section 202 is provided with a tank 221 which is disposed at the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and the tank 221 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Ru. A tank rail that slopes gently toward the downstream side is connected to the lower part of the tank 221, and a case rail that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A dispensing device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls put out by the payout device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution section provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 222.

The game ball distribution section has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is located on the main body side described above. It is formed so that it communicates with the upper plate 33 via the upper plate passage and the front door side upper plate passage, and the outer opening communicates with the lower plate 34 via the main body side lower plate passage and the front door side lower plate passage. .

As shown in FIG. 3, a discharge passage board 203 and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end in the front and rear directions. A discharge passageway that is open to the rear is formed on the surface of the discharge passage board 203 facing the control device assembly unit 204 , and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204 . The discharge passage is formed to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage etc. are delivered to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage. be discharged.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally elongated mounting base, and the dispensing control device 181 and the power supply and firing control device 191 are mounted on the mounting base. The payout control device 181 and the power source and launch control device 191 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 181 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 181, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is housed in a board box, and a state return switch provided on the payout control board projects outside the board box. For example, when a state recovery switch is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 222, the ball jam is cleared.

The power supply and launch control device 191 has a power supply and launch control board housed in a board box, and the board generates and outputs a predetermined power required by various control devices, and furthermore, the power supply and launch control board is housed in a board box, and the board generates and outputs a predetermined power required for various control devices, etc., and also allows the player to launch game balls. The launch of the game ball is controlled by operating the handle 41.

The power supply and launch control device 191 is provided with a power failure monitoring unit (power failure monitoring circuit) 315 that monitors the power source and detects the occurrence of a power outage state such as a power outage. This pachinko machine 10 has a memory retention function for various data, so that even in the event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when the power is restored, it can be restored to the state at the time of the power outage. It has become. For example, when the power is shut off in a normal procedure, such as when a game hall is closed, the state before the shutoff is stored and retained. Further, the power supply and launch control device 191 is provided with a RAM erase switch. If you turn on the power while holding down the RAM erase switch, the RAM data will be initialized.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram of FIG. 7.

An MPU 312 is mounted on the main control board 311 of the main control device 162 . The MPU 312 includes a ROM 313 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 312, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 313. A certain RAM 314, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are built in.

The RAM 314 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data using the power supply and backup voltage from the launch control device 191 even after a power outage occurs, and the RAM 314 temporarily stores various data. A backup area is provided separately from the storage area. The backup area is an area for storing the stack pointer at the time of power cutoff, the values of each register, I/O, etc. when a power cutoff occurs. At the time of recovery from a power outage state (at the time of power restoration), the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power outage based on the information in the backup area.

Note that in the configuration shown in FIG. 7, the ROM 313 and RAM 314 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 312, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which each of them is integrated into chips may be used. This also applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 162.

The MPU 312 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A payout control device 181 and a power supply and firing control device 191 are connected to the input side of the MPU 312. Furthermore, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 312. The various sensors include a general winning opening 61, a first operating opening 62, a second operating opening 63, a through gate 64, a winning sensor 61a for the general winning opening that detects winnings to the variable winning device 65, and a winning sensor 61a for the first operating opening. A sensor 62a, a winning sensor 63c for the second operating opening, a winning sensor 64a for through, a winning sensor 65c for the big winning opening, etc. are provided. The MPU 312 performs winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion based on the detection results of these various sensors 61a, 62a, 63c, 364a, and 65c. Furthermore, the MPU 312 executes various lottery drawings based on winnings in the first operating port 62, the second operating port 63, and the through gate 64.

A payout control device 181, an effect control device 143, etc. are connected to the output side of the MPU 312. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 181 based on a winning determination result for a winning ball entry portion corresponding to the paying out of a prize ball.

Various commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, a fluctuation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the production control device 143. In this case, the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Note that each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

Moreover, the output side of the MPU 312 is connected to a drive section 63b for the common electric accessory 63a and a drive section 65d for the variable winning device 65 as various drive sections. The main control board 311 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 312 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the MPU 312 executes drive control of the driving unit 65d so that the opening/closing door 65b of the variable prize winning device 65 is driven. Further, when the transition to the support state occurs, the MPU 312 performs drive control of the drive unit 63b so that each movable piece of the general electric utility object 63a is driven. Furthermore, in each special figure game round, display control of the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS in the special figure display section 43 is executed. In addition, during the normal figure game round, display control of the normal figure display section 44 is executed.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned external output terminal 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 312, and through this external output terminal 213, information regarding ball entry into various ball entry sections and lottery results such as jackpots is sent to the hall computer HC. Output. This makes it possible to grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10 on the hall computer HC.

The power supply and firing control device 191 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, necessary operating power is generated for the main control board 311, payout control device 181, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied.

The power supply and launch control device 191 is provided with a power outage monitoring section 315, and the power outage monitoring section 315 monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 191. The power outage monitoring unit 315 determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred when the output voltage from the power supply and launch control device 191 becomes less than 22 volts, and sends a power outage signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable output to the interrupt terminal). As a result, the main controller 162 recognizes the occurrence of a power outage, immediately executes the NMI interrupt process, and further executes the power outage process based on this. By the way, the power supply and launch control device 191 is provided with a power supply section such as a backup capacitor for use in case of power outage, and when a power outage occurs or the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, the Power for memory retention is supplied to the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 from the power supply unit. Further, the power supply and firing control device 191 is responsible for controlling the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 110, and the game ball firing mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met.

The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The production control device 143 controls the driving of the lamp sections 26 to 28 and the speaker section 29 provided in the front door frame 14, and controls the display control device 350, based on various commands input from the main control device 162. It is something to do. The display control device 350 executes display control of the symbol display device 75 based on commands input from the production control device 143. In this case, in the production control device 143, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the variable display time of the symbols on the symbol display device 75 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed are determined, Determine whether or not a reach event will occur and the content of the reach effect.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 75 will be explained based on FIGS. 8 to 10.

As shown in Figures 8(a) to (j), the pattern, which is a type of pattern, consists of nine types of main patterns, each numbered from ``1'' to ``9'', and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as octopuses are numbered from "1" to "9" to form the main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75: an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols of each of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclically scrolling manner in a predetermined direction. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9(b), on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done.

Five effective lines are set on the display screen G, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and with a combination of symbols with the same number attached to any active line formed, all symbol rows Z1 When the fluctuation display of ~Z3 ends, a jackpot video is displayed as the occurrence of a normal 4R jackpot result or a 10R probability variable jackpot result, which will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a 10R guaranteed variable jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbols The combination will stop displaying. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and if a large 4R winning result usually occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols will stop. Is displayed.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the variable display of each symbol row with reference to FIG. 10. When a game round is started, first, high-speed fluctuating display is started for all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol row is being displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 10(a), the fluctuating display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from a high-speed fluctuating display to a slow fluctuating display in which the player can recognize the fluctuating symbols. Then, as shown in FIG. 10(b), when the fluctuating display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, the fluctuating display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high-speed fluctuating display to the low-speed fluctuating display. Then, as shown in FIG. 10(c), the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. After the variation of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed, a stop display period is provided in which the stop display is maintained and stands by for a predetermined period.

By the way, in the gaming machine, when the symbols are stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 75, the symbols in the final stop row (the middle symbol row Z2 in this embodiment) are not suddenly stopped, but are gradually displayed while reducing the fluctuating display speed. Generally, it is stopped at In this case, if it is configured to start stopping the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 (final stop row) at the start of the stop display on the special symbol display section 43, the deceleration time until the symbols stop on the symbol display device 75 will be reduced. Accordingly, the time during which the symbol remains stationary is shortened, resulting in a substantial shortening of the stationary display time.

Therefore, before starting the stop display on the special figure display section 43, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 including the final stop row are stopped (temporarily stopped), and then the stop display on the special figure display section 43 is stopped. It is configured to cause the temporarily stopped symbol to be permanently stopped (determined display) in accordance with the start timing of . The display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the temporary stop is different from that during the final display. For example, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 moves gently back and forth, or at least a part of a character such as an octopus (FIG. 8) forming the main symbol or the sub symbol moves. In other words, the temporary stop is performed in such a way that although the symbol appears to be stopped at first glance, it remains in an incomplete stopped state (stopped display). On the other hand, the confirmed display is performed so that the character is completely stopped without any slight reciprocating movements or movements of the character.

In addition, the temporary stop display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 starts with the stop result corresponding to the result of the win/fail lottery or the type of jackpot, and then shifts to the final display as it is, as well as the temporary stop display that does not correspond to the result of the win/fail lottery or the type of jackpot. After the result is once stopped and displayed, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed again, and then changed to a stop result that corresponds to the result of the winning lottery, etc., and then the display may shift to a final display.

By the way, in the special figure game round executed on the special figure display section 43, the symbols are not temporarily stopped and displayed, but the symbols that have been fluctuated are suddenly stopped as the fluctuating display time elapses, and the state (pictures) (stop display) is maintained until the fixed display time has elapsed. In other words, the stop display of the picture on the special figure display section 43 becomes a fixed display as it is. This also applies to the normal pattern game round executed on the normal pattern display section 44.

Note that the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 75 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and is arbitrary, and may include the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, The combination of symbols corresponding to jackpots and misses can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), a hold display section 200 is provided at the bottom of the display screen G for displaying a number of hold images corresponding to the number of hold times of the game before execution. By viewing the display unit 200, the player can recognize the number of reservations. In the reservation display section 200, a first reservation display area Ga corresponding to the first special figure and a second reservation display area Gb corresponding to the second special figure are set.

In the first holding display area Ga, unit holding display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the same number as the maximum holding number when game balls enter the first operating opening 62 are displayed in sections so as to be arranged side by side in the left and right direction. There is. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first operating port 62, the maximum number of balls to be held is four, and correspondingly, the first unit holding display area Ga includes a first unit holding display area Ga1, a first unit holding display area Ga1, a first unit holding display area Ga1, a first unit holding display area Ga1, A 2-unit pending display area Ga2, a 3rd unit pending display area Ga3, and a 4th unit pending display area Ga4 are set.

For example, if the number of reservations is one when a game ball enters the first operating port 62, a predetermined reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Ga1, and the game ball enters the first operating port 62. If the number of reservations is 4 when winning 62, a predetermined reservation image is displayed in all of the first unit reservation display area Ga1 to fourth unit reservation display area Ga4.

In addition, in the second holding display area Gb, unit holding display areas Gb1 to Gb4 of the same number as the maximum holding number when game balls enter the second operating opening 63 are displayed in sections so that they are arranged in parallel in the left and right direction. has been done. Specifically, when a game ball enters the second operating port 63, the maximum number of balls to be held is four, and correspondingly, the second holding display area Gb has a first unit holding display area Gb1, a first unit holding display area Gb1, a first unit holding display area Gb1, a first unit holding display area Gb1, A 2 unit pending display area Gb2, a 3rd unit pending display area Gb3, and a 4th unit pending display area Gb4 are set.

For example, if the number of reservations when a game ball enters the second operating port 63 is one, a predetermined reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Gb1, and the game ball enters the second operating port 63. If the number of reservations is 4 when winning 63, a predetermined reservation image is displayed in all of the first unit reservation display area Gb1 to the fourth unit reservation display area Gb4.

Further, an execution display area D is set to be sandwiched between the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb. In the execution display area D, a pending image corresponding to the game round to be executed (currently being executed) is displayed. For example, when a game round ends and the next game round starts, the first unit hold display area Ga1 of the first hold display area Ga or the first unit hold display area Gb1 of the second hold display area Gb. The displayed pending image is moved and displayed in the execution display area D. This allows the player to recognize that the game session that was on hold will be played.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in MPU 312 of main controller 162>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described using FIG. 11.

During the game, the MPU 312 uses various counter information to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of the display on the special symbol display section 43, display setting of the regular symbol display section 44, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the initial value settings of the jackpot random number counter C1 used in the lottery to generate a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type such as a variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, and the jackpot random number counter C1 are set. A random number initial value counter CINI used for this, and a variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time in each special figure display section AS, BS in the special figure display section 43 are used. Furthermore, a random number counter C3 per ordinary figure is used to determine whether or not the ordinary electricity accessory 63a of the second actuating port 63 is to be placed in a support state (open state).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 314a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 314. In the lottery counter buffer 314a, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired information storage when a winning occurs in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b as a means.

The holding ball storage area 314b includes a holding area RE consisting of a first special figure holding area Ra and a second special figure holding area Rb, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra and Rb each include a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the lottery counter Numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS stored in the buffer 314a is stored as pending information in one of the areas. Note that the pending information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, if winnings to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 occur multiple times in a row, the first area → second area → third area → Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth area. By providing each of the four areas in this manner, a maximum of four winning histories of game balls entered into the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 can be stored on hold. In addition, a total reservation number storage area is provided in the reservation ball storage area 314b, and the total reservation number storage area stores the number of winning history of the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63. Information for identifying is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 43, and is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the reservation area RE. Based on various numerical information stored in the area AE, judgments of validity and the like are performed.

In detail about each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 199). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, when the game ball enters the first operating port 62, it is stored in the first special figure holding area Ra of the RAM 314, and when the game ball enters the second operating port 63, the second special figure is stored in the RAM 314. storage area Rb.

The value of the random number that results in a jackpot is stored as a win/fail table (win/fail information group) in a win/fail table storage area 313a as a win/fail information group storage means in the ROM 313. Here, the contents of the validity table will be explained using FIG. 12.

In the win/fail table, address information consisting of binary number information and jackpot numerical value information also consisting of binary number information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, the address information is expressed in decimal numbers and is set to five types from "1" to "5", and the jackpot numerical information is expressed in decimal numbers as "7", "17", and "27". , "37", and "47" are set, and these address information and jackpot numerical information are associated on a one-to-one basis. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical information is included in the numerical range of "0" to "199" of the random number information that can be updated in the jackpot random number counter C1.

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the win/fail lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low probability mode and the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the high probability mode are different, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low probability mode, only the jackpot numerical information whose address information is "1" is referenced during the lottery, and in the high probability mode, the jackpot numerical information corresponding to all address information is referenced during the lottery. Referenced. In other words, in the low probability mode, there is one piece of numerical information that results in a jackpot, and in the high probability mode, there are five pieces of numerical information, which is more than in the low probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability mode is 1/200, while the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode is 1/40, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode. The probability of winning is higher. In each lottery mode, the lottery result is a loss unless the random number value is a jackpot. Note that the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary as long as the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is for distributing the type when a jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). It has become. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, when the game ball enters the first operating port 62, it is stored in the first special figure holding area Ra of the RAM 314, and when the game ball enters the second operating port 63, the second special figure is stored in the RAM 314. storage area Rb.

The destinations to which game results are allocated to the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313 as a jackpot type table. Here, the jackpot type table will be explained with reference to FIG. 13.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special pattern (FIG. 13(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special pattern (FIG. 13(b)) are set. When a jackpot is achieved based on a winning at the first operating port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is referred to, and when a jackpot is achieved based on a winning at the second operating port 63, the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is referred to. The jackpot type table for 2 special figures is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), in the first special figure jackpot type table, 4R probability variable jackpot result and 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. In each of these jackpot results, the number of round games to be executed is four. Here, the round game is a game in which variable winning control is executed at least once, in which the variable winning device 65 is changed from a closed state to an open state, and then changed to a closed state. In this embodiment, the variable winning control is configured to be executed once for each round game.

The 4R variable probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the support mode in the general utility accessory 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode. It is. In this case, the high probability mode and high frequency support mode are continued until the next jackpot occurs (until the next opening/closing execution mode is started). Incidentally, while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, when compared in a situation where game balls continue to be launched in the same manner to the game area PE, the frequency of winnings to the second operating port 63 increases. The driving mode of the general electric utility object 63a is controlled so that the height is relatively high or low. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the random number lottery using the random number counter C3 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. The number of openings of the accessory 63a is also greater in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, and the time period for one opening is also longer in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize at the second operating port 63 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize is higher in the first operating port 62 than in the second operating port 63, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning is higher in the first operating port 62 than in the second operating port 63. The probability of winning the prize in the mouth 63 increases. When a winning occurs in the second operating port 63, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has too much. It can be carried out.

Note that the configuration for realizing the high-frequency support mode is not limited to the one described above. For example, after making the winning probability of the general lottery lottery equal in both modes, the configuration for realizing the high-frequency support mode is It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of times the accessory 63a is opened and the length of time each opening is given preferential treatment compared to the low-frequency support mode. In short, it is sufficient that the frequency of winnings to the second operating port 63 per unit time is higher than in the low frequency support mode, and any one of the following conditions or any arbitrary condition among the lottery of common figures, the number of openings, and the opening time is sufficient. A configuration may be adopted in which the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set by differentiating the combination conditions.

The 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the support mode in the utility power accessory 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode. It is. In this case, the high-frequency support mode continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 100 times). If the upper limit number of times is reached, the high-frequency support mode ends, and the support mode switches to the low-frequency support mode while the lottery mode remains the low-probability mode. That is, the game enters a gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

In this embodiment, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to 4R probability variable jackpot results, and "65" to "99" correspond to 4R normal jackpot results. That is, the probability of being allocated to the 4R probability variable jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being allocated to the 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, 10R probability variable jackpot result and 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. The 10R probability-variable jackpot result is one in which the number of round games to be executed is 10. In addition, for the 10R probability variable jackpot result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, and the support mode in the general utility accessory 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode. It was a jackpot result. In this case, the high probability mode and high frequency support mode are continued until the next jackpot occurs.

Note that the 4R normal jackpot result set in the jackpot type table for the second special symbol is the same as the 4R normal jackpot result set in the jackpot type for the first special symbol. In other words, when a 4R normal jackpot result is triggered by winning the second operating port 63, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode. This state continues until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 100 times).

In this embodiment, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to 10R probability variable jackpot results, and "65" to "99" correspond to 4R normal jackpot results. That is, the probability of being allocated to a 10R probability variable jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being allocated to a 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

In this way, the probability of being assigned to a probability-variable jackpot result is the same for both the type table of the first special figure display section and the type table of the second special figure display section. However, when a variable probability jackpot result is selected, the type table in the second special figure display section shows a 16R jackpot result, while the type table in the first special figure display section is set to show a 4R jackpot result. has been done. In other words, if the winning result is a variable jackpot based on winning the second operating port 63, the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode will be lower than if the winning result is variable jackpot based on winning the first operating port 62. As a result, it is possible to expect more game balls to be paid out. That is, a game in which a game ball is placed in the second operating port 63 is more advantageous for the player than a game in which a game ball is placed in the first operating port 62.

As described above, there is a clear difference in the advantages for the player between the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting to win a prize in the second operating port 63 of the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63. Players pay more attention to the high-frequency support mode in which the frequency of winning is increased.

In addition, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the stop result of the symbols to be stopped and displayed on each special figure display section AS, BS when the result of the lottery based on winnings to the operating ports 62 and 63 becomes a jackpot. is also used. The stop result is determined by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. In the stop result table, a plurality of data of stop results (jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on each special symbol display section AS, BS) in the case of a jackpot are set in correspondence with the value of the jackpot type counter C2, When determining the stop result, data corresponding to the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is read out of the plurality of stop result data. Here, since the same jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the stop result and the jackpot type, the jackpot pattern that is stopped and displayed on each special symbol display section AS, BS and the jackpot that is determined at the time of the jackpot. It corresponds to the type.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 312 to determine the variation display time in the first special figure display section AS and the second special figure display section BS of the special figure display section 43.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. The variable type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, when the game ball enters the first operating port 62, it is stored in the first special figure holding area Ra of the RAM 314, and when the game ball enters the second operating port 63, the second special figure is stored in the RAM 314. storage area Rb.

The allocation destination of the variable display time to the variable type counter CS is stored as a variable display time table in the variable display time table storage area 313c of the ROM 313. Here, the variable display time table will be explained with reference to FIG. 14.

As the variable display time table, a variable display time table for a jackpot (FIG. 14(a)) and a variable display time table for a loss (FIG. 14(b)) are set. If the result of the lottery based on winnings to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 is a jackpot, the variable display time table for jackpots is referred to, and the winnings to each of the operating ports 62 and 63 are If the result of the lottery based on the winning result is a loss, the variable display time table for losses is referred to.

In each fluctuation display time table, the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS and the information of the fluctuation pattern are set in association with each other. In addition, in FIG. 14, information on the variable display time is shown together with the variable pattern in order to facilitate understanding. However, the information on the variable display time is shown in the variable display time table as the time information corresponding to each variable pattern. is stored separately in the ROM 313.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), in the fluctuation display time table for jackpot, selectable fluctuation patterns include fluctuation pattern 1A (15 sec), fluctuation pattern 2A (60 sec), fluctuation pattern 3A (60 sec), and fluctuation pattern 3A (60 sec). A pattern 4A (120 sec) and a variation pattern 5A (120 sec) are set. When a variation pattern is selected using the variation type counter CS, the symbol changes in the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS at the variation display time corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Display is performed.

Further, when a variation pattern is selected, information indicating the variation pattern is transmitted to the production control device 143 as a variation start command. The production control device 143 grasps the variation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received variation start command. Then, the display control device 350 is controlled so that each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a variable manner at a variable display time corresponding to the grasped variation pattern. As a result, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 75 in synchronization with the variable display of the symbols on the first special symbol display section AS or the second special symbol display section BS.

Further, each variation pattern also corresponds to a game round effect such as a reach effect performed on the symbol display device 75. Specifically, variation pattern 1A corresponds to normal reach performance, variation pattern 2A corresponds to SP reach (super reach) A performance, variation pattern 3A corresponds to SP reach B performance, and variation pattern 4A corresponds to performance per SP reach B. The variation pattern 5A corresponds to the SPSP reach A winning performance, and the variation pattern 5A corresponds to the SPSP reach B winning performance. That is, when the performance control device 143 recognizes a fluctuation pattern from the received fluctuation start command, it controls the display control device 350 so that the game round performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is performed on the symbol display device 75.

Each of the above-mentioned reach-for-win effects is such that after the reach-for-reach display is performed, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination. Here, the reach display (reach state) is equipped with a symbol display device 75 that can perform variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the stop display result after the variable display is a special display result (jackpot result), in the gaming machine where the gaming state becomes a special gaming state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player, variable display (or variable display) of the symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 75 is started. This refers to a display state that is used to make the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result, before the stop display result is derived and displayed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the plurality of symbol arrays displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot state is established. This is a display state in which possible combinations of ready-to-win symbols are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. More specifically, as a step before ending the fluctuating display of symbols, while the symbols in the final stop row are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, a symbol in a symbol row other than the final stop row is placed on the active line in the display screen G to hit the jackpot. This is to form a reach line by stopping and displaying the symbol combinations.

In the normal reach-winning performance, symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination after the above-mentioned reach-to-reach display is performed. The SP reach effect is a reach effect that is higher than the normal reach effect, and after the reach line is formed, a predetermined effect in which a character etc. appears is performed, and after the predetermined effect, symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination. be. Note that the content of the predetermined performance after formation of the reach line is different between the SP reach A performance and the SP reach B performance. The SPSP reach performance is a reach performance higher than the SP reach performance, and after a development performance that develops from the SP reach performance is performed, symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination. SPSP Reach A performance develops from SP Reach A performance, and SPSP Reach B performance develops from Reach B performance.

Note that the items in the "Remarks (presentation mode)" column in FIG. 14(a) are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in the variation display time table for failure, selectable variation patterns include variation pattern 1H, variation pattern 2H (15 sec), variation pattern 3H (60 sec), and variation pattern 4H ( 60 sec), a variation pattern 5A (120 sec), and a variation pattern 6H (120 sec). The point that the variable display time is determined corresponding to each variable pattern is similar to the variable display time table for jackpots, but the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern 1H is determined by the first special figure or It is designed to change depending on the number of reservations for the second special drawing. Specifically, if variable pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of pending items is 2 or less, the variable display time is 8 seconds, and if variable pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of pending items is 3 or more. The variable display time is configured to be 4 seconds, which is shorter than 8 seconds.

Variation pattern 1H corresponds to a completely missed performance on the symbol display device 75, variation pattern 2H corresponds to a normal reach-off performance, variation pattern 3H corresponds to a SP reach-A missed performance, and variation pattern 4H corresponds to a SP reach-B missed performance. Correspondingly, the variation pattern 5H corresponds to the SPSP reach-A out-of-reach performance, and the variation pattern 6H corresponds to the SPSP reach-B out-of-reach performance.

The complete miss performance is one in which symbols are stopped and displayed in a miss symbol combination without a reach display. In addition, each of the above-mentioned out-of-reach effects is a combination of symbols in symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are out of reach (the symbols in the final stop row that are stopped and displayed on the reach line are different from the reach symbols) after the reach display is performed. The symbol is stopped and displayed when the combination results in a symbol other than the symbol that forms a jackpot. In addition, the SP Reach A out of reach effect corresponds to the SP Reach A hit effect, and after a predetermined effect of the same type as the SP Reach A hit effect is performed, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a symbol combination that is out of reach. It is. Furthermore, the SP reach B out performance, the SPSP reach A out performance, and the SPSP reach B out performance correspond to the SP reach B hit performance, SPSP reach A hit performance, and SPSP reach B win performance, respectively.

In the fluctuation display time table for jackpot, "0" of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1A, "1" to "12" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2A, and "13" to "28" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3A, "29" to "63" correspond to variation pattern 4A, and "64" to "99" correspond to variation pattern 5A. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table for deviations, "0" to "59" of the fluctuation type counter CS correspond to fluctuation pattern 1H, "60" to "79" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2H, and "80" to "59" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2H. "89" corresponds to variation pattern 3H, "90" to "96" correspond to variation pattern 4H, "97" to "98" correspond to variation pattern 5H, and "99" corresponds to variation pattern 6H. are doing.

If the result of the winning lottery based on winnings to the operating ports 62 and 63 is a jackpot result, the variation pattern 5A corresponding to the SPSP Reach B effect is most likely to be selected, and if the result of the winning lottery is a winning result. In this case, the variation pattern 6H corresponding to the SPSP reach B performance is the least likely to be selected. In other words, the SPSP Reach B effect is the reach effect that is most likely to be executed when it is a jackpot, and the least likely to be executed when it is a miss, so it functions as the top reach effect with the highest expectation of a jackpot. Become.

Regarding the variation patterns other than the variation pattern 5A and the variation pattern 6H, the variation pattern corresponding to the higher reach performance is more likely to be selected when it is a jackpot, and less likely to be selected when it is a miss. That is, the expectation level of a jackpot increases in the order of normal reach performance < SP reach A performance < SP reach B performance < SPSP reach A performance.

For example, the random number counter C3 per ordinary figure is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The random number counter C3 per common figure is updated regularly and is stored in the common figure holding area 314c of the RAM 314 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 64. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the general utility object 63a to be in an open state based on the stored value of the random number counter C3 per common figure. For example, if C4=0 to 190, the general electric accessory 63a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=191 to 250, the general electric accessory 63a is not controlled to be in the open state.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 162>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be explained. The processing of the MPU 312 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed to advance the game, and NMI processing that is started by inputting a power outage signal to the NMI terminal. There is interrupt processing. For convenience of explanation, NMI interrupt processing and timer interrupt processing will be explained first, and then main processing and normal processing will be explained.

<NMI interrupt processing>
NMI interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 15. This process is executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring section 315 of the power supply and launch control device 191 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 312, and the MPU 312 interrupts the control being executed. and starts NMI interrupt processing.

In the NMI interrupt processing, first in step Sa11, the data in the use register provided in the MPU 312 is saved to the backup area of the RAM 314. In step Sa12, a power outage flag (information on the occurrence of a power outage state) is set in the backup area. In step Sa13, the data saved in the backup area is returned to the register used by the MPU 312, and then the NMI interrupt processing is ended. Note that if the power outage flag can be set without destroying the data in the use register of the MPU 312, the processes of steps Sa11 and Sa13 can be omitted.

After the NMI interrupt process is executed, it is confirmed that the power failure flag is set in the normal process described later, and then the process at the time of a power failure is executed. This process will be explained later.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 16. This process is started by the MPU 312 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step Sa101, reading processing for various winning sensors is executed. That is, it reads the states of various winning sensors connected to the main control device 162, determines the states of the winning sensors (detection information from the winning sensors), and stores the detected information (winning detection information). For example, when it is determined that a winning has occurred in the first operating port 62, a winning detection flag for the first special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and a winning in the second operating port 63 is determined to have occurred. If it is determined that this has occurred, a winning detection flag for the second special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. Further, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 64, a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314.

In step Sa102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step Sa103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the regular pattern random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the regular hit random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step Sa104, a through prize winning process is executed in conjunction with winning the through gate 64. In the winning process for through gates, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for through gates is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the general pattern holding area 314c. On the condition that the number of stored accessories held is less than 4, the value of the random number counter C3 per normal figure updated in step Sa103 is stored in the normal figure holding area 314c. Further, if a winning detection flag for a through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, the winning detection flag is deleted and the winning process for the through gate ends.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step Sa104, the process proceeds to step Sa105, where the winning process for the actuating openings associated with the winning of the actuating ports 62 and 63 is executed, and the present timer interrupt process ends.

<Winning process for actuation port>
The winning process for the operating port in step Sa105 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 17.

First, in step Sa201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 62 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the first operating port winning sensor 62a. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the first operating port 62, a prize ball command is set in step Sa202 to cause the payout control device 181 to pay out three game balls.

In step Sa203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has won in the first operating port 62. In step Sa204, the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the first special symbol reservation area Ra is read, and the start reservation memory number RaN stored in the first special symbol reservation area Ra is set (hereinafter referred to as , also referred to as the first start pending storage number RaN). Thereafter, in step Sa205, information acquisition processing is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS, and the main prize winning process is ended.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step Sa201 (when no winning has occurred in the first operating port 62), the process proceeds to step Sa206, and it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second operating port 63 (starting winning). is determined based on the detection state of the second operating port winning sensor 63c. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operating port 63, a prize ball command is set in step Sa207 to cause the payout control device 181 to pay out one game ball.

In step Sa208, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has won in the second operating port 63. In step Sa209, the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the second special symbol reservation area Rb is read, and the start reservation memory number RbN stored in the second special symbol reservation area Rb is set (hereinafter referred to as , the second start pending storage number RbN). Thereafter, information acquisition processing is performed in step Sa205, and the main prize winning processing is ended.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step Sa206 (when a winning to the second operating port 63 has not occurred), the main winning processing is ended as is.

The prize ball command set in step Sa202 or step Sa207 is transmitted to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described later.

Here, the information acquisition process in step Sa205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 18.

First, in step Sa301, it is determined whether or not the start pending memory number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sa204 or step Sa209 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the starting pending memory number N is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is immediately terminated, and if it is less than the upper limit value, in step Sa302, the starting pending memory number N of the corresponding special figure holding area Ra, Rb is determined. Increment N by 1. In step Sa303, the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as common reservation number CRN) is incremented by one.

In step Sa304, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the corresponding special figure display reservation area, that is, in step Sa302. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages incremented by 1.

In other words, when the starting reservation storage number RaN for the first special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS are set in the reservation area Ra for the first special symbol. It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas, that is, the reservation area Ra corresponding to the start reservation storage number RaN for the first special symbol incremented by 1 in step Sa302.

In addition, when the start reservation storage number RbN for the second special symbol is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS is set in the reservation area RbN for the second special symbol. It is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas, that is, the reservation area Rb corresponding to the start reservation storage number RbN for the second special symbol incremented by 1 in step Sa302.

In step Sa305, a pending prefetch process is executed to execute a pending notice effect, which will be described later. Details of the pending prefetch processing will be described later. After executing step Sa305, this information acquisition process ends.

<Main processing>
The main processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 19. The main process is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while external power is supplied, or when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on) (when external power is supplied).

First, in step Sa2001, initial setting processing upon power-on is executed. Specifically, wait processing is executed for about one second, for example, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (such as the payout control device 181) to become operational. In the following step Sa2002, access to the RAM 314 is permitted.

In step Sa2003, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch of the power supply and launch control device 191 is turned on, and in the following step Sa2004, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314. In step Sa2005, a RAM determination value is calculated, and in step Sa2006, it is determined whether the RAM determination value is normal. Specifically, the RAM determination value calculated in step Sa2005 is compared with the RAM determination value saved at the time of occurrence of the power outage state, and it is determined whether or not the two match. If the two match, the RAM judgment value is determined to be normal, and the data stored and held in the RAM 314 is recognized as valid. Conversely, if the two do not match, it is determined that the RAM judgment value is abnormal, and the data stored and held in the RAM 314 is recognized as invalid. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 314. Note that it is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 314 is correctly stored.

If the RAM judgment value is normal, the process advances to step Sa2007, where the value of the stack pointer saved in the backup area is written to the stack pointer of the MPU 312, and the stack state is restored to the state before the power was cut off. In step Sa2008, a power restoration command is output for returning the sub-side control device (such as the payout control device 181) to the gaming state before the power outage. In step Sa2009, the power outage flag stored in the backup area is erased. Thereafter, in step Sa2010, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

If a positive determination is made in step Sa2003 (when the RAM erase switch is pressed) or a negative determination is made in step Sa2006 (if the RAM determination value is not normal), the process proceeds to step Sa2011, and the sub-side control device (payout control In order to initialize the device (device 181, etc.), an initialization command is output. In step Sa2012, the used area of the RAM 314 is cleared to 0, and in step Sa2013, initialization processing of the RAM 314 is executed. Thereafter, in step Sa2010, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started upon power-on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As a general outline, the processing in steps Sa401 to Sa408 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing in steps Sa409 and Sa410 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, in step Sa401, external signal output processing is executed. In the external signal output process of step Sa401, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181. In addition, if production commands such as a variation start command, type command, variation end command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the production control device 143.

In step Sa402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step Sa403, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. In this game round control process, jackpot determination, display control of the special figure display section 43, etc. are performed.

In step Sa404, a gaming state transition process is executed. This gaming state transition process shifts the gaming state to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. The details of the gaming cycle control process in step Sa403 and the gaming state transition process in step Sa404 will be described later.

In step Sa405, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the general electric utility object 63a provided in the second operating port 63 is executed. In this process for electric utility support, numerical information obtained from the random number counter C3 per ordinary figure stored in the ordinary figure holding area 314c of the RAM 314 is used to decide whether or not to open the electric utility object 63a. A lottery is conducted to determine whether the lottery is successful or not, and if the lottery is determined to be successful, opening/closing processing of the utility appliance 63a is executed. It also controls the display of the common symbol display section 44 so as to teach the lottery results of the common symbol lottery.

Here, as already explained, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set as modes of support by the general electric accessory 63a, and it is possible to switch to either of the support modes in the game state transition process described later. A transition takes place. After this process, if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, the mode becomes high-frequency support mode, and if the flag is not set, the mode becomes low-frequency support mode.

In the electric support support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. In the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the utility power utility object 63a becomes the open state is set to be greater than the case of the low-frequency support mode, and the number of times the general power utility object 63a is in the open state is set to be greater than that in the low-frequency support mode. Set the opening time to be longer. In addition, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, if the electric power open state is won and the open state of the general electric utility object 63a occurs multiple times, the next open state will start after one open state ends. Set so that the closing time until opening is shorter than the opening time.

In step Sa406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on the condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 191. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In step Sa407, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314. The power outage flag is set in the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 15) that is executed when a power outage occurs, and is used by the MPU 312 to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

If the power outage flag is not stored (if a power outage state has not occurred), in step Sa408, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time (from the start of the current normal processing). In this embodiment, it is determined whether 4 msec) has elapsed. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

That is, in step Sa409, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 314. Furthermore, in step Sa410, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the change type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 314.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps Sa401 to Sa408 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly The variation type counter CS can also be updated randomly.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa407 (if the power outage flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa411, and generation of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step Sa412, the value of the stack pointer of MPU 312 is stored in the backup area of RAM 314, and in step Sa413, a power outage flag is set in the backup area.

In step Sa414, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved in the backup area. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 314. In step Sa415, access to the RAM 314 is prohibited, and thereafter, an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Note that even after the power is completely cut off, the power for data storage retention of the RAM 314 is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191, so the information stored in the RAM 314 before the power is cut off remains unchanged. It is retained within a period (for example, one or two days).

<Game time control processing>
The game time control process in step Sa403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 21.

First, in step Sa501, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is stored (stored) in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The opening/closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in a gaming state transition process to be described later, and is cleared when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the same gaming state transition process.

If it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the processing from step Sa502 onwards, that is, the processing for starting the game round from step Sa502 to step Sa505, the processing for progressing the game round from step Sa506 to step Sa507, and the game round ending from step Sa508 to step Sa509. This game round control process ends without executing any of the other processes. In other words, when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, the special figure game round will not be started regardless of whether or not a prize has been won in the operating ports 62, 63.

It should be noted that the game round (common figure game round) based on a winning lottery triggered by winning in the through gate 64 is executed regardless of whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. That is, during the opening/closing execution mode, although the execution of the special figure game round is restricted, the regular figure game round is executed in the same manner as when not in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, when the result of the random drawing lottery is a winning result during the opening/closing execution mode, the second operating port 63 (general electric accessory 63a) is opened.

If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step Sa502 whether or not the special figure display section 43 is in a variable display mode. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS is in the process of variable display. Note that this determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored (stored) in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The variable display flag is stored when a variable display is started in either the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

When the special figure display section 43 is not in the variable display mode, the process proceeds to step Sa503, and it is determined whether the common reservation number CRN is "0" or not. When the common reservation number CRN is "0", it means that the start reservation storage numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first operation port 62 and the second operation port 63. Therefore, the game time control process is immediately ended.

If the common reservation number CRN is not "0", in step Sa504 data for setting the data stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra or the second special figure reservation area Rb for variable display After executing the setting process and further executing the variation start process for starting the variable display on the special symbol display section 43 and the variable display on the symbol display device 75 in step Sa505, the present game round control process is ended.

Here, the data setting process in step Sa504 and the fluctuation start process in step Sa505 will be described in detail below.

First, data setting processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22.

First, in step Sa601, it is determined whether the second start pending storage number RbN stored in the second special symbol holding area Rb is "0". When the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first special figure (first operating port 62) in steps Sa602 to Step Sa608 is executed, and the second start pending memory number RbN is If it is not "0", data setting processing for the second special figure (second operating port 63) in steps Sa609 to Step Sa615 is executed.

As already explained, the data setting process is performed when the common hold count CRN is 1 or more, but the situation in which the data setting process is executed is the first start hold memory number RaN and the second start hold memory number RaN. This means that at least one of RbN is 1 or more. In this case, in the data setting process, it is first determined whether or not the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", and it is determined that the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", that is, the second special It is configured to execute processing related to the reservation information for the first special figure on the condition that there is no reservation information for the first special symbol. Therefore, if the reservation information is stored in both the first special figure reservation area Ra and the second special figure reservation area Rb, the second special figure reservation area Rb stored in the second special figure reservation area The reservation information for the figure (second operating port 63) will be processed with priority.

In the data setting process for the first special symbol, first, in step Sa602, the first starting reservation storage number RaN of the first special symbol reservation area Ra is decremented by one. In step Sa603, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sa604, the data stored in the first area of the first special figure reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sa605, a process is executed to shift the data (reservation information such as jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area Ra. In this process, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in the second to fourth areas are sequentially moved to lower areas.

In step Sa606, it is determined whether the second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The second special figure flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the reservation information of the second operating port 63 exists. If the second special figure flag is stored, the second special figure flag is deleted in step Sa607.

After executing step Sa607 or if a negative determination is made in step Sa606 (if the second special symbol flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step Sa608, and the production control device 143 is notified that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. Set the shift command (shift occurrence information) for notification. In this case, from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, information indicating that the holding area to which the current data has been shifted corresponds to the first special figure holding area Ra, that is, the first operating port 62. A shift command including information that it is compatible is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the production control device 143. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sa608 is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ga of the symbol display device 75 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

In the data setting process for the second special symbol, first, in step Sa609, the second starting reservation storage number RbN of the second special symbol reservation area Rb is decremented by one. In step Sa610, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sa611, the data stored in the first area of the second special figure reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sa612, a process is executed to shift the data (reservation information such as jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation area Rb. In step Sa613, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second special figure flag is not stored, the second special figure flag is set in step Sa614.

After executing step Sa614 or when an affirmative determination is made in step Sa613 (if the second special symbol flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa615, and the sub-side control device informs that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. A shift command (shift occurrence information), which is information to be recognized by the production control device 143, is set. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313 that the holding area to which data has been shifted this time corresponds to the second special figure holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second operating port 63. A shift command including information on what is being done is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the production control device 143. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sa613 is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing for changing the display in the second reservation display area Gb of the symbol display device 75 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.

First, in step Sa701, it is determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether a high probability mode flag is stored (stored) in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The high probability mode flag is for the MPU 312 to know that it is in the high probability mode, and is set when transitioning to the high probability mode.

If it is not the high probability mode, the validity determination is made in step Sa702 by referring to the validity table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value (for example, "7") set as a jackpot win for the low probability mode. . On the other hand, if it is the high probability mode, the validity determination is made in step Sa703 by referring to the validity table for the high probability mode. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is a value set as a jackpot win for the high probability mode (for example, "7", "17", "27", "37"). ”, “47”).

After executing step Sa702 or step Sa703, it is determined in step Sa704 whether or not the result of the determination in step Sa702 or step Sa703 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, it is determined in step Sa705 whether or not the second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second special figure flag is not stored, in step Sa706, a lottery of the jackpot type is performed with reference to the type table for the first special figure display section (FIG. 13(a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 4R probability variable jackpot result or the numerical range of the 4R normal jackpot result.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol flag is stored, in step Sa707, a jackpot type lottery is performed with reference to the second special symbol type table (FIG. 13(b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 10R probability variable jackpot result or the numerical range of the 4R normal jackpot result.

After execution of step Sa706 or step Sa707, in step Sa708, a type flag indicating the jackpot type selected by lottery in S706 or step Sa707 is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, when the jackpot type selected by lottery is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 10R probability variable jackpot flag is stored.

In step Sa709, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313 is referred to and the stop result for the jackpot is set. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game round.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa704 (no jackpot has occurred), the process proceeds to step Sa710, where a stop result for a loss is set. In this embodiment, only one type of stop result is provided for disconnection, and that stop result is set in step Sa710.

After executing step Sa709 or step Sa710, in step Sa711, a variable display time setting process is performed to set the variable display time of the current game round in the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS. Execute.

Here, the variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step Sa801, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination in the current game round is a jackpot. If it is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sa802, and a variable display time table for jackpot (FIG. 14(a)) is obtained as a table for drawing variable display times (variable patterns). On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot but a miss, the process proceeds to step Sa803, and a variable display time table for misses (FIG. 14(b)) is obtained.

After step Sa802 or step Sa803 is executed, in step Sa804, a lottery process for variable display times (variable patterns) is executed using the variable display time table acquired in step Sa802 or step Sa803. Specifically, one variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is identified from among the variation pattern group set in the variation display time table.

In step Sa805, the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern identified in step Sa804 is set as the variable display time of the current game round. In this step, the value of the variable display time corresponding to the specified variation pattern is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. For example, if the variable display time is 15 seconds, 7500 is set in the variable display time counter area as the corresponding value. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) is activated. After executing step Sa805, the variable display time setting process ends.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 23), after step Sa711 is executed, a variation start command and a type command are set in step Sa712. The variation start command includes variation pattern information. Since the fluctuation patterns are set separately for a jackpot and a loss (FIG. 14), the production control device 143 analyzes the fluctuation patterns from the fluctuation start command, thereby controlling the main control device 162. It is possible to determine the result of the validity judgment made in . That is, the variation start command includes not only information regarding the variation display time but also information regarding the result of the validity determination. Further, the type command includes information on the jackpot type. Note that the type command is set only when the result of the judgment is a jackpot.

The variation start command and type command set in step Sa712 are transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. The contents of this production include the variable display mode of the symbols on the symbol display device 75, and the determined variable display mode of the symbols is output from the production control device 143 to the display control device 350 as a display content command. Ru. The display control device 350 controls the display of the symbol display device 75 based on the display content command received from the production control device 143 so that symbols corresponding to each game round are displayed in a variable manner.

In step Sa713, variable display on the special figure display section 43 is started. At that time, the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314 are referred to, and if the second special figure flag is stored, the current game round corresponds to the second special figure, and the picture on the second special figure display section BS is is displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, if the second special figure flag is not stored, it is assumed that the current game round corresponds to the first special figure, and the symbols on the first special figure display section AS are displayed in a variable manner. After executing step Sa713, this variation start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process (FIG. 21), if an affirmative determination is made in step Sa502 (when the special figure display section 43 is in the process of variable display), the process proceeds to step Sa506, where the variable display time of the current game round is displayed. It is determined whether or not the period has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 314 has become "0".

If the variable display time has not elapsed, a variable display process is executed in step Sa507. In the variable display processing, display control is performed on the special figure display section for the current game so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order (light emission control is performed on each display segment). )do. After executing step Sa507, the present game round control process ends.

If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step Sa508. In the variation end process, each special symbol display section AS, BS is controlled so that the symbols being varied and displayed are stopped and displayed according to the stop result set in step Sa709 or step Sa710.

In step Sa509, a variation end command is set, and then the main game round control process is ended. The variation end command set in step Sa509 is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The production control device 143 transmits the received variation end command to the display control device 350 while maintaining its information form. By receiving the variation end command, the display control device 350 causes the final stop symbol combination in the game round to be displayed as determined (final stop display).

<Game state transition processing>
The gaming state transition process in step Sa404 (FIG. 20) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 25.

First, in step Sa901, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step Sa902, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the variable display in each special figure display section AS, BS has ended (the fixed display has ended). If it is not the end timing of the variable display, the main game state transition process is ended as it is.

If it is the end timing of the variable display, it is determined in step Sa903 whether the game result of the current game round corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, that is, whether or not the result of the success/failure determination is a jackpot. do. In this step, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot by referring to whether or not a type flag (step Sa708 in FIG. 23) is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the game result of the current game round does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the main game state transition process is immediately ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa903 (if the game result of the current game round corresponds to transition to the opening/closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sa904, and a process for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed. In the start process, an opening/closing execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. Further, an opening period is set for waiting for the start of the first round while keeping the variable winning device 65 in a closed state. Further, if a high probability mode flag or a high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, a process for erasing these flags is executed.

In step Sa905, a round display start process is executed to notify the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode. In this step, the current jackpot type is determined based on the type flags stored in the various flag storage areas 314e, and the round display section is controlled so that the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. Note that the display of the number of rounds on the round display section continues until the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In step Sa906, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot result. If the result is not a 10R probability variable jackpot, that is, if it is either a 4R probability variation jackpot or a 4R normal jackpot result, "4" is set in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 in step Sa907. do. On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot result, "10" is set in the round counter area RC at step Sa908.

After executing step Sa907 or step Sa908, in step Sa909, an opening command is set to notify the production control device 143 of the start of the opening and the opening period. This set opening command is sent to the production control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

In step Sa910, after executing the external signal setting process, the main game state transition process is ended. In the external signal setting process, the jackpot signal output terminal provided at the external output terminal 213 is set to an output state. As a result, if the jackpot signal output terminal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and a jackpot occurs at the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. I can understand what I did.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa901 (if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress), the process proceeds to step Sa911, where it is determined whether or not the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the main game state transition process is immediately ended. If the opening period has elapsed, a big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step Sa912.

Here, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26.

First, in step Sa1001, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 65a is being opened. This determination is made based on the driving state of the driving section 65d. If the big prize opening 65a is not being opened, it is determined in step Sa1002 whether the value of the round counter area RC is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", that is, if there is a round game to be executed, the value of the timer area T provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 314 is "0" in step Sa1003. Determine whether it exists or not. This process determines whether a waiting period between rounds (round interval period) has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T is "0", the process advances to step Sa1004, and "15000" is set in the timer area T as a value corresponding to the upper limit opening time (30 seconds) of the variable winning device 65 in one round game. Set. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) is activated. In step Sa1005, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 344b as a value corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings (10) to the variable winning device 65 in one round game.

In step Sa1006, the variable winning drive unit 32c is driven to open the big winning opening 65a. In step Sa1007, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that opening of the grand prize opening 65a (variable winning device 65) has started, and then, the main prize opening opening/closing process is ended. This set release command is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

If a positive determination is made in step Sa1002 (if the value of the round counter area RC is 0) or a negative determination is made in step Sa1003 (if the value of the timer area T is not 0), the main prize opening opening/closing process is continued. finish.

Moreover, when an affirmative determination is made in the above step Sa1001 (when the big prize opening 65a is being opened), the process proceeds to step Sa1008, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer area T is "0". This process is to determine whether or not the upper limit opening time of the variable prize winning device 65 set in step Sa1004 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T is not "0", the process proceeds to step Sa1009, and it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the big winning hole 65a based on the detection state of the big winning hole winning sensor 65c. If no prize has been won, the main prize opening/closing process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if a win has occurred, the value of the win counter area PC is decremented by 1 in step Sa1010, and then, in step Sa1011, it is determined whether the value of the win counter area PC is "0" or not. judge. If the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0", the main winning opening opening/closing process is immediately terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa1008 (if the value of timer area T is 0) or if an affirmative determination is made in step Sa1011 (if the value of winning counter area PC is 0), the process proceeds to step Sa1012, and the drive unit 65d is switched to a non-driving state and the big prize opening 65a is closed. In step Sa1013, the value of the round counter area RC is decremented by 1, and in step Sa1014, it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC is "0".

If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", that is, if there are remaining round games, the process proceeds to step Sa1015, and the variable winning device 65 is kept in a closed state for a period of waiting for the start of the next round game. "1000" is set in the timer area T as a value corresponding to (2 sec).

In step Sa1016, a closing command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (that the round game has ended), and then the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended. The set closing command is sent to the production control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa1014 (if the value of the round counter area RC is 0), that is, if the final round of the opening/closing execution mode has ended, the process proceeds to step Sa1017, and an ending start process is executed. In the start processing, an ending period is set in which the variable prize winning device 65 is kept in a closed state and waits for the start of the next game round (the first game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends). In step Sa1018, an ending command is set to notify the production control device 143 of the start and ending period of the ending, and then the main prize opening/closing process is ended. The set ending command is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 25), after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step Sa912, it is determined in step Sa913 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", the main game state transition process is ended as it is in order to continue the opening/closing execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC is "0", the process advances to step Sa914, and it is determined whether the ending has ended (or not the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not been completed, the main game state transition process is immediately ended in order to continue the ending. On the other hand, if the ending has ended, the process advances to step Sa915, and a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

Here, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

First, in step Sa1101, the type flags stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314 are referred to to determine whether or not the current jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot result. If it is a probability variable jackpot result, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sa1102, and a high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sa1103. As a result, a transition is made to a gaming state in which the win/fail lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode (so-called variable probability gaming state with electric support). This gaming state continues until the next jackpot occurs. After execution of step Sa1103, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

If a negative determination is made in the above step Sa1101 (if the current jackpot is not a probability/variable jackpot result), that is, if the current jackpot is a normal jackpot result, the process proceeds to step Sa1104, and the high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. Set. If the current jackpot is a normal jackpot result, the high probability mode flag is not set, so the processing in step Sa1104 sets the gaming state where the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (so-called time saving mode). (gaming state). In the following step Sa1105, "100" is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 314. This set value is decremented by 1 each time a special figure game is executed in the time saving game state, and when the value of the game number counter area becomes "0", the various flags mentioned above are decremented. The high frequency support flag stored in the storage area 314e is deleted. Therefore, the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state ends when 100 gaming rounds are played, and thereafter shifts to a gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode. do. After step Sa1105 is executed, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 25), after the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in step Sa915 is completed, the round display termination process is executed in step Sa916. In this process, the round display section in the special figure display section 43 is controlled so that the round display section is turned off.

In step Sa917, the opening/closing execution mode termination process is executed, and then the main gaming state transition process is terminated. In the process of terminating the opening/closing execution mode, a process of erasing the type flag and opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 314e is executed.

<Pending read ahead processing>
The pending prefetch process in step Sa305 (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 28. This process is executed when pending information is acquired based on winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63, and regarding the acquired pending information, changes corresponding to the pending information are Prior to execution of the start process (FIG. 23), a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and the variation pattern.

First, in step Sa1201, the starting reservation storage numbers RaN and RbN stored in each reservation area Ra and Rb of the reservation ball storage area 314b and the common reservation number CRN stored in the total reservation number storage area of the reservation ball storage area 314b are calculated. and stores the information in the register of the MPU 312.

In step Sa1202, based on the current prize winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (a random number for determining the validity) included in the pending information acquired in step Sa304 (FIG. 18) is determined. Understand numerical values). In step Sa1203, a judgment is made using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 obtained in step Sa1202. At this time, if the lottery mode when the pending information was acquired is low probability mode, refer to the win/fail table for low probability mode, and if the lottery mode when the pending information was acquired is high probability mode, The validity determination is made by referring to the validity table for the high probability mode.

In step Sa1204, it is determined whether the result of the judgment in step Sa1202 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, in step Sa1205, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 (the jackpot type is drawn by drawing Random numbers).

In step Sa1206, a jackpot type lottery is performed using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped in step Sa1205. At this time, if the reservation information is based on winning to the first operating port 62, refer to the type table for the first special symbol (FIG. 13(a)), and check whether the reservation information is based on winning to the second operating port 63. If it is information, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is specified with reference to the second special figure type table (FIG. 13(b)). Note that the processing from step Sa1203 to step Sa1206 is similar to step Sa701 to step Sa707 in the variation start processing (FIG. 23).

In step Sa1207, jackpot information indicating a jackpot and type information indicating the jackpot type drawn in step Sa1206 are stored in the register of the MPU 312.

After executing step Sa1207 or if a negative determination is made in step Sa1204 (if it is not a jackpot win), in step Sa1208, the reservation information acquired based on the current prize winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 is The value of the included variation type counter CS is grasped. In step Sa1209, a variation pattern (variation display time) is selected by lottery using the value of the variation type counter CS obtained in step Sa1208. At this time, if the obtained pending information corresponds to a jackpot, refer to the variable display time table for jackpots (Fig. 14 (a)), and if the obtained pending information corresponds to a loss, , a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is specified with reference to the fluctuation display time table for deviations (FIG. 14(b)). Note that the process of this step is similar to steps Sa801 to Sa804 in the variable display time setting process.

In step Sa1210, variation pattern information indicating the variation pattern drawn in step Sa1209 is stored in the register of the MPU 312. In step Sa1211, a pending command is set as an output target to the production control device 143, and thereafter, the pending prefetching process is ended. The hold command includes information indicating whether the current hold information corresponds to the 1st special figure or the 2nd special figure, as well as various information stored in the register (information on the start hold memory number RaN, RbN, common information on the number of reservations CRN, jackpot information, type information, and fluctuation pattern information). In addition, as already explained, since the presence or absence of a jackpot can be ascertained from the fluctuation pattern, the pending command may be set so as not to include jackpot information. The hold command set in step Sa1211 is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

<About the electrical configuration of the production control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configuration of the production control device 143 and the display control device 350 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 29.

An MPU 342 is mounted on the performance control board 341 provided in the performance control device 143. The MPU 342 includes a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 342, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 343. It has a built-in RAM 344, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342 . The main controller 162 sends hold display control commands such as shift commands and hold commands, game cycle control commands such as fluctuation start commands, type commands, and fluctuation end commands, and opening/closing execution mode commands such as opening commands and ending commands. Receive various commands.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 342 is connected to the lamp sections 26 to 28 provided on the front door frame 14 and the speaker section 29, as well as the display control device 350.

Further, the input side of the MPU 342 is connected to the production operation section 36 provided on the front door frame 14. The performance operation unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor that detects the operation of the performance operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. The MPU 342 determines whether or not the production operation unit 36 has been operated based on the detected information, and determines the manner of operation that has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 on which an MPU 372 in which a program ROM 373 and a work RAM 374 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377 are respectively mounted. There is.

The MPU 372 analyzes commands received from the production control device 143 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 375 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 372, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 374 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 372 executes various programs. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 374.

The VDP 375 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 75. Since the VDP 375 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 375 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 372, the video RAM 377, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 377 from the character ROM 376 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 75.

The character ROM 376 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 75. This character ROM 376 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table, etc. that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.

Note that it is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 376 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 376. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 373 is stored in the character ROM 376.

The video RAM 377 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 75, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 377, the display contents of the symbol display device 75 are changed.

<About various processes executed by the production control device 143>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the production control device 143 will be explained.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30. The effect setting process is a process activated by the MPU 342 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

First, in step Sa1301, it is determined whether a hold command from the main controller 162 has been received. The pending command received from the main control device 162 is stored in a command storage area 344a provided in the RAM 344 of the production control device 143. The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and read out the previously stored commands. Therefore, even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time, processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

In the determination at step Sa1301, it is determined whether a pending command is stored in the area to be read this time in the command storage area 344a. If the hold command is stored (if the hold command has been received), in step Sa1302, the hold image is displayed on the hold display section 200 (FIG. 9(b)) of the display screen G. Executes pending command processing. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later.

After executing step Sa1302 or if a negative determination is made in step Sa1301 (if no pending command has been received), it is determined in step Sa1303 whether or not a shift command from the main controller 162 has been received. If a shift command has been received, in step Sa1304, a process corresponding to the shift command is executed to shift the hold image displayed on the hold display section 200. Details of the shift command response process will be described later.

After executing step Sa1304 or if a negative determination is made in step Sa1303 (if the shift command has not been received), in step Sa1305, a variable display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3, etc. is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Execute special figure fluctuation display processing to perform. Details of the special figure fluctuation display processing will be described later.

In step Sa1306, processing for the opening/closing execution mode is executed to perform effects during the opening/closing execution mode. In the process for the opening/closing execution mode, in addition to the round performance during the opening/closing execution mode, processing for performing an opening performance, an ending performance, a winning performance when a winning occurs in the variable winning device 65, etc. is executed.

In step Sa1307, a production mode switching process for switching the production mode is executed. Details of the production mode switching process will be described later.

In step Sa1308, other processing is executed, and then the effect setting processing is ended. Other processes include displaying a demonstration screen when a starting prize does not occur for a predetermined period of time, switching to a power saving mode that stops the video display on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 to reduce power consumption, etc. Execute the processing to be performed.

<Pending command handling process>
The command corresponding processing in step Sa1302 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.

First, in step Sa1401, a hold command from the main controller 162 is analyzed, and hold information (jackpot information, type information, fluctuation pattern information, etc.) is stored in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344.

As shown in FIG. 32, the holding storage area 344c is provided with a first special figure holding area SRa and a second special figure holding area SRb in correspondence with the holding ball storage area 314b on the main controller 162 side. It is being Each reservation area SRa, SRb has four storage areas: a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Further, in the reservation storage area 344c, an execution area SAE is provided in correspondence with the execution area AE on the main controller 162 side.

In step Sa1401, based on the hold command, it is determined whether the current hold information corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, and what number of hold information it is in the corresponding special figure. The change pattern information (if it is a jackpot, jackpot information and type information) is stored in the corresponding storage area of the reservation storage area 344c. For example, if the current hold information is the second hold information corresponding to the first special figure, the fluctuation pattern information etc. are stored in the second storage area of the first special figure hold area SRa.

After executing step Sa1401, in step Sa1402, the value of the hold number counter (start hold storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is incremented by one. The various counter areas 344b are provided with a pending number counter for the first special symbol and a pending number counter for the second special symbol, and in step Sa1402, the starting pending storage number SN on the corresponding side is updated.

In step Sa1403, a setting process for a pending notice is executed to execute a pending notice effect. Here, the pending notice effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 33.

In this embodiment, depending on the display mode of the pending image displayed on the pending display section 200 of the display screen G, a pending preview effect that informs or suggests the degree of expectation that a jackpot will occur in the game round to which the pending image corresponds is implemented. We are planning to do this. The display mode of the hold image is set to a normal display mode when the hold preview effect is not performed, and a specific display mode when the hold preview effect is performed, and furthermore, the specific display mode includes multiple displays. The mode has been set.

In this embodiment, the above expectation level is suggested by the display color (color) of the pending image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33(a), a normal display mode HMa in which the main display color is a normal color (for example, white) is set as the normal display mode, and the main display color is set as the specific display mode. Four types are set: a blue display mode HMb in which the color is blue, a green display mode HMc in which the color is green, a red display mode HMd in which the color is red, and a rainbow color display mode HMe in which the color is rainbow-colored. . Note that, in FIG. 33(a), different hatching is provided depending on the difference in display color.

Among the specific display modes, the blue display mode HMb has the lowest expectation of a jackpot, and thereafter, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of green display mode HMc<red display mode HMd<rainbow display mode HMe. The rainbow color display mode HMe suggests a jackpot.

Furthermore, each specific display mode suggests the performance to be performed in the game round to which the pending image corresponds. Specifically, the blue display mode HMb suggests that a reach effect (any of normal reach effect, SP reach effect, or SPSP reach effect) with a rank higher than normal reach effect will be performed in the game round to which the pending image corresponds. However, the green display mode HMc suggests that a ready-to-reach effect with a rank higher than the SP ready-to-reach effect will be performed, and the red display mode HMd suggests that a SPSP ready-to-reach effect will be performed.

The above-mentioned suspension notice performance using a suspension image is a period from the start of display to the end of the display of the suspension image that is the target of the execution of the performance, in other words, from the generation of suspension information to the end of the game round of that suspension information. It is carried out using at least a part of the period up to. During the period (holding period) in which the holding image is displayed in the first holding display area Ga or the second holding display area Gb, the holding notice effect may be executed at multiple times, such as when the holding image starts displaying or when shifting. The timing is set. Furthermore, the execution timing of the pending notice performance during the execution of the game round is set as a plurality of pending change points, as shown in FIG. 33(b). Each pending change point is set in accordance with, for example, the start timing of a game round (variation start timing), the start timing of various reach effects, the development timing of reach effects, etc.

Returning to the explanation of the hold command corresponding processing (FIG. 31), in the setting process for hold notice in step Sa1403, an execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute a hold notice effect for the current hold information, and when a hold notice effect is to be executed. or execute processing to set the display mode of the pending image. Details of the setting process for pending notice will be described later.

In step Sa1404, a first execution process of a pending notice for executing a pending notice effect is executed. In the first execution process of the pending notice, execution control of the pending notice effect is performed based on the setting result of step Sa1403. Details of the first execution process of the pending notice will be described later.

In step Sa1405, processing for displaying a hold image on the hold display section 200 of the display screen G is executed. Specifically, a hold display command is created so that a hold image is additionally displayed in the corresponding unit hold display area in each hold display area Ga, Gb, and set as an output target to the display control device 350. The hold display command includes information indicating whether the current hold information corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, and information indicating what number of hold information it is. After executing step Sa1405, the pending command handling process ends.

<Setting process for pending notice>
The setting process for pending notice in step Sa1403 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

First, in step Sa1501, the suspension storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern, etc. (pre-reading result) in the current suspension information is grasped. In step Sa1502, it is determined whether the current hold information corresponds to a jackpot based on the fluctuation pattern etc. grasped in step Sa1501.

If the pending information does not correspond to a jackpot, that is, if the pending information corresponds to a loss, the process proceeds to step Sa1503, and checks whether the fluctuation pattern of the pending information is fluctuation pattern 1H (fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete loss). Determine. If a negative determination is made in step Sa1503 (if the fluctuation pattern is other than fluctuation pattern 1H) or an affirmative determination is made in step Sa1502 (if the pending information corresponds to a jackpot), the current production mode is grasped in step Sa1504. do.

Here, the presentation mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 35. In this embodiment, performance mode A and performance mode B are set as the performance modes of the game performance executed on the display screen G. These production modes A and B are distinguishable from the player's perspective. For example, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the background image 401 displayed on the back side of the hold display section 200 are different between the two production modes. It has become something to do.

These production modes can be manually switched by the player's operation, and specifically, by performing a predetermined operation on the production operation unit 36 (FIG. 1) during the valid period of mode switching. It is possible to switch by. For example, if a predetermined operation is performed using the production operation unit 36 in a situation where the production mode is production mode A, the production mode is switched to production mode B, and the production operation is performed in a situation where production mode B is set. When a predetermined operation is performed by the section 36, the production mode is switched to production mode A.

In addition, the frequency of occurrence of the above-mentioned pending notice performance is different between production mode A and production mode B, and the system is configured such that the frequency of occurrence of the pending notice production in production mode A is higher than that in production mode B. There is. The configuration for differentiating the frequency of occurrence of the pending notice performance is not particularly limited, but for example, in any production mode, the pending notice performance is executed through an execution lottery, and then in production mode B. A configuration is conceivable in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned execution lottery is lower than that of production mode A when the pending information corresponds to a loss.

In this case, in production mode B, the percentage of the executed pending preview performance that corresponds to the prediction of the jackpot is higher than in production mode A, so the expectation level of the jackpot when the pending preview performance is executed is high. Become. In other words, production mode A functions as a mode in which the pending preview performance is likely to be executed and the performance is easy to enjoy, and production mode B functions as a mode in which the pending preview performance is difficult to execute, but the expectation of a jackpot when it is executed is It can function as a high mode.

Although not shown in FIG. 35, for example, in presentation mode A, a holding image imitating a game ball is displayed, whereas in presentation mode B, a holding image imitating a star is displayed. For example, the base image of the holding image may be different between production mode A and production mode B.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34), after grasping the current production mode in step Sa1504, the corresponding pending notice execution lottery table is retrieved from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343 in step Sa1505. get. A plurality of pending notice execution lottery tables are set in correspondence with the presence or absence of a jackpot and the presentation mode. For example, a pending preview execution lottery table corresponding to a case where the current pending information is a jackpot is set to have a higher probability of winning than a pending preview execution lottery table corresponding to a case where the current pending information is a jackpot. In addition, the pending notice execution lottery table that corresponds to presentation mode A and corresponds to the case where the current pending information is out of order is the holding notice execution lottery table that corresponds to presentation mode B and corresponds to the case where the current pending information is out of order. The probability of winning is set higher than the lottery table.

In step Sa1506, based on the pending notice execution lottery table obtained in step Sa1505 and the lottery counter (random value) obtained from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, an execution lottery is determined as to whether or not to execute the pending notice performance. I do. In step Sa1507, it is determined whether the lottery result in step Sa1506 is a winning result.

If the lottery result is an actual win, the process advances to step Sa1508 and the corresponding number of reservations is determined. In this step, the reservation storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and it is determined whether the current reservation information corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the number of reservations for the corresponding special symbol is determined. . The number of reservations in this case includes the current reservation information. For example, if the current reservation information is stored in the third area of the first special symbol reservation area SRa in the reservation storage area 344c, the reservation information corresponds to the first special symbol and the number of reservations is is 3. In addition, when the current hold information is stored in the first area of the first special figure holding area SRa (if it is the first hold information), if the hold information is stored in the execution area SAE. (If the game session is being executed), the above pending number is 1, and if no pending information is stored in the execution area SAE (when the gaming session is not being executed), the above pending number is 0. do.

In step Sa1509, the final display mode lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. In this embodiment, the display mode of the hold image is changed only once to perform the hold notice effect, but also the display form of the hold image is changed multiple times to perform the hold notice effect. It is configured. The final display mode lottery table is a table for selecting the final display mode of the pending image in the pending preview performance.

In the final display mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 36, the range of selectable final display modes and the selection probability of each display mode are set in correspondence with each variation pattern. In addition, in FIG. 36, the item "Remarks (performance mode)" indicating the game round performance corresponding to each variation pattern is added for convenience and is not set in the final display mode lottery table.

In addition, in the final display mode lottery table, a final display mode lottery table for jackpots (FIG. 36(a)) and a final display mode lottery table for losers (FIG. 36(b)) are set, and each of these is set. In the lottery table, the selection range of the final display mode and the selection probability of each option are different depending on each variation pattern.

In the final display mode lottery table for the jackpot, the range of the final display mode of the pending image in the pending preview performance is blue display mode HMb and rainbow color display mode HMe when the current pending information is fluctuation pattern 1A (normal reach hit). , In the case of variation pattern 2A (per SP reach A) or variation pattern 3A (per SP reach B), blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, and rainbow color display mode HMe, variation pattern 4A (per SPSP reach A) or variation In the case of pattern 5A (per SPSP reach B), blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, and rainbow color display mode HMe are set. Therefore, when a hold image with the blue display mode HMb is displayed as a hold preview performance, the hold image corresponds to a game round (game round of hold information that triggered the hold preview performance) when the hold image is higher than the normal reach performance. It suggests that a reach effect for the ranking will be performed, and if a pending image with a green display mode HMc is displayed, it suggests that a reach effect for a rank higher than the SP reach effect will be performed, and a red display mode HMd for a hold image is displayed. When the image is displayed, it suggests that the SPSP reach effect will be performed.

In addition, even in the final display mode lottery table for losers, if a pending image with a blue display mode HMb is displayed as a pending preview effect, a reach effect with a rank higher than the normal reach effect will occur in the game round to which the pending image corresponds. If a hold image with a green display mode HMc is displayed, it suggests that a reach effect with a rank higher than the SP reach effect will be performed, and a hold image with a red display mode HMd is displayed. In this case, the selection range of the final display mode corresponding to each variation pattern is determined so as to suggest that the SPSP reach effect will be performed. Therefore, when the hold preview performance is performed and any of the blue, green, or red hold images are displayed, the player can predict which level of the ready-to-reach performance will be performed. However, it is not possible to determine whether there is a jackpot or not.

In addition, in the final display mode lottery table for losers, the rainbow color display mode HMe is not set as an option for the final display mode, and the pending image of the rainbow color display mode HMe is displayed only when there is a jackpot. It becomes. Therefore, the pending image in the rainbow color display mode HMe suggests a jackpot, and when the pending image is displayed, the player is aware that a jackpot will occur in the game round to which the pending image corresponds. Can be predicted.

In the final display mode lottery table for the jackpot, the selection probability of the rainbow color display mode HMe is suppressed to a small probability (for example, 5%) in any variation pattern. This is because if the selection probability of the rainbow color display mode HMe is increased, there will be frequent opportunities for players to recognize the jackpot before the execution of the game round, and there is a concern that interest in the game round effect will fade. This is to prevent such inconveniences from occurring. The selection probabilities for other options are such that in each variation pattern, a higher display mode is more likely to be selected than a lower display mode. For example, in the case of the variation pattern 3A, the green display mode HMc is more likely to be selected than the blue display mode HMb.

On the other hand, in the final display mode lottery table for losers, higher display modes are less likely to be selected than in the case of the final display mode lottery table for jackpots. For example, in the variation pattern (variation pattern 4A) corresponding to the SPSP Reach A performance in the final display mode lottery table for jackpots, the selection probability of red display mode HMd is 55%, whereas the final display mode lottery for jackpots In the variation pattern (variation pattern 5H) corresponding to the SPSP reach B effect on the table, the selection probability of the red display mode HMd remains at 10%.

In each final display mode lottery table for jackpots and misses, the display mode selection tendency is set as described above, so even if the type of reach effect performed in the game round is the same, the game The expectation of a jackpot is higher when the higher-ranking display mode is displayed as the pending image corresponding to the round.

In this embodiment, a common table is used for production mode A and production mode B as the final display mode lottery table for jackpots and the final display mode lottery table for losers, but different tables are used for each production mode. It is also possible to configure the settings.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34), in step Sa1509, a final display mode lottery table corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot in the pending information is obtained based on the fluctuation pattern etc. grasped in step Sa1501. In step Sa1510, based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa1501, the final display mode lottery table acquired in step Sa1509, and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, the current hold The final display mode in the preview performance is selected by lottery.

Note that the lottery counter is acquired when a suspension command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, when suspension information that is subject to lottery processing is generated. This also applies to counters (random numbers) used in other lottery processes executed by the production control device 143.

In step Sa1511, the performance scenario lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The production scenario lottery table is a table for drawing production scenarios for the pending preview production.

In the performance scenario lottery table, as shown in FIG. 37, a plurality of performance scenarios are set in correspondence with the number of reservations and the final display mode of the reservation preview performance. Specifically, groups are set from the group of presentation scenario 0 corresponding to the number of reservations = 0 to the group of presentation scenario 4 corresponding to the number of reservations = 4, and furthermore, in each group, the final display mode of blue, green, red, and rainbow color is set. A group of production scenarios for each color is set corresponding to the color. Then, a random numerical value for lottery from 0 to 99 is assigned to a group of presentation scenarios for one color. For example, if the number of reservations is 0 and the final display mode is blue display mode HMb, then production scenario 0 blue (1) and production scenario 0 blue (2) are the production scenarios to be selected. The one corresponding to the random value is selected.

Each production scenario defines at what timing and in which display mode the pending image will be displayed in the pending preview performance whose final display mode has been determined. When pre-reading the reservation information corresponding to the first special symbol, the number of reservations for the first special symbol at that time is 4, and the red display mode HMd is selected by lottery as the final display mode. Taking production scenario 4 red (1) as an example, this scenario displays a holding image in the blue display mode HMb in the fourth unit holding display area Ga4 of the first holding display area Ga (FIG. 9(b)). After that, when the pending image is moved and displayed in the second unit pending display area Ga2, the display mode is changed to green HMc, and thereafter, the period during which the pending image is displayed in the execution display area D (the pending image is changed to the green display mode HMc). This stipulates that the display mode is changed to red during the execution of the game round corresponding to the image).

Although not shown in FIG. 37, in a performance scenario in which the display mode of the pending image is changed in the execution display area D, the display mode is changed at which timing (which pending change point) in the game round. It also stipulates whether There are also production scenarios that change the display mode multiple times during the execution of a game session.For example, production scenario 0 green (2) changes the display mode at the previous pending change point during the execution of the game session. After the normal display mode HMa is changed to the blue display mode HMb, it is specified that the display mode is further changed to the green display mode HMc at a later pending change point.

Note that "G4 (Hold 4)" to "G1 (Hold 1)" in "Remarks (Production mode)" in FIG. 37 are displays when displaying a hold image in each unit hold display area of the hold display section 200. It shows the aspect. In addition, "D (playing game)" is the display mode when the pending image is shifted from the first unit pending display area to the execution display area D, and the display mode when the pending image is displayed in the execution display area D. It shows the display mode in terms of period. Incidentally, the items in the "Notes (performance mode)" column are added for convenience and are not set in the production scenario lottery table.

Further, as the performance scenario lottery table, a performance scenario lottery table for a jackpot and a performance scenario lottery table for a loss are set. In this embodiment, a common table is used in production mode A and production mode B as the performance scenario lottery table for jackpot and the performance scenario lottery table for loss, but a configuration in which different tables are set for each production mode is used. Good too. Note that FIG. 37 shows an example of a performance scenario lottery table for a jackpot.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34), in step Sa1511, based on the fluctuation pattern etc. grasped in step Sa1501, an effect scenario lottery table corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot in the pending information is acquired. In step Sa1512, the number of reservations grasped in step Sa1508, the final display mode determined in step Sa1510, the performance scenario lottery table acquired in step Sa1511, and the lottery counter (random number value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344. ), the performance scenario for this pending preview performance will be drawn by lottery.

At step Sa1513, performance scenario data is set so that the performance scenario selected at step Sa1512 is executed. In step Sa1514, a pending notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and thereafter, the setting process for pending notice is ended. The suspension notice flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the suspension notice performance should be executed.

In addition, if an affirmative determination is made in step Sa1503 (if the fluctuation pattern of the reservation information is fluctuation pattern 1H (completely missed)) or a negative determination is made in step Sa1507 (if the result is a loss in the execution lottery of the reservation notice performance), , the process proceeds to step Sa1515, and the display mode of the pending image is set to the normal display mode HMa. Thereafter, the setting process for pending notice is ended.

<Process for first execution of pending notice>
The first execution process of the pending notice in step Sa1404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38(a).

First, in step Sa1601, it is determined whether a suspension notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. If the pending notice flag is not stored, that is, if the situation is not such that the pending notice performance should be executed, the process for first execution of the pending notice is ended.

On the other hand, if the suspension notice flag is stored and the situation is such that a suspension notice performance should be executed, the process advances to step Sa1602, and the display mode is changed for the suspension image corresponding to the suspension information that triggered the suspension notice performance. Determine whether it is time to change. That is, it is determined whether the situation is such that the hold image should be displayed in a specific display mode from the beginning. In this step, the above-mentioned determination is made with reference to the setting result of the performance scenario of the pending notice performance set in the above-mentioned step Sa1513 (FIG. 34). If it is not the timing to change the display mode, the first execution process of the pending notice is ended.

On the other hand, if it is the timing to change the display mode, an execution lottery is performed in step Sa1603 to determine whether or not to execute the change suggestion effect. The change-suggesting performance is a performance that suggests that the display mode of the pending image changes (ranks up). Although the manner of the change suggestion performance is not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the change suggestion performance is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 39. First, as shown in FIG. 39(a), a predetermined character image 402 is displayed near the hold display section 200 at a predetermined timing before the hold image changes. In addition, when performing a change suggestion effect in accordance with the generation timing of the suspension information, first, the suspension image is displayed in the normal display mode, and the character image 402 is displayed immediately after or at the same time. Thereafter, a video of the character performing a predetermined action is displayed, and the display mode of the pending image is changed to a higher-level display mode, as shown in FIG. 39(b). Note that the character image 402 is deleted after changing the display mode of the pending image.

In step Sa1603, an execution lottery of the change suggestion effect is performed based on the lottery counters (random values) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the execution lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. . In step Sa1604, it is determined whether the lottery result in step Sa1603 is a winning result. If the lottery result is a winning result, in step Sa1605, a change suggestion effect is set to be executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Specifically, a command to the effect that a change suggestion effect should be executed is set as an output target to the display control device 350.

Note that in this embodiment, the change suggestion effect can be executed only when the display mode of the hold image is changed, but the change suggestion effect can also be executed when the display mode of the hold image is not changed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is possible to do so. In other words, even when the display mode of the pending image is not changed, a lottery for executing the change suggestion performance may be performed.

In such a case, the change-suggesting effect may be, for example, after displaying a predetermined character image 402 as shown in FIG. After that, the character image 402 may be deleted without changing the display mode of the pending image, and the display mode before displaying the character image 402 may be maintained as it is. However, if such fake performances occur frequently, the player may lose expectations for the change-suggesting performance, so it is better to keep the frequency of execution low. Specifically, when the display mode is not changed, the execution probability of winning the change suggestion effect is lower than when the display mode is changed.In other words, when the character image 402 is displayed, the display mode of the pending image is lower. It is preferable that the frequency at which the value does not change is lower than the frequency at which it changes.

After executing step Sa1605 or if a negative determination is made in step Sa1604 (if the execution lottery of the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step Sa1606, and the destination to be changed in the current change process based on the setting result of the effect scenario. Understand the display mode. Specifically, it is determined which specific display mode among the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, and rainbow color display mode HMe is used to display the pending image.

In step Sa1607, settings are made to change the display mode of the pending image to the display mode grasped in step Sa1606. Note that when this process is performed when a hold command is received (when a hold image is additionally displayed), the initial display mode of the hold image to be additionally displayed is set to be the display mode grasped in step Sa1606 above.

At this time, if the change suggestion effect is not to be executed, the hold image is set to be displayed in one of the specific display modes indicated by the effect scenario from the beginning. On the other hand, when executing a change-suggesting performance, the display is set to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa and then changed to a specific display mode indicated by the production scenario. When the setting process in step Sa1607 is executed, in step Sa1405 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 31), the command is updated so that information about the display mode set in step Sa1607 is included in the pending display command to the display control device 350. Set.

In step Sa1608, information indicating the display mode of the current pending image is stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. As shown in FIG. 38(b), in the display mode storage area 344e, areas are provided corresponding to the reservation information (reservation image) of each special figure and the reservation information during the game round, The display mode of the pending image can be stored in each area. For example, when displaying the blue display mode HMb in the second unit pending display area Ga2 of the first pending display area Ga, the second area for the first special figure (corresponding to the second pending information) is displayed in the display mode storage area 344e. area) is displayed in the blue display mode HMb. Incidentally, when performing a change suggestion effect, information indicating the display mode (display color) after the change is stored. Note that the display mode storage area 344e may not be provided, and the display mode information may be stored in an area corresponding to the reservation storage area 344c. After executing step Sa1608, the first execution process for pending notice ends.

<Processing for commands during shift>
The shift command response process in step Sa1304 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 40(a).

First, in step Sa1701, a first execution process of a pending notice is executed. This process is for changing the display mode of the hold image of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect when the hold image is shifted. The process in this step is basically the same as the process for first execution of a suspended notice (FIG. 38(a)) in step Sa1404 (FIG. 31).

To explain with reference to FIG. 38(a), in the first execution process of the pending notice in step Sa1701, the pending notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and the situation in which the pending notice effect should be executed is If so, in step Sa1602, the current shift timing is determined for the hold image (the hold image displayed in each hold display area Ga, Gb) corresponding to the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance. It is determined whether it is time to change the display mode (display color). This determination is made based on the setting result of the effect scenario of the pending notice effect set in step Sa1513 (FIG. 34).

If it is time to change the display mode, an execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the change suggestion effect in step Sa1603.If the lottery is won, the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is changed in step Sa1605. Set so that the change suggestion effect is executed. After executing step Sa1605 or if a negative determination is made in step Sa1604 (if the execution lottery of the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step Sa1606, and the destination to be changed in the current change process based on the setting result of the effect scenario. Understand the display mode.

In step Sa1607, settings are made to change the display mode of the pending image to the display mode grasped in step Sa1606. Specifically, the output command to the display control device 350 includes information indicating which pending image's display mode is to be changed, and information indicating which display mode (display color) is to be changed. In this way, a command is set to the effect that the display mode of the pending image should be changed at the current shift timing. As a result, the display mode of the pending image is changed to the display mode determined by the setting result of the production scenario at the current shift timing.

In step Sa1608, for the pending image whose display mode is to be changed, information about the changed display mode is stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. For example, when changing the hold image in the blue display mode HMb displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2 of the first hold display area Ga to the green display mode HMc when shifting to the first unit hold display area Ga1, In the display mode storage area 344e, after erasing the information displayed in blue stored in the second area for the first special figure (area corresponding to the second pending information), the information displayed in green is stored in the same area. do.

Returning to the description of the shift command response process (FIG. 40), after the process of step Sa1701 is executed, the second execution process of the pending notice is executed in step Sa1702. Since this process is related to the production mode switching process of step Sa1307 (FIG. 30), it will be described in detail after the switching process is explained.

In step Sa1703, the value of the hold number counter (start hold storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is decremented by 1. The various counter areas 344b are provided with a pending number counter for the first special symbol and a pending number counter for the second special symbol, and in this step, the starting pending storage number SN on the corresponding side is updated.

In step Sa1704, a shift process for moving and displaying the pending image is executed, and then the main shift command corresponding process is ended. In the shift process, the pending information stored in the first area of the pending storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is moved to the execution area SAE, and the pending information stored in the second to fourth areas is sequentially moved to the lower area side. shift. At this time, the display mode information stored in each area of the display mode storage area 344e is also sequentially shifted to the lower area side.

In the shift process, the display control device 350 is controlled to change the display position of the pending image in the pending display section 200 of the display screen G to the lower unit pending display area. As a state before the control, for example, as shown in FIG. 40(b1), the holding image is displayed in the first unit holding display area Ga1 and the second unit holding display area Ga2 of the first holding display area Ga. In this case, the display positions of these pending images are changed to the execution display area D and the first unit pending display area Ga1 by the control, as shown in FIG. 40(b2). Note that if the display mode of the pending image is set to be changed in the first execution process of the pending notice in step Sa1701, the display position and the display mode are changed together.

<Special figure fluctuation display processing>
The special figure variation display process in step Sa1305 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 41.

First, in step Sa1801, it is determined whether or not a game round is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether a game round of either the first special figure or the second special figure is being executed. If no game is being executed, the process advances to step Sa1802, and it is determined whether a fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation display time setting process (FIG. 24) in the main controller 162.

By referring to the information on this variation pattern, it is possible to grasp at which variable display time the special figure game round on the special figure display unit 43 whose display is controlled by the main control device 162 is performed. Moreover, as already explained, since the fluctuation pattern for jackpots and the fluctuation pattern for misses are set separately, it is also possible to determine the result of the success/failure determination from the fluctuation patterns.

If the fluctuation start command has not been received, the special figure fluctuation display process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the fluctuation start command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sa1803, where a fluctuation start process is executed to start the performance for the game round, and thereafter, the special figure fluctuation display process is ended.

In the fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command from the main controller 162 is analyzed to identify the fluctuation pattern regarding the current special figure game round. Furthermore, based on the specified fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display time in the current special figure game round is grasped. The various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343 stores a performance pattern table in which variable display times are determined in association with each variable pattern. The variable display time defined in the effect pattern table corresponds to the variable display time to which each variable pattern (FIG. 14) corresponds in the main control device 162, and the effect control device 143 and the main control device 162 A common variable display time is assigned to the patterns. For example, when the variation pattern is variation pattern 1A, the corresponding variation display time is 15 seconds for both the production control device 143 and the main control device 162. In the variation start processing, the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern analyzed from the variation start command is specified with reference to the performance pattern table, and this is set as the variation display time of the current special figure game round.

Further, in the performance pattern table, performance patterns for game round performances are associated with each variation pattern. These performance patterns include normal reach, SP reach A, SP reach B, SPSP reach A, SPSP reach B, complete miss, normal reach miss, and SP reach A, which were mentioned when explaining the variable display time table. Missing, SP Reach B Missing, SPSP Reach A Missing, and SPSP Reach B Missing are set. Since the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the effect pattern has already been described with reference to FIG. 14, the explanation will be omitted. In the variation start process, the performance pattern corresponding to the current variation pattern is specified with reference to the performance pattern table, and this is set as the performance pattern for the current special figure game round.

In addition, in the fluctuation start process, if the result of the judgment regarding the current special figure game is a jackpot, the jackpot type is specified based on the type command from the main control device 162. When the jackpot type is a probability-variable jackpot, a stop result for a probability-variable jackpot is set as the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Conversely, when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the stop result for the normal jackpot is set as the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In these cases, the active lines L1 to L5 on which the stop result for the jackpot is displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Further, if the result of the validity judgment regarding the current special pattern game round is a failure, each stop symbol in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is determined at random. However, if the performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is a ready-to-win performance, each stop symbol is determined so that a reach is formed on the active lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery. That is, a stop result in which a combination of off-reach symbols is established on one active line L1 to L5 is set as the current stop result.

In the fluctuation start processing, after executing each of the above-mentioned processing, a command including information on the current stop symbol and information on the production pattern is set as an output target to the display control device 350. In the display control device 350, according to the received command, the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are stopped according to the stop result determined by the production control device 143, or the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped according to the production pattern determined by the production control device 143. The symbol display device 75 is controlled so that a performance is performed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa1801 (if a game round is being executed), the process advances to step Sa1804, and it is determined whether or not a variation end command has been received from the main controller 162. If the fluctuation end command has not been received, it means that the fluctuation display time has not yet elapsed in the current special figure game round. In this case, in step Sa1805, processing for changing is executed. In the fluctuating process, the fluctuating display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that was started by the fluctuating start process is continued, the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in order, and each reach effect is executed. Execute processing to

In step Sa1806, it is determined whether or not the current special figure game round is the game round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance. If it is not the game time of the reservation information that triggered the reservation notice performance, the special figure variation display process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is the game time of the pending information that triggered the pending preview performance, the process for first execution of the pending preview is executed in step Sa1807. This process is for changing the display mode of the pending image of the pending information that triggered the pending preview performance during the execution of the game round of the pending information. The process in this step is basically the same as the process for first execution of a suspended notice (FIG. 38(a)) in step Sa1404 (FIG. 31).

To explain with reference to FIG. 38(a), in the first execution process of the pending notice in step Sa1807, the pending notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and the situation in which the pending notice effect should be executed is If so, in step Sa1602, it is determined whether it is time to change the display mode of the pending image (the pending image displayed in the execution display area D) corresponding to the pending information that triggered the pending notice performance. Determine whether or not. This determination is made based on the setting result of the effect scenario of the pending notice effect set in step Sa1513 (FIG. 34).

If it is time to change the display mode, an execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the change suggestion effect in step Sa1603.If the lottery is won, the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is changed in step Sa1605. Set so that the change suggestion effect is executed. After executing step Sa1605 or if a negative determination is made in step Sa1604 (if the execution lottery of the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step Sa1606, and the destination to be changed in the current change process based on the setting result of the effect scenario. Understand the display mode.

In step Sa1607, settings are made to change the display mode of the pending image to the display mode grasped in step Sa1606. As a result, the display mode of the pending image is changed to the display mode determined by the setting result of the production scenario at a predetermined pending change point during a game round. In the following step Sa1608, information on the changed display mode is stored in the area corresponding to the execution display area D in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41), after executing the process of step Sa1807, the third execution process of the pending notice is executed in step Sa1808. Since this process is related to the production mode switching process of step Sa1307 (FIG. 30), it will be described in detail after the switching process is explained. After executing step Sa1808, the special figure variation display process is ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa1804 (if a variation end command has been received), this means that the variation display time has elapsed. In this case, the process advances to step Sa1809, and a variation termination process is executed. In the process for ending variation, the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 and the performance being executed are ended (the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are fixed and stopped).

In step Sa1810, it is determined whether or not the current special figure game round is the game round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance. If it is not the game time of the reservation information that triggered the reservation notice performance, the special figure variation display process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is the game round of the pending information that triggered the pending preview performance, it is determined in step Sa1811 whether a pending notice flag or a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. Details of the return standby flag will be described later.

If either the suspension notice flag or the return standby flag is stored, the stored flag is erased in step Sa1812. After execution of step Sa1812 or when a negative determination is made in step Sa1811 (when neither the suspension notice flag nor the standby flag for return is stored), the special figure variation display process is ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the variation display time has elapsed based on whether or not a variation end command is received from the main control device 162. Since the variable display time can be determined from the transmitted variable start command, it may be configured to determine whether or not the variable display time related to the game session being executed has elapsed based on the determined variable display time. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the main control device 162 does not transmit the fluctuation end command.

<Processing for switching production mode>
The production mode switching process in step Sa1307 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 42. The production mode switching process is for switching between production mode A and production mode B, which have already been described.

First, in step Sa1901, it is determined whether or not the effect mode switching is still valid. In this embodiment, the period in which the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is being executed in the special figure game round, and the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is being executed are set as invalid periods in which the effect mode cannot be switched. The period is the effective period for switching the performance mode, including during the execution of the special figure game. In step Sa1901, it is determined whether the current timing belongs to the above-mentioned valid period. If the effect mode switching is not within the valid period, the effect mode switching process is immediately ended.

If the effect mode switching is still valid, the process proceeds to step Sa1902, and it is determined whether a predetermined operation for switching the effect mode has been performed on the effect operation unit 36. If the predetermined operation is not performed, the production mode switching process is immediately ended.

If the predetermined operation has been performed, the process advances to step Sa1903, and a switching process for switching the production mode is executed. For example, if the current performance mode is performance mode A, the performance data is set so as to switch to performance mode B. In addition, the switching of the production mode may be performed in accordance with the timing at which the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, or may be performed in accordance with the timing at which the next special figure game round is started.

In step Sa1904, the production mode flag corresponding to the production mode after switching is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. In this embodiment, a mode A flag and a mode B flag are provided as flags corresponding to production mode A and production mode B, respectively. For example, when switching the production mode from production mode A to production mode B, the above-mentioned various The mode A flag stored in the flag storage area 344d is deleted, and the mode B flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d.

In step Sa1905, it is determined whether a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The return standby flag will be described later.

If the return standby flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step Sa1906, and it is determined whether or not a suspension notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If the pending notice flag is not stored, the production mode switching process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the pending notice flag is stored, that is, if the pending notice effect is being executed or is in a standby state, the process advances to step Sa1907 and the pending notice flag is deleted. As a result, if the pending preview performance was being executed before the mode switching, the continuation of the pending preview performance is canceled. Further, if the pending preview performance is in a standby state, the execution of the pending preview performance that has been on standby is canceled.

In step Sa1908, it is determined whether or not a hold preview effect is being executed, that is, whether there is a hold image displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, among the holding images displayed in each holding display area Ga, Gb, in any one of the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, or the rainbow color display mode HMe. Determine whether the displayed item exists. This determination is made with reference to the information of each area stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. If there is no pending image displayed in the specific display mode, the production mode switching process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if there is a hold image displayed in the specific display mode (if the hold preview effect is being executed), the process advances to step Sa1909, and the hold image displayed in the specific display mode is selected from any mode. Information indicating whether the display is displayed is stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344. In the return area 344f, areas are set corresponding to the hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4, Gb1 to Gb4 and execution display area D of each special figure, and the display mode of the hold image can be stored in each area. It is possible.

In step Sa1909, the display mode information stored in the display mode storage area 344e at that point is also stored in the return area 344f. Therefore, at the time of processing in step Sa1909, the same information is stored in the display mode storage area 344e and the return area 344f.

Note that the information on the display mode may be identification information indicating the display mode or may be identification information indicating the display color. In short, it is sufficient that the display mode of the pending image can be specified from the information stored in the return area 344f, and any information that corresponds to the display mode of the pending image is sufficient.

Through the above processing, by referring to the return area 344f after switching the production mode, it is possible to grasp which pending image was being displayed in which display mode before switching the production mode. Note that when executing the shift process in step Sa1704 in the shift command response process (FIG. 40) with the display mode information stored in the return area 344f, not only the display mode storage area 344e but also the return The display mode information stored in each area of the area 344f is also sequentially shifted to the lower area side.

In step Sa1910, processing for canceling the display in the specific display mode is executed for the pending image displayed in the specific display mode. That is, it is set so that the hold image displayed in the specific display mode is switched to the normal display mode HMa with the switching of the production mode. Note that the switching to the normal display mode HMa is performed in accordance with the switching timing of the production mode. For example, if the production mode is switched at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, the hold image is switched to the normal display mode HMa at that timing, and if the production mode is switched at the start timing of the next special figure game, the The hold image is set to switch to the normal display mode HMa at the appropriate timing.

Further, in the cancellation process of step Sa1910, a process of clearing the display mode information stored in the display mode storage area 344e is executed. Therefore, at the time of processing in step Sa1910, display mode information is stored only in the return area 344f. Furthermore, in the canceling process at step Sa1910, a process is also executed to erase the production scenario data set at step Sa1513 of the pending notice setting process (FIG. 34).

In this embodiment, when the production mode is switched, the obtained suspension information, in other words, the execution lottery for the suspension notice performance (the setting process for suspension notice in FIG. 34) has already been performed. Regarding pending information, the configuration is such that re-execution lottery is restricted. Specifically, we do not conduct another lottery for execution of the pending notice performance, and prevent duplicate execution lottery from occurring before and after switching the production mode for the same pending information (image for suspension). There is.

In step Sa1911, a return standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d. In this embodiment, after switching the production mode, when the original production mode is switched again, the display mode of the pending image is returned to the specific display mode. The return standby flag is a flag indicating that the system is in a standby state for the return process. After executing step Sa1911, the production mode switching process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa1905 (if the return standby flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa1912, where processing for erasing the return standby flag is executed. Here, the situation in which an affirmative determination is made in step Sa1905 means that the first production mode switching is performed in a situation where a pending preview production is being executed, and then, as a result of the mode switching operation being performed again, the original production mode is returned. This means that the situation has returned to . For example, there is a situation in which the production mode is switched from production mode A to production mode B while one of the pending images is displayed in a specific display mode, and then switched to production mode A again. At that time, in the previous mode switching (switching from production mode A to production mode B), the display mode of the pending image is set to the normal display mode HMa and the pending preview production is canceled, so production mode A The hold image that was displayed in the specific display mode will continue to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa during the stay in production mode B.

Note that after switching to production mode B and before switching to production mode A, the game round of the holding image (holding information) may end. In this case, since the return standby flag is erased in steps Sa1811 and step Sa1812 of the special figure fluctuation display process (FIG. 41), a negative determination is made in step Sa1905.

After executing step Sa1912, in step Sa1913, a setting process for returning to advance notice is executed to return the display mode of the pending image to a specific display mode. Thereafter, the production mode switching process ends.

<About changing the display mode of the hold image by switching the production mode>
As already explained, in this embodiment, when the production mode is switched in a situation where the hold image is displayed in a specific display mode, the display mode of the hold image is changed to the normal display mode HMa. , the suspended notice performance is released. In this case, by switching the display state of not only the background image 401 but also the hold display section 200, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the change in production mode.

In addition, if the switching of production modes is limited to simply changing the displayed image, it will be difficult to give the player an impression of the difference between the modes, but in this embodiment, the execution frequency of the pending preview production can be changed between modes. This makes it possible to highlight the differences between the production modes. However, in a configuration where the execution frequency of the pending preview effect differs between modes, even if the display mode of the pending image in which the pending preview effect is performed is the same, the jackpot expectation level suggested by the display mode will be different from the one in the production mode. It may differ depending on the type. For this reason, if the display format before the mode switch is maintained after the mode switch, even though the actual expectation level of the retained information corresponds to the production mode before the switch, it will appear as if the expectation level corresponds to the production mode after the switch. Therefore, there is a concern that there will be a mismatch between the level of expectation suggested by the pending notice performance and the actual level of expectation. In this regard, by changing the display mode of the pending image to the normal display mode HMa when switching the production mode, such mismatching of expectations can be suitably avoided.

In this way, by canceling the execution of the pending preview performance in response to switching the production mode, it is possible to make it easier to understand the change in the production mode, and to avoid inconsistencies in expectations suggested by the pending preview performance. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that some players may misunderstand that the cancellation of the pending preview presentation means that the chance suggested by the pending preview presentation has also disappeared, leading to disappointment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a setting process for returning to the notice in step Sa1913, a second execution process for the pending notice in step Sa1702, and a third execution process for the pending notice in step Sa1808 are provided, and after switching the production mode, The display mode of the pending image is configured to be restored when switching back to the original production mode. The processing of each of the above steps will be explained in detail below.

<Setting process for advance notice recovery>
The setting process for advance notice return in step Sa1913 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

First, in step Sa2101, the display status of the pending images displayed in each pending display area Ga, Gb and execution display area D before the specific display mode is canceled and the normal display mode HMa is set is grasped. For example, in a situation where the fourth reservation image for the first special figure (the reservation image in the fourth unit reservation display area Ga4) is displayed in the blue display mode HMb, the production mode changes from production mode A to production mode B. When the mode is switched and then switched to the production mode A again, it is recognized that the pending image was displayed in the blue display mode HMb.

At that time, after switching from performance mode A to performance mode B, if the game play has been completed and the hold image has been shifted to the lower area side, it will be displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 at the time of mode switching. It is understood that the holding image corresponding to the holding image that was previously displayed was displayed in the blue display mode HMb before the cancellation process. For example, if two gaming rounds have been played after switching to production mode B, the pending image displayed in the second unit pending display area Ga2 is displayed in the blue display mode HMb at the time of mode switching. Understand that. This understanding is performed with reference to the return area 344f of the RAM 344.

In step Sa2102, it is determined whether or not the game round of the pending image (target pending image) displayed in the specific display mode is being executed. That is, after switching from production mode A to production mode B, it is determined whether or not the game cycle has been completed and the game has progressed to the game cycle of the target pending image. If the game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step Sa2103, and the number of pieces of pending information (number of pending items) prior to the target pending image is grasped. For example, if the target pending image is the third pending information, the number of previous pending images is determined to be two. Note that pending information regarding the game being played is not included in the pending number. Further, the number of reserved pieces is determined separately for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In step Sa2104, it is determined whether the number of pending items determined in step Sa2103 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, one item). If the number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step Sa2105, and a lottery process for a return scenario is executed. The return scenario determines at which shift timing the target pending image is returned to its original specific display mode.

In the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, a return scenario table is stored which determines when to restore the display mode of the pending image in correspondence with the number of pending images and the original specific display mode. There is. In the return scenario table, for example, in response to the case where the number of pending items is 2, the return timing of the display mode is set at the first shift (shift to the second unit pending display area Ga2) and the second shift ( It is possible to select between the time of shift to the first unit pending display area Ga1) and the time of the third shift (time of shift to execution display area D).

In addition, in the return scenario table, if the original display mode is a specific display mode higher than the blue display mode HMb, whether to directly return to the original specific display mode from the normal display mode HMa or to return to the original specific display mode in stages. It is also possible to select whether to return to . Therefore, there are cases in which the specific display mode before release is restored by one hold change display, and cases in which the display mode is returned to the specific display mode before release after a plurality of hold change displays.

In step Sa2105, based on the above-mentioned return scenario table and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, the return timing and return mode of the display mode in the pending image are drawn.

After executing step Sa2105 or if a negative determination is made in step Sa2104 (if the number of pending items is less than one), a return scenario setting process is performed in step Sa2106. When the return scenario lottery process is performed in step Sa2105, the display mode of the pending image is set to be restored in the selected return scenario, and if the number of pending images is less than 1, the execution display is The display mode of the pending image is set to be restored when shifting to area D.

After execution of step Sa2106 or when an affirmative determination is made in step Sa2102 (when the game round of the target pending image is being executed), a preview return flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step Sa2107. The advance notice return flag is used by the MPU 342 to understand that processing for restoring the display mode of the pending image should be executed. After executing step Sa2107, the setting process for advance notice return is ended.

<Process for second execution of pending notice>
The second execution process for pending notice in step Sa1702 (FIG. 40(a)) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 44. This process is performed as part of the shift command response process, in other words, it is a process that is executed at the shift timing of the pending image.

First, in step Sa2201, it is determined whether the advance notice return flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. If the notice return flag is not stored, the process for second execution of the pending notice is ended.

If the advance notice return flag is stored, the process advances to step Sa2202, and the return scenario set at step Sa2106 in the above-mentioned advance notice return setting process is grasped. In step Sa2203, based on the setting result of the return scenario grasped in step Sa2202, it is determined whether the current shift timing is the return timing of the display mode of the target pending image. If it is not the return timing, the second execution process of the suspended notice is ended.

If it is the return timing, the process proceeds to step Sa2204, and the display mode to be changed is grasped based on the setting result of the return scenario. For example, if the display mode before the release of the target hold image is the green display mode HMc, and the display mode determined by the recovery scenario is the green display mode HMc, the display mode to be changed is the green display mode HMc. Understand. Further, when the display mode determined by the return scenario is the blue display mode HMb, which is a pre-stage to the green display mode HMc, the blue display mode HMb is grasped as the display mode to be changed.

In step Sa2205, settings are made to change the display mode of the target pending image to the display mode grasped in step Sa2204. Specifically, the output command to the display control device 350 includes information indicating the pending image whose display mode is to be changed, and information indicating which display mode (display color) to change to. A command is set to the effect that the display mode of the pending image should be changed at the current shift timing. After executing step Sa2205, the second execution process for pending notice ends.

<Process for third execution of pending notice>
The third execution process for pending notice in step Sa1808 (FIG. 41) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 45. This process is performed as a part of the special figure fluctuation display process, in other words, it is a process that is performed during the execution of the game round.

First, in step Sa2301, it is determined whether the advance notice return flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. If the notice return flag is not stored, the third execution process for the suspended notice is ended.

If the advance notice return flag is stored, the process proceeds to step Sa2302, and it is determined whether or not a promotion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The promotion flag will be described later.

If the promotion flag is not stored, the process advances to step Sa2303, and it is determined whether the current display mode of the target pending image is the normal display mode HMa. Note that the case where the current display mode of the target pending image is the normal display mode HMa is a case where the switching operation to the original production mode is performed during the execution of the game round of the target pending image.

If the current display mode is the normal display mode HMa, the process advances to step Sa2304, and it is determined whether or not there are any pending change points remaining in the game round in progress. For example, if there are no pending change points remaining, such as when the performance mode is changed at the end of the game of the target pending image, the process proceeds to step Sa2314, and the flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. Delete the previous notice return flag. As a result, the return processing of the pending notice performance is canceled, and the target pending image (the pending image displayed in the execution display area D) continues to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa in that game round.

If the hold change point remains, in step Sa2305, the specific display mode of the target hold image before cancellation is grasped by referring to the return area 344f of the RAM 344, and this is grasped as the display mode to be changed. do. In step Sa2306, settings are made to change the display mode of the pending image to the display mode grasped in step Sa2305. Specifically, as an output command to the display control device 350, a command indicating that the display mode of the pending image should be changed is set by including information indicating which display mode (display color) to change to. do. As a result, the display mode of the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is changed (returned) to the specific display mode before cancellation at the most recent hold change point.

After executing step Sa2306 or when a negative determination is made in step Sa2303 (when the current display mode of the target pending image is not the normal display mode HMa), the determined flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d in step Sa2307. Determine whether or not the Note that a case where the current display mode of the target pending image (the pending image displayed in the execution display area D) is not the normal display mode HMa means that the display mode of the pending image is already the specific display mode before cancellation. The situation has changed.

If it is determined in step Sa2307 that the determined flag is stored, the third execution process for pending notice is ended. On the other hand, if the determined flag is not stored, processing for promoting the pending notice is executed in step Sa2308.

Here, the pending notice promotion process in step Sa2308 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46.

In the promotion process, first in step Sa2401, the fluctuation pattern of the target pending image is grasped. This understanding is performed based on the fluctuation start command (step Sa712 in FIG. 23) transmitted from the main controller 162 at the start of the game round (game round in progress) of the target pending image.

In step Sa2402, a promotion determination of the pending preview performance is performed based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa2401 and the promotion determination table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. The promotion determination may change the display mode of the target pending image (the pending image displayed in the execution display area D) to a higher specific display mode (a display mode higher than the display mode before release). This is to determine whether or not it is possible.

As shown in FIG. 47, the upper limit of the display mode is determined in the promotion determination table in correspondence with each variation pattern. For example, for variation pattern 5H corresponding to SPSP reach A failure, the red display mode is set. Changes up to HMd are allowed. Incidentally, in the case of each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot, changes up to the rainbow color display mode HMe are allowed in any of variation patterns 1A to 5A.

Note that the promotion determination table is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 47, and may have other configurations, such as having different upper limit display modes for each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot. In short, it is sufficient that the upper limit display mode is determined so as to correspond to the jackpot expectation level of the game round (fluctuation pattern) (in other words, to match the jackpot expectation level).

In step Sa2402, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa2401 is specified with reference to the promotion determination table, and the current display mode of the target pending image is lower than the specified upper limit display mode. It is determined whether the display mode is selected. As a result, if the current display mode is a lower display mode than the upper limit display mode, promotion of the display mode is allowed; otherwise, promotion is not allowed. In addition, if the display mode is set to be changed in step Sa2306 above, it is determined whether the display mode after the change is a lower display mode than the upper limit display mode specified above, and the result is Determine whether promotion is possible based on the following.

After executing step Sa2402, a determined flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step Sa2403. The determined flag is for the MPU 342 to know that the promotion determination has been performed, and in other words, it is for avoiding duplicate promotion determination.

In step Sa2404, it is determined whether the result of the promotion determination in step Sa2402 allows promotion of the display mode. If the promotion is not permitted, the process exits the promotion process for the suspended notice and proceeds to step Sa2314 (FIG. 45), erases the notice return flag, and ends the third execution process for the suspended notice.

If promotion is permitted, the process advances to step Sa2405 and a promotion scenario lottery process is executed. The promotion scenario determines at what timing (pending change point) the display mode of the target pending image displayed in the execution display area D is to be changed. A promotion scenario lottery table for drawing a promotion scenario is stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, and in this promotion scenario lottery table, an execution lottery table for drawing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a promotion effect is stored. In addition to the information, multiple types of promotion scenarios are set corresponding to each upper limit display mode of the pending preview performance. In step Sa2405, based on the promotion scenario lottery table and the lottery counters (random values) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, an execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to promote the display mode, and a scenario for the promotion. A lottery will be held.

In step Sa2406, it is determined whether the result of the lottery process in step Sa2405 is to promote the display mode. If it is not to be promoted, the process exits the promotion process for the suspended notice and proceeds to step Sa2314 (FIG. 45), the preview return flag is erased, and the third execution process for the suspended notice is ended.

In the case of promotion, the process proceeds to step Sa2407, and promotion scenario data is set so that the promotion scenario selected at step Sa2405 is executed. After execution of step Sa2407, processes related to change suggestion effects are executed in steps Sa2408 to Sa2410. These processes are similar to steps Sa1603 to Sa1605 in the first execution process of the pending notice (FIG. 38(a)), so the explanation will be omitted.

After execution of step Sa2410 or when a negative determination is made in step Sa2409, a promotion flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d in step Sa2411, and thereafter, the pending notice promotion process is ended. The promotion flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that the display mode of the target pending image should be promoted.

Returning to the explanation of the process for third execution of a pending notice (FIG. 45), after the process for promoting a pending notice in step Sa2308 is executed, the third execution process for a pending notice is ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa2302 (if the promotion flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa2309, and it is determined whether or not it is time to promote the display mode. This determination is made based on the promotion scenario setting result in step Sa2407. If it is not the promotion timing, the third execution process for pending notice is ended.

If it is time for promotion, the process proceeds to step Sa2310, and the display mode to be changed (upper display mode) in the current change process is grasped based on the setting result of the promotion scenario. In the following step Sa2311, the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step Sa2310. Specifically, the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is changed by including information indicating which display mode to change to as an output command to the display control device 350. Set the command to indicate what should be done.

In step Sa2312, it is determined whether the display mode grasped in step Sa2310 or the display mode set as the change destination in step Sa2311 is the final display mode in the promotion effect. For example, if a promotion scenario is set to promote the display mode in multiple stages through multiple change processes, if the current change process is an intermediate step, it is assumed that it is not the final display mode. A negative determination is made in the step, and the third execution process for pending notice is ended.

If it is the final display mode, the promotion flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased in step Sa2313. In the following step Sa2314, the advance notice return flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased, and then the third execution process of the pending notice is ended.

<About the flow of the display mode of the hold image when the production mode is switched>
The flow of the display mode of the hold image when the production mode is switched will be explained with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50.

When a winning occurs in the first operation port 62 in a state where three pieces of holding information for the first special symbol have been acquired, and when the fourth piece of holding information (holding image HW) is acquired, the main controller In step 162, a pending prefetch process (step Sa305) is executed for the obtained pending information. Here, it is assumed that as a result, a result is read in advance in which the judgment of validity is wrong and the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 6H (missing SPSP reach B).

In addition, the effect control device 143 executes a setting process for a pending notice (step Sa1403) based on the pre-read result of the main control device 162, and performs a lottery for execution of a pending notice effect regarding the pending image HW, and selects the final display mode. Lotteries, production scenario drawings, etc. will be held. As a result of those lottery results, the red display mode HMd was selected as the final display mode, and the scenario in which the display was initially displayed in the green display mode HMc and changed to the red display mode HMd at a later shift timing was selected as the production scenario. shall be. In this case, as shown in FIG. 48(a), the holding image HW in the green display mode HMc is displayed in the fourth unit holding display area Ga4 of the first holding display area Ga.

Thereafter, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the performance operation section 36, the performance mode is switched from performance mode A to performance mode B. At this time, as shown in FIG. 48(b), the display mode of the pending image HW, which has been set as the green display mode HMc in the production mode A, is changed to the normal display mode HMa. In this case, in the production control device 143, information indicating the display mode (green display mode HMc) of the pending image HW before mode switching is stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344. Note that FIG. 48(b) shows a case where the production mode is switched in the middle of a game round in which the suspension information of the suspension image HW is acquired.

When the mode switching operation is performed again in the next game round and the production mode is switched from production mode B to production mode A, the production control device 143 uses a pre-announcement return function based on the information stored in the return area 344f. A setting process (step Sa1913) is executed, and the original display mode (green display mode HMc) is grasped and a return scenario is selected by lottery. As a result of the scenario lottery, it is assumed that a scenario is selected which is initially displayed in the normal display mode HMa and then changed to the original display mode HMc at the subsequent change timing.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 49(a), at the time of switching to production mode A, the hold image HW is displayed with the display mode set to the normal display mode HMa. If the selected return scenario is to change the display mode of the hold image HW to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, and further to the green display mode HMc at the next shift timing, As shown in 49(b), at the timing when the pending image HW is shifted to the second unit pending display area Ga2, the display mode of the pending image HW is returned to the original green display mode HMc. As a result, the display mode of the pending image HW, which was set to the normal display mode HMa when switching to production mode B, is returned to the display mode before switching to production mode B.

Note that after switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, until the game round of the pending image HW starts, a change-suggesting presentation (FIG. 39) that suggests a change in the display mode of the pending image (rank up) is performed. The actual lottery will not be held. Therefore, when changing to the blue display mode HMb or changing to the green display mode HMc, no change suggestion effect is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 50(a), when the game round of the pending image HW is started, the effect control device 143 executes the third execution process (step Sa1808) of the pending notice, and It grasps the variation pattern of HW, grasps the upper limit display mode corresponding to the grasped variation pattern, and determines promotion to a higher display mode.

The fluctuation pattern of the holding image HW is fluctuation pattern 6H, and the upper limit display mode in this case is the red display mode HMd (Fig. 47), so in the promotion judgment, the current display mode (green display mode HMc) is the upper limit display mode. Promotion of the display mode is allowed based on the fact that the mode is lower than the mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(b), at a predetermined pending change point in the game cycle of the pending image HW, the display mode of the pending image HW displayed in the execution display area D changes to the red display mode HMd. In other words, the display mode is changed to a higher level than the original display mode. At that time, if the lottery for executing the change suggestion performance is won, the change suggestion performance is performed and then the display mode is changed to red display mode HMd.

The red display mode HMd suggests that the SPSP reach effect will be performed in the game round of the relevant pending image. Here, since the fluctuation pattern of the hold image HW is the fluctuation pattern 6H corresponding to the SPSP reach B out effect, the SPSP reach B effect will be performed in the game round of the hold image HW, and the hold image HW The suggestion by and the actual game performance are consistent.

In addition, after switching from production mode A to production mode B, the game round of the pending image HW may end without switching to production mode A again. In this case, the display mode of the pending image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa without returning to the specific display mode.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

If execution of the hold notice effect is canceled by switching the effect mode and the display mode of the target hold image HW changes from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, then by shifting to the original display mode, the target hold The display mode of the image HW for use is returned to the original specific display mode.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the pending image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the pending pre-reading process, so that the player's expectations for a jackpot result are aroused even before the start of the game round. be able to. Furthermore, since multiple types of specific display modes are set with different levels of jackpot expectation, it is possible to suggest different levels of expectation, which is advantageous in arousing players' sense of anticipation. It can be configured as follows. Furthermore, since mode switching is performed between performance mode A and performance mode B, it is possible to change the player's mood during the game and prevent him from getting bored with the game. In such a configuration, if the performance mode is switched during the execution of a hold preview performance (a performance in which the hold image is set in a specific display mode) and the execution of the hold preview performance is canceled, the performance is notified or suggested by the relevant performance. There is a concern that players may feel misunderstood or feel anxious that their expectations have disappeared. In this case, it may be possible to restrict the switching of production modes while the pending preview production is in progress, but this may lead to a situation where the frequency of switching production modes decreases, and the significance of having multiple types of production modes may be lost. .

In this regard, in this configuration, when execution of the pending notice performance is canceled by switching the performance mode, and in that state, the switching to the original performance mode is performed again, the target pending image is changed to the normal display mode HMa. Since the HW is returned to the original specific display mode, the expectation level can be notified again. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the level of expectation has not disappeared, and it is possible to execute the pending notice performance without imposing restrictions on switching the performance mode. In other words, it becomes possible to suitably balance the execution of the pending notice performance and the switching of the performance mode.

Information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold image when a hold preview effect is performed can be stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344, and when the original effect mode is returned to, the information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold image is stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344. The configuration is such that the notification mode of the hold image HW is set. Thereby, when shifting to the original production mode, it becomes possible to suitably return the display mode of the pending image set to the normal display mode HMa to the original specific display mode.

At the time of the above setting, the display mode of the target pending image HW is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f, regardless of the result of the pending prefetch process performed on the target pending image.

For example, when transitioning from presentation mode A to presentation mode B and then to presentation mode A, the display mode of the target holding image HW is set based on the result of the holding pre-reading performed in the previous presentation mode A. If the configuration is such that the display mode is set to be different from the display mode in the production mode A described above. In this case, since the display mode of the target pending image HW in the subsequent performance mode A does not match the display mode in the previous performance mode A, the player can see that the canceled pending preview performance has been restored. Hateful. In particular, in a configuration where the display mode of the hold image can be changed in stages, even if the look-ahead result is the same, the display mode of the hold image (hold preview effect) at the time of switching may differ depending on the switching timing of the effect mode. In order to obtain this, if the display mode in the subsequent production mode A is set based on the result of the pending pre-reading process, a display mode different from the display mode in the previous production mode A is likely to be set.

In this regard, in this configuration, since the display mode is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f instead of the result of the pending prefetching process, when transitioning to the later production mode A, the display mode is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f. You can set the display mode to be the same as the actual display mode. As a result, the display mode in the previous performance mode A and the display mode in the subsequent performance mode B can be suitably matched, and the player can recognize that the display format (suspended preview performance) has returned. It becomes possible to make it easier.

When returning the display mode of the target holding image HW to the original specific display mode by transitioning to production mode A later, the display mode of the target holding image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the original specific display mode. The configuration is such that the performance scenario (return scenario) for the return is set again.

When returning the target retention image HW to the original specific display mode in the later production mode A, depending on the length of stay in the previous production mode B, the target retention image HW may be returned to the target retention image HW after switching to the later production mode A. It is assumed that the period until the game cycle of the image HW ends, that is, the remaining period during which the target pending image HW continues to be displayed, changes. In this regard, in this configuration, the production scenario is reset when the target pending image HW is returned to the original specific display mode, so even if the remaining period is changed, the target pending image HW is returned to the original specific display mode. can be suitably changed.

In the above case, the configuration is such that the number of pending images before the target pending image HW is grasped, and the production scenario is reset based on the result.

In this case, the production scenario can be reset after appropriately grasping the remaining period, and the target retention image HW can be suitably changed to the original specific display mode regardless of the stay period in production mode B. be able to.

The configuration is such that after the target retention image HW is changed to the original specific display mode in the later production mode A, it can be promoted to a higher specific display mode.

In this case, the range of the display mode (suggested expectation level) in the subsequent production mode A is limited to the display mode in the previous production mode A, and it is possible to suppress the range of suggestible expectation levels from narrowing. . At this time, if the specific display mode is suddenly changed to a higher-ranking specific display mode, it may be difficult to understand the correspondence with the pending notice performance performed in the previous performance mode A, and the performance may become difficult to understand. In this regard, in this configuration, it is possible to change from the original specific display mode to the higher-level display mode, so the display mode of the target pending image HW has been restored (the canceled pending preview effect has been restored). ), making it easy to understand, and it is possible to suppress confusion among players.

In the above case, instead of unnecessarily promoting the display mode of the target pending image HW, a promotion determination is made as to whether or not to promote it to a higher display mode based on the fluctuation pattern of the target pending image HW, and the result is The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not to use the upper mode based on the above. Thereby, it becomes possible to promote the display mode of the target pending image HW while making it consistent with the game round effect (reach effect, etc.) actually performed in the game round of the target pending image HW.

By making it possible to execute a change suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the pending image HW changes to a higher mode, and by shifting to the original mode, the display mode of the target pending image HW can be changed to the original specific display. When returning to the mode, execution of the change suggestion performance is restricted.

Since the change suggestion performance suggests a change to a higher-order display mode, expectations for the change to a higher-order display mode are aroused, and the player's attention to the pending image can be increased. In such a configuration, for example, when the target retention image HW is set to the green display mode HMc in the previous production mode A, and the normal display mode HMa is changed to the green display mode HMc in the subsequent production mode A, a change suggestion production is performed. When performing , the player changes the display mode to a higher level based on the specific display mode (green display mode HMc) in production mode A that he or she remembers, even though it actually only returns to the original specific display mode. (Red display mode HMd and rainbow color display mode HMe) may be associated with this. In this case, the actual display mode (green display mode HMc) in the target retention image HW becomes a lower display mode than the mode associated with the player, which may give an unpleasant impression to the player. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the change corresponds to a change to a higher-level display mode, if the display mode is simply returned to the previous display mode A, the change suggestion effect is not executed, so the actual It is possible to prevent the player from associating a higher level display mode than the display mode, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

The performance mode A and the performance mode B are configured to have different ease of execution of the pending notice performance.

In such a configuration, switching the production mode changes the production characteristics related to the expectation of jackpot, so compared to cases where the change is limited to only the appearance by changing the background image or character image, the difference between the production modes is more noticeable in the game. can make a strong impression on people. However, on the other hand, if the display mode of the target pending image HW is changed to a specific display mode (while the ongoing pending preview performance is continued), the expectation level suggested by the target pending image HW will change. This may lead to different situations before and after switching the production mode. In this case, such inconsistency in expectations can be suppressed by canceling the execution of the suspended preview performance when switching the production mode, but this time, the expectation level suggested by the specific display mode can be suppressed. There is a concern that the player may be misunderstood or feel anxious that the item has disappeared. By applying the present embodiment (a configuration in which the display mode of the target holding image HW is returned to the original specific display mode by shifting to the original production mode, etc.) to such a configuration, each of them can be improved. It is possible to make the features function effectively and to suitably exhibit each of the above-mentioned effects.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment described above, when switching from one of presentation mode A and presentation mode B to the other is performed in a state where there is a pending image in a specific display mode, for example, The display mode of the pending image is stored, and the display mode of the pending image is changed to the normal display mode. After that, if the original effect mode (one effect mode) is switched again before the game cycle of that pending image ends, the display stored at the time of the previous change (switch to the other effect mode) Based on the information on the mode, the display mode of the pending image is restored, and the display mode is changed to the original specific display mode or to a higher specific display mode.

During the period after the previous switching is performed until the subsequent switching (switching back to the original production mode), that is, during the period when the display mode restoration process is being waited for, the player cannot play the game. Therefore, new pending information may occur. In this modification, the handling of the suspension notice effect for this new suspension information is different from that of the first embodiment. This modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55. In these figures, the same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

<Pending command handling process>
The pending command handling process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51. This process is executed when a hold command is received in the production control device 143 (when hold information is generated), and is executed in place of the hold command corresponding process in FIG. 31. In FIG. 51, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 31, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step Sa1402, when the value of the pending number counter (start pending memory number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is incremented by 1, in step Sa2601, the recovery standby flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. Determine whether it is stored. The return standby flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that the MPU 342 is waiting for the return process (processing to return the display mode of the pending image to the original specific display mode), and is used for the return process. During the standby period, various flags are stored in the flag storage area 344d. The waiting period for the return process includes the period from when one of production mode A and production mode B is switched to the other until switching back to the original production mode (duration of stay in the other production mode). In addition, after being switched to the other production mode, the game round of the target pending image (the pending image that is subject to the display mode restoration process) ends without being switched back to the original production mode. There is a period until

If a negative determination is made in step Sa2601 (if the return standby flag is not stored), the process advances to step Sa1403, and a setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34) is executed. In the setting process for pending notice, settings are made to execute a pending notice effect for the generated pending information.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa2601 (if the return standby flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa2602 without executing the hold notice setting process in step Sa1403, and the hold notice corresponding to the hold information that has occurred is The image display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. That is, in this modification, when new suspension information is generated during the standby period of the return process, the execution of the suspension preview effect for the suspension information is restricted.

Note that the reservation prefetching process for the reservation information is performed in the reservation prefetching process (FIG. 26) of the main controller 162, similarly to other reservation information. Therefore, although the production control device 143 forcibly sets the display mode of the pending image to the normal display mode HMa as described above, the pre-reading results such as fluctuation patterns are in a state obtained by the pending command from the main control device 162. ing.

In step Sa2603, restricted occurrence information is stored in association with the generated pending information. The limited occurrence information indicates that the pending information has occurred during the limited period. The process of step Sa2603 is performed by, for example, storing the above-mentioned restricted occurrence information together with the suspension information such as the fluctuation pattern in the first to fourth areas (FIG. 32) provided in the suspension storage area 344c of the RAM 344. . Therefore, when the shift process of step Sa1704 in the shift command response process (FIG. 40) is executed, the restricted occurrence information is shifted to the lower area side along with the pending information. Thereby, even if the display area of the pending images is shifted by shift processing, it is possible to know which pending images are generated during the limited period. Note that the restricted occurrence information may be stored in a storage area other than the reservation storage area 344c so that it can be recognized which kind of reservation information it is.

After step Sa2603 is executed, in step Sa1405, processing for displaying the hold image on the hold display section 200 of the display screen G is executed. As described above, since the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa in step Sa2602, the pending image of the pending information generated during the restriction period is displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

Note that if a negative determination is made in step Sa2601 (if it is not within the restriction period) and the process reaches step Sa1405 via the setting process for a pending notice in step Sa1403 or the process for first execution of a pending notice in step Sa1404, The pending image is displayed in the display mode set in those processes.

<Processing for switching production mode>
The production mode switching process according to this modification will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52. This process is executed in step Sa1307 of the production setting process (FIG. 30) in the production control device 143, and is executed in place of the production mode switching process of FIG. In FIG. 52, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 42, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the production mode switching process in step Sa1903, a production mode flag corresponding to the switched production mode is set in step Sa1904. In the following step Sa1905, it is determined whether a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. Note that the situation in which the return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d when the switching process in step Sa1903 is executed means that after the production mode switching (previous switching) is performed, the original production This means that the mode has been re-switched. Conversely, a situation in which the return standby flag is not stored means a situation in which the above-mentioned previous switching has been performed (a situation in which re-switching to the original production mode has not yet been performed).

If it is determined in step Sa1905 that the return standby flag is not stored (if the previous switching has been performed), the process advances to step Sa1906, and the steps Sa1906 to Sa1911 are processed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Execute.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa1905 that the return standby flag is stored (if switching is performed again), the process proceeds to step Sa1912, where the return standby flag in the various flag storage areas 344d is deleted. As a result, the restricted state of the pending notice performance is released. Therefore, regarding the hold information generated after the cancellation, the process for setting the hold preview effect (step Sa1403) etc. is executed when the hold information is generated (when the hold command is received).

In step Sa1913, a setting process for advance notice return is executed, and in the following step Sa2701, it is determined whether there is any hold information that occurred during the restriction period. This determination is made based on the restricted occurrence information stored in step Sa2603 of the hold command processing (FIG. 51).

If there is no pending information that occurred during the limited period, the production mode switching process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if there is hold information that occurred during the limited period, a second setting process for hold notice is executed in step Sa2702, and then the production mode switching process is ended.

<Second setting process for pending notice>
The second setting process for pending notice in step Sa2702 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

First, in step Sa2801, hold information that has occurred during the restriction period is grasped. That is, based on the limited occurrence information, it is determined which of the currently existing pending information is the pending information that occurred during the limited period.

After executing the process of step Sa2801, the processes of step Sa2802 and subsequent steps are executed for the identified pending occurrence during the limited period. Note that many of the processes after step Sa2802 are similar to each process in the setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34) of step Sa1403 (FIG. 51), so the explanation of common processes will be simplified. The different processes will be explained in detail.

In Steps Sa2802 to Step Sa2804, the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to to understand the fluctuation pattern in the occurrence and holding during the limited period, and to determine whether or not it is a jackpot win. In step Sa2805, the production mode after switching is grasped. For example, if the reswitching is from production mode B to production mode A, production mode A is grasped as the production mode after switching.

In Steps Sa2806 to Step Sa2808, a hold preview execution lottery table corresponding to the switched performance mode grasped in Step Sa2805 is obtained, and a lottery for execution of the hold preview performance is performed. If the execution lottery is won, in steps Sa2809 to Sa2814, the final display mode of the pending image in the pending preview production is determined, and the process (production scenario) up to displaying the final display mode is determined. or

At that time, if the final display mode lottery table for drawing the final display mode and the production scenario lottery table for drawing the production scenario are different for each production mode, the production mode after switching ascertained in step Sa2805. Obtain the corresponding table and perform a lottery. Although the occurrence hold during the restriction period occurred during the production mode before switching, the conditions set for the production mode after switching are This is done in accordance with the production mode after switching.

In step Sa2815, a pending notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the second setting process for pending notice is ended. After the suspension notice flag is set in this way, the process for first execution of the suspension notice in step Sa1701 in the shift command response process (FIG. 38(a)) and the process for displaying special figure fluctuations (FIG. 41) In the first execution process of the suspension notice in step Sa1807, a process of changing the display mode of the suspension image to a specific display mode is executed. That is, the suspension notice performance regarding the suspension information that occurred before the mode switching will be performed in the performance mode after the switching.

<Special figure fluctuation display processing>
The special figure variation display process according to this modification will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. This process is executed in step Sa1305 of the production setting process (FIG. 30) in the production control device 143, and is executed in place of the special figure fluctuation display process of FIG. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 41, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

This process is provided as a response to the case where the game round of the target pending image (the pending image subject to the display mode restoration process) ends without being reswitched to the original production mode. It is something.

After executing the process for ending the variation in step Sa1809, in step Sa1810, the pending information (pending image that is subject to the display mode restoration process) that triggered the pending notice performance for the current special figure game is displayed. It is determined whether it is the game time. If it is the game round of the suspension information that triggered the suspension notice performance, it is determined in step Sa1811 whether a suspension notice flag or a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If either the suspension notice flag or the return standby flag is stored, the stored flag is erased in step Sa1812. As a result, the above-mentioned return processing is canceled, and the restricted state of the suspended preview performance is released.

In step Sa2901, it is determined whether there is any pending information that occurred during the limit period. If there is suspension information that occurred during the restriction period, the process advances to step Sa2902, and it is determined which suspension information is the suspension information that occurred during the restriction period. Each process of step Sa2901 and step Sa2902 is performed based on the restriction occurrence information stored in step Sa2603 of the pending command process (FIG. 51).

In step Sa2903, a setting process for notice of suspension is executed for the suspension that occurs during the limited period ascertained in step Sa2902. This process is similar to the setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34) in step Sa1403 (FIG. 51), and is a setting process for executing a pending notice effect in accordance with the current presentation mode. Become.

In other words, if the restriction state is lifted without switching back to the original production mode, the execution lottery for the suspended notice production, the lottery for the final display mode, etc. will be changed to the production mode you are staying in at that time. Apply the conditions set for. For example, when switching from production mode A to production mode B is performed as the previous switching, the conditions set for production mode B are applied to perform a lottery for execution of the pending notice production, etc. After execution of step Sa2903 or when a negative determination is made in step Sa2902 (when there is no pending information that occurred during the restriction period), the special figure fluctuation display process is ended.

<About the flow of the display mode of the pending image corresponding to the pending occurrence during the restriction period>
The flow of the display mode of the suspension image corresponding to the occurrence suspension during the restriction period will be described with reference to FIG. 55.

When the fourth hold information of the first special figure is generated in the situation where production mode A is set, the main control device 162 performs a hold pre-reading process (step Sa305), and the performance control device 143 performs hold preview processing. Setting processing (step Sa1403) is performed. As a result, when it is decided to execute a hold notice effect in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the hold image HA whose display mode is the green display mode HMc is is displayed in the fourth unit pending display area Ga4 of the first pending display area Ga.

When the player performs a mode switching operation in the game round in which the suspension information corresponding to the suspension image HA is acquired, the production mode is switched from production mode A to production mode B. At this time, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the display mode of the pending image HA is changed from the green display mode HMc to the normal display mode HMa.

It is assumed that two new pieces of suspension information are generated while the production mode is maintained at production mode B until the suspension image HA is shifted to the second unit suspension display area Ga2. For these newly generated hold information, the setting process for hold notice by the effect control device 143 is not performed, and the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, since the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted, the display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the newly generated hold information is changed to the normal display mode, as shown in FIG. 55(c). HMa is displayed in the third unit reservation display area Ga3 and the fourth unit reservation display area Ga4, respectively.

The reservation prefetching process performed by the main controller 162 on the reservation information of the reservation images HB1 and HB2 is performed at the acquisition timing of the reservation information, similarly to other reservation information. The result of pre-reading is notified to the production control device 143 through the reservation command, so although the production control device 143 is in a state where it does not perform the setting process for the reservation notice, the pre-reading result regarding the reservation information is acquired. It is in.

When the mode switching operation is performed again in the next game and the production mode is switched from production mode B to production mode A, the production control device 143 displays the holding images HB1 and HB2 displayed in the normal display mode HMa. The second setting process for pending notice (step Sa2702) is executed as the target. The second setting process for the suspension notice performs a lottery for execution of the suspension notice performance, a lottery for the final display mode, a lottery for the production scenario, etc., based on the pre-reading result notified from the main control device 162 at the timing of acquisition of the suspension information. It is something. When performing those lottery drawings, a lottery table corresponding to production mode A, which is the production mode after switching, is used. In other words, although the hold information of the hold images HB1 and HB2 was acquired in the situation of presentation mode B, the lottery for the hold notice effect for them is based on the effect that is the mode at the time of execution of the hold notice effect. The lottery conditions set for mode A are applied.

As a result of the above lottery, for example, if the result is that the hold preview effect is not executed for the hold image HB1, and that the hold preview effect is executed for the hold image HB2 with the display mode set to the blue display mode HMb, As shown in FIG. 55(d), the display mode of the pending image HB1 is maintained in the normal display mode HMa, and the display mode of the pending image HB2 is changed to the blue display mode HMb.

In addition, regarding the hold image HA corresponding to the hold information acquired in the effect mode A before shifting to the effect mode B, the setting process for returning to the notice by the effect control device 143 (step Sa1913), the second hold notice By performing the execution process (step Sa1702), the display mode is changed to the green display mode HMc, which is the original display mode.

Furthermore, unlike the case where the switching to production mode A is performed as described above, after the state shown in FIG. When the game round of the last pending information acquired in the previous production mode A ends, the restricted state ends with the end of the game round. In this case, at the end timing of the game round, the second setting process for pending notice targeting the pending images HB1 and HB2 is executed. At this time, various types of lottery such as execution lottery for pending preview performance, lottery for final display mode, lottery for performance scenario, etc. are performed using a lottery table corresponding to performance mode B. That is, different lottery conditions from those in the case of FIG. 55(d) are applied.

As a result of the above-mentioned lottery, for example, if it is determined that for the hold image HB1, the hold preview effect is executed with the display mode being the blue display mode HMb, but for the hold image HB2, the hold preview effect is not executed, the As shown in 55(e), the display mode of the pending image HB1 is changed to the blue display mode HMb, and the display mode of the pending image HB1 is maintained in the normal display mode HMa.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

Regarding the holding images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the holding information acquired during the restricted state in which the execution of the held preview effect is restricted, the display mode after the restricted state ends is determined by the holding look-ahead processing executed during the restricted state. The configuration was such that settings were made based on the results.

In this modification, if the presentation mode is switched during execution of the pending notice presentation, execution of the pending notice presentation is restricted until switching to the original presentation mode is performed again. If new pending information is acquired during the restricted state, assuming that such pending information is not changed to a specific display mode, the player's expectations regarding the pending information acquired during the restricted state will be reduced. There is a concern that it will not be possible to evoke

In this regard, according to the present configuration, the display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the hold information acquired during the limit state can be changed to a specific display mode after the limit state ends. It is possible to arouse the player's sense of expectation regarding the pending information acquired in the above. At that time, since the change to a specific display mode after the restricted state (execution of a pending notice effect) is performed based on the result of the pending pre-reading process executed during the restricted state, the pending pre-reading is performed in the same way as when not in the restricted state. can be processed. In other words, since there is no need to change the configuration of the suspension prefetching process, it is possible to execute a suspension notice performance triggered by suspension information acquired during the restriction state after the restriction state, while suppressing the complexity of the configuration. It becomes possible.

The configuration is such that the reservation prefetching process for the acquired reservation information is performed in accordance with the acquisition timing of the reservation information, regardless of whether it is in a restricted state or not.

In this case, it is possible to perform the pending prefetching process in accordance with the acquisition timing of the pending information in both the restricted state and the non-restricted state, so the pending prefetching process can be distinguished between the former case and the latter case. There's no need to. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a suspension notice effect triggered by suspension information acquired during the restriction state after the restriction state, while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated.

The setting of the display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 after the restriction state (setting of the hold preview effect) is configured to be executed at the end of the restriction state.

For example, when setting the display mode after the restriction state based on the result of the pending prefetch process executed during the restriction state, the setting may not be executed during the restriction state. However, if the game times of the pending images HB1 and HB2 with the display mode set are executed during the restricted state, the display period of the pending images will end without the display mode settings being reflected, and the settings will be changed. There is a risk of it being wasted. In this regard, in this configuration, since the display mode is set at the end of the restricted state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such waste and perform efficient processing.

When the hold information is acquired during the restricted state, the restriction occurrence information indicating that the hold information was acquired during the restricted state is stored in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344.

According to the above configuration, based on the restriction occurrence information stored in the reservation storage area 344c of the RAM 344, it can be determined after the restriction state that the reservation information was acquired during the restriction state. Therefore, after the restricted state ends, even if the held information acquired before entering the restricted state and the held information acquired during the restricted state are mixed, the held information acquired during the restricted state can be easily can be specified. As a result, when setting the display mode of each pending image after a restricted state, it is possible to distinguish between held information acquired during a restricted state and other held information, and to display only held information acquired during a restricted state. It becomes possible to process the target.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, we distinguish between switching from a production mode with a high frequency of pending notice production (production mode A) to a production mode with a low occurrence frequency (production mode B), and switching from a low production mode to a high production mode. The display mode of the pending image is configured to be restored. This modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. Note that in these figures, the same components as those in the first embodiment and each modification are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, the production mode is switched in a situation where there is a pending image in a specific display mode, and after the pending image is changed to the normal display mode HMa, the display mode is switched back to the original production mode. When the switching is performed, the display mode is restored to the pending image, but in this modification, even if the display mode is not switched back to the original mode, the pending image is The display mode is configured to perform a process of restoring the display mode for the image. By the way, the frequency of occurrence of the pending notice performance in production mode A (the execution probability of the pending notice production when the look-ahead result is incorrect) is higher than that in production mode B. In other words, the frequency of occurrence of the pending notice production in production mode A is higher than that in production mode B. On the other hand, the expectation level of jackpot in production mode A is lower than that in production mode B, which is the same as in the first embodiment.

<Processing for switching production mode>
The production mode switching process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56. This process is executed in step Sa1307 of the production setting process (FIG. 30) in the production control device 143, and is executed in place of the production mode switching process of FIG. In FIG. 56, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 42, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the production mode switching process in step Sa1903, the production mode flag corresponding to the switched production mode is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344 in step Sa1904. The production mode flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp the production mode after switching before switching the production mode, and the current production mode after switching the production mode.

In step Sa3101, it is determined whether or not a pending notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas. The pending notice flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the pending notice performance should be executed or that the pending notice performance is being executed.

If the pending notice flag is not stored, the production mode switching process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if a pending notice flag is stored, the process advances to step Sa3102 and the pending notice flag is deleted. As a result, if a pending notice performance was being executed before the mode switch, the continuation of the currently running pending notice performance is canceled, and if the pending notice performance was in a standby state, the standby of the pending notice performance ( execution reservation) is canceled.

In step Sa3103, it is determined whether there is a pending image displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, among the holding images displayed in each holding display area Ga, Gb, in any one of the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, or the rainbow color display mode HMe. Determine whether the displayed item exists. This determination is made with reference to information about each area stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. If there is no pending image displayed in the specific display mode, the production mode switching process is immediately terminated.

If there is a pending image displayed in the specific display mode, the process advances to step Sa3104, and it is determined whether the current mode switching is from production mode A to production mode B. In other words, whether or not the switching is from a performance mode with a high occurrence frequency of pending preview performances to a performance mode with a low occurrence frequency (in other words, a switch from a performance mode with a low jackpot expectation level of pending preview performances to a high side. (Whether or not it is switching to production mode.) In the case of switching to production mode B, in step Sa3105, the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the holding image displayed in the specific display mode is grasped.

In step Sa3106, a return determination is made based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa3105 and the return determination table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The determination for return is to determine whether or not it is possible to return the hold image displayed in the specific display mode to the specific display mode after switching the production mode.

As shown in FIG. 57, the upper limit of the display mode is determined in the return determination table in correspondence with each variation pattern. For example, for variation pattern 5H corresponding to SPSP reach A failure, the green display mode is set. Returns (changes) to HMc are allowed. When executing a suspended notice performance while staying in production mode B, the upper limit display mode corresponding to fluctuation pattern 5H is the red display mode HMd, but the upper limit display mode in the return determination table is different from that. It is limited to the lower green display mode HMc. This also applies to other deviation handling variation patterns such as variation pattern 3H and variation pattern 4H. Incidentally, in the case of each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot, changes up to the rainbow color display mode HMe are allowed in any of variation patterns 1A to 5A. Note that the return determination table is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 57, and may have other configurations, such as having different upper limit display modes for each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot.

In step Sa3106, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa3105 is specified with reference to the return determination table, and the display mode in which the current display mode of the target pending image is less than or equal to the specified upper limit display mode Determine whether or not. As a result, if the current display mode is less than or equal to the upper limit display mode, the display mode is allowed to return; otherwise, the display mode is not allowed to return.

In step Sa3107, it is determined whether the result of the return determination in step Sa3106 allows the display mode to be restored. If the return is not permitted, the process advances to step Sa3108, and processing for canceling the display of the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode is executed for the pending image displayed in the specific display mode. That is, it is set so that the hold image displayed in the specific display mode is switched to the normal display mode HMa with the switching of the production mode. In addition, in the cancellation process of step Sa3108, the display mode information stored in the display mode storage area 344e and the performance scenario data set in step Sa1513 of the pending notice setting process (FIG. 34) are also deleted. Execute. After executing step Sa3108, the production mode switching process ends.

If the above step Sa3107 makes an affirmative determination (if the restoration of the display mode is permitted), then in step Sa3109, information on the display mode of each pending image stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344 is restored to the RAM 344. storage area 344f. In step Sa3110, similar to step Sa3108 above, processing for canceling the display in the specific display mode is executed for the pending image displayed in the specific display mode.

In step Sa3111, a setting process for return to advance notice is executed, and thereafter, the production mode switching process is ended. The setting process for returning with advance notice in step Sa3111 is similar to the setting process for returning with advance notice (FIG. 43) in step Sa1913 of the production mode switching process (FIG. 42) according to the first embodiment. In the setting process for returning to advance notice, after switching to production mode B, at what timing should the display mode of the hold image be returned (changed), and how should it be returned (should it be returned with one change, or Perform setting processing such as whether to restore the system by making gradual changes.

When the setting process for returning the notice is performed as described above, the process for second execution of the pending notice (FIG. 44) in step Sa1702 of the shift command response process (FIG. 40(a)) and the special figure fluctuation In the third execution process (FIG. 45) of the pending notice in step Sa1808 of the display process (FIG. 41), the display mode of the target pending image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. At this time, in the second execution process of the pending notice, processing is executed to return the display mode of the target pending image to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before switching to production mode B).

In addition, in the third execution process of the pending notice, the current display mode of the target pending image (display mode restored by the restoration process) and the fluctuation pattern of the target pending image in the game round of the target pending image is compared with the corresponding upper limit display mode, and it is determined whether it is possible to change (promote) to a higher display mode. If such a change is possible, the display mode is promoted through promotion determination and promotion lottery.

At this time, the upper limit display mode referred to is the one set for production mode B (according to the conditions of the pending notice production in production mode B). Therefore, even if the display mode that can be restored is limited to the lower upper limit display mode determined by the return determination table at the time of returning the display mode by switching to production mode B, ultimately the production mode The display mode of the target pending image can be changed within the range of the upper limit display mode suitable for B.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step Sa3104 (in the case of switching from production mode B to production mode A), the processing in steps Sa3105 to Sa3107 is skipped and the process proceeds to step Sa3109. In other words, when switching from presentation mode B, which has a low occurrence frequency of pending notice presentations, to presentation mode A, which has a high occurrence frequency, the display mode in presentation mode B is reflected as is in presentation mode A after the mode switch. It is configured.

<About the flow of the display mode of the hold image when the production mode is switched>
The flow of the display mode of the hold image when the production mode is switched will be described with reference to FIG. 58. Here, a case where the performance mode A is switched to the performance mode B will be described. As already explained, performance mode A is a mode in which the frequency of occurrence of pending preview performances is relatively high, and performance mode B is a mode in which the frequency of occurrence of pending preview performances is relatively low.

When the third hold information (hold image HW) of the first special figure is generated in the production mode A, the main controller 162 executes hold pre-read processing (step Sa305) for the generated hold information. Execute. Here, it is assumed that as a result, a result is read in advance in which the validity judgment is wrong and the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 4H (SP reach B is off).

In addition, the effect control device 143 executes a setting process for a pending notice (step Sa1403) based on the pre-read result of the main control device 162, and performs a lottery for execution of a pending notice effect regarding the pending image HW, and selects the final display mode. Lotteries, production scenario drawings, etc. will be held. As a result of those lottery results, the green display mode HMc is selected as the final display mode, and the scenario in which the display is initially displayed in the blue display mode HMb and changes to the green display mode HMc at the first shift timing is selected as the production scenario. shall be. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58(a1), the hold image HW in the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3 of the first hold display area Ga.

Thereafter, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the effect operation section 36 with the display mode of the pending image HW set to the blue display mode HMb, the effect is changed as shown in FIG. 58(a2). At the same time as the mode is switched from production mode A to production mode B, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa.

Further, when switching to the production mode B, the production control device 143 performs a return determination as to whether or not to return the display mode of the pending image HW to a specific display mode (step Sa3106). In the determination for return, the fluctuation pattern of the hold image HW is specified, and the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is grasped based on the return determination table (FIG. 57), and the hold image HW before switching to presentation mode B is determined. It is determined whether the display mode of the image HW is equal to or less than the grasped upper limit display mode.

Here, the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 4H, which is the variation pattern of the pending image HW, is the blue display mode HMb, and the display mode of the pending image HW before switching to the production mode B is the blue display mode HMb. , the display mode of the pending image HW before switching to production mode B becomes a mode below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, return to the specific display mode is allowed, and a return scenario is set in a setting process for advance notice return (step Sa3111).

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, the display position of the hold image HW changes from the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second unit hold display area Ga3, as shown in FIG. When shifted to the unit pending display area Ga2, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

After that, when the display position of the pending image HW set in the blue display mode HMb is shifted to the execution display area D and the game round of the pending image HW is started, the production control device 143 performs the third execution of the pending notice. process (step Sa1808) to determine promotion to a higher display mode. Promotion determination in this case is performed by applying the determination conditions of production mode B.

For example, if the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 4H in production mode B is set to blue display mode HMb, which is lower than that in production mode A, promotion of the hold image HW is not permitted, and the hold image HW is not allowed to be promoted. The display mode of the image HW is maintained in the blue display mode HMb. In addition, if the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 4H in production mode B is set to green display mode HMc, as in production mode A, promotion is allowed and the predetermined number in the game round of the reservation image HW is At the hold change point, the display mode of the hold image HW is promoted to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a case will be described in which the production mode is switched in a situation where the display mode of the pending image HW is set to the green display mode HMc in the production mode A.

As shown in FIG. 58(a1), the pending image HW of the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit pending display area Ga3, and the display position of the pending image HW is changed to the third unit pending display area Ga3 without switching the production mode. It is assumed that the display mode of the pending image HW is shifted to the 2-unit pending display area Ga2 and changed from the blue display mode HMb to the green display mode HMc, as shown in FIG. 58(b1).

In this state, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the production operation unit 36, the production mode is switched from production mode A to production mode B, and the pending image The display mode of HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa.

At this time, the production control device 143 makes a determination for return, but the display mode of the pending image HW before switching to production mode B becomes a display mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, returning to the specific display mode is not permitted. As a result, the display mode of the pending image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa until it is shifted to the execution display area D.

Thereafter, when the display position of the pending image HW set to the normal display mode HMa is shifted to the execution display area D and the game round of the pending image HW is started, the production control device 143 performs the third execution of the pending notice. Execute the processing to determine promotion to a higher display mode. For example, if the upper limit display mode of variation pattern 4H in production mode B is set to blue display mode HMb, promotion to blue display mode HMb is allowed, and if set to green display mode HMc, , promotion to green display mode HMc is permitted. Note that FIG. 58(b3) shows a case where the display mode of the pending image HW is promoted to the blue display mode HMb.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

If the presentation mode is switched in a situation where the holding image is in a specific display mode (a situation where a holding notice presentation is being executed), the display mode of the target holding image HW in the switching presentation mode will be changed to the display mode before switching. The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the display mode is the same as the display mode in the production mode.

In this modification, mode switching is performed between performance mode A and performance mode B, so that the player's mood is changed during the game, and it is possible to suppress boredom with the game. At this time, performance mode B is set as a performance mode in which the pending notice performance is less likely to be executed than performance mode A. In such a configuration, switching the production mode changes the production characteristics related to the expectation of jackpot, so compared to cases where the change is limited to only the appearance by changing the background image or character image, the difference between the production modes is more noticeable in the game. can make a strong impression on people.

However, on the other hand, if the conditions for switching from production mode A to production mode B are satisfied in a situation where the pending image is in a specific display mode, the display mode of the target pending image HW is maintained and the production mode is changed. When a switch is made, there is a concern that only the corresponding expectation level will change even though the display mode remains unchanged. For example, even if the specific display mode is the same green display mode HMc, the expectation level in production mode B is higher than that in production mode A, so if the display mode of the target pending image HW is set to the green display mode HMc. If the player switches from production mode A to production mode B until then, if the player understands the expectation level of the green display mode HMC based on the expectation level in production mode B after the mode switch, the game that will actually be played in the game round. There is a risk that it will be associated with a higher level of expectation than a repeat performance (reach performance, etc.).

In this regard, in this configuration, when the presentation mode is switched in a situation where the holding image is set to a specific display mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW is changed to the same mode as the display mode in the presentation mode before switching. Determine whether or not to do so. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconsistency in expectations, and it is possible to suitably display the pending image after transition to production mode B.

The display mode of the target holding image HW at the time of transition to production mode B is compared with the upper limit display mode set corresponding to production mode B, and the display mode of the target holding image HW is changed to the mode based on the result. The configuration is such that it is determined whether the display mode is the same as the display mode before switching.

In the above configuration, by comparing the display mode at the time of transition to production mode B and the upper limit display mode set corresponding to production mode B, it is determined whether the display mode can be the same as the display mode in production mode A. be done. As a result, it is possible to decide whether or not each aspect (blue display mode HMb, etc.) should be the same in production mode B based on the corresponding expectation level, and display the pending image after transitioning to production mode B. This makes it possible to suitably perform the following.

In the above case, a plurality of upper limit display modes in production mode B are set corresponding to each variation pattern, and among them, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern read in advance for the target holding image HW is applied. The configuration was configured to perform judgment. As a result, based on the pre-reading result of the target pending image HW, that is, the win/fail result actually announced in the game round of the target pending image HW and the game round effect (reach effect, etc.) performed in the relevant game round. It is possible to decide whether to use the same mode or not.

When the display mode of the target holding image HW in production mode B is the same as the display mode in production mode A before mode switching, the configuration changes from the normal display mode HMa of the target holding image HW to the same mode. And so.

In the above configuration, when the display mode of the target pending image HW is the same as before the mode switching, it is possible to change the display mode from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. With this configuration, the display mode of the target holding image HW can be changed from production mode A to production mode B regardless of whether the display format is the same as before the mode switching or not. Accordingly, a configuration can be adopted in which the display mode is switched to the normal display mode HMa. This makes it possible to reduce unnaturalness when the specific display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa due to a determination that the display mode is not the same. In addition, by having a configuration in which the display mode changes to the specific display mode after becoming the normal display mode HMa, even if it is determined that the same mode is not used, the hold that is set to the normal display mode HMa after transitioning to production mode B. It is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the reserved image (reserved information) will be changed to a specific display mode, and it is possible to maintain the expectation for the reserved image (reserved information).

In the case of switching from production mode B to production mode A, the display mode of the target holding image in production mode A after mode switching is the same as the display format in production mode A before mode switching, without performing the above judgment. The configuration is as follows.

In the above configuration, when the mode is switched from the side where the level of expectation for the pending notice performance is high to the side where the level of expectation is low, it is not determined whether or not the same mode is to be used. As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuation of the suspension notice performance (maintenance of a specific display mode of the suspension image) from being excessively restricted, and it is also possible to reduce the processing load.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment and each modification described above, the target is the display mode of the hold image before and after switching the production mode, but in this modification, the target is the display format of the hold image before and after the opening/closing execution mode. shall be. This modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 59 to 67. Note that in these figures, the same components as those in the first embodiment and each modification are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modification, there is a variable display time table when the mode is high probability mode and high frequency support mode (high certainty gaming state), and a variable display time table when the mode is low probability mode and high frequency support mode (time saving gaming state). is set separately from the variable display time table (FIG. 14) for the low probability mode and low frequency support mode (normal gaming state).

In the variable display time table for the high probability gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), jackpots and misses are set respectively. In the fluctuation display time table for jackpot, a fluctuation pattern 11A corresponding to SPSP reach-A and a fluctuation pattern 12A corresponding to SPSP reach-B are set in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

In addition, in the fluctuation display time table for misses, there is a variation pattern 11H corresponding to a complete miss, a variation pattern 12H corresponding to a miss of SPSP reach A, and a variation pattern 12H corresponding to a miss of SPSP reach B, corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS. A variation pattern 13H is set. When the value of the variation type counter CS is within the range of 0 to 79, either complete miss (variation pattern 1H) or normal reach miss (variation pattern 2H) corresponds in the normal gaming state (Fig. 14(b)) ), in the high-precision gaming state, only the complete loss (variation pattern 11H) corresponds (FIG. 59(b)). In other words, even if the variable type counter CS has the same value, different game performances can be performed in the normal gaming state and the high certainty gaming state.

In the variable display time table for the time saving game state, as shown in FIGS. 59(c) and 59(d), jackpots and misses are set respectively. In the fluctuation display time table for the jackpot, in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS, there is a fluctuation pattern 21A corresponding to SP reach A, a fluctuation pattern 22A corresponding to SP reach B, and a fluctuation pattern 22A corresponding to SP SP reach A. A fluctuation pattern 23A corresponding to SPSP reach B and a fluctuation pattern 24A corresponding to SPSP reach B are set.

In addition, in the variation display time table for misses, there is a variation pattern 21H that corresponds to a complete miss, a variation pattern 22H that corresponds to a miss of SP reach A, and a variation pattern 22H that corresponds to a miss of SP reach B, corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS. A fluctuation pattern 23H that corresponds to the SPSP reach A failure, a fluctuation pattern 24H that corresponds to the SPSP reach B failure, and a fluctuation pattern 25H that corresponds to the SPSP reach B failure are set. Also in the variable display time table for the time-saving gaming state, when compared with the same value of the variable type counter CS, different game times can be performed in the normal gaming state and the high-precision gaming state. In the variable display time table for misses corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, the percentage of complete misses is lower than in other gaming states, but this is because by increasing the frequency of occurrence of reach effects, This is to prevent the time-saving gaming state from ending without being completed.

Note that the correspondence between the number of types of fluctuation patterns and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS in each fluctuation display time table shown in FIG. Other modes may be used as long as they are set.

<Setting process for pending notice>
The setting process for pending notice according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 60. This process is executed when the production control device 143 receives a hold command from the main control device 162. This process is executed in step Sa1403 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 31), and is executed in place of the pending notice setting process in FIG. In FIG. 60, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 34, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sa1501, fluctuation pattern information and the like regarding the current hold information is grasped based on the hold information stored in step Sa1401 of the hold command handling process (FIG. 31). In step Sa1502, it is determined whether the current hold information corresponds to a jackpot based on the fluctuation pattern information etc. grasped in step Sa1501.

If the pending information does not correspond to a jackpot, that is, if the pending information corresponds to a loss, the process proceeds to step Sa3301, and the fluctuation pattern of the pending information is variable pattern 1H (variation pattern corresponding to a complete loss in the normal gaming state). , a fluctuation pattern 11H (a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete loss in a high-precision gaming state), or a fluctuation pattern 21H (a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete loss in a time-saving gaming state). If a negative determination is made in step Sa3301 (if none of the fluctuation patterns 1H, 11H, or 21H) or an affirmative determination is made in step Sa1502 (if the pending information corresponds to a jackpot), step Sa3302 is performed. Understand the current gaming status. Specifically, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, a high probability gaming state, or a time saving gaming state.

In step Sa3303, the corresponding pending notice execution lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. A plurality of pending notice execution lottery tables are set in correspondence with the presence or absence of a jackpot and the gaming state. For example, a pending preview execution lottery table corresponding to a case where the current pending information is a jackpot is set to have a higher probability of winning than a pending preview execution lottery table corresponding to a case where the current pending information is a jackpot. In addition, in the reservation notice execution lottery table that corresponds to the high-precision gaming state and corresponds to the case where the current reservation information is incorrect, in order to suppress the occurrence of false effects in the high-precision gaming state, the normal gaming state and the time-saving game The probability of winning is set lower than that of the reservation notice execution lottery table that corresponds to the state and corresponds to the case where the current reservation information is out of order.

Note that it is not necessarily necessary to make the execution probabilities of the pending preview performance different depending on the gaming state, and it is also possible to have a configuration in which the execution probability of the pending preview performance is the same in the above three states or two of them.

In step Sa1506, based on the pending notice execution lottery table obtained in step Sa3303 and the lottery counter (random value) obtained from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, an execution lottery is determined as to whether or not to execute the pending notice performance. I do. In step Sa1507, it is determined whether the lottery result in step Sa1506 is a winning result. If the lottery result is an actual win, the process advances to step Sa1508 and the corresponding number of reservations is determined.

In step Sa3304, the final display mode lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state is acquired from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. In the final display mode lottery table, the range of selectable final display modes and the selection probability of each display mode are set in correspondence with each variation pattern. In this modification, since different variation patterns are set depending on the gaming state, the final display mode lottery table is also set separately corresponding to each gaming state.

FIG. 61 shows a jackpot table and a losing table as examples of final display mode lottery tables in a high-precision gaming state. Further, FIG. 62 shows a jackpot table and a loss table as examples of final display mode lottery tables in the time-saving gaming state.

In step Sa1510, based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa1501, the final display mode lottery table acquired in step Sa3304, and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, the current hold The final display mode in the preview performance is selected by lottery. In step Sa1511, the performance scenario lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. In step Sa1512, the number of reservations grasped in step Sa1508, the final display mode determined in step Sa1510, the performance scenario lottery table acquired in step Sa1511, and the lottery counter (random number value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344. ), the performance scenario for this pending preview performance will be drawn by lottery.

At step Sa1513, performance scenario data is set so that the performance scenario selected at step Sa1512 is executed. In step Sa1514, a pending notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and thereafter, the setting process for pending notice is ended. The suspension notice flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the suspension notice performance should be executed.

When the setting process for pending notice is performed as described above, based on the setting result in step Sa1513, step Sa1404 of the pending command corresponding process (FIG. 31) or step Sa1701 of the shift command corresponding process (FIG. 40) , In the first execution process (FIG. 38) of the reservation notice in step Sa1807 of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41), the display mode of the target reservation image is changed.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step Sa3301 (if the variation pattern of the pending information is a variation pattern of a completely lost pair), the process proceeds to step Sa1515, and the display mode of the pending image is set to the normal display mode HMa. Thereafter, the setting process for pending notice is ended.

<Processing for open/close execution mode>
The opening/closing execution mode processing according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 63. This process is executed in step Sa1306 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30).

First, in step Sa3401, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. If the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, it is determined in step Sa3402 whether an opening command (step Sa909 in FIG. 25) has been received from the main controller 162, that is, whether it is the timing to start the opening/closing execution mode. judge. If the opening command has not been received, the process for the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

If an opening command has been received, the process advances to step Sa3403 to execute opening processing. In the opening process, a command to be sent to the display control device 350 is set so that a predetermined opening effect is executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, etc.

In step Sa3404, it is determined whether the number of pending items (total number of special 1 pending and special 2 pending) is 0, that is, whether there is a pending. If the number of pending items is 0 (if there is no pending item), the opening/closing execution mode processing is immediately terminated.

If the number of reservations is not 0 and there are reservations, the process advances to step Sa3405, and it is determined whether a reservation notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. If a suspension notice flag is stored, the suspension notice flag is erased in step Sa3406. As a result, if a pending notice performance is being executed before the start of the opening/closing execution mode, the continuation of the currently running pending notice performance will be canceled, and if the pending notice performance is in a standby state, the pending notice performance will be canceled. The standby (execution reservation) for is canceled.

In step Sa3407, it is determined whether there is a pending image displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, among the holding images displayed in each holding display area Ga, Gb, in any one of the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, or the rainbow color display mode HMe. Determine whether the displayed item exists. This determination is made with reference to the information of each area stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344.

If there is a pending image displayed in the specific display mode, the process advances to step Sa3408, and information indicating in which mode the pending image displayed in the specific display mode is displayed is stored in the RAM 344 for recovery purposes. It is stored in area 344f. In the following step Sa3409, information indicating the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the RAM 344. For example, if the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the normal gaming state, information corresponding to the normal gaming state is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 344. Note that this information is stored in a separate storage area from the state flag indicating the current gaming state in order to be distinguished from the state flag.

In step Sa3410, a return standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d. The return standby flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that the MPU 342 is waiting for a return process to return the display mode of the pending image to the original specific display mode. In the following step Sa3411, processing for erasing the pending image from the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is executed. That is, in this modification, the hold image displayed on the hold display section 200 is configured to be erased with the start of the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step Sa3411, the process for opening/closing execution mode ends.

Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step Sa3405 (if the pending notice flag is not stored) or if a negative determination is made in step Sa3407 (if there is no pending image in a specific display mode), the process proceeds to step Sa3411, and the pending notice flag is not stored. Executes image deletion processing. That is, even when the hold preview effect is not being executed, the hold image on the hold display section 200 is erased when the opening/closing execution mode is started.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa3401 (in the opening/closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sa3412, and it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ending effect. If the elapsed time has not elapsed, the process for opening/closing execution mode is executed in step Sa3413, and then the process for opening/closing execution mode is ended. In the opening/closing execution mode process, a command to be sent to the display control device 350 is set so that a predetermined round effect, winning effect, ending effect, etc. are executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa3412 (if a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the ending effect), the process proceeds to step Sa3414, where it is determined whether a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. If the return standby flag is not stored, the opening/closing execution mode processing is immediately terminated.

If the return standby flag is stored, the process advances to step Sa3415, and processing for erasing the return standby flag is executed. Here, the situation in which an affirmative determination is made in step Sa3414 means that the opening/closing execution mode is performed while the hold preview effect is being executed, and the display of the hold image is erased. In this case, the process advances to step Sa3416, and a setting process for returning to advance notice is executed to return the display mode of the pending image to the specific display mode. Details of this processing will be described later.

After executing step Sa3416, settings are made in step Sa3417 to display the pending image in the normal display mode HMa. That is, when returning the display mode of the pending image to the specific display mode, immediately after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the display mode of the pending image is resumed as the normal display mode HMa. After executing step Sa3417, the opening/closing execution mode process ends.

If the above step Sa3414 makes a negative determination (if the return standby flag is not stored), proceed to step Sa3418, and determine whether the number of pending items (total number of special 1 pending and special 2 pending) is 0. do. If the number of pending items is 0 and there is no pending item, the opening/closing execution mode processing is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the number of pending items is not 0 and there are pending items, in step Sa3417, the pending images for those pending items are displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

<Setting process for advance notice recovery>
The setting process for advance notice return in step Sa3416 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 64.

First, in step Sa3501, the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is grasped. This understanding is performed based on the information stored in step Sa3409 (FIG. 63). In step Sa3502, the jackpot type of the jackpot that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is grasped. This understanding is performed based on the hold information obtained by analyzing the fluctuation start command.

In step Sa3503, the display mode is restored based on the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode ascertained in step Sa3501, the jackpot type ascertained in step Sa3502, and the return determination table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. Make a judgment regarding the use of the data. The determination for return is to determine whether or not to return the pending image, which was set to a specific display mode in the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode, to the original display mode in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the return determination table, whether the display mode is allowed to return or not depending on the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the jackpot type of the jackpot that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is a time saving gaming state and the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, or the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is a high certainty gaming state and the jackpot type is a certain variable jackpot. If the gaming state is the same before and after the opening/closing execution mode, as in some cases, the display mode of the pending image is allowed to return. On the other hand, if the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is a time-saving gaming state and the jackpot type is a variable jackpot, or if the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is a high-probability gaming state and the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, When the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is a normal gaming state and the jackpot type is a time-saving gaming state, when the gaming status is different before and after the opening/closing execution mode, the return of the display mode is regulated.

However, if the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the normal gaming state and the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot, it is determined whether or not to return by referring to the pre-reading result of the target pending image. Specifically, if the pre-reading result of the target pending image is a result other than a normal jackpot, the above display mode is regulated, while if the pre-reading result of the target pending image is a normal jackpot, the above display mode is regulated. allow the return of This is to prevent the high-certainty gaming state from ending without the player being able to fully enjoy the game in the high-certainty gaming state.

In other words, if the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the normal gaming state and the jackpot type is a variable jackpot, the game from the first special figure (left-handed game state) to the second special figure with the opening/closing execution mode in between. The game mode switches to a game (right-handed game state), but at that time, there is usually a jackpot in the hold of the first special symbol, and when the hold is exhausted, it is difficult to shift to the high-precision game state. Even if it is possible, the state will end prematurely. Therefore, if there is such a possibility, the display mode of the first special hold image is returned to the specific display mode to alert the player, and the second operating port 63 (starting port for the second special symbol) is ).

In addition, in this modification, when the pre-reading result of the target pending image is a probability-variable jackpot, the above-mentioned display mode is restricted from returning, but it may be configured to allow this.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for advance notice return (FIG. 64), after execution of step Sa3503, it is determined in step Sa3504 whether or not the result of the determination process in step Sa3503 allows the return of the display mode. If the return is not permitted, the setting process for return with advance notice is immediately terminated. That is, the display mode of the target pending image after the opening/closing execution mode remains the normal display mode HMa.

If the return is permitted, in step Sa3505, the return area 344f of the RAM 344 is referred to and the display mode of the target pending image before the opening/closing execution mode is grasped. After executing step Sa3505, processes from step Sa3506 to step Sa3510 are executed.

These processes are similar to steps Sa2103 to Step Sa2107 in FIG. 43, and the display mode of the target pending image is changed back to the original display at any timing in accordance with the number of pending images before the target pending image. This is for setting whether to return to the mode. That is, in step Sa3506, the number of pending images before the target pending image is determined, and if the determined number of pending images is 1 or more, in step Sa3508, a return scenario for changing the display mode determined in step Sa3505 is determined. will be drawn by lottery. In step Sa3509, return scenario data is set so that the selected return scenario is executed, and in step Sa3510, a preview return flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. The advance notice return flag is used by the MPU 342 to understand that processing for restoring the display mode of the pending image should be executed.

When the setting process for returning the notice is performed as described above, the process for second execution of the pending notice (FIG. 44) in step Sa1702 of the shift command response process (FIG. 40(a)) and the special figure fluctuation In the third execution process (FIG. 45) of the pending notice in step Sa1808 of the display process (FIG. 41), the display mode of the target pending image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. At this time, in the second execution process of the pending notice, processing is executed to return the display mode of the target pending image to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode).

In addition, in the third execution process of the pending notice, the current display mode of the target pending image (display mode restored by the restoration process) and the fluctuation pattern of the target pending image in the game round of the target pending image is compared with the corresponding upper limit display mode, and it is determined whether it is possible to change (promote) to a higher display mode. If such a change is possible, the display mode is promoted through promotion determination and promotion lottery.

<About the display mode of the hold image before and after opening/closing execution mode>
The display mode of the hold image before and after the opening/closing execution mode will be described. Here, a jackpot usually occurs in a situation where the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the time-saving gaming state, a case where the game state changes to the time-saving gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, and a situation where the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the time-saving gaming state. An example will be explained in which a variable probability jackpot occurs and a transition to a variable probability gaming state occurs after the opening/closing execution mode.

First, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 66 in which a normal jackpot occurs in a situation where the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the time-saving gaming state and the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode.

When the third reservation information of the second special symbol occurs in the time-saving gaming state, the main control device 162 performs reservation advance reading processing (step Sa305), and the production control device 143 performs reservation advance notice processing. Setting processing (step Sa1403) is performed. As a result, when it is decided to execute a hold notice performance in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the hold image HW whose display mode is the green display mode HMc is displayed in the third unit pending display area Gb3 of the second pending display area Gb.

When the game round in which the pending image HW is acquired usually results in a jackpot and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the display of all pending images including the pending image HW is erased, as shown in FIG. 66(b). . This state is maintained until a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the ending effect.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the ending effect, the effect control device 143 executes a setting process for returning to the notice (step Sa3416), and changes the display mode of the pending image HW to the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. A return determination is made to determine whether or not to return. In the determination for return, the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is compared with the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, and it is determined whether or not the two match. When a normal jackpot result is obtained in the time-saving game state, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode becomes the time-saving gaming state, so the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode matches the game state after the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, return to the specific display mode is allowed, and a return scenario is selected by lottery.

As a result, if a scenario for returning to the green display mode HMc is selected at the second shift timing after the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. The display of each pending image is resumed with the display mode set to the normal display mode HMa.

Thereafter, at the first shift timing from the third unit hold display area Gb3 to the second unit hold display area Gb2, the display mode of the hold image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa, as shown in FIG. 66(d). be done. Then, at the second shift timing from the second unit pending display area Gb2 to the first unit pending display area Gb1, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 67 about a case where the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the time-saving gaming state, and a variable probability jackpot is achieved, and the state shifts to the variable probability gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode.

When the third reservation information of the second special symbol occurs in the time-saving gaming state, the main control device 162 performs reservation advance reading processing (step Sa305), and the production control device 143 performs reservation advance notice processing. Setting processing (step Sa1403) is performed. As a result, when it is decided to execute a hold notice performance in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the hold image HW whose display mode is the green display mode HMc is displayed in the third unit pending display area Gb3 of the second pending display area Gb.

When the game round in which the hold image HW was acquired results in a variable jackpot result and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the display of all hold images including the hold image HW is erased, as shown in FIG. 67(b). .

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the ending effect, the effect control device 143 executes a setting process for advance notice return (step Sa3416) and performs a return determination. When a probability variable jackpot result is obtained in the time-saving game state, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high probability gaming state, so that the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode do not match. In this case, returning to the specific display mode is not permitted and the return process is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 67(c), at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the display of each pending image is restarted with the display mode of the pending image HW set to the normal display mode HMa. Thereafter, the display mode of the pending image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa during a period until the pending image HW is shifted to the execution display area D. In other words, if the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is different from the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, basically the hold notice performance made before the opening/closing execution mode is canceled, and the same hold after the opening/closing execution mode. The pending notice effect for the image HW is not executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(d), the display position of the pending image HW set to the normal display mode HMa shifts to the execution display area D, and when the game round of the pending image HW is started, the performance control The device 143 executes the third execution process for pending notice (step Sa1808) and determines whether to promote the display mode to a higher level display mode. As a result, if promotion to a higher display mode is selected by lottery, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, as shown in FIG. 67(e). Note that FIG. 67E shows a case where the display mode of the pending image HW is promoted to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a case will be described in which the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the normal gaming state, and a variable probability jackpot occurs, and the game shifts to the high probability gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode.

In this case, the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode do not match, so if the above example is applied, the display mode of the pending image HW will not be restored after the opening/closing execution mode. . However, when switching from a low-probability gaming state (left-handed game) in which you aim to win a prize to the first operating port 62 to a high-probability gaming state (right-handed game) in which you aim to win a prize to the second operating port 63, the hold image Whether or not to restore the display mode is switched based on the result of pre-reading the pending information corresponding to the HW.

Specifically, when the pre-read result of the reservation information corresponding to the reservation image HW is a normal jackpot result, the display mode of the reservation image HW is restored after the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, when there is pending information that would normally result in a jackpot on the first special map, when a game round of that pending information is executed, even though it was possible to shift to a high-guarantee gaming state, the Since the state ends early, the display mode is changed to a specific display mode in order to encourage winning through the second operating port 63.

In this case, instead of changing from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, the pending image HW may be displayed in the specific display mode from the beginning. It is expected that the player's awareness will be encouraged by using a display format that is different from the case where the display format is restored when the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode matches the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode. Ru. In addition, by displaying in a specific display mode from the beginning, there is an advantage that the player can quickly detect that there is reservation information that would normally result in a jackpot on the first special drawing, and it becomes easier to take action.

On the other hand, if the pre-read result of the pending information corresponding to the pending image HW is a result other than the normal jackpot result, as in principle, the display mode of the pending image HW is not restored after the opening/closing execution mode.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

When transitioning to opening/closing execution mode in a situation where the target holding image HW is set to a specific display mode (a situation where a holding notice effect is being executed), the gaming state before opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after opening/closing execution mode is different, the display mode of the target holding image HW after the open/close execution mode is made different from the display mode before the open/close execution mode.

In this modification, the display mode of the pending image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the pending pre-reading process, so that the player's expectations for a jackpot result are aroused even before the start of the game round. Can be done. Further, a plurality of types of game states are set as the game state, and when a jackpot result is obtained and the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the game state is shifted to one of the plurality of types of game states. In a configuration with multiple types of gaming states like this, even if the pending information used for winning or losing judgments is the same, the winning or losing results and the game round effects (reach effect, etc.) performed in the game round may differ depending on the gaming status. may occur.

In this regard, in this configuration, if the game state before and after the execution of the opening/closing execution mode is different for the target holding image HW that is set to the specific display mode before the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, the display after the opening/closing execution mode is Since the display mode is different from the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, even if the award determination result or game rendition etc. change due to the difference in the gaming state, the target retention image HW will mislead the player. This makes it possible to suitably display the hold image in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode.

When transitioning to opening/closing execution mode in a situation where the target holding image HW is set to a specific display mode (a situation where a holding notice effect is being executed), the gaming state before opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after opening/closing execution mode The configuration is such that the display mode of the target holding image HW after the opening/closing execution mode is different depending on whether or not they are the same.

As mentioned above, in a configuration with multiple types of gaming states, even if the pending information used for winning/failing judgments is the same, the winning/failing results and game round effects (reach effects, etc.) performed in the game round may vary depending on the gaming status. Differences may occur. In this regard, in this configuration, the display mode in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is changed between the display mode before and after the execution of the opening/closing execution mode for the target holding image HW that is set to the specific display mode before the execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Since the game state is different depending on whether the game state is the same or not, the display mode can be set based on the result of the right/fail judgment due to the difference in the game state and the change in the game play, and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode It becomes possible to suitably display the reserved image in the .

When the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is different from the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa.

With the above configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the display of a holding image that does not match the actual expectation level after the opening/closing execution mode, thereby causing a misunderstanding among the players. Further, by uniformly setting the normal display mode HMa, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustment of the display mode according to changes in the expectation level, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

When the display mode of the target pending image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa based on the difference between the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, then the target pending image HW The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher display mode (specific display mode), and the display mode of the target pending image HW is changed based on the result.

If the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is different from the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, by changing the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode to the normal display mode HMa, the gaming state can be changed. Although it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the results of the validity judgment and the game performance due to changes, there is a concern that it will not be possible to notify or suggest the expectation level of the reservation information corresponding to the target reservation image HW. In this regard, in this configuration, the target pending image HW set as the normal display mode HMa is given an opportunity to change to the specific display mode after that, so if the specific display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa Even if it is, it can be promoted to a specific display mode after the fact, and it becomes possible to notify the degree of expectation.

In the above case, when the game progresses to the game time of the target pending image HW set in the normal display mode HMa, it is determined whether or not to promote the display mode of the target pending image HW to a specific display mode, and The configuration is such that the promotion is executed based on the results.

By promoting the display mode of the target hold image HW after the game round of the target hold image HW has started, the information regarding the validity judgment and the information regarding the game round performance that is acquired and transmitted at the start of the game round can be utilized. Promotion can be determined by Since this information corresponds to the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, the above promotion can be performed in a manner suitable for the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, and will not give players a misunderstanding about their expectations. Instead, it becomes possible to change the display mode of the target pending image HW set in the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode.

In particular, by determining whether or not the target retention image HW is to be promoted to a specific display mode based on the fluctuation pattern specified by execution of the validity determination (start of the game round) in the main control device 162, It is possible to determine whether or not promotion is possible using the same information that is used for selecting the game round performance in the game round of the target pending image HW. As a result, when the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is different from the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, the target holding image HW The display mode can be changed to a specific display mode.

In addition, with the above configuration, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is supported solely for determining whether or not to promote the target holding image HW to a specific display mode. It is possible to avoid adding a dedicated process for transmitting the fluctuation pattern (information regarding the results of the validity judgment and the game performance). That is, when executing the game round of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is changed to the special symbol display section 43. It is necessary to send a fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 to the production control device 143 in order to execute it in synchronization with the special figure game time in , but the configuration is such that the promotion judgment is executed using this fluctuation start command. By doing so, there is no need to notify the production control device 143 from the main control device 162 of the variation pattern corresponding to the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode by a dedicated command different from the variation start command. Therefore, not only can promotion determination be performed using the existing processing configuration in the main control device 162, but also the production control device 143 does not need to be equipped with a processing configuration for when such a dedicated command is received. , it is possible to suppress the processing configuration from becoming complicated.

Information corresponding to the notification mode of the pending image when a pending notice performance is performed can be stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344, so that the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode are the same. In some cases, the display mode of the target pending image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is configured to be set based on the information stored in the return area 344f.

For example, if the display mode of the target pending image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set based on the result of the pending pre-reading process performed before the opening/closing execution mode, the display manner before the opening/closing execution mode may be set. There is a concern that the display mode may be set to be different. In this regard, in this configuration, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed in a situation where there is a hold image set as a specific display mode, information on the display mode at that time is stored, and the opening/closing mode is stored based on the stored information. Since the information display mode after the execution mode is set, it becomes possible to suitably return the display mode after the opening/closing execution mode to the original mode before the opening/closing execution mode.

By restoring the original state before the opening/closing execution mode in this way, opening/closing execution is performed for the target holding image HW (holding information) that aroused the player's expectations by changing to a specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. A similar feeling of anticipation can be aroused even after the mode.

When the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode are the same, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is the same as the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. When changing the display mode, the configuration is such that the normal display mode HMa can be changed to a specific display mode once.

In this case, regardless of whether the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is the same as the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode, the display mode of the target pending image HW will change as the opening/closing execution mode is executed. The specific display mode may be changed to the normal display mode HMa. This makes it possible to reduce unnaturalness when the display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa due to a difference in the gaming state. In addition, by causing an event that changes from the normal display mode HMa to a specific display mode, it is possible to change the pending display mode to the normal display mode HMa in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, including when the gaming state is different. It is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the image will be changed to a specific display mode, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation for the pending image (pending information).

The configuration is such that a determination as to whether or not the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the same as the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is performed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

In this case, it is possible to promptly respond to the display mode of the target holding image HW after the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, after the opening/closing execution mode, even in a situation where the number of reservations before the target reservation image HW is small, the display mode of the target reservation image HW can be suitably adjusted.

The configuration is such that the pending image is not displayed while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.

When changing the display mode of the target holding image HW at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, if you suddenly change the display mode of the target holding image HW to another display mode at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the game There is a concern that people may get an unnatural impression. In particular, if the display mode is downgraded to the normal display mode HMa, it is likely to be easily noticed by the player and give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, the hold image is hidden in the opening/closing execution mode, so when changing the display mode of the target hold image HW, the display of the hold image itself, including other hold images, is There may be intervening periods in which the event is not performed. This prevents changes in the display mode from being noticeable and makes it possible to reduce unnaturalness. Furthermore, since the hold image is hidden, there is also the advantage that it becomes easier to draw the player's attention to the performance for the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game performance).

<Modification 4>
In the third modification of the first embodiment, regarding the holding image that is set to a specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, depending on the relationship between the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode. However, in this modified example, the pre-reading process is executed again after the opening/closing execution mode for the holding image that was set to the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, and the result is Based on this, the display mode of the pending image is determined. This modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 76. Note that in these figures, the same components as those in the first embodiment and each modification are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The processing performed by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be explained.

<Information acquisition process>
Information acquisition processing according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 68(a). This process is executed when a winning occurs in the operating ports 62, 63 (executed in step Sa205 of the winning process for operating ports (FIG. 17)), and is performed in the information acquisition process of FIG. It is executed instead. In FIG. 68(a), the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 18, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS in the corresponding special figure display holding area in step Sa304, a holding command setting process is executed in step Sa4101. . After executing step Sa4101, the information acquisition process ends. Here, the pending command setting process in step Sa4101 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 68(b).

First, in step Sa4201, the starting reservation storage numbers RaN and RbN stored in each reservation area Ra and Rb of the reservation ball storage area 314b and the common reservation number CRN stored in the total reservation number storage area of the reservation ball storage area 314b are calculated. and stores the information in the register of the MPU 312. In steps Sa4202 to Step Sa4204, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 ( (a random number for determining whether the jackpot is successful), a value of a jackpot type counter C2 (a random number for drawing a jackpot type), and a value of a fluctuation type counter CS (a random number for drawing a fluctuation pattern). Note that the processing in steps Sa4201 to Sa4204 is similar to the processing in steps Sa1202, Sa1205, and Sa1208 of the pending prefetching process (FIG. 28) according to the first embodiment.

In the subsequent step Sa4205, a pending command is set as an output target to the production control device 143, and thereafter, the pending command setting process is ended. The hold command includes information indicating whether the current hold information corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, as well as the values of various counters C1, C2, and CS grasped in steps Sa4202 to Step Sa4204 above. Contains information indicating.

That is, in the first embodiment described above, in the reservation look-ahead process (FIG. 28), the validity judgment process and the fluctuating pattern lottery process are performed based on the values of the various counters C1, C2, and CS that have been grasped, and the results are Although it was configured to be sent to the performance control device 143 by being included in the hold command, in this modification, the information on the various counters C1, C2, CS that has been grasped (validity/invalidity Random number information used for determination processing and fluctuating pattern lottery processing) is included in the suspension command and transmitted to the production control device 143.

The processing performed by the MPU 342 of the production control device 143 will be explained.

<Pending command handling process>
The pending command handling process according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 69. This process is executed when a hold command is received from the main control device 162 (executed in step Sa1302 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30)), and is an alternative to the hold command corresponding process in FIG. It is something that is carried out. In FIG. 69, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 31, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

At step Sa1402, after incrementing the value of the hold count counter (start hold storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 by 1, the process proceeds to step Sa4301 to execute the first hold lookahead process. The first pending pre-reading process is a pending pre-reading process performed by the production control device 143, and is based on the information of various counters C1, C2, and CS included in the pending command from the main control device 162, and is acquired by the occurrence of a starting prize. This is to pre-read the results of validity judgment regarding pending information. Here, the first pending prefetching process in step Sa4301 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 70.

First, in step Sa4401, the current gaming state is grasped. Specifically, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, a high probability gaming state, or a time saving gaming state. In step Sa4402, the hold command from the main controller 162 is analyzed and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the current hold information is determined. In step Sa4403, the validity determination table is acquired from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343.

In this modification, the same table data as the validity determination table stored in the ROM 313 (validity table storage area 313a) of the main control device 162 is stored as the validity determination table for the production control device 143. In addition, regarding the jackpot type table for drawing the jackpot type and the variable display time table for drawing the variable pattern, the jackpot type table (FIG. 13) stored in the ROM 313 of the main controller 162 and the variable display time table are stored in the ROM 313 of the main controller 162. The same table data as the table (FIGS. 14 and 59) is stored. Therefore, even if the performance control device 143 performs the lottery processing separately from the win/fail lottery and the variable pattern lottery in the main control device 162, if the random numbers used for the lottery are the same value, the same lottery result will be obtained. It is now possible to

Since the success/failure determination table is set separately for the low probability mode (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state) and the success/failure table for the high probability mode (high probability gaming state), step Sa4403 Now, a table corresponding to the gaming state grasped in step Sa4401 is acquired.

In step Sa4404, as a pre-reading process to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, a judgment is made based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 obtained in step Sa4402 and the judgment table obtained in step Sa4403, and the judgment result is grasped. . In step Sa4405, it is determined whether the win/fail result grasped in step Sa4404 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, the hold command from the main controller 162 is analyzed in step Sa4406, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the current hold information is grasped.

In step Sa4407, as a pre-reading process for the jackpot type, a jackpot type lottery is performed based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped in step Sa4406 and the type table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. Understand the results. At this time, if the reservation information is based on winning to the first operating port 62, refer to the type table for the first special symbol, and if the reservation information is based on winning to the second operating port 63, the reservation information is based on winning to the second operating port 63. Refer to the type table for 2 special figures.

In step Sa4408, jackpot information as information indicating the jackpot result grasped in step Sa4404 and type information as information indicating the jackpot type result grasped in step Sa4407 are stored. These pieces of information are stored in corresponding areas in the reservation storage area 344c (FIG. 32) of the RAM 344.

In addition, in this modification, since the pre-reading result of the jackpot type is not reflected in the pending preview presentation, the processing of step Sa4406 and step Sa4407 may be omitted.

After executing step Sa4408 or if a negative determination is made in step Sa4405 (not winning the jackpot), in step Sa4409, the hold command from the main controller 162 is analyzed and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS in the current hold information is calculated. grasp. In step Sa4410, a corresponding variable display time table is acquired from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343 based on the gaming state ascertained in step Sa4401 and the winning/failure lottery result ascertained in step Sa4404. For example, if the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state and the grasping result in step Sa4404 is a winning result, a variable display time table for losing for the time-saving gaming state (FIG. 59(d)) is obtained.

In step Sa4411, as a prefetching process for a variation pattern, a lottery process for a variation pattern is performed based on the value of the variation type counter CS obtained in step Sa4409 and the variation display time table obtained in step Sa4410, and the result is grasped. . In step Sa4412, information indicating the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa4411 is stored in the corresponding area of the storage area for reservation 344c. After executing step Sa4412, the first pending prefetch process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the pending command handling process (FIG. 69), after the first pending prefetch process is executed in step Sa4301, a pending notice setting process is performed in step Sa1403 using the processing result of step Sa4301. The pending notice setting process is a setting process for executing a pending notice effect.

<Processing for open/close execution mode>
The opening/closing execution mode processing according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 71. This process is executed in step Sa1306 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the opening/closing execution mode process of FIG. 63. In FIG. 71, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 63, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After erasing the suspension notice flag in step Sa3406, it is determined in step Sa3407 whether or not there is a suspension image displayed in a specific display mode. That is, at the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode, the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, or the rainbow color display mode HMe is selected among the pending images displayed in the respective pending display areas Ga and Gb. It is determined whether something displayed in any of the modes exists.

If there is a pending image displayed in the specific display mode, the process advances to step Sa3408, and information indicating in which mode the pending image displayed in the specific display mode is displayed is stored in the RAM 344 for recovery purposes. It is stored in area 344f. After execution of step Sa3408, a return standby flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step Sa3410 without performing the process of step Sa3409 (FIG. 63). That is, in the above modification 4, the process of storing the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode was executed in step Sa3409, but in this modification, this process is not executed.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step Sa3414 (if it is determined that the return standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344), processing to erase the return standby flag is executed in step Sa3415.

Here, the situation in which an affirmative determination is made in step Sa3414 means that the opening/closing execution mode is performed while the hold preview effect is being executed, and the display of the hold image is erased. In this case, in step Sa4501, a second pending prefetching process is executed to perform pending prefetching again. In the following step Sa4502, a setting process for returning to advance notice is executed to return the display mode of the pending image to a specific display mode. Details of the second pending prefetching process in step Sa4501 and the setting process for advance notice return in step Sa4502 will be described later.

After step Sa4502 is executed, in step Sa3417, processing is executed to display the pending image in the normal display mode HMa, and thereafter, the opening/closing execution mode processing is ended. That is, also in this modification, the hold image is displayed in the normal display mode HMa immediately after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

<Second pending prefetch processing>
The second pending prefetching process in step Sa4501 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 72.

First, in step Sa4601, the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is grasped. This determination is made with reference to the jackpot type of the current jackpot that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. For example, if the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot result, the variable probability gaming state is grasped as the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, and if it is a normal jackpot result, the time saving gaming state is grasped as the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode. do.

In step Sa4602, the reservation storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for each reservation information stored in the storage area 344c is grasped. Note that this process may be performed on all pending information stored in the pending storage area 344c, or may be performed on all pending information stored in the pending storage area 344c. It is also possible to perform this process only on the hold information of the hold images (reservation information of the hold images).

In step Sa4603, a propriety determination table corresponding to the gaming state grasped in step Sa4601 is obtained. In step Sa4604, as a pre-reading process to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, a lottery is performed based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 obtained in step Sa4602 and the judgment table obtained in step Sa4603, and the result is grasped. . Note that the process in step Sa4604 is performed on the pending information whose jackpot random number counter C1 was grasped in step Sa4602. This also applies to the processing after step Sa4605.

Here, the processing of step Sa4603 and step Sa4604 is similar to step Sa4403 and step Sa4404 of the first pending prefetching process (FIG. 70) performed at the time of starting winning (when obtaining pending information). However, if the lottery mode changes before and after the opening/closing execution mode, for example, when the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is a normal gaming state and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-precision gaming state, step Sa4603 Since the validity determination tables obtained in the process are different, a lottery result different from that in the first pending prefetch process may be obtained. For example, in the case where a jackpot result with variable probability is won under the normal gaming state, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 regarding the pending pending information is "17", the opening/closing execution corresponding to the variable jackpot result is executed. In the first pending pre-reading process before the mode is performed, the winning result is pre-read, but in the second pending pre-reading process assuming the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, the winning result is pre-read (FIG. 12).

In step Sa4605, it is determined whether the win/fail result grasped in step Sa4604 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, in step Sa4606, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped with reference to the storage area 344c for reservation. In step Sa4607, as a pre-reading process for the jackpot type, a jackpot type lottery is performed based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped in step Sa4606 and the type table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, and a type lottery is performed. Understand the results.

In step Sa4608, the jackpot information as information indicating the jackpot result grasped in step Sa4604 and the type information as information indicating the jackpot type result grasped in step Sa4607 are stored in the corresponding storage area of the storage area 344c for reservation. do.

In step Sa4609, the value of the variation type counter CS is determined with reference to the storage area 344c for reservation. In step Sa4610, a corresponding variable display time table is obtained from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343 based on the gaming state ascertained in step Sa4601 and the winning/failure lottery result ascertained in step Sa4604. For example, if the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-precision gaming state and the grasping result in step Sa4604 is a loss result, the variable display time table for loss for the high-precision gaming state (FIG. 59(b)) get.

In step Sa4611, as a prefetching process for a variation pattern, a lottery process for a variation pattern is performed based on the value of the variation type counter CS obtained in step Sa4609 and the variation display time table obtained in step Sa4610, and the result is grasped. . The process of step Sa4611 is similar to step Sa4411 of the first pending pre-reading process performed at the time of starting winning (when obtaining pending information), but if the gaming state changes before and after the opening/closing execution mode, step Sa4611 Since the fluctuating display time tables obtained in the above process are different, a lottery result different from that in the first pending prefetch process may be obtained.

In step Sa4612, information indicating the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa4611 is stored in the corresponding area of the storage area 344c for reservation, and then the second reservation prefetching process is ended.

<Setting process for advance notice recovery>
The setting process for advance notice return in step Sa4502 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73.

First, in step Sa4701, the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the hold information corresponding to the target hold image (the hold image displayed in the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode) is grasped. The variation pattern grasped in this case is the variation pattern grasped in the second pending prefetch process.

In step Sa4702, it is determined whether the variation pattern grasped in step Sa4701 is one of variation pattern 1H, variation pattern 11H, or variation pattern 21H. These fluctuation patterns correspond to complete failures (FIGS. 14 and 59), and if either of them is the case, the setting process for returning with advance notice is immediately terminated.

If the variation pattern grasped in step Sa4701 is not variation pattern 1H, variation pattern 11H, or variation pattern 21H, the process proceeds to step Sa4703, and the variation pattern grasped in step Sa4701 (the variation pattern pre-read in the second pending pre-reading process) Understand the upper limit display mode corresponding to The various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343 stores an upper limit display mode table. As shown in FIG. 74, in the upper limit display mode table, the upper limit of the display mode is determined in correspondence with each variation pattern. , a red display mode HMd is set as the upper limit of the specific display mode. In step Sa4703, the upper limit display mode table is referred to and the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is specified.

In step Sa4704, the return area 344f of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is grasped for the target pending image. In step Sa4705, a return determination process is performed to determine whether or not to return the display mode of the target pending image to the specific display mode before the open/close execution mode in the game after the open/close execution mode. In this process, the upper limit display mode grasped in step Sa4703 and the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode grasped in step Sa4704 are compared, and the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is the same as or lower than the upper limit display mode. If so, the determination result is that the return is permitted, and if the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is a display mode higher than the upper limit display mode, the determination result is that the return is not permitted.

In step Sa4706, it is determined whether the result of the return determination in step Sa4705 allows return. If the determination result is that the return is not permitted, the setting process for the advance notice return is immediately terminated.

If the determination result is that return is permitted, the processes of steps Sa4707 to Sa4711 are executed. These processes are similar to steps Sa2103 to Step Sa2107 in FIG. 43, and the display mode of the target pending image is changed back to the original display at any timing in accordance with the number of pending images before the target pending image. This is for setting whether to return to the mode. That is, in step Sa4707, the number of pending images before the target pending image is ascertained, and if the grasped number of pending images is 1 or more, a return scenario lottery process is executed in step Sa4709. In step Sa4710, return scenario data is set so that the selected return scenario is executed.

Note that since the second pending prefetching process (step Sa4501) is executed at the end of the open/close execution mode, it is possible to start displaying the pending image in a specific display mode after the open/close execution mode ends. In this modification, the normal display mode HMa is uniformly set immediately after the opening/closing execution mode ends (step Sa3417). That is, even when the target holding image is set to a specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode, it is first displayed in the normal display mode HMa and then changed to the specific display mode after the fact. The reason for this configuration is that there is a high possibility that the payout of game balls will continue immediately after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the player must take appropriate action such as ejecting the game balls from the lower tray 34, etc. This is based on the assumption that in such cases, attention to the hold images may decrease. By avoiding displaying the specific display mode at such timing, it is possible to prevent the specific display mode from being used without the player's knowledge.

After executing step Sa4710, a notice return flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step Sa4711. The advance notice return flag is used by the MPU 342 to understand that processing for restoring the display mode of the pending image should be executed.

After executing step Sa4711, the setting process for advance notice return is ended. After that, as shown in FIG. 71, in step Sa3417, settings are made to display the holding images in the normal display mode HMa for all holdings that exist at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, including the target holding image. . That is, even when the return process is performed, the target pending image is displayed in the normal display mode HMa immediately after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Then, the second execution process of the pending notice in step Sa1702 of the shift command response process (FIG. 40(a)) (FIG. 44), and the second execution process of the pending notice in step Sa1808 of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41). In the third execution process (FIG. 45), the display mode of the target pending image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. At this time, in the second execution process of the hold notice, a process is executed to return the display mode of the target hold image to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode).

In addition, in the third execution process of the pending notice, the current display mode of the target pending image (display mode restored by the restoration process) and the fluctuation pattern of the target pending image in the game round of the target pending image is compared with the corresponding upper limit display mode, and it is determined whether it is possible to change (promote) to a higher display mode. If such a change is possible, the display mode is promoted through promotion determination and promotion lottery.

<About the flow of the display mode of the hold image before and after opening/closing execution mode>
The flow of the display mode of the pending image before and after the opening/closing execution mode will be described. First, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 75 about a case where the pre-read result of the validity judgment does not change before and after the opening/closing execution mode, but the pre-read result of the fluctuation pattern changes.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), when the third hold information (hold image HW) of the second special symbol occurs in the high-precision gaming state, the main controller 162 performs the information acquisition process ( Execute FIG. 68(a). As a result, it is assumed that 25 is obtained as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and 80 is obtained as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

In addition, the production control device 143 executes the first pending prefetching process (step Sa4301) based on the result of the information acquisition process of the main control device 162. In the first pending pre-reading process, the pre-reading process is executed using the gaming state at that time, that is, the validity determination table for the high-probability gaming state and the variable display time table. The winning result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 25 is a winning result (Figure 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 80 is fluctuation pattern 12H (Fig. 59 (b)), so the first pending The result of the pre-reading process is an error and a variation pattern 12H. The fluctuation pattern 12H is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to SPSP reach A failure.

Furthermore, the effect control device 143 executes a setting process for a pending notice (step Sa1403) based on the result of the first pending pre-reading process, and performs a lottery for execution of a pending notice effect for the pending image HW and a lottery for the final display mode. , a lottery for performance scenarios, etc. will be held. The selection range of the final display mode corresponding to the variation pattern 12H is the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, and the red display mode HMd (FIG. 61(b)). It is assumed that a red display mode HMd is selected by lottery as the mode, and a production scenario in which the initial display mode is the blue display mode HMb is selected. In this case, the hold image HW whose display mode is the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

When the game round in which the hold image HW is acquired results in a normal jackpot result and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the display of all hold images including the hold image HW is erased, as in the fourth modification. This state is maintained until a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the ending effect.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the ending performance, the performance control device 143 executes the second reservation prefetching process (step Sa4501) based on the reservation information stored in the storage area for reservation 344c. Normally, in the case of a jackpot result, the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode becomes the time-saving gaming state, but in the second pending pre-reading process, the pre-reading process is executed using the validity judgment table and variable display time table for the time-saving gaming state. do. The winning result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 25 is a winning result (Figure 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 80 is fluctuation pattern 23H (Fig. 59 (d)), so the second pending The result of the pre-reading process is an error and a variation pattern 23H. The variation pattern 23H is a variation pattern that corresponds not to the SPSP reach A failure but to the SP SP reach B failure, which is lower than the reach effect.

In addition, the production control device 143 executes a setting process for returning to advance notice (step Sa4502) based on the result of the second pending prefetch process, and returns the display mode of the pending image HW to the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. A return determination is made as to whether or not to do so. In the determination for return, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern read in advance by the second hold look-ahead process is grasped based on the upper limit display mode table (FIG. 74), and the display mode of the hold image HW before the opening/closing execution mode is determined. , it is determined whether the mode is equal to or less than the grasped upper limit display mode.

Here, since the upper limit display mode of the fluctuation pattern 23H prefetched by the second pending prefetching process is the green display mode HMc (FIG. 74), the blue display mode HMb, which is the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, corresponds to the fluctuation pattern. The upper limit display mode is as follows. In this case, return to the specific display mode is allowed and a return scenario is set.

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, the display position of the hold image HW changes from the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second unit hold display area Ga3, as shown in FIG. 75(b). When shifted to the unit reservation display area Ga2, the display mode is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

In addition, even if the display mode of the holding image HW is the green display mode HMc when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second holding pre-reading process. Since the display mode is below the upper limit display mode, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the holding image HW is the red display mode HMd when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is a variation pattern pre-read by the second holding pre-reading process. This is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to . In this case, returning to the specific display mode is not permitted. That is, whether or not to return to the specific display mode depends on the display mode of the pending image HW when the opening/closing execution mode is started.

If the return to the specific display mode is not permitted, the pending image HW will be displayed in the normal display mode HMa at the end of the opening/closing execution mode until it is shifted to the execution display area D. The state is maintained (FIG. 75(c)).

Thereafter, when the display position of the pending image HW set to the normal display mode HMa is shifted to the execution display area D and the game round of the pending image HW is started, the production control device 143 performs the third execution of the pending notice. process (step Sa1808) to determine promotion to a higher display mode. As a result, if promotion to a higher display mode is selected by lottery, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. For example, when the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 23H in the promotion determination is set to the green display mode HMc, the display mode of the pending image HW is promoted within the range up to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 76 about the case where the pre-read result of the propriety judgment changes before and after the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), when the third hold information (hold image HW) of the second special symbol occurs in the high-probability gaming state, the main controller 162 performs the information acquisition process. Execute. As a result, it is assumed that 17 is obtained as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and 45 is obtained as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

In addition, the production control device 143 executes a first pending prefetch process based on the result of the information acquisition process of the main control device 162. The win/fail result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1=17 in the high probability gaming state is a winning result (Fig. 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS=45 is the fluctuation pattern 12A (Fig. 59(a) )), the result of the first pending prefetching process is a win and a variation pattern 12A. The fluctuation pattern 12A is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to SPSP reach B.

Furthermore, the production control device 143 executes a setting process for a pending notice based on the result of the first pending pre-reading process. The selection range of the final display mode corresponding to the variation pattern 12A is the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, and the rainbow color display mode HMe (FIG. 61(a)). As a result of the lottery, it is assumed that a rainbow color display mode HMe is selected as the final display mode, and a production scenario in which the initial display mode is the blue display mode HMb is selected. In this case, the hold image HW whose display mode is the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

When the game round in which the pending image HW is acquired usually results in a jackpot, and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the display of all pending images including the pending image HW is erased. This state is maintained until a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the ending effect.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the ending performance, the performance control device 143 executes a second reservation prefetch process based on the reservation information stored in the storage area 344c for reservation. In the second suspension prefetching process, the prefetching process is executed using the propriety determination table for the time-saving gaming state and the variable display time table. The winning result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 17 is a winning result (Fig. 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 45 is fluctuation pattern 22H (Fig. 59 (d)), so the second pending The result of the pre-reading process is an error and a variation pattern 22H. The fluctuation pattern 22H is not a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a reach hit, but a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a reach miss (SP reach A miss).

In addition, the production control device 143 executes a setting process for returning to advance notice based on the result of the second hold lookahead process, and determines whether or not to return the display mode of the hold image HW to the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. Make a determination for return. Since the upper limit display mode of the fluctuation pattern 22H prefetched by the second pending prefetch process is the green display mode HMc (FIG. 74), the blue display mode HMb, which is the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, is the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. The following aspects apply. In this case, return to the specific display mode is allowed and a return scenario is set.

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, the display position of the hold image HW changes from the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second unit hold display area Ga3, as shown in FIG. When shifted to the unit reservation display area Ga2, the display mode is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

In addition, even if the display mode of the holding image HW is the green display mode HMc when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second holding pre-reading process. Since the display mode is below the upper limit display mode, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the holding image HW is the red display mode HMd or the rainbow color display mode HMe when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is the second pending pre-reading process. This is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern read in advance. In this case, returning to the specific display mode is not permitted. That is, even if the validity changes before and after the opening/closing execution mode, whether or not the specific display aspect is restored depends on the display manner of the holding image HW when the opening/closing execution mode is started.

If the return to the specific display mode is not permitted, the pending image HW will be displayed in the normal display mode HMa at the end of the opening/closing execution mode until it is shifted to the execution display area D. The state is maintained (FIG. 76(c)).

Thereafter, when the display position of the pending image HW set to the normal display mode HMa is shifted to the execution display area D and the game round of the pending image HW is started, the production control device 143 performs the third execution of the pending notice. Execute the processing to determine promotion to a higher display mode. As a result, if promotion to a higher display mode is selected by lottery, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode.

Furthermore, depending on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of the holding image HW, even if the result of the first holding look-ahead processing in the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is a hit and the fluctuation pattern is greater than the reach effect, the opening/closing execution mode ends. In some cases, the result of the second pending look-ahead processing is a loss and changes to a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete loss (for example, as mentioned above, a normal jackpot result occurs in the high-precision gaming state, and after the opening/closing execution mode, the result changes to a fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a complete loss). (in the case where the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hold information of the hold image HW is 17 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 10). In such a case, the display mode restoration process is not performed in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, and the display mode of the pending image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

If the target hold image HW is set to a specific display mode (a situation where a hold notice effect is being executed) and the mode shifts to opening/closing execution mode, the hold look-ahead process is performed again after the open/close execution mode (second hold look-ahead process). is executed, and the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set based on the result.

In this modification, the display mode of the pending image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the pending pre-reading process, so that the player's expectations for a jackpot result are aroused even before the start of the game round. Can be done. Further, a plurality of types of game states are set as the game state, and when a jackpot result is obtained and the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the game state is shifted to one of the plurality of types of game states. In a configuration with multiple types of gaming states like this, even if the pending information used for winning or losing judgments is the same, the winning or losing results and the game round effects (reach effect, etc.) performed in the game round may differ depending on the gaming status. may occur.

In this regard, in this configuration, when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode while a pending notice performance is being executed, the pre-reading process is executed again after the opening/closing execution mode for the pending information that triggered the pending notice performance, and the result is Based on this, the display mode of the target pending image HW (the pending image of the pending information that triggered the pending preview effect) is set. For this reason, it is possible to adjust the display mode after the opening/closing execution mode of the target pending image HW for which the suspension preview performance was performed before the opening/closing execution mode so that it becomes a mode suitable for the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode. This makes it possible to suitably display the hold image after the opening/closing execution mode.

When performing the pending pre-reading process again after the opening/closing execution mode, the pre-reading is performed by applying the validity judgment conditions and effect selection conditions corresponding to the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, the display mode of the target pending image HW can be made consistent with the win/fail result actually reported in the game round of the target pending image HW performed after the opening/closing execution mode and the game round effect actually performed in the relevant game round. can be adjusted.

Set the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the holding pre-reading process again after the opening/closing execution mode and the display mode of the target holding image HW before the opening/closing execution mode. It was configured to do this.

For example, if the display mode of the pending image changes frequently as the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable. In this regard, in this configuration, the display mode after opening/closing execution mode is set by taking into account not only the read-ahead result again but also the display format before opening/closing execution mode. In light of the pre-reading results, if there is no problem in maintaining the same display mode after opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to carry over the display mode before opening/closing execution mode. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the display mode of the holding image from changing excessively after the opening/closing execution mode, and it becomes possible to display the holding image after the opening/closing execution mode in a natural manner.

A plurality of upper limit display modes are set corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of each gaming state, and among them, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified by the pre-reading process again after the opening/closing execution mode, and the upper limit display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. The display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set based on the result. More specifically, if the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is below the upper limit display mode derived from the fluctuation pattern, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is the opening/closing execution mode. The configuration is the same as the previous display mode.

In this modification, a plurality of types of modes are set as the specific display mode of the pending image (notification mode in the pending preview performance) so that the jackpot expectation level is different. In a configuration where the expectation level is set stepwise and a large number of display modes are provided, the range of expectation levels that one display mode corresponds to is narrowed, so the opening/closing mode is set in the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. If the hold image is displayed after the execution mode, a difference is likely to occur in the level of expectation suggested before and after the opening/closing execution mode. In this regard, with this configuration, even in a situation where a large number of display modes are set, it is possible to suitably display the hold image after the opening/closing execution mode by matching the expectations.

If the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is a higher display mode than the upper limit display mode derived from the fluctuation pattern, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. It was configured to do this. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display mode after the opening/closing execution mode from exceeding the corresponding expectation in the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode, and it is possible to suitably display the holding image after the opening/closing execution mode.

When the display mode of the target pending image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, determine whether to promote the display mode of the target pending image HW to a specific display mode in the game round. The configuration is such that the promotion is executed based on the result.

If the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is different from the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, by changing the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode to the normal display mode HMa, the gaming state can be changed. Although it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the results of the validity judgment and the game performance due to changes, there is a concern that it will not be possible to notify or suggest the expectation level of the reservation information corresponding to the target reservation image HW. In this regard, in this configuration, when the game progresses to the game round of the target pending image HW set to the normal display mode HMa, an opportunity to change to the specific display mode is given. Therefore, even if the display mode is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, it can be promoted to the specific display mode after the fact, and it becomes possible to notify the level of expectation. .

In the above case, the configuration determines whether or not the target pending image HW is to be promoted to a specific display mode based on the variation pattern specified by the execution of the propriety judgment (start of the game round) in the main control device 162. And so.

In this case, the same information used to select the game round effect in the game round of the target pending image HW is used to determine whether promotion is possible, so the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game after the opening/closing execution mode are determined. In the case where the state is different, the display mode of the target holding image HW can be changed to a specific display mode while adapting to the game round performance actually performed in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, with the above configuration, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is supported solely for determining whether or not to promote the target holding image HW to a specific display mode. It is possible to avoid adding a dedicated process for transmitting the fluctuation pattern (information regarding the results of the validity judgment and the game performance). That is, when executing the game round of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is changed to the special symbol display section 43. It is necessary to send a fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 to the production control device 143 in order to execute it in synchronization with the special figure game time in , but the configuration is such that the promotion judgment is executed using this fluctuation start command. By doing so, there is no need to notify the production control device 143 from the main control device 162 of the variation pattern corresponding to the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode by a dedicated command different from the variation start command. Therefore, not only can promotion determination be performed using the existing processing configuration in the main control device 162, but also the production control device 143 does not need to be equipped with a processing configuration for when such a dedicated command is received. , it is possible to suppress the processing configuration from becoming complicated.

When the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is the same as the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to change the display mode from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. The structure is as follows.

In this case, regardless of whether or not the display mode of the target pending image HW is restored to the same mode, as the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the display mode of the target pending image HW changes from the specific display mode to the normal display mode. The display mode can be changed to HMa. This makes it possible to reduce unnaturalness when the display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa due to a determination not to return to the same mode. In addition, by causing an event that changes from the normal display mode HMa to a specific display mode, the normal display mode HMa can be changed from the normal display mode HMa in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, including when it is determined not to return to the same mode. It is possible to arouse a feeling of expectation that the reserved image (reserved information) will be changed to a specific display mode, and it is possible to maintain the expectation for the reserved image (reserved information).

The configuration is such that the pending image is not displayed while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.

When changing the display mode of the target holding image HW at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, if you suddenly change the display mode of the target holding image HW to another display mode at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the game There is a concern that people may get an unnatural impression. In particular, if the display mode is downgraded to the normal display mode HMa, it is likely to be easily noticed by the player and give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, the hold image is hidden in the opening/closing execution mode, so when changing the display mode of the target hold image HW, the display of the hold image itself, including other hold images, is There may be intervening periods in which the event is not performed. This prevents changes in the display mode from being noticeable and makes it possible to reduce unnaturalness. Furthermore, since the hold image is hidden, there is also the advantage that it becomes easier to draw the player's attention to the performance for the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game performance).

<Modification 5>
This modification deals with the display mode of the hold image before the occurrence of the power outage state and the display mode of the hold image at the time of recovery from the power outage state. This modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 86. Note that in these figures, the same components as those in the first embodiment and each modification are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment and each modification example, when the occurrence of a power outage is detected by the power outage monitoring section 315 of the power supply and launch control device 191, the power outage is stored in the backup area provided in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162. A flag (information on the occurrence of a power outage state) is set, and power for power outage is supplied from the backup power supply unit 316 of the power source and launch control device 191 to the RAM 314 . That is, when a power outage occurs, the game times of special and regular symbols on the main display unit 81 that were in progress when the power outage occurred, and the RAM 314 of the main controller 162 when the power outage occurred. Power is supplied to the RAM 314 so that the stored pending information and the like can be retained, and the data in the RAM 314 is backed up. In this modification, in addition to this, the data stored in the RAM 344 in the production control device 143 is also backed up.

However, since the production control device 143 handles a larger amount of data than the main control device 162, the RAM 344 installed in the production control device 143 has a larger capacity and larger scale than the RAM 314 of the main control device 162. . For this reason, if it is attempted to back up all the data stored in the RAM 344 of the production control device 143 as it is, the amount of power consumed under a power outage state will increase. As a result, the power stored in the backup power supply section 316 is consumed in a short period of time, resulting in a shortened data retention period (backup period) and the need for a backup power supply section 316 with a large amount of stored power, resulting in increased costs. There are concerns that it may lead to

Therefore, in this modification, instead of backing up the entire data stored in the RAM 344, information related to the pending image, such as pending information stored in the pending storage area 344c, is backed up as part of the data. It is configured as follows. The electrical configuration for this will be explained with reference to FIG. 77.

In addition to the RAM 344, the production control device 143 is provided with a backup RAM 345 as a storage medium exclusively for backup. The capacity of the backup RAM 345 is smaller than that of the RAM 344, and is large enough to store information related to reserved images. Note that, like the RAM 344, the backup RAM 345 may be integrated into one chip with the MPU 342, or may be integrated into a chip separately from the MPU 342 and the RAM 344.

The RAM 344 and the backup RAM 345 are supplied with power for power outage from the backup power supply section 316. In this modification, when a power outage occurs, information regarding the pending image among the data stored in the RAM 344 is stored (copied) in the backup RAM 345, and power is supplied to the RAM 344 during a power outage. is for supplying the power necessary to read the information regarding the pending image stored in the RAM 344. Therefore, after the read process (write process to the backup RAM 345) is completed, the supply of power to the RAM 344 during power outage is stopped.

On the other hand, the backup RAM 345 continues to be supplied with power during a power outage even after the writing process of information regarding the pending image is completed. In this way, when a power outage occurs, the information to be backed up is stored in a small storage medium provided separately from the RAM 344, and power is supplied to the storage medium in the event of a power outage. , power consumption for data retention can be kept low. This can prevent the data retention period from becoming short and from requiring the backup power supply section 316 with a large amount of stored power.

Although not shown, the power supply and firing control device 191 or the production control device 143 is provided with a switching unit (switch circuit) that switches the power supply state to the RAM 344 during power outage. The switching unit supplies the RAM 344 with power during a power outage from the backup power supply unit 316 while at least reading the information related to the pending image from the RAM 344 and writing it to the backup RAM 345, and writes the information related to the pending image to the backup RAM 345. After finishing, it operates to stop the supply of power to the RAM 344 during a power outage.

The production control device 143 is provided with an NMI terminal like the main control device 162, and a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring section 315 in the power supply and launch control device 191 is output to the NMI terminal. That is, in this modification, when a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring unit 315, the process for power outage is executed in both the main control device 162 and the production control device 143.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the production control device 143 will be explained. The processing of the MPU 342 can be roughly divided into a main process that is started upon power-on, a normal process for effect control, and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Among these, the NMI interrupt processing is almost the same as the NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 15) in the main control device 162, so it will be explained with reference to FIG.

<NMI interrupt processing>
As shown in FIG. 15, in the NMI interrupt processing, first in step Sa11, data in the use register provided in the MPU 342 is saved to a predetermined storage area of the RAM 344 or to the backup RAM 345. In step Sa12, a power failure flag is set in the backup RAM 345. In step Sa13, the saved data is returned to the register used by the MPU 342, and then the NMI interrupt processing is ended. Note that if the power outage flag can be set without destroying the data in the use register of the MPU 342, the processes of step Sa11 and step Sa13 can be omitted.

<Main processing>
The main processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78. The main process is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while external power is supplied, or when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on) (when external power is supplied).

In step Sa5101, initial setting processing upon power-on is executed, and in step Sa5102, access to the RAM 344 and backup RAM 345 is permitted. In step Sa5103, the used area of the RAM 344 is cleared to 0, and in step Sa5104, initialization processing of the RAM 344 is executed. Thereafter, the main process ends, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

<Normal processing>
The normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 79.

First, in step Sa5201, power-on notification processing is executed. The power-on notification process is to perform a power-on notification corresponding to the fact that the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on.

If a power outage occurs in a situation where a game round is not in progress before the power is turned on, a message such as "The power has been turned on" will be displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 75 as the above-mentioned power-on notification. It is done in G. This message display continues for a predetermined period of time, and then a predetermined demo video is displayed.

Additionally, if a power outage occurs in the middle of a game and the game is resumed after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), a message such as ``The screen will be restored soon'' will be displayed as a power-on notification. is performed on display screen G. At that time, the main display unit 81 is in a state where the next game round is executed, but the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not displayed on the display screen G, and no variable display is performed due to them. Such a fluctuating display is performed from the start timing of the next game round (game round started after the power is turned on) after the power is turned on (after the power is restored). Note that the above message display is erased when the subsequent game round ends (when the next game round starts).

In addition, in both cases where a power outage occurs while a game session is not being executed or when a power outage condition occurs in the middle of a game session, sound is output from the speaker unit 29 while the power-on notification is being executed. is not performed, and a silent state is maintained. The sound output is performed from the start timing of the game round that starts after the power is turned on (or the next game round if the subsequent game round is played when the power is restored). With such a configuration, when the hall power supply to which multiple pachinko machines 10 are connected is turned on and the pachinko machines 10 are started up at the same time, each pachinko machine It is possible to suppress the sound from being outputted all at once from 10 and turning into noise.

In step Sa5202, processing for restoring the pending notice is executed to display the pending image in the display mode before the power outage. Details of this processing will be described later. Note that the processes of step Sa5201 and step Sa5202 are executed only when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

After executing step Sa5202, external signal output processing is executed at step Sa5203. In the external signal output processing, commands set in the previous normal processing are transmitted to the display control device 350, control signals for driving and controlling the various lamp sections 26 to 28 and the speaker section 29, etc. are transmitted. In step Sa5204, counter update processing is executed to update the counter values provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344.

In step Sa5205, a command reception process for receiving a command from the main control device 162 is executed. The command received by the command reception process is stored in the command storage area 344a of the RAM 344, as already explained. In step Sa5206, the effect setting process described with reference to FIG. 30 is executed.

In step Sa5207, it is determined whether a power outage flag is set in the backup RAM 345. If the power outage flag is not set, that is, if a power outage state has not occurred, the process advances to step Sa5208, and a determination is made as to whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing. It is determined whether or not (2 msec in this modification) has elapsed.

If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step Sa5203 and processes from step Sa5203 onwards are executed. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process waits until the predetermined time has elapsed. In this case, the remaining time may be used to update the values of various counters, similar to the normal processing in the main controller 162 (FIG. 20).

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step Sa5207 (the power outage flag is set), it means that a power outage state has occurred. In this case, the process advances to step Sa5209 to create pending image information indicating in which display mode each pending image was displayed before (immediately before) the power outage occurred. In this step, by referring to the effect scenario data for the hold preview effect stored in the RAM 344, it is determined whether there is a hold image displayed in a specific display mode or if such a hold image exists. , in which mode it is displayed, etc., and create pending image information based on the result of the understanding.

In step Sa5210, information regarding the pending image is stored in the backup RAM 345. At that time, in addition to the hold image information created in step Sa5209, the information stored in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is also stored in the backup RAM 345, and the hold image is displayed when the power is restored. It is stored and retained as information for The information stored in the storage area 344c for reservation includes reservation information (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, fluctuation type counter) stored in each area set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition to each value of CS, etc.), information indicating the number of pending items is included.

Note that the storage process of the pending image information created in step Sa5209 and the storage process of the information stored in the pending storage area 344c do not necessarily have to be performed in the same step, and it is not necessary to execute either one of the storage processes. After that, the other storage process may be executed.

In step Sa5211, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup RAM 345. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value of information regarding the pending image stored in the backup RAM 345. In step Sa5212, access to the RAM 344 and backup RAM 345 is prohibited, and thereafter, an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

<Process for returning suspended notice>
The process for restoring the suspended notice in step Sa5202 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 80.

First, in step Sa5301, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup RAM 345. If the power outage flag is not stored, it means that the power stored in the backup power supply section 316 has run out and the data stored in the backup RAM 345 has been lost. In this case, the process for restoring the suspended notice is ended.

If a power outage flag is stored, the process advances to step Sa5302 and a RAM determination value is calculated. In the following step Sa5303, it is determined whether the RAM determination value is normal. Specifically, the RAM judgment value calculated in step Sa5302 is compared with the RAM judgment value saved at the time of occurrence of the power outage state (step Sa5211), and it is determined whether the two match.

If the two do not match, the RAM judgment value is determined to be abnormal, and the data stored and held in the backup RAM 345 is recognized as invalid. In this case, the process for returning the suspended notice is ended. Note that the validity of the data stored and held in the backup RAM 345 can also be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the backup RAM 345 is correctly stored.

On the other hand, if the two match, the RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and the data stored and held in the backup RAM 345 is recognized as valid. In this case, the process advances to step Sa5304, and the data stored in the backup RAM 345 is referenced to determine the number of pending items at the time of occurrence of the power outage state.

In step Sa5305, it is determined whether the number of pending items determined in step Sa5304 is zero. If the number of pending items is 0, that is, if a power outage has occurred in a situation where no pending items exist, the process for restoring the pending notice is immediately terminated.

If the number of pending items is not 0, the process advances to step Sa5306 to execute display mode setting processing. This process is for setting the display mode of the hold image to be displayed after power is restored. Here, the display mode setting process in step Sa5306 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 81.

In step Sa5401, data stored in the backup RAM 345 is referenced to grasp the display mode of each pending image before (immediately before the occurrence of) a power outage state. In step Sa5402, based on the grasp result in step Sa5401, it is determined whether or not there is a pending image displayed in a specific display mode. If there are no pending images displayed in the specific display mode, the process advances to step Sa5403, and the display mode of all pending images is set to the normal display mode HMa.

If there is a hold image displayed in a specific display mode, the process advances to step Sa5404, and the display mode of the hold image (target hold image) is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode (for example, red display mode HMd). Determine whether or not. If the display mode of the target hold image is lower than the predetermined display mode (for example, green display mode HMc or blue display mode HMb), the process advances to step Sa5405, and the display mode of the hold image is changed to the state before the power cut. Set to a specific display mode. In step Sa5406, the display mode of the pending images other than the target pending image is set to the normal display mode HMa.

If the display mode of the target pending image is a predetermined display mode or higher (for example, red display mode HMd or rainbow color display mode HMe), the process advances to step Sa5407, and the display mode of the pending image is lower than the predetermined display mode. (for example, green display mode HMc). That is, if the display mode of the target pending image is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, the display mode of the target pending image at the time of power restoration is limited to a lower mode than the specific display mode before the power outage.

In step Sa5408, the display mode of the pending images other than the target pending image is set to the normal display mode HMa. In step Sa5409, a return notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The role of the return notice flag will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the process for restoring a pending notice (FIG. 80), after executing the display mode setting process in step Sa5306, each pending image is displayed in the display mode set in step Sa5306 in step Sa5307. The display control device 350 is controlled so as to In step Sa5308, the pending information and the like stored in the backup RAM 345 are stored (restored) in the corresponding area of the RAM 344. In step Sa5309, the power outage flag stored in the backup RAM 345 is erased, and thereafter, the process for restoring the suspended notice is ended.

<Special figure fluctuation display processing>
The special figure variation display processing according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 82. This process is executed in step Sa1305 of the production setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the special figure variation display process of FIG. 41. In FIG. 82, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 41, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified. Note that in FIG. 82, for convenience, the description of the first execution process of the pending notice is omitted.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa1804 and the variable display is in progress, a process for changing in progress is executed in step Sa1805. In step Sa5501, it is determined whether or not the current special figure game is the game of the pending image (target pending image) that was displayed in a specific display mode before the power outage. If it is not the game time of the target pending image, the special figure fluctuation display process is ended as it is.

If it is the game time of the target pending image, the fourth execution process of the pending notice is performed in step Sa5502, and then the special figure variation display process is ended. The fourth execution process of the suspension notice is for promoting the display mode of the target suspension image to a higher mode in the game round of the target suspension image.

<Fourth execution process of pending notice>
The fourth execution process for pending notice in step Sa5502 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 83.

First, in step Sa5601, it is determined whether a return notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The recovery notice flag indicates that when the power is restored, processing should be executed to change the display mode of the hold image that was set to a lower display mode than the specific display mode before the power outage to a higher mode. This is for the MPU 342 to understand. If the return notice flag is not stored, the fourth execution process of the suspended notice is ended.

If a return notice flag is stored, the process advances to step Sa5602, and it is determined whether a promotion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The promotion flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that the display mode of the target pending image should be promoted, and is similar to the promotion flag according to the first embodiment.

If the promotion flag is not stored, it is determined in step Sa5603 whether or not a determined flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If the determined flag is stored, the fourth execution process for pending notice is ended.

If the determined flag is not stored, the process advances to step Sa5604, and it is determined whether or not there are any pending change points remaining in the current game round. If there are no pending change points remaining, proceed to step Sa5611, erase the return notice flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d, and then end the fourth execution process of the pending notice. do.

If there are any pending change points remaining, the process advances to step Sa5605 to execute the process for promoting the pending notice, and then ends the fourth execution process for the pending notice. Here, the process for promoting a suspended notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84.

In the promotion process, first, in step Sa5701, the current display mode of the target pending image displayed in the execution display area D is grasped. Note that the current display mode is the display mode set in step Sa5407 of the display mode setting process (FIG. 81).

In step Sa5702, the fluctuation pattern of the target pending image is grasped. This understanding is performed based on the fluctuation start command (step Sa712 in FIG. 23) transmitted from the main controller 162 at the start of the game round (game round in progress) of the target pending image.

In step Sa5703, the promotion judgment of the pending preview performance is made based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa5701, the current display mode grasped in step Sa5702, and the promotion judgment table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. conduct. The promotion determination is to determine whether the display mode of the target pending image displayed in the execution display area D can be changed to a specific display mode higher than the current display mode.

Similar to the promotion determination table (FIG. 47) according to the first embodiment, the promotion determination table has an upper limit of the display mode determined in correspondence with each variation pattern. In step Sa5703, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern is specified with reference to the promotion determination table, and it is determined whether the current display mode is a lower display mode than the specified upper limit display mode. As a result, if the display mode is in a lower level, the display mode is allowed to be promoted, and if it is not, the promotion is not allowed.

After step Sa5703 is executed, a determined flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d in step Sa5704. The determined flag is for the MPU 342 to know that the promotion determination has been executed.

In step Sa5705, it is determined whether the result of the promotion determination in step Sa5703 allows promotion of the display mode. If the promotion is not permitted, the process exits the promotion process for the pending notice and proceeds to step Sa5611 (FIG. 83), the return notice flag is erased, and the fourth execution process for the pending notice ends.

If promotion is permitted, the process advances to step Sa5706 and a promotion scenario lottery process is executed. The promotion scenario determines at what timing (pending change point) the display mode of the target pending image displayed in the execution display area D is to be changed. The promotion scenario lottery is obtained from the promotion scenario lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343 and each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, similarly to step Sa2405 (FIG. 46) according to the first embodiment. This is done based on the lottery counter (random value).

At step Sa5707, promotion scenario data is set so that the promotion scenario selected at step Sa5706 is executed. In step Sa5708, a promotion flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d, and thereafter, the pending notice promotion process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the fourth execution process for pending notice (FIG. 83), if an affirmative determination is made in step Sa5602 (if the promotion flag is stored), the process advances to step Sa5606, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing to promote the display mode. Determine whether This determination is made based on the promotion scenario setting result in step Sa5707. If it is not the promotion timing, the fourth execution process for pending notice is ended.

If it is promotion timing, the process advances to step Sa5607, and the display mode to be changed (higher display mode) in the current change process is grasped based on the setting result of the promotion scenario. In the following step Sa5608, the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step Sa5607. Specifically, the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is changed by including information indicating which display mode to change to as an output command to the display control device 350. Set the command to indicate what should be done.

In step Sa5609, it is determined whether the display mode grasped in step Sa5607 or the display mode set as the change destination in step Sa5608 is the final display mode in the promotion effect. For example, if a promotion scenario is set to promote the display mode in multiple stages through multiple change processes, if the current change process is an intermediate step, it is assumed that it is not the final display mode. A negative determination is made in the step, and the fourth execution process for pending notice is ended.

If it is the final display mode, the promotion flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased in step Sa5610. In the following step Sa5611, the return notice flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased, and then the fourth execution process of the suspended notice is ended.

<About the display mode of the hold image before power outage and after power restoration>
The display mode of the hold image before power outage and after power restoration will be described. First, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 85 in which a hold image with the green display mode HMc exists before the power outage state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), in a situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, there are three pieces of hold information of the first special figure, and the hold information of the third unit hold display area Ga3 is It is assumed that the image HW is displayed in a green display mode HMc. If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears. Accordingly, all the pending images including the pending image HW are not displayed.

At this time, the production control device 143 stores information regarding the pending image in the backup RAM 345. Since power is supplied to the backup RAM 345 from the power source and launch control device 191 during a power outage for data retention, information regarding the hold image stored in the backup RAM 345 is retained even during a power outage state. .

Thereafter, when the power is restored after the power outage is resolved, the main controller 162 executes power restoration processing (steps Sa2004 to Sa2010 in FIG. 19) based on the data stored in the RAM 314. As a result, the continuation of the game round (game round of the first special figure) that was interrupted when the power outage state occurred is resumed on the special figure display section 43.

When the power is restored, the production control device 143 executes a power-on notification process (step Sa5201) for carrying out a power-on notification. As a result, a character display 461 such as "The screen will be restored soon" is displayed on the display screen G, for example.

In addition, the production control device 143 executes a process for returning the pending notice (step Sa5202) in order to restore the display of the pending image. In the processing for restoring the hold notice, based on the information related to the hold images stored in the backup RAM 345, the number of hold items and the display mode of each hold image before the occurrence of the power outage state is grasped, and the grasped It is determined whether or not there is an image displayed in a specific display mode among the pending images. If there is a hold image that was displayed in a specific display mode, it is determined whether the display mode is a predetermined display mode (for example, red display mode HMd) or higher, and restoration is performed based on the result. Set the display mode when the power is on.

Here, since the display mode before the power outage state occurs is the green display mode HMc, which is a lower mode than the predetermined display mode, the display mode of the hold image HW is the display mode before the power outage state occurs. Set it to do so. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85(b), each pending image is displayed on the display screen G in the same state as when the power outage state occurred.

In addition, since the information regarding the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is not backed up, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is not displayed in the above case. Therefore, the character display 461 as a power-on notification and each pending image restored based on the information related to the pending image stored in the backup RAM 345 are different from each other when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner. It is displayed on a power recovery background 462 that is different from the background. The power recovery background 462 is, for example, a monochrome background in a predetermined display color (for example, black).

Thereafter, when the continued game session that has been restarted ends, each pending image is shifted to the lower unit pending display area, as shown in FIG. 85(c). With the start of the next game round, symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen G, and the screen returns.

Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 86 in which a hold image with the red display mode HMd exists before the power outage state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), in a situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, there are three pieces of hold information of the first special figure, which are displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3. It is assumed that the pending image HW is displayed in a red display mode HMd. If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears.

Thereafter, when the power outage state is resolved and the power is restored, the continuation of the game round (game round of the first special figure) that was interrupted when the power outage state occurred is resumed on the special figure display section 43. In addition, the effect control device 143 executes a process for restoring the pending notice, and determines whether the specific display mode of the pending image HW before the occurrence of the power outage state is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode.

Here, the display mode of the hold image HW before the power outage occurs is the red display mode HMd, which is a predetermined display mode or higher, so that the display mode of the hold image HW before the power outage is The green display mode HMc is set to a lower level than the display mode HMc. As a result, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the display of each pending image is restored with the display mode of the pending image HW set to the green display mode HMc.

After that, when the timing for starting the game of the hold image HW comes, the production control device 143 grasps the fluctuation pattern of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW based on the fluctuation start command sent from the main control device 162. . Then, based on the variation pattern, it is determined whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher level display mode than the current display mode (green display mode HMc).

In other words, if the display mode before the power outage state is higher than the predetermined display mode, the display mode is temporarily restored to a lower display mode than the display mode before the power outage, and then the change start command sent at the start of the game session is Based on this, the display mode of the pending image HW is reset. As a result, if promotion to the red display mode HMd (higher display mode) is determined, the display mode of the pending image HW in the execution display area D is changed to the green display mode, as shown in FIG. 86(c). The red display mode is changed from HMc to HMd. In addition, since the game round performance (reach performance, etc.) carried out in the game round of the pending image HW is determined based on the fluctuation pattern analyzed from the fluctuation start command, promotion is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. The display mode of the pending image HW matches the above-mentioned game performance.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

If a power outage abnormality occurs in a situation where the target hold image HW is in a specific display mode (a situation where a hold notice effect is being executed), and the power is restored after the power outage abnormality is resolved, the power outage The display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration is set based on the display mode of the previous target hold image HW, and the hold preview performance is re-executed.

In this modified example, a hold preview effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, so the player is aware of the possibility of a jackpot result before the start of the game round. It can arouse a sense of expectation. Furthermore, since multiple types of specific display modes are set with different levels of jackpot expectation, it is possible to suggest different levels of expectation, which is advantageous in arousing players' sense of anticipation. It can be configured as follows. Under such a configuration, if a power outage abnormality occurs during execution of a hold notice performance and then power is restored, the hold notice performance that was being performed before the abnormality occurred is re-executed. Thereby, it is possible to restore the suspended preview performance after the abnormality is resolved, and it is suppressed that the suspended preview performance disappears due to the occurrence of the abnormality. At this time, since the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the display mode before the occurrence of the abnormality, it becomes possible to suitably restore the hold preview performance that was being performed before the power outage.

By storing information regarding the pending image in the backup RAM 345 when a power outage occurs, the configuration is such that information corresponding to the display mode of the pending image can be retained even after the power outage occurs.

According to the above configuration, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped due to the occurrence of a power outage state and the control regarding the pending image is stopped, the information held in the backup RAM 345 will be retained after the power is restored. By referring to it, it is possible to understand the display mode of the target hold image HW before the power is cut off. This makes it possible to suitably restore the display mode of the target holding image HW to the display mode before the power cut, when re-executing the hold preview effect after the power is restored.

If the display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage is a notification mode higher than the predetermined mode (green display mode HMc), the display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration is limited to a predetermined mode or below. And so.

For example, if there is a change in the reservation information stored in the reservation ball storage area 314b due to a power outage abnormality, the result of the reservation look-ahead performed before the power outage and the propriety of the game play after the power is restored will be displayed. An inconsistency occurs between the determination result and the selection result of the game rendition. In such a case, if the suspended notice performance indicates a high level of expectation before the power is cut off, and if it is re-executed after the power is restored, the notification result (result of the judgment) in the game round and the result in the game round will be different. There is a concern that the game performance to be performed will not match the level of expectation suggested by the pending notice performance, giving an unpleasant impression to the player.

In this regard, in the above configuration, if the type of specific display mode that was being used at the time of the power outage is a mode that is higher than the predetermined level and suggests a certain degree of expectation, the display mode is limited to the lower display mode and the display is suspended. Rerun. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pending notice performance from suggesting an expectation level that does not match the notification results, etc. in the game round, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

When the display mode of the target pending image HW is limited to a display mode below a predetermined mode, it is determined whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher display mode in the game round of the target pending image HW, and the result is The configuration is such that the promotion is executed based on the following.

In the above configuration, even if the display mode of the target pending image HW is limited to a display mode below a predetermined display mode, promotion to a higher display mode is achieved by playing the game round of the target pending image HW. Therefore, the suggested level of expectation is prevented from remaining low.

In the above case, the configuration is such that the determination as to whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher-level display mode is made based on the result of the validity determination made at the timing of the game round and the selection result of the variable pattern.

In the above configuration, a determination is made as to whether or not to promote the display mode of the target pending image HW, using the results after power restoration regarding the validity determination and the selection of the game round effect as a determination material. Thereby, the promotion can be performed while being consistent with the notification results etc. that are actually carried out in the game round after the power is restored.

In the power restoration process executed when the power is restored from a power outage state, the configuration is such that a setting process for re-executing the suspended notice performance (suspended notice recovery process) is executed.

In this case, when the power outage is resolved and the power is restored, the pending notice performance can be promptly re-executed. As a result, if a power outage occurs in the middle of a game and there is a period in which symbol fluctuations are not displayed on display screen G after the power is restored, a suspended notice performance will be performed prior to the restoration of the symbol fluctuation display. can be re-executed.

<Modification 6>
In the fifth modification of the first embodiment, the production control device 143 was provided with a backup RAM 345, but in this modification, it is not provided, and the production control device 143 has a backup function. do not have. This modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 87 to 91. Note that in these figures, the same components as those in the first embodiment and each modification are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The production control device 143 according to this modification has the same electrical configuration as the production control device 143 according to the first embodiment, and the backup RAM 345 is not provided. Further, it does not have a function to back up data stored in the RAM 344. Therefore, if a power outage occurs in a situation where a hold exists (a situation where a hold image is displayed on the hold display section 200), the hold information etc. held on the production control device 143 side will be Disappear.

In addition, in this modification, the signal line that transmits the power outage signal output from the power outage monitoring unit 315 of the launch control device 191 is not connected to the production control device 143, and the power outage signal is not input to the production control device 143. It is configured as follows.

Further, in this modification, in the reservation pre-reading process (FIG. 28) of the main control device 162, the processing result (pre-reading result of fluctuating pattern lottery etc.) is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b (FIG. 11) of the RAM 314. That is, in each area set in the reserved ball storage area 314b, in addition to the reservation information (the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS), the reservation made for the reservation information is stored. The prefetch results are stored.

The information regarding the result of the pre-reading process stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b continues to be stored in the RAM 314 without being erased even after the information is transmitted to the production control device 143. The reason for this configuration is to enable, when a power outage occurs and then power is restored, the result of the pending prefetch processing performed before the power outage to occur to be ascertained.

In other words, in a normal pachinko machine, the main control device 162 executes the hold pre-reading process, and after transmitting the result as a hold command etc. to the performance control device 143, the pre-reading result is sent to the control process on the main control device 162 side. Since the information is not used for other purposes, there is no need to leave the information on the main controller 162 side. For this reason, after sending the information to the production control device 143, it is common to release the area in which the information regarding the prefetch results was stored and erase the information by overwriting the prefetch results, etc. for the subsequent pending information. It is.

On the other hand, in this modification, even after transmitting the information regarding the pre-reading result to the production control device 143, the information is stored in the RAM 314. When a power outage occurs, power for power outage is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191 to the RAM 314, and the information in the RAM 314 is held without being erased. Therefore, by using a configuration like this modified example, it is possible to retain information regarding the look-ahead results in the event of a power outage, and when the power is restored after a power outage, the information before the power outage occurs It becomes possible to understand the results of pending read-ahead processing performed in the past.

Note that the information regarding the prefetch results stored in the RAM 314 does not continue to be stored permanently, but is erased when the pending information is erased. That is, in response to the execution of the game round of the pending information that has been subjected to the pending pre-reading process, the information regarding the pre-reading result in the RAM 314 is erased.

By the way, the reason why the storage area for the information regarding the pre-reading result is set as the reserved ball storage area 314b is to understand which pending information the information regarding the pre-reading result corresponds to, and to prevent other information from being overwritten inadvertently. This is done in consideration of convenience when allocating areas. Therefore, the storage area for this information does not necessarily need to be the reserved ball storage area 314b, and may be another storage area in the RAM 314.

The processing performed by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be explained.

<Main processing>
The main processing according to this modification will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87(a). This process is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and is executed in place of the main process shown in FIG. 19. In FIG. 87(a), the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 19, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa2003 (the RAM erase switch is not pressed), it is determined in step Sa2004 whether or not a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314. If a power outage flag is stored, that is, if power is restored with the data in the RAM 314 stored and held after a power outage occurs, a RAM determination value is calculated in step Sa2005.

In step Sa2006, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value is normal or not. If it is normal, the stack pointer is restored in step Sa2007. In step Sa2008, a power restoration command is output.

In step Sa6101, a power restoration hold command is set based on the information stored and held in the held ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314, and is output to the production control device 143. The command for holding at the time of power recovery includes information indicating the number of items on hold at the time of occurrence of a power outage state, information indicating the result of pre-reading of holdings performed before the occurrence of a power outage state, and the like. After executing step Sa6101, the process of step Sa2009 (erasing the power outage flag) is executed.

The processing performed by the MPU 342 of the production control device 143 will be explained.

<Normal processing>
The normal processing according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 87(b). This process is executed in place of the normal process in FIG. 79. As shown in FIG. 87(b), the normal processing according to this modification does not include backup processing for pending information in the event of a power outage state.

Specifically, in the normal process shown in FIG. 79 according to the fifth modification, it is checked in step Sa5207 whether or not a power outage flag is stored in the backup RAM 345 to determine whether there is a power outage state, and if the power outage flag is If it is stored (when a power outage state occurs), the processes of steps Sa5209 to Sa5212 are executed, but these processes are not provided in the normal process of FIG. 87(b) according to this modification. do not have. In addition, in the normal process shown in FIG. 79 according to the fifth modification of the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the process for returning the suspended notice is executed in step Sa5202, but in this modification In the normal process shown in FIG. 87(b), such a process is not provided, and after the power-on notification process in step Sa5201 is executed, the external output process in step Sa5203 is executed.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process according to this modification will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 88. This process is executed in step Sa5206 of the normal process (FIG. 87(b)), and is executed in place of the effect setting process of FIG. 30. In FIG. 88, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 30, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sa6201, it is determined whether a power restoration hold command from the main controller 162 has been received. The power restoration hold command is output when the power is restored from a power outage state (step Sa6101 in FIG. 87(a)), and the command includes information indicating the number of items held at the time of the power outage state. It also includes information indicating the result of pending prefetching performed before the occurrence of the power outage state.

If the power recovery hold command has been received, the process advances to step Sa6202, and the number of items held at the time of the power outage state is determined based on the power recovery hold command from the main controller 162. In step Sa6203, it is determined whether the number of pending items determined in step Sa6202 is zero. If the number of pending images is not 0, the process advances to step Sa6204, and a display mode setting process is executed to set the display mode of the pending image after the power is restored. Here, the display mode setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 89.

First, in step Sa6301, the fluctuation pattern of each piece of hold information is grasped based on the hold command upon power recovery from the main controller 162. This fluctuation pattern is pre-read by the pending pre-read process (FIG. 28) of the main controller 162 before the power outage state occurs. Since the hold command at power restoration includes information on fluctuation patterns for the number of hold items grasped in step Sa6202, all of these fluctuation patterns are grasped in this step.

Note that if you send a power-return-on-hold command that includes information on fluctuation patterns for the number of items on hold, it is assumed that the amount of data will become large or that the information on the fluctuation patterns will not be able to be accommodated. The information may be sent in multiple parts. Specifically, a configuration may be adopted in which first, a power recovery hold command is transmitted in a form that does not include information on the fluctuation pattern, and then information on the fluctuation pattern of each hold information is sequentially transmitted following the command.

In step Sa6302, it is determined whether or not there is pending jackpot information based on the grasp result in step Sa6301. Specifically, it is checked whether the fluctuation patterns grasped in step Sa6301 include a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a jackpot, and whether there is pending information in which a jackpot was read in advance before the power outage state occurred. Determine whether or not.

If the jackpot pending information exists, the process advances to step Sa6303, and the display mode of the pending image corresponding to the pending information is set to the first specific display mode. The first specific display mode is a specific display mode lower than the rainbow color display mode HMe, which is the upper limit of the final display mode selected when a jackpot is predicted, and is, for example, the green display mode HMc.

In step Sa6304, a return notice flag is set in association with the pending image (target pending image). The return notice flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that a process (promotion process) for changing the display mode of the target pending image should be executed in the game round of the target pending image. Note that the return notice flag may be stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, or may be stored in the corresponding area ( (area corresponding to the target pending image).

After executing step Sa6304 or if a negative determination is made in step Sa6302 (if there is no jackpot pending information), in step Sa6305, it is determined that a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach effect exists among the fluctuation patterns grasped in step Sa6301. Determine whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the variation patterns 5H, 6H, 12H, 13H, 24H, and 25H exists. This step is to determine whether or not the pending information whose look-ahead result before the power outage is a negative result includes information that corresponds to a reach effect where the ranking of the jackpot expectation level is higher than a predetermined level. .

If there is a variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach effect, the process proceeds to step Sa6306, and the display mode of the pending image corresponding to the pending information in which the variation pattern is read in advance is set to the second specific display mode. The second specific display mode is a display mode lower than the first specific display mode, and is, for example, a blue display mode HMb. In step Sa6307, a return notice flag is set in association with the pending image.

After executing step Sa6307 or if a negative determination is made in step Sa6305 (if there is no variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach effect), in step Sa6308, it is determined whether there is pending information for which a variation pattern cannot be ascertained in step Sa6301. Determine. If the fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped, some of the information indicating the look-ahead results may be damaged due to a power outage, or some data may be damaged due to the influence of noise etc. when sending the hold command when power is restored. There may be cases where the

If there is hold information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped, the process advances to step Sa6309, and the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa. In step Sa6310, a return notice flag is set in association with the pending image.

After executing step Sa6310 or if a negative determination is made in step Sa6308 (if there is no pending information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped), in step Sa6311, the remaining pending images (the display mode is set in steps Sa6302 to Sa6310). The display mode of the pending image) is set to the normal display mode HMa.

Returning to the explanation of the effect setting process (FIG. 88), after executing the display mode setting process in step Sa6204, the hold image of the display mode set in the setting process is displayed on the display screen G in step Sa6205. The display control device 350 is controlled so as to be displayed. After executing step Sa6205, the process advances to step Sa1301, and thereafter the processes of steps Sa1301 to Sa1308 are executed.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa6201 (if a power recovery hold command has not been received), the process skips steps Sa6202 to Sa6205 and proceeds to step Sa1301. Further, if a negative determination is made in step Sa6203 (if the number of pending items is 0), the process skips steps Sa6204 and Sa6205 and proceeds to step Sa1301.

As a result of the above processing, when the power is restored after a power outage occurs, the pending image of the pending information in which the jackpot result was read in advance is displayed in the first specific display mode, creating a reach effect with a high jackpot expectation. The pending image of the pending information for which the corresponding missing result has been read in advance is displayed in the second specific display mode. After that, the display mode of the target pending image is promoted by performing the fourth execution process of the pending notice in step Sa5502 in the specific variation display process (FIG. 82). That is, the display mode of the target pending image is reset based on the fluctuation start command transmitted after the power is restored. It should be noted that the fourth execution process of the pending notice is the same as that of the fifth modification, so the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the display mode of the hold image before power outage and after power restoration>
The display mode of the hold image before power outage and after power restoration will be described. First, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 90 in which the jackpot result has been read in advance before the power outage state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), in a situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, there are three pieces of hold information of the first special figure, and the hold information of the third unit hold display area Ga3 is It is assumed that the image HW is displayed in a red display mode HMd. The pre-reading result of the pending information corresponding to the pending image HW is a jackpot result, and the pre-reading results of pending information corresponding to other pending images are all lose results (completely missed).

If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears. Accordingly, all the pending images including the pending image HW are not displayed.

At this time, the RAM 314 of the main controller 162 is supplied with power during power outage for data retention from the power supply and launch control device 191, so the data stored in the RAM 314 is retained even during the power outage state. be done. Note that the data stored in the RAM 314 includes the processing results of the pending prefetching process (step Sa305) performed on the pending information of each pending image before the power outage state occurs.

Thereafter, when the power is restored after the power outage is resolved, the main controller 162 executes power restoration processing (steps Sa2004 to Sa2010) based on the data stored in the RAM 314. As a result, the continuation of the game round (game round of the first special figure) that was interrupted when the power outage state occurred is resumed on the special figure display section 43.

In addition, at the time of power restoration, the main control device 162 includes, among the data stored in the RAM 314, information indicating the number of reservations, information indicating whether each reservation information corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, The result information (variation pattern) of the suspension prefetching process for each suspension information is read out and transmitted to the production control device 143 as a suspension command at power restoration (step Sa6101).

In the production control device 143, based on the above-mentioned various information transmitted from the main control device 162, a process for restoring the display of the pending image is executed (steps Sa6202 to Sa6205). In this process, the display mode of the pending image HW in which the jackpot result has been read in advance is set to the first specific display mode (green display mode HMc), and the display mode of the other pending images is set to the normal display mode HMa. . At this time, if there is hold information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped, the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 90(b), the display mode of the pending image HW is set to the green display mode HMc, and the display mode of the other pending images is set to the normal display mode HMa, and each pending image Image display is restored. When the power is restored, the production control device 143 executes a power-on notification process (step Sa5201) to notify the power-on, so the display screen G displays, for example, text such as "The screen will be restored soon." Display 461 is displayed. Therefore, each pending image whose display has been restored is displayed together with the character display 461.

After that, when the timing for starting the game of the hold image HW comes, the production control device 143 grasps the fluctuation pattern of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW based on the fluctuation start command sent from the main control device 162. . Then, based on the variation pattern, it is determined whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher level display mode than the current display mode (green display mode HMc).

In other words, the pending image HW of the pending information in which the jackpot result was read in advance before the power outage state occurred is once displayed in a manner limited to a predetermined or lower display mode (first specific display mode), and the display mode is limited to the display mode below a predetermined value (first specific display mode). The display mode of the hold image HW is reset based on the fluctuation start command sent at the time. As a result, if promotion to a higher display mode (red display mode HMd or rainbow color display mode HMe) is determined, the hold image HW is displayed in the execution display area D as shown in FIG. 90(c). The display mode is changed to a higher level mode (for example, red display mode HMd).

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern ascertained from the fluctuation start command sent at the start of the game round of the pending image HW does not correspond to a jackpot, that is, if the jackpot is not notified in the relevant game round. is not allowed to be promoted to a higher display mode, and the display mode of the pending image HW in the execution display area D is maintained in the first specific display mode.

Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 91 in which the SP out-of-reach result and the SPSP out-of-reach result are pre-read before the occurrence of the power outage state.

As shown in FIG. 91(a), in a situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, there are three pieces of hold information of the first special figure, and the hold information of the first unit hold display area Ga1 is It is assumed that the image HW1 for holding is displayed in a blue display mode HMb, and the holding image HW in the third unit holding display area Ga3 is displayed in a green display mode HMc.

The result of pre-reading the reservation information corresponding to the reservation image HW1 is a variation pattern 3H (outside SP reach A), and the result of pre-reading the reservation information corresponding to the reservation image HW2 is a variation pattern 6H (outside SPSP reach B). Note that the pre-reading result of the reservation information corresponding to the reservation image in the second unit reservation display area Ga2 is a variation pattern 1H (completely off).

If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears. Thereafter, when the power outage state is resolved and the power is restored, the continuation of the game round (game round of the first special figure) that was interrupted when the power outage state occurred is resumed on the special figure display section 43.

In addition, the production control device 143 executes processing for restoring the display of the suspension image based on the suspension command upon power recovery transmitted from the main control device 162 (steps Sa6202 to Sa6205). At this time, for the hold image HW1 for which the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern 3H) corresponding to SP out-of-reach has been read in advance, its display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, and the SPSP out-of-reach situation of a higher rank is handled. Regarding the hold image HW2 for which the variation pattern (variation pattern 6H) has been read in advance, its display mode is set to the second specific display mode (blue display mode HMb).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 91(b), the display mode of the pending image HW1 is set to the normal display mode HMa, and the display mode of the pending image HW2 is set to the blue display mode HMb, and each pending image The display will be restored. In other words, the pending image of the pending information corresponding to the out-of-reach performance below the predetermined ranking is displayed in the normal display mode HMa, regardless of whether it was displayed in the specific display mode before the power outage state occurred. , the reservation image of the reservation information corresponding to the reach performance of a predetermined rank or higher is displayed in a display mode that is limited to a predetermined or lower display mode (second specific display mode).

When the game round of the pending image HW2 is executed, the determination of promotion to a higher display mode is performed in the same way as in the case where the jackpot result is read in advance as explained with reference to FIG. 90. , the explanation is omitted.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

If a power outage abnormality occurs in a situation where the target hold image HW is in a specific display mode (a situation where a hold notice effect is being executed), and the power is restored after the power outage abnormality is resolved, the power outage The configuration is such that the display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration is set based on the result of the previously performed hold look-ahead process, and the hold preview effect is re-executed.

In this modified example, a hold preview effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, so the player is aware of the possibility of a jackpot result before the start of the game round. It can arouse a sense of expectation. Furthermore, since multiple types of specific display modes are set with different levels of jackpot expectation, it is possible to suggest different levels of expectation, which is advantageous in arousing players' sense of anticipation. It can be configured as follows. Under such a configuration, if a power outage abnormality occurs during execution of a hold notice performance and then power is restored, the hold notice performance that was being performed before the abnormality occurred is re-executed. Thereby, it is possible to restore the suspended preview performance after the abnormality is resolved, and it is suppressed that the suspended preview performance disappears due to the occurrence of the abnormality. At this time, since the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process before the occurrence of the abnormality, it becomes possible to suitably re-execute the hold preview effect after the power is restored.

By storing the validity results, variation patterns, etc. pre-read by the reservation pre-reading process in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314, the configuration is such that information corresponding to the above-mentioned pre-read results can be retained even after the occurrence of a power outage state.

In the above configuration, when a power outage occurs, the information corresponding to the prefetch result is retained without being lost. Therefore, after the power is restored, the display mode of the target pending image HW is based on the information retained in the RAM 314. This makes it possible to suitably re-execute the suspended notice performance after the power is restored.

In the case of executing the hold preview performance after power restoration, the display mode of the target hold image HW is limited to a predetermined mode (green display mode HMc) or less.

For example, if there is a change in the reservation information stored in the reservation ball storage area 314b due to a power outage abnormality, the result of the reservation look-ahead performed before the power outage and the propriety of the game play after the power is restored will be displayed. An inconsistency occurs between the determination result and the selection result of the game rendition. In such a case, if the suspended notice performance indicates a high level of expectation before the power is cut off, and if it is re-executed after the power is restored, the notification result (result of the judgment) in the game round and the result in the game round will be different. There is a concern that the game performance to be performed will not match the level of expectation suggested by the pending notice performance, giving an unpleasant impression to the player. In this regard, in the above configuration, if the type of specific display mode that was being used at the time of the power outage is a mode that is higher than the predetermined level and suggests a certain degree of expectation, the display mode is limited to the lower display mode and the display is suspended. Rerun. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pending notice performance from suggesting an expectation level that does not match the notification results, etc. in the game round, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

When the display mode of the target pending image HW is limited to a display mode below a predetermined mode, it is determined whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher display mode in the game round of the target pending image HW, and the result is The configuration is such that the promotion is executed based on the following.

In the above configuration, even if the display mode of the target pending image HW is limited to a display mode below a predetermined display mode, promotion to a higher display mode is achieved by playing the game round of the target pending image HW. Therefore, the suggested level of expectation is prevented from remaining low.

In the above case, the configuration is such that the determination as to whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher-level display mode is made based on the result of the validity determination made at the timing of the game round and the selection result of the variable pattern.

In the above configuration, a determination is made as to whether or not to promote the display mode of the target pending image HW, using the results after power restoration regarding the validity determination and the selection of the game round effect as a determination material. Thereby, the promotion can be performed while being consistent with the notification results etc. that are actually carried out in the game round after the power is restored.

After the power is restored, if the result of the pending prefetch process performed before the power outage cannot be specified, the display mode of the target pending image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa.

For example, if it is not possible to determine the result of the pending prefetching process that was performed for some pending images before the power outage, if the display of those pending images itself is canceled, the number of pending images cannot be properly notified to players. There are concerns that it will disappear. In addition, when re-executing the hold preview effect using a hold image for which the result of the hold look-ahead process can be specified (the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode), if the hold preview effect cannot be specified for the hold look-ahead process, If the image display is missing, the order of the reserved image set as a specific display mode and the game round may be out of sync, and there is a risk that the expectation level may be suggested by corresponding to a different game round. . In this regard, in this configuration, a holding image in which the result of the holding look-ahead processing performed before the power outage can be specified is distinguished from a holding image in which the result cannot be specified, and the display mode for the latter is redisplayed as the normal display mode HMa. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the number of reservations and to suitably perform a reservation notice effect in other reservation images.

When the power is restored from a power outage state, the main control device 162 outputs a hold command when the power is restored to the production control device 143, and based on the reception of the hold command when the power is restored in the production control device 143, the pending notice performance is restarted. The configuration is configured to execute setting processing (display mode setting processing) for execution.

In this case, when the power outage is resolved and the power is restored, the hold notice effect can be promptly re-executed. As a result, if a power outage occurs in the middle of a game round and there is a period in which symbol fluctuations are not displayed on the display screen G after the power is restored, a suspended notice performance will be performed prior to the restoration of the symbol fluctuation display. can be re-executed.

<Modification 7>
This modification is configured to restrict switching of the production mode when the hold image is displayed in a specific display mode. This modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. Note that in these figures, the same components as those in the first embodiment and each modification are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the production mode was configured to be switched by manual operation, but in this modification, the production mode can be automatically switched without operating the production operation section 36. It is composed of It should be noted that the production mode includes production mode A and production mode B, and these are different in the frequency of occurrence of pending preview production, similar to the first embodiment. Specifically, performance mode A functions as a mode in which the pending preview performance is likely to be executed and it is easy to enjoy the performance, and performance mode B functions as a mode in which the pending preview performance is difficult to execute, but it is possible to win a jackpot if it is executed. It is configured to function as a high expectation mode.

<Processing for switching production mode>
The production mode switching process according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 92. This process is executed in step Sa1307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the effect mode switching process of FIG. 42.

First, in step Sa7101, it is determined whether it is the lottery timing for switching the production mode. In this modification, a period in which the game is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which the game is in a normal gaming state and in which a performance that spans multiple game rounds such as a continuous performance is not performed) is set as the effective period for switching the performance mode. During the switching validity period, the lottery for switching the production mode is performed at a predetermined timing in each game round (for example, at the start timing of the game round). In this step, it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the switching lottery. If it is not the lottery timing for switching the performance mode, the process for switching the performance mode is directly ended in order to maintain the current performance mode.

If it is the lottery timing for switching the production mode, the process proceeds to step Sa7102, and a first mode switching lottery is executed to perform a lottery for executing production mode switching. In this step, the lottery is performed based on the lottery counters (random numbers) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the first mode switching lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The first mode switching lottery table is a lottery table for determining whether or not to switch the production mode. Note that this table may have a common winning probability regardless of the type of performance mode in which the user is staying, or may have a winning probability that varies depending on the performance mode in which the player is staying.

In step Sa7103, it is determined whether the lottery result in step Sa7102 is a winning result. If the lottery result is a losing result, the production mode switching process is directly ended in order to maintain the current production mode.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process advances to step Sa7104 and mode switching determination processing is executed. The mode switching determination process is for determining whether or not to allow switching of the production mode. Here, the mode switching determination process in step Sa7104 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 93.

First, in step Sa7201, the current number of pending items is determined by referring to the pending storage area 344c of the RAM 344. In step Sa7202, it is determined whether the number of pending items determined in step Sa7201 is zero. If the number of pending items is 0, it is determined in step Sa7203 that the performance mode switching is allowed, and then the mode switching determination process is ended.

If the number of pending images is not 0, the current display mode of each pending image is determined in step Sa7204. In the following step Sa7205, the pending display displayed in a specific display mode (one of the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow color display mode HMe) based on the grasp result of step Sa7204. Determine whether the image exists. If there is no pending image in the specific display mode, the process advances to step Sa7203, and it is determined that the production mode switching is allowed.

If there is a pending image in the specific display mode, it is determined in step Sa7206 whether or not the current mode switching is from production mode A to production mode B. In other words, whether or not the switching is from a performance mode with a high occurrence frequency of pending preview performances to a performance mode with a low occurrence frequency (in other words, a switch from a performance mode with a low jackpot expectation level of pending preview performances to a high side. (Whether or not it is switching to production mode.)

In the case of switching to production mode B, the process proceeds to step Sa7207, and it is determined whether or not the pre-read result for the reservation information of the reservation image displayed in the specific display mode is a jackpot result. If the pre-reading result is not a jackpot result, it is determined in step Sa7208 that the performance mode switching is not permitted, and thereafter, the mode switching determination process is ended. In general, in a win/fail judgment, the winning probability is much higher than the winning probability (jackpot probability), and most of the results of pending look-ahead are incorrect results, so most of the judgment results in step Sa7207 above are negative judgments. This means that switching the production mode will not be allowed. That is, in the case of switching to production mode B, in a situation where a pending image of a specific display mode exists, switching of production modes is basically not allowed and is restricted.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa7207 (if the look-ahead result is a jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sa7209, where a second mode switching lottery is executed to perform a mode switching re-lottery. In this step, the lottery is performed based on the lottery counters (random numbers) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the second mode switching lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The second mode switching lottery table, like the first mode switching lottery table, is a lottery table for determining whether or not to switch the production mode. The winning probability in the second mode switching lottery table may be the same as or different from the winning probability in the first mode switching lottery table.

In step Sa7210, it is determined whether the lottery result in step Sa7209 is a winning result. If the lottery result is a losing result, the process proceeds to step Sa7208, and it is determined that the performance mode switching is not permitted.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process proceeds to step Sa7203, and it is determined that switching to the production mode is permitted. That is, in some cases where the pre-reading result is a jackpot result, switching of the performance mode is exceptionally allowed even in a situation where a pending image of a specific display mode is displayed.

As already explained, in a situation where there is a pending image in a specific display mode and there is no pre-reading pending jackpot, switching the production mode is not allowed, and even if there is a pre-reading pending jackpot. If the second mode switching lottery is also unsuccessful, switching of the performance mode is not allowed. That is, it is a rare case that switching of performance modes is allowed in a situation where a reserved image of a specific display mode exists, so the player recognizes that the rules are broken and the performance is guaranteed to be a jackpot.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa7206 above (if the switching is from production mode B to production mode A), that is, if the switching is from a production mode with a low occurrence frequency of pending notice production to a production mode with a high occurrence frequency. (In other words, when switching from a presentation mode with a high jackpot expectation level to a presentation mode with a low expectation level of the pending preview presentation), in step Sa7211, the pending image displayed in the specific display mode is It is determined whether the display mode is equal to or higher than a predetermined mode (for example, green display mode HMc).

If the display mode is a mode lower than the predetermined mode (for example, blue display mode HMb), the process proceeds to step Sa7203, and it is determined that the production mode switching is allowed. In other words, in the case of switching to production mode A, even if a pending image of a specific display mode is displayed, switching of the production mode is permitted as long as the display mode is lower than the predetermined display mode. . In this case, the production mode is switched while the specific display mode of the pending image is maintained. Note that when the form of the holding image changes depending on the production mode, the form is changed and its display color is set to the same display color as before the mode switching.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa7211 above (when the display mode is the predetermined mode or higher), in step Sa7207, for the pending image whose display mode is the predetermined mode or higher, the result of pre-reading the pending information is the jackpot result. Determine whether or not. Thereafter, the processes of steps Sa7208 to Sa7210 are executed, and the production mode is allowed to be switched on the condition that the second mode switching lottery is won.

Returning to the explanation of the production mode switching process (FIG. 92), after executing the mode switching determination process in step Sa7104, it is determined in step Sa7105 whether the result of the determination process in step Sa7104 allows mode switching. Determine whether or not. If the result is that the mode switching is not permitted, the production mode switching process is directly ended in order to maintain the current production mode.

If the result is that mode switching is permitted, the process advances to step Sa7106, and a switching process for switching the production mode is executed. For example, if the current performance mode is performance mode A, the performance data is set so as to switch to performance mode B. Note that the switching of the performance mode may be performed at the start timing of the game round, or may be performed during the game round.

In step Sa7107, the production mode flag corresponding to the production mode after switching is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the production mode switching process is ended.

In addition, in this modification, the second execution process of the pending notice in step Sa1702 in the shift command response process (FIG. 40), the third execution process in step Sa1808 in the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41), Processing associated with them is not executed.

<About production mode switching restrictions>
A manner of restricting switching of the production mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 94. First, the case of switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B will be described with reference to FIG. 94(a).

When it is time to switch the performance mode, if there is no hold, or if there is no hold image in a specific display mode even if there is hold, the change of the performance mode is allowed.

If there is a pending image in a specific display mode, switching of the production mode is basically not allowed. In other words, from production mode A in which the frequency of occurrence of pending notice performances is relatively high (a production mode in which the jackpot expectation level of pending notice performances is relatively low) to production mode B in which the occurrence frequency of pending notice performances is relatively low (a production mode in which the jackpot expectation level of pending notice performances is relatively low). When switching to a production mode (high performance mode), switching of the production mode is restricted on the condition that a pending image of a specific display mode exists.

However, even if there is a pending image in a specific display mode, if there is one in which the jackpot result has been read in advance, switching of the production mode is allowed as an exception. In this case, as already explained, the performance will be such that a jackpot is guaranteed due to the contradiction in the performance. In addition, when there is pending information in which the jackpot result is pre-read, and the display mode is the normal display mode HMa, it is assumed that there is no pending image in the specific display mode and switching of the performance mode is allowed.

Next, the case of switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A will be described with reference to FIG. 94(b).

When it is time to switch the production mode, if there is no hold, or if there is no hold image in a specific display mode even if there is a hold, the same as when switching from production mode A to production mode B, Switching of production modes is allowed.

If there is a pending image in a specific display mode, whether or not mode switching is allowed depends on the display mode. Specifically, when the display mode of the pending image displayed in the specific display mode is a display mode lower than the predetermined display mode (blue display mode HMb), switching of the production mode is allowed. In other words, from production mode B in which the frequency of occurrence of pending preview performances is relatively low (a production mode in which the jackpot expectation level of pending preview performances is relatively high) to production mode A (a production mode in which the jackpot expectation level of pending preview performances is relatively high). When switching to a production mode with a lower level of performance), the switching restrictions are more relaxed than when the opposite is true. In this case, the display mode for the pending picture is not changed to the normal display mode HMa, and the specific display mode before the mode switching is maintained.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the pending image is a display mode higher than the predetermined display mode, switching of the performance mode is not allowed unless there is a pre-read jackpot result. In other words, when the player is informed of a certain level of expectation through the pending advance notice performance, switching of the performance mode is restricted.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

The system is configured to restrict switching of the performance mode when a hold preview effect is being executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode.

In this modified example, a hold preview effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, so the player is aware of the possibility of a jackpot result before the start of the game round. It can arouse a sense of expectation. Furthermore, since mode switching is performed between performance mode A and performance mode B, it is possible to change the player's mood during the game and prevent him from getting bored with the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the production mode is switched while the pending preview performance is being executed, the attention to the pending preview performance may decrease due to being distracted by the change of the production mode, or conversely, the performance mode may be switched while the pending preview performance is being executed. As a result of concentrated concentration, there is a concern that the performance mode may be changed without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, in this configuration, since switching of the production mode is restricted when the pending preview performance is being executed, it is possible to suppress the execution of the pending preview performance and the switching of the performance mode from overlapping. As a result, the execution of the pending notice performance and the switching of the performance mode can be carried out in such a way that it is easy for the player to pay attention to each of them, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. In addition, if the production mode after switching is not suitable for the pending preview production in progress, advance adjustment is required to make both compatible when designing the production, but with this configuration, such adjustment is not possible. There is also the advantage that it becomes unnecessary and the burden at the time of design can be reduced.

The performance mode A and the performance mode B are configured to have different ease of execution of the pending notice performance.

In such a configuration, switching the production mode changes the production characteristics related to the expectation of jackpot, so compared to cases where the change is limited to only the appearance by changing the background image or character image, the difference between the production modes is more noticeable in the game. can make a strong impression on people. However, on the other hand, if the performance mode is switched while the pending preview performance is being executed, there is a risk that the level of expectation suggested by the pending preview performance will be different before and after switching the performance mode. In this case, there is a concern that in the performance mode after switching, the level of expectation suggested by the pending advance notice performance and the actually notified result of the propriety determination will be different, giving an unpleasant impression to the player. By applying this modification (a configuration that restricts switching of production modes when a pending preview production is in progress) to such a configuration, the occurrence of the above-mentioned discrepancy can be avoided and an unpleasant impression given to the player can be avoided. It becomes possible to suitably suppress giving of

The performance mode B is a performance mode in which the pending preview performance is more difficult to be executed than the performance mode A, and is configured to restrict switching to the performance mode B when the pending preview performance is executed in the performance mode A.

If the ease of execution of the pending notice performance in production mode B is lower than that in production mode A, if you switch from production mode A to production mode B while the pending notice production is still being executed, the apparent expectation level will increase. Therefore, there is a concern that players may have higher expectations than they actually have. In this regard, in this configuration, it is difficult to execute the pending notice performance from production mode A in which the pending notice performance is likely to be executed (the expectation level corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low). When switching to production mode B (highly expected), if a pending preview production is in progress, the execution of the switch is restricted, so it is possible to suitably suppress the suggestion of a higher level of expectation than the actual level. become.

If a pending preview performance is being executed in production mode A, switching to production mode B is basically restricted, but as an exception if the pending preview performance that triggered the pending preview performance is a jackpot result. The configuration allows switching to production mode B.

In this case, even though the switching of production modes is not normally performed, the switching occurs, which breaks the rules from the player's perspective, and can suggest a jackpot. In other words, it becomes possible to utilize the switching of the presentation mode as one of the presentations suggesting the degree of expectation.

If the conditions for switching to production mode A are met when a pending preview production is being executed in production mode B, whether to restrict switching to production mode A depending on the type of specific display mode when the switching condition is met. The configuration is such that the results are different.

If a configuration that uniformly restricts the switching of production modes when a pending preview performance is being executed, there is a risk that the switching of production modes may be excessively restricted or the execution frequency of the pending preview performance may be suppressed. , there is a concern that the significance of providing multiple types of presentation modes and the significance of having a function to execute a pending notice presentation will be diminished. In this regard, in this configuration, when switching from production mode B, which has a high expectation level and corresponds to a pending notice performance, to production mode A, which has a low expectation level, and which corresponds to a pending notice performance, the restrictions on mode switching are relaxed, and the switching Switching is permitted on the condition that the specific display mode when the condition is satisfied is equal to or less than a predetermined mode (green display mode HMc). For this reason, it is possible to prevent switching of production modes and execution of a pending notice production from being excessively restricted, and it is possible to suitably secure such opportunities.

<Modification 8>
In this modification, execution of the pending notice performance is restricted when the performance mode is switched. This modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99. Note that in these figures, the same components as those in the first embodiment and each modification are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modification, a switching guidance notification is given during the production mode switching validity period, and when the player operates the production operation unit 36 while the notification is being made, the production mode will be switched from the next game round. It is composed of Here, an example of such mode switching will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), a switching guide image 451 as a switching guide notification is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 in a predetermined game time during the effect mode switching period. This switching guide image 451 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, until the end of the game).

In FIG. 95(a), as a display example of the switching guide image 451, a text message such as "Press the production button will switch the production mode" is displayed as a caption above the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. It shows. Note that the switching guidance notification is not limited to this, and may also include displaying a window in which the above characters are displayed, or causing a predetermined light emitting unit to emit light corresponding to the switching guidance. . Further, the notification is not necessarily limited to visual notification, but may be audio guidance using the speaker section 29.

In such a state, when the player performs a predetermined operation using the performance operation section 36, a switching standby notification is performed. The switching standby notification is for notifying that the switching of the production mode is on standby. The specific form of the switching standby notification is not particularly limited, but for example, as shown in FIG. One that displays an image 452 is conceivable.

When the game round in which the switching standby image 452 was displayed ends and the game moves on to the next playing round, as shown in FIG. 95(c), the display of the switching standby image 452 is erased and the production mode is switched. .

Furthermore, if the performance operation unit 36 is not operated by the player during the display period of the switching guide image 451 in FIG. The production mode is maintained.

It should be noted that the production mode includes production mode A and production mode B, and these are different in the frequency of occurrence of pending preview production, similar to the first embodiment. Specifically, performance mode A functions as a mode in which the pending preview performance is likely to be executed and it is easy to enjoy the performance, and performance mode B functions as a mode in which the pending preview performance is difficult to execute, but it is possible to win a jackpot if it is executed. It is configured to function as a high expectation mode.

<Processing for switching production mode>
The production mode switching process according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 96. This process is executed in step Sa1307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the effect mode switching process of FIG. 42.

First, in step Sa8101, it is determined whether or not the effect mode switching period is in effect. In this modification, as well as in modification 7, a period in which the player is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which the player is in a normal gaming state and in which a performance that is performed across multiple game rounds, such as a continuous performance, is not performed) is defined. This is set as the effective period for switching the production mode. If the effect mode switching is not within the valid period, the effect mode switching process is ended to maintain the current effect mode.

If the effect mode switching is still valid, the process proceeds to step Sa8102, and it is determined whether a switching standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The switching standby flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that it is in a state of waiting for mode switching, in other words, that the production mode will be switched afterwards.

If the switching standby flag is not stored, that is, if the mode is not in a standby state for switching, the process proceeds to step Sa8103, and it is determined whether or not a guide display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The guidance notification flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that switching guidance notification is being executed.

If the guidance notification flag is not stored, that is, if the switching guidance notification is not being executed, the process proceeds to step Sa8104, and it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the switching guidance notification execution lottery. The execution lottery for switching guidance notification is a process for determining whether or not to execute the switching guidance notification. Although the lottery timing of the switching guidance notification is not particularly limited, in this modification, the start timing of the game round is set to the above-mentioned lottery timing. If it is not the lottery timing, the production mode switching process is immediately ended.

If it is the lottery timing, the process advances to step Sa8105, and a lottery for executing the switching guidance notification is performed. In this step, the lottery is performed based on the lottery counters (random numbers) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the switching guide lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. In step Sa8106, it is determined whether the lottery result in step Sa8105 is a winning result. If the lottery result is a losing result, the process for switching the production mode is ended so that the switching guidance notification is not executed.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process advances to step Sa8107, and the display control device 350 is controlled to display the switching guidance image 451 as switching guidance notification. Specifically, a command to display the switching guide image 451 is set as a transmission command to the display control device 350. As a result, the switching guide image 451 is displayed on the display screen G. In step Sa8108, a guide notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d, and then the production mode switching process is ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa8103 above (if the guidance notification flag is stored), that is, if switching guidance notification is being executed, the process proceeds to step Sa8109, in which the production mode is switched using the production operation unit 36. It is determined whether a predetermined operation has been performed. If the predetermined operation has been performed, the process advances to step Sa8110, and the guidance notification flags stored in the various flag storage areas 344d are deleted.

In step Sa8111, a switching standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d. This causes the device to enter a standby state for mode switching. In step Sa8112, the display control device 350 is controlled to display a switching standby image 452 as a switching standby notification. Specifically, a command to display the switching standby image 452 is set as a transmission command to the display control device 350. As a result, a switching standby image 452 is displayed on the display screen G. After executing step Sa8112, the production mode switching process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa8109 (the predetermined operation has not been performed), the process proceeds to step Sa8113, and it is determined whether the display period of the switching guidance image 451 (the notification period of the switching guidance notification) has elapsed. If the display period has not elapsed, the production mode switching process is ended to continue displaying the switching guide image 451.

If the display period has elapsed, the process advances to step Sa8114, and the guidance notification flags stored in the various flag storage areas 344d are deleted. As a result, the period for accepting production mode switching operations ends. Furthermore, in step Sa8114, the display control device 350 is controlled to erase the switching guide image 451. After executing step Sa8114, the production mode switching process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in the above step Sa8102 (if the switching standby flag is stored), that is, if the mode is in a mode switching standby state, the process proceeds to step Sa8115, and it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the mode switching. . The switching timing of the production mode is not particularly limited as long as it is the timing after transition to the standby state, but in this modification, the timing of starting the next game round after the end of the game round in which the switching operation was performed is set to the above switching timing. If it is not the switching timing, the production mode switching process is ended to continue the mode switching standby state.

If it is the switching timing, the process advances to step Sa8116, and the switching standby flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased. This ends the mode switching standby state. In step Sa8117, a switching process for switching the production mode is executed. For example, if the current performance mode is performance mode A, the performance data is set so as to switch to performance mode B.

In step Sa8118, a production mode flag corresponding to the production mode after switching is set in the various flag storage areas 344d. In step Sa8119, a second setting process for pending notice is executed, and then the production mode switching process is ended. The second suspension notice setting process is to set execution of a suspension notice performance for suspension information generated during the standby period for mode switching. Details of the setting process will be described later.

<Pending command handling process>
The pending command handling process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 97. This process is executed when a hold command is received from the main controller 162 (executed in step Sa1302 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30)), and is an alternative to the hold command corresponding process in FIG. It is something that is carried out. In FIG. 97, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 31, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step Sa1402, after incrementing the value of the pending number counter (start pending storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 by 1, the process proceeds to step Sa8201, and the switching standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. Determine whether or not is stored. If the switching standby flag is not stored, that is, if the mode is not in a standby state for mode switching, the process advances to step Sa1403, and a setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34) is executed. In the setting process for pending notice, settings are made to execute a pending notice effect for the generated pending information.

If the switching standby flag is stored (mode switching standby state), the process advances to step Sa8202, and the display mode of the pending image corresponding to the generated pending information is set to the normal display mode HMa. That is, in this modification, when new suspension information is generated during the standby period for mode switching, execution of the suspension notice effect triggered by the suspension information is restricted.

Note that the pre-reading of the pending information is performed in the pending pre-reading process (FIG. 26) of the main controller 162, similarly to other pending information. Therefore, although the production control device 143 does not execute the setting process for pending notice in step Sa1403 and forcibly sets the display mode of the pending image to the normal display mode HMa, the pre-reading results of fluctuation patterns etc. are controlled by the main control. The state is obtained by a hold command from the device 162.

In step Sa8203, standby occurrence information indicating that the hold information has occurred during the standby period is stored in association with the generated hold information. This process is performed, for example, by storing the standby occurrence information in the first to fourth areas (FIG. 32) provided in the storage area 344c for reservation in the RAM 344. Therefore, when the shift process in step Sa1704 in the shift command response process (FIG. 40) is executed, the standby occurrence information is shifted to the lower area side along with the pending information (variation pattern information, etc.). As a result, even if the display area of the pending images is shifted by shift processing, it is possible to know which pending images have been generated during the standby period. Note that the standby occurrence information may be stored in a storage area other than the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344 as long as it is possible to recognize which hold information is targeted.

After executing step Sa8203, in step Sa1405, processing for displaying the pending image on the pending display section 200 of the display screen G is executed. As described above, since the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa in step Sa8202, the pending image of the pending information generated during the waiting period is displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

<Second setting process for pending notice>
The second setting process for pending notice in step Sa8119 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 98. The second setting process for pending notice is to set execution of a pending notice performance for pending information generated during the standby period for mode switching.

First, in step Sa8301, pending information generated during the waiting period for mode switching is grasped. That is, based on the standby occurrence information, it is determined which of the hold information existing at that time is the hold information that has occurred during the standby period.

After executing the process of step Sa8301, the processes of step Sa8302 and subsequent steps are executed for the grasped occurrence pending during the waiting period. Note that many of the processes after step Sa8302 are similar to each process in the pending notice setting process (FIG. 34), so common processes will be simplified and different processes will be explained in detail. .

In steps Sa8302 to Sa8304, the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to to understand the fluctuation pattern of the occurrence and holding during the waiting period, and to determine whether or not there is a jackpot win. In step Sa8305, the production mode after switching is grasped. For example, if the current mode switching is from production mode A to production mode B, production mode B is grasped as the production mode after switching.

In Steps Sa8306 to Step Sa8308, a pending notice execution lottery table corresponding to the switched production mode grasped in Step Sa8305 is obtained, and a lottery for execution of the pending notice performance is performed. If the execution lottery is won, in steps Sa8309 to Sa8314, the final display mode of the pending image in the pending preview presentation is determined, and the presentation scenario is determined. At that time, if a different table is set for each production mode as the final display mode lottery table for drawing the final display mode or the production scenario lottery table for drawing the production scenario, it is determined in step Sa8305. A table corresponding to the performance mode after switching is acquired and a lottery is performed.

As described above, in this modification, for the hold information generated during the standby period for mode switching, the hold preview effect is set (processing to set the display mode based on the pre-read result) when the standby state is released. At that time, although the occurrence hold during the standby period occurred during the production mode before switching, the lottery for execution of the pending notice production, the lottery for the final display mode, etc. are set for the production mode after switching. This is done by applying the specified conditions and corresponding to the production mode after switching.

In step Sa8315, a pending notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the second setting process for pending notice is ended. After the suspension notice flag is set in this way, the process for first execution of the suspension notice in step Sa1701 in the shift command response process (FIG. 38(a)) and the process for displaying special figure fluctuations (FIG. 41) In the first execution process of the suspension notice in step Sa1807, a process of changing the display mode of the suspension image to a specific display mode is executed. That is, the suspension preview performance regarding the suspension information generated during the waiting period for mode switching is performed after the performance mode is switched.

<About the display mode of the hold image when the production mode is switched>
The display mode of the hold image when the production mode is switched will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 99. Here, a case where switching from production mode A to production mode B will be explained as an example.

If the lottery for executing the switching guidance notification is won during the validity period of the mode switching, the switching guidance image 451 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, as shown in FIG. 95(a). In this state, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the production operation unit 36, the player shifts to a mode switching standby state (a state in which the player knows that a mode switching will be performed later), as shown in FIG. 99(a). A switching standby image 452 is displayed on the display screen G as shown in FIG. Note that the mode switching standby state ends when the mode switching timing (start timing of the next game round) comes.

If two pieces of new hold information are generated during the standby period, the main controller 162 executes the hold lookahead processing (step Sa305) in the same way as for hold information that has occurred outside of the standby period, and Predict fluctuation patterns in information. In addition, the production control device 143 does not execute the setting process for pending notice (step Sa1403) for each of the pending information, and changes the display mode of the corresponding pending images HW1 and HW2 to the normal display mode HMa. Set.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 99(b), the holding images HW1 and HW2 in the normal display mode HMa are displayed in the second unit holding display area Ga2 and the third unit holding display area Ga3 of the first holding display area Ga. Is displayed. The state in which the display mode of the pending images HW1 and HW2 is the normal display mode HMa continues at least until the standby state ends.

When the mode switching timing comes with the start of the next game round, the standby state for mode switching ends, and the performance mode is switched from performance mode A to performance mode B, as shown in FIG. 99(c). At this time, the production control device 143 executes a second setting process for a pending notice (step Sa8119) for the pending information (pending images HW1, HW2) that occurred during the standby period.

In the second setting process for the hold notice, various drawings for executing the hold notice performance (execution lottery for the hold notice performance, final display (Lotteries for various formats, drawings for performance scenarios, etc.) will be held. At that time, a lottery table set for production mode B, which is the production mode after switching, is used for those lottery selections.

Suppose that as a result of the second setting process for the hold notice, a result is drawn in which the hold preview effect is not executed for the hold image HW1, and the display mode is changed to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing for the hold image HW2. As shown in FIG. 99(d), when the holding image HW2 is shifted from the second unit holding display area Ga2 to the first unit holding display area Ga1, the display mode changes from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb. will be changed to That is, a suspension notice effect triggered by suspension information generated during a waiting period for mode switching is executed after mode switching.

It should be noted that there are cases where the player wins the execution lottery for switching guidance notification while the suspension preview performance is being executed, and the switching guidance image 451 (FIG. 95(a)) is displayed while the suspension preview performance is being executed. In this case, the pending notice performance is not subject to execution restrictions, and the system shifts to a standby state while the pending notice performance is continued.

In addition, when hold information is generated from when the switching guide image 451 is displayed until the switching operation is performed (until the transition to the standby state), and the hold notice effect is executed using the hold information as a trigger. There is also. In other words, the hold image of the hold information acquired after the switching guide image 451 is displayed may transition to the standby state with the hold image in a specific display mode. In this case as well, the pending notice performance is not subject to execution restrictions, and the system shifts to a standby state while the pending notice performance continues.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

In a configuration in which the production mode is switched to a standby state when the switching condition for the production mode is satisfied, and then the switching timing is reached, the display mode of the pending image is set to a specific display mode while the production mode is in the standby state. The system is configured to restrict the execution of preview effects.

In this modified example, a hold preview effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, so the player is aware of the possibility of a jackpot result before the start of the game round. It can arouse a sense of expectation. Furthermore, since mode switching is performed between performance mode A and performance mode B, it is possible to change the player's mood during the game and prevent him from getting bored with the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the production mode is switched while the pending preview performance is being executed, the attention to the pending preview performance may decrease due to being distracted by the change of the production mode, or conversely, the performance mode may be switched while the pending preview performance is being executed. As a result of concentrated concentration, there is a concern that the performance mode may be changed without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, in a state where it is known that the production mode will be switched later (standby state for mode switching), execution of the pending notice performance is restricted, so the production mode is changed while the pending notice performance is being executed. Switching can be suppressed. As a result, the execution of the pending notice performance and the switching of the performance mode can be carried out in such a way that it is easy for the player to pay attention to each of them, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. In addition, if the production mode after switching is not suitable for the pending preview production in progress, advance adjustment is required to make both compatible when designing the production, but with this configuration, such adjustment is not possible. There is also the advantage that it becomes unnecessary and the burden at the time of design can be reduced.

The system is configured to restrict the execution of a hold notice performance for hold information acquired during a standby state.

With the above configuration, the range of special states subject to restrictions on the pending notice performance is widened, and execution of the pending notice performance can be prevented from being excessively restricted. In particular, if the hold information acquired after the switching guide image 451 is displayed and before the transition to the standby state is subject to the execution restriction of the hold preview effect, it is uncertain whether the change of the effect mode will actually be performed. Execution of the pending notice effect is restricted even for the pending information obtained in . In this case, if the player does not perform the switching operation and the production mode is not switched, the execution of the pending notice performance will be restricted for the pending information that did not need to be restricted. However, according to this configuration, it is possible to suppress such unnecessary restrictions.

The configuration is such that the execution of the pending notice performance is restricted regardless of the result of the pending pre-reading process.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to forcibly restrict the execution of the pending notice effect regardless of the result of the pending prefetching process. Thereby, it is possible to suitably suppress switching of the performance mode during execution of the pending notice performance. In addition, since the execution restriction of the pending notice performance is not affected by the result of the pending advance reading process, even if you are in the standby state (during the restriction period of the pending advance notice performance), the pending advance reading process will proceed in the same way as when you are not in the standby state. be able to. That is, since there is no need to change the configuration of the pending prefetch process, it is possible to restrict the execution of the pending preview performance during the standby state while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated.

The performance mode A and the performance mode B are configured to have different ease of execution of the pending notice performance.

In such a configuration, switching the production mode changes the production characteristics related to the expectation of jackpot, so compared to cases where the change is limited to only the appearance by changing the background image or character image, the difference between the production modes is more noticeable in the game. can make a strong impression on people. However, on the other hand, if the performance mode is switched while the pending preview performance is being executed, there is a risk that the level of expectation suggested by the pending preview performance will be different before and after switching the performance mode. In this case, there is a concern that in the performance mode after switching, the level of expectation suggested by the pending advance notice performance and the actually notified result of the propriety determination will be different, giving an unpleasant impression to the player. By applying this modification to such a configuration (a configuration that restricts the execution of the pending notice performance when the performance mode is in a standby state in preparation for switching), the occurrence of the above discrepancy can be avoided, It is possible to suitably suppress giving an unpleasant impression to the player.

The performance mode B is a performance mode in which the pending preview performance is more difficult to be executed than the performance mode A, and is configured to restrict switching to the performance mode B when the pending preview performance is executed in the performance mode A.

If the ease of execution of the pending notice performance in production mode B is lower than that in production mode A, if you switch from production mode A to production mode B while the pending notice production is still being executed, the apparent expectation level will increase. Therefore, there is a concern that players may have higher expectations than they actually have. In this regard, in this configuration, it is difficult to execute the pending notice performance from production mode A in which the pending notice performance is likely to be executed (the expectation level corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low). When switching to production mode B (highly cost-effective), execution of the pending notice production is restricted if preparation for switching to the mode is in progress. Thereby, switching from performance mode A to performance mode B during execution of the pending notice performance is suppressed, and it becomes possible to suitably suppress the suggestion of a higher level of expectation than the actual level.

A configuration is adopted in which a suspension notice performance corresponding to suspension information acquired during a standby state is executed after switching the performance mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent execution of a pending preview performance from being restricted for pending information acquired during a standby state, and not being able to suggest an expectation level.

In the above case, the system is configured to execute the hold preview performance after mode switching based on the result of the hold look-ahead process performed during the standby state (the hold look-ahead process when hold information is acquired). In this case, it is possible to execute the hold preview performance corresponding to the hold information acquired during the standby state without having to execute the hold look ahead process again after switching the performance mode. Thereby, the existing configuration can be used as is for the pending prefetch processing of the main control device 162, and the configuration can be prevented from becoming complicated.

After switching the performance mode, an execution lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to execute the suspension notice performance based on the reservation information acquired during the standby state, and the lottery conditions (winning probability, etc.) for the execution lottery are based on the information after switching. It is configured to apply conditions set in accordance with the production mode.

In the above configuration, when drawing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a pending notice performance after switching the production mode, the lottery conditions (the lottery set corresponding to the production mode before switching) when the target pending information is acquired (condition), but the lottery conditions set in accordance with the production mode after switching are applied. Thereby, even if the hold information is acquired during the standby state (before switching of the performance mode), it is possible to perform a hold preview performance in correspondence with the performance mode after switching.

When hold information is acquired during the standby state, standby occurrence information indicating that the hold information was acquired during the standby state is stored in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344.

According to the above configuration, based on the standby occurrence information stored in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344, it can be determined after the standby state that the hold information was acquired during the standby state. Therefore, even if the hold information obtained before entering the standby state and the hold information obtained during the standby state are mixed after the end of the standby state, the hold information obtained during the standby state can be easily retrieved. can be specified. As a result, when performing a hold notice effect after switching modes, it is possible to distinguish between hold information acquired during the standby state and hold information that is not, and process only the hold information acquired during the standby state. It becomes possible to do this.

<Other variations>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the first embodiment and each modification example described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the first embodiment and each modification, or may be applied in part or in whole to the first embodiment and each modification. May be applied. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the first embodiment and each modification example. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

(1) In the above-described first embodiment and each modification example, the configuration is such that up to four pieces of pending information based on winnings to the first operating port 62 are stored, but the number may be less than four pieces. (may be one), or may be five or more. Further, the upper limit storage number of pending information based on winnings to the second operating port 63 may be less than 4 (or may be 1), or may be 5 or more. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the upper limit storage number of pending information based on winnings to each operating port 62, 63 is different.

(2) In the first embodiment and each modification, the reservation information based on winnings to the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63 is distinguished, but it may be configured that they are not differentiated. In addition, the reservation information based on winnings to the second operating port 63 was configured to be subject to determination of validity with priority over the pending information based on winnings to the first operating port 62, but the relationship is reversed. There may also be a structure in which the winning/falsifying determination is made in the order of winning.

(3) In the first embodiment and each modification example, only the game ball flowing down the right route can pass through the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63 or win a prize, but the game ball flowing down the left route It may be configured such that only game balls that play the game can pass through or win a prize, or it may be configured such that only game balls that do so can pass through or win a prize from either the right route or the left route. However, in order to add sharpness to the game, only game balls flowing down one of the right route and the left route can enter the first operating port 62, and only game balls flowing down the other of the right route and the left route can enter the prize through the through gate. 64, it is preferable that the second operating port 63 be configured to be able to pass through or win a prize.

(4) In the first embodiment and each modification example, by displaying the holding image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, the holding notification that allows the player to recognize the number of holdings is provided. However, the retention image may be displayed on a display section other than the symbol display device 75, or the retention lamp sections (light emitting sections) provided in the number corresponding to the upper limit memory number may be made to emit light. The number of reservations may be notified based on the number of reservation lamp units. In the case where the hold lamp part is made to emit light, a hold notice effect is performed by setting the light emitting mode (for example, the light emitting color) to a specific light emitting mode different from the normal light emitting mode based on the result of the hold lookahead processing. be able to.

(5) In the above-described first embodiment and each modification, the system shifts to the jackpot game (opening/closing execution mode) when the result of the judgment becomes a jackpot. As such, the result of the judgment becomes the small winning result, and in a small winning game (a game state in which a variable winning device that has a V winning hole inside or has a V winning hole and a winning hole is opened and closed), the V winning hole (V winning hole) It may be configured such that when the game ball passes through the sensor (when the result of the award determination becomes a predetermined result and a predetermined game result), the game shifts to a jackpot game.

In addition, in the present invention, "a privilege can be granted to the player based on the result of grant support" and "a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of grant support" It can be understood that "Let the player win" etc. includes the case where the result of the win/fail determination becomes a small win result and the game progresses to a jackpot game via the V winning prize, as described above.

(6) In the above-described first embodiment and each modification example, as a specific notification, a hold notice effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode, but the hold notice effect using the hold image is Instead, each of the first embodiments and each modification is targeted at a game round performance (so-called continuous preview performance or look-ahead zone performance) that is executed over multiple game rounds based on the result of the pending look-ahead process. configuration may be applied.

(7) In the above-described first embodiment and each modification example, the specific notification is an effect that spans multiple gaming sessions, but the specific notification does not necessarily need to span multiple gaming sessions; It may also be done inside. For example, in the first embodiment, it is assumed that the production mode will be switched multiple times during a game. In this case, the performance that is performed during one game round does not necessarily have to be triggered by the result of the pending prefetching process, but is based on the result of the validity judgment etc. performed at the start of the game round. It may be.

(8) In the first embodiment and each modification, the symbols displayed variably on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are scrolled in the left-right direction, but the symbols are arranged on the left, middle and right. may be displayed, and these symbols may be scrolled up and down to be displayed variably. That is, the direction in which the symbols are arranged and the direction in which the symbols are scrolled are not particularly limited. Further, the number of symbols (the number of symbol rows) is not limited to three, and may be two or four or more.

(9) In the first embodiment and each modification, the execution display area D was provided to notify the player of the execution of the suspended game round, but the execution display area D It is also possible to have a configuration that does not include.

(10) In the above-described first embodiment and each modification example, when executing the hold notice effect, the effect scenario is set including the notification period in the execution display area D, but the target hold image HW The production scenario may be set for a period before is displayed in the execution display area D (a period during which the game round of the target pending image HW is on hold).

(11) In the above-described first embodiment and each modification, when executing a hold preview effect, settings are performed in stages, such as determining the final display mode of the hold image and then setting the effect scenario. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the final display mode and production scenario are set in one process. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which both the final display mode and the production scenario are determined using one table.

(12) In the first embodiment and each modification, the structure is such that information on the fluctuation pattern is transmitted when notifying the performance control device 143 of the result of the pending prefetching process executed by the main control device 162. In order to suppress the data volume of the sending command from increasing, predetermined information with a smaller amount of data than the fluctuation pattern concerned (such as an identifier corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, rank information when the fluctuation pattern is ranked according to the degree of expectation, etc.) ) may be configured to transmit. This also applies to the power recovery hold command and the like in the fifth modification of the first embodiment.

(13) In the above-described first embodiment and each modification example, the game round performance (performance pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern, but the game round performance is determined based on the values of the fluctuation type counter CS and the jackpot random number counter C1. It may be configured to determine. In this case, the main control device 162 does not execute the reservation prefetching process, and the production control device 143 executes the reservation command based on the reservation command (information indicating the values of the fluctuation type counter CS and the jackpot random number counter C1) from the main control device 162. It is preferable to adopt a configuration that executes a pending pre-reading process (a process of pre-reading the result of the validity judgment and the game performance).

(14) In the first embodiment and each modification, the mode of the pending notice performance (display mode of the pending image) is set based on the variation pattern specified by the pending prefetching process, but the performance control device 143 In this step, the performance pattern (game performance) is read in advance based on the information of the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern specified by the reservation pre-reading process) transmitted from the main control device 162, and the mode of the reservation notice performance is determined based on the result. It is also possible to configure the settings. Such a configuration is particularly effective, for example, when a plurality of types of performance patterns (game performance) correspond to one variation pattern.

(15) In the above-described first embodiment, modifications 1 to 3, and modifications 5 to 8 of the first embodiment, the suspension prefetching process is performed by the main controller 162; It may be configured to be performed by the effect control device 143 or the display control device 350. When the performance control device 143 executes the pending prefetching process, as in the fourth modification of the first embodiment, the information corresponding to the values (obtained random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the fluctuation type counter CS is mainly controlled. It is preferable to have a configuration in which the device 162 transmits the results to the production control device 143, and the production control device 143 pre-reads the results of the judgment of validity, the lottery results of the fluctuating pattern, and the like. Further, in the above modification 4, a configuration may be adopted in which the main controller 162 performs at least one of the first pending prefetching process and the second pending prefetching process.

(16) In the first embodiment and Modifications 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, the display mode of the target pending image HW is returned to the original specific display mode, and then the upper display mode is changed. Although the configuration is such that the display mode is promoted to a higher level display mode, the display mode may be promoted to a higher level display mode without returning to the original specific display mode. In addition, as a configuration in which both the case of returning to the original specific display mode and then promoting to a higher display mode, and the case of promoting to a higher display mode without returning to the original specific display mode, good.

(17) In the first embodiment and modifications 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, when the display mode of the target pending image HW is restored to the original specific display mode, the target pending image Although the configuration is such that the display mode of the image HW may be returned in stages, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode of the image HW is not returned in stages. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode is uniformly changed once to return to the original specific display mode.

(18) In the first embodiment and modifications 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, the return scenario is set including the display period in the execution display area D. A configuration may be adopted in which the return scenario is set only for the display period of the hold display area Ga or the second hold display area Gb (without including the display period in the execution display area D).

(19) In the first embodiment and modifications 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the promotion process of the target pending image HW is not performed.

(20) In the first embodiment and modifications 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, the target hold image HW is displayed in the first hold display area Ga or the second hold display area Gb. The original specific display mode is returned to the original specific display mode during the period (holding period) during which the target pending image HW is played, and then promoted to a higher display mode in the game round of the target pending image HW. There is no need to wait for promotion until the end of the period, and a configuration may be adopted in which promotion can be performed during the suspension period. When performing promotion processing before the start of a game round, instead of using the fluctuation start command sent from the main controller 162 at the start of fluctuation, the reservation prefetch processing performed on the target reservation image HW (reservation information) is used. Please refer to the results.

(21) In the first embodiment and modifications 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, when promoting the target holding image HW to a higher display mode in a game round, at the start of the change, Although the configuration is such that the fluctuation start command sent from the main control device 162 is referred to, the above-mentioned promotion may be performed based on the result of the reservation prefetch processing performed on the target reservation image HW (reservation information).

(22) In the first embodiment and Modifications 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, the production mode is switched by the player's operation (manually), but as in Modification 7 above, Alternatively, the production mode may be automatically switched without any operation by the player.

(23) In the first embodiment and the first and second modifications of the first embodiment, the production mode is switched during the game round, but It is also possible to have a configuration in which the production mode is switched. For example, for a configuration where a plurality of performance modes are set as performance modes for a high-precision gaming state, and the player can select which performance mode to play in in the opening/closing execution mode immediately before that. , the first embodiment, and the configurations according to Modifications 1 and 2 of the first embodiment may be applied.

For example, when applying the configuration according to the first embodiment, the following configuration can be adopted. In the performance mode A during the high-probability gaming state, the display mode of the target pending image HW is set to a specific display mode, and the game cycle of the pending information before the target pending image HW results in a guaranteed jackpot and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. However, if production mode B, which is different from production mode A, is selected during the opening/closing execution mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW is normally displayed in production mode B (high-precision gaming state) after the opening/closing execution mode. The mode is set to HMa. Then, in the game game of the reservation information before the target reservation image HW, it becomes a probability-variable jackpot again and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, and if production mode A is selected during the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening/closing execution mode In production mode A (high-precision gaming state), the display mode of the target pending image HW is set to the original specific display mode.

Note that the above configuration is not limited to the case where the production mode is switched by the player's operation (manually), but may be configured such that the production mode is automatically switched without the player's operation.

(24) In the above-described first embodiment and Modifications 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, the susceptibility to execution of the pending notice performance (execution probability) is different between performance mode A and performance mode B. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed is the same in these performance modes.

(25) In the first embodiment and the first and second modifications of the first embodiment, the configuration includes two types of performance modes, performance mode A and performance mode B, as multiple types of performance states. However, it may be configured to include three or more types of presentation modes. In this case, for example, in a configuration that has three or more types of performance modes, such as performance mode A to performance mode C, it may be difficult to execute the pending preview performance in the order of performance mode A > performance mode B > performance mode C, etc. It may be possible to have a configuration in which the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed is different between the production modes, or in which the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed is the same in production modes A to C. Mode A and production mode C have the same ease of execution of the pending notice performance, but production mode B has the same ease of execution of the pending notice performance; It is also possible to have a configuration in which production modes with different ease of execution coexist.

In addition, in a configuration where a production mode with the same ease of execution of a suspended notice production and a production mode with a different ease of execution coexist, it is difficult to switch between production modes with the same ease of execution. Similarly to the switching between different production modes, the display mode of the target retention image HW may be set to the normal display mode HMa when switching the production mode. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which switching between production modes that have the same ease of execution and switching between different production modes is not distinguished.

In addition, when switching between production modes that have the same ease of execution, unlike switching between different production modes, even when the production mode is switched, the normal display mode HMa is not changed, and the specific display before mode switching A configuration may be adopted in which the aspect is maintained. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which switching between performance modes that have the same ease of execution and switching between different performance modes are distinguished, and the pending preview performance is handled differently between the two.

(26) In the first embodiment and Modifications 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the pending preview performance can be executed in the performance mode B in which the pending preview performance is difficult to execute. A configuration may also be adopted in which the pending notice performance is not executed in the performance mode B. In other words, the "performance state in which specific notification is difficult to be performed" in the present invention is understood to include not only a performance mode in which the execution probability of the pending notice performance is low, but also a performance mode in which the pending notice performance is not executed. Can be done.

(27) In the first embodiment and the first and second modifications of the first embodiment, the production mode The ease of execution of the pending notice performance in production mode A and B is different, but the execution probability of the pending notice performance when the pending information corresponds to a jackpot is different, and the probability of execution of the pending notice performance is different when the pending information corresponds to a jackpot. By making both the execution probabilities different when corresponding to the above, the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed in these performance modes may be made different.

(28) In the above-described first embodiment and Modifications 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, when the performance mode is switched during execution of the hold notice performance, the hold displayed in the execution display area D However, the first pending display area Ga, the second pending display area Gb, and the execution display area D are distinguished, and the pending display displayed in the execution display area D is changed to the normal display mode HMa. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the image for use is not changed to the normal display mode HMa.

(29) In the first embodiment and the first and second modifications of the first embodiment, when the display mode of the target retention image HW is returned to the original specific display mode, the change suggestion effect is Although the configuration is such that the execution is restricted, a configuration may also be adopted in which a dedicated performance (different from the change suggestion performance) corresponding to the return is executed. By adopting such a configuration, the case where the display mode of the pending image is purely changed to a higher-level display mode and the case where the pending image is returned to the original specific display mode due to the restoration process can be handled easily. This can make it easier for people to identify.

(30) In the first embodiment, if the performance mode A shifts to the performance mode B while the pending preview performance is being executed, and then shifts to the performance mode A again (the source where the pending preview performance was being executed), The display mode of the target retention image HW is returned to the original specific display mode when the display mode is returned to the production mode of In a situation where the pending notice performance is being executed, the display mode of the target pending image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa, and then the performance mode is changed before the game round of the target pending image HW ends. It may be configured such that when switching to C (a production mode different from production mode A), the original specific display mode is restored.

In the above case, the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed is the same in production mode A and production mode C, or the pending notice performance is more likely to be executed in production mode C than in production mode A (the degree of expectation for the pending notice production). It is preferable to use a production mode (low). However, the present invention is not limited to these, and the configuration may be such that the performance mode C is more difficult to execute the pending preview performance than the performance mode A. In this case, production mode C may be a production mode in which the pending notice production is more likely to be executed than production mode B, or may be a production mode in which it is less likely to be executed, or production mode C and execution of the pending notice production. It may be a production mode in which the ease of being played is the same. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the performance mode A, performance mode B, and performance mode C have the same ease of execution of the pending notice performance.

(31) In the first embodiment described above, there are two cases: when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B while the pending notice presentation is being executed, and when switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A during the execution of the pending notice presentation. In both cases, the display mode of the target pending image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa, but in the latter case, in other words, the display mode corresponding to the pending preview performance is changed from a high-expectation performance mode to a low-expectation performance mode. In the case of switching, the display mode of the target pending image HW may be maintained in the specific display mode (not changed to the normal display mode HMa).

(32) In the first embodiment, the performance mode A is switched to the performance mode B while the pending preview performance is being executed, and after that, the performance is switched before the game round of the pending information that triggered the pending preview performance ends. When switching to mode A, the display mode of the target hold image HW is configured to return to the original specific display mode, but the hold information that triggered the hold preview effect is displayed before the game round starts. When switching to mode A, the display mode of the target pending image HW may be returned to the original specific display mode. That is, when switching to production mode A after the game round of the reservation information that triggered the suspension notice performance has started, the display mode of the target suspension image HW may not be returned to the original specific display mode. .

(33) In the first embodiment described above, when the production mode A is switched from the production mode B to the production mode B during the execution of the pending preview production, and new pending information occurs while the production mode B is staying, the production In mode B, the suspension notice performance is not executed based on the suspension information, but by holding a lottery for execution of the suspension notice performance under the conditions set corresponding to production mode B, and winning the lottery. It may also be configured to execute a pending notice effect.

However, while the pending image that was in the specific display mode in production mode A before switching to production mode B is changed to the normal display mode HMa by switching to production mode B, the pending information that occurred in production mode B When a hold preview effect is performed for , it further aggravates the player's anxiety that the hold image (hold information) that was set as the normal display mode HMa may have been a big hit or even his expectations have disappeared. There are concerns. Additionally, if the performance mode is switched back to production mode A while a pending preview performance started in production mode B is being executed, there is a problem of how to handle the pending preview performance, and there is a concern that the process as a whole will become complicated. .

In this sense, as in the first embodiment, the state of staying in production mode B (in other words, the state of the target holding image HW that was set to the specific display mode in the previous production mode A) It is preferable to restrict the execution of a pending notice effect for newly generated pending information (in a state where the display mode is waiting for a return process to return the display mode to the original display mode). In addition, in the case where the performance mode A is switched to the performance mode B in a situation where the pending notice performance is not being executed, the execution of the pending notice performance triggered by the newly generated pending information in the performance mode B will not be restricted. It's okay.

(34) In the first embodiment, the number of reservations including the current reservation information is grasped in step Sa1508, but the configuration is such that the number of suspensions is grasped based on the reservation information earlier than the current suspension information. Good too.

(35) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the target holding images HB1 and HB2 in the restricted state (images for holding the held information generated during the restricted state) are set to the normal display mode HMa. A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined display mode (for example, a black display mode) is different from both the display mode HMa and the specific display mode. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the suspended notice performance is in a restricted state.In other words, the player can be made aware that there is a possibility that the display mode will be changed to a specific display mode when the restricted state ends. It becomes possible to inform.

(36) In the first modification of the first embodiment, when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B during execution of a pending notice presentation, that is, when transitioning to a restricted state of pending notice presentation, the restriction It is also possible to provide a notification that corresponds to the current state and is different from the hold image (for example, a predetermined display indicating that the restricted state is in effect).

(37) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the display of the pending image may not be executed during the restriction state. More specifically, not only the holding image HA set in a specific display mode in presentation mode A and the holding images HB1 and HB2 of holding information generated in presentation mode B, but also all holding images including other holding images. The configuration may be such that the display is not executed.

In this case, in order to prevent the player from being unable to recognize the number of pending games, the number of pending games may be notified by a separate display such as a numeric display (notification of the number of pending games separate from the pending image). However, if the display suddenly switches to the above-mentioned separate display, it will be difficult for the player to understand, so for example, the number of reservations can be notified by both the reservation image and a separate display such as a number display, so that the number of reservations is notified while the reservation notice is being executed. When switching from production mode A to production mode B, it is preferable to configure such a configuration that only the display of the pending image is deleted in production mode B. In this case, in order to prevent the player from losing sight of the separate display, it is preferable not to change the display location of the separate display.

(38) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the mode of the suspension notice effect triggered by the suspension information generated during the restriction state is set at the end of the restriction period (step Sa2702), It may be set during the restriction period, or may be set after the restriction period ends.

(39) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the pending prefetch process is executed when the pending information is acquired during the restricted state, and after the limited state ends, the pending prefetch process is performed during the restricted state. Although the display mode of the target hold images HB1 and HB2 is set based on the results of , the hold lookahead processing for the hold information acquired during the limit state is executed after the limit state, and the limit is set based on the result. A configuration may be adopted in which the display mode of the target pending images HB1 and HB2 after the state is set. At this time, the suspension prefetching process may be performed by the main control device 162 or by the production control device 143. Further, the suspension prefetching process when suspension information is acquired during the restriction state may not be executed or may be executed.

(40) In the second modification of the first embodiment, when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B during execution of a pending notice presentation, the display mode in presentation mode B is the same as that in presentation mode A. However, in cases where the notification mode of the pending image is different between production mode A and production mode B, it is not necessarily necessary to return to the same specific display mode, and the player may use the same display mode. The configuration may be such that the display mode is changed to one that can be recognized as existing. For example, in production mode A, the rankings are in the order of blue display mode HMb<green display mode HMc<red display mode HMd<rainbow display mode HMe, while in production mode B, yellow display mode<brown display mode In a configuration that is ranked in the order of <Purple display mode<Rainbow display mode, when the display mode of the target holding image HW is switched to the green display mode HMc, and the production mode A is switched to the production mode B. , the display mode of the target retention image HW in production mode B may be configured to be a brown display mode.

In addition, in a gaming machine that suggests the level of expectation by changing the pending image to a predetermined character image, if the character's costume, pose, facial expression, etc. are set to differ depending on the production mode, the target pending When switching from production mode A to production mode B while the image HW for use has been changed to a character image such as a costume corresponding to production mode A (a state in which a pending preview production is being executed), if production mode A is switched from production mode A to production mode B, the target image in production mode B While the hold image HW is restored to the same character image as in the production mode A, the costumes and the like may be made to correspond to the production mode B.

In short, it is sufficient that the player can recognize that the display mode of the target retention image HW in production mode B is the same as the display mode in production mode A. This also applies to the case where the display mode of the target pending image HW is promoted to a higher-level display mode in production mode B. That is, any display mode that can be recognized as a higher-ranking display mode from the perspective of the player may be used. In the above example, the display mode of the target pending image HW is set to a brown display mode, and then promoted to a purple display mode.

In addition, in the first embodiment and its first modification, the configuration in which the display mode of the target retention image HW is returned to the original specific display mode upon returning to the original production mode A, and the first embodiment In modification example 3 of the embodiment, when the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode are the same, the display mode of the target holding image HW after the opening/closing execution mode is different from that before the opening/closing execution mode. In the configuration where the specific display mode is the same, in the fourth modification of the first embodiment, the specific display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the variation pattern specified by the second holding look ahead process. If the corresponding upper limit display mode is below, the display mode of the target holding image HW after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the same specific display mode as before the opening/closing execution mode, in Modification 5 of the first embodiment. , even in a configuration where the display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration is the same specific display mode as the display mode at the time of power outage, the player recognizes the display mode of the target hold image HW as being of the same rank. This can be said to be a specific example of restoring the display mode to a display mode that can be used.

(41) In the second modification of the first embodiment, when switching from production mode A to production mode B during execution of a pending preview production, the display mode of the target pending image HW is temporarily displayed as normal. Although the display mode HMa has been changed, the display mode may not be changed to the normal display mode HMa. That is, when the determination result is to display the equivalent display mode in production mode B (if an affirmative determination is made in step Sa3107), the display mode of the target pending image HW is not changed to the normal display mode HMa ( It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the appositional display mode is used (without executing the process of step Sa3110).

(42) In the second modification of the first embodiment, when it is determined that the display mode of the same rank is not displayed in production mode B (when a negative determination is made in step Sa3107), the target retention image Although the HW display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, it may be set to a specific display mode as long as it does not exceed actual expectations. Specifically, when the specific display mode of the target suspension image HW before switching to the production mode is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode set in the return determination table, the display mode is lower than or equal to the upper limit display mode. (A lower display mode than the specific display mode before switching to the production mode) may be used as the specific display mode.

(43) Modifications 3 and 4 of the first embodiment have three types of gaming states: a normal gaming state, a high-precision gaming state, and a time-saving gaming state. For example, the normal gaming state It is also possible to have a configuration that includes two types of gaming states, ie, a high probability gaming state, and a gaming state other than three. In other words, it suffices to have a plurality of types of gaming states.

(44) In the third and fourth variations of the first embodiment, the display of the hold image is not executed during the opening/closing execution mode, but the hold image may be displayed. . In this case, the display mode of the pending image during the opening/closing execution mode may be the normal display mode HMa, or the display mode may be a specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined display mode (for example, a black display mode) is different from both the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode. In this case, the predetermined display mode may be one that does not correspond to the jackpot expectation level, etc. of each pending information (one that does not suggest the expectation level, etc.).

(45) In the third and fourth modifications of the first embodiment, the display of the pending image is resumed during the ending period, but the display of the pending image is restarted before the ending period starts. It may be configured so that it is restarted, or it may be configured that the display of the pending image is restarted after the ending period ends (for example, when the first game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends).

(46) Modifications 3 and 4 of the first embodiment have a configuration in which the display mode of the target holding image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode. However, instead of using the normal display mode HMa, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific display target is displayed. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the display of the pending image HW is restarted in a state where the display mode of the target pending image HW is set to the specific display mode.

(47) In Modifications 3 and 4 of the first embodiment, as an applicable configuration, the game state (fluctuation pattern table) is changed through the opening/closing execution mode in which a plurality of round games are executed. Although the configuration to be changed has been illustrated, it is also possible to apply a configuration in which the variable pattern table is changed through a small winning game (opening/closing execution mode in which one round game is executed). Note that changes to the variable pattern table are not limited to those triggered by the result of a win/fail determination or the opening/closing execution mode (game state in which the variable prize winning device 65 is opened/closed) being executed; for example, The determination may be performed based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, such as the number of times the game has been played in which the result of the determination is incorrect has reached a predetermined number of times.

(48) In the third and fourth modified examples of the first embodiment, even if the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the fluctuation type counter CS are the same, the results obtained by lottery are different. Although the game state is changed in response to the execution mode as an example, the above-mentioned difference may occur in response to an event other than the opening/closing execution mode. Examples of such an event include, for example, the number of times the player has played a game with a wrong result in a win/fail determination, or the player has won some kind of lottery. In other words, what is the trigger is arbitrary; in short, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned difference occurs due to the occurrence of some event. Further, the above-mentioned difference is not limited to one caused by a change in the gaming state, but may be caused by a change in the production state that does not involve a change in the jackpot probability, for example.

(49) In the third modification of the first embodiment, the display mode of the pending image is stored when the opening/closing execution mode is started, but the storage timing of the display mode is not particularly limited. For example, it may be configured to store the winning game time that triggers the opening/closing execution mode.

However, if the display mode of the pending image is gradually promoted in the pending preview performance, the display mode of the pending image may change during the execution of the winning game round, so the display mode may change. It is preferable to memorize the display mode after it has been determined, in other words, after the display mode has been restricted from changing. Specifically, it is preferable to store the information when the opening/closing execution mode is started (when the winning game round ends) as in the third modification.

(50) In the third modification of the first embodiment, return determination and return process setting (step Sa3416) are performed during the ending period, but these processes may be performed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. . Moreover, it may be performed after the start of the opening/closing execution mode and before the start of the ending period.

In addition, when performing each of the above-mentioned processes during the opening/closing execution mode, it is preferable to perform them during a period when the variable prize winning device 65 is in a closed state, such as an opening period, an ending period, or a round interval period. When the variable winning device 65 is in the open state in the opening/closing execution mode, the processing load is relatively high, such as the need to perform processing to perform a winning effect based on the occurrence of a winning to the variable winning device 65. It is assumed that there are. If such a period is used to determine return or set return processing, there is a concern that an even higher load will be caused. In this regard, by configuring the above-mentioned processes to be performed using the period during which the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

(51) In the third modification of the first embodiment, when the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the normal gaming state and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is the high certainty gaming state, the pending pre-reading process When the result is a normal jackpot result, the display mode of the target pending image HW is restored. If the target pending image HW is prefetched, the display mode of the target pending image HW may be restored.

(52) In the fourth modification of the first embodiment, the acquired random numbers themselves such as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the fluctuation type counter CS are transmitted from the main control device 162 to the production control device 143, but In order to suppress an increase in the data volume of the transmission command, a configuration may be adopted in which predetermined information (such as an identifier corresponding to the random number) whose data volume is smaller than those acquired random numbers is transmitted.

(53) In the fourth modification of the first embodiment, the second pending prefetch process is performed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, but it may be configured to be performed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, it may be configured to be performed while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed or before the opening/closing execution mode is started (the period from the start of the winning game round until the opening/closing execution mode is started).

(54) In the fourth modification of the first embodiment, the variation pattern is pre-read in the first pending pre-reading process and the second pending pre-reading process. Good too. Such a configuration is particularly effective, for example, when a plurality of types of performance patterns (game performance) correspond to one variation pattern.

(55) In the fourth modification of the first embodiment, the upper limit display mode is set in correspondence with the variation pattern in the upper limit display mode table, but the upper limit display mode is set in correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

(56) In the fourth modification of the first embodiment, even if the winning result for the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 changes between the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, Although the display mode of the target holding image HW is configured to be a specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode, it may be configured not to be a specific display mode. Specifically, if the result of the first pending pre-reading process is a jackpot and the result of the second pending pre-reading process is a loss, the display mode of the target pending image HW is changed to a specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is not done.

(57) In the fourth modification of the first embodiment, the specific display mode of the target pending image HW in the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the upper limit corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the second pending pre-reading process The display mode is compared with the display mode, and based on the result, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set. (regardless of the above), the display mode may be set based on the result of the second pending prefetch process.

(58) In the fourth modification of the first embodiment, the specific display mode of the target pending image HW in the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the upper limit corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the second pending prefetching process. If the mode is higher than the display mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. A specific display mode may be set. Specifically, when the specific display mode of the target pending image HW in the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is a higher mode than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the second pending pre-reading process. , the specific display mode may be set to a display mode below the upper limit display mode (a display mode lower than the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode).

(59) In the fourth modification of the first embodiment, the second pending prefetch process is executed regardless of the difference between the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode. , when each of the above gaming states is the same, the second pending pre-reading process is not executed, and the display mode of the target pending image HW after the opening/closing execution mode is set based on the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. Good too. Specifically, the display mode after the open/close execution mode may be set to be the same as the display mode before the open/close execution mode. In this case, the normal display mode HMa may be changed to the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, or the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode may be displayed from the beginning.

(60) In Modifications 5 and 6 of the first embodiment, a power outage abnormality is exemplified as a predetermined abnormality, but other abnormalities such as a magnetic sensor abnormality or a vibration sensor abnormality may also occur. good. At this time, the predetermined abnormality is not limited to one in which the game progress is stopped, but may be one in which the game progress is continued.

(61) In Modifications 5 and 6 of the first embodiment, when the power outage abnormality is resolved and the power is restored, the target hold image HW is set to the specific display mode. However, at the initial stage when the power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa, and then the display mode before the power outage state or the display mode that was performed before the power outage state is resumed. A configuration may also be adopted in which the display mode is changed to a specific display mode set based on the result of the pending prefetch process.

In addition, at the initial stage when the power is restored, the display mode of the target holding image HW is a predetermined display target that is different from both the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode (a display mode exclusive to the power recovery, for example, a purple display mode). It may be configured such that the display mode is changed to a specific display mode that is set based on the display mode before the occurrence of the power outage state or the result of the pending prefetch processing performed before the power outage state. At that time, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending image set in the predetermined display mode is once changed to the normal display mode HMa and then changed to the specific display mode.

(62) In Modifications 5 and 6 of the first embodiment, when the power outage abnormality is resolved and the power is restored, the screen state of the symbol display device 75 is set to the recovery standby screen (“The screen will return soon”). The display of the hold image is resumed in the situation where the character display 461 such as "I will return" is displayed, but the hold image is not displayed in the return standby screen state and the screen is not returned. (Return of the symbol variation display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3) (or when the screen is returned), the display of the pending image may be resumed. In such a case, the display of the pending images is resumed with the number of pending images updated (each pending image is shifted to the lower side and the number of pending images is decreased by one).

Further, the display timing of the pending image may be different depending on whether the power outage abnormality occurs while a game session is not being executed or when it occurs while a game session is being executed. Specifically, if a power outage error occurs while a gaming session is not in progress, the game will be put on hold when the power-on screen (a screen displaying text such as "Power has been turned on") is displayed. If the display of the hold image is resumed and a power outage error occurs during the execution of a game, the hold image will not be displayed in the recovery standby screen state, and the hold image will be displayed again when the screen returns. It is also possible to have a configuration in which In other words, if a power outage abnormality occurs while a gaming session is not being executed, the hold image will be displayed at an earlier timing (with a shorter elapsed time from the start of power supply) than when it occurs during a gaming session. It is also possible to configure the system so that it is restarted.

(63) In Modifications 5 and 6 of the above-described first embodiment, the case where a power outage abnormality occurs during execution or non-execution of a game round is exemplified, but the power failure occurs during execution of the opening/closing execution mode. It can also be applied when a disconnection abnormality occurs. At that time, the display of the target hold image may be resumed in the power-on screen state or recovery standby screen state, or the hold image may be displayed during the period when the subsequent opening/closing execution mode is performed after the power is restored. It may be configured such that the display is not executed and the display of the target pending image is restarted in accordance with the start timing of the first game round after the opening/closing execution mode. Alternatively, the display of the pending image may not be executed during the period in which the screen is in the return standby state, and the display of the pending image may be restarted when the screen returns.

(64) In Modifications 5 and 6 of the first embodiment, the power outage monitoring unit 315 is provided in the power supply and launch control device 191, but it may also be provided in the main control device 162 or the production control device 143. good. In this case, in modification 5, the power outage monitoring section 315 may be provided in each of the main control device 162 and the effect control device 143, or may be provided in one of the main control device 162 and the effect control device 143, and the power outage monitoring section 315 is A configuration may also be adopted in which a power outage signal from the unit 315 or a power outage command (command indicating the occurrence of a power outage state) from one control device is transmitted to the other control device.

(65) In Modifications 5 and 6 of the first embodiment, the process for setting the display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration (the process for restoring the hold notice in step Sa5202 and the display in step Sa6204) Although the mode setting process) is executed when the power is restored, it may be executed after the power is restored. Specifically, it may be configured to be executed at a predetermined timing during a period after the power is restored until the game round of the target pending image HW is started.

(66) In the fifth modification of the first embodiment, the information indicating the display mode of the target pending image HW is backed up, and after the power is restored, the display mode before the power outage is grasped based on that information. In Modification 6 of the first embodiment, the display mode of the target holding image HW after power restoration is set, and information indicating the prefetch results is backed up, and after power restoration, the information before the power outage is displayed based on the information. Although the display format of the target pending image HW after power restoration was determined by understanding the prefetch results, the display format of the target pending image HW after power restoration was executed again after the power was restored, and based on the result. may be set. At that time, the pre-reading process after the power is restored may be performed by the main control device 162 or may be performed by the production control device 143.

In the above case, in a situation where multiple hold images are displayed, change point information that allows you to understand which hold image is set to a specific display mode is stored, and a power outage condition occurs. It is also preferable to back up (memory retain) the changed location information. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to ascertain which pending image was displayed in a specific display mode before the power outage occurred after the power is restored. The change location information may be stored in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 and backed up by the main control device 162, or may be stored in the RAM 344 or backup RAM 345 of the production control device 143 and backed up by the production control device 143. Good too.

In the above case, it is preferable to execute the pre-reading process after the power is restored, targeting the hold image (hold information) that was determined to be in a specific display mode before the power outage. In this case, even the hold images that were not set in the specific display mode before the power outage are set in the specific display mode by the pre-reading process after the power is restored, making it possible to prevent an unnatural impression from being given to the player. Furthermore, compared to the case where the prefetch processing is performed again on all the pending information that exists after the power is restored, the number of times the prefetch processing is executed can be reduced, making it possible to reduce the processing load when the power is restored. .

Here, knowing which hold images were being displayed in a specific display mode before the power outage can also be expressed as knowing which hold images were not being displayed in the specific display mode before the power outage. However, the display mode may be set to the normal display mode for the hold image that is determined to have not been displayed in the specific display mode. In this case, the processing may be to set the display mode of the hold images that were not subject to the prefetching process after power restoration to the normal display mode, or to set the display mode to the normal display mode for the hold images that were not subject to the prefetch processing after power restoration, or to For hold images that are determined to have not been displayed in a specific display mode after prefetch processing, the display mode may be forcibly set to the normal display mode, regardless of the result of the prefetch process. .

Further, in the configuration in which the display mode of the target pending image HW is set based on the pre-read result after power restoration, the display mode is set below a certain level, similar to Modification 5 and Modification 6 of the first embodiment. The configuration may be such that the display mode is limited to a specific display mode (for example, the green display mode HMc or the blue display mode HMb).

Note that the pre-reading process after power restoration may be performed at the time of power restoration, or as long as it is before the start of the game round of the hold image (hold information) that was set as the specific display mode before the power outage. It may be performed after power is restored.

In addition, without performing pre-reading processing after power restoration, for hold images that are determined to have been in a specific display mode before the power outage, the display mode is changed to a predetermined specific display mode (for example, a blue display mode). HMb).

(67) In the fifth modification of the first embodiment, the backup RAM 345 is provided to back up (memory hold) information regarding the reserved image; A configuration may be adopted in which all information is backed up. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a part of the information (information regarding the reserved image) stored in the RAM 344 is backed up without providing the backup RAM 345.

(68) In the fifth modification of the first embodiment, the power outage signal from the outage monitoring unit 315 is configured to be sent to the main control device 162 and the production control device 143, but the power outage signal is sent only to the main control device 162. It may also be a configuration. In this configuration, when a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring unit 315 is input to the main control device 162, a power outage command is transmitted from the main control device 162 to the production control device 143, and the production control device 143 receives the power outage command. It is preferable to use this as an opportunity to execute power outage processing (processing in steps Sa11 to Sa13, etc.).

(69) In the fifth modification of the first embodiment, when the specific display mode of the target holding image HW before power cut is a display mode equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode (green display mode HMc) (step Sa5404 In the case of an affirmative determination), the display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration is limited to a specific display mode lower than the predetermined display mode, but the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa (cancels the specific display mode).

(70) In the fifth modification of the first embodiment, the display mode of the target holding image HW after power restoration is set to a specific display mode lower than the specific display mode before power outage. , the configuration was such that promotion processing of the target pending image HW is executed in the game round (step Sa5409, step Sa5601), but the display mode of the target pending image HW after power restoration is set to the specific display mode before the power outage. In this case, a configuration may also be adopted in which promotion processing of the target pending image HW is executed in the game round. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the promotion process is executed in a gaming session regardless of the display mode of the target pending image HW after the power is restored.

(71) In the sixth modification of the first embodiment, if the jackpot result is prefetched by the pending prefetching process before the power outage (if an affirmative determination is made in step Sa6302), the target pending result after the power is restored is Although the configuration is such that the display mode of the image HW is uniformly set to the first specific display mode (green display mode HMc), it may be configured such that the display mode is easily set to the first specific display mode. Specifically, when the jackpot result is prefetched by the prefetching process before power outage, the display mode of the target pending image HW after power restoration is lower than the normal display mode HMa or the first specific display mode. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the first specific display mode is set to a higher probability than those display modes.

In addition, without setting restrictions such as the first specific display mode, the same setting process for hold notice as before the power outage can be performed based on the grasped hold look-ahead result (result of the hold look-ahead process performed before the power outage). A configuration may also be adopted in which a lottery process for executing a reservation notice performance or a lottery process for displaying a display mode of a reservation image is performed.

The same holds true for the case where a negative result with a high expectation level is read in advance (if an affirmative determination is made in step Sa6305).

(72) In the sixth modification of the first embodiment, the upper limit display mode of the target pending image HW after the power is restored depends on whether the pending prefetching process before the power outage is a jackpot result or a missed result. Although the configuration is such that the numbers are different, it is also possible to have a configuration that does not make such a distinction. Specifically, the upper limit display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration may be uniformly set to a predetermined special display mode regardless of whether it is appropriate or not.

(73) In the sixth modification of the first embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern specified by the pre-fetch prefetch process before power outage cannot be grasped (if a negative determination is made in step Sa6308), the process corresponding to the pending information Although the configuration is such that the pending image is displayed in the normal display mode HMa, it may be configured such that the pending image is not displayed as an error. At that time, the hold image corresponding to the hold information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped may be hidden, or all the hold images including other hold images may not be displayed.

(74) In the sixth modification of the first embodiment, when the jackpot result is prefetched by the prefetch pending processing before the power outage (if an affirmative determination is made in step Sa6302), the target pending result after the power is restored is Although the display mode of the image HW is set to the first specific display mode, it may be configured to be set to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, if you set a specific display mode with a high expectation level after the power is restored based on the fact that the jackpot result was pre-read before the power outage, the result of the pre-read result and the result of the win/fail judgment in the game will be postponed due to the influence of the power outage abnormality. It is assumed that if an inconsistency occurs between the two, it will have a large impact on the player. In this regard, by setting the display mode of the hold image after the power is restored as the normal display mode HMa for the time being, and changing the display mode based on the fluctuation start command sent at the start of a game session, it is possible to It becomes possible to safely set the display mode of the pending image. This also applies to the case where a highly expected outlier result is prefetched (if an affirmative determination is made in step Sa6305).

(75) In the sixth modification of the first embodiment, when the jackpot result is prefetched by the pending prefetching process before the power is cut off, or the variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP out of reach effect or more is prefetched. The configuration is such that promotion processing is executed in the game round of the target pending image HW (step Sa6304, step Sa6307), but when the result is another look-ahead result (SP out-of-reach effect, etc.) ) may also have a configuration in which promotion processing of the target pending image HW is executed in the game round. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the promotion process is executed in the game round regardless of the pre-read result.

(76) In the sixth modification of the first embodiment, not only the information corresponding to the result of the reservation lookahead processing performed before the power outage but also the specific display mode of the target reservation image HW before the power outage A configuration may also be adopted in which the corresponding information is also backed up and the display mode of the target pending image HW after the power is restored is set based on both pieces of information. For example, you can set multiple types of the upper limit of the specific display mode after power restoration (upper limit display mode) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and set the specific display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage (backed up specific display mode). ) is below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (backed up pending look-ahead result) read ahead in the hold look-ahead process before power outage, the display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration is The configuration may be such that the specific display mode is set to be the same as the specific display mode before the power is cut off.

(77) In the sixth modification of the first embodiment, the main control device 162 backs up information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetching process performed before the power cut, but the production control device 143 Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the display control device 350 backs up the information. When backing up using the production control device 143, as in the fifth modification of the first embodiment, the production control device 143 is equipped with a backup function such as a backup RAM, and then the main control device 162 The information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetching process sent from It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which it is maintained even during power outage. In such a configuration, when the power is restored after the power outage is resolved, based on the information held in the production control device 143 (information corresponding to the result of the pending pre-reading process), the pending pre-reading performed before the power outage is performed. The results of processing can be understood.

In the above case, the information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetch processing in the main control device 162 may or may not be backed up. By the way, if the configuration is such that both the main control device 162 and the production control device 143 back up information corresponding to the result of pending prefetch processing, the information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetch processing is backed up based on the comparison result of each information backed up by both control devices 162 and 143. The information processing apparatus may further include a configuration for determining the normality of the information. Specifically, when the power outage is resolved and the power is restored, information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetching process backed up by the main control device 162 is transmitted to the production control device 143, and the production control device 143 , compares the information it backs up (information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetching process) and the information transmitted from the main controller 162. As a result, if both pieces of information correspond, it is determined that the backed up information is normal, the information is recognized as valid, and is used to set (return) the suspended notice effect after the power is restored. do. On the other hand, if the two pieces of information do not correspond, it is determined that the backed up information is not normal, and the information is deemed invalid and the process of restoring the suspended preview performance (setting of the suspended preview performance using the information) ) is not executed.

Here, the information transmitted from the main control device 162 and the information backed up by the production control device 143 correspond not only when the values of both pieces of information match, but also when the format of the information at the time of storage (for example, the value ) are different between the control devices 162 and 143, and although the information itself does not match, the substantive meaning of each piece of information may be the same.

Note that the comparison of information may be performed not only by the production control device 143 but also by the main control device 162 or the display control device 350. When the main control device 162 performs the comparison, the information backed up by the production control device 143 is transmitted to the main control device 162 when the power outage is resolved and the power is restored.

In addition, the information for determining normality by comparing (verifying) the results backed up by the main control device 162 and the production control device 143 is not necessarily limited to the result of the pending prefetching process, and for example, the information for determining the correctness. It may also be other information, such as information regarding results or the number of reservations. By the way, if the information regarding the number of reservations backed up by the main control device 162 does not correspond to the information regarding the number of reservations backed up by the production control device 143, an error notification may be executed as an abnormality. Alternatively or in addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of reservations is notified based on information backed up by the main control device 162 (priority is given to information backed up by the main control device 162).

(78) In Modifications 7 and 8 of the first embodiment, the susceptibility to execution (execution probability) of the pending notice performance is different in performance mode A and performance mode B, but these performances A configuration may be adopted in which the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed is the same in the modes.

(79) In Modifications 7 and 8 of the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the pending notice performance can be executed in the performance mode B in which the pending notice performance is difficult to execute. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is not executed. In other words, the "performance state in which specific notification is difficult to be performed" in the present invention is understood to include not only a performance mode in which the execution probability of the pending notice performance is low, but also a performance mode in which the pending notice performance is not executed. Can be done.

(80) In the seventh modification of the first embodiment, the production mode is automatically switched without the player's operation, but the production mode may be switched by the player's operation (manually). good. In this case, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the performance mode switching operation is disabled while the pending preview performance is being executed.

(81) In the seventh modification of the first embodiment, the configuration includes two types of performance modes, performance mode A and performance mode B, as the plurality of types of performance states, but three or more types of performance modes are provided. It may also be a configuration. In this case, for example, in a configuration that has three or more types of performance modes, such as performance mode A to performance mode C, it may be difficult to execute the pending preview performance in the order of performance mode A > performance mode B > performance mode C, etc. It may be possible to have a configuration in which the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed is different between the production modes, or in which the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed is the same in production modes A to C. Mode A and production mode C have the same ease of execution of the pending notice performance, but production mode B has the same ease of execution of the pending notice performance; It is also possible to have a configuration in which production modes with different ease of execution coexist.

In addition, in a configuration where a production mode with the same ease of execution of a suspended notice production and a production mode with a different ease of execution coexist, it is difficult to switch between production modes with the same ease of execution. Similarly to switching between different production modes, switching between production modes may be restricted while a pending preview production is being executed, or in the case of switching between production modes that have the same ease of execution, It may be configured to allow switching of the performance mode even while the pending preview performance is being executed.

(82) In the seventh modification of the first embodiment, when it is the switching lottery timing (if an affirmative determination is made in step Sa7101), the production mode switching lottery (the first mode switching lottery in step Sa7102) is executed. However, in the case of winning the lottery, it is determined whether or not the pending notice performance is being executed, and if it is being executed, the production mode switching process is not executed.However, if the switching lottery timing comes It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is determined whether or not a pending notice performance is being executed (if an affirmative determination is made in step Sa7101), and if it is being executed, the mode switching is not performed without performing a production mode switching lottery. good.

(83) In the seventh modification of the first embodiment described above, not only switching from production mode A in which a pending notice performance is likely to be executed to production mode B in which a pending notice production is difficult to execute, but also switching from production mode B to the production mode With regard to switching to A, the configuration was such that switching between presentation modes is restricted while the pending preview presentation is being executed, but switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A is permitted even while the pending notice presentation is being executed. It may also be a configuration.

(84) In the seventh modification of the first embodiment, when switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, the display mode of the target holding image HW in which the holding preview presentation is being executed is the predetermined display mode. (Green display mode HMc) It was configured to determine whether or not the above display mode is present, and to decide whether or not to allow switching of the production mode based on the result, but when switching from production mode A to production mode B As in the case of switching, regardless of the display mode of the target holding image HW, switching of the effect mode may be restricted if the hold preview effect is being executed.

(85) In the seventh modification of the first embodiment, when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, regardless of the display mode of the target pending image HW, even if the pending preview presentation is being executed. For example, the configuration is such that the switching of the production mode is restricted, but similarly to the case of switching from production mode B to production mode A, it is determined whether or not to allow switching of the production mode based on the display mode of the target retention image HW. It is also possible to have a configuration that distributes the information.

In the above case, the predetermined display mode that serves as the criterion (boundary) for whether or not to allow switching of production modes may be the same display mode as the case of switching from production mode B to production mode A, or may be the same display mode as the case of switching from production mode B to production mode A. The display mode may be different from that in the case of switching from B to production mode A. When using a different display mode, it is preferable to use a higher display mode than in the case of switching from production mode B to production mode A.

(86) In the seventh modification of the first embodiment, when switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A is permitted during execution of a pending notice presentation, the display mode of the target pending image HW is displayed in a specific manner. Although the configuration is such that the presentation mode can be switched while the presentation mode is maintained, a configuration may also be adopted in which the display mode of the target pending image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa as the presentation mode is switched. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the target pending image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa until the game round starts or ends, or the configuration shown in FIG. As such, the display mode may be changed to a specific display mode before the game round of the target pending image HW starts or ends.

(87) In the seventh modification of the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which switching of the production mode is restricted based on the result of the pending prefetching process. For example, when a predetermined result (for example, a jackpot result or a losing result that is higher than the SPSP reach performance) is prefetched by the pending prefetching process, switching of the production mode may be restricted until the game round of the pending information ends. .

For example, if a miss result with high expectations such as a jackpot result or a SPSP reach effect is read in advance, the pending effect such as a preview effect that arouses the player's sense of anticipation even before the game session of the pending information (pending It is assumed that a production (different from the pending preview production using images for use) will be performed. If the performance mode is switched during execution of the promotion performance, there is a risk that the promotion performance may become difficult to understand from the player's perspective. At this time, regardless of whether or not the pending notice performance is being executed, if the configuration is such that the switching of the production mode is restricted based on the result of the pending preview processing that triggers the pending notice performance, the inciting performance may be restricted. It is possible to suitably prevent the production mode from switching midway. In addition, since it is possible to restrict production mode switching before the execution of the pending notice performance, even if the switching timing of the production mode and the start timing of the pending notice production overlap, the production mode switching and the execution of the pending notice production It is possible to prevent these from occurring at the same time.

(88) In the seventh modification of the first embodiment, when the performance mode switching condition is satisfied during the execution of the suspended notice performance (when the performance mode switching timing has come and the first mode switching lottery is won) In , a configuration was adopted in which switching of the performance mode is allowed when the pre-reading result of the reservation image (reservation information) in which the reservation preview performance is being executed is a jackpot result, but instead of or in addition to this, it is possible to It may be configured to allow switching of the performance mode when the result (for example, a result that is out of reach of SPSP reach performance or higher) is read in advance. In other words, although the presentation mode cannot be switched in principle while the pending notice presentation is in progress, when the presentation mode is switched, it suggests that expectations for the pending information targeted by the pending notice presentation are high. be able to.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned configuration that allows production mode switching exceptionally is not essential, and in the seventh modification of the first embodiment, the pending preview production is executed without referring to the result of the pending pre-reading process. It may be configured to determine whether or not to allow switching of the production mode based on whether or not the display mode is in the middle and the type of specific display mode at that time.

(89) In the seventh modification of the first embodiment, the production mode is allowed to be switched on the condition that the second mode switching lottery is won, but the mode can be switched without going through such a lottery. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that allows this. That is, when the performance mode switching condition is satisfied during the execution of the pending preview performance and the result of pre-reading the pending information is a jackpot result, the switching of the performance mode may be always permitted.

(90) In the eighth modification of the first embodiment, the production mode is switched by the player's operation (manually), but the production mode may be automatically switched without the player's operation. good. In such a configuration, for example, switching of the production mode is set in advance based on a predetermined result being pre-read by the pending pre-reading process, and then the production mode is automatically switched when the switching execution condition is satisfied. I can think of things. Note that the switching execution conditions may include, for example, starting a game round of pending information in which a predetermined result has been read in advance, or starting a game round a predetermined time before the relevant game round.

(91) Although the eighth modification of the first embodiment has two types of performance modes, performance mode A and performance mode B, as multiple types of performance states, three or more types of performance modes are provided. It may also be a configuration. In this case, for example, in a configuration that has three or more types of performance modes, such as performance mode A to performance mode C, it may be difficult to execute the pending preview performance in the order of performance mode A > performance mode B > performance mode C, etc. It may be possible to have a configuration in which the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed is different between the production modes, or in which the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed is the same in production modes A to C. Mode A and production mode C have the same ease of execution of the pending notice performance, but production mode B has the same ease of execution of the pending notice performance; It is also possible to have a configuration in which production modes with different ease of execution coexist.

In addition, in a configuration where a production mode with the same ease of execution of a suspended notice production and a production mode with a different ease of execution coexist, it is difficult to switch between production modes with the same ease of execution. Similarly to switching between different production modes, the execution of the pending notice production may be restricted while the production mode is in a standby state, or switching between production modes that have the same ease of execution may be possible. In this case, the configuration may be such that execution of the pending notice performance is allowed even in a standby state for switching the performance mode.

(92) In the eighth modification of the first embodiment, the execution of the pending notice performance is uniformly restricted when the performance mode is in a standby state, but a specific display mode more than a predetermined number is displayed. It may also be configured to restrict execution of the pending notice effect. For example, in a standby state for production mode switching, while allowing the execution of a pending notice production in which the display mode of the pending image is set to the blue display mode HMb, the display mode of the pending image is set to the green display mode HMc or higher. It may also be configured such that the pending notice performance as the display mode is not executed.

(93) In the eighth modification of the first embodiment, the execution of the pending notice performance is restricted when the production mode is in a standby state for switching, regardless of the production mode to which the switching destination is switched. The restriction mode may be changed depending on the production mode. For example, in the case of switching from production mode B, in which pending notice performances are difficult to execute, to production mode A, in which pending notice performances are likely to be executed, while the execution of pending notice performances is uniformly restricted in the standby state for switching the production mode, In the case of switching from production mode A to production mode B, execution of a pending notice production is permitted even in the standby state for production mode switching, or a specific display higher than a predetermined display mode (for example, blue display mode HMb) is allowed. Although the execution of the pending notice effect as a mode is restricted, the execution of the pending notice effect in a specific display mode below a predetermined display mode may be permitted.

(94) In the eighth modification of the first embodiment, the display mode of the target holding image HW after switching the production mode is set when the standby state ends, but after the standby state ends. It may be configured to be set at a predetermined timing during a period (after the production mode is switched) and until the game round of the target pending image HW starts or ends. In addition, when setting the target pending image HW during a game round, the display mode may be set based on the result of the pending prefetching process of the target pending image HW, or during the gaming round of the target pending image HW. The display mode may be set based on a variation start command sent at the start.

(95) In the eighth modification of the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the execution of the reservation notice performance is not restricted for the reservation information acquired before the display of the switching guide image 451, but the execution of the reservation notice performance is restricted. It is also possible to have a configuration in which That is, the configuration may be such that the execution of the pending notice effect is restricted not only during the standby state but also before transitioning to the standby state.

Specifically, when the switching guide image 451 is displayed while the pending preview performance is being executed, the pending preview performance is executed at a predetermined timing during the period from when the switching guide image 451 is displayed until the performance mode is switched. It is conceivable that the display mode of the target pending image is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa. Note that the specific timing of changing from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa is assumed to be the display timing of the switching guide image 451, the transition timing to the standby state, the switching timing of the production mode, etc.

(96) In the eighth modification of the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the execution of the reservation notice effect is not restricted for the reservation information acquired after the switching guide image 451 is displayed and before transition to the standby state; It may also be configured to restrict execution of the pending notice performance.

In this case, based on the display of the switching guidance image 451 (transitioning to the switching guidance state), a configuration may be adopted in which execution restriction of the pending preview performance is started prior to transitioning to the standby state. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which a hold preview performance triggered by hold information acquired after the switching guide image 451 is displayed and before transition to the standby state is not executed before or during the transition to the standby state.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which, although the hold preview performance is temporarily executed before transitioning to the standby state, the execution of the hold preview performance is canceled when the hold preview performance is transitioned to the standby state. Specifically, after the switching guide image 451 is displayed, a hold preview performance triggered by the hold information acquired before transition to the standby state is executed before transition to the standby state, and then the hold preview performance is executed. The display mode of the target pending image may be changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa. Note that the specific timing of changing from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa may be the timing of transition to a standby state, the timing of switching the production mode, etc.

(97) In the eighth modification of the first embodiment, when the hold information is acquired during the standby state, the hold lookahead process is executed, and after the standby state ends, the hold lookahead process is performed during the standby state. Although the display mode of the target holding image HW is set based on the result of the process, the holding prefetching process for hold information acquired during the standby state is executed after the standby state, and based on the result, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set. It is also possible to set the display mode of the target pending image HW in . At this time, the suspension prefetching process may be performed by the main control device 162 or by the production control device 143. Further, the suspension prefetching process when suspension information is acquired during the standby state may not be executed or may be executed.

(98) In Modification 8 of the first embodiment, the configuration according to Modification 7 of the first embodiment is applied, and the transition to the switching guidance state is restricted while the hold notice performance is being executed. You can also use it as Specifically, while the pending notice performance is being executed, the lottery may not be performed even if the switching guidance lottery is to be executed, or even if the lottery is won, the switching guidance image 451 may not be displayed or the guidance notification flag may not be displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which no setting is performed, or a configuration in which it is not determined whether or not it is the timing to execute the switching guidance lottery.

(99) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is formed on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Furthermore, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner is provided with a storage section and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

<Second embodiment>
The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained below. Note that the basic configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10 is the same in this embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in MPU 312 of main controller 162>
The electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described using FIG. 100.

During the game, the MPU 312 uses various counter information to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, settings for the display on the special symbol display section 43, display settings on the regular symbol display section 44, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the initial value settings of the jackpot random number counter C1 used in the lottery to generate a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type such as a variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, and the jackpot random number counter C1 are set. A random number initial value counter CINI used for this, and a variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time in each special figure display section AS, BS in the special figure display section 43 are used. Furthermore, a random number counter C3 per ordinary figure is used to determine whether or not the ordinary electricity accessory 63a of the second actuating port 63 is to be placed in a support state (open state).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 314a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 314. In the lottery counter buffer 314a, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired information storage when a winning occurs in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b as a means.

The holding ball storage area 314b includes a holding area RE consisting of a first special figure holding area Ra and a second special figure holding area Rb, and an execution area AE. The reservation areas Ra and Rb each include a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the lottery counter Numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS stored in the buffer 314a is stored in one of the areas as pending information (special information).

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, if winnings to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 occur multiple times in a row, the first area → second area → third area → Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth area. By providing each of the four areas in this manner, a maximum of four winning histories of game balls entered into the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 can be stored on hold. In addition, a total reservation number storage area is provided in the reservation ball storage area 314b, and the total reservation number storage area stores the number of winning history of the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63. Information for identifying is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 43, and is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the reservation area RE. Based on various numerical information stored in the area AE, judgments of validity and the like are performed.

In detail about each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 2999, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 2999). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 2999).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, when the game ball enters the first operating port 62, it is stored in the first special figure holding area Ra of the RAM 314, and when the game ball enters the second operating port 63, the second special figure is stored in the RAM 314. storage area Rb.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for a lottery to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and the random number value for a jackpot is set in the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 313a of the ROM 313. has been done. As shown in FIG. 101, the success/failure tables are set as a win/fail table for low probability mode and a win/fail table for high probability mode. In this pachinko machine 10, the lottery modes in the win/fail lottery are a low probability mode (low probability state) in which the probability of a jackpot is relatively low, and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which the probability of a jackpot is relatively high. is provided. When the lottery mode is a low probability mode, the lottery mode for the low probability mode is referred to, and when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the lottery mode for the high probability mode is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 101(a), in the low probability mode win/fail table, a total of 10 random numbers from "0" to "9" are set as jackpot random number values. That is, the jackpot winning probability in the low probability mode is set to 1/300.

As shown in FIG. 101(b), in the high probability mode win/fail table, a total of 50 random numbers from "0" to "49" are set as jackpot random numbers. That is, the jackpot winning probability in the high probability mode is set to 1/60.

In each lottery mode, the lottery result is a loss unless the random number value is a jackpot. Note that the jackpot winning probability in each probability mode is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. That is, as long as the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is for distributing the type when a jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). It has become. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, when the game ball enters the first operating port 62, it is stored in the first special figure holding area Ra of the RAM 314, and when the game ball enters the second operating port 63, the second special figure is stored in the RAM 314. storage area Rb.

The destinations to which game results are allocated to the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313 as a jackpot type table. As shown in FIG. 102, as the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special pattern and a jackpot type table for the second special pattern are set. When a jackpot is achieved based on a winning at the first operating port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is referred to, and when a jackpot is achieved based on a winning at the second operating port 63, the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is referred to. The jackpot type table for 2 special figures is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 102(a), in the jackpot type table for the first special figure, the selectable jackpot types are 4R probability variable jackpot result A, 4R probability variable jackpot result B, 4R normal jackpot result A, and 4R. Usually jackpot result B is set. In each of these jackpot results, the number of round games to be executed is four. Here, the round game is a game in which variable winning control is executed at least once, in which the variable winning device 65 is changed from a closed state to an open state, and then changed to a closed state. In this embodiment, the variable winning control is configured to be executed once for each round game.

The 4R probability variable jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high probability mode is continued until the number of executions of the special symbol game after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times). When the first upper limit number of times is reached, the high probability mode ends and the lottery mode is changed to the low probability mode.

In addition, in the 4R probability variable jackpot result A, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the support mode in the general electric accessory 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode. In this case, the high frequency support mode is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening/closing execution mode reaches the second upper limit number of times (for example, 1100 times) which is larger than the first upper limit number of times. When the second upper limit number of times is reached, the high-frequency support mode ends and the support mode is changed to the low-frequency support mode.

That is, when the jackpot type is 4R probability variable jackpot result A, the high probability mode and high frequency support state (high probability game state , variable probability gaming state), and after reaching the first upper limit number of times, the state remains in the low probability mode and high frequency support mode (time saving gaming state) until reaching the second upper limit number of times. After reaching the second upper limit, the game shifts to a low probability mode and low frequency support state (normal gaming state).

Here, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode will be explained. In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, when compared in a situation where game balls continue to be launched in the same manner to the game area PE, the frequency of winnings to the second operating port 63 is relatively high. The driving mode of the general electric utility object 63a is controlled so as to be high or low. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the random number lottery using the random number counter C3 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. The number of openings of the accessory 63a is also greater in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, and the time period for one opening is also longer in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize at the second operating port 63 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize is higher in the first operating port 62 than in the second operating port 63, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning is higher in the first operating port 62 than in the second operating port 63. The probability of winning the prize in the mouth 63 increases. When a winning occurs in the second operating port 63, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has too much. It can be carried out.

Note that the configuration for realizing the high-frequency support mode is not limited to the one described above. For example, after making the winning probability of the general lottery lottery equal in both modes, the configuration for realizing the high-frequency support mode is It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of times the accessory 63a is opened and the length of time each opening is given preferential treatment compared to the low-frequency support mode. In short, it is sufficient that the frequency of winnings to the second operating port 63 per unit time is higher than in the low frequency support mode, and any one of the following conditions or any arbitrary condition among the lottery of common figures, the number of openings, and the opening time is sufficient. A configuration may be adopted in which the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set by differentiating the combination conditions.

The 4R probability variable jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high probability mode is continued until the number of executions of the special symbol game after the opening/closing execution mode reaches the first upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times). Further, in the 4R probability variable jackpot result B, the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high frequency support mode in this case is continued until the number of executions of the special symbol game after the opening/closing execution mode reaches the first upper limit number of times. In other words, when the jackpot type is 4R probability variable jackpot result B, it will be in a high probability gaming state until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening/closing execution mode reaches the first upper limit number of times, and after reaching the first upper limit number of times. transitions to the normal gaming state.

4R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to low probability mode and the support mode is set to high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high frequency support mode is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined third upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times). In other words, when the jackpot type is 4R normal jackpot result A, the time saving game state will be in effect until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening/closing execution mode reaches the third upper limit, and after reaching the third upper limit. Shift to normal gaming state.

4R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to low probability mode and the support mode is set to high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high frequency support mode is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening/closing execution mode reaches the fourth upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) which is smaller than the third upper limit number of times. In other words, when the jackpot type is 4R normal jackpot result B, the time saving game state will be in effect until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening/closing execution mode reaches the fourth upper limit, and after reaching the fourth upper limit, Shift to normal gaming state.

In this embodiment, "0" to "1" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 4R probability variable jackpot result A, "2" to "49" correspond to the 4R probability variable jackpot result B, and "50" to " 51" corresponds to the 4R normal jackpot result A, and "52" to "99" correspond to the 4R normal jackpot result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to 4R definite variable jackpot result A is 2%, the probability of being assigned to 4R probable variable jackpot result B is 48%, the probability of being assigned to 4R normal jackpot result A is 2%, the probability of being assigned to 4R normal jackpot result B is set at 48%.

As shown in FIG. 102(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, 10R probability variable jackpot result A and 10R probability variable jackpot result B are set as selectable jackpot types. Each of these jackpot results results in 10 round games being executed.

The 10R probability variable jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high probability mode is continued until the number of executions of the special symbol game after the opening/closing execution mode reaches the first upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times). In addition, in the 10R probability variable jackpot result A, the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high frequency support mode is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening/closing execution mode reaches the second upper limit number of times (for example, 1100 times). In other words, when the jackpot type is 10R probability variable jackpot result A, the game will be in a high probability gaming state until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening/closing execution mode reaches the first upper limit, and then reaches the second upper limit. Until then, it will be a time-saving game state.

The 10R probability variable jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high probability mode is continued until the number of executions of the special symbol game after the opening/closing execution mode reaches the first upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times). In addition, in the 10R probability variable jackpot result B, the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high frequency support mode is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening/closing execution mode reaches the first upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times). In other words, if the jackpot type is 10R probability variable jackpot result B, the game will be in a high probability gaming state until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening/closing execution mode reaches the first upper limit, and after reaching the first upper limit. transitions to the normal gaming state.

In this embodiment, "0" to "19" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 10R probability variable jackpot result A, and "20" to "99" correspond to the 10R normal jackpot result B. That is, the probability of being allocated to the 10R probability variable jackpot result A is set to 20%, and the probability of being allocated to the 10R normal jackpot result B is set to 80%.

In addition, in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, the normal jackpot result is not set as a selectable jackpot type. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the second special drawing lottery based on the prize entered into the second actuation port 63, the variable probability jackpot result will be selected with a 100% probability after the opening/closing execution mode ends. . For this reason, if a jackpot is achieved in the high-precision gaming state or the time-saving gaming state in which a prize can be won through the second operating port 63, the game will definitely shift to the high-precision gaming state. In addition, if you win the jackpot in the second special drawing lottery, the number of round games played in the opening/closing execution mode is greater than if you win the jackpot in the first special drawing lottery. This means that you can expect to win the ball. Therefore, the game in which a game ball is placed in the second operating port 63 is more advantageous for the player than the game in which the game ball is placed in the first operating port 62.

In this way, there is a clear difference in the advantages for the player between the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting to win a prize in the second operating port 63 of the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63. Players pay more attention to the high-frequency support mode in which the frequency of winning is increased.

Here, in this embodiment, in addition to the time-saving gaming state that is transitioned to when a normal jackpot result is obtained, the cumulative number of special drawing game times (losing game times) in which the winning lottery result turned into a losing result ( There is a time-saving gaming state that is triggered when the so-called addictive number of times reaches a predetermined ceiling number of times (for example, 1000 times) (FIG. 102(c)). In the following, in order to distinguish between the time-saving gaming state that is triggered by a jackpot and the time-saving gaming state that is triggered by reaching the ceiling number of times, the former is referred to as the first time-saving gaming state, and the latter is referred to as the second time-saving gaming state. There is something called a state.

In counting the winning game times, if a jackpot result occurs before reaching the ceiling number, the remaining number of times until the ceiling number is reached is reset to an initial value (for example, 1000 times), and the number of winning games up to that point is discarded. In addition, the losing game times during the high-probability gaming state are not counted. Therefore, in order to shift to the second time-saving gaming state, it is necessary that the number of missed games after the opening/closing execution mode ends reaches the ceiling number, and the transition to the high-precision gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is completed. In this case, it is necessary that the number of losing games after the high-probability gaming state ends reaches the ceiling number.

Since the trigger for transitioning to the second time-saving game state is a winning result, the game transitions to the second time-saving game state without going through the opening/closing execution mode. That is, after the special figure game round in which the number of missed game times reaches the ceiling number ends, it is possible to immediately play the special figure game round in the second time-saving game state. The second time-saving game state is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game after shifting to the second time-saving game state reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 900 times). After the second time-saving game state ends, the game shifts to the normal game state.

In addition, the jackpot type counter C2 is also used to determine the stop result of the symbols that are stopped and displayed on each special figure display section AS, BS when the result of the lottery based on winnings to the operating ports 62 and 63 becomes a jackpot. used. The stop result is determined by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. In the stop result table, a plurality of data of stop results (jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on each special symbol display section AS, BS) in the case of a jackpot are set in correspondence with the value of the jackpot type counter C2, When determining the stop result, data corresponding to the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is read out of the plurality of stop result data. Here, since the same jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the stop result and the jackpot type, the jackpot pattern that is stopped and displayed on each special symbol display section AS, BS and the jackpot that is determined at the time of the jackpot. There is a correlation with the type.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 312 to determine the variation display time in the first special figure display section AS and the second special figure display section BS of the special figure display section 43.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. The variable type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, when the game ball enters the first operating port 62, it is stored in the first special figure holding area Ra of the RAM 314, and when the game ball enters the second operating port 63, the second special figure is stored in the RAM 314. storage area Rb.

The allocation destination of the variable display time to the variable type counter CS is stored as a variable display time table in the variable display time table storage area 313c of the ROM 313. Details of the variable display time table will be described later.

For example, the random number counter C3 per ordinary figure is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The random number counter C3 per common figure is updated regularly and is stored in the common figure holding area 314c of the RAM 314 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 64.

The general random number counter C3 is used for the general lottery (support lottery) to determine whether or not it is a general lottery (support winning).If the result is a support winning, the general random number counter C3 is An accessory opening/closing game is performed at least once in which the accessory 63a is changed from the closed state to the open state and then brought into the closed state.

The random number value for the support win is set in the support lottery table stored in the win/fail table storage area 313a of the ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 103, the support lottery table includes a support lottery table for low frequency support mode and a support lottery table for high frequency support mode. When the support lottery is performed, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode is referred to, and if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 103(a), in the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode, a total of one random number of "7" is set as the value of the random number for support winning. That is, the support winning probability in the low-frequency support mode is set to 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), a total of 99 numbers from "0" to "98" are set in the support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode. That is, the support winning probability in the high-frequency support mode is set to 99/100, and most of the support lottery results in each round are support winning results.

In each support mode, the lottery results will be out of the ordinary unless the random number value is a support win. Note that the support winning probability in each support mode is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. That is, as long as the probability of support winning is higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode, the number and value of random numbers for support winning are arbitrary. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the support lottery table in each support mode is made common so that support winning probabilities are equal in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 162>
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 312 in the main control device 162 to advance the game will be explained. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 312 executes main processing that is started upon power-on, and NMI interrupt processing that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). , a description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 104. This process is started by the MPU 312 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step Sb101, reading processing of various winning sensors is executed. That is, it reads the states of various winning sensors connected to the main control device 162, determines the states of the winning sensors (detection information from the winning sensors), and stores the detected information (winning detection information). For example, when it is determined that a winning has occurred in the first operating port 62, a winning detection flag for the first special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and a winning in the second operating port 63 is determined to have occurred. If it is determined that this has occurred, a winning detection flag for the second special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. Further, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 64, a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314.

In step Sb102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step Sb103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the regular hit random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the common pattern random number counter C3 is incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step Sb104, a through prize winning process is executed in conjunction with a winning through gate 64. In the winning process for through gates, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for through gates is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the general pattern holding area 314c. On the condition that the number of stored accessories held is less than 4, the value of the random number counter C3 per normal figure updated in step Sb103 is stored in the normal figure holding area 314c. Further, if a winning detection flag for a through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, the winning detection flag is deleted and the winning process for the through gate ends.

In step Sb105, winning processing for the actuating ports is executed in response to winnings in the actuating ports 62 and 63, and thereafter, the timer interrupt processing is ended.

<Winning process for actuation port>
The winning process for the operating port in step Sb105 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 105.

First, in step Sb201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 62 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the first operating port winning sensor 62a. When it is determined that a game ball has entered the first operating port 62, a prize ball command is set in step Sb202 to cause the payout control device 181 to pay out three game balls.

In step Sb203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has won in the first operating port 62. In step Sb204, the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the first special symbol reservation area Ra is read, and the start reservation memory number RaN stored in the first special symbol reservation area Ra is set (hereinafter referred to as , also referred to as the first start pending storage number RaN). Thereafter, in step Sb205, information acquisition processing is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS, and the main prize winning process is ended.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step Sb201 (when no winning has occurred in the first operating port 62), the process proceeds to step Sb206, and it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second operating port 63 (starting winning). is determined based on the detection state of the second operating port winning sensor 63c. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operating port 63, a prize ball command is set in step Sb207 to cause the payout control device 181 to pay out one game ball.

In step Sb208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has won in the second operating port 63. In step Sb209, the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the second special symbol reservation area Rb is read out, and the start reservation storage number RbN stored in the second special symbol reservation area Rb is set (hereinafter referred to as , the second start pending storage number RbN). Thereafter, information acquisition processing is performed in step Sb205, and the main prize winning processing is ended.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step Sb206 (when a winning to the second operation port 63 has not occurred), the main winning process is directly ended.

The prize ball command set in step Sb202 or step Sb207 is transmitted to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described later.

Here, the information acquisition process in step Sb205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 106.

First, in step Sb301, it is determined whether or not the start pending memory number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sb204 or step Sb209 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the starting pending memory number N is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is immediately terminated, and if it is less than the upper limit value, in step Sb302, the starting pending memory number N of the corresponding special figure holding area Ra, Rb is determined. Add 1 to N. In step Sb303, 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as common reservation number CRN).

In step Sb304, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the corresponding special figure display reservation area, that is, in step Sb302. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories added by 1.

In other words, when the starting reservation memory number RaN for the first special symbol is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS is set in the reservation area Ra for the first special symbol. It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas, that is, the reservation area Ra corresponding to the start reservation storage number RaN for the first special symbol added by 1 in step Sb302.

In addition, when the start reservation memory number RbN for the second special symbol is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS is set in the reservation area RbN for the second special symbol. It is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas, that is, the reservation area Rb corresponding to the start reservation storage number RbN for the second special symbol added by 1 in step Sb302.

In step Sb305, a display update process is executed for the special figure reservation number display section AM of the main display unit 81. In the special figure reservation number display section AM, it is possible to display the number of reservations for the first special figure and the number of reservations for the second special figure separately. In the display update process of step Sb305, if the current ball landing destination (winning destination) is the first operating port 62, the display of the number of reservations for the first special symbol is updated, and the current ball landing destination (winning destination) is updated. If it is the second operating port 63, the display of the number of reservations for the second special symbol is updated.

In step Sb306, a hold command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143. The hold command includes information indicating whether the starting prize is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, information indicating the number of holdings, and the like. After executing step Sb306, this information acquisition process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 107. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started upon power-on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the process from step Sb401 to step Sb408 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update process from step Sb409 to step Sb411 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, in step Sb401, external signal output processing is executed. In the external signal output process of step Sb401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181. In addition, if production commands such as a variation start command, type command, variation end command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the production control device 143.

In step Sb402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step Sb403, a special symbol game time control process is executed to control the game in each special symbol game time. In the special figure game round control process, jackpot determination, display control of the special figure display section 43, etc. are performed. In step Sb404, a gaming state transition process is executed. This gaming state transition process shifts the gaming state to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the special figure game time control process in step Sb403 and the game state transition process in step Sb404 will be described later.

In step Sb405, a normal pattern game time control process for controlling the game in the normal pattern game period is executed. In the normal pattern game round control process, support lottery (normal pattern winning/failure lottery), display control of the normal pattern display section 44, etc. are performed. In step Sb406, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the general electric utility object 63a provided in the second operating port 63 is executed. The details of the normal figure game times control process in step Sb405 and the power support process in step Sb406 will be described later.

In step Sb407, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on the condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 191. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In step Sb408, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314. The power outage flag is set by the NMI interrupt process executed when a power outage occurs, and is used by the MPU 312 to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

If the power outage flag is not stored (if a power outage state has not occurred), in step Sb409, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time (from the start of the current normal processing). In this embodiment, it is determined whether 4 msec) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step Sb410. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 314.

In step Sb411, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the change type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 314.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb409 (if a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the current normal process), the process returns to step Sb401 and processes from step Sb401 onwards are executed.

In this way, after executing the process of step Sb408, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated using the remaining period until the next normal process execution timing arrives. Here, since the execution time of each process from step Sb401 to step Sb408 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly The variation type counter CS can also be updated randomly.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb408 (if the power outage flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sb412, and generation of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step Sb413, the value of the stack pointer of MPU 312 is stored in the backup area of RAM 314, and in step Sb414, a power outage command is set as a transmission target to production control device 143. By transmitting the power outage command, the production control device 143 is notified of the occurrence of the power outage state.

In step Sb415, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved in the backup area. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 314. In step Sb416, access to the RAM 314 is prohibited, and thereafter, an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Note that even after the power is completely cut off, the power for data storage retention of the RAM 314 is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191, so the information stored in the RAM 314 before the power is cut off remains unchanged. It is retained within a period (for example, one or two days).

<Special figure game time control process>
The game time control process in step Sb403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 108.

First, in step Sb501, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The opening/closing execution mode flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.

If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step Sb502 whether or not the special figure display section 43 is in the final display. Specifically, it is determined whether a final display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. The confirmed display flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the final display is being displayed in the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS.

If the special figure display section 43 is not in fixed display, it is determined in step Sb503 whether or not the special figure display section 43 is in variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a variable display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. The variable display flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS is undergoing a variable display.

When the special figure display section 43 is not in the variable display mode, it is determined in step Sb504 whether or not the common reservation number CRN is "0". When the common reservation number CRN is "0", it means that the start reservation storage numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first operation port 62 and the second operation port 63. Therefore, when the common reservation number CRN is "0", it means that there is no reservation information to be executed, so the special figure game time control process is ended as it is.

If the common reservation number CRN is not "0", in step Sb505 data for setting the data stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra or the second special figure reservation area Rb for variable display After executing the setting process and further executing the variation start process for starting the variable display on the special figure display section 43 in step Sb506, the present game round control process is ended.

Here, the data setting process in step Sb505 and the fluctuation start process in step Sb506 will be described in detail below.

First, data setting processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 109.

First, in step Sb601, it is determined whether the second start pending storage number RbN stored in the second special symbol holding area Rb is "0". When the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first special figure (first operating port 62) in steps Sb602 to Sb608 is executed, and the second start pending memory number RbN is If it is not "0", data setting processing for the second special figure (second operating port 63) in steps Sb609 to Sb615 is executed.

As already explained, the data setting process is performed when the common hold count CRN is 1 or more, but the situation in which the data setting process is executed is the first start hold memory number RaN and the second start hold memory number RaN. It means that at least one of RbN is 1 or more. In this case, in the data setting process, it is first determined whether or not the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", and it is determined that the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", that is, the second special It is configured to execute processing related to the reservation information for the first special symbol on the condition that there is no reservation information for the first special symbol. Therefore, if the reservation information is stored in both the first special figure reservation area Ra and the second special figure reservation area Rb, the second special figure reservation area Rb stored in the second special figure reservation area The reservation information for the figure (second operating port 63) will be processed with priority.

In the data setting process for the first special symbol, first in step Sb602, the first starting reservation storage number RaN of the first special symbol reservation area Ra is subtracted by 1. In step Sb603, the common reservation number CRN is subtracted by 1. In step Sb604, the data stored in the first area of the first special figure reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sb605, a process is executed to shift the data (reservation information such as jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area Ra. In this process, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in the second to fourth areas are sequentially moved to lower areas.

In step Sb606, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The second special figure flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the reservation information of the second operating port 63 exists. If the second special figure flag is stored, the second special figure flag is deleted in step Sb607.

After executing step Sb607 or if a negative determination is made in step Sb606 (if the second special symbol flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step Sb608, and the production control device 143 is notified that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. Set the shift command (shift occurrence information) for notification. In this case, from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, information indicating that the holding area to which the current data has been shifted corresponds to the first special figure holding area Ra, that is, the first operating port 62. A shift command including information that it is compatible is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the production control device 143. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sb608 is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in normal processing (FIG. 107). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ga of the symbol display device 75 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

In the data setting process for the second special symbol, first in step Sb609, the second starting reservation storage number RbN of the second special symbol reservation area Rb is subtracted by one. In step Sb610, the common reservation number CRN is subtracted by 1. In step Sb611, the data stored in the first area of the second special figure reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sb612, a process is executed to shift the data (reservation information such as jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation area Rb. In step Sb613, it is determined whether the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second special figure flag is not stored, the second special figure flag is set in step Sb614.

After executing step Sb614 or when an affirmative determination is made in step Sb613 (if the second special symbol flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sb615, and the sub-side control device informs that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. A shift command (shift occurrence information), which is information to be recognized by the production control device 143, is set. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313 that the holding area to which data has been shifted this time corresponds to the second special figure holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second operating port 63. A shift command including information on what is being done is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the production control device 143. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sb615 is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in normal processing (FIG. 107). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing for changing the display in the second reservation display area Gb of the symbol display device 75 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 110.

First, in step Sb701, it is determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The high probability flag is for the MPU 312 to know that it is in the high probability mode, and is set when transitioning to the high probability mode.

If it is not the high probability mode, a judgment is made in step Sb702 with reference to the validity table for the low probability mode (FIG. 101(a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win for the low probability mode (for example, "0" to "9"). Determine whether On the other hand, if it is the high probability mode, the validity determination is made in step Sb703 with reference to the validity table for the high probability mode (FIG. 101(b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win for the high probability mode (for example, "0" to "49"). Determine whether

After executing step Sb702 or step Sb703, it is determined in step Sb704 whether or not the result of the determination in step Sb702 or step Sb703 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, it is determined in step Sb705 whether or not the second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the second special symbol flag is not stored, in step Sb706, a lottery of the jackpot type is performed with reference to the type table for the first special symbol (FIG. 102(a)). Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is in any numerical range of 4R probability variable jackpot result A, 4R probability variable jackpot result B, 4R normal jackpot result A, or 4R normal jackpot result B. Determine whether it belongs.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol flag is stored, in step Sb707, a lottery of the jackpot type is performed with reference to the type table for the second special symbol (FIG. 102(b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE belongs to either the 10R probability variable jackpot result A or the 10R probability variable jackpot result B.

After step Sb706 or step Sb707 is executed, in step Sb708, a type flag indicating the jackpot type selected by the lottery in step Sb706 or step Sb707 is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, when the jackpot type selected by lottery is 4R probability variable jackpot result A, a 4R probability variable jackpot A flag is stored.

In step Sb709, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313 is referred to to set the stop result for the jackpot. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game round.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb704 (not a jackpot win), the process proceeds to step Sb710, and a stop result for a loss is set. In this embodiment, only one type of stop result is provided for disconnection, and that stop result is set in step Sb710.

After step Sb709 or step Sb710 is executed, in step Sb711, a variable display time setting process is performed to set the variable display time of the current game round in the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS. Execute.

Here, the variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 111.

First, in step Sb801, the current gaming state is grasped. Specifically, it determines which of the high probability flag and high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314, and based on the result, the current gaming state is determined to be the normal gaming state or the high frequency support flag. Identify whether the game is in a guaranteed game state or a time-saving game state. The high frequency support flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the current support mode is the high frequency support mode. If both the high-probability flag and high-frequency support mode are set, it is identified as a high-probability gaming state, and if only the high-frequency support mode is set, it is identified as a time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability If neither the flag nor the high-frequency support mode is set, it is determined that the game is in a normal gaming state.

In step Sb802, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is a jackpot. If it is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sb803, and a variable display time table for jackpot is obtained as a table for drawing variable display times (variable patterns). At this time, a variable display time table corresponding to the current gaming state is acquired based on the grasp result in step Sb801.

Here, the variable display time table will be explained with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113.

As the variable display time table, a variable display time table for the normal gaming state, a variable display time table for the high probability gaming state, and a variable display time table for the time saving gaming state are set. Further, in the variable display time table corresponding to each gaming state, one for jackpot and one for loss are set.

In each fluctuation display time table, the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS and the information of the fluctuation pattern are set in association with each other. In addition, in FIG. 112 and FIG. 113, in order to facilitate understanding, information on the fluctuation display time is shown together with the fluctuation pattern, but the information on the fluctuation display time is not included in the fluctuation display as time information corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. It is stored in the ROM 313 separately from the time table.

As shown in FIG. 112(a), in the jackpot variable display time table corresponding to the normal gaming state, selectable variable patterns include variable pattern 1A (15 sec), variable pattern 2A (60 sec), and variable pattern 3A ( 120 seconds) is set. When a variation pattern is selected using the variation type counter CS, the symbol changes in the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS at the variation display time corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Display is performed.

Further, when a variation pattern is selected, information indicating the variation pattern is transmitted to the production control device 143 as a variation start command. The production control device 143 grasps the variation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received variation start command. Then, the display control device 350 is controlled so that each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a variable manner at a variable display time corresponding to the grasped variation pattern. As a result, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 75 in synchronization with the variable display of the symbols on the first special symbol display section AS or the second special symbol display section BS.

Further, each variation pattern also corresponds to a game repeat effect such as a reach effect performed on the symbol display device 75. Specifically, the variation pattern 1A corresponds to the normal reach performance, the variation pattern 2A corresponds to the SP reach (super reach) performance, and the variation pattern 3A corresponds to the SPSP reach performance. That is, when the performance control device 143 understands the fluctuation pattern from the received fluctuation start command, it controls the display control device 350 so that the game repeat performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is performed on the symbol display device 75.

Each of the above-mentioned reach-for-win effects is such that after the reach-for-reach display is performed, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination. Here, the reach display (reach state) is equipped with a symbol display device 75 that can perform variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the stop display result after the variable display is a special display result (jackpot result), in a gaming machine where the gaming state becomes a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous for the player, variable display (or variable display) of the symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 75 is started. This refers to a display state that is used to make the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result, before the stop display result is derived and displayed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the plurality of symbol arrays displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot state is established. This is a display state in which possible combinations of ready-to-win symbols are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. More specifically, as a step before ending the fluctuating display of symbols, while the symbols in the final stop row are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, a symbol in a symbol row other than the final stop row is placed on the active line in the display screen G to hit the jackpot. This is to form a reach line by stopping and displaying the symbol combinations.

In the normal reach-winning performance, symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination after the above-mentioned reach-to-reach display is performed. The SP reach effect is a reach effect that is higher than the normal reach effect, and after the reach line is formed, a predetermined effect in which a character etc. appears is performed, and after the predetermined effect, symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination. be. The SPSP reach performance is a reach performance higher than the SP reach performance, and after a development performance that develops from the SP reach performance is performed, symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination.

Note that the items in the "Remarks (presentation mode)" column in FIG. 112(a) are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

As shown in FIG. 112(b), in the losing variation display time table corresponding to the normal gaming state, selectable variation patterns include variation pattern 1H, variation pattern 2H (15 sec), and variation pattern 3H (60 sec). , fluctuation pattern 4H (120 seconds) are set. The point that the variable display time is determined corresponding to each variable pattern is similar to the variable display time table for jackpots, but the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern 1H is determined by the first special figure or It is designed to change depending on the number of reservations for the second special drawing. Specifically, if variable pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of pending items is 2 or less, the variable display time is 8 seconds, and if variable pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of pending items is 3 or more. The variable display time is configured to be 4 seconds, which is shorter than 8 seconds.

Variation pattern 1H corresponds to a complete out-of-reach performance on the symbol display device 75, variation pattern 2H corresponds to a normal reach-out performance, variation pattern 3H corresponds to an SP reach-out performance, and variation pattern 4H corresponds to a SPSP out-of-reach performance. are doing.

The complete miss performance is one in which symbols are stopped and displayed in a miss symbol combination without a reach display. In addition, each of the above-mentioned out-of-reach effects is a combination of symbols in symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are out of reach (the symbols in the final stop row that are stopped and displayed on the reach line are different from the reach symbols) after the reach display is performed. The symbol is stopped and displayed when the combination results in a symbol other than the symbol that forms a jackpot. The SP out-of-reach performance corresponds to the SP out-of-reach performance, and after a predetermined performance of the same type as the SP out-of-reach performance is performed, symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols that are out of reach. Furthermore, the SPSP out-of-reach performance also corresponds to the SPSP reach-in performance.

In the fluctuation display time table for jackpot, "0" of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1A, "1" to "29" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2A, and "30" to "99" correspond to fluctuation pattern Compatible with 3A. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table for deviations, "0" to "64" of the fluctuation type counter CS correspond to fluctuation pattern 1H, "65" to "84" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2H, and "85" to "64" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2H. "94" corresponds to variation pattern 3H, and "95" to "99" correspond to variation pattern 4H.

If the result of the winning lottery based on winnings to the operating ports 62 and 63 is a jackpot result, the variation pattern 3A corresponding to the SPSP reach effect is most likely to be selected, and if the result of the winning lottery is a winning result, The variation pattern 4H corresponding to SPSP reach effect is the most difficult to be selected. In other words, the SPSP reach effect is the reach effect that is most likely to be executed when it is a jackpot, and the least likely to be executed when it is a miss, so it functions as the top reach effect with the highest expectation of a jackpot. .

Regarding the variation patterns other than the variation pattern 3A and the variation pattern 4H, the variation pattern corresponding to the higher reach performance is more likely to be selected when it is a jackpot, and less likely to be selected when it is a miss. That is, the expectation level of a jackpot increases in the order of normal reach performance < SP reach performance < SPSP reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 113(a), in the variable display time table for jackpot corresponding to the high-probability gaming state, selectable variation patterns include variable pattern 11A (60 sec) corresponding to SP reach, and variable pattern 11A (60 seconds) corresponding to SP SP reach. A variation pattern 12A (120 seconds) is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 113(b), in the variation display time table for losing that corresponds to the high probability gaming state, the selectable variation patterns include a variation pattern 11H that corresponds to a complete loss, and a variation that corresponds to a SP reach failure. Pattern 12H (60 sec) and fluctuation pattern 13H (120 sec) corresponding to SPSP out-of-reach are set. In the variable display time table for losing in a high-probability gaming state, the range of the variable type counter CS corresponding to a complete loss is wider than the variable display time table for losing in a normal gaming state, making it difficult for reach effects to occur. , allowing you to progress through the game quickly.

Regarding the variable display time of the variable pattern 11H corresponding to a complete loss, the function to shorten the variable display time is activated earlier than the variable display time table for a loss in the normal gaming state. Specifically, when the number of pending items is one or less, it is 8 seconds, and when the number of pending items is two or more, it is 4 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 113(c), in the variable display time table for jackpot corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, selectable variation patterns include a variation pattern 21A (15 sec) corresponding to normal reach and a variation corresponding to SP reach. A pattern 22A (60 sec) and a fluctuation pattern 23A (120 sec) corresponding to each SPSP reach are set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 113(d), in the variation display time table for missing that corresponds to the time-saving gaming state, the selectable variation patterns include a variation pattern 21H that corresponds to a complete miss, and a variation pattern 22H that corresponds to a normal reach miss. (15 sec), a variation pattern 23H (60 sec) corresponding to SP out of reach, and a variation pattern 24H (120 sec) corresponding to SPSP out of reach are set. In the variable display time table for losing in the time-saving gaming state, the percentage of complete loses is lower than in the variable display time table for losing in the normal gaming state, but this is because by increasing the frequency of reach effects, This is to prevent the time-saving game state from ending without any performance occurring. In addition, regarding the variable display time of the variable pattern 21H corresponding to a complete loss, as in the variable display time table for loss in the high-probability gaming state, if the number of pending items is 1 or less, it will be 8 seconds, and if the number of pending items is 2 items. If the time is longer than that, it is configured to be 4 seconds.

Note that each fluctuation display time table shown in FIGS. 112 and 113 is only an example, and the number of types of fluctuation patterns and the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponding to each fluctuation pattern can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to the description of the variable display time setting process (FIG. 111), in step Sb803, for example, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the variable display time for jackpot in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 112(a) is set. Get the table.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb802 (not a jackpot), a losing variable display time table corresponding to the current gaming state is acquired as a table for drawing variable display times in step Sb804. For example, when the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state, a variable display time table for losing the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 113(d) is obtained.

After step Sb803 or step Sb804 is executed, in step Sb805, a lottery process for variable display times (variable patterns) is executed using the variable display time table acquired in step Sb803 or step Sb804. Specifically, one variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is identified from among the variation pattern group set in the variation display time table.

In step Sb806, the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern identified in step Sb805 is set as the variable display time in the current special figure game round. In this step, the value of the variable display time corresponding to the specified variation pattern is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. For example, if the variable display time is 15 seconds, 7500 is set in the variable display time counter area as the corresponding value. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104) is activated. After executing step Sb806, the variable display time setting process ends.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 110), after executing the process of setting the variation display time in step Sb711, a variation display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb712. In the following step Sb713, a fluctuation start command and a type command are set as transmission targets to the production control device 143. The variation start command includes variation pattern information. As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, different variation patterns are set for each gaming state, and different variation patterns are also set depending on whether it is a jackpot or a miss. Therefore, in the performance control device 143, by analyzing the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation start command, it becomes possible to grasp not only the information on the fluctuation display time but also the presence or absence of a jackpot and the current gaming state. Further, the type command includes information on the jackpot type. Note that the type command is set only when the result of the judgment is a jackpot.

The variation start command and type command set in step Sb713 are transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). The performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. The contents of this production include the variable display mode of the symbols on the symbol display device 75, and the determined variable display mode of the symbols is output from the production control device 143 to the display control device 350 as a display content command. Ru. The display control device 350 controls the display of the symbol display device 75 based on the display content command received from the production control device 143 so that symbols corresponding to each game round are displayed in a variable manner.

In step Sb714, variable display on the special figure display section 43 is started. At that time, the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314 are referred to, and if the second special figure flag is stored, the current game round corresponds to the second special figure, and the picture on the second special figure display section BS is is displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, if the second special figure flag is not stored, it is assumed that the current game round corresponds to the first special figure, and the symbols on the first special figure display section AS are displayed in a variable manner. After executing step Sb714, this variation start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure game time control process (FIG. 108), after the execution of step Sb506, the special figure game time control process is ended. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step Sb501 (in the opening/closing execution mode), the special figure game time control process is ended without executing the processes after step Sb502. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, no variable display is performed on the special figure display section 43 even if there is pending information.

When an affirmative determination is made in step Sb503 (when the special figure display section 43 is in the process of variable display), the process proceeds to step Sb507, and it is determined whether or not the variable display time for the current special figure game has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 314 has become "0".

If the variable display time has not elapsed, a variable display process is executed in step Sb508. In the variable display processing, display control is performed on the special figure display section for the current game so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order (light emission control is performed on each display segment). )do. After executing step Sb508, the special figure game time control process ends.

If the variable display time has elapsed, the process advances to step Sb509, and the variable display flags set in the various flag storage areas 314e are cleared. In the following step Sb510, high probability mode update/termination processing is executed. In the high probability mode update/termination process, processing for updating the remaining number of high probability modes and terminating the high probability mode is performed. In step Sb511, high-frequency support mode update/termination processing is executed. In the high-frequency support mode update/termination process, processing for updating the remaining number of high-frequency support modes and terminating the high-frequency support mode is performed.

In step Sb512, a process for transitioning to the second time-saving game state is executed to control the transition to the second time-saving game state (FIG. 102(c)). In step Sb513, a final display start process is executed to start a final display on the special figure display section 43, and then the special figure game time control process is ended. Details of each process in steps Sb510 to Sb513 will be described later.

When an affirmative determination is made in step Sb502 (when the special figure display section 43 is in the final display), the process proceeds to step Sb514, and a process for ending the final display in order to end the final display on the special figure display section 43 is performed. Execute. After executing step Sb514, the special figure game time control process ends. Note that details of the final display termination process in step Sb514 will be described later.

<Game state transition processing>
The gaming state transition process in step Sb404 (FIG. 107) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 114.

First, in step Sb901, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step Sb902, and it is determined whether it is the timing at which the special figure game round has ended (or not, whether it is the timing at which the confirmation display on the special figure display section 43 has ended). . If it is not the end timing of the special figure game round, the main game state transition process is ended as it is.

If it is the end timing of the special figure game round, in step Sb903, it is determined whether the game result of the current special figure game round corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, that is, whether the result of the judgment is a jackpot. Determine whether or not. In this step, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot by referring to whether or not a type flag (step Sb708 in FIG. 110) is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the game result of the current special figure game round does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the main game state transition process is ended as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb903 (if the game result of the current special figure game round corresponds to transition to the opening/closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sb904, and the opening/closing execution mode start process is executed. In the start process, an opening/closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Further, an opening period is set for waiting for the start of the first round while keeping the variable winning device 65 in a closed state. Further, if a high probability flag or a high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, these flags are cleared.

In step Sb905, a round display start process is executed to notify the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode. In this step, the current jackpot type is determined based on the type flags stored in the various flag storage areas 314e, and the round display section is controlled so that the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. Note that the display of the number of rounds on the round display section continues until the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In step Sb906, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot result. If the result is not a 10R probability variable jackpot, that is, if it is either a 4R probability variation jackpot or a 4R normal jackpot result, "4" is set in the round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 in step Sb907. do. On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot result, "10" is set in the round counter area RC1 at step Sb908.

After executing step Sb907 or step Sb908, in step Sb909, an opening command for notifying the production control device 143 of the start and opening period of the opening is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107).

In step Sb910, after executing the external signal setting process, the main game state transition process is ended. In the external signal setting process, the jackpot signal output terminal provided at the external output terminal 213 is set to an output state. As a result, if the jackpot signal output terminal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and a jackpot occurs at the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. I can understand what I did.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb901 (in the opening/closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sb911, and it is determined whether or not the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the main game state transition process is immediately ended. If the opening period has elapsed, a big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step Sb912.

Here, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 115.

First, in step Sb1001, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 65a is being opened. This determination is made based on the driving state of the driving section 65d. If the big prize opening 65a is not being opened, it is determined in step Sb1002 whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0", that is, if there is a round game to be executed, in step Sb1003, the value of the timer area T1 provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 314 is set to "0". Determine whether or not. This process determines whether a waiting period between rounds (round interval period) has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T1 is "0", the process advances to step Sb1004, and "15000" is set in the timer area T1 as a value corresponding to the upper limit opening time (30 seconds) of the variable winning device 65 in one round game. Set. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104) is activated. In step Sb1005, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC1 provided in the various counter areas 344b as a value corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings (10 pieces) to the variable winning device 65 in one round game.

In step Sb1006, the drive unit 65d is driven to open the big prize opening 65a. In step Sb1007, an opening command is set to notify the production control device 143 that opening of the grand prize opening 65a (variable winning device 65) has started, and then the main prize opening opening/closing process is ended. This set release command is sent to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107).

If a positive determination is made in step Sb1102 (if the value of the round counter area RC1 is 0) or a negative determination is made in step Sb1103 (if the value of the timer area T1 is not "0"), the main prize opening opening/closing process is performed as is. end.

When an affirmative determination is made in step Sb1001 (when the big prize opening 65a is being opened), the process proceeds to step Sb1008, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer area T1 is "0". This process is to determine whether or not the upper limit opening time of the variable prize winning device 65 set in step Sb1004 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step Sb1009, and it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the big winning hole 65a based on the detection state of the big winning hole winning sensor 65c. If no prize has been won, the main prize opening/closing process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the winning counter area PC1 is subtracted by 1 in step Sb1010, and then it is determined whether the value of the winning counter area PC1 is "0" in step Sb1011. do. If the value of the winning counter area PC1 is not "0", the main winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb1008 (if the value of timer area T1 is "0") or if an affirmative determination is made in step Sb1011 (if the value of winning counter area PC1 is "0"), the process advances to step Sb1012. , the driving section 65d is switched to the non-driving state and the big prize opening 65a is closed. In step Sb1013, the value of the round counter area RC1 is subtracted by 1, and in step Sb1014, it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0".

If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0", that is, if there are remaining round games, the process proceeds to step Sb1015, and the variable winning device 65 is kept in a closed state for a period of waiting for the start of the next round game. As a value corresponding to (2 sec), "1000" is set in the timer area T1.

In step Sb1016, a closing command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (that the round game has ended), and then the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended. The set closing command is sent to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107).

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb1014 (if the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0"), that is, if the final round of the opening/closing execution mode has ended, the process proceeds to step Sb1017, and ending start processing is executed. In the start processing, an ending period is set in which the variable prize winning device 65 is kept in a closed state and waits for the start of the next game round (the first game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends). In step Sb1018, an ending command is set to notify the production control device 143 of the start of the ending and the ending period, and then the main prize opening/closing process is ended. The set ending command is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 114), after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step Sb912, it is determined in step Sb913 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0", the main game state transition process is ended as it is in order to continue the opening/closing execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0", the process advances to step Sb914, and it is determined whether the ending has ended (or not the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not been completed, the main game state transition process is immediately ended in order to continue the ending. On the other hand, if the ending has ended, the process advances to step Sb915, and a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

Here, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 116.

First, in step Sb1101, the type flag set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314 is referred to to determine whether or not the current jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot result. If it is a probability variable jackpot result, a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e at step Sb1102. As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.

In step Sb1103, a value corresponding to the first upper limit number of times (for example, 100) is set in the variable probability counter area KC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. The probability variable counter area KC is for the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times in the high probability mode (the remaining number of special figure game times that can stay in the high probability mode). is subtracted by 1 each time.

In step Sb1104, a first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The first support flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, and by setting the first support flag, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. .

In step Sb1105, it is determined whether the current jackpot result is the 4R probability variable jackpot result A or the 10R probability variable jackpot result A. If it is the 4R definite variable jackpot result A or the 10R definite variable jackpot result A, proceed to step Sb1106, and set a value (for example, 1100) corresponding to the second upper limit number of times in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d. . On the other hand, if it is not the 4R probability variable jackpot result A or the 10R probability variation jackpot result A, that is, if it is the 4R probability variation jackpot result B or the 10R probability variation jackpot result B, the process proceeds to step Sb1107, and the first upper limit number of times is entered in the support counter area SC. Set the corresponding value (eg 100). The support counter area SC is for the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode (the remaining number of special figure game times that can be stayed in the high-frequency support mode), and is used for the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode. Each time a figure game is played, the number is subtracted by 1.

After execution of step Sb1106 or step Sb1107, in step Sb1108, a high certainty gaming state start command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is ended. The high certainty gaming state start command set in step Sb1108 is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). By transmitting the high-probability gaming state start command, the production control device 143 is notified of the start of the high-probability gaming state (high probability mode and high-frequency support mode).

When a negative determination is made in step Sb1101 (when the current jackpot result is a normal jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sb1109, and a first support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. As a result, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode while the lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode, and the game shifts to the first time-saving gaming state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode).

In step Sb1110, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is the 4R normal jackpot result A. If it is the 4R normal jackpot result A, the process proceeds to step Sb1111, and a value (for example, 1000) corresponding to the third upper limit number of times is set in the support counter area SC. On the other hand, if it is not the 4R normal jackpot result A, that is, if it is the 4R normal jackpot result B, the process proceeds to step Sb1112, and a value (for example, 100) corresponding to the fourth upper limit is set in the support counter area SC.

After execution of step Sb1111 or step Sb1112, in step Sb1113, the first time-saving game state start command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is ended. The first time saving game state start command set in step Sb1113 is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). By transmitting the first time-saving gaming state start command, the production control device 143 is notified of the start of the first time-saving gaming state.

Returning to the explanation of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 114), after the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in step Sb915 is completed, the round display termination process is executed in step Sb916. In this process, the round display section in the special figure display section 43 is controlled so that the round display section is turned off.

In step Sb917, the opening/closing execution mode termination process is executed, and then the main gaming state transition process is terminated. In the process of terminating the opening/closing execution mode, a process of erasing the type flag and opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 314e is executed.

Next, the high probability mode update/end process of step Sb510 in FIG. 108, the high frequency support mode update/end process of step Sb511, and the second time saving game state transition process of step Sb512 will be explained. These processes are executed when the variable display time has elapsed, in other words, when the final display on the special figure display section 43 is started.

<High probability mode update/termination process>
The high probability mode update/end processing in step Sb510 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 117.

First, in step Sb1201, it is determined whether a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the high probability flag is set, that is, if the current lottery mode is the high probability mode, the process advances to step Sb1202, and the value of the variable probability counter area KC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 is updated. Specifically, the value of the variable probability counter area KC is subtracted by 1.

In step Sb1203, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter area KC is "0". When the value of the probability variable counter area KC is "0", that is, when the remaining number of special symbol game times that can stay in the high probability mode is 0, in step Sb1204, the above various flag storage areas 314e Clear the high probability flag set in . As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode.

At this time, if the value of the support counter area SC is 0, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode, and the game shifts to the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). If the value of the support counter area SC is not 0, the support mode is maintained in the high-frequency support mode and shifts to the first time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode).

In step Sb1205, a high probability game state end command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143, and then the high probability mode update/end process is ended. The high probability game state end command set in step Sb1204 is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). By transmitting the high probability gaming state end command, the production control device 143 is notified of the end of the high probability gaming state.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1201 (the high probability flag is not set), that is, if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, the high probability mode is updated and terminated without executing the processes from step Sb1202 onwards. end the process. In addition, if a negative determination is made in step Sb1203 (if the value of the variable probability counter area KC is not "0"), in order to continue the high probability mode, the high probability mode update/termination is performed without executing the processing after step Sb1204. Finish the process.

<Processing for updating/terminating high-frequency support mode>
The high-frequency support mode update/end processing in step Sb511 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 118.

First, in step Sb1301, it is determined whether the first support flag or the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. When these flags are set, the support mode is a high-frequency support mode, which means that the mode is one of a high-precision gaming state, a first time-saving gaming state, and a second time-saving gaming state.

In this case, the process advances to step Sb1302, and the value of the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 is updated. Specifically, the value of the support counter area SC is subtracted by 1.

In step Sb1303, it is determined whether the value of the support counter area SC is "0". When the value of the support counter area SC is "0", that is, when the number of executions of the game in the high-frequency support has reached the upper limit number of times, the process advances to step Sb1304, and the various flag storage areas 314e are stored. Clear any set support flags. As a result, the high-precision gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, or the second time-saving gaming state ends.

In step Sb1305, a corresponding game state end command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143. At this time, when the variable probability gaming state or the first time-saving gaming state ends, a first time-saving gaming state end command is set, and when the second time-saving gaming state ends, a second time-saving gaming state ending command is set. .

The set gaming state end command is sent to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). In the production control device 143, when the first time-saving gaming state end command is received together with the high certainty gaming state end command (step Sb1205 in FIG. 117), the high certainty gaming state is terminated and the game state is shifted to the normal gaming state. Understand things. In addition, if only the first time-saving game state end command is received, it is understood that the first time-saving game state ends, and when the second time-saving game state end command is received, the second time-saving game state is ended. Understand things.

After executing step Sb1305, the high-frequency support mode update/end processing is ended. In addition, if a negative determination is made in step Sb1301 (if none of the support flags are set), that is, if the normal gaming state is present, the high-frequency support mode is updated and terminated without executing the processing from step Sb1302 onwards. Finish the process. Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step Sb1303 (if the value of the support counter area SC is not "0"), in order to continue the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is updated without executing the processes after step Sb1304. End the termination process.

<Processing for transition to second time-saving gaming state>
The process for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb512 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 119.

First, in step Sb1401, it is determined whether or not the result of the current special drawing lottery is a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step Sb1402, and a value corresponding to the ceiling number (for example, 1000) is set in the number of misses counter area HC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. The missed number counter area HC is for the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number. After executing step Sb1402, the process for transitioning to the second time saving game state is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1401 (if the result of the special drawing lottery is a losing result), the process proceeds to step Sb1403, and it is determined whether or not the second support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. . The second support flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the gaming state is the second time-saving gaming state.

If the second support flag is not set, that is, if the current gaming state is not the second gaming state, it is determined in step Sb1404 whether or not the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. do. If the high probability flag is not set, that is, if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, the process advances to step Sb1405, and the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC is updated. Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC.

In step Sb1406, it is determined whether the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC is "0". If the value of the losing number counter area HC is "0", that is, if the number of losing games reaches the ceiling number, the process advances to step Sb1407, and a second support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. do. Thereby, the game shifts to the second time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode).

Here, the process for updating and terminating the high-frequency support mode in step Sb511 includes a process of subtracting the remaining number of times of the high-frequency support mode, and a process of terminating the high-frequency support mode based on the result. However, in the present embodiment (FIG. 118), after these processes are performed, the process for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb512 is performed. For this reason, if the value of the winning number counter area HC becomes "0" in the last game of the first time-saving game state, in other words, the game time in which the end of the first time-saving game state is determined and the second time-saving game state are If the game time in which the transition to the game state is determined is the same game time, the first time-saving game state ends in that game time before the second time-saving game state is entered.

In addition, if the result of the judgment of the special figure game turns into a jackpot before the value of the number of misses counter area HC reaches "0", the process of step Sb1402 is executed, so that the number of misses counter The value of area HC is reset to the value corresponding to the ceiling number. Therefore, after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result ends, the game is started with the remaining number of missed game times until shifting to the second time-saving game state set to the ceiling number of times.

In step Sb1408, a value (for example, 900) corresponding to the fifth upper limit is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. In step Sb1409, a second time saving game state start command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143. The set second time saving game state start command is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). By transmitting the second time-saving gaming state start command, the production control device 143 is notified of the start of the second time-saving gaming state.

In step Sb1410, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, that is, whether the special figure game time that has reached the ceiling number of times is the second special figure game time. do. The case where the special figure game round that reached the ceiling number is the second special figure game round is the case where the ceiling number is reached in the final game round (1000th special figure game round) of the first time-saving game state. It means that. On the other hand, the case where the special figure game round that reached the ceiling number of times is the first special figure game round means that the ceiling number of times has been reached in the special figure game round in the normal game state.

If the second special figure flag is not set (if the special figure game time that has reached the ceiling number of times is the first special figure game time), the process advances to step Sb1411, and the regular figure game time is being displayed in a variable manner. Determine whether or not. If the normal pattern game round is being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step Sb1412, and it is determined whether the support lottery result in the normal pattern game round is a support winning result (normal pattern winning result).

If it is a support winning result, the process proceeds to step Sb1413, and the win/fail result of the regular game game, which is being displayed in a variable manner, is changed to a lose result. In the subsequent step Sb1414, a stop result for a missed result is set as a stop result for the normal figure game.

After executing step Sb1414 or if a negative determination is made in step Sb1412 (if the winning result of the general figure game round that is being fluctuatedly displayed is a wrong result), the variable display of the general figure game round is forcibly terminated in step Sb1415. . That is, the ordinary figure display unit 44 is controlled so as to end the variable display even before the variable display time has elapsed. Thereafter, the stop result corresponding to the missed result is displayed as a final result on the ordinary figure display section 44 at a predetermined final display time (for example, 0.5 sec). After executing step Sb1415, the process for transitioning to the second time saving game state is ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb1410 (if the second special symbol flag is set), the second time shortening is performed without executing the processes of steps Sb1411 to Sb1415, as the general symbol game round is not forcibly terminated. The game state transition process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb1403 (in the second time-saving gaming state) or in an affirmative determination in step Sb1404 (in the high probability mode), processing regarding the second time-saving gaming state is not executed. The process for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state is ended without executing the processes after step Sb1405. In addition, if a negative determination is made in step Sb1406 (if the value of the number of misses counter area HC is not "0"), in order to maintain the gaming state at that point, the second time shortening is performed without executing the processing after step Sb1407. The game state transition process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1411, that is, if the fluctuating display of the regular game time is not performed (including the case where the fixed display of the regular game time is being performed), the process from step Sb1412 onward is executed. The process for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state is ended without any problem.

<Process for starting confirmation display>
The final display start process in step Sb513 (FIG. 108) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 120(a).

First, in step Sb1501, it is determined whether the second special symbol flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the second special figure flag is not set, that is, if the current special figure game round is the first special figure game round, in step Sb1502, the current special figure game round is a missed game that reaches the ceiling. It is determined whether or not it is the second time. That is, it is determined whether or not the current special pattern game time corresponds to the immediately preceding game period in terms of the first special pattern game period to be played after shifting to the second time-saving game state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb1501 (when the second special figure flag is set) or a negative determination is made in step Sb1502 (if it is not a missed game round that reaches the ceiling), the process proceeds to step Sb1503, and the current special figure game The normal fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) is set as the fixed display time for the second time.

Note that the normal fixed display time does not necessarily need to be one type; for example, the first time (for example, 0.5 sec) for the low-frequency support mode (normal gaming state), and the first time for the high-frequency support mode (variable playing state, the first time). A plurality of types having different lengths may be provided, such as a second time (for example, 0.3 sec) for a first time saving game state and a second time saving game state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb1502 (if it is a missed game round where the ceiling has not been reached), the process proceeds to step Sb1504, and the fixed display time for this special figure game round is set as a specific fixed display time different from the normal fixed display time (for example, 0 .8sec). This specific fixed display time is longer than the normal fixed display time. Note that when the normal fixed display time is provided for low frequency support mode and high frequency support mode, the normal fixed display time for low frequency support mode is longer than the normal fixed display time for low frequency support mode.

As already explained, if the regular figure game round is in the fluctuating display at the fixed display start timing in the game round where the ceiling is missed (the first special figure game round), the fluctuating display is forcibly terminated and the normal The winning result is stopped and displayed as the stopping result of the game round. The specific confirmed display time is longer than the confirmed display time (0.5 sec) of the common figure game at that time.

Therefore, at the end of the confirmation display for the general pattern game session, if there is a pending next general pattern game session, the confirmation display of the special pattern game session when the ceiling is reached for the next general pattern game session. starts earlier than it ends. In this case, since the internal gaming state has already shifted to the second time-saving gaming state (high-frequency support mode), the next regular game game will be played in a mode corresponding to the second time-saving gaming state. . In other words, when the number of misses reaches the ceiling number, the regular figure game time precedes the special figure game time and the game is started in a mode corresponding to the second time saving game state.

After executing step Sb1503 or step Sb1504, a final display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314 in step Sb1505. The confirmation display flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the confirmation display of the special figure game round is being executed.

In step Sb1506, final display start processing is executed. In the final display start process, the special figure display unit 43 is controlled so that the variablely displayed pattern is stopped and displayed with the stop result set in step Sb709 (FIG. 110) or step Sb710.

In step Sb1507, a variation end command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143, and then the final display start process is ended. The variation end command set in step Sb1507 is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). The production control device 143 transmits the received variation end command to the display control device 350 while maintaining its information form. By receiving the variation end command, the display control device 350 causes the final stop symbol combination in the game round to be displayed as determined (final stop display).

<Process for finalizing display>
The final display termination process in step Sb514 (FIG. 108) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 120(b).

First, in step Sb1601, it is determined whether the final display time set in step Sb1503 or step Sb1504 has elapsed. If the final display time has not elapsed, the process for ending the final display is ended in order to continue displaying the stop results on the special figure display section 43.

If the final display time has elapsed, the final display flag set in the various flag storage areas 314e is cleared in step Sb1602, and the final display termination process is then terminated. If the confirmed display flag is cleared in this way, a negative determination will be made in step Sb502 of the special symbol game time control process (FIG. 108) in the next processing time. Therefore, if there is a pending next special figure game round (pending information in which the game round has not yet been executed), a variable display related to the next special figure game round is started. On the other hand, if there is no next pending special figure game (unprocessed pending information), the finalized stop result will not be displayed until a new start winning occurs and pending information is acquired. continue.

<Public figure game times control process>
The normal figure game time control process in step Sb405 (FIG. 107) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 121.

First, in step Sb1701, it is determined whether or not the accessory opening/closing game using the common electric accessory 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the accessory object opening/closing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The accessory opening/closing flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the accessory opening/closing game is being executed, and is set when the accessory opening/closing game is executed.

If the accessory opening/closing game is in progress, the normal figure game control process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if the accessory opening/closing game is not in progress, it is determined in step Sb1702 whether or not the standard figure game is being executed on the standard figure display section 44. In this case, the general figure game round is a concept that includes a fluctuating display of the symbols on the ordinary figure display section 44 and a stop display (determined display) of the symbols on the ordinary figure display section 44, and in step Sb1702, the above-mentioned variable display or a stop display is being executed.

In addition, in the special figure game round in the special figure display section 43, the execution of the variable display is restricted when the opening/closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is being executed, but in the regular figure game round, the execution of the variable display is restricted during the opening/closing execution mode. Fluctuation display is allowed even if In addition, in the general figure game game, the execution of the variable display is restricted during the opening/closing game using the general figure accessory 63a, but in the special figure game session, the variable display is restricted even during the opening/closing game using the public figure accessory 63a. is allowed.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1702 (if the normal game game round is not being executed), the process proceeds to step Sb1703, and it is determined whether the normal pattern pending storage number FN is "0". If the number FN of stored normal figures is "0", the normal figure game times control process is immediately terminated.

If the general figure reservation storage number FN is not "0", a general figure data setting process is executed in step Sb1704 to set the data stored in the electric service holding area Rc for variable display. In the ordinary figure data setting process, the ordinary figure pending storage number FN is subtracted by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the electric service holding area Rc is moved to the ordinary figure execution area. After that, a process is executed to shift the data stored in each storage area of the electronic role holding area Rc, and further, the production control device 143 is made to recognize that the data in the holding area on the general figure side has been shifted. Set the general map shift command, which is the information for.

In step Sb1705, the normal pattern variation start process is executed, and then the normal pattern game times control process is ended. Here, the ordinary figure fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 122.

First, in step Sb1801, it is determined whether the first support flag or the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If none of the support flags is set, that is, if the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode (FIG. 103(a)) is referred to in step Sb1802. A support lottery will be held (judgment of the validity of the general map). On the other hand, if any of the support flags is set, that is, if the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode (FIG. 103(b)) is selected in step Sb1803. Refer to the support lottery. As already explained, in the support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode, the probability of support winning is set higher than in the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode, and it is more likely to result in a support winning result.

Incidentally, in the general map game round that is executed during the confirmation display of the special map game round when the ceiling is reached, the support lottery table for the high frequency support mode is referred to and the support lottery is performed. Therefore, the support lottery in this case is likely to result in a support winning result, and in a situation where the support winning probability is set to 95/100 as in this embodiment, the support winning result has a very high probability. .

After step Sb1802 or step Sb1803 is executed, it is determined in step Sb1804 whether or not the lottery result in step Sb1802 or step Sb1803 is a support winning result (normal pattern winning result). If it is a support winning result, the process proceeds to step Sb1805, and the stopping result table stored in the stopping result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313 is referred to to set the stopping result for the winning of the normal map. If it is not a support winning result, that is, if it is a normal/out of the chart result, the process advances to step Sb1806, and the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313 is referred to to determine the stop result for a normal/out of the chart. Set.

After step Sb1805 or step Sb1806 is executed, a process for setting a normal figure fluctuation display time is executed in step Sb1807. In the setting process, the variable display time of the current common figure game time on the common figure display section 44 is set. At this time, if the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, a relatively long variable display time is set, and if the support mode is a high-frequency support mode, a relatively short variable display time is set.

Specifically, if the support mode is a low-frequency support mode and the support lottery result is an out-of-the-ordinary result, for example, 30 seconds is set as the variable display time, and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode and the support winning result is If so, the variable display time is set to, for example, 0.5 sec. In addition, if it is a high-frequency support mode and the result is out of the ordinary map, set the variable display time to, for example, 0.5 sec, and if it is the high-frequency support mode and the result is a support winning result, set the variable display time to, for example, Set 0.5 sec.

By the way, the regular game game that is executed during the final display of the special game game when the ceiling is reached is started with the internal transition to the second time-saving game state, so the fluctuating display for the high-frequency support mode is Time applies. In other words, the regular game game is performed with a short variable display time.

Please note that the above variable display times are just examples; for example, when a support winning result is obtained in a high-frequency support mode, multiple types of times such as 0.5 sec and 1 sec can be selected as the variable display time. Other configurations may also be used, such as .

In step Sb1808, a common figure fluctuation start command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143. The general pattern fluctuation start command includes information on the general pattern fluctuation pattern (information indicating the normal pattern validity result and the fluctuation display time). The set normal pattern variation start command is sent to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107).

In step Sb1809, processing is executed to start variable display of the symbols on the display section 44 for ordinary figures, and then the present ordinary figure variation start process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the normal figure game times control process (FIG. 121), if an affirmative determination is made in step Sb1702 (if the normal figure game times are being executed), the process advances to step Sb1706, and the variable display time set in step Sb1807 is Determine whether the time has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, the process advances to step Sb1707 and executes variable display processing. In the variable display processing, display control is performed on the ordinary figure display section 44 so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order (light emission control of each display segment). . Thereafter, the normal figure game time control process is ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb1706 (if the variable display time has elapsed), a process for finalized display of normal figures is executed in step Sb1708, and then the normal figure game times control process is ended. In the ordinary figure final display process, the ordinary figure display unit 44 is controlled so that the picture is stopped and displayed according to the stop result set in step Sb1805 or step Sb1806. At that time, the final display time is set to a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec). In addition, in the normal pattern finalization display process, a normal pattern fluctuation end command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143. The common figure variation end command includes information on the fixed display time of the current common figure game round.

<Processing for electric support>
The power support process in step Sb406 (FIG. 107) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 123.

First, in step Sb1901, it is determined whether or not the accessory opening/closing game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the accessory opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314.

If the accessory opening/closing game is not in progress, the process advances to step Sb1902, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the common figure game round has ended. If it is not the end timing of the regular figure game round, the process for supporting the electric winning combination is ended as it is.

If it is the end timing of the general figure game round, the process advances to step Sb1903, and it is determined whether or not the result of the support lottery in the current general figure game round is a support winning result. If it is not a support winning result, the electronic support support process is immediately terminated.

If it is a support winning result, the process advances to step Sb1904, and it is determined whether the first support flag or the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If none of the support flags is set, that is, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, "1" is set in the open count counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 in step Sb1905. set. The opening number counter area RC2 is for counting the number of openings of the general electric accessory 63a in the accessory opening/closing game, and is decremented by 1 each time the general electric accessory 63a is switched from the closed state to the open state. .

If the first support flag or the second support flag is set, that is, if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, "2" is set in the open count counter area RC2 in step Sb1906. That is, in the accessory opening/closing game in the low-frequency support mode, the number of openings of the general electric accessory 63a is set to one, and in the accessory opening/closing game in the high-frequency support mode, the number of openings of the general electric accessory 63a is set to two. is set to

In step Sb1907, a accessory object opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. In the following step Sb1908, an external signal setting process is executed, and then the electric support support process is ended. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the accessory release signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to the release signal output state.

When an affirmative determination is made in step Sb1901 (when the accessory opening/closing game is in progress), the accessory opening/closing process is executed in step Sb1909. Here, the accessory opening/closing process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 124.

First, in step Sb2101, it is determined whether the utility power accessory 63a is being opened. Specifically, this determination is made based on the driving state of the driving section 63b. If the general electric utility object 63a is not being opened, it is determined in step Sb2102 whether the value of the opening number counter area RC2 is "0".

If the value of the open number counter area RC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step Sb2103, and it is determined whether the value of the timer area T2 provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 314 is "0". This process is to determine whether or not the waiting period between each release has elapsed when the general purpose electric accessory 63a is opened a plurality of times in the accessory opening/closing game.

If the value of the timer area T2 is "0", the process advances to step Sb2104, and it is determined whether the first support flag or the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If none of the support flags are set, that is, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, "50" (corresponding to 0.1 sec) is set in the timer area T2 at step Sb2105. If any of the support flags is set, that is, if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, "1000" (equivalent to 2 seconds) is set in the timer area T2 at step Sb2106. The value set in step Sb2105 or step Sb2106 corresponds to the upper limit opening time per opening in the accessory opening/closing game.

After executing step Sb2105 or step Sb2106, in step Sb2107, "6" is set in the winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 344b. This value corresponds to the upper limit number of winnings (6 pieces) to the non-electric accessory object 63a (second operating port 63) in the accessory object opening/closing game.

In step Sb2108, the driving section 63b is brought into a driving state in order to open the utility appliance 63a. In step Sb2109, an accessory release command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143. The set accessory release command is sent to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). As a result, the production control device 143 is notified of the switching of the public utility object 63a from the closed state to the open state.

After executing step Sb2109, the accessory opening/closing process ends. In addition, if a positive determination is made in step Sb2102 (if the value of the open number counter area RC2 is "0") or a negative determination is made in step Sb2103 (if the value of the timer area T2 is not "0"), the power supply Since the accessory 63a is not opened, the accessory opening/closing process is ended without executing the processes after step Sb2104.

When an affirmative determination is made in step Sb2101 (when the utility power accessory 63a is open), the process proceeds to step Sb2110, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer area T2 is "0". This process is to determine whether or not the upper limit opening time of the utility appliance 63a set in step Sb2105 or step Sb1206 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T2 is not "0", that is, if the upper limit opening time of the general electric utility object 63a has not elapsed, in step Sb2111, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second operating port 63. Determine. If a prize has been won, in step Sb2112, the value of the winning prize counter area PC2 is subtracted by 1. In step Sb2113, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0", that is, whether the number of winnings entered into the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit number of winnings.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb2111 (if no winning has occurred in the second operating port 63) or if a negative determination is made in step Sb2113 (if the value of winning counter area PC2 is not "0"), the In order to continue the open state of the object 63a, the accessory object opening/closing process is ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb2110 (the value of the timer area T2 is "0" and the upper limit opening time of the utility power accessory 63a has elapsed) or if an affirmative determination is made in step Sb2113 (the value of the winning counter area PC2 is If the value is "0" and the number of prizes entered into the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit number of prizes), in step Sb2114, the drive unit 63b is set to a non-driving state in order to close the general electric accessory 63a. shall be.

In step Sb2115, the accessory closing command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143. The set accessory closing command is sent to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). As a result, the production control device 143 is notified of the switching of the general utility object 63a from the open state to the closed state.

In step Sb2116, updating processing of the above-mentioned release number counter area RC2 is executed. In the update process, the value of the prize counter area PC2 is referred to, and if the value of the prize counter area PC2 is not "0" (the number of prizes entered into the second operation port 63 does not reach the upper limit number of prizes), the release is performed. Subtract 1 from the value in the number counter area RC2. On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0" (when the number of winnings to the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit number of winnings), the value of the number of openings counter area RC2 is set to "0". do.

In step Sb2117, it is determined whether the value of the open number counter area RC2 is "0". If the value of the opening number counter area RC2 is "0", the accessory opening/closing process is immediately terminated. If the value of the number of openings counter area RC2 is not "0", that is, if there are any remaining openings of the utility appliance 63a, in step Sb2118, "100" (corresponding to 0.2 sec) is set in the timer area T2. is set, and then the accessory opening/closing process ends. The value set in step Sb2118 corresponds to the standby time for keeping the utility power accessory 63a in the closed state and waiting for the next opening.

Returning to the explanation of the electric support support process (FIG. 123), after executing the accessory opening/closing process in step Sb1909, it is determined in step Sb1910 whether or not the value of the opening number counter area RC2 is "0". do. If the value of the release number counter area RC2 is not "0", the electric support support process is immediately terminated. When the value of the opening number counter area RC2 is "0", that is, when the accessory opening/closing game is finished, in step Sb1911, the accessory opening/closing flag set in the various flag storage areas 314e is cleared. Then, the electric support support process ends.

<About the electrical configuration of the production control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configuration of the production control device 143 and the display control device 350 according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 125.

An MPU 342 is mounted on the performance control board 341 provided in the performance control device 143. The MPU 342 includes a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 342, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 343. It has a built-in RAM 344, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342 . The main controller 162 sends hold display control commands such as shift commands and hold commands, game cycle control commands such as fluctuation start commands, type commands, and fluctuation end commands, and opening/closing execution mode commands such as opening commands and ending commands. Receive various commands.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 342 is connected to the lamp sections 26 to 28 provided on the front door frame 14 and the speaker section 29, as well as the display control device 350.

Further, the input side of the MPU 342 is connected to the production operation section 36 provided on the front door frame 14. The performance operation unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor that detects the operation of the performance operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. The MPU 342 determines whether or not the production operation unit 36 has been operated based on the detected information, and determines the manner of operation that has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 on which an MPU 372 in which a program ROM 373 and a work RAM 374 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377 are respectively mounted. There is.

The MPU 372 analyzes commands received from the production control device 143 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 375 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 372, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 374 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 372 executes various programs. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 374.

The VDP 375 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 75. Since the VDP 375 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 375 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 372, the video RAM 377, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 377 from the character ROM 376 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 75.

The character ROM 376 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 75. This character ROM 376 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table, etc. that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.

Note that it is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 376 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 376. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 373 is stored in the character ROM 376.

The video RAM 377 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 75, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 377, the display contents of the symbol display device 75 are changed.

<About various processes executed by the production control device 143>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the production control device 143 will be explained.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 126. The effect setting process is a process activated by the MPU 342 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

First, in step Sb2301, it is determined whether an ending command (step Sb1018 in FIG. 115) has been received from the main controller 162. The ending command is transmitted when the ending is started in the opening/closing execution mode that is performed when the result of the judgment in the special figure game is a jackpot.

In addition, various commands received from the main control device 162 are stored in a command storage area 344a provided in the RAM 344 of the production control device 143. The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and read out the previously stored commands. Therefore, even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time, processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

When determining step Sb2301, it is determined whether an ending command is stored in the area to be read this time in the command storage area 344a. When the ending command is stored (when the ending command is received), in step Sb2302, a process is performed to set a transition performance corresponding to the transition to the high-precision gaming state or the first time-saving gaming state. Execute the first transition effect setting process. Details of the first transition effect setting process will be described later.

After executing step Sb2302 or if a negative determination is made in step Sb2301 (if the ending command has not been received), in step Sb2303, a second time-saving gaming state start command (step Sb1409 in FIG. 119) is sent from the main controller 162. is received. The second time-saving game state start command is transmitted at the time of transition to the second time-saving game state triggered by the number of missed game times in the special figure game time reaching the ceiling number.

If the second time-saving gaming state start command has been received, in step Sb2304, a second transition performance setting process is executed to set a transition performance corresponding to the transition to the second time-saving gaming state. Details of the second transition effect setting process will be described later.

After executing step Sb2304 or if a negative determination is made in step Sb2303 (if the second time-saving gaming state start command has not been received), in step Sb2305, it is determined whether or not any gaming state end command has been received. judge. Specifically, whether or not the high-precision game state end command (step Sb1205 in FIG. 117), the first time-saving game state end command, or the second time-saving game state end command (step Sb1305 in FIG. 118) is received. Determine whether

If any of these commands has been received, in step Sb2306, a termination command is sent to set a termination performance corresponding to the end of the high-precision gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, or the second time-saving gaming state. Execute production setting processing. Details of the end effect setting process will be described later.

After executing step Sb2306 or if a negative determination is made in step Sb2305 (if no gaming state end command has been received), in step Sb2307, symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Executes special figure fluctuation display processing for performing fluctuation display, etc. Details of the special figure fluctuation display processing will be described later.

In step Sb2308, other processes are executed, and then the effect setting process is ended. Other processes include displaying a demonstration screen when a starting prize does not occur for a predetermined period of time, switching to a power saving mode that stops the video display on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 to reduce power consumption, etc. Execute the processing to be performed.

<First transition production setting process>
The first transition effect setting process in step Sb2302 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 127. This process is executed when an ending command is received from the main controller 162, in other words, it is executed in accordance with the ending start timing of the opening/closing execution mode.

First, in step Sb2401, it is determined whether the situation is such that a transition to the high-precision gaming state or the first time-saving gaming state occurs. That is, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode to which the ending command was sent corresponds to a jackpot result that causes a transition to a high-precision gaming state or a first time-saving gaming state. This determination is made based on the type command sent from the main controller 162.

Note that if there is only a jackpot type that always transitions to either the high-precision gaming state or the first time-saving gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode ends as in this embodiment, the process of step Sb2401 may be omitted. It is possible.

If the situation is such that a transition to the high-precision gaming state or the first time-saving gaming state occurs, a start performance corresponding to each gaming state is set in step Sb2402. For example, if a transition to a high certainty gaming state occurs, a start performance for the high certainty gaming state is set as the start performance. In the start effect for the high-precision gaming state, as shown in FIG. 128(a), on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, a title image 471 corresponding to the high-precision gaming state, such as "Lucky Time", for example, A remaining number of times image 472 is displayed. The remaining number of times image 472 is for notifying the remaining number of special symbol game times that can be maintained in a high probability gaming state.

In the first time-saving game state, the start performance for the time-saving game state with 100 times remaining corresponds to the time-saving game state with 100 times remaining, such as "chance time", as shown in FIG. 128(b). A title image 473 and a remaining number of times image 472 are displayed. The remaining number of times image 472 in this case is for notifying the remaining number of special figure game times that can stay in the first time saving game state.

In the start performance for the time-saving game state in which the remaining number of times is 1000 in the first time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. An image 474 and a remaining number of times image 472 are displayed.

In addition, in the start performance for each time-saving game state, a number of winnings image 475 is displayed that informs you of the number of winning games in which the result of the special symbol validity determination is a winning result. This winning number image 475 continues to be displayed in the first time saving game state, and the display number is updated every time a winning game time ends. Therefore, by viewing the image 475, the player can know the progress in the process of reaching the ceiling (FIG. 128(d)). Specifically, if the player knows the current number of unsuccessful games, or knows the ceiling number, he or she can know the remaining number of times until the ceiling number.

Note that FIG. 128(d) shows a time-saving effect executed during the stay in the first time-saving gaming state. The time-saving medium performance is performed after the start performance shown in FIGS. 128(b) and 128(c) ends until the first time-saving game state ends. This short-time performance is configured such that it can be distinguished from the normal performance by having a different background image, etc. from the normal performance during the normal gaming state, for example.

Incidentally, the number-of-misses image 475 is not erased even after the first time-saving gaming state ends, and continues to be displayed even after transitioning to the normal gaming state. It should be noted that the number-of-misses image 475 may be temporarily erased at the end of the first time-saving gaming state and displayed again at the start of the normal gaming state or after transition to the normal gaming state.

In step Sb2402, settings are made so that the various start effects described above are displayed on the display screen G during the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, these start effects may be displayed during the entire ending period, or may be displayed during a part of the ending period.

In step Sb2403, a predetermined value is set in the remaining number counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344. The remaining number of times counter area is for the MPU 342 to grasp the remaining number of special figure game times that can stay in the high-precision game state or the first time-saving game state, and the special figure game times are executed in each of these game states. It is subtracted by 1 each time. In this step, if the gaming state to be transferred is a high-probability gaming state, values corresponding to the first upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) and the second upper limit number of times (for example, 1100 times) are set as the above-mentioned predetermined values, respectively; In the case of the first time-saving game state, a value corresponding to the third upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times) or the fourth upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) is set.

In this embodiment, the production control device 143 is configured to count the remaining number of times of each game state separately from the main control device 162. It may also be configured to grasp the remaining number of gaming states. For example, the main control device 162 notifies the production control device 143 of the update result of the probability change counter area KC (step Sb1202 in FIG. 117) and the update result of the support counter area SC (step Sb1302 in FIG. 118) by transmitting a predetermined command, It may be configured such that the production control device 143 analyzes the command and grasps each of the update results. In this case, information on each update result may be included in an existing command such as a variation end command (step Sb1506 in FIG. 120(a)) to be used as the predetermined command, or a dedicated command for notifying each update result may be used. The predetermined command may be configured by:

In step Sb2404, settings are made to start displaying the remaining number of times image 472. At that time, the display of the remaining number of times image 472 may be set to start at each start performance (performance performed using the ending period) set in step Sb2402, or after the start performance ends, The display of the remaining number of times image 472 may be set to start after transitioning to the guaranteed gaming state or the like.

In step Sb2405, a remaining count display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The remaining number of times display flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that the remaining number of times image 472 is being displayed.

In step Sb2406, it is determined whether the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is a high certainty gaming state. If the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is not a high-precision gaming state, that is, if it is the first time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step Sb2407, and the setting is made to start displaying the number of misses image 475. At that time, it may be set so that the display of the number of misses image 475 is started at each start performance set in step Sb2402, or after the start performance ends, the number of misses is entered after moving to the first time-saving game state. Settings may be made so that the display of the image 475 is started. Note that the initial value of the number of misses image 475 when the display is started in step Sb2406 is 0 times.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step Sb2401 (when the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is the normal gaming state), the process proceeds to step Sb2407, and the display setting of the number of misses image 475 is performed.

After executing step Sb2407, in step Sb2408, a failure count display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d. The miss count display flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that the miss count image 475 is being displayed.

After executing step Sb2408, the first transition effect setting process ends. In addition, when an affirmative determination is made in step Sb2406 (when the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-precision gaming state), the number of misses image 475 is not displayed, and the processing in steps Sb2407 and Sb2408 is not executed. 1. End the transition effect setting process.

<Second transition production setting process>
The second transition effect setting process in step Sb2304 (FIG. 126) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 129. This process is executed when the second time-saving gaming state start command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, it is executed when the second time-saving gaming state is started. .

First, in step Sb2501, the value of the number-of-misses counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is cleared. The number of winnings counter area is for counting the number of times the special figure game has a winning result, and is referred to when displaying the number of winnings image 475.

In step Sb2502, a process is executed to erase the number of misses image 475 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, and in step Sb2503, the number of misses display flag set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 is erased. clear.

In step Sb2504, it is determined whether or not the first time saving game state ends in the current special figure game round. That is, it is determined whether the special figure game time in which the second time-saving game state start command is received is the final special figure game time in the first time-saving game state. In this step, the above-described determination is made by determining whether or not the first time-saving game state end command is received in the same game.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the upper limit number of times (the third upper limit number of times (for example, 1000)) of the first time-saving gaming state to which the transition occurs when the 4R normal jackpot result is A, and the second time-saving gaming state The ceiling number of times (for example, 1000 times) that triggers the transition is set to the same number of times. In such a configuration, if the number of playing games in the first time-saving gaming state reaches the upper limit without winning a jackpot, the number of missed games also reaches the ceiling number at the same time, and the first time-saving gaming state ends. A corresponding first time-saving game state end command and a second time-saving game state start command corresponding to the fact that the number of misses has reached the ceiling number are transmitted in the same special figure game time. In addition, the same applies if the 4R probability variable jackpot result is A and the game moves to a high probability gaming state, and after the end of that high probability gaming state, it shifts to the first time saving gaming state (the first time saving gaming state with 1000 remaining times). An event occurs. In step Sb2504, it is determined whether these cases apply.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb2504 (if the first time-saving game state does not end in the current special figure game round), that is, if the normal game state shifts to the second time-saving game state, the process advances to step Sb2505, and the A start performance corresponding to the 2-hour shortening game state is set. In the start performance for the second time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 130(a), a title image corresponding to the higher-rank time-saving game state, such as "Super Chance Time", is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. 474 and a remaining number of times image 472 are displayed.

The start effect for the second time-saving game state may be executed in the special figure game round in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number, or may be executed after shifting to the second time-saving game state. In the former case, it is preferable to execute the above-mentioned start effect after stopping and displaying each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the combination of winning results in the special figure game round in which the ceiling number of times has been reached. In that case, the start effect may be executed using a part or all of the fixed display time, or the start effect may be executed using a part or all of the fixed display time, or a variable display time (part of the variable display time) and a fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time). ) may be executed across.

In addition, when executing the above start effect using a part of the fixed display time, it will start in the latter half of the fixed display time, unless the start effect is executed across the variable display time and the fixed display time. It is a good idea to perform a performance. Specifically, it is preferable to execute the start performance after starting the final display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is possible to notify the transition to the second time-saving gaming state after notifying the result of the special pattern winning/failure lottery using each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. This can be a preferable aspect for players to understand both of the above.

In step Sb2506, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times is set in the remaining number of times counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344. The fifth upper limit number of times is the number of special figure game times that can stay in the second time-saving game state, and is, for example, 900 times.

In step Sb2507, settings are made to start displaying the remaining number of times image 472. At that time, as shown in FIG. 130(a), the display of the remaining number of times image 472 may be set to start at the start effect for the second time-saving game state, or after the start effect ends, the display of the remaining number of times image 472 may be started. The display of the remaining number of times image 472 may be set to start after transitioning to the 2-hour saving game state.

In step Sb2508, a remaining count display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the second transition effect setting process is ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb2504 (if the first time-saving game state ends in the current special figure game round), that is, if the first time-saving game state shifts to the second time-saving game state, proceed to step Sb2509, Set to perform an additional effect of the remaining number of times. Here, the additional effect will be explained with reference to FIGS. 130(b) and 130(c).

In performing the above-mentioned additional effect, as shown in FIG. 130(b), in the final game round in the first time-saving game state, a symbol string Z1 to Z3 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 and stops at the resultant combination. Display. The stop display in this case does not take a special form of stopping, but is to notify you of a missed result, and stops each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in order as in other special pattern game times in the first time-saving game state. It is to be displayed.

After each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 130(c), in the special pattern game round in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, for example, "+900 times!!" An additional image 476 consisting of characters is displayed. As a result, the player is notified that the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state has been added. This additional image may be displayed using part or all of the fixed display time, or may be displayed using a part or all of the fixed display time, or a variable display time (part of the variable display time) and a fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time). It may be displayed across. At that time, the images of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are stopped and displayed may be deleted and then the additional image 476 may be displayed, or the images of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may not be deleted and the images of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be displayed on the near side of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The superimposed image 476 may be arranged and displayed.

After step Sb2509 is executed, in step Sb2510, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times is added to the value of the remaining number of times counter area. As a result, in the game after shifting to the second time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 130(d), a remaining number of times image 472 reflecting the fifth upper limit number of times is displayed. After executing step Sb2510, the second transition effect setting process ends.

<End effect setting process>
The ending effect setting process in step Sb2306 (FIG. 126) will be described with reference to FIG. 131. This process is executed when an end command for each gaming state of the high-precision gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state is received, and in other words, each of these gaming states ends. It is executed when

In step Sb2601, it is determined whether the end of the current gaming state is the end of the first time-saving gaming state. Specifically, it is determined whether the first time-saving game state end command from the main control device 162 has been received.

If the end of the current game state is the end of the first time-saving game state, the process advances to step Sb2602, and it is determined whether the number of misses has reached the ceiling number. That is, it is determined whether the conditions for transition to the second time-saving gaming state are satisfied.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb2602 (the number of misses has not reached the ceiling number and the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is not made) or if a negative determination is made in step Sb2601 (in the case of a high-precision gaming state or a second time-saving gaming state) If it is the end), in step Sb2603, an end effect corresponding to the game state to be ended is set. For example, when it is the end of a high-probability gaming state, a setting is made such that an end effect for the high-probability gaming state is executed.

In step Sb2604, the values of the remaining number counters provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 are cleared (initialized), and in step Sb2605, the remaining number of times image 472 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is erased. do.

In step Sb2606, the remaining count display flag set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344 is cleared, and then the end effect setting process is ended. In addition, if an affirmative determination is made in step Sb2602 (the number of misses has reached the ceiling number and the transition is made to the second time-saving gaming state), the processing from step Sb2603 onward is performed in order to continue updating and displaying the remaining number of times. End the end effect setting process without executing it.

<Special figure fluctuation display processing>
The special figure variation display process in step Sb2307 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 132.

First, in step Sb2701, it is determined whether or not a game round is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether a game round of either the first special figure or the second special figure is being executed. If no game is being executed, the process advances to step Sb2702, and it is determined whether a fluctuation start command from the main controller 162 has been received.

The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation display time setting process (FIG. 111) in the main controller 162. By referring to the information on this variation pattern, it is possible to grasp at which variable display time the special figure game round on the special figure display unit 43 whose display is controlled by the main control device 162 is performed. Moreover, as already explained, since the fluctuation pattern for jackpots and the fluctuation pattern for misses are set separately, it is also possible to determine the result of the success/failure determination from the fluctuation patterns.

If the fluctuation start command has not been received, the special figure fluctuation display process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the fluctuation start command has been received, the process advances to step Sb2703 and executes fluctuation start processing for starting the performance for the game round.

In the fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command from the main controller 162 is analyzed to identify the fluctuation pattern regarding the current special figure game round. Furthermore, based on the specified fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display time in the current special figure game round is grasped. The various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343 stores a performance pattern table in which variable display times are determined in association with each variable pattern. The variable display time determined by the effect pattern table corresponds to the variable display time to which each variable pattern (FIG. 112, FIG. 113) corresponds in the main control device 162, and the effect control device 143 and the main control device 162 A common variation display time is assigned to one variation pattern. For example, when the variation pattern is variation pattern 1A, the corresponding variation display time is 15 seconds for both the production control device 143 and the main control device 162. In the fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern analyzed from the fluctuation start command is specified with reference to the performance pattern table, and this is set as the fluctuation display time of the current special figure game round.

Further, in the performance pattern table, performance patterns for game round performances are associated with each variation pattern. As each performance pattern, the normal reach hit, SP reach hit, SPSP reach hit, complete miss, normal reach miss, SP reach miss, and SPSP reach miss mentioned in the explanation of the variable display time table are set. The correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the effect pattern has already been described with reference to FIG. 112, so the explanation will be omitted. In the variation start process, the performance pattern corresponding to the current variation pattern is specified with reference to the performance pattern table, and this is set as the performance pattern for the current special figure game round.

In addition, in the fluctuation start process, if the result of the judgment regarding the current special figure game is a jackpot, the jackpot type is specified based on the type command from the main control device 162. When the jackpot type is a probability-variable jackpot, a stop result for a probability-variable jackpot is set as the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Conversely, when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the stop result for the normal jackpot is set as the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In these cases, the active lines L1 to L5 on which the stop result for the jackpot is displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Further, if the result of the validity judgment regarding the current special pattern game round is a failure, each stop symbol in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is determined at random. However, if the performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is a ready-to-win performance, each stop symbol is determined so that a reach is formed on the active lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery. That is, a stop result in which a combination of off-reach symbols is established on at least one active line L1 to L5 is set as the current stop result.

In the fluctuation start processing, after executing each of the above-mentioned processing, a command including information on the current stop symbol and information on the production pattern is set as an output target to the display control device 350. In the display control device 350, according to the received command, the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are stopped according to the stop result determined by the production control device 143, or the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped according to the production pattern determined by the production control device 143. The symbol display device 75 is controlled so that special effects are performed.

After execution of step Sb2703, the process for updating the remaining number of times display is executed in step Sb2704, and then the process for displaying the special figure fluctuation is ended. Here, the process for updating the remaining number of times display will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 133(a).

First, in step Sb2801, it is determined whether the remaining count display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, that is, whether the remaining count image 472 is being displayed. Note that the remaining number of times display flag is set when the game is in the high-precision gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, or the second time-saving gaming state, so the determination process in step Sb2801 is performed when the current gaming state is in each of these gaming states. It can also be said that it is determined whether or not it is either.

If the remaining count display flag is not set, the process for updating the remaining count display is ended. On the other hand, if the remaining number of times display flag is set, the process advances to step Sb2802 and the value of the remaining number of times counter area is updated. Specifically, the value in the remaining number of times counter area is subtracted by 1. In the following step Sb2803, the display contents of the remaining number of times image 472 are updated with reference to the update result in step Sb2802. As a result, the remaining number of times notified by the remaining number of times image 472 is subtracted by 1. After executing step Sb2803, the process for updating the remaining count display ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure fluctuation display process (FIG. 132), if an affirmative determination is made in step Sb2701 (when the special figure game round is being executed), the process advances to step Sb2705, and a fluctuation end command is sent from the main controller 162. Determine whether or not it is being received. If the fluctuation end command has not been received, it means that the fluctuation display time has not yet elapsed in the current special figure game round. In this case, in step Sb2706, processing for changing is executed. In the fluctuating process, the fluctuating display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that was started by the fluctuating start process is continued, the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in order, and each reach effect is executed. Execute processing to

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb2705 (if a fluctuation end command has been received), the process advances to step Sb2707, and a fluctuation end process is executed. In the variation termination process, the variation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 and the performance being executed are terminated. Further, in step Sb2707, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are controlled to be fixed and stopped at the fixed display time set by the main controller 162.

In step Sb2708, the process for updating the display of the number of misses is executed, and then the process for displaying the special figure fluctuation is ended. Here, the process for updating the display of the number of misses will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 133(b).

First, in step Sb2901, it is determined whether a miss count display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, that is, whether the miss count image 475 is being displayed. In addition, since the losing count display flag is set in the normal gaming state or the first time-saving gaming state, the determination process in step Sb2901 determines whether the current gaming state is in any of these gaming states. It can also be said to be something to judge.

If the winning number display flag is set, it is determined in step Sb2902 whether or not the result of the current special symbol lottery is a winning result. If the result is a failure, the process advances to step Sb2903, and the value of the failure count counter area is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the value of the number-of-misses counter area. In the following step Sb2904, the display contents of the number-of-misses image 475 are updated with reference to the update result in step Sb2903. As a result, the number of misses reported by the miss count image 475 is incremented by 1.

The process of updating the number-of-misses counter in step Sb2903 is executed at the start timing of the final display, but in step Sb2904, the number-of-misses image 475 is set to be updated after the final display time has elapsed. In this case, the update timing of the number of misses image 475 may be the timing at which the confirmation display ends, or may be the timing after the start of the next special figure game round.

After executing step Sb2904, the process for updating the display of the number of misses ends. In addition, if a negative determination is made in step Sb2901 (if the number-of-misses display flag is not set) or a negative determination is made in step Sb2902 (if the result of the current special figure game is a jackpot result), step Sb2903 The process for updating the display of the number of misses is ended without executing subsequent processes.

<About the flow of transition to the second time-saving gaming state>
The flow of transition to the second time-saving gaming state will be explained. Here, after the 4R normal jackpot result A has become the trigger, the game enters the first time-saving gaming state with the third upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times), and then it is assumed that the number of misses has reached the ceiling number of times (for example, 1000 times). The case of transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state as a trigger will be described with reference to FIG. 134.

When the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result A ends at timing t1, a first support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. As a result, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state, which is a low probability mode and high frequency support mode (FIGS. 134(a) and 134(b)).

Further, at the timing t1, a third upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 in the main controller 162 (FIG. 134(c)). The value of the support counter area SC is subtracted by 1 each time a special figure game round (missing game round) in which the result of the judgment of validity is a wrong result in the first time-saving game state is performed, and the value becomes "0". As a result, the first time saving game state ends (FIG. 108, FIG. 118). In other words, the value of the support counter area SC corresponds to the remaining number of special figure game times in which the first time-saving game state can be played.

In the performance control device 143, the remaining number of times is counted by the remaining number of times counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 (FIG. 133(a)). The remaining number of times image 472 (FIG. 128(d)) based on the value of the remaining number of times counter area is displayed on the symbol display device 75, thereby informing the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state.

In addition, if a jackpot result occurs during the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state ends as the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, and each value in the support counter area SC and remaining number of times counter area changes. cleared.

In addition, at the start timing of the confirmation display of the special figure game round that resulted in the 4R normal jackpot result A, the main controller 162 sets a value corresponding to the ceiling number of times (for example, 1000 times) in the number of misses counter area HC of the various counter areas 314d. is set (FIG. 134(d)). The value of the winning number counter area HC is subtracted by 1 each time a winning game is played after the opening/closing execution mode ends (FIGS. 108 and 119). As a result, the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number of times is counted.

In the performance control device 143, the number of times of losing games is counted by the number of losing times counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b (FIG. 133(b)). The value of the winning number counter area of the performance control device 143 is incremented by 1 each time a winning game is played. In other words, the value of the winning number counter area of the performance control device 143 corresponds to the number of winnings after the jackpot result (after the opening/closing execution mode is performed). On the symbol display device 75, a number of winnings image 475 based on the value of the number of winnings counter area is displayed (FIG. 128(d)), thereby notifying the cumulative number of winning games.

The update of the number of misses counter area HC by the main control device 162 is carried out when the confirmation display is started in the special figure game game in which the result of winning is determined as a result of the judgment, but the number of misses displayed by the number of misses image 475 is updated. The update is performed after waiting for the final display time of the special figure game to elapse. However, this configuration is not essential, and the number-of-misses image 475 may be updated before the final display time elapses. That is, the number of misses may be updated at the start of the final display or during the final display.

By the way, the re-lottery effect (temporarily stop and display the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, then change the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 again, and then stop the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 with a different symbol combination from the previous stop display) In a pachinko machine equipped with an execution function (effects to be displayed), even after the fluctuating display has ended and the final display has started, the player may continue to use the symbol display device 75 in the hope that the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 will fluctuate again. It is assumed that they are paying attention. In order to maintain a sense of anticipation in such a configuration, it is preferable to update the missed number image 475 after the final display time has elapsed, rather than updating it at any timing during the final display.

At timing t2, when the number of unsuccessful games in the first time-saving game state reaches the third upper limit and the value of the support counter area SC becomes "0", the first support flag is cleared and the first time-saving game state is switched off. The process ends (FIGS. 134(b) and 134(c)). Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the third upper limit number of times and the ceiling number of times are set to the same value, the value of the number of missed times counter area HC also becomes "0" at the same time as the support counter area SC becomes "0". . In response to this, a second support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e, and the game shifts to a second time-saving game state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode (FIG. 134(e)).

At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is reset to the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 900 times) corresponding to the duration of the second time-saving gaming state. Further, in the symbol display device 75, an additional performance (FIGS. 130(b) to 130(d)) is executed so that the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state is added.

Here, in this embodiment, the transition determination to the second time-saving game state is performed after the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated (FIGS. 108, 118, and 119). The advantages of such a configuration will be explained with reference to FIG. 135.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding, a configuration in which the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state is updated after the transition determination to the second time-saving gaming state is performed is used as a comparative example, and the configuration is different from the configuration according to the present embodiment. Explain the difference. Furthermore, in order to make it easier to compare both, it is assumed that in both the comparative example and the configuration according to the present embodiment, there is a restriction that restricts the overlapping implementation of the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state.

As mentioned above, in the case where the cumulative number of missed game times reaches the ceiling in the final game of the first time-saving game state triggered by a jackpot, in the configuration of the comparative example, the transition to the second time-saving game state is first determined. By this, it is recognized internally that the state should be shifted to the second time-saving gaming state. However, at that point, since the player is still in the first time-saving gaming state, the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is restricted, and as a result, reaching the ceiling is invalidated.

In order to avoid such invalidation of reaching the ceiling, increase the number of times the ceiling is exceeded to the third upper limit so that the cumulative value of the number of misses reaches the ceiling in the special figure game after the final game in the first time-saving game state. It is conceivable to make it the number of times. If you want to immediately move to the second time-saving game state after the first time-saving game state ends, set the ceiling number of times to 1001 times, or set the third upper limit number of times to 999 times, and select the special figure next to the above-mentioned final game time. What is necessary is to allow the cumulative value of the number of misses to reach the ceiling number of times during the game.

However, in this case, there will be a period of time during which the player stays in the normal gaming state between the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state. For example, if the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated and the transition to the second time-saving game state is determined at the start timing of the confirmation display in the special figure game session, the start timing of the confirmation display in the previous special figure game session. The period from when the first time-saving game state ends to transitioning to the second time-saving game state at the start timing of the final display of the later special figure game, that is, the period during which the variable display is performed in the later special figure game. At this point, the game enters the normal gaming state.

At that time, if the variable display in the normal game game period may start in the normal game state, the variable display time in the normal game game period is set to a long time for the normal game state, and The low winning probability for the normal game state is also applied to the probability of winning or failing. In this case, if the result of the correctness judgment for the general figure game round is incorrect, the general electric accessory 63a will be in the open state only after the general figure game round with the long variable display time ends and the next normal figure game round ends. The support winning result (result of winning a normal figure) will be obtained in the figure game round, and after that round of the normal figure game ends. For this reason, even if it shifts to the second time-saving game state at the start timing of the confirmation display of the later special figure game time, it takes a long period of time until the general electric accessory 63a is brought into the open state, and the frequency is high. There is a concern that there will be a delay before players can actually benefit from the support mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated first, so in the final game time of the first time-saving game state, the reaching of the third upper limit number of times is first recognized, and the first time-saving game state is started. After the gaming state ends, the transition to the second time-saving gaming state based on reaching the ceiling number of times is recognized. Therefore, the switch from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state is performed in the same special figure game round, and reaching the ceiling is not invalidated, and there is no intervening period of staying in the normal game state. Does not occur. In other words, in the case where the cumulative number of misses reaches the ceiling in the final game of the first time-saving gaming state triggered by a win, it is possible to smoothly transition from the first time-saving gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state. It becomes possible.

Next, the case of transitioning from the normal gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 136. Here, the variable display of the special figure game time in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number is performed from timing t1 to timing t3 in FIG. It is assumed that it has been started.

When the special figure game round (the special figure game round of the first special figure) in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number in the normal game state is started, the fluctuation display is performed from timing t1 to timing t3. When the variable display time elapses at timing t3, the confirmation display of the special figure game time is started. In this case, the fixed display time is set to a specific fixed display time (for example, 0.8 sec) that is longer than the normal fixed display time (FIG. 120(a)).

Further, at timing t3, the second support flag is set based on the reaching the ceiling number of times, and a transition to the second time-saving gaming state is performed (FIGS. 136(a) and (b)). At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is set to the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 900 times) corresponding to the duration of the second time-saving gaming state.

In the symbol display device 75, a start effect (FIG. 130(a)) corresponding to the transition to the second time-saving game state is executed. This start effect is executed, for example, in the special figure game time when the ceiling number of times has been reached. At that time, the start effect may be executed during part or all of the fixed display time, or the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time) may be executed. The start effect may be executed by straddling the two.

On the other hand, when the regular figure game round starts at timing t2, which is the middle timing of the variable display in the special figure game round, the gaming state at this point is the normal gaming state, so The variable display time is set to the variable display time for the normal gaming state (for example, 30 seconds).

At timing t3, the fixed display in the special figure game round of reaching the ceiling is started, and when the transition to the second time-saving game state is performed, the variable display of the normal figure game round is forcibly terminated (FIG. 136(c)) ). As a result, the variable display ends earlier than the elapse of the variable display time set at timing t2. In the above case, if the support determination result in the relevant normal pattern game round is a support winning result (normal pattern winning result), the judgment result is rewritten to a losing result. Therefore, after the above-mentioned forced termination, a confirmation display is performed with the stop result corresponding to the failure result.

In addition, if the support determination result is a negative result, that result is maintained, and a final display is performed with the stop result set at the start of the regular game game round. In addition, if at timing t3, the general figure game round is being displayed as confirmed or the opening/closing game using the general electric accessory 63a is being executed, the forced termination will not be executed and those states will continue. be done.

After that, when the final display time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed at timing t4, the result has been rewritten to a missed result as described above, so the accessory opening/closing game using the general electric accessory 63a is not executed, and the next game is immediately performed. The regular game game begins. Since the gaming state at this point is the second time-saving gaming state, the variable display in the game round is performed in a short variable display time (for example, 0.5 sec) for the second time-saving gaming state. Further, support determination in this case is performed under a high winning probability for the second time-saving gaming state. Here, it is assumed that the result of the support determination is a support winning result.

Here, the fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the regular figure game session in which the variable display is forcibly terminated based on reaching the ceiling is longer than the fixed display time (for example, 0.8 sec) of the special figure game session that has reached the ceiling. It's shorter. For this reason, the game round in the second time-saving game state is carried out earlier in the regular figure game time than the special figure game time (FIG. 136(c)).

When the variable display time of the above-mentioned normal figure game time has elapsed at timing t6, the final display is then performed for the set final display time (for example, 0.5 sec). In addition, the total time (for example, 1 sec) of the variable display time (for example, 0.5 sec) and the fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the regular figure game is the fixed display time of the special figure game that has reached the ceiling (for example, 0. .8sec). For this reason, the confirmation display of the special pattern game time ends in the middle of the confirmation display of the regular pattern game time (timing t5).

At that time, if the reservation information of the first special figure exists, the next special figure game round (game round of the first special figure) is started. The special figure game round in this case becomes a game round played under the second time-saving game state. Incidentally, at this point, since the accessory opening/closing game using the general electric accessory 63a has not yet been executed, no prize is won in the second operation opening 63, and the game round of the second special symbol is not executed.

At timing t7, when the confirmed display time of the above-mentioned common figure game time has elapsed, the accessory opening/closing game is executed. This makes it easy for game balls to enter the second operating port 63.

With the above configuration, the start timing of the accessory opening/closing game after transitioning to the second time-saving game state is brought forward compared to the case where the normal figure game round is not forced to end or the result is not rewritten to a winning result. be able to. As a result, it is possible to hasten the start of the period during which winnings can be made to the second actuation port 63, and by extension, to acquire the reservation information of the second special symbol earlier.

For example, if the acquisition timing of the reservation information of the second special figure is delayed, the game round of the first special figure becomes easier to play in the second time-saving gaming state. In the case of a jackpot result in the winning/failure lottery of the second special drawing, the type determination is more preferential than that of the first special drawing (Fig. 102(a), (b)). The more this happens, the more disadvantageous it becomes for the player. In particular, in the case of a configuration in which the variable display time in the game times of the first special figure is shortened under the second time-saving game state, the number of game times of the first special figure to be played after transitioning to the second time-saving game state. There is a concern that this may increase.

In this regard, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to bring forward the start of the period in which the suspension information of the second special figure can be generated, so that the game of the first special figure after transitioning to the second time-saving game state is It is possible to suppress an increase in the number of times. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to play the game in the second time-saving game state in a preferred manner.

Note that, as in this embodiment, in a configuration where the normal game state is a left-handed game and no prize is won to the through gate 64 under the left-handed game, the second time-saving game state is changed from the normal game state. Basically, the event that the regular game game is being executed at the time of transition does not occur. However, if the player recognizes that the ceiling has been reached and switches to the right-handed game in a hurry, a transition to the second time-saving game state can be made while the regular game game is being executed. In particular, in a configuration in which the number of misses up to that point is notified by the miss count image 475, the player tends to be conscious of transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state from a relatively early stage, and such operational errors are likely to occur. It is assumed that In such a case, the longer the variable display time for the normal game state in the regular figure game round, the later the timing at which the second special figure game round can be played will be delayed, and this configuration will function effectively.

In addition, if the firing intensity of the game ball is too strong and the game ball flows to the right route and passes through the through gate 64 unintentionally, or if the second time saving game state is completed after the first time saving game state is Even in cases where the special figure game session in the normal game state is interposed once or several times before transitioning to the state, it is possible to enter the second time-saving game state while the regular figure game session is in progress. A transition can take place. This configuration is also effective in such cases.

In addition, in a configuration in which a game ball can enter a prize in the through gate 64 in a left-handed game (in other words, a configuration in which a prize in the through gate 64 can normally occur in the normal gaming state), it is possible to enter the second ball from the normal gaming state. This configuration is also effective for such pachinko machines because it can naturally occur that the regular game game is being executed when the time-saving game state is entered.

As mentioned above, when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state, the regular game game is forcibly terminated and the result is rewritten to the winning result, but when the normal gaming state is transferred from the first time-saving gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state, Such processing is not performed during migration. When transitioning from the first time-saving gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state, the general game game session has already been performed in a manner compatible with the high-frequency support mode before the transition, and in such a situation, normal This is because if the variable display of the figure game round is ended midway or if it is rewritten to a winning result, there is a risk that the start timing of the accessory opening/closing game will be delayed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

In the first special figure game, the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state is updated, and then the transition to the second time-saving game state is determined.

According to this configuration, when the cumulative number of missed game times reaches the ceiling number in the final game time of the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state is ended and then the second time-saving game state is made to move. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transition to the second time-saving gaming state from being restricted due to the first time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state. Not only that, but because the end of the first time-saving game state and the transition to the second time-saving game state can be performed in the same game, the second time-saving game state can be completed without intervening the special figure game time in the normal game state. A seamless transition from the first time-saving gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state can be realized. This makes it possible to create a state equivalent to adding the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to suitably arouse the player's joy.

In addition, this embodiment can also be seen as being configured such that in one special figure game round, after the end determination of the first time-saving game state is performed, the transition determination to the second time-saving game state is performed. can. In this case as well, the same effects as above can be achieved.

As the first time-saving gaming state, a predetermined first time-saving gaming state in which the upper limit number of times is set to the same number of times as the ceiling number (time-saving gaming state corresponding to 4R probability variable jackpot result A, time-saving gaming state corresponding to 4R normal jackpot result A) state).

In this case, if the predetermined first time-saving game state is implemented as the first time-saving game state, the number of missed game times will automatically reach the ceiling number in the final game time, and the second time-saving game state will be changed from the first time-saving game state. It is possible to shift to a gaming state. In other words, even if the first time-saving gaming state ends without being able to draw a jackpot result, the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state is added by shifting to the second time-saving gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling number of times. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the chance of drawing a jackpot result in a time-saving gaming state is greatly increased compared to the case where there is no addition of the remaining number of times. This not only gives the user the pleasure of expecting a predetermined time-saving gaming state to be selected as the time-saving gaming state, but also increases the appeal of the predetermined time-saving gaming state (appealing power to players) and increases the desire to play. It becomes possible to suitably arouse.

The configuration is such that when a regular game game round is being executed in a situation where a shift to a second time-saving game state is performed, the regular game game round can be ended.

For example, if a prize is won in the through gate 64 immediately before transitioning to the second time-saving game state, the regular game game and the accessory opening/closing game triggered by this will be performed in a disadvantageous manner corresponding to the normal game state. become. At that time, for example, if the transition is made after passing through the opening/closing execution mode, such as in the conventional time-saving gaming state, the general game game cycle that occurs in such a situation should be ended in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the influence from reaching the second time-saving gaming state. However, in the case of the second time-saving game state that transitions without going through the opening/closing execution mode, it is not possible to secure a period to absorb the normal game game times, etc. that started before the transition, so There is a concern that unfavorable general figure game rounds and the like will continue to be played even after the transition to the second time-saving game state. In this respect, if a normal game game session is in progress in a situation where the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is performed, the normal game game session is terminated, so that the disadvantageous aspect corresponding to the normal game state is It is possible to suppress the continuation of the figure game round etc. even after shifting to the second time-saving game state. This allows the player to quickly enjoy the benefits of the second time-saving gaming state.

If the result of the support lottery for the general map game round that is subject to termination is a support winning result (result of winning a general map), it is configured to be changed to a losing result.

According to this configuration, after the end of the common figure game round, the next common figure game round can be started without intervening the accessory opening/closing game. Accordingly, it is possible to bring forward the start timing of the common figure game round and the accessory opening/closing game in an advantageous manner corresponding to the second time-saving game state, and the player can enjoy the benefits of the second time-saving game state more quickly. becomes possible.

In a situation where a transition to the second time-saving gaming state is made and a regular game game is being executed, if the regular game game is in the process of displaying a confirmation, the execution of the ending process is restricted. did.

For example, if a confirmation display is being executed and the display is forcibly terminated, the notification period of the stop result (support lottery notification result) will be shortened. As a result, there is a concern that the visibility of the stop result will decrease, making it difficult for players to grasp the result of the support lottery. In this regard, by restricting the execution of forced termination when the confirmation display is in progress, an appropriate notification period can be ensured and visibility of the termination result can be prevented from deteriorating.

Furthermore, the configuration in which the support lottery result is changed to a losing result can provide the following effects. For example, in a situation where the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is performed, if the support lottery result of the regular game game in which the confirmation display is being executed is the support winning result, When the confirmation display is forcibly terminated and the winning result is rewritten, first, a confirmation display corresponding to the support winning result that has been carried out before the transition to the second time-saving game state is performed, and then the second time-saving game The final display ends due to forced termination accompanying the transition to the state. In other words, although the result is internally rewritten to a wrong result, the final display ends without it being reflected in the stop result, so the stop result corresponding to the changed result is not displayed, and the result before the change is Only the suspension results corresponding to the support winning results will be displayed. In this case, even though the support winning result has been announced, the accessory opening/closing game is not performed, which may cause players to feel distrustful and reduce their trust in the pachinko machine and the game hall. In this regard, by restricting the execution of forced termination when the confirmed display is in progress, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconsistencies between the notified results and the changed support lottery results. It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the accessory opening/closing game is not performed in a situation where the result has been announced.

When the number of misses reaches the ceiling number, a transition is made to the second time-saving game state at the start timing of the confirmation display in the special figure game round in which the number of misses is achieved.

When the confirmation display ends in the special figure game round in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number, the first special figure game round after shifting to the second time-saving game state is started as the next special figure game time. In this case, in this configuration, since the transition to the second time-saving game state is performed at the start timing of the final display of the special figure game time in which the number of misses has reached the ceiling number, the first time after the transition to the second time-saving game state, There is a grace period until the special figure game round is played (the gaming state has transitioned to the second time-saving game state, but the special figure game round after shifting to the second time-saving game state has not yet been played). period) can be ensured. If you end the regular game game round in response to the transition to the second time-saving game state, if you start the next regular game game round during the grace period, the special game time after the transition to the second time-saving game state will be It is possible to start the regular figure game session prior to the figure game session. As a result, the start timing of the accessory opening/closing game using the general electric accessory 63a is brought forward, and it is possible to quickly create a situation in which winnings are more likely to occur in the second operation opening 63 after transitioning to the second time-saving game state. It becomes possible.

The above-mentioned grace period is configured to be longer than the confirmed display time of the regular game game that is subject to termination processing.

According to this configuration, since the fixed display of the regular game game session in which the variable display is ended due to the termination process ends in the middle of the grace period, the next regular game game session is started before the end of the grace period. becomes possible. The next time-saving game is played under the second time-saving game state, so the first time-saving game after transitioning to the second time-saving game state is the first game after transitioning to the second time-saving game state. It can be started earlier than the special figure game round. Thereby, it is possible to advance the start timing of the accessory opening/closing game after the transition to the second time-saving game state, and to quickly create a situation in which winnings to the second operating port 63 are more likely to occur.

The end processing of the regular game game corresponding to the transition to the time-saving game state is performed for the case of transitioning from the normal game state to the time-saving game state (second time-saving game state).

In this configuration, the end process of the general figure game round is executed in response to a change in the situation in which the general figure game round and the accessory opening/closing game are played in an unfavorable manner to the situation in which the general figure game round is played in an advantageous manner. It becomes possible to suitably exhibit each effect.

When the condition for transitioning to the time-saving gaming state is met in a situation where the time-saving gaming state is present (when the ceiling number of times, which is the transition condition to the second time-saving gaming state, is reached in the final game of the first time-saving gaming state) ) is configured to restrict the execution of the above termination process.

If the conditions for transitioning to the time-saving gaming state are met in a time-saving gaming state, the regular game game and the accessory opening/closing game have already been executed in a manner compatible with the time-saving gaming state before the transition condition is satisfied. There is. Therefore, if the above-mentioned termination process is performed in such a situation, the termination process will forcibly terminate the Fuzu game round in the middle, and after that, the next Fuzu game round will be started without the accessory opening/closing game being performed. The opening and closing game of accessories will be played after the normal figure game round is started. In other words, there is a possibility that the start timing of the accessory opening/closing game may be delayed compared to the case where the regular figure game is continued without being forced to end. Therefore, by using the presence or absence of the above-mentioned end processing depending on the case of transitioning from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state and the case of transitioning from the time-saving gaming state to the time-saving gaming state, opening and closing of accessories can be done in either case. It is possible to quickly start a game.

Set the confirmed display time of the special figure game game in which the transition condition to the second time-saving game state (the number of missed times reaches the ceiling) to the specific confirmed display time, and other special figure games in which the above transition condition is not satisfied. The display time is set to be longer than the final display time (normal display time).

In order to allow players to smoothly start playing in the time-saving gaming state, it is important to make the transition to the time-saving gaming state before the first special symbol game after entering the time-saving gaming state starts. It is preferable to inform the player. In this case, if the transition is via the opening/closing execution mode like the conventional time-saving gaming state, the period of the opening/closing execution mode (for example, the ending period, etc.) can be used to support the transition to a specific gaming state. However, in the case of a time-saving game state that transitions without going through the opening/closing execution mode, such as the second time-saving game state according to the present embodiment, the special figure game round in which the transition conditions are satisfied After the end of the game, the first special figure game after transitioning to the second time-saving game state is immediately played, making it difficult to secure the execution period for such notification. In this regard, by lengthening the confirmation display time of the special figure game round in which the conditions for transition to the second time-saving game state are met, the first special figure game time after transitioning to the second time-saving game state will start. The timing can be delayed, and it becomes possible to suitably secure the execution period of the notification informing the transition to the second time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in a configuration that lengthens the confirmed display time of the special figure game session in which the conditions for transition to the second time-saving game state are met, the above grace period is longer than the confirmed display time of the regular figure game session that is subject to the termination process. There are also advantages in making it happen. When constructing such a relationship, it is conceivable to make the final display time of the regular game game subject to the termination process shorter than the normal final display time. However, in this case, as the display time of the stop result becomes shorter, its visibility decreases, and there is a concern that the player will not be able to properly understand the result of the support lottery. In this regard, by lengthening the final display time for special pattern game rounds, it is possible to avoid an unreasonable shortening of the final display time for standard game games, and the above relationship can be established without impairing the visibility of stop results. It becomes possible to do so.

Targeting the case of transitioning from the normal game state to the time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), the configuration is such that the confirmed display time of the special figure game round in which the transition condition is satisfied is lengthened.

According to this configuration, it is possible to secure the player's preparation period for switching to the time-saving gaming state due to the longer confirmation display time in the game round in which the transition condition is satisfied. In particular, in this embodiment, while a left-handed game is recommended in the normal game state, a right-handed game is recommended in the time-saving game state. An operation to switch the intensity is required. According to this configuration, it is possible to suitably secure time for such a firing intensity switching operation.

<Modification 1>
Modification 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. In these figures, the same components as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the second embodiment, when the ceiling number is reached in the first special figure game and the transition to the second time-saving game state occurs, the regular figure game is earlier than the special figure game. However, in this modification, the accessory opening/closing game in a mode corresponding to the second time-saving game state is configured to be performed prior to the special figure game time.

<About specific confirmed display time>
In this modified example, the length of the specific confirmation display time that is set when the ceiling number of times is reached in the game round of the first special symbol is longer than that of the second embodiment. Specifically, the specific confirmed display time is the fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the normal game game that is forcibly terminated, and the variable display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the normal game game that corresponds to the second time-saving gaming state. .5 sec) and the fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the regular game game corresponding to the second time-saving gaming state (for example, 1.5 sec) is set to a longer time (for example, 4 sec). .

<About the flow of transition to the second time-saving gaming state>
The case of transitioning from the normal gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 137. Here, the variable display of the special figure game time in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number is performed from timing t1 to timing t3, and the variable display of the regular figure game time is started at timing t2, which is an intermediate timing. shall be taken as a thing.

When the special figure game round (the special figure game round of the first special figure) in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number in the normal game state is started, the fluctuation display is performed from timing t1 to timing t3. When the variable display time elapses at timing t3, the confirmation display of the special figure game time is started. In this case, the specific confirmed display time (for example, 4 seconds) is set as the confirmed display time.

Furthermore, at timing t3, the second support flag is set based on the reaching the ceiling number of times, and a transition to the second time-saving gaming state is performed (FIGS. 137(a) and (b)). At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is set to the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 900 times) corresponding to the duration of the second time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, when the regular figure game round starts at timing t2, which is the middle timing of the variable display in the special figure game round, the gaming state at this point is the normal gaming state, so The variable display time is set to the variable display time for the normal gaming state (for example, 30 seconds).

At timing t3, when the fixed display in the special figure game round of reaching the ceiling is started and the transition to the second time-saving game state is performed, the variable display of the above-mentioned normal figure game round is forcibly terminated (FIG. 137(c)) ). As a result, the variable display ends earlier than the elapse of the variable display time set at timing t2. In the above case, if the support determination result in the relevant normal pattern game round is a support winning result (normal pattern winning result), the judgment result is rewritten to a losing result. Therefore, after the above-mentioned forced termination, a confirmation display is performed with the stop result corresponding to the failure result.

After that, when the final display time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed at timing t4, the result has been rewritten to a missed result as described above, so the accessory opening/closing game using the general electric accessory 63a is not executed, and the next game is immediately performed. The regular game game begins. Since the gaming state at this point is the second time-saving gaming state, the variable display in the game round is performed in a short variable display time (for example, 0.5 sec) for the second time-saving gaming state. Further, support determination in this case is performed under a high winning probability for the second time-saving gaming state. Here, it is assumed that the result of the support determination is a support winning result.

At timing t5, when the variable display time of the normal figure game has elapsed, the final display is then performed for the set final display time (for example, 0.5 sec). Then, when the confirmed display time has elapsed at timing t6, the accessory opening/closing game using the general electric accessory 63a is executed (FIG. 137(d)). This makes it easier for game balls to enter the second operating port 63.

Here, the period during which the confirmed display of the special figure game session that started from timing t3 is continued (specific confirmed display time) is the confirmed display time of the regular figure game session from timing t3 to timing t4, and from timing t4 to timing It is longer than the total period (for example, 1.5 sec) of the variable display time of the regular figure game up to t5 and the fixed display time of the regular figure game from timing t5 to timing t6. For this reason, the accessory opening/closing game will be started in the middle of the confirmation display of the above-mentioned special figure game round.

When the specific confirmed display time elapses at timing t7, the first special figure game round after transitioning to the second time-saving game state is executed. As mentioned above, in this modification, since the accessory opening/closing game is started prior to the first special figure game, the second operating port 63 is opened in the period before the first special figure game is started. It is possible to secure a period for generating a prize and acquiring pending information of the second special drawing. Therefore, the reservation information of the second special figure can be made to exist at the time when the first special figure game round after shifting to the second time-saving game state is started. This makes it possible to carry out, as the first special figure game round, a game round of the second special figure, which is given more preferential treatment than the first special figure.

In the above case, in order to promote the acquisition of the reservation information of the second special symbol during the period T from timing t6 to timing t7, it is preferable to perform a predetermined notification to encourage winning to the second operating port 63. Although the specific mode of the predetermined notification is not particularly limited, for example, as shown in FIG. 138, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, a right-handed notification image 477a and, for example, "Aim for the electric chew!" It is preferable to display a target guide image 477b including characters such as . The right hit notification image 477a is for prompting the game ball to be fired to the right route in the game area PE, and the target guide image 477b is for guiding the target to which the game ball should win.

The above-mentioned predetermined notification may be performed after the timing t3 when the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is performed, but at that time, the confirmation display of the special figure game round in which at least the conditions for transition to the second time-saving gaming state are satisfied ends. It is preferable to perform this at a predetermined timing before the timing t7. This predetermined timing may be any timing before timing t6 when the accessory opening/closing game is started, or any timing in the period from timing t6 to timing t7 (timing when the specific confirmed display time elapses) It may be. Considering the operation period for the player to adjust the firing intensity, it is preferable that the above-mentioned notification is performed before the accessory object opening/closing game starts (before the general electric accessory object 63a is set in the open state), and the timing is Preferably, the predetermined timing is a period from t3 to timing t6.

In addition, at timing t7 when the first special figure game round after transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state, not only the reservation information of the second special figure but also the reservation information of the first special figure may exist. be. In this regard, in this modification, if there is reservation information for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the game round of the second special symbol is played with priority (Figure 109), so in such a case However, it becomes possible to carry out the second special figure game round as the first special figure game round.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

To end the confirmation display in the first regular figure game round after shifting to the second time saving game state before the start of the first special figure game round after shifting to the second time saving game state. The configuration allows for

In this case, if the support lottery result of the first regular game game after transitioning to the second time-saving game state is the support winning result, the first special game game after transitioning to the second time-saving game state is the support lottery result. Before the opening/closing game is started, the common electric accessory 63a can be brought into an open state by starting the accessory opening and closing game. As a result, before the first special figure game round after transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state starts, a prize is generated in the second operating port 63 and the pending information of the second special figure is accumulated. This makes it possible to carry out the second special figure game round as the first special figure game round.

At the same time as the transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is made in accordance with the start of the confirmation display of the special figure game time, and at least a predetermined notification to encourage winning to the second operating port 63 is sent when the confirmation display of the above-mentioned special figure game time is started. It is configured to be executed before it ends.

By shifting to the second time-saving game state in conjunction with the start of the confirmation display of the special figure game round in which the transition conditions have been met, the period between the transition to the second time-saving game state and the time when the first special figure game round is played. It is possible to secure a grace period (a period in which the gaming state has shifted to the second time-saving gaming state, but the special figure game round after shifting to the second time-saving gaming state has not been played yet). can. In a configuration in which it is possible to start the accessory opening/closing game before the first special figure game after transitioning to the second time-saving game state, winning to the second operating port 63 during the grace period is possible. By providing the prompting notification, it becomes possible for the player to easily accumulate the reservation information of the second special symbol before the start of the first special symbol game round.

<Modification 2>
A second modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 140. In these figures, the same components as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In this modification, when the number of times of losing reaches the ceiling number in the middle of the first time-saving game state, it is configured to shift to the second time-saving game state. A specific configuration for this purpose will be described below.

<About the second time saving game state>
The second time-saving game state of this modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 139. Also in this modification, in addition to the first time-saving gaming state that is triggered by a jackpot result, there is a second time-saving gaming state that is triggered by the number of losing games reaching the ceiling number. It is provided.

The ceiling number of times in the second time-saving game state of this modification is set to a smaller number of times (for example, 800 times) than the third upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times) in the first time-saving game state. For this reason, when the 4R normal jackpot result is A and the opening/closing execution mode ends and the game moves to the first time-saving game state, if you repeat a winning game in the first time-saving gaming state, the cumulative number of winning games will increase. The ceiling number of times will be reached before reaching the end number of times of the first time-saving game state. Note that the duration of the transition to the second time-saving game state is similar to the first embodiment described above, when the number of special figure games after transitioning to the second time-saving game state is a predetermined period. 5 until reaching the upper limit number of times (for example, 900 times).

<Processing for transition to second time-saving gaming state>
The second time-saving game state transition process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 140. This process is executed in step Sb512 of the special figure game time control process (FIG. 108) in the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the second time-saving game state transition process in FIG. 119. . In FIG. 140, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 119, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1404 (the high probability flag is not set), the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC in the RAM 314 is updated in step Sb1405. Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC.

In step Sb1406, it is determined whether the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC is "0". When the value of the number of misses counter area HC is "0", that is, when the number of times of the special figure game with a miss result reaches the ceiling number, the process advances to step Sb3101, and the number is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. 1 Determine whether the support flag is set. The first support flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the game is in the first time-saving gaming state.

If the first support flag is set, that is, if the first time-saving game state is in progress, the process advances to step Sb3102, and the first support flag set in the various flag storage areas 314e is cleared. In the subsequent step Sb1407, a second support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e, and a second time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) is started. That is, in this modification, if the value of the number-of-time-out counter area HC becomes "0" during the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state is switched to the second time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state is switched to the second time-saving game state. be forced to activate.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3101 (the first support flag is not set), that is, if the first time-saving game state is not in effect, the second support flag is set in step Sb1407 without executing the process in step Sb3102. set.

After step Sb1407 is executed, in step Sb1408, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 900 times) is set in the support counter area SC of the RAM 314. Even if you transition to the second time-saving gaming state in the middle of the first time-saving gaming state, the same value is set as when you transition from the normal gaming state (a situation that is not the first time-saving gaming state) to the second time-saving gaming state. do. In other words, if you transition to the second time-saving game state in the middle of the first time-saving game state, regardless of the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state at that time, the remaining number of times in the subsequent high-frequency support mode will be the second time-saving game state. It is rewritten to the fifth upper limit number of times in the time-saving gaming state.

In step Sb1409, a second time saving game state start command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143. The set second time saving game state start command is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). After that, the process proceeds to step Sb1410, and it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

<About the flow to the second time-saving gaming state>
The flow of transition to the second time-saving gaming state will be explained. Here, after the 4R normal jackpot result A has become the trigger, the transition to the first time-saving gaming state with the third upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times) is performed, and then it is assumed that the number of misses has reached the ceiling number of times (for example, 800 times). The case where the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is triggered will be explained.

When the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result A ends, the first support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. As a result, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state, which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode. At this time, a value corresponding to the third upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times) is set in the support counter area SC of the RAM 314.

Then, when the cumulative number of winning games in the first time-saving game state reaches 800 and reaches the ceiling, the first support flag is cleared in the special figure game that reached the ceiling, and the various flags mentioned above are stored. A second support flag is set in area 314e. At this time, the number of times the game is executed in the first time-saving game state has not reached the third upper limit, and there are 200 remaining times, but the switch from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state will be held. Then, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 900 times) is set in the support counter area SC.

In the symbol display device 75, as in the first embodiment, an additional performance (FIGS. 130(b) to 130(d)) is executed such that the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state is added. However, the number of additions notified by the said addition performance is the number of times (for example, 700) obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times in the first time-saving gaming state from the fifth upper limit number of times. In other words, internally, the remaining 200 times will be canceled and a new 900 times will be set for the duration of the high-frequency support mode, but from the player's perspective, it will appear as if 700 times have been added. be done.

Here, in this modification, the transition to the second time-saving game state is determined after the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated (FIGS. 108, 118, and 140). The advantages of such a configuration will be explained with reference to FIG. 141.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding, a configuration in which the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state is updated after the transition determination to the second time-saving gaming state is performed is used as a comparative example, and the differences from the configuration according to this modification are Explain. Furthermore, in order to make it easier to compare the two, it is assumed that the transition to the second time-saving game state during the first time-saving game state is also allowed in the comparative example.

In the case where the cumulative number of missed game times reaches the ceiling number in the middle of the first time-saving game state, in the configuration of the comparative example, the transition from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state is first determined. Switching to the 2-hour saving gaming state is performed. After that, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated within the same special figure game, so even though the special figure game in the second time-saving game state is not actually executed, the second time-saving game The remaining number of times in the game state is subtracted by 1. Therefore, the number of special symbol game times that can be played under the second time-saving game state is 899 times, which is one time less.

In contrast, in this modification, the transition to the second time-saving game state is determined after the update of the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is completed, so switching from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state is difficult. After being played, the remaining number of times in the second time-saving game state is not subtracted in that special figure game time. In other words, since the remaining number of times in the second time-saving game state is subtracted from the start of the next special figure game time (the special game time executed after the transition to the second time-saving game state), the second time-saving game state The number of special figure game times that can be played under this will be 900 times. In other words, it becomes possible to suitably secure the number of special symbol game times that can be played under the second time-saving game state.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

If the transition condition is satisfied during the first time-saving game state, the transition to the second time-saving game state is allowed, and after the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated in the first special figure game, It is configured such that a transition determination to the second time-saving gaming state is performed.

According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress updating of the remaining number of times in a certain special figure game time immediately after shifting to the second time-saving game state in that special figure game time. Thereby, it is possible to appropriately secure the remaining number of times after shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

<Modification 3>
A third modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. In these figures, the same components as those in the second embodiment and each modification are designated by the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example, the winning results in the winning/failure lottery of the special figure game include a normal winning result and a special winning result, and when the result of the win/fail drawing becomes a special winning result, the opening/closing execution mode is activated. It is configured to shift to the third time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) without shifting. Note that the normal deviation result is similar to the deviation result according to the second embodiment. Further, in this modification, the function of the second time-saving game state is not installed.

<Special figure game round validity table>
In this modified example, the winning table for the first special pattern and the winning/failing table for the second special pattern are provided as the winning/failure tables used for the winning/failure lottery in the special pattern game round. The win/fail table for the first special figure is referred to in the win/fail lottery based on the starting prize entered into the first actuating port 62 (starting port of the first special figure), and the win/fail table for the second special figure is , which is referred to in the winning lottery based on the starting prize entered into the second operating port 63 (starting port of the second special figure). Note that the validity table for the first special symbol is the same as the validity table (FIG. 101) according to the second embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The win/fail table for the second special symbol is stored in the win/fail table storage area 313a of the ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 142, the second special symbol winning table includes a low probability mode winning table and a high probability mode winning table. When the lottery mode is a low probability mode, the lottery mode for the low probability mode is referred to, and when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the lottery mode for the high probability mode is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 142(a), in the low probability mode win/fail table, a total of 10 random numbers from "0" to "9" are set as jackpot random number values (value of jackpot random number counter C1), and The probability of winning a jackpot in the probability mode is set to 1/300. Further, a total of 300 random numbers from "10" to "309" are set as special outlier results. That is, the probability of a special outlier result in the low probability mode is set to 1/10. Other random values are assigned to normal results, and the probability of a normal result in low probability mode is set to 2690/3000.

In addition, in the win/fail table for low probability mode corresponding to the first special symbol, a special lose result is not set as a lottery result. In other words, the special winning result is a result that can be won only when a right-handed game is played in a situation where winning is possible through the second operating port 63.

As shown in FIG. 142(b), in the high probability mode winning/failure table, a total of 50 random numbers from "0" to "49" are set as the jackpot random number values, and the jackpot winning probability in the high probability mode is It is set to 1/60. In addition, in the win/fail table for the high probability mode, no special winning results are set as lottery results, and all random values other than the random numbers for jackpot are assigned to normal winning results. The probability of a normal result in the high probability mode is set to 59/60.

<Special figure game type table>
As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special pattern (FIG. 143(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special pattern (FIG. 143(b)) are set.

As shown in FIG. 143(a), in the jackpot type table for the first special figure, 4R probability variable jackpot result and 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. In each of these jackpot results, the number of round games to be executed is four.

The 4R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to a high probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high certainty gaming state continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times). When the first upper limit number of times is reached, the high probability gaming state ends and the mode shifts to the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode).

The 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to the first time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined second upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times). When the second upper limit number of times is reached, the first time-saving game state ends and the game shifts to the normal game state.

In the jackpot type table for the first special figure, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to 4R probability variable jackpot results, and "65" to "99" correspond to 4R normal jackpot results. That is, the probability of being allocated to the 4R probability variable jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being allocated to the 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in FIG. 143(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, 10R probability variable jackpot result and 10R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. In each of these jackpot results, the number of round games to be executed is 10.

The 10R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to a high probability gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high certainty gaming state continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined third upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times). Further, the 10R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to the first time-saving gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times).

In the jackpot type table for the second special figure, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to 10R probability variable jackpot results, and "65" to "99" correspond to 10R normal jackpot results. That is, the probability of being allocated to a 10R probability variable jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being allocated to a 10R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

Moreover, in this modification, a type table for special failure is provided as another type table. The special loser type table is a type table that is referred to when the result of the win/fail lottery is a special loser result, and is stored in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313.

As shown in FIG. 144(a), in the special deviation type table, special deviation result A and special deviation result B are set as selectable special deviation types. The special winning result A is a special winning result that moves to the third time-saving game state A, and the special winning result B is a special winning result that moves to the third time-saving gaming state B.

As shown in FIG. 144(b), the third time-saving game state A is a low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode game state, and the special symbol game round is executed after transitioning to the third time-saving game state A. This continues until the number of times reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit (for example, 900 times). The third time-saving game state B is also a low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode game state, and the third time-saving game state B is a game state in which the number of times the special symbol game is executed after transitioning to the third time-saving game state B is This continues until the sixth upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times), which is smaller than the fifth upper limit number of times, is reached. That is, the third time-saving game state A is more advantageous for the player than the third time-saving game state B.

Note that the special deviation results A and B are both one of the deviation results, so the opening/closing execution mode is not executed. That is, in the case of these results, the game shifts to the third time-saving game states A and B without going through the opening/closing execution mode.

In the special winning type table, "0" to "9" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to special winning result A, and "10" to "99" correspond to special winning result B. That is, the probability of being assigned to the special outlier result A is set to 10%, and the probability of being assigned to the special outlier result B is set to 90%.

The random number value (jacket type counter C2) used for the special winning type lottery is used to determine the stop result of the symbols that are stopped and displayed on each special symbol display section AS, BS when the result of the winning lottery is a special winning result. is also used. The stop result is determined by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. In the stop result table, data of a plurality of stop results (special winning symbols that are stopped and displayed on each special symbol display section AS, BS) in the case of a special winning result is set in correspondence with the value of the jackpot type counter C2. When determining the stop result, data corresponding to the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is read out of the plurality of stop result data. Here, since the same jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the stop result and the special winning type, the special winning pattern that is stopped and displayed on each special symbol display section AS, BS and the special winning pattern determined at the time of the special winning are determined. There is a correlation with the special outlier type.

In addition, in this modification, the special winning type is drawn using the jackpot type counter C2, but a dedicated counter value (random number for lottery) corresponding to the special winning result is prepared, and the dedicated counter value is used to draw the special winning type. may be drawn by lottery.

Further, the special winning type may be drawn by substituting an existing counter value other than the jackpot type counter C2, such as the fluctuation type counter CS. At that time, since it is assumed that the number of types of special outlier results will be smaller than the number of types of fluctuation patterns, etc., the above lottery will be performed using a part (some bit values) of the fluctuation type counter CS, etc. Good too.

<Special figure game time control process>
The special figure game time control process according to this modification will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 145. This process is executed in step Sb403 of the normal process (FIG. 107) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the special symbol game time control process of FIG. In FIG. 145, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 108, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

When a negative determination is made in step Sb503 (when the special figure display section 43 is not in the variable display mode), it is determined in step Sb504 whether or not the common reservation number CRN is "0". If the common reservation number CRN is not "0", that is, if there is reservation information for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the process advances to step Sb505 and data setting processing is executed. In the data setting process, the holding information stored in the first special figure holding area Ra or the second special figure holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE for variable display.

In step Sb3201, a fluctuation start process for starting a fluctuation display on the special figure display section 43 is executed. Here, the variation start processing in step Sb3201 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 146. Note that in FIG. 146, the same step numbers are given to processes similar to the fluctuation start process in FIG. 110, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb3301, it is determined whether the second special symbol flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The second special figure flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the current special figure game round is a special figure game round of the second special figure.

If the second special figure flag is not set, that is, if the current special figure game round is the special figure game round of the first special figure, in step Sb3302, the first special figure winning/failure table (Fig. 101 ) to determine validity. At that time, if the lottery mode at that time is low probability mode, refer to the win/fail table for low probability mode (Fig. 101(a)), and if the lottery mode is high probability mode, refer to the win/fail table for high probability mode (Fig. 101(a)). Refer to FIG. 101(b)).

If the second special figure flag is set, that is, if the current special figure game round is the special figure game round of the second special figure, in step Sb3303, the second special figure winning/failure table (Fig. 142 ) to determine validity. At that time, if the lottery mode at that time is low probability mode, refer to the low probability mode win/fail table (Fig. 142(a)), and if it is high probability mode, refer to the high probability mode win/fail table (Fig. 142(a)). Refer to FIG. 142(b)).

After executing step Sb3302 or step Sb3303, it is determined in step Sb3304 whether or not the result of the determination in step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, the process advances to step Sb3305, and a jackpot type is drawn by referring to the corresponding jackpot type table (FIG. 143).

In step Sb3306, the type flag indicating the jackpot type selected by the type determination in step Sb3305 is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, when the jackpot type selected by lottery is a 4R probability variable jackpot result, a 4R probability variable jackpot flag is stored.

In step Sb3307, a stop result for a jackpot is set by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game round.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3304 (not a jackpot win), the process proceeds to step Sb3308, and it is determined whether or not the result of the success or failure determination in step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 is a special winning result. If it is a special failure result, in step Sb3309, a special failure type is selected by lottery with reference to the special failure type table (FIG. 144(a)).

In step Sb3310, a special failure flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. The special failure flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the result of the current special symbol lottery is a special failure result. A plurality of types of special failure flags are prepared depending on the type of special failure, and in step Sb3310, the special failure flag corresponding to the type selected in step Sb3309 is set. For example, when the selected special deviation type is special deviation result A, special deviation flag A is set.

In step Sb3311, a stop result for special failure is set with reference to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game round.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3308 (not a special winning result), it means that the result of the current win/fail lottery is a normal winning result. In this case, the process advances to step Sb3312, and a stop result for normal failure is set. In this modification, only one type of stop result is provided for disconnection, and that stop result is set in step Sb3312.

After executing step Sb3307, step Sb3311 or step Sb3312, in step Sb3313, the variable display time is set for setting the variable display time of the current game round in the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS. Execute the setting process. In the variable display time setting process, a variable display time is selected by lottery using the variable type counter CS and the variable display time table. Here, the variable display time table according to this modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 147.

As the variable display time table in this modification, at least a variable display time table for special misses in the second special figure and a variable display time table for normal misses in the second special figure are set. Moreover, in each of these variable display time tables, one for the first time-saving gaming state and one for the normal gaming state in the reserved portion after the first time-saving gaming state are set. The reserved portion here is based on the reservation information of the second special figure that exists at the end of the first time-saving game state, and the special figure game time that is executed in the normal game state after the end of the first time-saving game state. It is equivalent. Since the upper limit number of second special figures to be reserved is 4, the special figure game times for the above-mentioned reserved figures are executed up to four times.

The variable display time table (for the first time-saving game state) for special winnings in the second special drawing shows the case where the result of the winning lottery in the second special drawing becomes a special winning result in the situation of the first time-saving gaming state. This is what is referred to. In this variable display time table, as shown in FIG. 147(a), it depends on the number of executions of the special figure game after transitioning to the first time-saving game state (in other words, after the opening/closing execution mode is performed). The variation patterns are configured to be selected in different ways. Specifically, if a special winning result is obtained in a situation where the number of executions of the special symbol game after transitioning to the first time-saving game state is from 1st to 99th, the fluctuation pattern Z1 (for example, 8sec or 4sec ) is selected and the number of executions of the special figure game after moving to the first time-saving game state is the 100th time, that is, when the special winning result is obtained in the final game in the first time-saving game state. The configuration is such that a variation pattern Z2 (for example, 15 seconds) is selected.

The variation pattern Z1 corresponds to a complete out-of-reach performance, and the variation pattern Z2 corresponds to a special out-of-reach performance. That is, when the fluctuation start command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern Z1 is sent to the performance control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes a completely missed performance as a game repeat performance, and the fluctuation start command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern Z2 is performed. When transmitted to the control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes a special out-of-reach performance as a game repeat performance. The complete miss performance is one in which symbols are stopped and displayed in a miss symbol combination without a reach display. Further, the special reach-out performance will be explained in detail later.

The variable display time table (for the first time-saving game state) for normal winnings in the second special drawing shows the case where the result of the winning/failure lottery in the second special drawing becomes a normal winning result in the situation of the first time-saving gaming state. This is what is referred to. Also in this variable display time table, as shown in FIG. 147(b), the selection mode of the variable pattern is configured to differ depending on the number of times the special figure game is executed after shifting to the first time saving game state.

Among these, the case where the number of executions of the special figure game after transitioning to the first time-saving game state is from 1st to 99th and the result is a normal result is explained in the second embodiment above. Since this is the same as the case of FIG. 113(d), the explanation will be omitted. In addition, if the final game in the first time saving game state results in a normal result, the fluctuation pattern Z3 (8 sec or 4 sec) is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. There is. Variation pattern Z3 corresponds to a completely off performance.

The variable display time table for special winnings in the second special figure (normal game state for the reserved part) is referred to when a special winning result occurs in the special figure game round for the reserved part. As shown in FIG. 147(c), this variation display time table is configured such that variation pattern Z4 (15 seconds) is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS. Variation pattern Z4 corresponds to a special out-of-reach performance.

The variable display time table for normal winnings in the second special figure (normal game state for the reserved part) is referred to when the normal winning result is obtained in the above-mentioned reserved special figure game round. As shown in FIG. 147(d), this variation display time table is configured such that variation pattern Z5 (8 sec) is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS. Variation pattern Z5 corresponds to a completely off performance.

Since each variable display time table is configured as described above, in the final game round to the reserved game round, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot result or a special lose result, a reach effect is executed, If the result of the special drawing lottery is a normal result, the execution of the reach effect is restricted. Therefore, if the reach effect is executed from the last game round to the reserved game round, the jackpot result or special winning result will be confirmed, and the player can It becomes possible to predict that the results are not normal. In other words, in these game rounds, the player plays the game with a strong expectation that a reach effect will occur, and it becomes possible to greatly increase the degree of attention to the behavior of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Each of these variable display time tables is stored in the variable display time table storage area 313c of the ROM 313. Note that the items in the "Notes (presentation mode)" column in FIG. 147 are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

In addition, a variable display time table for the normal gaming state (other than reserved portions) and a variable display time table for the high certainty gaming state are also provided, but these are similar to those shown in FIGS. 112 and 113 described in the second embodiment. Since this is the same as in the case, the explanation will be omitted.

Further, the variable display time table for the third time-saving game state is similar to the variable display time table for the time-saving game state shown in FIGS. 113(c) and (d). In addition, in the third time-saving game state, a right-handed game is played, so there may be a special winning result in the winning/failure lottery of the special figure game, but in this case, the variable display for losing as shown in FIG. 113(d) A time table (for the time-saving game state) is referred to, and a variable display time is randomly selected without distinguishing it from a normal result.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 146), in the fluctuation display time setting processing of step Sb3313, the current game state, the result of the winning/failure lottery, the number of executions of the special figure game, etc. are grasped, and the grasped results are handled accordingly. The variable display time table (variable pattern) is selected by reference to the variable display time table. Then, the drawn variable display time is set in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 314 as the variable display time in the current special figure game round.

In the following step Sb712, a variable display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The variable display flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner. After executing step Sb712, the processing from step Sb713 onwards is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure game time control process (FIG. 145), if an affirmative determination is made in step Sb507 (if the variable display time has elapsed), the process advances to step Sb509, and the various flags are set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Clear the current fluctuation display flag. In step Sb510, high probability mode update/end processing is executed to update the remaining number of high probability modes and to terminate the high probability mode.

In step Sb511, a process for updating and terminating the high-frequency support mode is executed to update the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode and to terminate the high-frequency support mode. In step Sb3202, a process for transitioning to the third time-saving game state is executed to control the transition to the third time-saving game state (FIG. 144(b)). In step Sb3203, a final display start process is executed to start a final display on the special figure display section 43, and then the special figure game time control process is ended.

<Processing for transition to third time-saving gaming state>
The third time-saving gaming state transition process in step Sb3202 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 148. This process is executed after the high-frequency support mode update/termination process in step Sb511.

First, in step Sb3401, it is determined whether a special failure flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 344. If the special failure flag is set, that is, if the result of the current special drawing lottery is a special failure result, the process advances to step Sb3402, and the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Determine whether or not. The high probability flag indicates that the current gaming state is a high probability gaming state.

If the high probability flag is not set, that is, if the high probability gaming state is not set, it is determined in step Sb3403 whether the first support flag or the third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. do. The first support flag indicates that the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state, and the third support flag indicates that the current gaming state is the third time-saving gaming state.

If neither the first support flag nor the third support flag is set, that is, if neither the first time-saving game state nor the third time-saving game state is set, the process advances to step Sb3404, and the various flag storage areas 314e are Set the third support flag. Thereby, the game shifts to the third time-saving game state.

In step Sb3405, it is determined whether the type of the current special deviation result is special deviation result A or not. This determination is made by understanding the type of special out-of-order flag set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

If it is the special deviation result A, the process advances to step Sb3406, and a value (for example, 900) corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times is set in the support counter area SC of the RAM 314. As a result, the third time-saving game state to be transferred is set to the third time-saving game state A.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3405 (not the special deviation result A), that is, if the type of the special deviation result is special deviation result B, the process proceeds to step Sb3407, and the support counter area SC corresponds to the sixth upper limit number of times. Set the value (for example, 100). As a result, the third time-saving game state to be transferred is set to the third time-saving game state B.

After execution of step Sb3406 or step Sb3407, the third time-saving game state start command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143 in step Sb3408. At that time, when transitioning to the third time-saving game state A, a start command corresponding to the third time-saving game state A is set, and when moving to the third time-saving game state B, a start command corresponding to the third time-saving game state B is set. Set the start command. Each of these start commands includes information indicating the upper limit number of times.

The set third time saving game state start command is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). By transmitting the third time-saving game state start command, the production control device 143 is notified of the start of the third time-saving game state. After executing step Sb3408, the third time-saving game state transition process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb3402 (if the high probability flag is set) or if an affirmative determination is made in step Sb3403 (if either the first support flag or the third support flag is set), step The third time-saving game state transition process is ended without executing the processes from Sb3404 to Sb3408. In other words, if a special winning result occurs in the high-accuracy gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, or the third time-saving gaming state, the transition to the third time-saving gaming state will be restricted, and the current special figure gaming round will be restricted. Special outlier results in are disabled.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3401 (the special out-of-play flag is not set), in order to continue the gaming state at that point, the process for transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state is executed without executing the processing after step Sb3402. finish.

<Process for starting confirmation display>
The final display start process in step Sb3203 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 149. In FIG. 149, the same step numbers are assigned to processes similar to the final display start process in FIG. 120(a), and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb3501, it is determined whether a special failure flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the special failure flag is set, that is, if the result of the current special symbol lottery is a special failure result, the process advances to step Sb3502 and a process of clearing the special failure flag is executed. In the following step Sb3503, the normal fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) is set as the fixed display time in the current special figure game round.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3501 (when the special out-of-place flag is not set), that is, if the result of the current special drawing lottery is not a special outgoing result, in step Sb3504, the result of the current special drawing drawing is Determine whether or not is a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step Sb3503, and the above-mentioned normal confirmed display time is set as the confirmed display time in the current special figure game round.

If it is not a jackpot result, that is, if the result of the current special drawing lottery is a normal loss result, in step Sb3505, the current special pattern game round is the final game round (100th time) in the first time-saving game state. (game time). If it is not the last game round, the process proceeds to step Sb3503, and the above-mentioned normal fixed display time is set as the fixed display time for the current special figure game round.

On the other hand, if it is the last game round, the process advances to step Sb3506, and it is determined whether or not the regular game round is being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the normal game game round in this case, the variable display started before the start of the confirmed display in the final game round in the first time-saving game state, and the support lottery was started under the first time-saving game state. (a lottery with a high probability of winning).

If the normal figure game round is being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step Sb3507, and it is determined whether the win/fail result of the normal figure game round that is being displayed in a variable manner is a support winning result (a common figure winning result). If it is a support winning result, the process proceeds to step Sb3508, and the win/fail result of the regular game game, which is being displayed in a variable manner, is changed to a lose result. In the subsequent step Sb3509, a stop result for a missed result is set as a stop result for the normal figure game.

After executing step Sb3509 or if a negative determination is made in step Sb3507 (if the winning result of the general figure game round that is being fluctuatedly displayed is a wrong result), the variable display of the general figure game round is forcibly terminated in step Sb3510. . Thereafter, the stop result corresponding to the missed result is displayed as a final result on the ordinary figure display section 44 at a predetermined final display time (for example, 0.5 sec).

After executing step Sb3510, in step Sb3511, a specific fixed display time longer than the normal fixed display time is set as the fixed display time in the current special figure game round. This specific confirmed display time is the execution period of the accessory opening/closing game in the first time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) shown in FIG. 103(c) (opening time 2 sec + interval period 0.2 sec + opening time 2 sec = 4.2 sec ), and more specifically, it is a period longer than 4.7 sec, which is the total period of the final display time of the general figure game (for example, 0.5 sec) and the execution period of the above-mentioned accessory opening/closing game. Ru. In this modification, for example, 5 seconds is set as the specific confirmed display time. In addition, in a configuration where multiple types of accessory opening/closing games with different number of openings, opening times, etc. are provided as the opening/closing game in the first time saving game state, a time longer than the longest time among them is specified and confirmed. Set as display time.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step Sb3506 (if the regular figure game round is not being displayed in a variable manner), the process proceeds to step Sb3511 without executing the processes of steps Sb3507 to Sb3510, and the fixed display time in the current special figure game round is Set the above-mentioned specific confirmed display time as .

After executing step Sb3511 or step Sb3503, a final display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314 in step Sb1504. In step Sb1505, the special figure display unit 43 is controlled so that the final display is started, and in step Sb1506, a variation end command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143.

In step Sb3512, external signal setting processing is performed to output a game round execution signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side to notify the execution of the special figure game round (more specifically, the completion of the variable display). conduct. The game execution signal is used by the game hall to grasp the number of executions of the special figure game, and to display the number of executions of the special figure game after a jackpot on a data counter or the like on the game island. In the external signal setting process, the game execution signal is set to be on for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, in the external signal setting process of step Sb3512, a setting process is performed to output a lottery result signal to notify the result of the current special symbol lottery to the management control device on the gaming hall side. Specifically, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot, a lottery result signal corresponding to the jackpot is output, and if the result is a normal loss, a lottery result signal corresponding to the normal loss is output, and a special If the result is a loss, a lottery result signal corresponding to the special loss is set to be output.

These plurality of lottery result signals may be assigned a signal wiring (output terminal of the external output terminal 213) for each signal, or each lottery result signal may be output by sharing one signal wiring. It may be something. In the latter case, it is preferable to vary the signal form (output level, output period, output timing, etc. when in the on state) of the lottery result signal transmitted through one signal wiring for each winning lottery result. . In this case, the management control device on the gaming hall side that has received the lottery result signal can grasp the result of the lottery based on the difference in signal format.

Here, in this modification, when the result of the winning lottery is a special winning result, there are two cases in which a transition to the third time-saving gaming state occurs, and a case in which the transition does not occur (transition to the third time-saving gaming state). In the external signal setting process of step Sb3512, a lottery result signal corresponding to the special failure is output in any of these cases. Set it as follows.

If the transition to the third time-saving gaming state does not occur, it may be treated as a normal winning result and outputting a lottery result signal in a manner corresponding to the normal winning. From the perspective of ensuring consistency with the subsequent gaming state (a state in which the state does not shift to the third time-saving gaming state), a signal corresponding to a normal miss is output rather than a signal corresponding to a special miss as in this modification example. That seems more reasonable.

However, in a configuration that outputs a lottery result signal corresponding to a normal winning result, the game hall cannot grasp the actual number of times that a special winning result occurs in a game, and winnings for special winning results generally follow the designed probability. There is a concern that it will be difficult to identify whether the In particular, the number of special winning results that are notified to the gaming hall side is thinned out and becomes less than the actual number, so even if, for example, an act that fraudulently increases the probability of a special winning result is carried out, it will be detected. There is a risk that delays may occur.

In this regard, regardless of whether or not the transition to the third time-saving gaming state occurs, if the result of the winning lottery is a special winning result, by outputting an external signal for special winning, the special winning result can be changed. The game hall side can appropriately grasp the actual number of times the game has been played, and it becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process according to this modification will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 150. This process is activated by the effect control device 143 at a predetermined cycle (eg, 2 msec cycle), and is executed in place of the effect setting process of FIG. 126. In FIG. 150, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 126, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb2301, it is determined whether an ending command from the main controller 162 has been received. If the ending command has been received, in step Sb2302, a first transition performance setting process is executed to set a transition performance corresponding to the transition to the high-precision gaming state or the first time-saving gaming state.

After executing step Sb2302 or if a negative determination is made in step Sb2301 (if no ending command has been received), it is determined in step Sb2305 whether any gaming state end command has been received. If the game state end command has been received, in step Sb2306, end performance setting is performed to set a end performance corresponding to the end of the high-precision game state, the first time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state. Execute processing.

After executing step Sb2306 or if a negative determination is made in step Sb2305 (if no gaming state end command has been received), in step Sb3601, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Executes special figure fluctuation display processing for performing fluctuation display, etc. In step Sb2308, other processes are executed, and then the effect setting process is ended.

<Special figure fluctuation display processing>
The special figure variation display process in step Sb3601 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 151. In FIG. 151, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as the special figure variation display process of FIG. 132, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb2701, it is determined whether or not a game round is being executed. If the game round is not being executed, the process advances to step Sb2702, and it is determined whether a fluctuation start command from the main controller 162 has been received.

If a fluctuation start command has been received, the process advances to step Sb3701 and executes fluctuation start processing for starting the performance for the game round. Here, the fluctuation start processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 152.

First, in step Sb3801, it is determined whether the current special figure game round is the last game round in the first time-saving game state. If it is the last game round, the process proceeds to step Sb3802, and settings are made so that chance notification will be performed in the current special figure game round. In the chance notification, a chance notification image 478 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, as shown in FIG. 153(a). In the chance notification image 478, for example, above the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G, a telop image with text such as "Chance if you reach" is displayed. The chance notification starts at the final game round in the first time-saving game state, and continues until the special figure game round of the reserved second special figure after the first time-saving game state ends.

Note that the chance notification may be such that a window with the above-mentioned characters displayed is displayed, or a predetermined light emitting unit corresponding to the chance notification is made to emit light. Further, the notification is not necessarily limited to visual notification, but may be audio guidance using the speaker unit 29.

After executing step Sb3802 or if a negative determination is made in step Sb3801 (if it is not the last game in the first time-saving game state), in step Sb3803, the fluctuation start command from the main controller 162 is analyzed, and the current special Understand the fluctuation patterns related to game times. In step Sb3804, it is determined whether the grasped variation pattern is either variation pattern Z2 or variation pattern Z4. The fluctuation pattern Z2 is selected when a special winning result is obtained in the last game in the first time-saving gaming state (FIG. 147(b)), and the fluctuation pattern Z4 is selected when the special result in the normal gaming state of the reserved portion is selected. This is selected when a special winning result is obtained in the figure game round (FIG. 147(c)).

If the grasped fluctuation pattern is either fluctuation pattern Z2 or fluctuation pattern Z4, proceed to step Sb3805, and set so that a special out-of-reach performance is executed as a game repeat performance in the current special figure game round. . Here, the special reach effect will be explained with reference to FIGS. 153(b) to 153(d).

In the special reach out effect, first, as shown in FIG. 153(b), the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed in a reach combination on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 on the display screen G, and the reach is reached. Perform display. Thereafter, the middle symbol row Z2 (the symbol row of the final stop row) is switched from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, but at that time, as shown in FIG. A special symbol 479 with characters such as "LUCKY" attached thereto is displayed in a low-speed variable manner. FIG. 153(c) shows an example in which a special symbol 479 is placed at the position of the "4" symbol which is the next symbol for the "3" symbol which is the jackpot combination.

Then, as shown in FIG. 153(d), the special symbol 479, which is being displayed in slow fluctuations, is stopped and displayed on the reach line to notify the special off result. That is, in this modification, after a reach line is formed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol combination in which the special symbol 479 of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed on the reach line is a special miss result. It has a corresponding pattern combination.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 152), if a negative determination is made in step Sb3804 (if it is neither variation pattern Z2 nor variation pattern Z4), in step Sb3806, the grasped variation pattern is a variation pattern. It is determined whether the pattern is Z1, variation pattern Z3, or variation pattern Z5. The fluctuation pattern Z1 is selected when a special winning result is obtained in the 1st to 99th special symbol game times in the first time-saving game state (FIG. 147(a)), and the fluctuation pattern Z3 is This is selected when the final game in the 1-hour saving game state results in a normal loss (FIG. 147(b)). Further, the variation pattern Z5 is selected when the special figure game round in the normal game state of the reserved portion results in a normal out-of-order result (FIG. 147(d)).

If the grasped variation pattern is one of variation pattern Z1, variation pattern Z3, or variation pattern Z5, in step Sb3807, a complete out-of-order production is executed as a game repeat production in the current special figure game round. Set to . Here, not only when the grasped fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Z3 or fluctuation pattern Z5, but also when it is fluctuation pattern Z1, that is, when the lottery result in the special drawing game is a special winning result. The execution of a complete winning performance is set, but this is made in response to the fact that even if a special winning result occurs during the first time-saving game state, it will be invalidated.

That is, in the 1st to 99th special symbol game rounds in the first time saving game state, even if the result of the winning lottery is a special winning result, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 displayed on the symbol display device 75 is stopped and displayed in a completely incorrect combination. As a result, the player is notified that the result is simply a winning result, and it is made impossible or difficult to identify that the result of the special drawing lottery has become a special winning result.

At this time, regarding the stop result on the special figure display section 43, the stop result corresponding to the special off result is displayed (FIG. 146). Since the symbol display device 75 reports a result that is different from the actual result of the lottery, it is assumed that even if a fraud is committed, it will be difficult for the employees of the game hall to understand it. By configuring the display section 43 to not reflect the invalidation, it becomes possible to grasp the actual lottery results by visually checking the special drawing display section 43, making it easier to discover fraudulent activities. .

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3806 (if the variation pattern is none of the variation pattern Z1, Z3, or Z5), the process proceeds to step Sb3808, and a game replay effect corresponding to the variation pattern grasped in step Sb3803 is executed. Set it as follows. For example, when the grasped variation pattern is variation pattern 23A (FIG. 113(c)), the SPSP reach effect is set to be executed.

After executing step Sb3805, step Sb3807, or step Sb3808, in step Sb3809, a stop result command and a pattern command are transmitted as output targets to the display control device 350. The stop result command is a command that specifies the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the pattern command is a performance pattern command that specifies the game repeat performance to be executed. In accordance with the received command, the display control device 350 controls the symbol display device so that the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped according to the specified stop result, and the game replay effect is performed according to the specified effect pattern. 75. After executing step Sb3809, the variation start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 151), after executing the variation start process in step Sb3701, the process for updating the remaining number of times display is executed in step Sb2704. In the process for updating the remaining number of times display, the remaining number of times such as the first time saving game state is updated, and the display contents of the remaining number of times image 472 are updated.

<About the flow to the third time-saving game state>
The flow of transition to the third time-saving game state in this modification will be explained with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155. Here, it is assumed that after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result has been performed, the state has shifted to the first time-saving game state in which the number of remaining times is 100.

At timing t1, for example, in the third special figure game after shifting to the first time-saving game state, if the winning lottery result becomes a normal winning result, the third support flag remains in the off state. Therefore, the transition to the third time-saving game state does not occur (FIG. 154(d)). As shown in FIG. 155, in that special symbol game round, a complete winning effect is executed on the symbol display device 75, and the player is notified of the normal winning result.

At timing t2, for example, in the 10th special figure game after shifting to the first time-saving game state, if the winning/fail lottery result becomes a special winning result, the first time-saving game state is in progress. Based on this, the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted, and the special winning result is invalidated (timing t3). As shown in FIG. 155, in the special symbol game round, a completely missed effect is executed on the symbol display device 75. The complete winning performance in this case is similar to the case where the result of the winning lottery is a normal winning result, and the performance time (variable display time) is also the same. Therefore, as long as the player is looking at the symbol display device 75, it is difficult to distinguish between a normal winning result and a special winning result, making it difficult for the player to understand that a special winning result has occurred.

In addition, in this modification, the probability of winning a special winning result is set to be relatively low (1/10), so the special winning result may be won multiple times in the process of playing the first time-saving gaming state. This is assumed (timing t4). Also in this case, the winning of the special winning result is not reflected in the switching of the gaming state, and the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is invalidated (timing t5). In addition, the symbol display device 75 executes a complete winning performance, and a game replay performance is performed in such a way that the special winning result is not clearly indicated.

At timing t6, if the win/fail lottery result becomes a special lose result in the final game round (100th special figure game round) in the first time-saving game state, the third support flag is turned on, and the third support flag is turned on. 3. Transition to time saving gaming state (timing t7). That is, in this modification, the transition to the third time-saving game state is determined after the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated (FIGS. 145 and 148), and the final game time in the first time-saving game state is This is because after the first time-saving game state ends by updating the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state, a transition to the third time-saving game state is determined based on the winning of the special winning result.

In other words, in this modified example, even if you win a special winning result in a special figure game round other than the last game round (1st to 99th special figure game round) in the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state remains in effect. For some reason, the transition to the third time-saving game state is not performed, but if you win a special winning result in the final game round, the winning of the special winning result will be reflected in the switching of the gaming state, and the third time-saving game will start. The configuration is such that a transition to the state occurs. For this reason, the final game round is a game round that is more advantageous for the player than other special symbol game times in the first time-saving game state, and is, so to speak, a game round in a chance state.

When shifting to the third time-saving gaming state as described above, the remaining number of times in the state set to the low probability mode and high-frequency support mode increases by the remaining number of times in the third time-saving gaming state. Specifically, when the type of special error result becomes special error result A, the remaining number of times increases by 900, and when the type of special error result becomes special error result B, the remaining number of times increases by 100 (FIG. 144).

Here, in this modification, the end of the first time-saving game state due to the number of executed game times reaching the upper limit number and the transition to the third time-saving game state based on the winning of the special winning result are the same game. It takes place during the session. That is, since it is possible to shift to the third time-saving game state without letting the player experience the end of the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times can be added (on top of) at the end of the first time-saving game state. It can be a state that has occurred. The transition to the third time-saving game state is performed at the start timing of the confirmation display in the final game round (strictly speaking, just before the start of the confirmation display).

In the above case, in that special figure game round, as shown in FIG. 155, a special out-of-reach effect is executed on the symbol display device 75. As a result, the player is notified of the special winning result. Further, after the execution of the special out-of-reach performance, an additional performance (FIG. 130(c)) is performed such that the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state is added. This additional effect may be performed using part or all of the fixed display time of the last game, or the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part of the fixed display time) may be used. (or all)), or may be performed in the next special figure game round.

It should be noted that if the win/fail lottery result in the final game round is a normal loss result, the first time-saving game state ends, but the transition to the third time-saving game state does not occur. That is, the state of the low probability mode and high frequency support mode ends and shifts to the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 155, in the special symbol game round, a completely missed effect is executed on the symbol display device 75.

By the way, in this modified example, since it has a second special symbol holding function that can store up to four pieces of holding information, the final game in the first time-saving game state will normally result in a miss, resulting in a low When the state of probability mode and high frequency support mode ends, if there is reservation information of the second special symbol, it is possible to run the game of the second special symbol a number of times corresponding to the number of reservations. can. Since these game rounds are played under the normal game state, if a special winning result occurs, a transition to the third time-saving game state occurs in the same way as the final game time in the first time-saving game state.

In other words, not only the final game round in the first time-saving game state but also the reserved game round after the end of the first time-saving game state become a chance game time. When a special winning result is obtained in the reserved special figure game round, as shown in FIG. 155, a special winning reach effect is executed on the symbol display device 75, and the special winning result is notified. In addition, when a normal winning result is obtained in the reserved special figure game round, a complete winning effect is executed on the symbol display device 75.

<About the flow of the regular game game in the final game game>
The flow of the regular game game in the final game time in the first time saving game state will be explained with reference to FIG. 156. Here, it is assumed that the win/fail lottery result in the final game round is a normal win/fail lottery result. First, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 156(a) when the regular game game is being displayed in a variable manner at the start timing of the final game game confirmation display.

After the fluctuating display of the regular game game time starts at timing t1, before the fluctuating display time has elapsed, at timing t2, when the final game time of the first time-saving game state starts the fixed display, the above-mentioned regular game game time starts. The variable display of game times is forcibly terminated (FIGS. 156(a1), (a4), FIG. 149). The normal drawing game game that was subject to this forced termination was a game in which a lottery was held under the first time-saving game state, and the support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode (FIG. 103(b)) was applied. It is something that If the support lottery result of this general game game is a support winning result, it is changed to a losing result in accordance with the above-mentioned forced termination (FIG. 149).

When the variable display of the normal figure game is forcibly terminated at timing t2, the losing result is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display section 44 for a predetermined fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) (timing t3). ). Also, at timing t2, the confirmation display of the final game round (special figure game round) is also started, but the confirmation display time in this case is a specific confirmation display time (for example, 6 seconds) which is longer than the normal confirmation display time (for example, 0.5 seconds). ) is set (Fig. 149).

At this time, the confirmed display time of the last game round is longer than the fixed display time of the forcedly terminated normal figure game round. In addition, in the forcedly ended Fuzu game round, the result of the lottery is considered as a loss, so the accessory opening/closing game using the Fuden accessory 63a is not performed after that, and the forced ending Fuzu game time is confirmed. Immediately after the display ends, the next regular game game starts. Therefore, the next common figure game round is started before the timing t4 at which the confirmed display time of the last game round has elapsed (timing t3).

Since the first time-saving game state ends at the start timing of the confirmation display of the final game round, the next common figure game round is performed under the normal game state. Therefore, in this general game game, a win/fail lottery is performed using the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode (FIG. 103(a)), and the result is likely to be a loss, and the fluctuating display time is also different from that for the low-frequency support mode. A longer variable display time (for example, 30 seconds) is set.

Therefore, not only at timing t4 when the next special figure game round (game round of the second reserved special figure) starts, but also for a while after that, the common electric utility object 63a is maintained in a closed state, It becomes impossible or difficult to win a prize through the second operating port 63. Thereby, even if a game round of the reserved second special figure is played and there is a vacant space in the reserved number of the second special figure, it is possible to suppress replenishment of new reserved information.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156(b), we will explain the case where the opening/closing game is being executed at the start timing of the final display in the final game (when the fluctuating display is not being displayed in the regular game game). .

After the utility object opening/closing game using the general electric utility object 63a is started, before the execution period (for example, 4.2 seconds) has elapsed, the final game time of the first time-saving game state is reached and the final display start timing is reached. (timing t11). At this time, since the normal figure game is not being displayed in a variable manner, forced termination is not executed, and the continuation of the accessory opening/closing game is continued thereafter.

As described above, the confirmation display of the final game round starting from timing t11 is performed for a specific confirmation display time (for example, 6 seconds) that is longer than the normal confirmation display time. Since this specific confirmed display time is longer than the execution period of the accessory opening/closing game, the accessory opening/closing game ends before the timing t13 at which the final game display ends (timing t12). ). In other words, even if a role opening/closing game is performed at the start timing of the final game display, it will be absorbed during the final game display time, and the next special figure game cycle (second special figure of the reserved part) will be absorbed during the final game display time. At timing t13 when the game (game round) is started, the accessory opening/closing game has ended.

When the above-mentioned accessory opening/closing game ends at timing t12, the next common figure game round is started, but this common figure game round is played under the normal game state. For this reason, the result is likely to be incorrect, and the variable display time is set to a longer variable display time (for example, 30 seconds) for the low-frequency support mode.

Therefore, as in the case of FIG. 156(a), not only the timing t13 when the next special figure game round (the second special figure game round of the reserved part) starts, but also for a while after that, the power supply is The accessory 63a is maintained in a closed state, making it impossible or difficult to enter the second operating port 63. Thereby, even if a game round of the reserved second special figure is played and there is a vacant space in the reserved number of the second special figure, it is possible to suppress replenishment of new reserved information.

It should be noted that it is possible that the regular game game is being displayed as a confirmation at the start timing of the confirmation display in the final game session. At that time, even if the support lottery result of the general figure game is the support winning result and the accessory opening/closing game is executed after that, the confirmed display time of the ordinary figure game and the execution period of the accessory opening/closing game are different. Because the specific confirmed display time of the final game round is longer than the total period (for example, 4.7 sec), the time limit is set before the next special figure game round (game round of the second special figure on hold) starts. The accessory opening/closing game can be ended.

As described above, in this modification, the replenishment of pending information after the final game round is suppressed, so the number of game rounds that can be executed after the first time-saving game state (second special figure game round) can be limited to the number of times (4 times) corresponding to the upper limit number of reservations. As already explained, the game round of the second special symbol on hold is advantageous in that, like the final game round of the first time-saving game state, if a special winning result is won, the game will shift to the third time-saving game state. With the above-described configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being too advantageous when it comes to game rounds.

Furthermore, for example, if replenishment of pending information is allowed after the end of the first time-saving gaming state, it is easy to accurately predict how many pieces of pending information will be replenished during the actual game at the design stage of the pachinko machine. It is assumed that this is not the case. As a result, there is a concern that the effort involved in probability design will increase, leading to an increase in the burden of design work. However, according to this modification, the game round (game of the second special Since the number of times) can be fixed, there is also the advantage that the burden during design can be reduced.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

By becoming a special winning result in the last game of the first time-saving game state, the transition to the third time-saving game state occurs after the end of the first time-saving game state, while in other special symbol game times in the first time-saving game state. The configuration is such that even if there is a special winning result, the transition to the third time-saving game state does not occur.

According to this configuration, by winning a special winning result in the last game of the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state is transferred to the third time-saving game state, and the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is increased. The state can be made equivalent to Therefore, the period in which the time-saving gaming state can be played is extended, and the chance of winning a jackpot result in the time-saving gaming state can be increased. As a result, it is possible to add a game in which the aim is not only to win a jackpot result in the first time-saving game state, but also to win a special winning result in the final game round, expanding the range of ways to enjoy it and increasing interest. It becomes possible to improve.

In addition, even if there is a special winning result in another special symbol game in the first time-saving game state, the transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, so in order to realize the transition to the third time-saving game state, Not only is it necessary to achieve a special outlier result, but also the timing is required. This makes it possible to appropriately increase the level of difficulty of transitioning to the third time-saving game state, and suitably bring out the player's joy and sense of accomplishment when the state is achieved. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the superiority of the final game round to the first time-saving game state as a chance game round, and it is also possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game round.

The configuration is such that when a special winning result is obtained in the final game round of the first time-saving game state, the end of the first time-saving game state and the transition to the third time-saving game state are performed in the final game round.

According to this configuration, it is possible to switch from the first time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state without intervening a special figure game time in the normal game state. This makes it possible to create a state similar to that in which the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state is added.

In this case, since the symbol display device 75 executes the additional effect, it is possible for the player to easily sense that the remaining number of times has been added.

The configuration is such that the transition to the third time-saving game state is performed without passing through the opening/closing execution mode.

According to the above configuration, since winning the jackpot result is not required for the transition to the third time-saving gaming state, the probability of the transition being performed can be set independently of the jackpot winning probability. This makes it possible to freely set the transition probability to the third time-saving gaming state without depending on the jackpot winning probability. Moreover, by shifting to the third time-saving game state without going through the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to suppress the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state from being largely separated. This makes it easier for the players to feel a sense of unity regarding the time-saving gaming state of both players, making it easier to give the impression that the time-saving gaming state has been extended.

At this time, since the winning probability of the special winning result is made higher than the jackpot winning probability, it is possible to give the player the impression that it is easy to shift to the third time-saving gaming state. This makes it easier for players to feel a sense of anticipation even when they are approaching the final game round of the first time-saving game state, and provides an element of enjoying the game as a way out just before the first time-saving game state ends. It becomes possible to expand.

The condition for transition to the third time-saving game state is that the result of the special drawing lottery becomes a special winning result.

According to this configuration, both a game where the result of the special drawing lottery results in a jackpot result and a game where the result is a special winning result and whether or not the conditions for transition to the third time-saving game state are satisfied. can be executed in one special figure game. As a result, the final game time in which transition to the third time-saving game state is allowed functions as a chance game time (a game time more advantageous than other special symbol game times) in which both of these games can be played. This makes it possible to suitably increase expectations and attention for the game round.

In the case of a special winning result, an external signal is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 to notify the result, and in the first time-saving game state, a special winning result is generated in a special symbol game game other than the last game time. A configuration that outputs the above-mentioned external signal for notifying that a special winning result has been obtained even when the result is a special winning result in a situation where transition to the third time saving gaming state is restricted. And so.

In this configuration, since an external signal corresponding to the special off result is output, it becomes possible for the management control device of the gaming hall to grasp that the trigger for transition to the third time-saving gaming state has been established. In this case, in a situation where transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted, it is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the external signal is not outputted even if the result of the special symbol winning/failing lottery turns out to be a special winning result. Considering that the transition to the third time-saving gaming state does not occur after that, it is more logical to not output an external signal than to output it.

However, with such a configuration, it becomes impossible for the game hall to grasp the actual number of times that a special winning result occurs in a game, and even if, for example, an act is carried out that fraudulently increases the winning probability of a special winning result, There is a risk that there will be a delay in the discovery. In this regard, in this configuration, the above-mentioned external signal is intentionally output even when the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted, so that the gaming hall side can appropriately grasp the actual number of times that a special error result has occurred. be able to. This makes it easier to discover when the winning probability of a special outlier result is fraudulently increased, and it becomes possible to enhance the fraud deterrent effect.

The output mode of the lottery result signal for notifying the jackpot result or the normal winning result is different, and an external signal corresponding to the special winning result is output.

According to this configuration, it is possible to output an external signal corresponding to a special winning result by using existing terminals and existing wiring for notifying jackpot results, etc., so compared to the case where a dedicated signal is output, the pachinko machine The number of output terminals in 10 can be kept small. Additionally, if the management control device on the gaming hall side is already equipped with an input terminal, etc. for receiving notifications about jackpot results, etc., it can be used to receive external signals corresponding to special winning results. Can be done. Even if it becomes necessary to add a function to identify (recognize) differences in the output format of lottery result signals, this can be done with only small changes to the control program, making it possible to keep implementation costs low. Become.

In addition, in outputting the lottery result signal corresponding to the special loss, a common lottery result signal may be output in the case where the transition to the third time-saving gaming state occurs and the case where the transition does not occur, or Separate lottery result signals may be output for different cases. In the case of the latter configuration, the management control device on the gaming hall side will be able to detect not only the result of a special error, but also whether or not the state should shift to the third time-saving gaming state. It can be determined from the signal. This makes it possible to immediately determine that there is no abnormality in the pachinko machine 10 when the game does not shift to the third time-saving game state despite the special winning result.

When outputting separate lottery result signals for cases in which a transition to the third time-saving gaming state occurs and cases in which the transition does not occur, a signal is output when a transition occurs and a signal is output when the transition does not occur. Separate signal wiring (output terminal of external output terminal 213) may be assigned to each, or one signal wiring may be shared. When sharing signal wiring, the signal state of the lottery result signal corresponding to special failure (output level, output period, output timing, etc. when in the on state) depending on whether a transition occurs or not. It is better to make them different.

In addition, in order to reduce the number of required signal wiring (output terminal of external output terminal 213), a configuration is adopted in which an external signal corresponding to a special winning result is output using a game round execution signal output for each game round. Good too. That is, the signal format of the game round execution signal may be configured to vary depending on the result of the lottery.

Specifically, if the result of the winning/failure lottery is a jackpot result, a game round execution signal is output in a manner corresponding to the jackpot, and if the result is a normal loss, a game round execution signal is output in a manner corresponding to the normal loss. A signal is output, and if the result is a special loss, a game round execution signal in a mode corresponding to the special loss is output. In this case, a dedicated signal as a lottery result signal is not output.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the configuration by omitting signal terminals and signal wiring for lottery result signals, and also avoid adding input terminals in the management control device on the gaming hall side. be able to. In addition, since the lottery result signal can be output at the same time as the game execution signal, it is possible to reduce the number of signal outputs from the pachinko machine, and the processing required for signal exchange between the pachinko machine and the management control device on the gaming hall side. It becomes possible to reduce the load.

In the above case, the game round execution signal in the same manner may be output in the case of a jackpot result and the case of a normal loss result. This is because even in such a case, the management control device on the gaming hall side can grasp that it is a jackpot result by outputting an external signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode after the fact.

As a configuration in which the signal form of the game round execution signal is made different for each win/fail lottery, it is possible to make the output level, output period, output timing, etc. different when in the on state. Among them, from the viewpoint of ease of implementation and introduction, it is preferable to use a device that has different output periods in the on state. For example, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot, a game execution signal with an on period of 0.3 seconds is output, and if the result is a loss, a game execution signal with an on period of 0.5 seconds (or 0.3 seconds) is output. A game run execution signal is output, and if the result is a special failure, a game run execution signal with an on period of 0.8 seconds is output.

When outputting the game run execution signal for special losing, similarly to the above, the game run execution signal in the same manner is output in the case where the transition to the third time-saving gaming state occurs and the case where the transition does not occur. Alternatively, a different type of game execution signal may be output.

In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a function of outputting an external signal (game round start signal) for notifying the start of the game round in each game round, the game round start signal may be output instead of or in addition to the game round execution signal. It may also be configured to output an external signal corresponding to the special deviation result using the rotation start signal. In other words, the signal format of the game round start signal may be configured to vary depending on the result of the lottery.

In addition, if there is an external signal that is output externally in each game round in addition to the game round execution signal and the game round start signal, it can also be configured to use that signal to output an external signal corresponding to a special winning result. good.

<Modification 4>
In the above modification 3, if a special winning result occurs during the first time-saving game state, the transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, but in this modification, the transition is allowed. ing. The configuration of this modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 157 to 168. In these figures, the same components as those in the second embodiment and each modification are designated by the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

<Special figure game round validity table>
A win/fail table for the first special figure (for low probability mode), a win/fail table for the second special figure (for low probability mode), and a win/fail table for the first special figure and the second special figure according to this modification. (for high probability mode) will be explained with reference to FIG. 157. Each of these validity tables is stored in the validity table storage area 313a of the ROM 313.

The win/fail table for the first special symbol (for low probability mode) is referred to when performing a win/fail lottery based on winnings to the first operating port 62 in a situation where the lottery mode is the low probability mode. In this win/fail table for the first special symbol (for low probability mode), as shown in FIG. A total of 10 prizes are set, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is set to 1/300. In addition, a total of 10 random numbers from "10" to "19" are set as the value of the random number that results in a special failure result, and the probability of a special failure result in the low probability mode is set to 1/300. Other random values are assigned to normal results, and the probability of a normal result in low probability mode is set to 2980/3000.

The win/fail table for the second special symbol (for low probability mode) is referred to when performing a win/fail lottery based on winnings to the second operating port 63 in a situation where the lottery mode is the low probability mode. In this second special figure win/fail table (for low probability mode), as shown in FIG. 157(b), the value of the random number that will be a jackpot (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) is "0" to "9". A total of 10 prizes are set, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is set to 1/300. Furthermore, a total of 30 random numbers from "10" to "39" are set as the values of the random numbers that result in special deviations. That is, the probability of a special winning result in the low probability mode is set to 1/100, which is set to a different probability from that of the first special symbol. Other random values are assigned to normal results, and the probability of a normal result in low probability mode is set to 2960/3000.

The win/fail table for the first special figure and the second special figure (for high probability mode) is for the win/fail lottery based on winnings to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 in the situation where the lottery mode is the high probability mode. This is to be referred to when carrying out such activities. In this win/fail table (for high probability mode) for the first special figure and the second special figure, as shown in Fig. 157(c), there are a total of 50 random numbers from "0" to "49" that will be a jackpot. is set, and the jackpot winning probability in the high probability mode is set to 1/60. In addition, in the win/fail table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special drawings, special winning results are not set as lottery results, and all random values other than the random numbers for jackpots are assigned to normal winning results. It is being Normally, the probability of a negative result is set to 59/60.

<Special figure game type table>
The type table of the special figure game round according to this modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 158.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special pattern (FIG. 158(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special pattern (FIG. 158(b)) are set.

As shown in FIG. 158(a), in the jackpot type table for the first special figure, 4R probability variable jackpot result and 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. In each of these jackpot results, the number of round games to be executed is four.

The 4R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to a high probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high certainty gaming state continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times). When the first upper limit number of times is reached, the high probability gaming state ends and the mode shifts to the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode).

The 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to the first time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined second upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times). When the second upper limit number of times is reached, the first time-saving game state ends and the game shifts to the normal game state.

In the jackpot type table for the first special figure, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to 4R probability variable jackpot results, and "65" to "99" correspond to 4R normal jackpot results. That is, the probability of being allocated to the 4R probability variable jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being allocated to the 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in FIG. 158(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, 10R probability variable jackpot result and 10R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. In each of these jackpot results, the number of round games to be executed is 10.

The 10R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to a high probability gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high certainty gaming state continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined third upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times). Further, the 10R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to the first time-saving gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times).

In the jackpot type table for the second special figure, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to 10R probability variable jackpot results, and "65" to "99" correspond to 10R normal jackpot results. That is, the probability of being allocated to a 10R probability variable jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being allocated to a 10R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

Note that in this modification, a type table for special deviation is not set. That is, in both the first special figure and the second special figure, there is only one type of special off result. However, if there is a special winning result in the first special drawing's winning/failure drawing, or if there is a special winning result in the second special drawing's winning/mistaking drawing, the third drawing will be triggered by the winning of the special winning result. The modes of time-saving gaming states (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) are configured to be different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 158(c), if the first special drawing draws a special winning result, the game shifts to the third time-saving gaming state A, and the second special drawing draws a winning result. If the special winning result is obtained, the game shifts to the third time-saving game state B. The third time-saving game state A is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game after shifting to the third time-saving game state A reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times). The third time-saving game state B continues until the number of executions of the special figure game after shifting to the third time-saving game state B reaches the sixth upper limit number of times (for example, 10 times), which is smaller than the fifth upper limit number of times. . Note that, since the special failure result is one of the failure results, the opening/closing execution mode is not executed. That is, in the case of a special winning result, the game shifts to the third time-saving game states A and B without going through the opening/closing execution mode.

<Processing for transition to third time-saving gaming state>
The third time-saving game state transition process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 159. This process is executed in step Sb3202 of the special figure game time control process (FIG. 145) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the third time-saving game state transition process in FIG. 148. . In FIG. 159, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 148, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified. Note that the third time-saving game state transition process is executed after the high-frequency support mode update/end process of step Sb511.

First, in step Sb3401, it is determined whether a special failure flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the special winning flag is set, that is, if the result of the current special drawing lottery is a special winning result, the process advances to step Sb3402, and it is determined whether the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Determine whether

If the high probability flag is not set, it is determined in step Sb4101 whether the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The third support flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the game is in the third time-saving gaming state. If the third support flag is not set, that is, if it is not in the third time-saving game state, it is determined in step Sb4102 whether or not the first support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. The first support flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the game is in the first time-saving gaming state.

If the first support flag is set, that is, if it is the first time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step Sb4103, and the first support flag set in the various flag storage areas 314e is cleared. As a result, the first time-saving game state ends.

After executing step Sb4103 or if a negative determination is made in step Sb4102 (the first support flag is not set and the first time saving game state is not in effect), in step Sb4104, the third support is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. Set flag. Thereby, the game shifts to the third time-saving game state.

In step Sb4105, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the second special symbol flag is not set, that is, if the current special winning result is the special winning result of the first special symbol, the transition to the third time-saving gaming state A (Fig. 158(c)) is required. , In step Sb4106, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the support counter area SC of the RAM 314.

In step Sb4107, a process for ending a normal figure is executed. This process is similar to the process of steps Sb1411 to Sb1415 in the process for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state in FIG. 119. At that time, in the special figure game round, a specific confirmed display time that is longer than the normal confirmed display time is set as the confirmed display time (FIG. 149), but this specific confirmed display time is not the same as in the second embodiment above. , it may be set to a longer time (for example, 0.8 sec) than the fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the regular game game session to be forcibly terminated, or as in the above modification example 2, the regular display time for the regular game game session to be forcibly terminated may be , the variable display period (for example, 0.5 sec) of the regular game game corresponding to the second time-saving game state, and the determined display time of the regular game game corresponding to the second time-saving game state (for example, 0.5 seconds). The period may be longer (for example, 4 seconds) than the total period (for example, 1.5 seconds) including 5 seconds.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb4105 (if the second special figure flag is set), that is, if the current special winning result is a special winning result of the second special symbol, the third time-saving game state B (fig. 158(c)), in step Sb4108, a value corresponding to the sixth upper limit number of times (for example, 10 times) is set in the support counter area SC.

Here, in this modification, the third support flag is set even in a situation where the first support flag is set, and if a special result is lost in the middle of the first time-saving game state, it is possible to switch to the third time-saving game state. Migration is allowed. In addition, since the first time-saving game state is a game state in which it is possible or easy to win a prize to the second operation opening 63 corresponding to the second special symbol, the special winning result won during the first time-saving game state is the same as the first time-saving game state. This will result in a special miss for 2 special figures. Therefore, the third time-saving game state to which the game transitions in the middle of the first time-saving game state becomes the third time-saving game state B in which the remaining number of times is set to the sixth upper limit number of times (for example, 10 times).

In this way, it is possible to shift to the third time-saving game state B in a situation where the number of times remaining in the first time-saving game state remains, but in this case, in the above step Sb4108, the value of the support counter area SC is is rewritten to a value corresponding to the remaining number of times in the third time-saving game state B, regardless of the value at that time (remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state). Therefore, no matter which special figure game time in the first time-saving game state it shifts to the third time-saving game state, the remaining number of times thereafter will be changed to the sixth upper limit number of times.

Since the sixth upper limit number of times (for example, 10 times) is smaller than the first upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times), which is the remaining number of times set at the beginning of the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state Unless the remaining number of times is less than the sixth upper limit number of times and the game does not shift to the third time-saving game state B, the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state will decrease. In other words, the more the player continues to avoid winning the special winning result, the longer the time-saving gaming state can continue, and the game can proceed more advantageously. In other words, when comparing the case where a special winning result occurs in the first time saving game state and the case where a special winning result does not occur, the former is configured to be more disadvantageous to the player than the latter.

In addition, in this modification, since a special winning result is also set for the first special figure, a special winning result may occur during the normal gaming state. In this case, a transition is made to the third time-saving game state A, and the support mode is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode. In other words, when a special winning result occurs in the normal gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player than when there is no special winning result.

After execution of step Sb4107 or step Sb4108, in step Sb3408, the third time-saving game state start command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143, and then, the process for transitioning to the third time-saving game state is ended.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step Sb4101 (if the third support flag is set), the third time-saving game state transition process is ended without executing the processes of steps Sb4102 to Sb3408. That is, even if there is a special result in the third time-saving game state, the re-transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, and the remaining number of times at that point is maintained.

<Fluctuating display time table of special figure game times>
The special figure game time control process and the fluctuation start process performed by the main control device 162 are the same as in the case of the third modification (FIGS. 145 and 146), but as described above, in this modification, the first time-saving game It is configured such that the number of remaining times in the time-saving game state is reduced when a special out-of-play result is obtained in a state, and a variable display time table is set accordingly. The variable display time table according to this modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161.

The variable display time table in this modification includes at least a variable display time table for special wins in the first special figure (for normal gaming state), and a variable display time table for jackpots in the second special figure (for the first special figure). (for the time-saving gaming state), a variable display time table for normal winnings in the second special figure (for the first time-saving gaming state), and a variable display time table for special winnings in the second special drawing (for the first time-saving gaming state). ), a variable display time table for the jackpot in the second special drawing (for the third time-saving gaming state B), a variable displaying time table for the normal loss in the second special drawing (for the third time-saving gaming state B), A variable display time table (for the third time-saving game state B) for special winnings in the second special figure is set.

The variable display time table for special winnings in the 1st special drawing (for normal gaming state) is referenced when the result of the win/fail lottery in the 1st special drawing becomes a special winning result in the normal gaming state. It is something. This variable display time table is configured so that the variable pattern Y1 (for example, 15 seconds) is selected, as shown in FIG. 160(a). The variation pattern Y1 corresponds to a special out-of-reach performance. That is, when a fluctuation start command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern Y1 is transmitted to the performance control device 143, the special out-of-reach performance is executed in the symbol display device 75 as a game repeated performance. The special out-of-reach performance notifies the result of a special out-of-reach performance, and is similar to the special out-of-reach performance (FIGS. 153(b) to 153(d)) according to the third modification.

The variable display time table for the jackpot in the second special drawing (for the first time-saving gaming state) is referenced when the result of the winning/failure lottery in the second special drawing becomes a jackpot in the situation of the first time-saving gaming state. It is something that will be done. In this fluctuation display time table, as shown in FIG. 160(b), when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is "0" to "79", one of the fluctuation patterns 21A to 23A is selected, and the fluctuation The variation pattern Y2 (60 seconds, for example) is selected when the value of the type counter CS is between "80" and "99". The variation patterns 21A to 23A are similar to the variation patterns 21A to 23A in FIG. 113(c). The variation pattern Y2 corresponds to the specific performance A as the game repeated performance. Details of specific performance A will be described later.

The variable display time table (for the first time-saving game state) for normal winnings in the second special drawing shows the case where the result of the winning/failure lottery in the second special drawing becomes a normal winning result in the situation of the first time-saving gaming state. This is what is referred to. In this fluctuation display time table, as shown in FIG. 160(c), when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is "0" to "79", one of the fluctuation patterns 21H to 24H is selected, and the fluctuation The variation pattern Y3 (for example, 60 seconds) is selected when the value of the type counter CS is between "80" and "99". The fluctuation patterns 21H to 24H are similar to the fluctuation patterns 21H to 24H in FIG. 113(d). The variation pattern Y3 corresponds to the specific performance B as a game repeated performance. Details of specific performance B will be described later.

The variable display time table (for the first time-saving game state) for special winnings in the second special drawing shows the case where the result of the winning lottery in the second special drawing becomes a special winning result in the situation of the first time-saving gaming state. This is what is referred to. This variable display time table is configured so that the variable pattern Y4 (for example, 60 seconds) is selected, as shown in FIG. 160(d). The variation pattern Y4 corresponds to a specific performance C as a game repeated performance. Details of the specific performance C will be described later.

The variable display time table for the jackpot in the second special drawing (for the third time-saving game state B) is for when the result of the winning/failure lottery in the second special drawing becomes a jackpot in the situation of the third time-saving gaming state B. This is what is referred to. In this variable display time table, as shown in FIG. 161(a), the variable display time table is configured so that the variable pattern Y5 (for example, 60 sec) is selected as the variable pattern. The variation pattern Y5 corresponds to the specific performance D as a repeated game performance. Details of the specific performance D will be described later.

The variable display time table (for the 3rd time-saving game state B) for normal winnings in the 2nd special drawing shows that in the situation of the 3rd time-saving gaming state B, the result of the winning/failure lottery in the 2nd special drawing becomes a normal winning result. It will be referred to when In this fluctuation display time table, as shown in FIG. 161(b), the fluctuation pattern is displayed when the normal result is out in the 1st to 9th special symbol game after transitioning to the 3rd time-saving game state B. It is configured such that when Y6 (for example, 8 seconds or 4 seconds) is selected and the final game round (10th time) of the third time-saving game state B results in a normal losing result, the variable pattern Y7 (for example, 60 seconds) is selected. There is. The variation pattern Y6 corresponds to a completely missed performance, and the variation pattern Y7 corresponds to a specific performance E as a repeated game performance. Details of the specific performance E will be described later.

The variable display time table (for the 3rd time-saving game state B) for special winnings in the 2nd special drawing shows that in the situation of the 3rd time-saving gaming state B, the result of the winning or losing lottery in the 2nd special drawing becomes a special winning result. It will be referred to when In this variable display time table, as shown in FIG. 161(c), if a special winning result occurs in the 1st to 9th special symbol game after transitioning to the 3rd time-saving game state B, the variation pattern It is configured such that when Y8 (for example, 8 seconds or 4 seconds) is selected and the final game round (10th time) of the third time-saving game state B results in a normal losing result, the variable pattern Y9 (for example, 60 seconds) is selected. There is. The variation pattern Y8 corresponds to a completely missed performance, and the variation pattern Y9 corresponds to a specific performance E as a repeated game performance.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process according to this modification will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 162. This process is activated by the effect control device 143 at a predetermined cycle (eg, 2 msec cycle), and is executed in place of the effect setting process of FIG. 126. In FIG. 162, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 126, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb2301, it is determined whether an ending command from the main controller 162 has been received. If the ending command has been received, in step Sb4201, a first transition performance setting process is executed to set a transition performance corresponding to the transition to the high-precision gaming state or the first time-saving gaming state.

After executing step Sb4201 or if a negative determination is made in step Sb2301 (if no ending command has been received), in step Sb4202, it is determined whether or not the third time-saving gaming state start command from the main controller 162 has been received. Determine. If the third time-saving gaming state start command has been received, in step Sb4203, a third transition performance setting process is executed to set a transition performance corresponding to the transition to the third time-saving gaming state.

After executing step Sb4203 or if a negative determination is made in step Sb4202 (if the third time-saving gaming state command has not been received), it is determined in step Sb2305 whether or not any gaming state end command has been received. do. If the game state end command has been received, in step Sb2306, end performance setting is performed to set a end performance corresponding to the end of the high-precision game state, the first time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state. Execute processing.

After executing step Sb2306 or if a negative determination is made in step Sb2305 (if no gaming state end command has been received), in step Sb4204, symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Executes special figure fluctuation display processing for performing fluctuation display, etc. In step Sb2308, other processes are executed, and then the effect setting process is ended.

<First transition production setting process>
The first transition effect setting process in step Sb4201 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 163(a).

First, in step Sb4301, it is determined whether or not the situation is such that a shift to a high probability gaming state occurs. That is, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode to which the ending command has been transmitted corresponds to a jackpot result that causes a transition to a high probability gaming state. This determination is made based on the type command sent from the main controller 162.

If the situation is such that a shift to the high-certainty gaming state occurs, a production setting process for the high-certainty gaming state is executed in step Sb4302. In this process, for example, after a start effect for a high-probability gaming state similar to that shown in FIG. . The game replay effect for the high certainty gaming state has a different aspect from the game replay effect for the normal game state. For example, the background image displayed on the back side of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is The display color and display content are set to be different from those for the gaming state.

In step Sb4303, a value corresponding to the first upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the remaining number of times counter area of the RAM 344. In step Sb4304, settings are made to start displaying the remaining number of times image 472 (FIG. 128(a), etc.). In step Sb4305, a remaining count display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the first transition effect setting process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb4301 (if the situation is not such that a transition to the high probability gaming state occurs), the process proceeds to step Sb4306, and it is determined whether the situation is such that a transition to the first time-saving gaming state occurs. That is, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode to which the ending command was transmitted corresponds to a jackpot result that causes a transition to the first time-saving gaming state.

If the situation is such that a shift to the first time-saving game state occurs, in step Sb4307, a performance setting process for the first time-saving game state is executed. In this process, for example, after the start effect for the first time-saving game state similar to that shown in FIG. Set. The game replay effect for the first time-saving game state has a different aspect from the game replay effect for the normal game state and the high-precision game state. The displayed background image is set to a display color and display content different from those for the normal gaming state and the high-precision gaming state.

In addition, in the start performance and game repeat performance for the first time-saving game state according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 163(b), instead of the remaining number of times image 472, a chance time (first time-saving game state) is displayed. A status notification image 450 is displayed to notify that the device is inside. That is, in the case of the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times is hidden.

After execution of step Sb4307 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb4306 (if the situation is not such that transition to the first time saving game state occurs), the first transition performance setting process is ended.

<3rd transition production setting process>
The third transition effect setting process in step Sb4203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 164(a).

First, in step Sb4401, performance setting processing for the third time saving game state is executed. In this process, after the start performance for the third time-saving game state is executed, a setting is made such that a game repeat performance corresponding to being in the third time-saving game state is executed. The game replay for the third time-saving game state has a different aspect from the game replay for the normal game state, the high-precision game state, and the first time-saving game state.

In step Sb4402, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times of the third time-saving gaming state to be transferred is set in the remaining number of times counter area of the RAM 344. Specifically, if the transition is to the third time-saving game state A, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) is set, and if the transition is to the third time-saving game state B, the value corresponding to the fifth upper limit is set. Set a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times (for example, 10 times).

In step Sb4403, settings are made to start displaying the remaining number of times image 472 (FIG. 128(a), etc.). In addition, when transitioning to the third time-saving game state in the middle of the first time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 472. In other words, the state changes from a state where the remaining number of times is hidden to a state where the remaining number of times is made clear.

In step Sb4404, a remaining count display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the third transition effect setting process is ended.

<Special figure fluctuation display processing>
The special figure variation display process in step Sb4204 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 165. In FIG. 165, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as the special figure variation display process of FIG. 132, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb2701, it is determined whether or not a game round is being executed. If the game round is not being executed, the process advances to step Sb2702, and it is determined whether a fluctuation start command from the main controller 162 has been received.

If the fluctuation start command has been received, the process advances to step Sb4501, and a fluctuation start process is executed to start the game repeated performance on the symbol display device 75. Here, the fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 166(a).

First, in step Sb4601, the fluctuation start command from the main controller 162 is analyzed to understand the fluctuation pattern regarding the current special figure game. In step Sb4602, a setting is made so that a game repeat effect corresponding to the grasped variation pattern is executed. The correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the game replay will be explained with reference to FIG. 166(b).

When the grasped variation pattern is variation pattern Y1, a special out-of-reach effect is set to be executed. The variation pattern Y1 is set when a special winning result is obtained in the first special figure (when a special winning result is obtained during the normal gaming state). Further, the special reach-off performance is similar to the special reach-off performance according to the third modification (FIGS. 153(b) to (d)).

When the grasped variation pattern is variation pattern Y2, the specific performance A is set to be executed. The variation pattern Y2 is set in part when a jackpot result occurs during the first time-saving gaming state. Specific performance A is a performance that notifies the jackpot result, and for example, after the reach display is performed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, a predetermined display is performed to determine whether the warrior character can defeat the enemy character. It is configured so that a battle performance is performed (FIG. 167(a)). In the specific performance A, an ending in which the warrior character wins in the battle performance is displayed, and then symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a jackpot combination.

When the grasped variation pattern is variation pattern Y3, the specific performance B is set to be executed. The variation pattern Y3 is set in part when the result is a normal loss during the first time saving game state. Specific performance B is a performance that notifies a missed result, and is a performance related to specific performance A. In specific effect B, after the reach display, the above battle effect results in a tie between the warrior character and the enemy character (FIG. 167(b)), and then symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in combinations that are out of reach. Ru.

When the grasped variation pattern is variation pattern Y4, the specific performance C is set to be executed. The variation pattern Y4 is set when a special winning result occurs during the first time saving gaming state. Specific performance C is a performance that notifies the transition to the third time-saving gaming state, and is related to specific performances A and B. In the specific performance C, an ending in which the warrior character is defeated in the battle performance after the reach-to-reach display is displayed (FIG. 167(c)), and then symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in combinations that are out of the reach.

In the case of the grasped variation pattern Y5, the specific effect D is set to be executed. The variation pattern Y5 is set when a jackpot result occurs during the third time-saving gaming state. The specific performance D is a performance that notifies the jackpot result. For example, after the reach display is performed using the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the warrior character challenges the defeated enemy character to a match again in the specific performance C. It is configured so that a revenge battle effect is performed (FIG. 167(d)). In the specific performance D, an ending in which the warrior character wins in the revenge battle performance is displayed, and then symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a jackpot combination.

When the grasped variation pattern is variation pattern Y7 or variation pattern Y9, the specific effect E is set to be executed. The fluctuation pattern Y7 is set when the final game round (10th special figure game round) of the third time-saving game state results in a normal winning result, and the fluctuation pattern Y9 is set when the final game round (the 10th special figure game round) of the third time-saving game state is achieved. This is set when a special winning result occurs in the final game round. The specific performance E is a performance that notifies the winning result and the end of the third time-saving game state, and is related to the specific performance D. In the specific performance E, an ending in which the warrior character is defeated in the revenge battle performance after the reach-for-reach display is displayed (FIG. 167(d)), and then symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a combination that is out of the reach.

When the grasped variation pattern is variation pattern Y6 or variation pattern Y8, a setting is made so that a complete out-of-line effect is executed. Fluctuation pattern Y6 is set when the normal result is out in the game rounds other than the final game round (1st to 9th special figure game rounds) in the third time-saving game state, and fluctuation pattern Y8 is , is set when a special winning result is obtained in a game round other than the final game round in the third time-saving game state.

Returning to the explanation of the variation start processing (FIG. 166(a)), after executing step Sb4602, the stop result command and pattern command are transmitted to the display control device 350 in step Sb4603. The pattern command is a production pattern command that specifies a game repeat production to be executed. In accordance with the received command, the display control device 350 controls the symbol display device so that the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped according to the specified stop result, and the game replay effect is performed according to the specified effect pattern. 75. After executing step Sb4603, the variation start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure fluctuation display process (FIG. 165), after executing the fluctuation start process in step Sb4501, in step Sb4502, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the third time saving gaming state. Determine whether or not. If the game is in the high certainty gaming state or the third time saving gaming state, a process for updating the remaining number of times display is executed in step Sb2704. In the process for updating the remaining number of times display, the remaining number of times such as the first time saving game state is updated, and the display contents of the remaining number of times image 472 are updated. After execution of step Sb2704 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb4502 (not in the high certainty gaming state or the third time saving gaming state), the special symbol fluctuation display process is ended.

<About the flow of the gaming state>
The flow of the gaming state in this modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 168. First, the flow from the normal gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state will be explained with reference to FIG. 168(a).

In the normal game state, the game is a left-handed game, and the game is mainly played by winning or losing the first special symbol triggered by a winning at the first operating port 62. If the win/fail lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a special lose result in the normal game state, the game shifts to the third time-saving game state A, and the support mode is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, it becomes possible or easy to enter a prize into the second operation port 63, and the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls he has too much, and can also receive a type lottery in which jackpot types are given preferential treatment. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, a special winning result results in a transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

The upper limit number of times (fifth upper limit number of times) of the third time-saving game state A is set to 100 times. Here, in this modification, the transition to the third time-saving game state is determined after the update of the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is completed, so after switching to the third time-saving game state, the next After reaching the special figure game time, the remaining number of times can be subtracted. Therefore, after shifting to the third time-saving game state A, it is possible to suitably secure 100 times as the number of special figure game times in which the game state can be played.

As mentioned above, in the case of a special winning result in the normal gaming state, it is advantageous for the player, so in the normal gaming state, it is possible to play while aiming not only for a jackpot but also for a special winning result. Become.

Next, the flow of the gaming state from the first time saving gaming state will be explained with reference to FIG. 168(b).

In the first time-saving game state, it is a right-handed game, and the game is mainly played by winning or losing the second special symbol, which is triggered by winning in the second operating port 63. In the first time-saving game state, if the winning/failure lottery result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot result, the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the symbol display device 75 notifies the jackpot result through the specific effect A, and executes a battle effect in which the warrior character wins against the enemy character, as well as an effect in which symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a jackpot combination. Ru.

In the first time-saving game state, when the winning/failure lottery result of the second special symbol becomes a special winning result, the first time-saving game state shifts to the third time-saving game state B. As a result, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is changed to the sixth upper limit number of times (for example, 10 times), which is the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state B. Since this sixth upper limit number of times is much smaller than the first upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times) which is the upper limit number of times of the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state will decrease. That is, at the beginning of the transition to the first time-saving game state, up to 1000 games in the time-saving game state are allowed, but if a special winning result is achieved during that time, the remaining games will be reduced to 10 times. Therefore, if a special winning result occurs in the first time saving game state, it will be disadvantageous for the player.

Furthermore, when transitioning to the third time-saving game state B, regardless of the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state at that time, the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state is set as the remaining number of times in the subsequent time-saving game state. Ru. Then, no matter how many times the special figure game after moving to the first time-saving game state results in a special winning result in the winning/failure lottery result of the second special figure, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is 10. Therefore, the later the special winning result occurs after shifting to the first time-saving game state, the longer the duration of the time-saving game state can be extended. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that he will not draw any special winning results at all, or that even if he does, the timing will be as late as possible.

When a special winning result is obtained in the first time-saving game state, the symbol display device 75 notifies the special winning result through a specific performance C, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed along with a battle performance in which the warrior character is defeated by the enemy character. An effect that stops and displays when the combination is out of reach is executed. Further, after the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, a transition effect to a revenge battle effect mode is executed in which the player re-challenges the defeated enemy character.

In the first time-saving game state, if the winning/fail lottery result of the second special symbol is a normal winning result, no transition of the game state occurs, and the first time-saving game state is maintained. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes the specific performance B in addition to the complete out-of-reach performance and various out-of-reach performance.

In the specific performance B, a battle performance with a draw ending between the warrior character and the enemy character and a performance in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in combinations that are out of reach are executed. This specific performance B is configured in such a way that it is impossible or difficult to distinguish it from specific performance A or specific performance B until the ending is displayed, and at this stage, there is an expectation that it may be a jackpot result. Along with this feeling, it also arouses the sense of excitement that a special result may result and the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state may be reduced.

Furthermore, while the ending of specific performance C, which is executed in the case of a special winning result, is considered a defeat, the ending of specific performance B, which is executed in the case of a normal winning result, is considered a draw, giving the former a more unfavorable impression than the latter. This is because, in this modification, it is more disadvantageous for the player if the result of the special drawing lottery is a special winning result than if it is a normal winning result.

In the third time-saving game state B, if the winning/failure lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot result, the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the symbol display device 75 notifies the jackpot result through the specific effect D, and executes an effect in which symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the jackpot combination along with a revenge battle effect that ends with the warrior character winning against the enemy character. be done.

In addition, the revenge battle effect is performed in the third time-saving game state B, not because it has been demoted to the normal game state, but because the time-saving game state is still continuing, although the number of times remaining is small (10 times). It is something that With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is still a chance left, thereby alleviating disappointment or motivating the player.

In the 1st to 9th special symbol game rounds in the 3rd time-saving gaming state B, if the winning/failure lottery result of the 2nd special symbol becomes a normal winning result or a special winning result, the gaming state will not shift, and the 3rd time saving game state will not shift. The time-saving gaming state is maintained. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes a completely missed effect.

In the final game round (10th special figure game round) in the third time-saving game state, if the win/fail lottery result of the second special figure becomes a normal winning result or a special winning result, the third time-saving gaming state ends. In this case, in the symbol display device 75, the winning result and the end of the third time-saving game state are notified through the specific performance E. In the specific effect E, a revenge battle effect with the ending in which the warrior character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, as well as an effect in which symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in combinations that are out of reach.

In addition, after those performances, in that special figure game time, the total number of special figure game times executed in the time-saving game state (total number of special figure game times executed through the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state). Execute the notification effect for the number of times to notify. By visually confirming the performance, the player can grasp the performance in the current time-saving gaming state.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

In a situation where the first time-saving game state is in a situation where a special winning result is obtained, a transition to the third time-saving game state is allowed, and the first time-saving game state is changed without transitioning to the third time-saving game state. It is configured so that it is more disadvantageous for the player to shift to the third time-saving gaming state than to continue.

According to this configuration, when transitioning to the first time-saving gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, you can enjoy the thrill of being demoted to a disadvantageous state depending on the subsequent game development, and you can achieve a jackpot result. It is possible to add more fun than just aiming to win. However, while such a thrill can be provided, if the player is too disappointed when he or she is demoted to a disadvantageous state, there is a concern that the player's subsequent desire to play will be diminished, which will have the opposite effect. In this regard, with this configuration, the demotion to a disadvantageous state is achieved by transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state where there are fewer remaining times, so even if such a demotion occurs, there is still a chance to win a jackpot in the time-saving gaming state. can be left behind. Thereby, the player's disappointment can be reduced compared to the case where the game state is shifted to the normal gaming state. In particular, in a configuration where the type judgment in the case of a jackpot result in the second special drawing lottery is more preferential than that for the first special drawing, even if you are demoted to a disadvantageous state, the second special drawing Since the gaming period of 1 is secured, the above-mentioned effects can be effectively exhibited. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game in which the player can enjoy the above-mentioned thrill while preventing the player's desire to play from being significantly impaired.

If a special result is achieved in the first time-saving game state, regardless of the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state at that time, the upper limit of the third time-saving game state will be uniformly set as the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state. The configuration allows you to set the number of times.

According to this configuration, the later the timing at which the special winning result occurs in the first time-saving game state, the more the total number of times the time-saving game state can be played increases, which is advantageous for the player. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the fun of avoiding winning a special winning result when playing the game in the first time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the case of the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times is hidden.

For example, if the configuration is such that the remaining number of times in the first time-saving gaming state is clearly displayed, the player can know how many times there were remaining before the special winning result occurs, and the time-saving gaming state becomes a special winning result. When the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state is set as the remaining number of times, the player can easily specify how many times the number of times has decreased as a result. In this regard, by hiding the remaining number of times in the first time-saving gaming state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of times before the special winning result occurs. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to identify the decrease in the remaining number of games when moving to the third time-saving gaming state, and even if the decrease becomes large, the player will be greatly disappointed and his or her desire to play will decrease. can be suppressed.

In the above case, when transitioning to the third time-saving game state, the remaining number of times is clearly indicated. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the fact that the game has moved to the third time-saving game state and the number of remaining time-saving game states after the transition to the third time-saving game state.

In addition, in this modification, there is only one type of first time-saving game state, but the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state is hidden, making it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of times before a special winning result occurs. In the above, it is preferable to provide a plurality of types of first time-saving game states with different upper limit numbers. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp or predict the original upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state, and the above-mentioned effects can be more suitably exhibited. In this case, the above-mentioned effect can be further enhanced by providing a configuration in which it is difficult for the player to distinguish or distinguish between the first time-saving game states.

A special losing result and a normal losing result are provided for the winning result, and when the result of the special drawing lottery becomes the special winning result, a demotion to a disadvantageous state (transition to a third time-saving game state) occurs.

According to this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to be demoted to a disadvantageous state in each game round. This makes it possible to experience the thrill of being demoted in each game round, and to enhance the game in which the player enjoys such a thrill.

A special winning result can occur even in the normal gaming state, and by configuring the system to shift to the third time-saving gaming state in the event of a special winning result, a special winning result can occur during the normal gaming state. In this case, unlike the case where a special winning result occurs during the first time-saving game state, it is configured to be advantageous for the player.

According to this configuration, even if the same special winning result is won, the advantages and disadvantages are reversed depending on the gaming state at the time of winning, so it is possible to add surprise. Further, it is possible to prevent the game from being fixed to a game that only avoids the establishment of a special winning result, and it is possible to diversify the game.

At that time, the upper limit of the number of times of the 3rd time-saving game state to which the player will transition if a special winning result occurs in the normal gaming state is set to the upper limit of the 3rd time-saving game state to which he or she will transition if a special winning result occurs in the 1st time-saving game state. I did it more than the number of times. This makes it possible to highlight the superiority of the third time-saving game state that transitions from the normal game state, and it becomes possible to enhance the fun of aiming to win the special winning result in the normal game state.

<Modification 5>
This modification is configured to determine which of the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state should be prioritized when a special winning result occurs during the first time-saving game state. The configuration of this modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 169 to 177.

<Special figure game round validity table>
A win/fail table for the first special figure (for low probability mode), a win/fail table for the second special figure (for low probability mode), and a win/fail table for the first special figure and the second special figure according to this modification. (for high probability mode) will be explained with reference to FIG. 169. Each of these validity tables is stored in the validity table storage area 313a of the ROM 313.

The win/fail table for the first special symbol (for low probability mode) is referred to when performing a win/fail lottery based on winnings to the first operating port 62 in a situation where the lottery mode is the low probability mode. In this win/fail table for the first special symbol (for low probability mode), as shown in FIG. A total of 10 prizes are set, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is set to 1/300. Other random values are assigned to normal results, and the probability of a normal result in low probability mode is set to 2990/3000. In addition, in the win/fail table for the first special symbol (for low probability mode), a special lose result is not set as a lottery result.

The win/fail table for the second special symbol (for low probability mode) is referred to when performing a win/fail lottery based on winnings to the second operating port 63 in a situation where the lottery mode is the low probability mode. In this win/fail table for the second special symbol (for low probability mode), as shown in FIG. A total of 10 prizes are set, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is set to 1/300. Furthermore, a total of 30 random numbers from "10" to "39" are set as the values of the random numbers that will result in special failures, and the probability of the special failure results in the low probability mode is set to 1/100. Other random values are assigned to normal results, and the probability of a normal result in low probability mode is set to 2960/3000.

The win/fail table for the first special figure and the second special figure (for high probability mode) is for the win/fail lottery based on winnings to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 in the situation where the lottery mode is the high probability mode. There are some things to refer to when doing so. In this win/fail table (for high probability mode) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, as shown in Figure 169(c), there are a total of 50 random numbers from "0" to "49" for the jackpot. is set, and the jackpot winning probability in the high probability mode is set to 1/60. In addition, in the win/fail table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special drawings, special winning results are not set as lottery results, and all random values other than the random numbers for jackpots are assigned to normal winning results. It is being Normally, the probability of a negative result is set to 59/60.

<Special figure game type table>
The type table of the special figure game round according to this modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 170.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special pattern (FIG. 170(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special pattern (FIG. 170(b)) are set.

As shown in FIG. 170(a), in the jackpot type table for the first special figure, 4R probability variable jackpot result, 4R normal jackpot result A, and 4R normal jackpot result B are set as selectable jackpot types. In each of these jackpot results, the number of round games to be executed is four.

The 4R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to a high probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high certainty gaming state continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times). When the first upper limit number of times is reached, the high probability gaming state ends and the mode shifts to the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode).

4R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result that shifts to the first time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined second upper limit number of times (for example, 70 times). When the second upper limit number of times is reached, the first time-saving game state ends and the game shifts to the normal game state.

4R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot result that shifts to the first time-saving gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches the third upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) which is greater than the second upper limit number of times. When the third upper limit number of times is reached, the first time-saving game state ends and the game shifts to the normal game state.

In the jackpot type table for the first special symbol, "0" to "69" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 4R probability variable jackpot results, "70" to "89" correspond to the 4R normal jackpot result A, and " 90'' to ``99'' correspond to 4R normal jackpot result B. That is, the probability of being allocated to the 4R definite variable jackpot result is set to 70%, the probability of being allocated to the 4R normal jackpot result A is 20%, and the probability of being allocated to the 4R normal jackpot result B is set to 10%.

As shown in FIG. 170(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, 10R probability variable jackpot result, 10R normal jackpot result A, and 10R normal jackpot result B are set as selectable jackpot types. In each of these jackpot results, the number of round games to be executed is 10.

The 10R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to a high probability gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high certainty gaming state continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times).

10R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result that shifts to the first time-saving gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 70 times).

10R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot result that shifts to the first time-saving gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches the sixth upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) which is greater than the fifth upper limit number of times.

In the jackpot type table for the second special figure, "0" to "69" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 10R probability variable jackpot result, "70" to "89" correspond to the 10R normal jackpot result A, and " 90” to “99” correspond to 10R normal jackpot result B. That is, the probability of being assigned to the 10R guaranteed variable jackpot result is set to 70%, the probability of being assigned to the 10R normal jackpot result A is 20%, and the probability of being assigned to the 10R normal jackpot result B is set to 10%.

Note that in this modification, a type table for special deviation is not set. That is, there is only one type of special off result in the second special figure. In the case of a special winning result, the game shifts to the third time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) without going through the opening/closing execution mode. In the third time-saving game state in this modification, as shown in FIG. ), and continues until the seventh upper limit number of times (for example, 50 times) is reached, which is smaller than the third upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times), the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 70 times), and the sixth upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times).

<Processing for transition to third time-saving gaming state>
The third time-saving game state transition process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 171. This process is executed in step Sb3202 of the special figure game time control process (FIG. 145) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the third time-saving game state transition process in FIG. 148. . In FIG. 171, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 148, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified. In addition, also in this modification, after the high-frequency support mode update/termination process of step Sb511 is executed, the process for transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state is executed.

First, in step Sb3401, it is determined whether a special failure flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the special failure flag is set, that is, if the result of the current special drawing lottery is a special failure result, the process advances to step Sb3402, and the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Determine whether or not.

If the high probability flag is not set, it is determined in step Sb4801 whether the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The third support flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the game is in the third time-saving gaming state.

If the third support flag is not set, that is, if it is not in the third time-saving game state, it is determined in step Sb4802 whether or not the first support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. The first support flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the game is in the first time-saving gaming state.

If the first support flag is set, that is, if it is the first time-saving gaming state, the process advances to step Sb4803, and the upper limit number of times of the third time-saving gaming state to which the transition is triggered by winning the special winning result is the first time-saving gaming state. It is determined whether the number of times remaining is greater than the current remaining number of times in the time-saving game state. Specifically, by referring to the value in the support counter area SC of the RAM 314, the current remaining number of times in the first time-saving gaming state during the stay is ascertained, and the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving gaming state is determined from the determined remaining number of times. (7th upper limit number of times) is determined to be greater. In this modification, the seventh upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state is set to 50, and if the value of the support counter area SC is 50 or less, this step is determined to be affirmative, and if it is greater than 50, this step is determined to be positive. Make a negative judgment.

If the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state is greater than the current remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state is applied with priority over the current first time-saving game state, from step Sb4804 The process of step Sb3408 is executed.

In step Sb4804, the first support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. As a result, the first time-saving game state ends. In the following step Sb4805, a third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. Thereby, the game shifts to the third time-saving game state.

In step Sb4806, a value corresponding to the seventh upper limit number of times (for example, 50 times) is set in the support counter area SC of the RAM 314. At that time, regardless of the value of the support counter area SC at that time (remaining number of times in the first time-saving gaming state), it is rewritten to a value corresponding to the seventh upper limit number of times. For this reason, no matter which timing during the first time-saving game state you transition to the third time-saving game state, the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high-frequency support state) after transitioning to the third time-saving game state The remaining number of times becomes the seventh upper limit number of times.

In step Sb3408, the third time-saving game state start command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143. As a result, the production control device 143 is notified of the transition to the third time-saving game state.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb4803 (if the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state is less than the current remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state), the current first time-saving game state is prioritized over the third time-saving game state. and apply. Specifically, the third time-saving gaming state transition processing is ended without performing the processing of steps Sb4804 to Sb3408.

In this way, in this modification, when the result is a special failure, the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state and the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state are compared, and the time-saving game state with the higher number of times is prioritized. It is composed of For example, if the configuration is such that the transition to the third time-saving game state is always made, in a situation where the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state is smaller than the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state, the time-saving game is started by shifting to the third time-saving game state. The remaining number of states will be substantially reduced. In other words, the player will be in a disadvantageous state, but according to this modification, it is possible to suppress such a shift to a disadvantageous state.

In addition, in this modification, where there are multiple types of first time-saving game states with different upper limit numbers as the first time-saving game state, the priority order with the third time-saving game state is reversed in the first time-saving game state. The number of games is different depending on the type of the first time-saving game state. Specifically, in the first time-saving game state A (the first time-saving game state with an upper limit of 70 times), which is triggered by winning the 4R normal jackpot result A, in the 1st to 20th special figure game times. When the result is a special failure, priority is given to continuation of the first time-saving game state A, and from the 21st time onwards, priority is given to shifting to the third time-saving game state. In addition, in the first time-saving game state B (the first time-saving game state with an upper limit of 100 times), which is triggered by winning the 4R normal jackpot result B, special winning results are obtained in the 1st to 50th special symbol game times. When this happens, priority is given to continuation of the first time-saving game state B, and from the 51st time onward, priority is given to shifting to the third time-saving game state.

Such a relationship is the same in the first time-saving gaming state, which is triggered by winning 10R normal jackpot result A, and the first time-saving gaming state, which is triggered by winning 10R normal jackpot result B. .

If a negative determination is made in step Sb4802 (the first support flag is not set), that is, if the game is in the normal gaming state, a normal game ending process is executed in step Sb4807. This process is similar to the process of steps Sb1411 to Sb1415 in the process for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state in FIG. 119. At that time, in the special figure game round, a specific confirmed display time that is longer than the normal confirmed display time is set as the confirmed display time (FIG. 149), but this specific confirmed display time is not the same as in the second embodiment above. , it may be set to a longer time (for example, 0.8 sec) than the fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the regular game game session to be forcibly terminated, or as in the above modification example 2, the regular display time for the regular game game session to be forcibly terminated may be , the variable display period (for example, 0.5 sec) of the regular game game corresponding to the second time-saving game state, and the determined display time of the regular game game corresponding to the second time-saving game state (for example, 0.5 seconds). The period may be longer (for example, 4 seconds) than the total period (for example, 1.5 seconds) including 5 seconds.

After executing step Sb4807, the process proceeds to step Sb4805, and a process of setting a third support flag is executed. Thereafter, the processing from step Sb4806 onwards is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb4801 (if the third support flag is set), the process for transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state is ended without executing the processes in steps Sb4802 to Sb3408. That is, even if there is a special result in the third time-saving game state, the re-transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, and the remaining number of times at that point is maintained.

<Fluctuating display time table of special figure game times>
The special figure game time control process and the fluctuation start process performed by the main control device 162 are the same as in the case of the third modification (FIGS. 145 and 146), but as described above, in this modification, the first time-saving game It is configured to determine whether to give priority to continuation of the first time-saving game state or transition to the third time-saving game state when a special result is obtained in the state, and the variable display time table is adjusted accordingly. is set. The variable display time table according to this modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173.

The variable display time table in this modification includes at least a variable display time table for special wins in the second special figure (for the first time-saving game state A), and a variable display time table for special wins in the second special figure. table (for the first time-saving game state B), a variable display time table (for the first time-saving game state A) for the normal out of the second special figure, and a variable display time table for the normal out of the second special figure ( (for the first time-saving game state B) is set.

The variable display time table (for the first time-saving game state A) for special winnings in the second special figure is the second special figure in the situation of the first time-saving game state A (the first time-saving game state with an upper limit of 70 times). This is referred to when the result of the lottery in the figure is a special failure result. In this variable display time table, the situation when a special winning result is obtained is a situation in which continuation of the first time-saving gaming state A is prioritized, and a situation in which a transition to the third time-saving gaming state is prioritized. The selection mode of the variation pattern is configured to be different between the two.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 172(a), the variable pattern W1 (for example, 8 seconds or 4 seconds) is selected in the 1st to 20th special figure game times in which continuation of the first time-saving game state A is prioritized. , The variable pattern W2 (for example, 15 seconds) is configured to be selected in the 21st to 70th special figure game times in which transition to the third time-saving game state is prioritized. The variation pattern W1 corresponds to a complete out-of-reach performance, and the variation pattern W2 corresponds to a special out-of-reach performance. That is, when the fluctuation start command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern W1 is sent to the performance control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes a completely missed performance as a game repeated performance, and the fluctuation start command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern W2 is performed. When transmitted to the control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes a special out-of-reach A performance as a game repeat performance.

The special out-of-reach performance A is similar to the special out-of-reach performance according to the third modification. That is, as shown in FIGS. 174(a) and 174(b), after the reach display is performed using the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in a low-speed fluctuation manner while including the special symbol 479, After that, the special symbol 479 is stopped and displayed on the reach line. After the special out-of-reach performance A is performed, an additional performance (FIG. 130(c)) similar to that of the second embodiment is performed. The number of additions notified at that time is 50 times, which is the upper limit number of times (seventh upper limit number) of the third time-saving game state.

The variable display time table (for the first time-saving game state B) for special winnings in the second special figure is the second special figure in the situation of the first time-saving game state B (the first time-saving game state with an upper limit of 100 times). This is referred to when the result of the lottery in the figure is a special failure result. Also in this variable display time table, the situation when the special winning result is obtained is a situation in which continuation of the first time-saving gaming state B is prioritized, and a situation in which priority is given to transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state. The selection mode of the variation pattern is configured to be different depending on the case. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 172(b), the variable pattern W1 is selected in the 1st to 50th special figure game times in which continuation of the first time-saving game state B is given priority, and the third time-saving game state B is selected. The structure is such that the variable pattern W2 is selected in the 51st to 100th special figure game times in which the transition to is given priority.

The variable display time table (for the first time-saving game state A) for normal winnings in the second special drawing shows that in the situation where the first time-saving gaming state A is, the result of the winning/failure lottery in the second special drawing becomes a normal winning result. It will be referred to when In this variable display time table, as shown in FIG. 173(a), the selection mode of the variable pattern is configured to differ depending on the number of times the special symbol game is executed after transitioning to the first time-saving game state A. .

Specifically, in the 1st to 20th special figure game rounds, one of the variable patterns 21H to 24H is selected. The fluctuation patterns 21H to 24H are similar to the fluctuation patterns 21H to 24H in FIG. 113(d). In addition, in the 21st to 60th special figure game times, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is "0" to "79", one of the fluctuation patterns 21H to 24H is selected, and the fluctuation type counter CS When the value of is between "80" and "99", the variation pattern W3 (for example, 14 seconds) is selected.

The variation pattern W3 corresponds to the special out-of-reach B performance. The special out-of-reach B effect is a so-called fake effect that is a pair of the special out-of-reach A effect, and after stirring up expectations for a special out-of-reach effect, symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a combination different from the special out-of-reach combination. It is something that makes you Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 174(a) and 174(c), after the reach display is performed using the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the middle symbol row Z2 is changed at a low speed while including the special symbol 479. After that, the medium symbol row Z2 is configured to be stopped and displayed so that the special symbol 479 does not stop on the reach line.

In the 61st to 70th special figure game times, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is "0" to "39", one of the fluctuation patterns 21H to 24H is selected, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is selected. is between "40" and "99", variation pattern W3 is selected. Compared to the 21st to 60th special figure game times, the ratio of the variable pattern W3 is higher. In other words, in the 61st to 70th special figure game times, the special reach-out B effect is more likely to be executed than in the 21st to 60th special figure game times, and the special out-of-reach B effect is more likely to be executed than in the 21st to 60th special figure game times. The agitation is becoming stronger.

In addition, the 1st to 20th special figure game times are such that even if a special winning result is obtained in the 1st time-saving game state A, the situation does not shift to the 3rd time-saving game state, and the 21st to 60th times are the 1st time-saving game state. This corresponds to the middle stage of state A, and the 69th to 70th times correspond to the final stage of the first time-saving game state A. Incidentally, the variable patterns selectable in the 1st to 20th special figure game times do not include the variable pattern W3, and the special out-of-reach B effect is not executed in these special figure game times.

The variable display time table (for the first time-saving game state B) for normal winnings in the second special drawing shows that in the situation of the first time-saving gaming state B, the result of the winning lottery in the second special drawing is a normal winning result. It will be referred to when Also in this variable display time table, as shown in FIG. 173(b), the selection mode of the variable pattern is configured to differ depending on the number of times the special symbol game is executed after transitioning to the first time-saving game state A. .

Among these, the selection mode in the 1st to 70th special figure game times is the same as in the case of the variable display time table (for the first time-saving game state A) for normal failure in the second special figure in Fig. 173 (a) It is. That is, in the 1st to 70th special figure game times in the first time-saving game state B, a variable pattern is selected using the same lottery table as in the first time-saving game state A. For this reason, the selection tendency of the variable display time (game repeat performance) tends to be similar to that in the first time-saving game state A. This allows you to determine whether you are in the first time-saving game state A or the first time-saving game state B (in other words, what is the upper limit number of times you can be in the first time-saving game state during your stay). It is impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish from the behavior of the replay performance.

Note that the selection manner of the variation patterns does not necessarily have to be completely the same, and may have the same degree of selection manner. For example, in the variable display time table for the first time-saving game state B, the selection ratio of the variable pattern W3 is higher in the 61st to 70th special figure game times, etc. As long as they have a common tendency, detailed selection probabilities, target game times, etc. may be different.

As shown in FIG. 173(b), in the 71st to 90th special figure game, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is "0" to "79", one of the fluctuation patterns 21H to 24H is selected. is selected and the value of the variation type counter CS is between "80" and "99", the variation pattern W3 is selected. In addition, in the 91st to 100th special figure game times, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is "0" to "39", one of the fluctuation patterns 21H to 24H is selected, and the fluctuation type counter CS When the value of is between "40" and "99", the variation pattern W3 is selected. That is, even in the case of the first time-saving game state B, the special out-of-reach B effect is more likely to be executed in the final stage, and the incitement to the special out-of-reach (third time-saving game state) is strengthened.

<About the flow of the gaming state>
The flow of the gaming state in this modification will be explained. First, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 175 in which the result of the special drawing winning/failing lottery is a special winning result in the first time saving gaming state A (first time saving gaming state where the upper limit number of times is 70 times).

The upper limit of the number of times in the third time-saving game state that is triggered by winning a special winning result is set to 50, but the number of times that the special figure game can be played after moving to the first time-saving game state A is the first time. - In the 20th time, the remaining number of times in the 1st time-saving game state A is greater than the upper limit number of times in the 3rd time-saving game state, and in the 21st to 70th times of the above special figure game, the first time-saving game state The upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state is greater than the remaining number of times in the game state A.

Here, in this modification, if a special result occurs during the first time-saving game state and an opportunity to shift to the third time-saving game state is established, the continuation of the first time-saving game state A and the third time-saving game state Among the transitions to , the system is configured so that priority is given to the side where the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) is large (the side that is advantageous to the player). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 175(a) and 175(b), if a special winning result is obtained in the 1st to 20th special symbol game, the first time saving game state A is continued, and the 21st to 70th special symbol game state is continued. When a special winning result is obtained in the special figure game round, the game shifts to a third time-saving game state.

When shifting to the third time-saving game state, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is changed to the remaining number of times in the third time-saving game state, regardless of the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state A at that time. For this reason, for example, if a special winning result occurs in the 30th special symbol game, the time-saving game state will be set for 50 times from that point on (FIGS. 175(c) and (d)), Similarly, for example, if a special winning result occurs in the 65th special pattern game, the time-saving gaming state will be set for 50 times from that point on (Figure 175(e), ( f)). However, the total number of games based on both the first time-saving game state A and the third time-saving game state is 80 times in the former case, but 115 times in the latter case. In other words, in the 21st to 70th special figure game times in which transition to the third time-saving game state is allowed, the later the special figure game time that results in a special winning result, the longer the special figure game time in which the time-saving game state can be played. This increases the total number of times, which is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, an upper limit is set for the first time-saving game state A, and the opportunity to shift to the third time-saving game state is not guaranteed indefinitely. In particular, in this modified example, when in the normal gaming state, winning through the second operating port 63 is restricted, resulting in a game mode in which the player aims to win a jackpot by placing a prize into the first operating port 62, and the first operating port In the win/fail lottery for the first special symbol, which is conducted by winning a prize on 62, the result type does not include a special lose result. Therefore, if the first time-saving game state A ends without transition to the third time-saving game state, the opportunity to transition to the third time-saving game state will disappear. In this case, the total number of special symbol game times in which the time-saving game state can be played is 70, and as a result, the total number of times remains smaller than in the case where the special winning result is obtained.

In other words, the closer you get to the end of the first time-saving game state A, the greater the profit if you win a special winning result, but the higher the risk that the first time-saving game state A will end and you will not be able to increase the number of remaining times. It turns out. As a result, the game is played in a conflict between the expectation that the winning timing of the special winning result will be later rather than earlier, and the frustration of having to win the special winning result before the end of the first time-saving game state A. This allows the player to have fun, and it becomes possible to increase the interest of the game in the first time-saving game state A.

In addition, in this modification, the transition to the third time-saving game state is determined after the update of the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is completed, so when switching from the first time-saving game state A to the third time-saving game state After the switching is performed, the remaining number of times can be subtracted from the next special figure game time. Therefore, it is possible to suitably secure 50 times as the remaining number of times after shifting to the third time-saving game state.

Next, the flow of the game state based on the first time-saving game state B (first time-saving game state with an upper limit of 100 times) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177.

In this modification, in addition to the above-mentioned first time-saving game state A, a first time-saving game state B is set as the type of the first time-saving game state to which the player shifts upon winning the jackpot result. In this first time-saving game state B, the upper limit number of times is 100 times, which is more than in the first time-saving game state A, so if a special winning result is obtained, a special figure game time in which a transition to the third time-saving game state occurs. The range is different from that of the first time-saving game state A. Specifically, even if a special winning result occurs in the 1st to 50th special pattern game, it does not shift to the 3rd time-saving gaming state, and if a special winning result occurs in the 51st to 100th special pattern gaming, Transitioning to the third time-saving game state, the remaining number of times is rewritten to 50 (FIGS. 176(c) and (d)).

For example, if the configuration is such that only the first time-saving game state A is set and the range of special figure game times in which the transition to the third time-saving game state occurs when a special winning result is fixed is fixed, at what timing? The player may be able to know in advance whether winning a special winning result will increase his or her profit level, and there is a risk that interest in other gaming rounds may fade. In this regard, in this modification, the range of special figure game times in which the transition to the third time-saving gaming state occurs when a special winning result is achieved is diversified, so at what timing can you win the game if you hit a special winning result. It is no longer uniformly clear whether the profit for the individual will be high. This prevents the player's interest from concentrating on the same game round in each first time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game throughout the first time-saving game state.

Here, in this modification, it is configured such that it is impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish between the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B. Specifically, as already explained, the selection mode of the variable display time (variable display pattern) is shared between the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B, and in addition to The configuration is such that a common effect is executed as a start effect when transitioning.

For example, as shown in FIG. 128(b), in the case of a configuration in which a remaining number of times image 472 is displayed on the symbol display device 75 together with a title image 473 such as "Chance Time" in the start performance, the first time-saving game state A and A title image 473 and a remaining number of times image 472 having the same contents are displayed in both the first time-saving game state B and the first time-saving game state B. That is, even when the transferred first time-saving game state is the first time-saving game state B, the same number of times as in the case of the first time-saving game state A is notified as the initial remaining number of times.

Regarding the remaining number of times image 472, the display contents are the same as in the case of the first time-saving game state A not only at the time of the start performance but also in the subsequent special figure game times in the first time-saving game state B. In addition, in the case of the first time-saving game state B, when the number of special figure games reaches the 70th time, a predetermined additional effect (for example, the additional effect shown in FIG. 130(c)) is executed. Thereby, an increase in the remaining number of times corresponding to the difference (30 times) from the first time-saving game state A is notified, and consistency with the actual remaining number of times is attempted.

In addition, in the case of a configuration in which a background image for the first time-saving game state that is different from that for the normal game state is set as the background image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, the background image is set for the first time-saving game state A and the background image for the first time-saving game state A and the background image for the first time-saving game state A and It may be shared with the 1-hour saving game state B. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which multiple types of display modes for each symbol in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set according to the type of gaming state, each of the same display modes is set in the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B. It may also be configured to display a pattern.

In addition, in making it impossible or difficult to distinguish between the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B, it is not necessarily necessary to implement all of the above configurations, but at least one of them must be implemented. Bye.

As mentioned above, by providing multiple types of first time-saving game states with different upper limit numbers, the range of special figure game times in which a transition to the third time-saving game state occurs in the event of a special winning result is uniformly determined. First, because it is impossible or difficult to distinguish between the first time-saving game states, various types of fun can be enjoyed depending on the number of times the special figure game is played after transitioning to the first time-saving game state, as shown below. can be granted.

First, in zone A (FIG. 176(e)) where the 1st to 20th special figure game times are played, the first time-saving game state to which the transition is made after the opening/closing execution mode is the first time-saving game state A or the first time-saving game state B. In either case, if the special winning result is won, there will be no transition to the third time-saving game state. In this zone A, there is no addition of the remaining number of games, so the player can enjoy the game only aiming for a jackpot result. In line with this, in the game replay performance performed on the symbol display device 75, there is a special reach-out A performance that notifies the winning (occurrence of addition) to the special out-of-reach result, and a special reach-out B performance that is a fake performance. None of the above is executed (FIGS. 172 and 173).

In zone B (Fig. 176(e)) where the 21st to 50th special figure game times are played, if the first time-saving game state to which the transition was made was the first time-saving game state A, the zone B (FIG. 176(e)) is If the winning results in a shift to the third time-saving game state, and the first time-saving game state B is present, the state does not occur even if the special winning result results in a shift to the third time-saving game state. Therefore, zone B becomes a zone where the first time-saving game state A is determined by the addition of the remaining number of times.

As a result, from the player's perspective, due to the occurrence of the top-up, the total number of special symbol game times in which the time-saving game state can be played becomes greater than the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state A, but conversely, the top-up does not occur. As a result, there remains a possibility of the first time-saving game state B in which the player can aim for a larger total number of special symbol game times in which the time-saving game state can be played. Therefore, regardless of how much the total number of games has increased, a player who expects the total number of games to increase can enjoy aiming for a jackpot result or a special winning result. In addition, for players who wish to increase the total number of games as much as possible, they can enjoy aiming for a jackpot result while avoiding a special winning result.

In zone B, in the game repeat performance of the symbol display device 75, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a special winning result, a special reach-out A performance is executed, and in a part of the normal winning result, a special Out-of-reach B effect is executed (FIGS. 172 and 173).

In zone C (FIG. 176(e)) where the 51st to 60th special figure game times are played, the first time-saving game state to which the transition is made is either the first time-saving game state A or the first time-saving game state B. also moves to the third time-saving gaming state by winning the special winning result, but if it were in the first time-saving gaming state B, the timing of winning the special winning result (timing of transition to the third time-saving gaming state) would be earlier. , the increase in the total number of times remains small. For this reason, players who wish to increase the total number of wins will be in a state where they do not want to get a special winning result, and they can enjoy aiming for a jackpot result while avoiding a special winning result. state.

In zone D (FIG. 176(e)) where the 61st to 70th special figure game times are played, the first time-saving game state to which the transition is made is either the first time-saving game state A or the first time-saving game state B. also moves to the third time-saving game state by winning the special winning result, but if the first time-saving game state to which it transitioned was the first time-saving game state A, the first time-saving game state A ends because it is the final stage. The possibility of this happening is increasing. For players who want to avoid ending the time-saving game state without adding up the remaining number of times, they can enjoy the thrill of the time-saving game state almost ending while aiming for a jackpot result or a special winning result. state.

In zone D, the probability that the special reach-missing B performance will be executed is increased when the result of the special symbol lottery is a normal winning result (FIG. 173). As a result, the player watches the performance in suspense, wondering whether the special winning result will be won and the remaining number of times will be added, or whether the special winning result will not be won and the time-saving gaming state will end as it is. Opportunities can be increased, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

In addition, if the first time-saving game state to which the transition was made was the first time-saving game state B, the winning timing for the special winning result would still be in the early category, and the increase in the total number of times would remain small. . For this reason, for players who want a larger total number of games, it is important to avoid ending the time-saving game state while avoiding a special result (the first time-saving game state that has been transferred is the first time-saving game state B). ).

Zone E (FIG. 176(e)) where the 71st to 90th special figure game times are played is a state in which it is determined that the first time-saving game state to which the transition has been made is the first time-saving game state B. For the player, the player can enjoy aiming for a jackpot result or a special miss result.

In addition, if the first time-saving game state to which the transition was made is the first time-saving game state B, and the 70th special figure game is reached, as already mentioned, the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state A Execute additional effects corresponding to the difference between the In this case, there is an effect that the number of times notified by the remaining number of times image 472 can be matched with the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state B, and also a game where the user thinks that the first time-saving game state to which the transition has been made is the first time-saving game state A. There is also an advantage that players who do not know the game characteristics in advance can be made to recognize the special symbol game times after the 71st time as game times with the remaining number of times added.

In this case, before the execution of the additional performance, an end performance corresponding to the end of the first time-saving game state may be performed. Thereby, it is possible to give a stronger impression that the first time-saving game state has ended.

Zone F (FIG. 176(e)) where the 91st to 100th special figure game times are played is the final stage of the first time-saving game state B, and a state where the possibility that the first time-saving game state B will end is increasing. becomes. For the player, if he can win the special winning result at this timing (if he can add on the remaining number of times), he will have won the maximum number of times as a total number of times, and the first time-saving game state B will end. While enjoying the thrill of what is likely to happen, you can enjoy aiming for a jackpot result or a special miss result. In Zone F, as in the case of Zone D, when the result of the special symbol winning/fail lottery is a normal winning result, the probability that the special reach missing B effect will be executed is increased (FIG. 173).

With the above configuration, it is possible to predict whether the transferred first time-saving gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state A or the first time-saving gaming state B, and to predict at what timing a special winning result can be achieved. This allows the player to enjoy the game while predicting whether or not the total number of plays can be increased, and it becomes possible to suitably enhance the interest of the game.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

The first time-saving game state includes a first time-saving game state A and a first time-saving game state B in which the range of special symbol game times in which an increase in the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is allowed in the case of a special winning result is different. The structure is as follows.

For example, if the configuration is such that the number of special symbol game times in which an increase in the remaining number of times (transition to the third time-saving game state) is allowed in the event of a special winning result is fixed, at what timing the special winning result will occur. If the remaining number of times is increased, the player will be able to know in advance whether the remaining number of times will increase, and there is a risk that the player will lose interest in other special figure game times. In this regard, since there are multiple first time-saving game states in which the range of special symbol game times in which an increase in the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is allowed in the event of a special winning result is provided, there is If this happens, it will not be uniformly determined whether the remaining number of times will increase or not. This prevents the player's interest from concentrating on the same special symbol game round in each first time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game throughout the first time-saving game state.

The type of the first time-saving gaming state is not specified, and it is difficult for the player to determine whether the first time-saving gaming state to which the transition has been made is the first time-saving gaming state A or the first time-saving gaming state B. The structure is as follows.

For example, if the configuration is such that the special figure game times in the permissible state (state in which an increase in the remaining number of times is allowed) is clarified, then if the range of special figure game times in such a state is different, the first time saving Even if game states are provided, special symbol game times to be noted in each first time-saving game state become clear, and there is a concern that the player's interest may be biased toward a specific game time. In this regard, by creating a configuration that makes it impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish between the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B, the player cannot or cannot identify the range of special symbol game times that are allowed. It can be difficult. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the game while letting the player predict which special symbol game round will be in the permissible state in each first time-saving game state, and attract attention to the game throughout the first time-saving game state. It is possible to increase the degree.

After making the upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) of the first time-saving game state B larger than the upper limit number of times (for example, 70 times) of the first time-saving game state A, in the first time-saving game state B, the first time-saving game state A The configuration is such that the permissible state is included in the special figure game times after the upper limit number of times (for example, the 71st to 100th special figure game times).

In this configuration, when the number of special symbol games after transitioning to the time-saving gaming state becomes the number of times corresponding to the upper limit number of times of the first time-saving gaming state A (for example, 70 times), the game is started for the first time-saving gaming state to which the transition is made. If the person predicts that the player will be in the first time-saving gaming state A, the time-saving gaming state will end when the upper limit is reached, but on the other hand, if the player predicts that the player is in the first time-saving gaming state B, By obtaining a special winning result after exceeding the corresponding number of times, the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state can be increased, which is a desirable situation for the player. For this reason, when the number of times of the special figure game in the first time-saving game state approaches the corresponding number of times, there is a feeling of anxiety that the time-saving game state will end, and the special winning result after that number is exceeded. The player can play the game while competing with the expectation that the number of remaining games will be increased efficiently by winning the game, and it is possible to suitably increase the level of interest.

In the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B, common special symbol game times (1st to 20th times) are provided in which the remaining number of times is not added even if a special winning result is obtained.

According to this configuration, in the above-mentioned common special figure game times, no matter whether the transitioned time-saving game state is the first time-saving game state A or the first time-saving game state B, the remaining number of times is not added, so the game It is possible to secure a period in which a player can concentrate on a game aiming at a jackpot result without worrying about the type of time-saving game state or winning a special winning result.

In addition, in the above case, the above-mentioned common special pattern game times in which the remaining number of times are not added even if there is a special winning result, and other special pattern game times in which the remaining number of times are added in the case of a special winning result. It may be configured such that the player can determine the information. For example, it is conceivable to make the background image, etc. on the symbol display device 75 different between the above-mentioned common special figure game round and the above-mentioned other special figure game round.

If a special winning result occurs in the first time-saving game state A or the first time-saving game state B, and the remaining number of times is added, even if a special winning result occurs again in the time-saving game state after the addition, the addition of the remaining number of times is limited. The configuration is as follows.

With this configuration, the addition of the remaining number of times based on winning a special winning result is limited to only once in the transitioned time-saving gaming state, so if the addition occurs earlier in the transitioned time-saving gaming state, Depending on whether the game occurs late or not, it can make a big difference in the total number of game times in which the time-saving game state can be played. This makes it possible to increase the importance of the timing at which a special deviation result occurs, and to suitably bring out the effects of each of the above-mentioned configurations.

If a special result is achieved in the first time-saving game state, compare the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state at that time with the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state, and play the time-saving game on the side with the higher number of times. The structure was designed to prioritize the state.

According to this configuration, in the case of a special winning result (when the trigger for transition to the third time-saving gaming state is established), if the remaining number of times at that time is greater, the first time-saving gaming state is continued. On the contrary, if the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state is greater, switching from the first time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is performed. As a result, even if a special winning result occurs at any timing, it is possible to always shift to a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous for the player.

In addition, by adopting the above configuration, a pachinko machine having a plurality of time-saving game states in which the range of game times in which the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is allowed to increase in the case of a special winning result can be created with a simple configuration. Moreover, it can be realized by simple control. That is, while managing the termination of a plurality of time-saving gaming states (first time-saving gaming state A and first time-saving gaming state B) with different upper limit numbers using the existing control method, the above-mentioned comparison and prioritization processing (step Sb4803) Since it is sufficient to simply add , it is possible to suppress the configuration and control processing from becoming complicated.

<Modification 6>
Although the second embodiment and its modifications include either the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, this modification includes both of these time-saving game states. . Moreover, in this modification, when in any of the time-saving game states, the transition to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is restricted. The configuration of this modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 178 to 190.

<Special figure game round validity table>
In this modified example, as a win/fail table for the special figure game time, a win/fail table for the first special figure and the second special figure (for low probability mode), a win/fail table for the first special figure and the second special figure (for high probability mode), and a victory table for the first special figure and the second special figure (for high probability mode) are used. mode). Each of these validity tables is stored in the validity table storage area 313a of the ROM 313.

The win/fail table for the first special figure and the second special figure (for low-probability mode) is a win-fail lottery based on winnings to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 in a situation where the lottery mode is the low probability mode. There are some things to refer to when doing so. In this win/fail table for the first special figure and the second special figure (for low probability mode), as shown in FIG. A total of 10 numbers from 9 to 9 are set, and the probability of winning the jackpot in low probability mode is set to 1/300. In addition, a total of 10 random numbers from "10" to "19" are set as the value of the random number that results in a special failure result, and the probability of a special failure result in the low probability mode is set to 1/300. Other random values are assigned to normal results, and the probability of a normal result in low probability mode is set to 2980/3000.

The win/fail table for the first special figure and the second special figure (for high probability mode) is for the win/fail lottery based on winnings to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 in the situation where the lottery mode is the high probability mode. There are some things to refer to when doing so. In this win/fail table (for high probability mode) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, as shown in Figure 178(b), there are a total of 50 random numbers from "0" to "49" for the jackpot. is set, and the jackpot winning probability in the high probability mode is set to 1/60. In addition, in the win/fail table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special drawings, special winning results are not set as lottery results, and all random values other than the random numbers for jackpots are assigned to normal winning results. It is being Normally, the probability of a negative result is set to 59/60.

<Special figure game type table>
The type table of the special figure game round according to this modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 179.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special pattern (FIG. 179(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special pattern (FIG. 179(b)) are set.

As shown in FIG. 179(a), in the jackpot type table for the first special figure, 4R probability variable jackpot result and 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. In each of these jackpot results, the number of round games to be executed is four.

The 4R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to a high probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high certainty gaming state continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times). When the first upper limit number of times is reached, the high probability gaming state ends and the mode shifts to the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode).

The 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to the first time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined second upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times). When the second upper limit number of times is reached, the first time-saving game state ends and the game shifts to the normal game state.

In the jackpot type table for the first special figure, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to 4R probability variable jackpot results, and "65" to "99" correspond to 4R normal jackpot results. That is, the probability of being allocated to the 4R probability variable jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being allocated to the 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in FIG. 179(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, 10R probability variable jackpot result and 10R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. In each of these jackpot results, the number of round games to be executed is 10.

The 10R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to a high probability gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high certainty gaming state continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined third upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times).

The 10R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to the first time-saving gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times).

In the jackpot type table for the second special figure, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to 10R probability variable jackpot results, and "65" to "99" correspond to 10R normal jackpot results. That is, the probability of being allocated to the 10R probability variable jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being allocated to the 10R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

Here, in this modification, in addition to the first time-saving game state to which the game state shifts to when a jackpot occurs, there are provided a second time-saving game state and a third time-saving game state to which the game state transitions not from a jackpot.

Among these, the second time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is transitioned to when the number of game rounds that result in a losing result (losing game rounds) reaches a predetermined ceiling number (for example, 800 times). In this second time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 179(c), the number of times the special figure game is executed after transitioning to the second time-saving game state is a predetermined fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 500 times). continues until reached.

The ceiling number of times in this modification is set to a number greater than the upper limit number of times (continuation number of times) of the first time-saving gaming state that is triggered by a 4R normal jackpot result or a 10R normal jackpot result. Therefore, it is avoided that the number of missed game times reaches the ceiling number during the first time-saving game state.

The third time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is transitioned to when the result of the special drawing lottery becomes a special winning result. In this third time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 179(d), the number of executions of the special figure game after transitioning to the third time-saving game state is a sixth upper limit number of times ( This continues until the number of times (for example, 300 times) is reached. That is, the third time-saving game state is continued less often than the second time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state is a more advantageous time-saving game state for the player. In this modification, there is only one type of third time saving game state.

<Transition processing at the end of opening/closing execution mode>
The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 180. This process is executed in step Sb915 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 114) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in FIG. In FIG. 180, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 116, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb1101, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot result. If it is a probability variable jackpot result, a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e at step Sb1102. As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.

In step Sb1103, a value corresponding to the first upper limit number of times (for example, 100) is set in the variable probability counter area KC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. In step Sb1104, a first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Sb5101, a value (for example, 100) corresponding to the first upper limit number of times is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d. In step Sb1108, a high certainty gaming state start command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143, and thereafter, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

When a negative determination is made in step Sb1101 (when the current jackpot result is a normal jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sb1109, and a first support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Thereby, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state.

In step Sb5102, a value (for example, 100) corresponding to the second upper limit number of times is set in the support counter area SC. In step Sb1113, the first time saving game state start command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

<Special figure game time control process>
The special figure game time control process according to this modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 181. This process is executed in step Sb403 of the normal process (FIG. 107), and is executed in place of the special figure game time control process of FIG. 108. In FIG. 181, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 108, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

When a negative determination is made in step Sb503 (when the special figure display section 43 is not in the variable display mode), it is determined in step Sb504 whether or not the common reservation number CRN is "0". If the common reservation number CRN is not "0", that is, if there is reservation information for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the process advances to step Sb505 and data setting processing is executed. In the data setting process, the holding information stored in the first special figure holding area Ra or the second special figure holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE for variable display.

In step Sb5201, a variation start process is executed to start a variable display on the special figure display section 43, and then the special figure game time control process is ended. Details of the fluctuation start process in step Sb5201 will be described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb507 (if the variable display time has elapsed), the variable display flags set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314 are cleared in step Sb509. In step Sb510, high probability mode update/end processing is executed to update the remaining number of high probability modes and to terminate the high probability mode.

In the following step Sb5202, high-frequency support mode termination processing is executed to terminate the high-frequency support mode. In step Sb5203, processing for transition to the time-saving gaming state is executed to perform transition processing to the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state. In step Sb5204, a final display start process is executed to start a final display on the special figure display section 43, and then the special figure game time control process is ended. Details of steps Sb5202 to Sb5204 will be described later.

<Fluctuation start processing>
The fluctuation start process in step Sb5201 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 182. Note that in FIG. 182, the same step numbers are given to processes similar to the fluctuation start process of FIG. 146, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the process of step Sb3302 or step Sb3303, it is determined in step Sb3304 whether or not the result of the determination in step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, the process advances to step Sb3305, and the jackpot type is drawn by referring to the corresponding type table (FIG. 179).

In step Sb3306, a type flag indicating the jackpot type selected by the type determination in step Sb3305 is set in the various flag storage area 314e. In step Sb3307, a stop result for a jackpot is set by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3304 (not a jackpot win), the process proceeds to step Sb3308, and it is determined whether or not the result of the success or failure determination in step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 is a special winning result. If the result is a special failure, a special failure flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e at step Sb3310. In step Sb3311, a stop result for a special miss is set as a stop result of the pattern variably displayed on the special figure display section 43.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3308 (not a special winning result), it means that the result of the current win/fail lottery is a normal winning result. In this case, the process advances to step Sb3312, and a stop result for normal failure is set.

After executing step Sb3307, step Sb3311 or step Sb3312, in step Sb5301, a high-frequency support mode update process is executed to update the number of special symbol games in the high-frequency support mode. In step Sb5302, a process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is executed to determine whether the transition opportunity to the second time-saving gaming state has been established, and in step Sb5303, the transition trigger to the third time-saving gaming state is established. A process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is executed to determine whether or not it has been established. Details of steps Sb5301 to Sb5303 will be described later.

In step Sb3313, a variable display time setting process for setting a variable display time for the current game round in the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS is executed. In the variable display time setting process, a variable display time is selected by lottery using the variable type counter CS and the variable display time table.

In this modification, the variation patterns when the winning result (special winning result or normal winning result) is obtained in the winning/fail drawing of the first special drawing include a complete winning effect when the result is a normal winning result, and various out-of-reach effects. In addition to the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the above, as shown in FIG. 183, a fluctuation pattern R1 for reaching the ceiling (for example, 18 seconds) and a fluctuation pattern R2 for special deviation results (for example, 15 seconds) are set.

The variation pattern R1 is selected in a game round in which the result of the special drawing lottery is a winning result and the number of winnings reaches the ceiling number. When a fluctuation start command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern R1 is sent to the performance control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes a ceiling reaching performance as a game repeat performance. In the ceiling reaching performance, after a complete miss performance using symbol rows Z1 to Z3 notifies you of a missed result, a reaching notification performance that notifies you of reaching the ceiling number of times is executed. In addition, instead of or in addition to the arrival notification performance, at least a part of the start performance (for example, the start performance shown in FIG. 130(a)) corresponding to the transition to the second time-saving gaming state may be performed.

The variation pattern R2 is selected when the result of the special drawing success/failure lottery is a special failure result. When the fluctuation start command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern R2 is transmitted to the performance control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes a special out-of-reach performance as a game repeated performance. The special out-of-reach performance is to notify that a special out-of-reach result has been obtained, and is similar to the special out-of-reach performance shown in FIG. 153 according to the third modification.

In addition, in this modification, even if the result of the winning lottery is a special winning result, the transition to the third time-saving gaming state may be restricted. The above-mentioned variation pattern R2 is selected when a transition to the third time-saving gaming state occurs in the case of a special winning result, and when the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted, the variation pattern R2 is selected in the case where the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted. A variation pattern corresponding to a completely off performance is selected.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 182), after execution of step Sb3313, a fluctuation display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb712. The variable display flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner. After executing step Sb712, the processing from step Sb713 onwards is executed.

Next, the process for updating the high-frequency support mode in step Sb5301, the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb5302, and the process for determining transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb5303 will be explained. These processes are executed in the variation start process, in other words, they are executed when the variation display in the special figure game round is started.

<Processing for updating high-frequency support mode>
The high-frequency support mode update process in step Sb5301 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 184.

First, in step Sb5401, it is determined whether or not the result of the current special drawing lottery is a jackpot result. If it is not a jackpot result, it is determined in step Sb5402 whether any of the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The first support flag indicates that the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state, the second support flag indicates that the current gaming state is the second time-saving gaming state, and the third support flag indicates that the current gaming state This shows that the state is the third time-saving game state.

If these flags are set, the process advances to step Sb5403, and the values in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 are updated. Specifically, the value of the support counter area SC is subtracted by 1. As a result, the remaining number of times in each time-saving game state is subtracted by 1.

In step Sb5404, it is determined whether the value of the support counter area SC is "0". If the value of the support counter area SC is "0", that is, if the number of times the game is executed in each time-saving game state has reached the upper limit number of times, the process advances to step Sb5405, and the various flag storage areas 314e are stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. Set the time-saving termination flag to . The time-saving end flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that each time-saving gaming state should be ended.

After executing step Sb5405, the high-frequency support mode update process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb5401 (in the case of a jackpot result) or a negative determination is made in step Sb5402 (if neither support flag is set), the remaining number of times in each time-saving gaming state is not updated, and step Sb5403 The high-frequency support mode update process ends without executing subsequent processes. In addition, if a negative determination is made in step Sb5404 (if the value of the support counter area SC is not "0"), it is determined that each time-saving gaming state should not be ended, and the high-frequency support mode is entered without executing the process in step Sb5405. Finish the update process.

<Process for determining transition to second time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb5302 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 185.

First, in step Sb5501, it is determined whether or not the result of the current special drawing lottery is a jackpot result. If it is not a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step Sb5502, and it is determined whether the reached flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. The reached flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the number of missed games has reached the ceiling number.

If the reached flag is not set, it is determined in step Sb5503 whether a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the high probability flag is not set, that is, if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, the process advances to step Sb5504, and the value of the number of loses counter area HC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 is updated. . Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC. The missed number counter area HC is for the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number.

In step Sb5505, it is determined whether the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC is "0". If the value of the winning number counter area HC is "0", that is, if the number of winning games reaches the ceiling number, the process advances to step Sb5506, and the reached flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. .

In step Sb5507, it is determined whether any of the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set. If none of the support flags is set, that is, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, in step Sb5508, the second time saving start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e, and then, The process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is ended. The second time saving start flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the game should move to the second time saving gaming state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb5507 (if any support flag is set), the process proceeds to step Sb5509, and it is determined whether or not a time-saving termination flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. When the time-saving end flag is set, it means that it is the last game round of each time-saving game state. In this case, the process advances to step Sb5508, and a second time saving start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. That is, when the ceiling number of times is reached in the final game of each time-saving game state, it is processed that the game should move to the second time-saving game state.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb5509 (if the time-saving end flag is not set), that is, if you are staying in another time-saving gaming state and it is not the final game, the game will move to the second time-saving gaming state. Since it should not be done, the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is ended without executing the process of step Sb5508. This restricts the transition to the second time-saving gaming state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb5502 (if the reached flag is set) or if an affirmative determination is made in step Sb5503 (if the high probability flag is set), the process from step Sb5504 onward is not executed. The process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is ended. Further, if a negative determination is made in step Sb5505 (if the value of the number of misses counter area HC is not "0"), the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is ended without executing the process from step Sb5506 onward. .

When an affirmative determination is made in step Sb5501 (in the case of a jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sb5510, and a value (for example, 800) corresponding to the ceiling count is set in the value of the counter area HC. In step Sb5511, it is determined whether the reached flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

If the reached flag is set, a process to clear the reached flag is executed in step Sb5512. After execution of step Sb5512 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb5511 (when the reached flag is not set), the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving game state is ended.

<Process for determining transition to third time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb5303 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 186.

First, in step Sb5601, it is determined whether a special failure flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the special failure flag is set, that is, if the result of the current special drawing lottery is a special failure result, the process advances to step Sb5602, and whether the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e or not. Determine whether or not.

If the high probability flag is not set, that is, if the high probability gaming state is not set, in step Sb5603, one of the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Determine whether it is set. If any of these support flags is set, that is, if the current gaming state is one of the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, or the third time-saving gaming state, in step Sb5604, It is determined whether the time-saving termination flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb5603 (none of the support flags is set and the current gaming state is the normal gaming state) or if an affirmative determination is made in step Sb5604 (the time-saving end flag is set and each time-saving If it is the last game time in the game state), the process proceeds to step Sb5605, and it is determined whether or not the second time saving start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

If the flag for starting the second time saving is not set, that is, if the situation is not to shift to the second time saving gaming state, in step Sb5606, the flag for starting the third time saving is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. , After that, the process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is ended. The third time-saving start flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the game should move to the third time-saving game state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb5605 (if the second time-saving start flag is set), the process for determining the transition to the third time-saving game state is ended without executing the process in step Sb5606. That is, even if the result is a special failure, if the state should be shifted to the second time-saving game state, the shift to the third time-saving game state is restricted.

Therefore, if reaching the ceiling number of times and winning the special winning result are achieved in the same game round, the game state will shift to the second time-saving game state. The second time-saving gaming state has a higher maximum number of times than the third time-saving gaming state, and is a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous for the player, but with the above configuration, if both transition triggers are established at the same time. It is possible to shift to a time-saving gaming state that is more advantageous.

Here, the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb5302 (FIG. 185) and the process for determining transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb5303 (FIG. 186) are performed when the variable display of the special symbol game time is started. (More specifically, before the variable display time setting process in step Sb3313) (FIG. 182).

These processes are related to the restriction of transition to the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state, so originally, the timing of transition to each of these time-saving gaming states (start timing of confirmation display in special figure game round) It is natural to do so. However, in such a configuration, when both reaching the ceiling number of times and winning a special winning result are achieved in the same game round, when setting the variable display time (fluctuation pattern) in that game round, The MPU 312 only recognizes the special deviation result and does not recognize reaching the ceiling. Therefore, as the fluctuation pattern for that game round, the fluctuation pattern R2 (FIG. 183) corresponding to the special winning result is inevitably set.

In the subsequent fluctuation start command setting process in step Sb713 (FIG. 182), the fluctuation start command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern R2 is set, so in the performance control device 143, the special out-of-reach A You will recognize the performance. In other words, in the control of the game state, even though reaching the ceiling is prioritized over special missed results and transitions to the second time-saving game state, in the game repeat performance, the performance corresponding to the second time-saving game state (ceiling Instead of the performance corresponding to the arrival), the performance corresponding to the transition to the third time-saving gaming state (the performance notifying the winning of the special winning result) will be performed. That is, there is a concern that there will be a mismatch between the content of the game repeat performance and the time-saving gaming state to which the game will be transferred, leading to inconveniences such as players who have viewed the game repeat performance misunderstanding the time-saving gaming state to which they will be transferred.

In such cases, the above inconsistency can be resolved by performing exactly the same game replay effect when the ceiling is reached and when the special winning result is won. Even though various types of time-saving game states are provided, they cannot be utilized for production, which is undesirable.

In this regard, in this modification, since the processes of steps Sb5302 and Sb5303 are executed when the variable display of the special figure game time is started, the variable display time is can be set. Therefore, in a game round in which both the reaching the ceiling and the special missing result are established, the setting of the variation pattern R2 corresponding to the special missing result can be canceled and the variation pattern R1 (FIG. 183) corresponding to reaching the ceiling can be set. As a result, even if a game replay effect that corresponds to reaching the ceiling and a game replay effect that corresponds to a special result are provided separately, the game replay effect that matches the actual transition game state can be executed. This makes it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb5601 (the special outlier flag is not set) or an affirmative determination is made in step Sb5602 (the high probability flag is set), the process from step Sb5603 onward is not executed. The process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is ended.

Next, the process for ending the high-frequency support mode in step Sb5202 (FIG. 181), the process for transitioning to the time-saving gaming state in step Sb5203, and the process for starting the confirmation display in step Sb5204 will be described. These processes are executed when the variable display time has elapsed in the special figure game time, in other words, they are executed when the fixed display in the special figure game time is started.

<Processing for ending high-frequency support mode>
The high-frequency support mode termination process in step Sb5202 (FIG. 181) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 187.

First, in step Sb5701, it is determined whether any of the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If any of the support flags is set, that is, if you are staying in the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state, the process advances to step Sb5702, and the time-saving end Determine whether the flag is set. The time-saving end flag indicates that the time-saving gaming state during the stay should be ended; in other words, the current special figure game is the final special figure game in the time-saving gaming state during the stay. This indicates that it is the second time.

If the time-saving end flag is set, the process advances to step Sb5703, and the support flags set in the various flag storage areas 314e are cleared. As a result, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state ends. In the following step Sb5704, the time-saving termination flag set in the various flag storage areas 314e is cleared.

In step Sb5705, a corresponding game state end command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143, and then the high frequency support mode end process is ended. Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step Sb5701 (if none of the support flags are set) or if a negative determination is made in step Sb5702 (if the time-saving end flag is not set), the processes from step Sb5703 onward are executed. The high-frequency support mode termination process is terminated without doing so.

<Processing for transition to time-saving gaming state>
The time-saving gaming state transition process in step Sb5203 (FIG. 181) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 188.

First, in step Sb5801, it is determined whether or not the second time saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The second time saving start flag indicates that the game should move to the second time saving gaming state.

If the second time saving start flag is set, a second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sb5802. Thereby, the game shifts to the second time-saving game state.

Here, in this modification, the process for ending the high-frequency support mode in step Sb5202 (the process for ending the time-saving gaming state) is executed, and then the process for transitioning to the time-saving gaming state in step Sb5203 (the process for moving to the time-saving gaming state) It is configured to execute. Therefore, if the number of missed games reaches the ceiling number in the final game in another time-saving game state, the previous time-saving game state is transferred to the second time-saving game state without going through the normal game state. be able to.

In step Sb5803, a value (for example, 500) corresponding to the fifth upper limit is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. The support counter area SC is for the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode.

In step Sb5804, the second time-saving game state start command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143. The set second time saving game state start command is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107).

If a negative determination is made in step Sb5801 (if the second time saving start flag is not set), the process proceeds to step Sb5805, and it is determined whether or not the third time saving start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. do. The third time saving start flag indicates that the game should move to the third time saving gaming state.

If the third time saving start flag is set, a third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sb5806. Thereby, the game shifts to the third time-saving game state. In addition, if a special winning result occurs in the final game in another time-saving gaming state, it is possible to seamlessly transition from the preceding time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state without intervening the normal gaming state. .

In step Sb5807, a value (for example, 300) corresponding to the sixth upper limit is set in the support counter area SC. In step Sb5808, the third time-saving game state start command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143.

After executing step Sb5804 or step Sb5808, in step Sb5809, the time saving start flag set in the various flag storage areas 314e is cleared. In step Sb5810, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

If the second special figure flag is not set, that is, the current special figure game time is the first special figure game time, and the transition to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is from the normal game state. If it is the transition, the normal figure end process is executed in step Sb5811. This process is similar to the process of steps Sb1411 to Sb1415 in the process for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state in FIG. 119.

After executing step Sb5811, the time-saving gaming state transition process ends. Moreover, when an affirmative determination is made at step Sb5810 (when the second special symbol flag is set), the time saving game state transition process is ended without executing the process of step Sb5811. Further, if a negative determination is made in step Sb5805 (the third time-saving start flag is not set), that is, if the situation is not such that the time-saving gaming state should be shifted, the time-saving gaming state transition process is directly ended.

Here, in this modification, in the end control and transition control of the time-saving gaming state, the process of updating the number of games and the transition determination process of whether to shift to the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state are performed. While the process is performed at the start of the variable display, the process of actually ending the time-saving gaming state and the process of transitioning are performed after the variable display ends.

When updating the former number of times or determining the transition at the start of the variable display, the processing timing for the latter end processing or transition processing should not be set after the end of the variation, but at the same timing (processing times) as the former. It is possible that From the viewpoint of processing efficiency, it is preferable to execute the processes at the same timing, rather than dividing the processes and distributing the execution timings.

However, if the configuration is such that the end processing and transition processing are performed at the start of the variable display, the general figure game round and the general electric accessory 63a will correspond to the time-saving game state before the winning/failure lottery results are announced in the special figure game round. There is a possibility that the player may be able to infer a transition to the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state by observing these behaviors. The second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state is triggered when the result of a winning lottery becomes a winning result, so in the above case, the player will be able to grasp the winning result before the winning lottery result is announced. It leads to this. As a result, a situation arises in which the expectation of a jackpot in the special figure game round is quickly lost, which is undesirable in terms of increasing the attention level to the game round.

In this regard, according to this modification, since the transition to the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state occurs after the variable display ends, the general drawing game round or the general telephone call after the winning/failure lottery results are announced. The accessory 63a can be operated in a manner corresponding to the time-saving gaming state. As a result, it is possible to prevent a winning lottery result from being able to be determined before the winning lottery result is announced, and it is possible to suitably maintain expectations for a jackpot.

<Process for starting confirmation display>
The final display start process in step Sb5204 (FIG. 181) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 189. In FIG. 189, the same step numbers are given to processes similar to the final display start process in FIG. 149, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb5901, it is determined whether or not the current special figure game round is a game round where the player fails to reach the ceiling. If it is not a missed game time in which the ceiling has been reached, it is determined in step Sb5902 whether or not a special missed flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314.

If the special failure flag is set, that is, if the result of the current special symbol lottery is a special failure result, a process to clear the special failure flag is executed in step Sb5903. After execution of step Sb5903 or when an affirmative determination is made in step Sb5901 (if it is a missed game round where the ceiling is reached), it means that the situation is such that a shift to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state occurs.

In this case, in step Sb5904, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the second special figure flag is set, that is, if the current special figure game is the second special figure game, in step Sb5905, the fixed display time for the current special figure game is set as the normal Set the final display time (for example, 0.5 seconds). In addition, if a negative determination is made in step Sb5902 (the special out-of-play flag is not set), that is, if the result of the current special drawing lottery is a jackpot result or a normal out-of-the-box result, the process proceeds to step Sb5905 and the current confirmation is confirmed. The above normal confirmed display time is set as the display time.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb5904 (the second special figure flag is not set), that is, if the current special figure game is the first special figure game, the second time-saving game state or the third This means that the transition to the time-saving gaming state is a transition from the normal gaming state. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sb5906, and a specific fixed display time longer than the normal fixed display time is set as the fixed display time in the current special figure game round. In this case, the specific confirmed display time may be longer (for example, 0.8 sec) than the confirmed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the normal game game to be forcibly terminated, as in the second embodiment. Okay, as in the above modification example 2, the fixed display time of the normal game game session to be forcibly terminated, the variable display period (for example, 0.5 sec) of the normal game game session corresponding to the second time-saving gaming state, and the The time may be longer (for example, 4 seconds) than the total period (for example, 1.5 seconds) including the confirmed display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the normal figure game times corresponding to the 2-hour short game state.

After step Sb5905 or step Sb5906 is executed, a final display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb1504, and then the processes of step Sb1505 and step Sb1506 are sequentially executed.

In step Sb3512, a game round execution signal for notifying the execution of the special figure game round and a lottery result signal for notifying the result of the current special figure winning/failure lottery are output to the management control device on the game hall side. Performs external signal setting processing for In addition, in this modification, if a special winning result is obtained in a situation where the time saving game state is, the transition to the third time saving gaming state is restricted, but in the external signal setting process, even in such a case, the special winning result is restricted. Set so that the external signal corresponding to the

<About the flow of the gaming state>
The flow of the gaming state in this modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 190.

When the number of missed games reaches the ceiling number in the normal gaming state (event A), the normal gaming state shifts to the second time-saving gaming state. In this case, in the special figure game round in which the ceiling is reached, a ceiling reaching performance (FIG. 183) is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game round performance. In the ceiling reaching performance, a complete miss performance using symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and a reaching notification performance that notifies that the number of times the ceiling has been reached are executed.

Here, in this modification, the update of the number of misses counter area HC (update of the number of misses in the game) is performed at the start of the variable display in the special figure game (FIG. 182, FIG. 185), but the number of misses image 475 The update of the number of misses in (FIG. 128) is performed after the fixed display time has elapsed in the special figure game round, similarly to the second embodiment.

For example, if the display count of the miss count image 475 is updated at the update timing of the miss count counter area HC, the display count of the miss count image 475 will be incremented by 1 before the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed. In this case, there is a concern that the player may be able to predict the winning result before the lottery results are announced using the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, making it difficult to maintain expectations for a jackpot in that special pattern game round. be.

In this regard, as in this modification, the update timing of the number of misses image 475 is delayed relative to the update timing of the number of misses counter area HC, and the number of misses image 475 is updated after the confirmed display time has elapsed. The flow can be such that the display count of the failure count image 475 is incremented by 1 after the failure result is reported in the columns Z1 to Z3. This prevents the player from being able to predict in advance a winning result, making it possible to maintain expectations for a jackpot.

In the above configuration, if there is pending information corresponding to the next special figure game round, the number of missed times image 475 will be updated when that special figure game round is started, and the number of missed times image 475 will be updated in the next special figure game round. If there is no pending information corresponding to , the number of missed times image 475 will be updated after the special figure game round in which the number of missed times counter area HC has been updated ends.

Note that the update of the number-of-misses image 475 does not necessarily need to be performed when the final display time has elapsed, and may be performed at other timings. In other words, in order to avoid advance prediction of the winning result, it is sufficient that the winning number image 475 is updated after the win/fail lottery result is notified by the stop display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, so the winning number counter area HC is updated. In the special figure game round, the number-of-misses image 475 may be updated at any timing during the period from the end of the variable display until the end of the fixed display.

If a special winning result occurs in a normal gaming situation (event B), the normal gaming state shifts to a third time-saving gaming state. In this case, in the special symbol game round in which the special winning result is obtained, a special reach-missing effect (FIG. 183) is executed on the symbol display device 75.

If a special winning result occurs in a game other than the final game in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state (event C), the transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, and the first time-saving game state Or the second time saving game state is continued. In this case, in the special symbol game round that resulted in a special winning result, a complete winning performance is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game repetition performance. In addition, in the special figure display section 43, the picture corresponding to the special miss result is stopped and displayed.

If a special winning result occurs in the final game of the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state (event D), the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state shifts to the third time-saving game state. In addition, if the game session that resulted in a special winning result is the last game session of each time-saving gaming state, the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is permitted only after the update process of the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode (step Sb5301 high-frequency support mode update process) is executed to recognize the end of the time-saving gaming state, and then the third time-saving gaming state transition determination process (step Sb5303 third time-saving gaming state transition determination process) is executed. It is for the purpose of execution.

In the above case, in the special figure game round that resulted in a special winning result, a special reach-missing performance is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game repeat performance. Further, during at least part of the confirmed display time in the special figure game round, an additional performance (for example, the additional performance shown in FIG. 130(c)) is executed to notify that the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode has increased. At this time, the number of additions notified by the addition effect is the number of times (for example, 300) corresponding to the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state.

If the number of winning games reaches the ceiling number in a game other than the last game in the third time-saving game state (event E), the transition to the second time-saving game state is restricted, and the third time-saving game state is Continued. In this case, in the special figure game round in which the ceiling has been reached, a completely missed performance is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game round performance.

When the number of missed game times reaches the ceiling number in the final game time of the third time-saving game state (event F), the third time-saving game state shifts to the second time-saving game state. In this case, in the special figure game round in which the ceiling is reached, a ceiling reaching performance is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game round performance. Further, the above-mentioned additional performance is executed during at least a part of the fixed display time in the special figure game round.

In addition, in this modification, the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state is set to a smaller number than the ceiling number, so the number of missed game times reaches the ceiling number in the middle of the first time-saving game state or in the final game time. However, if the upper limit number of times and the ceiling number of times in the first time-saving game state are set to the same number of times as in the second embodiment, the result will be a loss in the final game time of the first time-saving game state. As a result, the first time-saving game state shifts to the second time-saving game state.

When the ceiling is reached and the special winning result is established in the same special figure game round in the normal gaming state (event G), the transition determination of the second time-saving gaming state (step Sb5302 process for determining the transition of the second time-saving gaming state) )→3rd time-saving gaming state transition determination (step Sb5303, third time-saving gaming state transition determination process), the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is prioritized. That is, if you are in the time-saving game state, the transition to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is restricted, so the transition to the second time-saving game state is determined by the previous transition determination of the second time-saving game state. By being determined, the transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted in the later transition determination of the third time-saving game state. Thereby, it is possible to avoid shifting to the third time-saving gaming state, which is disadvantageous to the player, and to shift to the second time-saving gaming state, which is advantageous to the player.

In this case, in the special figure game round in which both the ceiling reaching and the special missing result are established, the ceiling reaching performance is executed on the symbol display device 75 as the game round performance. In addition, in the special figure display section 43, the picture corresponding to the special miss result is stopped and displayed.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

A second time-saving gaming state that is triggered by the number of winning games reaching a ceiling number, and a time-saving gaming state that is more disadvantageous for the player than the second time-saving gaming state and is triggered by a special winning result. In a configuration having a third time-saving gaming state that transitions to the second time-saving gaming state, even if a special result occurs during the second time-saving gaming state, the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted, and In the game game shown in the figure, the configuration is such that after the transition determination to the second time-saving game state is performed, the transition determination to the third time-saving game state is performed.

According to this configuration, when reaching the ceiling number of times and winning a special winning result are established in the same special figure game round, the transition condition to the second time-saving game state is determined in the transition determination of the second time-saving game state. Even if it is determined in the transition determination of the third time-saving game state that the transition condition to the third time-saving game state is established after it is determined that the above is satisfied, the transition to the third time-saving game state is avoided due to the above restrictions. . As a result, the transition to the second time-saving gaming state, which is more advantageous, is carried out, and the gaming state can be suitably controlled.

The configuration is such that the determination of transition to the second time-saving game state and the determination of transition to the third time-saving game state are performed at the start of the special figure game round.

In the above configuration, since the transition determination of the second time-saving game state and the transition determination of the third time-saving game state are performed at the start of the special figure game round, the game round performance may include a ceiling reaching performance corresponding to the reaching of the ceiling number of times. , each of these transition determinations can be made before the execution of the special out-of-reach performance corresponding to the special out-of-reach result is set. For example, if reaching the ceiling number of times and winning a special winning result are achieved in the same special figure game round, both the above-mentioned ceiling reaching effect and special reaching out effect are established as the execution target of the game repeat effect. However, according to this configuration, it is possible to select each of the above effects based on the fact that the transition to the third time-saving game state is avoided and the transition to the second time-saving game state is prioritized. . Thereby, when the time-saving gaming state of the transfer destination is adjusted to either one, it becomes possible to suitably execute a game repeat performance that matches the adjusted time-saving gaming state of the transfer destination.

The transition to the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state are determined at the start of a special figure game round, while the transition to each of the time-saving game states is performed in accordance with the start of a confirmation display.

Once you have executed the transition determination for the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state, and determined the transition to each time-saving gaming state or the destination time-saving gaming state, you can save time according to the decision result. All that is required is a transition to a gaming state (simply setting the time-saving flags corresponding to the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314). For this reason, in the configuration in which each of these transition determinations is performed at the start of the special figure game round, it becomes natural that the transition to the time-saving game state is also performed at the start of the special figure game round.

However, if the transition to the time-saving gaming state is made at the start of the special figure game round, the player's interest will shift to the time-saving gaming state even before the result of the special drawing lottery is announced. There is a concern that the role of the gaming session will not be properly fulfilled. In this respect, by waiting for the start of the confirmation display before transitioning to the time-saving gaming state, even if the player notices the time-saving gaming state from the behavior of the general electric utility object 63a, the special drawing lottery will be canceled. It is possible to have a configuration in which attention is focused on the game round until the result is announced, and then attention is shifted to the transition to the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, while suppressing the loss of attention to the game round, each of the above transition determinations is executed at the start of the special figure game round, and a game round performance that is consistent with the adjusted time-saving game state of the transition destination is executed. It becomes possible to do so.

Further, the conditions for transition to the second time-saving gaming state and the conditions for transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state are both satisfied when the result of the special drawing winning/failure lottery is a losing result. For this reason, if the transition to the time-saving gaming state is made at the start of a special drawing game round, even before the results of the special drawing lottery are announced, the player may not realize the time-saving gaming state and may deviate from the result. There is also the disadvantage that it can be determined in advance. In this regard, by waiting for the start of the confirmation display before transitioning to the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences.

After the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated, the transition determination to the second time-saving game state and the transition determination to the third time-saving game state are performed.

According to this configuration, for example, if a special winning result occurs in the final game round of the second time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state is ended in the final game round, and then the third time-saving game state is entered. can be moved to. As a result, it is possible to prevent winnings for special winning results from being invalidated and the transition to the third time-saving game state to be restricted, and also to prevent the transition to the third time-saving game state from being restricted, and also to prevent the transition to the third time-saving game state from being restricted. It becomes possible to switch from the gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state.

Regarding the transition to the third time-saving gaming state, a special reach-out performance (notification corresponding to the special winning result or transition to the third time-saving gaming state) is set based on the result of the special drawing lottery. (step Sb3313) and a process (step Sb5504) of updating the number of losing game times as related to the transition to the second time-saving gaming state. In the game shown in Figure 1), the latter update process is configured to be performed before the former setting process is performed.

For example, if the configuration is such that the former setting process is executed before the latter update process, in a special pattern game round in which both reaching the ceiling number of times and winning a special winning result are achieved, at the setting process stage, The pachinko machine 10 only recognizes the winning of the special winning result and does not recognize the reaching of the ceiling number of times. In this case, the setting result will inevitably be to execute the special reach-out performance, but since the time-saving gaming state to which the actual transition is made will be adjusted to the second time-saving gaming state, the notification that does not match the time-saving gaming state to which the adjustment will be made will be made. It will be done. In this regard, by executing the latter update process before the former setting process, the pachinko machine 10 can recognize that the ceiling number of times has been reached at the setting process stage, and can cancel the execution of the special out-of-reach effect. . As a result, it is possible to adjust the destination time-saving game state while suppressing notifications that are inconsistent with the type of time-saving game state to which the transition is actually made in the special figure game round, and to control the game state appropriately. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, if a special winning result is obtained in a special figure game round in which the cumulative number of winning game times does not reach the ceiling number, execution of the special reach-missing effect is set after the number of winning game times is updated. That is, when only the transition condition to the third time-saving gaming state is satisfied, the corresponding notification can be appropriately performed.

The symbol display device 75 displays the number-of-misses image 475, and the display contents are updated after the fixed display time has elapsed.

In the above configuration, by displaying the missed number image 475, the player can grasp the progress of the cumulative number of times, the remaining number of times until the ceiling number, etc., and use this as useful information in playing the game thereafter. can do. In this case, in the configuration in which the number of times of failure is updated prior to setting the notification corresponding to the special failure result, the update process is performed at a relatively early stage in the special figure game round. In such a case, if the display content of the number of winnings image 475 is immediately updated in response to the update of the number of winnings, the player will lose even though the result of the special drawing lottery has not yet been announced. There is a concern that it may be possible to determine that it is a result. In this regard, by waiting until the end of the confirmation display to update the miss count image 475, it is possible to prevent the miss result from being able to be determined in advance. As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation of a big win, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game round.

<Modification 7>
In the above modification 6, even if the ceiling is reached or a special failure occurs during the time-saving game state, the transition to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is restricted, but in this modification, these transitions are restricted. configured to be acceptable. The configuration of this modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 191 to 194. In these figures, the same components as those in the second embodiment and each modification are designated by the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

The structure of the winning/failure table and the type table of the special figure game round in this modification is the same as the winning/failure table and the type table of the above-mentioned modification 6 shown in FIGS. 178 to 179. Further, the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state are also similar to the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state of the sixth modification example shown in FIG. 179. That is, the second time-saving game state is continued more often than the third time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state is a more advantageous time-saving game state for the player.

<Fluctuation start processing>
The fluctuation start process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 191. This process is executed in step Sb5201 of the special figure game time control process (FIG. 181), and is executed in place of the fluctuation start process of FIG. 182. In FIG. 191, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 182, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing step Sb3307, step Sb3311 or step Sb3312, that is, after setting the stop result corresponding to each win/fail lottery result, in step Sb5301, to update the number of special symbol game times in the high frequency support mode. Executes the process for updating the high-frequency support mode. In step Sb6101, a process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is executed to determine whether the transition opportunity to the third time-saving gaming state has been established, and in step Sb6102, the transition trigger to the second time-saving gaming state is established. A process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is executed to determine whether or not it has been established. That is, in the above modification 6, the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving game state was executed and then the process for determining the transition to the third time-saving game state was executed, but in this modification, the process for determining the transition to the third time-saving game state was executed. After the determination process is executed, the transition determination process for the second time-saving gaming state is executed. Details of step Sb6101 and step Sb6102 will be described later.

After executing step Sb6102, in step Sb3313, a variable display time setting process for setting a variable display time for the current game round in the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS is executed. In this modification, as well as in modification 6, a fluctuation pattern R1 (for example, 18 seconds) for reaching the ceiling and a fluctuation pattern R2 (for example, 15 seconds) for special deviation results are set (FIG. 183). . After executing step Sb3313, the processing from step Sb712 onwards is executed.

<Process for determining transition to third time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb6101 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 192. In FIG. 192, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as the transition determination process of the third time-saving game state in FIG. 186, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb5601, it is determined whether a special failure flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the special outlier flag is set, it is determined in step Sb5602 whether a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, it is determined in step Sb6201 whether the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. . If any of these support flags is set, that is, if the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, or the third time-saving gaming state, in step Sb6202, A time-saving termination flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. That is, in this modification, if a special winning result occurs in a situation where the player is in the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state, the time-saving game state during the stay is configured to be terminated. There is.

After executing step Sb6202 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb6201 (if none of the support flags are set), in step Sb6203, a third time saving start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e, and then , the process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state ends. The third time-saving start flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the game should move to the third time-saving game state.

<Process for determining transition to second time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb6102 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 193. In FIG. 193, the same step numbers are given to the same steps as the transition determination process of the second time-saving gaming state in FIG. 185, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb5503 (the high probability flag is not set), the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 is updated in step Sb5504. In step Sb5505, it is determined whether the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC is "0". If the value of the winning number counter area HC is "0", that is, if the number of winning games reaches the ceiling number, the process advances to step Sb5506, and the reached flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. .

In step Sb6301, it is determined whether any of the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of these support flags is set, that is, if the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, or the third time-saving gaming state, in step Sb6302, A time-saving termination flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

After executing step Sb6302 or if a negative determination is made in step Sb6301 (if none of the support flags are set), in step Sb6303, check whether the third time saving start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Determine whether or not. If the flag for starting the third time saving is set, that is, if the special figure game round reaches the ceiling and the result is a special failure, proceed to step Sb6304 and perform the process of clearing the flag for starting the third time saving. Execute. As a result, the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is canceled.

After executing step Sb6304 or if a negative determination is made in step Sb6303 (if the third time saving start flag is not set), a second time saving start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb6305, Thereafter, the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is ended. The second time saving start flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the game should move to the second time saving gaming state.

In this way, in this modification, if both the ceiling reaching and the special winning result are achieved in the same game round, the game should first shift to the third time-saving gaming state based on the winning of the special winning result. This is set, and then it is rewritten to indicate that the second time-saving game state should be entered based on the establishment of reaching the ceiling. The second time-saving gaming state has a higher maximum number of times than the third time-saving gaming state, and is a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous for the player, but with the above configuration, if both transition triggers are established at the same time. It is possible to shift to a time-saving gaming state that is more advantageous.

In addition, the process for updating the high-frequency support mode in step Sb5301, the process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb6101, the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb6102, the setting of the variable display time in step Sb3313 Executed prior to processing. For this reason, in the special figure game round where both the ceiling reaching and the special winning result are achieved, the decision result that prioritizes transition to the second time-saving game state can be reflected in the selection of the variable display time (variable pattern). . Specifically, if a special figure game round in which the number of losing game times reaches the ceiling number also has a special winning result at the same time, the fluctuation pattern R1 corresponding to reaching the ceiling is set as the fluctuation pattern for that game round (Fig. 183) can be set. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute a game replay performance that matches the transitioning game state.

<About the flow of the gaming state>
The flow of the gaming state in this modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 194. Incidentally, since the events A to B are the same as those of the event A to B in the sixth modification, the explanation will be omitted.

If a special winning result occurs in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state (event C), the time-saving game state shifts from each time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state. In this case, in the special figure game round in which the special winning result is obtained, a special reach-out performance is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game repetition performance.

If the number of missed games reaches the ceiling number in the third time-saving game state (event D), the third time-saving game state shifts to the second time-saving game state. In this case, in the special figure game round in which the ceiling is reached, a ceiling reaching performance is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game round performance.

If the ceiling is reached and the special winning result is established in the same special figure game round in the normal gaming state (event E), the transition determination of the third time-saving gaming state (processing for determining the transition of the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb6101) )→Determination of transition to the second time-saving gaming state (processing for determining transition of the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb6102), giving priority to the transition to the second time-saving gaming state. In other words, if a transition opportunity is established during the time-saving gaming state, the transition to the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state is allowed, so the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is determined by the transition to the third time-saving gaming state. This is because even if it is determined to shift to the second time-saving game state, the determination result is changed so that the second time-saving game state is shifted to the second time-saving game state. Thereby, it is possible to avoid shifting to the third time-saving gaming state, which is disadvantageous to the player, and to shift to the second time-saving gaming state, which is advantageous to the player.

In this case, in the special figure game round in which both the ceiling reaching and the special missing result are established, the ceiling reaching performance is executed on the symbol display device 75 as the game round performance. In addition, in the special figure display section 43, the picture corresponding to the special miss result is stopped and displayed.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

A second time-saving gaming state that is triggered by the number of winning games reaching a ceiling number, and a time-saving gaming state that is more disadvantageous for the player than the second time-saving gaming state and is triggered by a special winning result. In a configuration having a third time-saving game state that transitions to the third time-saving game state, if a special result occurs in the middle of the second time-saving game state, the transition to the third time-saving game state is allowed, and then the first In the special figure game round, the configuration is such that after the transition determination to the third time-saving game state is performed, the transition determination to the second time-saving game state is performed.

According to this configuration, when reaching the ceiling number of times and winning a special winning result are achieved in the same special figure game round, the transition to the third time-saving game state is determined by the transition determination of the third time-saving game state. Even if it is determined, the transition to the second time-saving game state is determined in the transition determination of the second time-saving game state, thereby canceling the result of the transition determination of the third time-saving game state. . As a result, the transition to the second time-saving gaming state, which is more advantageous, is carried out, and the gaming state can be suitably controlled.

<Modification 8>
In the above modifications 6 and 7, the order of the transition determination process for the second time-saving gaming state and the transition determination process for the third time-saving gaming state is fixed, but in this modification, these orders are switched. configured to be possible. The configuration of this modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 195 to 200. In these figures, the same components as those in the second embodiment and each modification are designated by the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In this modification, as in the above-mentioned modification 6, if the number of winning games reaches the ceiling number in the time-saving gaming state or the winning/failure lottery result becomes a special winning result, the second time-saving It is configured such that transition to the gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state is restricted.

Further, the structure of the winning/failing table and the type table of the special figure game round in this modification is the same as the winning/failing table and the type table of the above-described modified example 6 shown in FIGS. 178 to 179. Further, the second time-saving game state that is triggered by the number of missed game times reaching the ceiling number is also the same as the second time-saving game state of the above modification 6 shown in FIG. 179.

However, in this modification, a plurality of types of special out-of-order results are set, and a plurality of types of the third time-saving game state are also set.

<Special exit type table and third time-saving game state>
The special winning type table and the third time-saving game state according to this modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 195.

In this modification, a special winning type table (for the first special figure) is provided as a type table different from the jackpot type table. The type table for special winnings (for the first special drawing) is a type table that is referred to when the win/fail lottery result of the first special drawing becomes a special winning result, and is stored in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313. ing.

As shown in FIG. 195(a), in the special deviation type table (for the first special figure), special deviation result A and special deviation result B are set as selectable special deviation types. The special winning result A is a special winning result that moves to the third time-saving game state A, and the special winning result B is a special winning result that moves to the third time-saving gaming state B.

As shown in FIG. 195(b), the third time-saving game state A is a time-saving game state that continues until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined sixth upper limit number of times (for example, 300 times). . The sixth upper limit number of times is smaller than the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 500 times) of the second time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state is a time-saving game that is more advantageous for the player than the third time-saving game state A. It is in a state.

The third time-saving game state B is a time-saving game state that continues until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined seventh upper limit number of times (for example, 700 times). The seventh upper limit number of times is greater than the fifth upper limit number of times in the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state B is a time-saving game state that is more advantageous for the player than the second time-saving game state. .

In the special winning type table (for the first special figure), "0" to "89" of jackpot type counter C2 correspond to special winning result A, and "90" to "99" correspond to special winning result B. are doing. That is, the probability of being assigned to special outlier result A is set to 90%, and the probability of being assigned to special outlier result B is set to 10%.

A special winning result is also set in the win/fail lottery for the second special drawing (FIG. 178(a)), but only one type of special winning result is set for the second special drawing. That is, the type table for special misses corresponding to the second special figure is not set. When a special winning result is obtained in the winning/failure lottery of the second special symbol, the game shifts to a third time-saving game state A. Note that this configuration is for convenience in order to facilitate understanding and explanation, and a plurality of types of special off results for the second special figure may be set.

<Fluctuation start processing>
The fluctuation start process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 196. This process is executed in step Sb5201 of the special figure game time control process (FIG. 181), and is executed in place of the fluctuation start process of FIG. 182. In FIG. 196, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 182, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing step Sb3307, step Sb3311 or step Sb3312, that is, after setting the stop result corresponding to each win/fail lottery result, in step Sb5301, to update the number of special symbol game times in the high frequency support mode. Executes the process for updating the high-frequency support mode.

In step Sb6501, it is determined whether or not a special failure flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the special winning flag is set, that is, if the result of the current special drawing lottery is a special winning result, the process advances to step Sb6502, and it is determined whether the type of the special winning result is special winning result B or not. judge. The special winning result B is an opportunity to move to the third time-saving game state B, and the third time-saving game state B is a time-saving game state that is more advantageous for the player than the second time-saving game state that is triggered by reaching the ceiling. It is.

If the type of the special deviation result is not special deviation result B, it means that it is special deviation result A. The special winning result A triggers the transition to the third time-saving game state A, and the third time-saving game state A is a time-saving game state that is more disadvantageous for the player than the second time-saving game state. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sb6503 to execute the determination process A for transition to the second time-saving gaming state, and then, in step Sb6504, execute the determination process A for transition to the third time-saving gaming state.

The determination processing A for transition to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb6503 and the determination processing A for transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb6504 are the determination processing A for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb5302 according to the above modification 6. The process (FIG. 185) is similar to the third time-saving gaming state transition determination process (FIG. 186) of step Sb5303. Therefore, if reaching the ceiling number of times and winning a special winning result are achieved in the same game round, and the type of the special winning result is special winning result A, the time-saving game will reflect the reaching the ceiling number of times. Transition processing to the state is performed. That is, the transition to the third time-saving gaming state A is restricted, and it is determined that the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is to be performed.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step Sb6501 (when the special winning flag is not set), that is, when the current special symbol lottery result is a normal winning result, the process proceeds to step Sb6503.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb6502 (when the type of the special failure result is special failure result B), determination processing B for transition to the third time-saving gaming state is executed in step Sb6505, and then, in step Sb6506, the 2. Execute determination process B for transition to time-saving gaming state. That is, processing is performed in the reverse order of the case where a negative determination is made in step Sb6502.

Here, the determination process B for transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb6505 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 197. In FIG. 197, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as the transition determination process for the third time-saving game state in FIG. 186, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

As shown in FIG. 197, the determination process B for transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb6505 is basically the same as the determination process for transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state in FIG. 186, but the process in step Sb5605 is They are different in that they are not equipped. Step Sb5605 is for restricting the transition to the third time-saving game state when the second time-saving start flag is set (if the situation is such that it should transition to the second time-saving game state), but step Sb6505 In the determination processing B for transition to the third time-saving gaming state, such processing is not executed. In other words, without considering whether or not the situation is such that the situation should shift to the second time-saving gaming state, if the user is not staying in another time-saving gaming state, the third time-saving gaming state is assumed to be the one that should shift to the third time-saving gaming state. Set flag.

Next, the determination processing B for transition to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb6506 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 198. In FIG. 198, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as the transition determination process for the second time-saving game state in FIG. 185, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

As shown in FIG. 198, the determination process B for transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb6506 is basically the same as the determination process for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state in FIG. 185, but the process in step Sb6601 is They are different in that they are equipped. Step Sb6601 is for restricting the transition to the second time-saving game state when the third time-saving start flag is set. Therefore, if reaching the ceiling number of times and winning a special winning result are achieved in the same game round, and the type of the special winning result is special winning result B, the winning to the special winning result will be reflected. A transition process to a time-saving gaming state is performed. That is, the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is restricted, and it is determined that the transition to the third time-saving gaming state B is performed.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 196), after step Sb6504 or step Sb6506 is executed, a fluctuation display time setting process is executed in step Sb3313. In the variable display time setting process, if the number of winning games has reached the ceiling number, a fluctuation pattern R1 (FIG. 183) corresponding to reaching the ceiling is set, and if the win/fail lottery result is a special winning result. sets a variation pattern R2 corresponding to the special deviation result. However, if both reaching the ceiling number of times and winning a special winning result occur in the same game, the fluctuation pattern will be set taking into account the decision result of which time-saving gaming state to transition to. do. Specifically, when it is determined to move to the second time-saving game state, a fluctuation pattern R1 corresponding to reaching the ceiling is set, and when it is decided to move to the third time-saving game state B. sets a variation pattern R2 corresponding to the special deviation result. After executing step Sb3313, the processing from step Sb712 onwards is executed.

<Processing for transition to time-saving gaming state>
The time saving game state transition process according to this modification will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 199. This process is executed in step Sb5203 of the special figure game time control process (FIG. 181), and is executed in place of the time-saving game state transition process of FIG. 188. In FIG. 199, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 188, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb5801 (if the second time saving start flag is not set), in step Sb5805, it is determined whether or not the third time saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. judge. If the third time saving start flag is set, in step Sb5806, a third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. Thereby, the game shifts to the third time-saving game state.

In step Sb6701, it is determined whether the type of the special deviation result is special deviation result B. If it is not the special failure result B, that is, if it is the special failure result A, the process advances to step Sb6702, and a value corresponding to the sixth upper limit number (for example, 300) is stored in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. Set. As a result, the third time-saving game state to be transferred is set to the third time-saving game state A.

When an affirmative determination is made in step Sb6701 (special deviation result B), the process proceeds to step Sb6703, and a value (for example, 700) corresponding to the seventh upper limit number of times is set in the support counter area SC. As a result, the third time-saving game state to be transferred is set to the third time-saving game state B.

After execution of step Sb6702 or step Sb6703, in step Sb6704, the third time-saving game state start command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 143. At that time, when transitioning to the third time-saving game state A, a start command corresponding to the third time-saving game state A is set, and when moving to the third time-saving game state B, a start command corresponding to the third time-saving game state B is set. Set the start command. Each of these start commands includes information indicating the upper limit number of times.

After executing step Sb5804 or step Sb6704, in step Sb5809, a process of clearing the time saving start flag is executed. Thereafter, the processing from step Sb5810 onwards is executed.

<About the flow of the gaming state>
The flow of the gaming state in this modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 200. Incidentally, since the event A is the same as the case of the event A in the above modification 6, the explanation will be omitted.

When a special winning result A or a special winning result B occurs in a normal gaming situation (event B), the normal gaming state shifts to a third time-saving gaming state A or a third time-saving gaming state B. In this case, in the special figure game round that resulted in a special winning result, a special reach-out performance (FIG. 183) is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game repetition performance.

If the special winning result A or the special winning result B occurs in a game session other than the final game session in the first time saving game state or the second time saving game state (event C), the third time saving game state A or the third time saving game Transition to state B is restricted, and the first time-saving gaming state or the second time-saving gaming state continues. In this case, in the special symbol game round that resulted in a special winning result, a complete winning performance is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game repetition performance. In addition, in the special figure display section 43, the picture corresponding to the special miss result is stopped and displayed.

If a special winning result A or a special winning result B occurs in the final game of the first time-saving gaming state or the second time-saving gaming state (event D), the third time-saving gaming state A or the third Transition to time-saving game state B. In this case, in the special figure game round in which the special winning result is obtained, a special reach-out performance is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game repetition performance.

If the number of missed games reaches the ceiling number in a game other than the final game in the third time-saving game state A or the third time-saving game state B (event E), the transition to the second time-saving game state is restricted. Then, the third time-saving game state A or the third time-saving game state B is continued. In this case, in the special figure game round in which the ceiling has been reached, a completely missed performance is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game round performance.

If the number of missed games reaches the ceiling number in the final game of the third time-saving game state A or the third time-saving game state B (event F), the second time-saving game state is changed from each of the third time-saving game states. to move to. In this case, in the special figure game round in which the ceiling is reached, a ceiling reaching performance is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game round performance.

If the ceiling is reached and the special winning result A is established in the same special figure game in the normal gaming state (event G), the second time-saving gaming state transition determination (step Sb6503 for the second time-saving gaming state transition determination) By executing the processes in the order of process A) → third time-saving gaming state transition determination (step Sb6504, third time-saving gaming state transition determination process A), the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is prioritized. Ru. That is, when the time-saving game state is in progress, the transition to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state A is restricted, so the transition to the second time-saving game state is determined by the previous transition determination of the second time-saving game state. By determining, the transition to the third time-saving game state A is restricted in the later determination of transition to the third time-saving game state. Thereby, it is possible to avoid shifting to the third time-saving gaming state A, which is disadvantageous to the player, and to shift to the second time-saving gaming state, which is advantageous to the player.

In this case, in the special figure game round in which both the ceiling reaching and the special missing result are established, the ceiling reaching performance is executed on the symbol display device 75 as the game round performance. In addition, in the special figure display section 43, the pattern corresponding to the special missing result A is stopped and displayed.

If the ceiling is reached and the special winning result B is established in the same special figure game round in the normal gaming state (event H), the transition determination for the third time-saving gaming state (step Sb6505 for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state) By executing the processes in the order of process B)→determination of transition to the second time-saving game state (processing B for determining transition to the second time-saving game state in step Sb6506), priority is given to transition to the third time-saving game state B. be done. In other words, if you are in the time-saving game state, the transition to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state B is restricted, so the transition to the third time-saving game state B is determined by the previous transition judgment of the third time-saving game state. By determining the transition, the transition to the second time-saving game state is restricted in the later transition determination of the second time-saving game state. Thereby, it is possible to avoid shifting to the second time-saving gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player, and to shift to the third time-saving gaming state B which is advantageous to the player. In this case, in the special figure game round in which both the reaching the ceiling and the special out-of-reach result are achieved, a special out-of-reach performance is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game round performance.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

A second time-saving gaming state that is triggered by the number of winning games reaching a ceiling number, and a time-saving gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the second time-saving gaming state and triggered by a special winning result. In a configuration having a third time-saving game state B that transitions to the third time-saving game state B, even if a special failure result occurs during the second time-saving game state, the transition to the third time-saving game state B is restricted; In the special figure game round, the configuration is such that after the transition determination of the third time-saving game state B (step Sb6505) is performed, the transition determination of the second time-saving game state (step Sb6506) is performed.

According to this configuration, when reaching the ceiling number of times and winning a special winning result are established in the same special figure game round, the transition to the third time-saving game state B is determined by the transition to the third time-saving game state B. After it is determined that the transition conditions are satisfied, even if it is determined in the transition determination of the second time-saving gaming state that the transition conditions to the second time-saving gaming state are satisfied, the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is avoided due to the above restrictions. be done. As a result, the transition to the third time-saving gaming state B, which is more advantageous, is carried out, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

It has a third time-saving game state A that is more disadvantageous than the second time-saving game state, and a third time-saving game state B that is more advantageous than the second time-saving game state. When the result is established in the same special figure game, the type of the special winning result (type of the third time-saving game state to which the game is transferred) is referred to, and the order of transfer determination is switched based on the result.

According to this configuration, when reaching the ceiling number of times and winning a special winning result are achieved in the same special figure game round, the type of the special winning result is special winning result A (more disadvantageous than the second time-saving game state). If the type corresponds to the transition to the third time-saving game state A), the transition determination of the second time-saving game state (step Sb6503) → the transition determination of the third time-saving game state A (step Sb6504) is performed. When the process is executed and the type of the special winning result is special winning result B (type corresponding to transition to the third time saving gaming state B which is more advantageous than the second time saving gaming state), the third time saving gaming state Processing can be executed in the order of B transition determination (step Sb6505)→second time-saving gaming state transition determination (step Sb6506). With such a configuration, even if there is a plurality of third time-saving game states, and there is a mixture of those that are more disadvantageous and those that are more advantageous than the second time-saving game state, the time-saving game that is more advantageous will always be selected. Priority can be given to transition to the gaming state.

<Modification 9>
In this modification, in the special figure game game when the number of missed game times reaches the ceiling number and the conditions for transition to the second time-saving game state are satisfied, the process of determining whether to transition to the third time-saving game state is performed. It is configured not to run. The configuration of this modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202.

In this modification, as in Modification 8 above, if the number of winning games reaches the ceiling number in the time-saving gaming state, or if the win/fail lottery result becomes a special winning result, the second time-saving It is configured such that transition to the gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state is restricted.

The win/fail table, jackpot type table, and second time-saving game state of the special figure game round in this modification are the same as the win/fail table, jackpot type table, and second time-saving game state of Modification 6 shown in FIGS. 178 to 179. It is. Further, the special loss type table and the third time-saving game state in this modification are the same as the special loss type table and the third time-saving game state of the above-mentioned modification 8 shown in FIG. 195. That is, the third time-saving game state has a third time-saving game state A and a third time-saving game state B, and the third time-saving game state A has a lower upper limit number of times than the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state B is a time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is greater than the second time-saving game state.

<Fluctuation start processing>
The fluctuation start process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 201. This process is executed in step Sb5201 of the special symbol game time control process (FIG. 181) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the fluctuation start process of FIG. 196. In FIG. 201, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 196, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing step Sb3307, step Sb3311 or step Sb3312, that is, after setting the stop result corresponding to each win/fail lottery result, in step Sb5301, to update the number of special symbol game times in the high frequency support mode. Executes the process for updating the high-frequency support mode.

In step Sb7201, a transition determination process for the second time-saving gaming state is executed to determine whether to transition to the second time-saving gaming state. This process is similar to the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state in FIG. 185 according to the sixth modification.

Referring to FIG. 185, the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb7201 will be described. First, in step Sb5501, it is determined whether or not the result of the current special drawing lottery is a jackpot result. If it is not a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step Sb5502, and it is determined whether the reached flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314.

If the reached flag is not set, it is determined in step Sb5503 whether a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the high probability flag is not set, the process advances to step Sb5504, and the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 is updated.

In step Sb5505, it is determined whether the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC is "0". If the value of the winning number counter area HC is "0", that is, if the number of winning games reaches the ceiling number, the process advances to step Sb5506, and the reached flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. .

In step Sb5507, it is determined whether any of the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set. If any of the support flags is set, it is determined in step Sb5509 whether or not a time-saving termination flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb5507 (when none of the support flags are set) or an affirmative determination is made in step Sb5509 (when the time-saving end flag is set), the various flags described above are stored in step Sb5508. A second time saving start flag is set in area 314e. The second time saving start flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the game should move to the second time saving gaming state.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 201), after executing the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb7201, the second time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb7202. Determine whether it is set. If the flag for starting the second time-saving game is not set, that is, if the situation is not such that the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is necessary, in step Sb7203, a process for determining whether to transition to the third time-saving gaming state A process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is executed. This process is similar to the process B for determining the transition to the third time-saving game state in FIG. 197 according to the eighth modification.

Referring to FIG. 197, the process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb7203 will be described. First, in step Sb5601, it is determined whether or not a special out flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the special winning flag is set, that is, if the result of the current special drawing lottery is a special winning result (special winning result A or special winning result B), the process advances to step Sb5602, and the various flags described above are stored. It is determined whether a high probability flag is set in area 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, it is determined in step Sb5603 whether the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. . If any of these support flags is set, it is determined in step Sb5604 whether or not a time-saving termination flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb5603 (none of the support flags is set and the current gaming state is the normal gaming state) or an affirmative determination is made in step Sb5604 (the time-saving termination flag is set, If it is the last game round of each time-saving game state), in step Sb5606, a third time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. The third time-saving start flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the game should move to the third time-saving game state.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 201), if an affirmative determination is made in step Sb7202 (if the second time saving start flag is set), the process proceeds to step Sb7204, and a special out-of-order flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. Determine whether or not is set. If the special winning flag is set, that is, if the result of the current special symbol lottery is a special winning result, in step Sb7205, processing is executed to clear the set special winning flag.

After executing Step Sb7203 and Step Sb7205, or if a negative determination is made in Step Sb7204 (when the special off flag is not set), in Step Sb3313, the current time in the first special figure display section AS or second special figure display section BS is A variable display time setting process is executed to set a variable display time for the game times. In this modification, as well as in modification 6, a fluctuation pattern R1 (for example, 18 seconds) for reaching the ceiling and a fluctuation pattern R2 (for example, 15 seconds) for special deviation results are set (FIG. 183). . After executing step Sb3313, the processing from step Sb712 onwards is executed.

<About the flow of the gaming state>
The flow of the gaming state in this modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 202. Incidentally, since events A to F are the same as those of event A to event F in the above modification 8, their explanation will be omitted.

In this modification, the process is executed in the order of the transition determination process for the second time-saving gaming state (step Sb7201) → the transition determination process for the third time-saving gaming state (step Sb7203), and the transition determination for the second time-saving gaming state is performed. When the flag for starting the second time saving game is set in the process, execution of the process for determining the transition to the third time saving game state is avoided. Therefore, if the ceiling is reached and the special winning result A or B is established in the same special figure game round in the normal game state (event G), the transition to the third time-saving game state A or B is restricted, and the normal game The state shifts to a second time-saving game state.

In this case, in the special symbol game round in which both the ceiling reaching and the special missing result A or B are established, a ceiling reaching performance is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game round performance. At this time, in the special figure display section 43, the picture corresponding to the special winning result A or B is stopped and displayed.

The third time-saving game state A is a time-saving game state that is more disadvantageous for the player than the second time-saving game state, whereas the third time-saving game state B is a time-saving game state that is more advantageous for the player than the second time-saving game state. These third time-saving game states have different advantages and disadvantages in relation to the second time-saving game state. In this modification, regardless of the difference in advantageous relationships, regardless of the type of special winning result that is achieved at the same time as reaching the ceiling, priority is given to transitioning to the second time-saving game state. With such a configuration, the following effects can be expected.

Since the second time-saving gaming state transitions depending on the cumulative number of winning games, the player can predict the transition to the second time-saving gaming state before the number of winning games reaches the ceiling (before the transition opportunity is established). There is a characteristic that it can be done. For this reason, even though the number of winning games has actually reached the ceiling number and the transition opportunity has been established, if the transition is not made to the second time-saving gaming state, the transition to the second time-saving gaming state may not be possible. It is easy for players to notice this. In this case, there is a risk of being confused as to what happened to reaching the ceiling, and even if the transition is made to another time-saving game state, there is a concern that it will give an unnatural impression that it is not the second time-saving game state. .

On the other hand, in the third time-saving gaming state, the transition is triggered by winning a special winning result, and the transition is based on conditions that are established in one game round, so the player can start the game from a stage before the transition trigger is established. 3 It is not possible to predict the transition to the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the winning state is internally set to a special winning result, unless this is actively notified, it is possible to avoid the player from becoming aware of the transition to the third time-saving gaming state.

For these reasons, if the trigger for transition to the second time-saving gaming state and the trigger for transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state are established at the same time, and there is no choice but to choose one of the time-saving gaming states, the third time-saving gaming state It is thought that restricting the transition to the time-saving gaming state and giving priority to transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state can make it difficult for the player to notice the restriction on the transition. Therefore, as in this modification, by uniformly giving priority to the second time-saving gaming state regardless of its advantages or disadvantages, it becomes possible to adjust the destination time-saving gaming state while suppressing the player's awareness.

In addition, even in the above-mentioned variations 6 and 7, in which there are only conditions that are more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state as the third time-saving game state, reaching the ceiling number of times and winning the special winning result This modification example is similar to the present modification example in that it gives priority to transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state when it is established in the same game round. You can expect it.

<Modification 10>
In this modification, in the special figure game round where the win/fail lottery result becomes a special lose result and the conditions for transition to the third time-saving game state are met, the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-saving game state is not executed. It is composed of The configuration of this modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 203 to 206.

In this modification, as in Modification 8 above, if the number of winning games reaches the ceiling number in the time-saving gaming state, or if the win/fail lottery result becomes a special winning result, the second time-saving It is configured such that transition to the gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state is restricted.

The win/fail table, jackpot type table, and second time-saving game state of the special figure game round in this modification are the same as the win/fail table, jackpot type table, and second time-saving game state of Modification 6 shown in FIGS. 178 to 179. It is. Further, the special loss type table and the third time-saving game state in this modification are the same as the special loss type table and the third time-saving game state of the above-mentioned modification 8 shown in FIG. 195. That is, the third time-saving game state has a third time-saving game state A and a third time-saving game state B, and the third time-saving game state A has a lower upper limit number of times than the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state B is a time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is greater than the second time-saving game state.

<Fluctuation start processing>
The fluctuation start process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 203. This process is executed in step Sb5201 of the special symbol game time control process (FIG. 181) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the fluctuation start process of FIG. 196. In FIG. 203, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 196, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing step Sb3307, step Sb3311 or step Sb3312, that is, after setting the stop result corresponding to each win/fail lottery result, in step Sb5301, to update the number of special symbol game times in the high frequency support mode. Executes the process for updating the high-frequency support mode.

In step Sb7501, a transition determination process for the third time-saving gaming state is executed to determine whether to transition to the third time-saving gaming state. This process is similar to the process B for determining the transition to the third time-saving game state in FIG. 197 according to the eighth modification.

Referring to FIG. 197, the process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb7501 will be described. First, in step Sb5601, it is determined whether or not a special out flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the special winning flag is set, that is, if the result of the current special drawing lottery is a special winning result (special winning result A or special winning result B), the process advances to step Sb5602, and the various flags described above are stored. It is determined whether a high probability flag is set in area 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, it is determined in step Sb5603 whether the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. . If any of these support flags is set, it is determined in step Sb5604 whether or not a time-saving termination flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb5603 (none of the support flags is set and the current gaming state is the normal gaming state) or an affirmative determination is made in step Sb5604 (the time-saving termination flag is set, If it is the last game round of each time-saving game state), in step Sb5606, a third time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. The third time-saving start flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the game should move to the third time-saving game state.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 203), after executing the process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb7501, it is determined in step Sb7502 whether to transition to the second time-saving gaming state. A process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is executed. Details of step Sb7502 will be described later.

In the subsequent step Sb3313, a variable display time setting process is executed to set a variable display time for the current game round in the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS. In this modification, as well as in modification 6, a fluctuation pattern R1 (for example, 18 seconds) for reaching the ceiling and a fluctuation pattern R2 (for example, 15 seconds) for special deviation results are set (FIG. 183). . After executing step Sb3313, the processing from step Sb712 onwards is executed.

<Process for determining transition to second time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb7502 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 204. In FIG. 204, the same step numbers are given to processes similar to the transition determination process of the second time-saving gaming state in FIG. 185, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb5503 (the high probability flag is not set), it is determined in step Sb7601 whether or not the third time saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the third time-saving start flag is not set, that is, if the situation is not to shift to the third time-saving gaming state, proceed to step Sb7602, and check whether the third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Determine whether or not.

If the third support flag is set, that is, if the current gaming state is the third time-saving gaming state, in step Sb7603, it is determined whether the time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Determine whether When the time-saving end flag is set, it means that the current special figure game round is the final game round in the third time-saving game state.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb7602 (the third support flag is not set) or an affirmative determination is made in step Sb7603 (the time-saving end flag is set), in step Sb7604, various counters in the RAM 314 are The value of the number-of-misses counter area HC provided in area 314d is updated. Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC. The missed number counter area HC is for the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number.

In step Sb7605, it is determined whether the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC is "0". If the value of the losing number counter area HC is "0", that is, if the number of losing games reaches the ceiling number, the process advances to step Sb7606, and the reached flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. .

In step Sb7607, it is determined whether the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the first support flag is set, that is, if the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state, the process advances to step Sb7608, and it is determined whether the time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Determine whether When the time-saving end flag is set, it means that the current special figure game round is the last game round in the first time-saving game state.

In addition, in this modification, the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving gaming state is set to a number (for example, 100 times) that is smaller than the ceiling number of times (for example, 800 times), and when a jackpot result occurs, the number of times that the number of hits is lost is increased in the counter area. The configuration is such that the value of HC is reset to a value (for example, 800) corresponding to the number of ceilings. For this reason, in the situation of the first time-saving game state, the number of missed games does not reach the ceiling number, and the determination process in step Sb7607 always makes a negative determination. However, it is optional whether or not to set the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state to be less than the ceiling number, and it is also possible to set it to a number greater than the ceiling number, so in such a configuration, the determination process in step Sb7607 There are cases where the judgment is negative, and there are cases where the judgment is affirmative.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb7607 (the first support flag is not set) or an affirmative determination is made in step Sb7608 (if the time-saving end flag is set), the process proceeds to step Sb5508, and the various flags described above are stored. A second time saving start flag is set in area 314e. The second time saving start flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the game should move to the second time saving gaming state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb7601 (if the third time-saving start flag is set), that is, if the situation is such that the transition should be made to the third time-saving gaming state, the process from step Sb7602 onward is not executed. The process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is ended. That is, the process of step Sb7604 is not executed, and the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC is not updated. For this reason, if the result of the winning lottery is a special winning result in a special figure game round where the number of losing game times is the ceiling number, the update of the number of losing game times will be limited and the reaching of the ceiling number will be suspended. be done.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step Sb7603 (if the time-saving end flag is not set), that is, if the third time-saving gaming state is in progress (excluding the final game round), the processing from step Sb7604 onward is executed. Therefore, the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is ended. That is, even in the third time-saving game state (excluding the final game round), the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC is not updated. Therefore, while staying in the third time-saving game state, even if the result of the special drawing lottery turns out to be a losing result, the number of losing game times is not updated and the same value continues to be maintained.

In addition, when the 3rd support flag is cleared and the 3rd time-saving game state ends, a negative determination is made in step Sb7602, and the process of step Sb7604 is executed. That is, the state in which the update of the number of losing game times is limited is canceled when the third time-saving game state ends.

Incidentally, in the case where a negative determination is made in step Sb7602 (when it is determined that the third support flag is not set), both the third support flag and the first support flag are not set, and the game at that point In addition to the case where the state is the normal gaming state, there is also a case where the first support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e and the gaming state at that time is the first time-saving gaming state. In this case, the process of step Sb7604 is executed to update the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC. That is, when in the first time-saving game state, unlike the case in the third time-saving game state, the number of winning games is updated in response to the result of the special drawing winning/failure lottery becoming a winning result.

<About the flow of the gaming state>
The flow of the game state in this modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 205.

As shown in FIG. 205(a), in a situation where the game is in the third time-saving game state A or the third time-saving game state B (excluding the final game time), updating of the number of missed game times is limited. This case will be explained with reference to FIG. 206. Here, a case will be explained taking as an example a case where a 4R normal jackpot result occurs and the game shifts to the first time-saving gaming state, and then a special winning result A occurs and the game shifts to the third time-saving gaming state A.

When the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result ends at timing t1, the first support flag is set and the game shifts to the first time-saving game state (FIGS. 206(a) and 206(b)). At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is set to a value corresponding to the second upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times). Note that the number of misses counter area HC is set to a value corresponding to the ceiling number of times (for example, 800 times) at the start timing of the confirmation display in the special figure game game that resulted in a 4R normal jackpot result (Fig. 206(d) , (e)).

When the value of the support counter area SC becomes "0" at timing t2, the first support flag is cleared, the first time-saving game state ends, and the game shifts to the normal game state. During the period from the start to the end of the first time-saving game state (timing t1 to timing t2), based on the fact that the winning lottery result becomes a winning result (special winning result or normal winning result) in each special figure game round. , the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC is updated (FIG. 206(e)).

When the result of the win/fail lottery becomes a special lose result A at timing t3, the third support flag is set, and the normal game state shifts to the third time-saving game state A (FIG. 206(c)). At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is set to a value corresponding to the sixth upper limit number of times (for example, 300 times).

Further, at timing t3 when the third time-saving game state A is entered, the state is entered into a restriction state in which updating of the number-of-misses counter area HC is restricted. This limited state continues until the third time-saving game state A ends (FIG. 206(e)). Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the number of missed times becomes the ceiling number in the middle of the third time-saving game state, and the transition to the second time-saving game state is restricted, in other words, reaching the ceiling is disabled.

When the value of the support counter area SC becomes "0" at timing t4, the third support flag is cleared, the third time-saving game state A ends, and the game shifts to the normal game state. Along with this, the above-mentioned restriction state is canceled and updating of the number-of-misses counter area HC is restarted.

After that, when the value of the number of misses counter area HC becomes "0" at timing t5, the second support flag is set, and the state shifts to the second time-saving game state (FIG. 206(f)).

In the above configuration, the number of misses is not updated in the miss number image 475 displayed on the symbol display device 75 between timing t3 and timing t4 when updating of the miss count counter area HC is restricted. In other words, the number of misses immediately before shifting to the third time-saving game state A is maintained. At this time, as shown in FIG. 206(g), a holding image 481 corresponding to the fact that the number of times of failure is held is displayed, and it is notified that the update of the number of times of failure is stopped. This holding image 481 is erased at timing t4 when updating of the number-of-misses counter area HC is restarted.

At timing t1 to timing t3 and timing t4 to timing t5 when the value of the number of misses counter area HC is updated, similarly to the second embodiment, when the result of the special drawing lottery becomes a miss. The number-of-misses image 475 is displayed so that the number of times of display increases. In this modification, the update of the number of misses counter area HC (update of the number of misses) is performed at the start of the special figure game (FIGS. 203 and 204), but the update of the number of misses in the number of misses image 475 is , as in the second embodiment, is performed after the final display time has elapsed in the special figure game round. Note that the number of misses image 475 does not necessarily have to be updated when the confirmed display time has elapsed, and can be updated from the end of the variable display until the end of the confirmed display in the special figure game game in which the number of misses counter area HC has been updated. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number-of-misses image 475 is updated at any timing during the period.

Next, the flow of the gaming state when each of the events A to E shown in FIG. 205(b) occurs will be explained. Of these, events A to D are the same as events A to D in Modification 8, and therefore their explanation will be omitted.

If the winning lottery result becomes special winning result A or special winning result B in a special figure game round where the number of winning games reaches the ceiling number (the ceiling number game round) (event E), the winning number counter Update of area HC is restricted (step Sb7601 in FIG. 204). As a result, the value of the number-of-misses counter area HC is held at "1", which is the value immediately before reaching the ceiling, and reaching the ceiling is suspended. Therefore, the MPU 312 recognizes only the winning of the special winning result, and the gaming state shifts to the third time-saving gaming state A or the third time-saving gaming state B. In this case, in that special figure game round, a special reach out performance (FIG. 153) is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game round performance.

In this modification, updating of the number of times of winnings counter area HC is restricted not only in game times in which the winning/failure lottery result becomes a special winning result, but also in the third time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the state in which the value of the number of misses counter area HC is "1" is maintained even during the third time-saving game state.

Then, when the third time-saving game state ends, the update restriction on the number-of-misses counter area HC is lifted. In this case, in this modification, processing for updating the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode (processing for updating the high-frequency support mode in step Sb5301) → processing for updating the number of times of failure (processing for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb7502) Since the processing is executed in this order, after the end processing of the third time-saving game state is performed in the final game of the third time-saving game state, the update of the number of winnings is resumed in that special figure game time. Ru.

In other words, the value of the number of misses counter area HC, which had been held at "1" until then, is subtracted by 1 and becomes "0" in the final game of the third time-saving game state, and as a result, the second support flag is set. Shift to the second time-saving game state. In this way, the end of the third time-saving game state and the cancellation of the pending state of reaching the ceiling are performed in the same game round, and the third time-saving game state is transferred from the second time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state without going through the normal game state. Transition. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes an additional effect (for example, the additional effect shown in FIG. 130(c)) to notify that the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode has increased. At this time, the number of additions notified by the addition effect is the number of times (for example, 500) corresponding to the upper limit number of times in the second time-saving gaming state.

The above-mentioned additional effects may be performed using part or all of the final game display time, or may be performed by using a part or all of the final game display time, or by using a variable display time (a part of the variable display time) and a fixed display time (a part of the fixed display time). (part or all) may be carried out.

According to this modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

In a configuration having a second time-saving gaming state to which the number of winning games is shifted to the ceiling number of times, and a third time-saving gaming state to which the transition is triggered by a special winning result, the third time-saving gaming state In this case, the update of the number of losing games is limited.

The third time-saving game state shifts based on the result of the special drawing winning/failure lottery, and the transition to the third time-saving game state occurs randomly, so the winning game occurs in the situation of the third time-saving game state. It may occur that the cumulative number of times reaches a ceiling number. In this case, if the transition to the second time-saving game state is restricted and the third time-saving game state is continued, it is possible to avoid multiple time-saving game states from overlapping and complicating the process. All the games you've played to reach that goal end up being nothing. In particular, since the player can predict in advance the number of times the player will reach the ceiling, if the number of times the player reaches the ceiling is invalidated, the player will easily notice this and may feel uncomfortable. In this regard, by limiting the update of the number of missed game times when in the third time-saving gaming state, the cumulative number of missed gaming times (the number of times recognized by the pachinko machine 10) will reach a ceiling during the third time-saving gaming state. It is possible to suppress reaching the number of times. This prevents the reaching of the ceiling number of times from being invalidated, making it possible to suitably control the gaming state.

The above-mentioned restriction is canceled based on the end of the third time-saving game state. According to this configuration, when the third time-saving game state ends, updating of the number of losing game times is restarted. This makes it possible for the player to continue playing the game with the aim of reaching the ceiling number of times again from the point where the accumulated number of times continued before shifting to the third time-saving game state.

The system is configured to limit updating of the number of losing game times when the result of the special drawing winning/failure lottery is a special winning result.

According to this configuration, when a special winning result occurs in a game round in which the cumulative number of winning game rounds reaches the ceiling number, priority is given to winning the special winning result, and the reaching of the ceiling number is reserved. It can be carried over. Therefore, it is possible to avoid transition to the second time-saving game state and to shift to the third time-saving game state, and it is possible to suppress overlapping of a plurality of time-saving game states. Then, after the third time-saving game state ends, updating of the number of losing game times is restarted, so that the updated result naturally reaches the ceiling number of times, and the state shifts to the second time-saving game state. In other words, if a special winning result occurs in a game where the cumulative number of losing game times reaches the ceiling, it is possible to sequentially transition to the third time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, and each time-saving game It becomes possible to create a configuration in which the player can enjoy the benefits of both states.

In one game round, after determining the transition to the third time-saving game state, the number of losing game times is updated.

According to this configuration, when a special winning result occurs in a game game where the cumulative number of winning game times reaches the ceiling number, the number of winning game times is determined based on the result of the transition determination to the third time-saving gaming state. You can switch whether to update or not. Therefore, as mentioned above, it is possible to provide a preferable aspect in realizing a configuration in which the special winning result is prioritized and the reaching of the ceiling number of times is reserved.

The configuration is such that the number of losing games is allowed to be updated when the game is in the first time-saving game state.

Regarding the first time-saving game state that transitions to via the opening/closing execution mode, adjustments can be made at the design stage of the pachinko machine so that the cumulative number of missed games during the first time-saving game state does not reach the ceiling number. . Specifically, the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state may be set to be less than the ceiling number of times. Based on these characteristics, the first time-saving game state is capable of restricting the update of the number of missed game times when in the third time-saving game state, while preventing the reaching of the ceiling number of times in the middle of the state. By allowing the number of losing games to be updated, it is possible to avoid reaching the ceiling during the third time-saving game state, which cannot be predicted in advance at the design stage, but to prevent the update of the number of losing games from becoming excessively stagnant. It is possible to prevent a large delay from occurring in the transition to the second time-saving gaming state.

When the update of the number of winning games is limited, the display content of the winning number image 475 is held in the state immediately before the restriction is applied.

In the configuration in which updating of the number of winning games is limited when in the third time-saving game state, a discrepancy occurs between the actual cumulative number of winnings in the game and the internal cumulative number of winnings recognized by the Pachinko machine 10. For this reason, there is a concern that it will be difficult for the player to grasp the cumulative number of times recognized internally in relation to the ceiling number of times, and this tendency is due to the fact that playing in the third time-saving game state is As the deviation increases, it becomes more noticeable. In this regard, when the number of updates is limited, the number of missed times image 475 is displayed with the previous state maintained, so that the player can easily understand the internally recognized number of times. . This makes it possible to suitably suppress confusion on the part of the player.

<Modification 11>
This modification differs from Modification 3 in the manner in which the external signal is output when a special error result is obtained.

Conventional pachinko machines were only equipped with the first time-saving gaming state, which transitioned through the opening/closing execution mode, so the hall computer (management control device) in the gaming hall and the notification unit (data counter, etc.) installed in the gaming island It is assumed that hall equipment is also configured to support only this. For this reason, a pachinko machine equipped with a third time-saving gaming state (a time-saving gaming state that enters when a special winning result is entered) without going through the opening/closing execution mode can be configured to output a dedicated external signal. There is a concern that the hall equipment cannot cope with this, and the game hall cannot grasp the occurrence of the special winning result or the third time-saving gaming state. In this case, it is possible to deal with this by replacing the hall equipment, but this would place a heavy burden on the gaming hall.

The configuration of this modified example has been devised in consideration of such circumstances, and the configuration of this modified example will be described below with reference to FIG. 207.

First, an explanation will be given with reference to FIG. 207(a) regarding external signals when a normal jackpot result is obtained in the special drawing winning/failure lottery and a transition is made to the first time-saving gaming state via the opening/closing execution mode. In this modification, the external signals used in this case include a first external signal (FIG. 207(a4)) and a second external signal (FIG. 207(a5)). The first external signal and the second external signal are output to the outside of the gaming machine using different output terminals in the external output terminal 213.

The first external signal is a signal output corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode, and as shown in FIG. 207(a4), the period from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode (FIG. 207(a2)) (timing t2 It is turned on at timing t3). The second external signal is a signal that is output corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode and the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state), and as shown in FIG. 207 (a5), from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the time-saving gaming state. It is turned on during the period (from timing t2 to timing t4) until the end of (FIG. 207(a3)).

By the way, during the special pattern game period, a direct external signal corresponding to the jackpot result (such as a jackpot winning signal) is usually not output, and only a game period execution signal indicating that the special pattern game period has been executed is output. be. The game round execution signal is output at the start or end of the confirmation display in the special figure game round.

The hall computer, notification unit, etc. recognizes the execution (end) of the special figure game round by receiving the game round execution signal, and then receives the first external signal to recognize the occurrence of a jackpot or the jackpot game (opening/closing). execution mode). Further, after the first external signal is turned off, the second external signal is turned on, thereby recognizing the transition to the time-saving gaming state (occurrence of the time-saving gaming state).

Next, referring to FIG. 207(b), an explanation will be given of an external signal when a special winning result is obtained in the special drawing lottery and the game enters the third time-saving gaming state without going through the opening/closing execution mode.

If there is a special winning result in the special drawing lottery, a direct external signal corresponding to the special winning result (such as a special winning result winning signal) will not be output during the special drawing game period, and the special drawing game period will end. Only the game execution signal indicating that the game has been executed is output.

Thereafter, the first external signal is output at the timing of transition to the third time-saving game state (FIG. 207 (b4)). In this modification, the first external signal is output at the start timing of the above-mentioned confirmation display in order to shift to the third time-saving game state at the start timing of the confirmation display in the special figure game game that resulted in a special winning result. .

As mentioned above, the first external signal is a jackpot signal that notifies the hall equipment that it is in the opening/closing execution mode, but since the opening/closing execution mode is not performed when transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state, The first external signal 207(b4) is a pseudo jackpot signal that does not correspond to the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, in order to be able to distinguish it from the case in which it actually corresponds to the opening/closing execution mode (usually when the result is a jackpot), it is turned on for a shorter period than in such a case (from timing t12 to timing t13). ).

The specific output period of the first external signal is not particularly limited as long as it can be distinguished from the first external signal in the case of a jackpot result, but the minimum period for one round in the opening/closing execution mode (gaming It is preferable that the period is shorter than (ball firing cycle x upper limit number of winnings to the variable winning device 65). With such a configuration, the output period of the first external signal that is output when transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state is suppressed from being longer than the output period when the opening/closing execution mode is actually performed. This makes it possible to suitably distinguish between the two. In this modification, the output period of the first external signal is, for example, 200 msec.

Further, when a special deviation result is obtained, a second external signal is outputted in correspondence with the above transition timing (FIG. 207 (b5)). This second external signal is turned on during the period from the transition timing to the end of the time saving gaming state (timing t12 to timing t14).

As mentioned above, when moving to the 3rd time-saving gaming state due to winning a special winning result, the same external signal (same as Since the signal output from the external terminal is used, it is possible to receive the external signal when transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state without adding a receiving terminal in the hall equipment.

At that time, if the hall equipment has a function that can determine the output period (difference in length) of the first external signal, receiving the first external signal with a short output period will prevent the occurrence of special deviation results. Recognizable. Therefore, it becomes possible to manage the occurrence of a special winning result in the hole computer, and to provide notification corresponding to the winning of the special winning result using a data counter or the like.

Even if the difference in output period cannot be determined, the behavior of the external signal in the case of a special winning result is the same as in the case of a normal jackpot result, so the hall equipment can grasp the transition to the time-saving gaming state or the occurrence of the situation. can do. That is, even in the case of a special winning result, the first external signal and the second external signal are in the ON state, and then the first external signal is in the OFF state and the second external signal is in the ON state, as in the case of a normal jackpot result. Since the flow is set to the ON state, even if it is difficult to distinguish between a normal jackpot result and a special winning result, it is possible to recognize the transition to the time-saving gaming state.

Further, depending on the type of data counter or the like, it is also assumed that the structure is such that a light emitting effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is performed based on the first external signal. In this regard, in this modification, the first external signal in the case of a special winning result is output after shifting to the time-saving game state (third time-saving game state). Therefore, in the case of a special failure result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the light emission performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode before shifting to the time-saving gaming state.

At that time, the above-mentioned light emitting effect may be performed at the start of the time-saving gaming state, but since the output period of the first external signal in the case of a special failure result is shortened, such light emitting effect is completed in a short time. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emitting effect less noticeable, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression to the player.

In addition, in the above explanation, the third time-saving game state triggered by winning a special winning result was exemplified as the time-saving game state to which the transition is made without going through the opening/closing execution mode. This can also be applied to the second time-saving gaming state that is triggered by reaching . Specifically, the special figure game time (timing t11 to timing t12) of the special out result in FIG. 207 (b1) may be replaced with the special figure game time that reached the ceiling number of times. That is, when transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling number of times, the first external signal and the second external signal in FIGS. 207(b4) and (b5) are It may be configured to output an external signal.

<Modification 12>
This modification example differs from the above modification example 3 and the above modification example 11 in the manner in which the external signal is output when a special error result is obtained. The configuration of this modification will be explained with reference to FIGS. 208 to 210.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 208, it is possible to output a first external signal A, a first external signal B, a second external signal A, a second external signal B, and a third external signal as external signals. There is. Among these, the first external signal A and the second external signal A are the same as the first external signal and the second external signal of Modification 11, so the explanation will be omitted. That is, this modification has a configuration in which a first external signal B, a second external signal B, and a third external signal are added to the configuration of modification 11.

The first external signal B is a signal output corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode, and when the special drawing lottery results in a normal jackpot and the transition to the first time-saving gaming state via the opening/closing execution mode. , as shown in FIG. 208(e), is turned on during the period from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode (timing t2 to timing t3). In other words, the output mode is the same as that of the first external signal A.

However, as shown in FIG. 209(e), if there is a special winning result in the special drawing lottery and the transition is made to the third time-saving game state without going through the opening/closing execution mode, the on state is not established and the opening/closing execution mode is changed. The off state is maintained in response to the fact that is not executed. That is, the first external signal A (FIG. 209(d)) is kept on for a predetermined period (timing t12 to timing t13) as a pseudo jackpot signal when transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state. However, with the first external signal B, such switching to the on state is not performed.

The second external signal B is a signal output corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode and the time-saving gaming state, and in the case of transition to the first time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 208(g), the opening/closing execution mode is output. It is turned on during the period (timing t2 to timing t4) from the start of the time saving game state to the end of the time saving gaming state. In other words, the output mode is the same as that of the second external signal A.

However, as shown in FIG. 209(g), in the case of transition to the third time-saving game state, it is turned off during the time-saving game state. That is, although the second external signal A (FIG. 209(f)) is turned on in the time-saving gaming state, the second external signal B is not switched to the on state.

The third external signal is a signal output in response to the time-saving game state, and is turned on during the period from the start to the end of the time-saving game state. This is the same regardless of whether the time-saving gaming state to be transferred is the first time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state (FIGS. 208(h) and 209(h)).

The first external signal B, second external signal B, and third external signal are output from different output terminals to the outside of the gaming machine.

When a third time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state without going through the opening/closing execution mode) is added as a function of a pachinko machine, game halls will be required to add a third time-saving gaming state to accommodate such a function. It is possible to introduce new hall equipment (hall computers, data counters, etc.) or add functions to existing hall equipment.

However, not all gaming halls will take such measures, and there is a possibility that existing hall equipment will continue to be used. In other words, there is a possibility that as hall devices that are expected to receive external signals, there will be a mixture of non-compatible devices that are not compatible with the third time-saving gaming state and compatible devices that are compatible with the third time-saving gaming state. be.

The configuration of this modified example has been devised in consideration of such a mixed state. It is assumed that the above-mentioned compatible device is equipped with a function that allows the time-saving gaming state to be recognized from the above-mentioned third external signal.

In order for the data counter etc. to receive external signals from the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to connect the wiring from the data counter etc. to each terminal of the external output terminal 213 in the pachinko machine 10. At this time, in this modification, the manner in which the external output terminal 213 is connected to each terminal is changed depending on whether the hall equipment on the game hall side is a non-compatible equipment or a compatible equipment.

Specifically, if the hall device connected to the pachinko machine 10 is a non-compatible device, as shown in FIG. 210(a), the output terminal for the first external signal A provided in the external output terminal 213 And the above wiring is connected to the output terminal for the second external signal A. Thereby, the hall device becomes in a state where it can receive the first external signal A and the second external signal B output from the pachinko machine 10 to the outside. In this case, the hall equipment recognizes the transition to the first time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, etc. in the manner described in Modification 11.

On the other hand, if the hall device connected to the pachinko machine 10 is a compatible device, connect the above wiring to the output terminal for the first external signal B and the output terminal for the third external signal provided in the external output terminal 213. do. Thereby, the hall equipment becomes in a state where it can receive the first external signal B and the third external signal externally output from the pachinko machine 10.

As mentioned above, in the case of transition to the first time-saving game state, the first external signal B is turned on in the opening/closing execution mode, and the third external signal is turned on in the time-saving game state (Fig. 210 ( b)). In this case, the hall equipment recognizes the time-saving gaming state after recognizing the opening/closing execution mode, thereby indicating that it has transitioned to the time-saving gaming state via the opening/closing execution mode, that is, has transitioned to the first time-saving gaming state. can be understood.

Further, in the case of transition to the third time-saving game state, the third external signal becomes on-state in the time-saving game state without the first external signal B becoming on-state (FIG. 210(b)). In this case, the hall equipment recognizes the time-saving gaming state without going through the opening/closing execution mode, thereby transitioning to the time-saving gaming state without going through the opening/closing execution mode, that is, transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state. I can understand what I did.

Note that a data counter or the like may be equipped with a function of automatically adding up the number of jackpots based on the fact that the first external signal (jackpot signal) is turned on. In this case, in the case of transition to the third time-saving gaming state (in the case of transitioning to the time-saving gaming state without passing through the opening/closing execution mode), if an ON state for a predetermined period is provided like the first external signal A, , there is a risk that the number of jackpots reported by a data counter or the like will increase even though the result is a special loss. In this regard, if a compatible device that can recognize the time-saving gaming state from the third external signal is connected to the pachinko machine 10, using the first external signal B that is maintained in the off state will result in a special error result. It is possible to suppress an increase in the number of jackpots that are notified each time.

In addition, in the above description, the output terminal for the first external signal B and the output terminal for the third external signal were illustrated as connection terminals when the hall device connected to the pachinko machine 10 is a compatible device. Alternatively, the output terminal for the second external signal B and the output terminal for the third external signal may be used as connection terminals. In this case, the hall equipment can recognize the transition to the first time-saving gaming state when both the second external signal B and the third external signal are in the on state, and the second external signal B is in the off state. The transition to the third time-saving game state can be recognized by turning on the third external signal in the state in which the game mode is set. Which of the output terminals of the first external signal B and the second external signal B the hall equipment is connected to can be arbitrarily selected depending on the specifications of the hall equipment and the like.

In addition, as a time-saving game state that transitions to without going through the opening/closing execution mode, the third time-saving game state that is triggered by winning a special winning result has been illustrated, but the configuration of this modification example is such that the time-saving game state is transitioned without going through the opening/closing execution mode. It is also possible to apply to the second time-saving gaming state that is triggered. Specifically, the special figure game round (timing t11 to timing t12) with the special out result in FIG. 209(a) may be replaced with the special figure game round in which the ceiling number of times has been reached.

<Other variations>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the second embodiment and each modification example described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the second embodiment and each modification, or a part or all of them may be combined to apply to the second embodiment and each modification. May be applied. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the second embodiment and each modification example. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

(1) In the second embodiment and each modification example, up to four pieces of pending information based on winnings to the first operating port 62 are stored, but the number may be less than four pieces. (may be one), or may be five or more. Further, the upper limit storage number of pending information based on winnings to the second operating port 63 may be less than 4 (or may be 1), or may be 5 or more. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the upper limit storage number of pending information based on winnings to each operating port 62, 63 is different.

Alternatively, at least one of the first operating port 62 (first special symbol) or the second operating port 63 (second special symbol) may not have a holding function. In particular, with regard to modification 3, by having a configuration that does not include a reservation function for winning a prize to the second operating port 63, it is possible to create a special figure game in which an increase in the remaining number of times is allowed in the case of the final game (special winning result). This makes it possible to highlight the superiority of

(2) In the second embodiment and each modified example, the reservation information based on winnings to the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63 is differentiated, but it may be configured that they are not differentiated. In addition, the reservation information based on winnings to the second operating port 63 was configured to be subject to determination of validity with priority over the pending information based on winnings to the first operating port 62, but the relationship is reversed. There may also be a structure in which the winning/falsifying determination is made in the order of winning.

(3) In the second embodiment and each modification example, only the game ball flowing down the right route can pass through the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63 or win a prize, but the game ball flowing down the left route It may be configured such that only game balls that play the game can pass through or win a prize, or it may be configured such that only game balls that do so can pass through or win a prize from either the right route or the left route. However, in order to add sharpness to the game, only game balls flowing down one of the right route and the left route can enter the first operating port 62, and only game balls flowing down the other of the right route and the left route can enter the prize through the through gate. 64, it is preferable that the second operating port 63 be configured to be able to pass through or win a prize.

(4) In the above-mentioned second embodiment and each modification, the structure is such that when the result of the judgment becomes a jackpot, the game shifts to the jackpot game (opening/closing execution mode). As such, the result of the judgment becomes the small winning result, and in a small winning game (a game state in which a variable winning device that has a V winning hole inside or has a V winning hole and a winning hole is opened and closed), the V winning hole (V winning hole) It may be configured such that when the game ball passes through the sensor (when the result of the award determination becomes a predetermined result and a predetermined game result), the game shifts to a jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the present invention, it is possible to grant a predetermined benefit to the player based on the result of the special determination being a specific result, or the ability to grant a predetermined benefit to the player based on the result of the first determination being a specific result. As mentioned above, there is a right or wrong statement regarding the following: "A predetermined benefit can be granted to the player" and "Based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result, the player is transferred to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state." It can be understood that this includes cases where the result of the determination is a small winning result and the game is transferred to a jackpot game via a V winning prize.

(5) In the second embodiment and each modification example, the first support flag, the second support flag, and the third support flag are set for the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state. Although the configuration is such that different support flags are associated with each other, such a distinction may not be made and one support flag may be provided as a common flag for each of these time-saving gaming states.

In the case of such a configuration, for example, in the second embodiment, the support flag is set in response to the transition to the first time-saving gaming state, and the support flag is set in response to the transition to the first time-saving gaming state, and the support flag is set in response to the transition to the first time-saving gaming state, and the support flag is set in response to the transition to the first time-saving gaming state. When the cumulative number of games has reached the ceiling, the support flag is cleared once according to the fact that the number of games since the transition to the first time-saving gaming state has reached the upper limit, and then, The support flag may be reset in response to the transition to the second time-saving gaming state being determined by the determination of transition to the second time-saving gaming state.

(6) In the second embodiment and each modification example, when various support flags are set in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, a transition is made to the high-frequency support mode (time-saving gaming state), and the various flag storage areas Although the high-frequency support mode is configured to end when various support flags are deleted from the various flag storage area 114e, the information corresponding to the first value (for example, during support If a flag) is stored, the system shifts to high-frequency support mode, and information corresponding to a second value different from the first value (for example, a non-support flag) is stored in the specific storage area. The configuration may be such that the high-frequency support mode ends at the end of the period. In other words, there is information corresponding to being in high-frequency support mode and information corresponding to not being in high-frequency support mode, and depending on which information is stored (set), it is possible to switch to high-frequency support mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the transition to the high-frequency support mode and the termination of the high-frequency support mode are controlled.

Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to end when information corresponding to a second value that is the same as or different from the first value is stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area. That is, a storage area corresponding to being in high-frequency support mode and a storage area corresponding to not being in high-frequency support mode are provided, and depending on which storage area information is stored (set), A configuration may also be adopted in which transition to high-frequency support mode and termination of high-frequency support mode are controlled.

(7) In the above-mentioned second embodiment and each modification, the configuration is such that the transition to the time-saving gaming state is triggered when the cumulative number of winning games reaches the ceiling number or a special winning result occurs. However, it may be configured to shift to a high-precision gaming state. In this case, the support mode in the high certainty gaming state may be a high frequency support mode or a low frequency support mode.

Also, instead of shifting to a time-saving gaming state or a high-precision gaming state, the system shifts to a specific production mode in which special productions that cannot be seen in the normal gaming state are performed, special characters, etc. appear. It may be something. Further, the state may be changed to a state in which a special lottery that is not performed in the normal gaming state is performed. In these cases, the player is in a more advantageous state than in the normal gaming state in that he or she can see special performances and receive a special lottery. Note that a point lottery may be considered as an example of a special lottery. It may also be configured to shift to a time-saving gaming state, a high-precision gaming state, or an opening/closing execution mode depending on the points awarded in the point lottery and the total number thereof. Further, special effects (for example, character costumes, etc.) may be released, or development secrets regarding the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed.

(8) In the above-mentioned second embodiment and each modification, the configuration has a first time-saving game state that transitions via the opening/closing execution mode, in addition to the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state. However, it may be configured without the first time-saving gaming state. Moreover, it is also possible to adopt a configuration that does not include a high-probability gaming state.

(9) In the second embodiment and each modification example, when the cumulative number of winning games reaches the ceiling number or a special winning result occurs, a time-saving game that does not go through the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Although the configuration is such that the transition is made to the state, the configuration may be such that the transition to the time-saving gaming state is triggered by events other than these. For example, it may be configured to shift to the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state based on the game ball entering or passing through a specific ball entry section or a specific passing section provided inside the gaming area PE or a predetermined ball entry section. . In this case, the prize ball may or may not be paid out based on the above-mentioned ball entry or passage.

The specific ball entry section may be of a type that does not have an opening/closing mechanism and is always open, or may have an opening/closing mechanism and be in an open state where game balls can enter or easily enter. It may be a variable type ball entry part that can be switched between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter or a closed state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball than in an open state. This also applies to the predetermined ball entry portion.

In addition, in a configuration in which a specific ball entry part or passing part is provided within a predetermined ball entry part, only the specific ball entry part or passing part is provided within the predetermined ball entry part, and the game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry part is It may be configured such that the ball always enters or passes through a specific ball entry section or passing section, or there may be one or more other ball entry sections or passing sections different from the specific ball entry section or passing section within the predetermined ball entry section. is provided, and the game balls that have entered the designated ball entry area are sorted, so that game balls that have entered the designated ball entry area may not enter the specific ball entry area, or may not pass through the specific passing area. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which there are cases in which the information is not present. In the latter configuration, when a game ball that has entered a predetermined ball entry section enters a specific ball entry section or passes through a specific passing section, an opportunity for transition to the time-saving gaming state is established. In this case, even if the game ball that has entered the prescribed ball entry section enters the other ball entry section or passes through another passing section, the trigger for transition to the time-saving gaming state is not established. be able to.

(10) In the second embodiment and each modification example, when the remaining number of time-saving gaming states is added, the configuration involves ending the preceding time-saving gaming state and transitioning to the subsequent time-saving gaming state. However, the remaining number of times may be increased while the time-saving gaming state continues. For example, as in Modified Example 3, if the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state increases due to a special winning result in the last game of the first time-saving game state, the end processing of the time-saving game state (support flag It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which rewriting of the remaining number of times (a process of setting a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times of the third time-saving gaming state in the support counter area SC) is executed without performing the clearing of the number of times.

In addition, as mentioned above, if the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is increased without ending the time-saving game state, as described in (5) above, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state are It is preferable that the support flag be associated with the support flag as one flag common to the three time-saving gaming states. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the need for rewriting the type of support flag in accordance with the rewriting of the remaining number of times.

(11) In the above-described second embodiment and each modification, the fixed display time of the special figure game round was configured to be selected separately from the variable display time, but it is now possible to select it as a set with the variable display time. You can also do this. For example, each variable display time (variation pattern) is associated with a fixed display time in advance, and by selecting the variable display time, the fixed display time can also be selected at the same time. In that case, the selected fixed display time may be set at the start of the fixed display, or may be set at the same time as the variable display time at the start of the variable display.

(12) In the above-mentioned second embodiment and fixed variations, the modes of the general figure game round and the accessory opening/closing game are made common in the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state, At least one of the common figure game round and the accessory opening/closing game may be configured to have a different aspect. For example, in the first time-saving game state, the support lottery in the regular game game is held with a higher winning probability than in the normal game state, while in the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, the support lottery is held in the normal game state. It may be configured such that the winning probability is the same as the winning probability. Further, in the third time-saving game state, the accessory opening/closing game may be performed in a more advantageous manner than in the second time-saving game state, such as for example, the opening time of the general electric accessory 63a is longer. In addition, the third time-saving game state includes a plurality of states including a third time-saving game state A and a third time-saving game state B, and the third time-saving game state A is more advantageous than the third time-saving game state B. An accessory opening/closing game may also be performed.

(13) In the second embodiment and each modification, only one type of ceiling number is set, but multiple types of different numbers may be set. Further, a plurality of types with different upper limit numbers may be set for the second time-saving game state as well. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of ceiling frequencies are set and the type of the second time-saving gaming state is associated with each ceiling frequency, or if one ceiling frequency is set and the ceiling frequency is reached. It may also be configured such that a lottery is conducted to determine which second time-saving game state the second time-saving game state should be entered.

(14) In the second embodiment and each modification example, when the number of misses reaches the ceiling number of times and the transition is made to the second time-saving gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state ends without a jackpot result. is configured so that the second ceiling is not reached regardless of the number of hits after that, but if the second time-saving gaming state ends without a jackpot result, a value corresponding to the number of hits is placed in the number of misses counter area HC. may be reset, and the ceiling may be reached for the second time or later. In that case, a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, 3 times) may be set for the number of times the ceiling is reached (number of times of transition to the second time-saving gaming state), or a configuration may be adopted in which such an upper limit number of times is not provided.

In addition, in a configuration where reaching the ceiling is allowed only once, the normal gaming state before reaching the ceiling (before transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state) and after the second time-saving gaming state ends without a jackpot result. Even if the normal gaming state is the same as the normal gaming state, the former normal gaming state is advantageous compared to the latter normal gaming state in that it can transition to the second time-saving gaming state. It can also be said that In this specification, the former normal gaming state and the latter normal gaming state are not distinguished, and these states may be collectively referred to as a predetermined gaming state, and the former normal gaming state and the latter normal gaming state may be collectively referred to as a predetermined gaming state. One of them is called, for example, a predetermined gaming state, and the other is, for example, a gaming state that has a different degree of advantage for the player from the predetermined gaming state.

(15) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, the variation patterns and the repeated game effects correspond in a one-to-one relationship, but they may correspond in a one-to-multiple relationship. In this case, the performance control device 143 acquires a random number for the performance lottery, and uses the acquired random number to create one game recurrent performance from among a plurality of game recurrent performances that are associated with one variation pattern. The configuration can be such that the following is selected.

(16) In the second embodiment and each modification example, each support flag is set when ending the general game game round in response to the transition to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state. The Fuzu game session ends from , but the Fuzu game session ends based on the conditions for transitioning to each time-saving gaming state being met and the destination time-saving gaming state being determined, and after that, each support A configuration may also be adopted in which a flag is set.

(17) In the second embodiment and each modification, when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state (such as the second embodiment), the transition from the normal gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state (Modifications 4, 6, etc.), and when transitioning from the first time-saving game state to the normal game state (Modification 3, etc.), the normal game game round is ended, but the second time-saving game state Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the transition is made when transitioning from the third time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Also, for example, when transitioning from the first time saving game state to the third time saving game state or from the second time saving game state to the third time saving game state, from the third time saving game state A to the third time saving game state B It is also possible to have a configuration in which the normal figure game round is ended when the predetermined time-saving gaming state is transferred to another time-saving gaming state, such as when the game is transferred to. In these cases, it is expected that it will be beneficial to have a configuration in which the modes of the common figure game times and the opening/closing game of the accessory are different in each time-saving game state as described in (12) above.

(18) In the above-mentioned second embodiment and each modification, the special figure game is made to correspond to the transition timing to the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, and the conditions for transition to each of these time-saving game states are satisfied. Although the regular figure game round ends at the start timing of the final confirmation display, the regular figure game round may be ended at the middle timing of the final confirmation display or at the end timing of the final confirmation display. In addition, from the perspective of securing a grace period (a period in which the gaming state has transitioned to the second time-saving game state, but the special figure game round after transitioning to the second time-saving game state has not yet been played). In this case, it is preferable that the common figure game round be ended at a timing earlier than the end timing of the confirmation display.

(19) In the second embodiment and each modification, when the support lottery result of the general game game round to be ended is a support winning result when the general game game round ends, it is changed to a losing result. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which no change processing is performed to the incorrect result. The support lottery held in the normal gaming state has a high probability of being a losing result, and it is assumed that it will be rare for the result of the support lottery to be a support winning result in the Fuzu game round being executed when transitioning to the time-saving gaming state. This is for the purpose of

(20) In the second embodiment and each modification example, if the special figure game round in which the transition conditions to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state are satisfied is the second special figure game time ( When the conditions for transition to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state are satisfied in the time-saving game state), the end process of the regular game game round is not executed. The above-mentioned end processing may be executed without distinguishing between the two special figures. That is, the end process may be executed even when the conditions for transition to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state are satisfied in the time-saving game state.

(21) In the second embodiment and each modification example, when the special figure game round in which the transition conditions to the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state are satisfied is the game time of the second special figure; Although the configuration is such that the end processing of the general figure game round is not uniformly executed, the game round of the second special figure is the special figure game time during the time-saving game state, or the remaining pending after the time-saving game state ends. It may be configured to identify whether it is a special figure game time and, if it is the latter special figure game time, to execute the termination process of the regular figure game time. Since the game round of the second special figure that was put on hold at the end of the time-saving game state is played under the normal game state, the regular figure game round that was started while these special figure game rounds were being executed is returned to the normal game state. This is done in a corresponding manner. In this case, by performing the end processing of the regular game game round, it is possible to expect the same effects as those described in the second embodiment and the first modification.

(22) In the second embodiment and each modification example, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is set in the support counter area SC at the time of transition to the time-saving game state, and that value is set every time a special figure game is played. The configuration is such that the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state is updated by subtracting 1 at a time, but the value corresponding to the upper limit number of times in the support counter area SC is not set when transitioning to the time-saving gaming state, and the special figure gaming times are The number of special figure games executed in the time-saving game state may be updated by adding 1 to the value of the support counter area SC each time the game is played. In this case, the time-saving gaming state may be configured to end when the updated count value reaches the upper limit number of times.

(23) In the above-described second embodiment and each modification, the display content of the missed number image 475 is updated after the final display time of the special figure game time has elapsed. A configuration may also be adopted in which the display content of the number-of-misses image 475 is updated after the variable display time has elapsed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the display content of the number of misses image 475 from being updated before the result of the special symbol lottery is notified by the stop display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the display content of the number of misses image 475 is updated at the start of the next special figure game round or after the start of the next special figure game round.

(24) In the above-described second embodiment and each modification, the symbol display device 75 is configured to provide notification corresponding to reaching the ceiling number of times or winning a special winning result. It may also be configured to be executed in the department. In addition, the notification is not limited to image display, but may be made using a light emitting means such as an LED, or by operating a decorative movable object (movable accessory) for movable performance in a predetermined operation mode. Good too. Further, each of the above-mentioned notifications does not necessarily have to be a visual notification, but may be an auditory notification by sound from the speaker section 29. This also applies to the notification of the remaining number of times of time saving, the notification of the number of misses, the right-handed notification, etc.

(25) In the second embodiment, modification example 1, modification example 2, modification example 6 to modification example 10 (configurations including a second time-saving game state that is triggered by reaching the ceiling number of times), the time-saving game The configuration is such that after the process of updating the remaining number of times in the state is executed, the process of updating the number of losing games (the number of losing games counter area HC) (the process of step Sb1405 in the second embodiment) is executed. , if the process of determining whether to transition to the second time-saving game state (the process of step Sb1406 in the second embodiment) is performed after the process of updating the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state, Prior to the process of updating the remaining number of times, the process of updating the number of losing game times may be performed. As such a configuration, for example, it is conceivable to perform updating processing of the number of missed game times at the start of a special symbol game time. In this case, the pachinko machine can recognize that the ceiling number has been reached at the start of the special figure game round, and if you want to execute the game round effect corresponding to the reaching the above limit from the start of the special figure game round, or This is effective when you want to set a dedicated variable display time (variable pattern) corresponding to

(26) In the second embodiment, modification example 1, modification example 2, modification example 6 to modification example 10, the transition to the second time-saving game state is made when the cumulative number of missed game times reaches the ceiling number of times. Although it is configured to be executed at the start of the confirmation display in the special figure game round, it may be configured to be executed after the confirmation display starts. Specifically, the transition to the second time-saving game state is executed at the timing in the middle of the confirmed display in the special figure game time when the ceiling number has been reached, at the end timing of the confirmed display, and at the start timing of the next special figure game time. Good too. However, there is a grace period when the normal figure game session ends (the gaming state has moved to the second time-saving game state, but the special figure game session after moving to the second time-saving game state has not been played yet). In order to ensure the duration of the state, it is preferable to shift to the second time-saving game state before the confirmation display of the special figure game time that has reached the ceiling number of times ends.

In addition, in the case of shifting to the second time-saving game state at the end timing of the confirmation display, a configuration may be adopted in which the end processing of the common figure game round is executed at the end timing.

In that case, in the normal process (FIG. 107), the process for transitioning to the second time-saving game state (step Sb512) → the regular game time control process (step Sb405) is performed in the order of the second time-saving game state. It can be configured such that the first regular figure game round in the second time-saving game state is started before the first special figure game round is started. That is, in the processing cycle in which the transition process to the second time-saving gaming state was performed (1 periodic process in the normal process), after the transition to the second time-saving gaming state (after setting the support flag), the normal figure gaming cycle control By executing the process, it is possible to start the first regular figure game round in the second time saving game state, and then to start the first special figure game round in the second time saving game state in the next processing time. can.

In addition, even in a configuration in which the second time-saving game state transition process is performed after the regular figure game time control process, the regular figure game time control process in step Sb405 is changed to the special figure game time control process in step Sb403 in the normal process. If the configuration is such that it is performed in advance, the regular figure game round can be started prior to the special figure game round after transition to the second time-saving game state. That is, in the next processing time after the transition to the second time-saving game state, processing can be performed in the order of starting fluctuation of the regular figure game time → start of fluctuation of the special figure game time, and changing to the second time-saving game state. It is possible to start the normal game game session corresponding to the above earlier.

(27) In the second embodiment, modification example 1, modification example 2, modification example 6 to modification example 10, the second time-saving game state is entered based on the cumulative number of missed game times reaching the ceiling number of times. Although the configuration is such that the transition is made, it may be configured that the transition is made to the second time-saving gaming state based on the total number of points such as internal point information reaching a predetermined number of points. In this case, the number of points may be awarded based on, for example, the number of winning games reaching a predetermined number, or when the result of a special drawing lottery is a winning result. , when the values of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 and fluctuation type counter CS reach a predetermined value, a predetermined point lottery is executed, and points are awarded by winning the lottery. good. In addition, the number of points to be awarded may be a fixed number based on the establishment of a granting opportunity, or a plurality of points are prepared as the number of points that can be awarded, and points are selected from among them. The number of points selected by a lottery may be awarded. Note that the award of points and the number of awarded points may be taught or suggested to the player by notification, or may be configured such that no notification is made and the player is unable or difficult to identify them.

(28) In the second embodiment, Modification 1, Modification 2, Modification 6 to Modification 10, the winning number counter area is used in the special pattern game round in which the result of the special pattern winning/failure lottery results in a jackpot result. Although the value of HC is set to the ceiling number of times, it may be set at the start or end of the opening/closing execution mode, at the middle of the opening/closing execution mode, or at the time of transition to the first time-saving game state.

In addition, in the second embodiment, modification example 1, modification example 2, modification example 6 to modification example 10, the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number is updated, but the value of the off number counter area HC is changed to the ceiling number. Instead of setting it to the number of times, the value of the number of winnings counter area HC is added by 1 each time a winning game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, and the second time reduction is performed based on the total value reaching the ceiling number of times. It may be configured to shift to a gaming state. In this case, if the result of the special drawing lottery becomes a jackpot before reaching the ceiling number of times, the updated result of the winning result will be cleared (initialized) in the special drawing game round, opening/closing execution mode, etc. It is recommended to have a configuration that

(29) In the second embodiment and modification 1, a value corresponding to the number of ceilings is set in the number of misses counter area HC in the special figure game round that results in a jackpot, but the opening/closing execution mode The above set may be executed at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, or when transitioning to the first time-saving game state. In addition, when the configuration is such that the value of the disconnection number counter area HC is incremented by 1 as in (28) above, the first time reduction is It is preferable to initialize the value of the number of misses counter area HC to 0 upon transition to the gaming state.

(30) In the second embodiment, modification example 1, and modification example 2, the transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the second time-saving game state is performed at the start of the confirmation display in the special figure game round. However, it may be executed at the start of the special figure game round as in Modifications 6 to 10. In that case, the transition determination may be made at the start of the special figure game round, while the transition to the second time-saving gaming state may be performed at the start of the confirmation display, or the transition to the second time-saving gaming state may also be determined by the special figure. It may also be configured to be performed at the start of a game round.

Further, the above transition determination may be executed at a timing in the middle of the variable display in the special figure game game when the cumulative number of missed game times reaches the ceiling number. In addition, when shifting to the second time-saving gaming state after the start of the confirmation display, the above transition determination may be executed after the start of the confirmation display.

(31) In the above-mentioned second embodiment, as in the first modification, the right hit notification (the second actuation port 63 It is also possible to have a configuration in which a notification to encourage winnings is made. In this case, the above-mentioned notification may be performed during the entire fixed display time, or the above-mentioned notification may be performed during at least a part of the fixed display time. Further, in the first modification, the right-hand hit notification may be configured to be performed throughout the final display time.

(32) In the first modification of the second embodiment, the confirmed display time of the special figure game session in which the number of missed game sessions reaches the ceiling number is the confirmed display time of the regular figure game session that is forcibly terminated. , the regular display time that is longer than the total period of the variable display time of the regular game game corresponding to the second time-saving game state and the fixed display time of the regular game game corresponding to the second time-saving game state, but the regular game that is forced to end. Based on the total period of the variable display time of the regular game game corresponding to the second time-saving game state and the final display time of the regular game game corresponding to the second time-saving game state, not including the fixed display time of the regular game game. It may also be configured to have a longer length. In the normal game state (left-handed game), winnings to the through gate 64 basically do not occur, and in many cases it is assumed that the forced termination of the regular game round will not occur, so even with the above configuration. , the end of the first regular figure game after transitioning to the second time-saving game state (the start of the first accessory opening/closing game after transitioning to the second time-saving game state) transitions to the second time-saving game state. This is because it is thought that it is possible to realize a configuration in which the game is played prior to the start of the first special figure game round after the start of the game.

(33) In the first modification of the second embodiment, the end of the first regular game game after transitioning to the second time-saving game state (the end of the confirmation display) causes the transition to the second time-saving game state. However, the end of the variable display in the first regular pattern game period precedes the start of the first special pattern game period. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is done. In this case, the fixed display time of the special figure game round in which the number of missed game rounds has reached the ceiling number, the fixed display time of the regular figure game round that is forcibly ended, and the fixed display time of the regular figure game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state. It may be made longer than the total period including the variable display time of , or longer than the variable display time of the regular figure game corresponding to the second time-saving game state. Even with such a configuration, compared to a configuration in which the variable display of the first regular figure game session ends after the first special figure game session has started, the first role after transitioning to the second time-saving game state is The object opening/closing game is started earlier, and it is possible to expect the effect of hastening the timing at which the utility object 63a is brought into the open state.

(34) In Modifications 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, the special winning result is provided as part of the result of the special drawing winning/failure lottery, but the special winning result is provided as a part of the result of the special drawing winning/failure lottery. Alternatively, it may be configured such that only a lottery is performed to determine whether the result is a negative result, and if the result is a negative result, a separate lottery (a type of negative result lottery) is performed to determine whether or not the result is a special negative result. . In this case, a separate lottery may be conducted using other existing random numbers such as the jackpot type counter C2 or the fluctuation type counter CS, or it may be conducted using a special random number for drawing the type of winning result. It's okay to be hurt.

Furthermore, instead of the type lottery for losing results, a transition lottery may be performed to determine whether or not the transition condition to the third time-saving gaming state is satisfied. In this case, the lottery may be conducted using other existing random numbers such as the jackpot type counter C2 or the fluctuation type counter CS, or it may be conducted using a special random number for determining whether the transition condition is met. It's okay to be hurt.

(35) In Modifications 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, a special reach effect is executed as a notification corresponding to a special out-of-reach result, but a game repeated effect without a reach effect A notification corresponding to the special deviation result may be performed. Further, the notification need not be made using the symbol rows Z1 to Z3; for example, notification corresponding to the special miss result may be made by displaying a predetermined symbol such as a predetermined character on the symbol display device 75. .

In addition, the symbol is completely synchronized with the special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display section 43, and the symbol that is displayed in a smaller size than each symbol in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (the so-called fourth symbol) is the symbol. In the pachinko machine displayed on the display device 75, the fourth symbol may be displayed in a specific mode different from the normal mode to provide notification corresponding to the special winning result. Further, notification corresponding to the special out-of-order result may be performed by a combination of the mode of the fourth symbol that is stopped and displayed and at least some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are stopped and displayed.

Note that the notification corresponding to the special winning result may be made during the entire special figure game round, or may be carried out during a part of the special figure game round. By the way, in the special reach effects exemplified in Modifications 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, the player cannot determine whether or not it is a special winning result at the start of the special figure game round, and the special Since the configuration is such that the player can determine that the result is a special winning result at the end of the game round, it can be said that the notification corresponding to the special winning result is executed during a part of the period in the special symbol game round.

(36) In Modifications 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, when a special deviation result occurs, an external signal corresponding to the special deviation result is output, but the external signal is not output. It may also be a configuration.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which it is possible to switch whether or not to output the external signal. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a switching operation section such as a changeover switch, and by operating the switching operation section, the output of the external signal can be switched. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the switching operation section at a position where it can be operated when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened, such as on the back side of the front door frame 14 or on the back side of the game board 60. With such a configuration, the switching operation is allowed only to hall employees, and abuse for fraudulent activities can be suppressed.

(37) In Modifications 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, if a special winning result occurs in a special figure game other than the last game in the first time-saving game state (to the third time-saving game state) Although the configuration is such that an external signal corresponding to the special deviation result is output even when a special deviation result is obtained in a situation in which the transition of is restricted, the external signal may not be output. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the external signal corresponding to the special deviation result is not output, or a configuration may be adopted in which an external signal corresponding to the normal deviation result is output in place of the external signal corresponding to the special deviation result.

For example, based on an external signal for special winning results output from a pachinko machine, gaming results related to special winning results (e.g., special winning results, winning probability of special winning results in actual games, etc.) are displayed at the game hall. In a configuration in which notification is provided by a predetermined notification unit (for example, a data counter installed above each pachinko machine on a game island, its light emitting unit, etc.), the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted. When the external signal for the special winning result is output, although the transition to the third time-saving gaming state does not occur, a notification corresponding to the winning of the special winning result is performed in the predetermined notification section, There is a concern that this may cause misunderstanding and confusion among players and hall employees. In this regard, by configuring (37), even if a special winning result occurs in a situation where transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted, it will not be reflected in the notification by the predetermined notification unit. This makes it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of misunderstandings.

(38) In Modifications 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, if a special winning result occurs in the third time-saving game state, the re-transition to the third time-saving game state (remaining number of times Although the configuration restricts re-addition, it may also be configured to allow re-migration. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which an external signal corresponding to the special deviation result that is a trigger for re-transfer is outputted.

Further, although a transition to the third time-saving gaming state occurs regarding the above-mentioned special winning result, it may be configured such that an external signal corresponding to the special winning result is not output. With such a configuration, the predetermined notification section of the gaming hall can notify the special winning result at the time of the first shift, but not notify the special winning result at the time of re-shifting. .

(39) Modifications 3 to 10 of the second embodiment have a configuration in which the transition to the third time-saving game state is executed at the start of the confirmation display in the special figure game round in which the special winning result has occurred. However, it may be configured to be executed after the confirmation display is started. Specifically, the transition to the third time-saving game state is executed at the middle timing during the confirmed display in the special figure game round that resulted in a special winning result, at the end timing of the confirmed display, and at the start timing of the next special figure game round. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

In addition, in the case of transitioning to the third time-saving game state at the end timing of the confirmation display, a configuration may be adopted in which the end processing of the common figure game round is executed at the end timing.

In that case, in the normal process (FIG. 107), the process for transitioning to the third time-saving game state (step Sb3202) → the regular game time control process (step Sb405) is performed in the order of It can be configured such that the first regular figure game round in the third time-saving game state is started before the first special figure game round is started. That is, in the processing cycle in which the transition process to the third time-saving gaming state was performed (1 periodic process in the normal process), after the transition to the third time-saving gaming state (after setting the support flag), the normal figure gaming cycle control By executing the process, it is possible to start the first regular figure game round in the third time-saving game state, and then to start the first special figure game round in the third time-saving game state in the next processing time. can.

In addition, even in a configuration in which the third time-saving game state transition process is performed after the regular figure game time control process, the regular figure game time control process in step Sb405 is changed to the special figure game time control process in step Sb403 in the normal process. If the configuration is such that the game is performed in advance, the regular game game can be started prior to the special game game after the transition to the third time-saving game state. That is, in the next processing time after the transition to the third time-saving game state, processing can be performed in the order of starting fluctuation of the regular figure game time → start of fluctuation of the special figure game time, and changing to the third time-saving game state. It is possible to start the normal game game session corresponding to the above earlier.

(40) In Modifications 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, an external signal corresponding to the time-saving gaming state may be output to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10. In this case, the external signal is, for example, in either the on state or the off state (for example, the on state) when the time saving gaming state is in place, and the other of the on state or the off state (for example, the off state) when it is not in the time saving gaming state. It is fine as long as it is something. By outputting the above-mentioned external signal, it becomes possible for the management control device of the gaming hall to grasp whether the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or not. In addition, in a situation where the time-saving gaming state is in a situation where the transition to the time-saving gaming state is restricted even if the transition conditions are met, by outputting the above external signal, the situation in which the transition to the time-saving gaming state is restricted. It is also possible to have the management control device of the game hall understand that the Note that the above external signal does not necessarily have to indicate the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode state), and even if it is a signal corresponding to the support mode being the high frequency support mode. good.

In addition, in a configuration that outputs an external signal corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, the result of the special drawing lottery is determined in the final game round of the time-saving gaming state (the special drawing gaming round at which the time-saving gaming state ends). In the case of a special winning result, an external signal corresponding to the time-saving gaming state is turned off, and then an external signal (a lottery result signal or a game round execution signal) corresponding to the special winning result is turned on. It is good to say.

In the above case, the special winning result triggers a transition to the subsequent time-saving gaming state, but for example, the external signal corresponding to the special winning result is turned on → the external signal corresponding to the time-saving gaming state is turned off, in this order. When the process is executed, there is a concern that the management control device on the gaming hall side will recognize the transition to the time-saving gaming state even though the transition to the time-saving gaming state is restricted. In this regard, by turning off the external signal corresponding to the time-saving gaming state → turning on the external signal corresponding to the special winning result, the above management control device can detect the special winning result after the time-saving gaming state ends. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being recognized as an unnatural behavior even if the player then shifts to the time-saving gaming state.

(41) In Modifications 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, the external signal corresponding to the special winning result is output when the confirmation display is started in the special figure game round. , may be output at a timing during the confirmation display or at the end timing of the confirmation display. In addition, it may be output at a timing in the middle of the fluctuation display in the special symbol game round that resulted in a special winning result.

(42) In Modifications 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, when a special winning result occurs in a situation where transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted, the stop corresponding to the special winning result Although the configuration is such that the results are stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 43, a configuration may also be adopted in which a stop result corresponding to a normal result is stopped and displayed. In addition, a stop result corresponding to a special failure result in a situation where the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted (corresponding to a special failure result, but a special failure result in a situation where the above transition is not restricted) It is also possible to have a configuration in which a result that is different from the stop result that is stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed.

(43) In the third to fifth modifications of the second embodiment, the transition determination as to whether to transition to the third time-saving game state is performed at the start of the confirmation display in the special figure game round. However, it may be executed when a special figure game round is started as in Modifications 6 to 10. In that case, the transition determination may be made at the start of the special figure game round, while the transition to the third time-saving game state may be performed at the start of the confirmation display, or the transition to the third time-saving game state may also be determined by the special figure. It may also be configured to be performed at the start of a game round.

Moreover, the above-mentioned transition determination may be performed at a timing in the middle of the fluctuation display in the special figure game time in which the special winning result has been obtained. In addition, in the case of transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state after the start of the confirmation display, the above-mentioned transition determination may be executed after the start of the confirmation display.

(44) In the third modification of the second embodiment, the configuration is such that transition to the third time-saving game state is allowed only in the final game time in the first time-saving game state, but there are special features other than the final game time. It may be configured such that transition to the third time-saving game state is allowed in the figure game round. For example, if a configuration is provided with a permission flag indicating that transition to the third time-saving game state is permitted in the case of a special winning result, the permission flag is set to a special symbol game time other than the last game time (for example, 70 (from the 80th to the 80th special figure game), or during the period during which special figure game times other than the last game time are executed (for example, the period from transition to the first time-saving game state until a predetermined period elapses) ) may be set to allow the permissible state. With this configuration, if a special winning result is obtained in a special figure game round or period in which the permissible flag is set, a transition to the third time-saving game state is allowed, and a special figure game round in which the permissible flag is not set. If there is a special winning result in the period or period, the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted.

In addition, instead of or in addition to the permissible flag, a configuration may be provided in which a restriction flag is provided which indicates that transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted in the case of a special winning result. In this case, the above-mentioned restriction flag is set so as to be in a non-permissible state in a special symbol game game or period in which the game is not allowed to shift to the third time-saving game state even if the result is a special winning result.

If the transition to the third time-saving game state is allowed in special figure game times other than the final game time, the transition to the third time-saving game state is permitted in the latter half side special figure game state in the first time-saving game state. It is preferable to have a configuration that includes game times. As the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state decreases, the expected value of winning a jackpot result in the time-saving gaming state decreases, so the player's sense of expectation lasts longer in games in the second half of the time-saving gaming state than in games in the first half. become less likely to be In such a situation, by allowing the transition to the third time-saving gaming state due to the special winning result, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the sense of anticipation.

(45) In the third modification of the second embodiment, the final game round of the first time-saving game state and the game round of the second special symbol of the remaining reserved portion (the second special symbol played under the normal game state) It is also possible to have a configuration in which different game play effects are performed depending on the game time shown in the figure. For example, it is possible to make the background image or the like on the symbol display device 75 different.

(46) In the third modification of the second embodiment, the final display time when a special winning result occurs in the final game of the first time-saving game state or the game of the second special symbol of the remaining reservation It may be configured to be set to a shorter time than the normal confirmation display. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly start the game (special figure game round) after shifting to the third time-saving game state.

(47) In Modification 3, Modification 5, and Modifications 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, the first special figure may have a special off result as in Modification 4. In the case where both the 1st special drawing and the 2nd special drawing have special winning results, the winning probability of the special winning result in the 1st special drawing is the same as the winning probability of the special winning result in the 2nd special drawing. It may be different, or it may be different. In addition, the upper limit number of times of the 3rd time-saving gaming state to which the 1st special drawing results in a special winning result is the upper limit number of times of the 3rd time-saving gaming state to which the transition occurs when the 2nd special drawing results in a special winning result. may be the same or different.

Further, in the fourth modification of the second embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the first special figure is not provided with a special result as in other modifications.

(48) In Modifications 3, 4, and 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, a special out-of-reach performance (fake performance) may be performed as in Modification 5.

(49) In the fourth modification of the second embodiment, the configuration is such that it is disadvantageous for the player when a special winning result occurs in the first time-saving game state, but it may be configured to be disadvantageous. Specifically, there is a third time-saving game state where the upper limit number of times is relatively small (for example, a third time-saving game state where the upper limit number of times is 10) and a third time-saving game state where the upper limit number of times is relatively large (for example, the upper limit number of times is 10 times). 1000 times), and the former third time-saving game state may be more likely to be selected when a special winning result is obtained.

(50) In the fourth modification of the second embodiment, the number of remaining times in the time-saving game state is reduced due to the special winning result in the first time-saving game state. The mode of the common figure game times and the accessory opening/closing game in the 3rd time saving game state may be set to a mode more disadvantageous than that in the 1st time saving game state. For example, the variable display time of the general figure game times becomes longer, the opening time of the general electric accessory 63a becomes shorter, or the number of times the general electric accessory 63a is opened in one accessory opening/closing game decreases. is possible.

(51) In the fourth modification of the second embodiment, the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state is hidden throughout the first time-saving game state, but the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state is a predetermined number (for example It may be configured such that the remaining number of times is hidden in a situation where the number of times is greater than 10 times) and is made clear when the number of times is less than a predetermined number. With such a configuration, if the special winning result does not occur until the end of the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times can be notified to the player before the end, giving the impression that the time-saving game state has ended suddenly. can be suppressed.

(52) In the fifth modification of the second embodiment, the configuration includes two types of first time-saving game states, the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B. The number of types of states may be three or more.

(53) In the fifth modification of the second embodiment, by comparing the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state and the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state and giving priority to the larger side, the third time-saving game Although the configuration is such that a plurality of first time-saving game states are provided in which the range of game times to which transition to the state is allowed differs, the transition to the third time-saving game state is performed without using priority processing based on a comparison of the remaining number of times. A configuration may be provided in which a plurality of first time-saving game states are provided in which the range of game times allowed is different. For example, if a configuration is provided with a permission flag indicating that transition to the third time-saving gaming state is permitted in the event of a special losing result, the range of gaming times in which the permission flag is set and the permissible state is set is set. It is conceivable that each first time-saving game state has a different configuration.

In this case, the permissible flag is not limited to the case where the permissible flag is set for a range of special pattern game times, but also for one special pattern game period or multiple special pattern game times that are not continuous as a range. It may be configured such that . For example, in the first time-saving game state A, the 60th special figure game time is set as the special figure game time in the permissible state, or the 40th, 50th, and 60th special figure game times are set as the special figure game time in the permissible state. On the other hand, in the first time-saving game state B, the 80th special figure game time is set as the allowed special figure game time, and the 80th, 90th, and 100th special figure game times are allowed. For example, it may be set as a state special figure game time.

Further, a permission flag may be set for a period. For example, in the first time-saving game state A, the first period (for example, 5 minutes) after the start of the predetermined number of times (for example, the 20th) special figure game after shifting to the time-saving game state is the permissible state. On the other hand, in the first time-saving game state B, a second period (for example, 10 minutes) after the start of a specific number of times (for example, the 20th or 25th) special figure game after shifting to the time-saving game state is considered to be in a permissible state.

Even when setting the permissible state using the permissible flag as described above, as in modification 5, the permissible state in the first time-saving game state B may be included in the 70th and subsequent special figure game times, or the permissible state in the first time-saving game state B may be If the time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state have a configuration in which the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted, the range or period of the special drawing gaming time is set in common, Each of the effects described in Modification 5 can be achieved.

In addition, when setting a permissible state using a permissible flag, it is good also as a structure where the common upper limit number of times is set in the 1st time-saving game state A and the 1st time-saving game state B. In addition, instead of or in addition to the permission flag, a restriction flag may be provided that indicates that transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted when a special winning result is obtained.

(54) In Modifications 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, in the special pattern game round in which the ceiling has been reached or in the special pattern game round in which the result has been a special failure, the end timing of the variable display may be different. The structure is such that each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed (either a temporary stop display or a real stop display is fine) earlier than the special figure game time, and after the stop display, the rest until the fluctuating display ends. A configuration may also be adopted in which at least a part of the notification corresponding to the reaching the ceiling or the special deviation result is performed using the period.

(55) In Modifications 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, the transition determination as to whether to transition to the second time-saving gaming state and the transition determination as to whether to transition to the third time-saving gaming state are performed. is configured to be executed at the start of the special figure game round, but it is executed at the start of the confirmation display (timing of transition to each time-saving game state) as in the second embodiment and modifications 1 to 5. may be done. Moreover, each of the above transition determinations may be executed at a timing in the middle of the variable display in the special figure game round in which the transition conditions to each time-saving game state are satisfied. Further, in the case of transitioning to each time-saving gaming state after the start of the confirmation display, the above-mentioned transition determination may be executed after the start of the confirmation display.

(56) In Modifications 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, the transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the second time-saving gaming state is performed in the fluctuation pattern setting process (game replay effect setting process). Although the configuration has been described in which it is executed before, the transition determination may be executed after the fluctuation pattern setting process as long as it is before the notification corresponding to the reaching the ceiling or the special deviation result is executed. In such a configuration, when both reaching the ceiling number of times and winning a special winning result are achieved in one special pattern game round, first, based on the understanding that the special winning result has been won, the special winning result is won. The notification corresponding to the result is set to be executed, but after that, based on the fact that the ceiling number of times has been reached in the transition determination of whether to transition to the second time-saving gaming state, the notification of the execution target is determined. It is preferable that the notification is changed from the notification corresponding to the special deviation result to the notification corresponding to reaching the ceiling.

(57) In Modifications 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, the transition determination as to whether to transition to the second time-saving gaming state is performed before the fluctuation pattern setting process. The transition determination may be executed after the process of setting the variable pattern, and only the process of updating the number of losing games may be executed before the process of setting the variable pattern. Even in such a configuration, before setting the fluctuation pattern, it is grasped that both the winning of the special winning result and the reaching of the ceiling number of times have been achieved, and the fluctuation pattern is set so that notification corresponding to reaching the ceiling is executed. This is because the settings can be made.

(58) In Modifications 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, the advantages and disadvantages of the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state are caused by the size of the upper limit number of times, but instead of this, In addition or in addition, it may be configured such that advantages and disadvantages arise depending on the mode of the normal figure game and the role opening/closing game in the time-saving game state. For example, if the second time-saving game state is more advantageous to the player than the third time-saving game state, the fluctuating display time of the regular game game in the second time-saving game state is shorter than that in the third time-saving game state. It is conceivable that the number of openings of the common electric accessory 63a in one accessory object opening/closing game in the second time-saving game state is greater than that in the third time-saving game state.

(59) In the seventh modification of the second embodiment, the second time-saving game state is more advantageous to the player than the third time-saving game state, but the third time-saving game state is more advantageous to the player. The configuration may be more advantageous for the player than the second time-saving gaming state. In this case, when winning the special winning result and reaching the ceiling number of times are established in the same special symbol game round, in order to move to the third time-saving game state on the advantageous side, shift to the second time-saving game state. It is preferable that the process is executed in the order of transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the third time-saving gaming state.

(60) In modification 7 of the second embodiment, as in modification 5, when the conditions for transition to another time-saving gaming state are met in a time-saving gaming state (reaching the ceiling number of times or (If a special winning result is achieved), compare the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state at that point with the upper limit of the other time-saving gaming state to which you are planning to transition, and select the time-saving gaming state with the higher number of times. The configuration may be such that priority is given to

(61) Modification 8 of the second embodiment has a configuration in which transition to another time-saving gaming state is restricted when a condition for transitioning to another time-saving gaming state is satisfied in a situation where the time-saving gaming state is present. However, a configuration may be adopted in which this transition is allowed, as in Modification 7. In this case, in order to shift to the more advantageous time-saving gaming state when winning the special winning result and reaching the ceiling number of times occur in the same special symbol game, it is necessary to shift to the second time-saving gaming state. It is preferable that the order of the transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the third time-saving gaming state and the transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the third time-saving gaming state be the reverse order of the case of Modification Example 8.

(62) In the tenth modification of the second embodiment, when a special winning result occurs in a special figure game round in which the number of winning games reaches the ceiling number, updating of the number of winnings is restricted. However, the update may be allowed. That is, if a special winning result is obtained in the special figure game round of the ceiling number, the reaching of the ceiling number is invalidated, and the transition to the second time-saving game state may be restricted.

(63) In the tenth modification of the second embodiment, while the update of the number of winning games is limited in the third time-saving game state, the update is executed in the final game. Although this configuration has been described above, it may also be configured such that updating of the number of losing game rounds is limited even in the final game round. In other words, if a special winning result is obtained in a special figure game round in which the number of missed game times is the ceiling number, the game first shifts to the third time-saving game state, and is performed after the third time-saving game state ends. It may be configured such that updating of the number of missed game times is resumed in the special figure game time (the special figure game time in the normal game state). In this case, although there is a special figure game time in the normal game state, it is possible to transition to each of the third time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state.

(64) In the tenth modification of the second embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which updating of the number of losing games is allowed in part of the third time-saving gaming state. For example, in the third time-saving game state, the number of losing games is allowed to be updated until the number of losing games reaches a predetermined value smaller than the ceiling number (for example, the value immediately before the ceiling number), and the number of losing games is allowed to be updated. A configuration may be adopted in which updating is restricted after the value is reached. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the ceiling number of times is reached in the middle of the third time-saving game state.

(65) In the tenth modification of the second embodiment, it may be configured to refer to the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number of times and to switch whether or not to limit updating of the number of times of failure. Specifically, if the remaining number of times until the ceiling number is less than the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state, updating of the number of missed times is limited in the third time-saving game state, and if it is greater, in the third time-saving game state. A configuration may be adopted in which this update is permitted.

(66) In the tenth modification of the second embodiment, the second time-saving game state has a higher upper limit number of times than the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, which is advantageous for the player. The second time-saving game state may have a lower upper limit number of times than the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, which may be disadvantageous to the player.

(67) In the tenth modification of the second embodiment, the update of the number of losses is allowed in the first time-saving game state, but the update is not allowed in the first time-saving game state. It is also possible to have a restricted configuration. In this case, even if the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state is set to a number greater than the ceiling number, it is possible to suppress reaching the ceiling number of times in the first time-saving game state.

In addition, for pachinko machines that have both the first time-saving game state where the upper limit number of times is equal to or higher than the ceiling number of times, and the first time-saving game state where the upper limit number of times is less than the ceiling number of times, in the case of the former, the number of misses is updated. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of deviations is limited, and in the latter case, updating of the number of deviations is allowed.

(68) In the tenth modification of the second embodiment, when the update of the number of misses is restricted, the number of misses image 475 is displayed while maintaining the state immediately before the restriction is applied. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the number-of-misses image 475 is not displayed. In this case, the configuration may be such that only the holding image 481 is displayed, or the configuration may be such that other images related to the third time-saving game state such as "during chance time" are displayed. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the number-of-offs image 475 is only erased upon transition to the restricted state, and no other images are displayed in the display area of the number-of-offs image 475.

(69) In the tenth modification of the second embodiment, a predetermined external signal is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 when the restriction on updating the number of misses is started or when the restriction is in progress. Good too. According to such a configuration, the management control device on the gaming hall side can be made to know that the number of missed games in the pachinko machine 10 has not been updated, and even if the number of missed games exceeds the ceiling number of times, It becomes possible to immediately determine that there is no abnormality in the pachinko machine 10 since the pachinko machine 10 does not shift to the second time-saving game state.

(70) Although the eleventh modification of the second embodiment includes the second external signal, this may be omitted. In other words, if the hall equipment is capable of determining differences in output periods, it is possible to determine the occurrence of a special deviation result based on the first external signal. Note that the difference in the first external signal between the normal jackpot result and the special miss result is not limited to the output period (on-state period), and may be, for example, the output level, etc. .

(71) In the eleventh modification of the second embodiment, the second external signal is turned on during the opening/closing execution mode and the time saving game state, but it is turned off during the opening/closing execution mode, It may be configured to be turned on during the time saving game state. This also applies to the second external signals A and B in Modification 12.

(72) In modification 11 and modification 12 of the second embodiment, the first external signal and the second external signal in the case of a special losing result are turned on at the timing of transition to the time-saving gaming state. However, it may be turned on before shifting to the time-saving gaming state (for example, immediately before shifting) or after shifting (for example, immediately after shifting). In short, those external signals may be turned on in response to the transition to the time-saving gaming state.

(73) In the eleventh and twelfth variations of the second embodiment, the first external signal is turned on during the opening/closing execution mode in the case of a normal jackpot result, but in the opening/closing execution mode It may be turned on before the transition (for example, immediately before the transition) or after the transition (for example, immediately after the transition). That is, the first external signal may be turned on in response to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

(74) In the twelfth modification of the second embodiment, the configuration is such that both the first external signal B and the second external signal B can be output, but a configuration may also be adopted in which one of these is not output. .

(75) In the second embodiment and each modification, the symbols displayed variably on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are scrolled in the horizontal direction, but the symbols are arranged on the left, middle and right. may be displayed, and these symbols may be displayed in a variably manner by scrolling them up and down. That is, the direction in which the symbols are arranged and the direction in which the symbols are scrolled are not particularly limited. Further, the number of symbols (the number of symbol rows) is not limited to three, and may be two or four or more.

(76) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine that releases a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is formed on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Furthermore, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner is provided with a storage section and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

<About inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, structures corresponding to each of the above-described embodiments are indicated in parentheses as appropriate, but the present invention is not limited to the specific structures shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics aA group to characteristics aI group>
The inventions described in the following feature groups aA to feature aI are extracted from the above-described first embodiment and its modifications. The invention described in these characteristic groups is, ``For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko game machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the player Regarding the background technology that provides a predetermined benefit (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2004-81853), it is noted that in the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still no way to perform game effects. There is room for improvement.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristics aA group>
The characteristic aA group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and mainly includes the first embodiment and modifications 1 to modification of the first embodiment. This is extracted based on Example 6.

Feature aA1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Granting a benefit that allows the player to receive a benefit based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. means (a function of executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means so that the game time operation is performed;
A suspension notification means (a suspension notification means) that provides a suspension notification (a suspension image) using the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means so that the player can at least recognize the number of pending games before execution; (a function of executing processing corresponding to a pending command in the production control device 143);
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. Destination specifying means that executes a destination specifying process to be specified at a previous timing (main controller 162 in the first embodiment, Modifications 1 to 3, Modifications 5 to 6 of the first embodiment) (a function of executing a pending pre-reading process by the main control device 162 in modification 4 of the first embodiment, a function of executing a first pending pre-reading process by the production control device 143),
Specific mode means (first embodiment) capable of setting the notification mode of the suspension notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the destination specifying process , a function of executing a setting process for a pending notice and a process for first execution of a pending notice by the production control device 143 in Modifications 1 to 6 of the first embodiment);
Equipped with
In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. has been
When a predetermined event occurs in a state where the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a specific mode (in the first embodiment, modification 1 to modification 2 of the first embodiment, the production mode is switched (In the case where the opening/closing execution mode is performed in Modifications 3 and 4 of the first embodiment, and when a power outage state occurs in Modifications 5 and 6 of the first embodiment), It is configured such that at least the notification for suspension set in the specific mode is set to a specific mode or a specific state in which the notification for suspension is not executed (First Embodiment, Modification 1 of the First Embodiment) ~A configuration in which the display mode of the pending image is changed to the normal display mode HMa by switching the production mode in Modification 2; in Modification 3 and Modification 4 of the first embodiment, the pending image is changed by executing the opening/closing execution mode. (a configuration in which the hold image disappears due to the occurrence of a power outage state in Modifications 5 and 6 of the first embodiment);
After the end of the specific state, a predetermined first step that allows the player to recognize the notification mode of the suspension notification that is the subject of the specific state as being the same as the notification mode before the predetermined event occurs. (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) or a predetermined second mode that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode is higher than the notification mode before the predetermined event occurs (higher rank display mode, etc.) Specifying means that can be used (specific display mode, etc.) (in the first embodiment and modifications 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, setting processing for returning to a notice by the production control device 143, pending notice) A function of executing the second execution process of the pending notice, a function of executing the third execution process of the pending notice, a function of executing the process for returning the pending notice by the production control device 143 in modification 5, a fourth execution process of the pending notice, modification A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with the function of executing the display mode setting process by the production control device 143 in Example 6.

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a specific format based on the result of so-called suspension look-ahead, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations for the result corresponding to the grant even before the start of the game round. can. Furthermore, since multiple types of specific modes are set with different expectations for the reward response results, it is possible to assign and suggest levels of expectation, which is useful in arousing players' sense of expectation. This can be an advantageous configuration. In such a configuration, if a predetermined event occurs in a situation where the suspension notification is set to a specific mode, the system transitions to a specific state where the specific mode or suspension notification is not executed. In this case, there is a concern that non-execution of the specific mode may cause the player to misunderstand or feel anxious that the level of expectation suggested by the specific mode has disappeared. In this regard, in this configuration, after the specific state ends, the suspension notification is performed in the first mode that is equivalent to the notification mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event, or in the second mode that is higher than that, so the expectation level is again set. This makes it possible to maintain expectations for the result that corresponds to the grant.

Feature aA2. The configuration is such that at least information corresponding to the notification mode of the suspension notification set as the specific mode can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (return area 344f of the RAM 344),
When setting the notification mode of the suspension notification that is subject to the specific state to the predetermined first mode, the specifying means determines the notification mode from the predetermined first mode based on information stored in the predetermined storage unit. means (a function of executing a setting process for advance notice return in the production control device 143 in the first embodiment and modifications 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, a display mode setting process in modification 5) The gaming machine according to feature aA1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the following:

In the above configuration, information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification is stored, and after the specific state ends, the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the stored information. As a result, after the specific state ends, it is possible to suitably return the notification mode of the suspension notification to the same mode as before the specific state (before the predetermined event occurs).

Feature aA3. It includes an execution notification section (execution display area D) that performs a predetermined notification (display of a suspension image in the execution display area D) so that the player can recognize the execution of the game session that has been suspended;
The specifying means may change the mode of the predetermined notification performed by the execution notification unit to the predetermined first mode or the predetermined first mode in a game round of special information corresponding to the suspension notification that is subject to the specific state. Specification means that can be used as the second mode (in the first embodiment and variations 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, the production control device 143 executes the third execution process of the pending notice) The gaming machine according to feature aA1 or feature aA2, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a fourth execution process of a pending notice by the production control device 143 in modifications 5 and 6.

In the above configuration, after the specific state ends, when processing is performed to make the notification mode equivalent to the notification mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event or the second mode higher than it, the notification mode becomes the target of the specific state. The game period for which the suspension notification is given can be included in the implementation period. As a result, it is possible to secure a long processing period for returning the notification mode to the same level mode, etc. For example, if a predetermined event occurs immediately before the start of a game round of pending notification that has been set as a specific mode. However, it is possible to perform the return process using the playing period of the game after the end of the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suggest the degree of expectation after the end of the specific state.

Feature aA4. When a game round is executed, the game round is executed based on the special information (pending information) that was the subject of the award determination that triggered the game round, or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information. Equipped with a game time performance setting means (a function for executing special symbol fluctuation display processing in the performance control device 143) for setting the game time performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed,
When the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the predetermined second mode, the specifying means selects the predetermined second mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game rendition setting device. Means for executing (the first embodiment, the function of executing the third execution process of the pending notice by the production control device 143 in Modifications 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, Modifications 5 to 6) The gaming machine according to feature aA3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a fourth execution process of a pending notice in a game.

For example, if the notification mode is simply returned to the apposition mode after the end of the specific state, it is not possible to suggest a higher level of expectation than was suggested before the occurrence of the predetermined event. On the other hand, if the notification mode is unnecessarily set to a high-ranking one, it will not match the game performance that is actually performed in the game round, and there is a risk that the player's trust will be damaged. In this regard, in this configuration, based on the special information or specific information used to set the game round performance in the game round of the suspension notification that is subject to the specific state, the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the suspension notification is determined. is promoted to a higher level than before the predetermined event occurred. Thereby, it becomes possible to promote the notification mode of the predetermined notification while suppressing the notification mode of the predetermined notification from becoming inconsistent with the game round effect actually performed in the game round.

Feature aA5. The specifying means is a determining means for determining whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be the predetermined second mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game run performance setting means. (The first embodiment, the function of executing the third execution process of the pending notice by the production control device 143 in the first to fourth modifications of the first embodiment, and the function of executing the third execution process of the pending notice in the fifth to sixth modifications) (a function of executing a fourth execution process), and when the determining means determines that the predetermined second mode is to be used, the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the predetermined second mode. The gaming machine described in feature aA4.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether the mode is to be promoted to a higher mode based on the special information or specific information used for setting the game rendition, and if promotion to the higher mode is permitted by the determination, the promotion process is performed. It will be done. Thereby, after the end of the specific state, the notification mode of the predetermined notification can be promoted within a range that does not exceed the expected level of the game performance that will actually be performed.

Feature aA6. The specifying means includes means for changing the notification mode of the suspension notification that is subject to the specific state to the predetermined first mode and then to the predetermined second mode after the specific state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA5.

When setting the notification mode of the suspension notification to a higher mode than the original mode after the end of a specific state, if it is suddenly set to a higher mode, the specific mode that was made before the occurrence of the predetermined event from the perspective of the player will be changed. It is difficult to understand the relationship between the two and may cause confusion. In this regard, in this configuration, since the notification mode is changed to the upper level notification mode after being set to the same level, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the notification mode has returned, and it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned confusion.

Feature aA7. When the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a specific mode, the specific mode means is a first scenario setting section (production control) that sets a notification scenario (production scenario) for setting the notification mode of the suspension notification to the specific mode. (a function of executing a setting process for a pending notice in the device 143),
When the specific means sets the notification mode of the suspension notification that is the subject of the specific state to the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode after the specific state ends, the specifying means determines the suspension notification. A second scenario setting means for setting a notification scenario (return scenario) for setting the notification mode to the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode (a function of executing a setting process for advance notice return in the production control device 143) ) The gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA6.

For example, in a configuration where games can be played in a specific state, the number of games played will be exhausted during the specific state, so the execution period after the specific state (remaining period) is assumed to vary depending on the length of stay in a particular state. In this regard, in this configuration, in addition to the notification scenario set before the occurrence of a predetermined event, a notification scenario is created to make the pending notification that is the subject of the specific state into an equivalent mode after the specific state ends. is reset, it is possible to suitably change the notification mode of the suspension notification to an equivalent mode even though the remaining period of the suspension notification after the specific state changes.

Feature aA8. After the end of the specific state, a pending number grasping means (which executes the process of step Sa2103) grasps the number of pending games before or before the special information corresponding to the pending notification that is the target of the specific state. function),
The second scenario setting means sets a notification scenario for the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode based on the number of reservations ascertained by the number of reservations grasping means. The gaming machine described in aA7.

In the above configuration, when a specific state ends, the number of reservations is ascertained, and the notification scenario is reset to take into consideration the result, so regardless of the period of stay in the specific state, The notification mode of the suspension notification can be suitably changed to an equivalent mode or the like.

Feature aA9. The gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA8, wherein the specific state is such that the notification mode of at least the specific mode of suspension notification is the normal mode.

When the notification mode of the suspension notification is changed (downgraded) from the specific mode to the normal mode due to the transition to a specific state, there is a misunderstanding that the level of expectation suggested by the specific mode before the occurrence of the specified event has disappeared. This can easily cause anxiety and anxiety to players. By applying any one of the features aA1 to aA8 to such a structure, each of the features can be made to function effectively and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

In addition, when setting the suspension notification to the normal mode in a specific state, it is necessary to change (upgrade) the normal mode to the same mode after the specific state ends, but this feature cannot be changed to feature aA7 or feature aA8. By applying this method, it is possible to suitably change from the normal mode to the peer mode even when the remaining period of suspension notification after a specific state changes.

Feature aA10. Means for restricting the execution of the specific aspect in the specific state regarding the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state (suspension triggered by the suspension information acquired in production mode B) The gaming machine according to feature aA9, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of restricting the execution of preview performances.

For example, if the notification mode for hold notifications, which was considered to be a specific mode, is changed to the normal mode in a specific state, but the special information acquired during the specific state is changed to the specific mode, Since it is necessary to distinguish between special information acquired before the state and special information acquired during the specific state, there is a concern that the processing will become complicated. In addition, even though there is a suspension notification that has been changed from a specific mode to a normal mode, if a suspension notification of special information acquired later is set to a specific mode, the normal mode of the previous suspension notification will be changed. There is also the risk of further aggravating a sense of anxiety that expectations regarding changes to the format may have disappeared. In this regard, in this configuration, since the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state is restricted from being changed to a specific mode in the specific state, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. It becomes possible.

Feature aA11. Means for causing processing by the specific aspect means to be performed after the specific state ends for the suspension notification in which the execution of the specific aspect is restricted (the suspension notice notification in the first modification of the first embodiment) 2. The gaming machine according to feature aA10, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a setting process.

As mentioned in the effect of feature aA10 above, by restricting the change to a specific mode for special information acquired during a specific state, expectations regarding the change to the normal mode in the previous suspension notification disappear. This will prevent you from inciting anxiety that something may have gone wrong. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that an opportunity to suggest the degree of expectation regarding special information acquired during a specific state may be lost. In this regard, in the above configuration, since a change to a specific mode is allowed after the end of the specific state for the suspension notification that imposes such a restriction, it is possible to secure an opportunity to suggest the degree of expectation.

Feature aA12. The gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA8, wherein the specific state is such that at least with respect to a specific mode of suspension notification, the suspension notification is not executed.

If the notification mode of the suspension notification is not executed due to the transition to the specific state, it may cause the player to misunderstand or feel anxious that the level of expectation suggested by the specific mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event has disappeared. It becomes easier. By applying any one of the features aA1 to aA8 to such a structure, each of the features can be made to function effectively and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aA13. After the specific state ends, the suspension notification that is subject to the specific state is configured to be executed in the normal mode,
The specifying means is a means for changing the notification mode of the suspension notification which has been set to the normal mode to the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode (setting for advance notice return in the production control device 143). The gaming machine according to feature aA12, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function for executing processing.

After the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to non-execution due to the transition to the specific state, when the suspension notification is restarted in the normal mode, the notification mode indicated by the specific mode before the predetermined event occurs. There is a risk that this will further fuel a sense of anxiety that the level of expectations that were built up may have disappeared. By applying any one of the features aA1 to aA8 to such a structure, each of the features can be made to function effectively and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the suspension notification is not executed in a specific state and the suspension notification returns to the normal mode after the specific state ends, the normal mode will change from the normal mode to the equivalent mode, etc. after the specific state ends. Processing to change (upgrade) is required, but by applying this feature to feature aA7 or feature aA8, even if the remaining period of suspension notification after a specific state changes, it is possible to change the status from the normal mode to the same mode, etc. Changes can be made appropriately.

In addition, this feature is as follows: "After the end of the specific state, the suspension notification that is the target of the specific state is executed in the normal mode, and then It can also be expressed as "it is provided with a means for changing to the second mode (a function of executing a setting process for returning to advance notice in the production control device 143)."

Feature aA14. A specific effect means (a function that executes the processing of steps Sa1603 to Step Sa1605) that executes a specific effect (change suggestion effect) that suggests that the notification mode of the suspension notification changes to a higher level notification mode;
After the end of the specific state, when the notification mode of the suspension notification that is the target of the specific state is set to the predetermined first mode, means for restricting the execution of the specific effect (change suggestion effect) (a feature that allows execution to be restricted) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA13, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since it is suggested that the notification mode of the hold notification will change to a higher level notification mode due to the specific effect, a sense of expectation for the change to the higher level notification mode is aroused, and the player is encouraged to receive the hold notification. can increase the attention of In such a configuration, for example, if a specific performance is performed to change the mode to the same level after the end of the specific state, the player may change the notification mode ( It is assumed that users will associate higher-level notification modes with reference to the mode before the occurrence of a predetermined event. In this case, since the actual notification mode does not match the mode associated with the player, there is a risk that the player's trust in the specific performance may be lost. In this regard, in this configuration, when the same mode is set after the end of the specific state, execution of the specific effect is restricted, so the player is suppressed from associating a higher level mode than the actual notification mode, and the above-mentioned It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconveniences.

Note that for each configuration of features aA1 to aA14, features aA1 to aA14, aB1 to aB14, aC1 to aC9, aD1 to aD10, aE1 to aE19, aF1 to aF12 , features aG1 to aG15, features aH1 to aH11, and features aI1 to aI12. It is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic aB group>
The feature aB group is a group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the first embodiment.

Feature aB1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Granting a benefit that allows the player to receive a benefit based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. means (a function of executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
A specific notification means (in the performance control device 143) that causes a specific notification (pending notice performance) to be performed on a predetermined notification device (symbol display device 75, reservation lamp part) based on a predetermined execution trigger (prereading result). function to execute processing corresponding to pending commands),
Equipped with
The specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to one of a plurality of notification modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow color display mode HMe). It is provided with a setting means (a function of executing a setting process for a pending notice in the production control device 143 and a process for first execution of a pending notice), and executes the specific notification based on the setting result of the first notification mode setting means. It is configured as follows.
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when a predetermined operation is performed by the production operation unit 36), one production state among multiple types of production states (production mode A, production mode B) including the predetermined production state. A production state transition means (a function of executing production mode switching processing in the production control device 143) for transitioning from the production state to another production state;
When the specific notification (pending notice effect using the pending image HW) is transferred from the predetermined presentation state to another presentation state and then transferred to the predetermined presentation state, the specification in the subsequent predetermined presentation state A second notification mode setting means that sets the notification mode of the notification based on the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined production state (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the setting process for advance notice return by the production control device 143) )and,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, a plurality of types of performance states are provided, and the performance state is switched when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. This allows the player to change his/her mood during the game, and prevents the player from becoming bored with the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the execution of the specific notification is canceled when the production state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, it may be assumed that the chance that was notified or suggested by the specific notification has disappeared. There is a concern that this may cause misunderstandings and anxiety to players. In such a case, it may be possible to restrict the switching of presentation states while a specific notification is being executed, but this may lead to a situation where the frequency of switching presentation states decreases, and the purpose of providing multiple types of presentation states may be lost. be.

In this regard, with this feature, when a predetermined presentation state is transitioned to another presentation state while a specific notification is being executed, and then the transition is made to a predetermined presentation state, the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined presentation state is set first. Since the settings are made based on the notification mode in the predetermined presentation state, the specific notification can be returned to the original notification mode by returning the presentation state to the original state. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the chance has not disappeared, and it is possible to perform specific notification without imposing restrictions on switching the presentation state. In other words, it becomes possible to suitably balance the execution of specific notification and the switching of the presentation state.

Feature aB2. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , comprising a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game time operation to be performed,
The gaming machine according to feature aB1, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, the effect state is likely to change while the specific notification is being executed. By applying the configuration of feature aB1 to such a configuration, the feature can be made to function effectively and the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Note that this feature may include the following feature: "The performance state transition means includes means for switching the performance state in accordance with the execution of the game round." In a configuration in which the specific notification is performed across game rounds and the performance state is switched according to the break between the game rounds, the phenomenon in which the performance state is switched during execution of the specific notification is particularly likely to occur, so the above effect of feature aB1 It becomes possible to exhibit this even more suitably.

Feature aB3. The configuration is such that information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (return area 344f of the RAM 344),
According to feature aB1 or feature aB2, the second notification mode setting means sets a notification mode of a specific notification in a subsequent predetermined presentation state based on information stored in the predetermined storage unit. Game machine.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification is stored, and when transitioning to a later predetermined production state, the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the stored information. Thereby, the specific notification in the later predetermined performance state can be suitably returned to the original notification mode executed in the previous predetermined performance state.

Feature aB4. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. A game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) that controls the game time operation to be performed;
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. A destination specifying means for executing a destination specifying process to be specified at a previous timing (a function of executing a pending prefetch process in the main controller 162);
Equipped with
The specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification based on the result of the destination identification process before the special information that is the target of the destination identification process becomes the target of the provision determination. ,
The specific notification means transitions from the previous predetermined presentation state to the other presentation state during the execution of specific notification triggered by specific special information (suspension information of the target pending image HW), and then transitions from the previous predetermined presentation state to the other presentation state. If the transition to a later predetermined presentation state occurs before the special information game round ends or before the specific special information becomes subject to the provision determination by the provision determination means, in the subsequent predetermined performance state, the specific special information Equipped with a specific means for executing a specific notification in response to special information (a function of executing a setting process for returning the notice in the production control device 143, a process for second execution of the suspended notice, and a process for executing the third execution of the suspended notice). The gaming machine according to any one of features aB1 to aB3.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is executed based on the result of so-called pending look-ahead, the notification mode of the specific notification indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the allocation judgment will be the result corresponding to the allocation, and the allocation judgment is performed. It is possible to suitably arouse the player's sense of expectation for the result corresponding to the grant in advance. In such a case, if the execution of the specific notification is canceled when the performance state is switched as described above, it may cause the player to misunderstand that the award response result has disappeared or that their expectations have decreased. There are concerns about giving.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, if the original performance state is returned to before the end of the game round of the special information that triggered the specific notification or before the special information becomes subject to determination, the original notification The notification mode of the specific notification is set in accordance with the mode. Therefore, in addition to informing the player that the award corresponding results have not disappeared, the expectation level for the special information that triggered the specific notification can be notified before the award determination result for the special information is announced. can be suggested once again. Therefore, the above-mentioned concerns can be appropriately addressed, and it becomes possible to suitably balance the execution of specific notification and the switching of the production state.

Feature aB5. The second notification mode setting means sets the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined performance state based on the notification pattern of the specific notification in the previous predetermined performance state, regardless of the result of the destination specifying process in the previous predetermined performance state. The gaming machine according to feature aB4, characterized in that a notification mode is set.

For example, if the notification mode of a specific notification in a later predetermined production state is set based on the result of pending pre-reading performed in a previous predetermined production state, the notification of a specific notification in a previous predetermined production state may be set. It is assumed that an aspect different from the aspect is set. In addition, in a configuration where the notification mode of specific notification is changed in stages (ranked up), even if the look-ahead result is the same, there may be a difference in the notification mode of specific notification at the time of switching depending on the switching timing of the production state. If the notification mode in the later predetermined performance state is set based on the result of the pending pre-reading, a different notification mode from the specific notification in the previous predetermined performance state is likely to be set.

In this regard, in this configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined production state is not the result of the pending pre-reading performed in the previous predetermined production state, but the notification mode when switching from the production state to another production state. Since the setting is based on the notification mode of the notification, when the performance state returns to the original state, the notification mode can be set to the same notification mode as the specific notification that was actually notified. As a result, it is possible to suitably match the notification mode in the previous predetermined production state with the notification mode in the subsequent predetermined production state, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the notification mode has returned. become.

Feature aB6. The specific notification means is
When performing a specific notification triggered by the specific special information in the predetermined performance state, a first scenario setting means (for pending notice) sets a notification scenario (performance scenario) for changing the notification mode of the specific notification. function to execute the setting process), and
When a specific notification is made in response to the specific special information in a later predetermined performance state, a second scenario setting means (notice return scenario) for resetting a notification scenario (return scenario) for changing the notification mode of the specific notification ), and
The gaming machine according to feature aB4 or feature aB5, characterized by comprising:

When making a specific notification in a later predetermined production state, depending on the length of the stay in the other production state, the game session of the special information to which the specific notification corresponds may start or end after switching to the later predetermined production state. It is assumed that the period until the end, that is, the period during which specific notification can be executed, will vary. In this regard, in this configuration, when a specific notification is made in a later predetermined production state, the notification scenario for changing the notification mode is reset, so even if the above period changes, the notification mode of the specific notification will be changed to the original. It can be suitably changed depending on the aspect.

Feature aB7. When transitioning to a later predetermined production state, a pending number grasping means (a function of executing the process of step Sa2103) is provided for grasping the pending number of gaming times before or before the specific special information,
The gaming machine according to feature aB6, wherein the second scenario setting means resets the notification scenario based on the number of reservations ascertained by the number of reservations grasping means.

In the above configuration, when switching to a later predetermined presentation state, the number of pending events is grasped, and the notification scenario for the specific notification is reset by taking the result into account, so regardless of the stay period in other presentation states, The notification mode of the specific notification can be suitably changed to the original mode.

Feature aB8. In the case where the previous predetermined presentation state transitions to the other presentation state during the execution of the specific notification, a means for restricting the continuation of the specific notification (a function of setting the display mode of the pending image HW to the normal display mode HMa) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features aB1 to aB7.

In the above configuration, since the continuation of the specific notification that has been executed up to that point is restricted (regulated) when the performance state is switched, it is easy to give the player a misunderstanding that the chance has disappeared. By applying any one of the features aB1 to aB7 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aB9. The gaming machine according to any one of features aB1 to aB8, wherein the predetermined performance state is a performance state in which the ease with which the specific notification is executed is different from the other performance states.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease with which specific notifications are executed differs depending on the performance state, if the performance state is switched while the specific notification is still being executed, the level of expectation etc. suggested by the specific notification will be different before and after the performance state is switched. There is a risk of inviting In this case, by canceling execution of the specific notification upon switching of the production state, it is possible to suppress such inconsistency in expectations. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that the player may be misled or worried that the chance suggested by the specific notification has disappeared. By applying any one of the features aB1 to aB8 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

In addition, in this feature, "the predetermined performance state is a performance state in which the ease with which the specific notification is executed is different from the other performance states" includes the condition that the other performance state is a state in which the specific notification can be executed. It can be understood that this includes not only a configuration in which this is set, but also a configuration in which another presentation state is set as a state in which specific notification is not executed.

Feature aB10. The plurality of types of notification modes in the specific notification are set such that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different,
The second notification mode setting means sets a predetermined notification mode that allows the player to recognize the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined performance state as being the same as the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined performance state. Features aB1 to Features characterized by comprising a first means (setting process for returning to advance notice in the production control device 143) for setting one mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) The gaming machine according to any one of aB9.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined production state is set to a mode that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode in the previous predetermined production state is the same, so that the specific notification is restored. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that he/she has done so.

Feature aB11. The second notification mode setting means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to the first predetermined mode in a later predetermined production state, and then sets the notification mode of the specific notification to the first predetermined mode in a subsequent predetermined performance state, and then sets the notification mode of the specific notification to the player if the notification mode is higher than the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined production state. Feature aB10 characterized by comprising a second means (setting process for advance notice return in the production control device 143) for setting a predetermined second mode (upper specific display mode, etc.) that can be recognized by the user. The gaming machine described in .

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined production state can be set to a higher level of notification mode than the notification mode in the previous predetermined production state, so that the notification mode in the later predetermined production state is The notification mode is limited to a predetermined performance state, and it is possible to prevent the range of possible expectations, etc. from becoming narrower. At this time, if the notification mode is suddenly set to a higher level, it may be difficult to understand the correspondence with the notification mode that was performed in the previous predetermined presentation state, and the presentation may become difficult to understand. In this regard, in this configuration, since the notification mode is first set to the same level and then changed to the higher level notification mode, it is possible to easily understand that the notification mode has been restored, and it is possible to suppress confusion among players.

Feature aB12. a specific presentation means (a function that executes the processing of steps Sa1603 to Sa1605) that executes a specific presentation (change suggestion presentation) that suggests that the notification mode of the specific notification changes to a higher notification mode;
When the notification mode of the specific notification is set to the predetermined first mode in a subsequent predetermined presentation state, means for restricting the execution of the specific presentation (function for restricting the execution of the change suggestion presentation) and,
The gaming machine according to feature aB10 or feature aB11, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since it is suggested that the specific presentation will change the notification mode of the specific notification to a higher level notification mode, expectations for the change to the higher level mode are aroused, and the player's attention to the specific notification is increased. You can increase the degree. In such a configuration, for example, if a specific effect is performed when the notification mode of a specific notification is set to be a peer mode, the player may be able to change the destination that he or she remembers, even though the mode is actually only a peer mode. It is assumed that the user will associate a higher level notification mode with the notification mode in a predetermined performance state as a reference. In this case, since the actual notification mode does not match the mode associated with the player, there is a risk that the player's trust in the specific performance may be lost. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the change corresponds to a change to a higher-level notification mode, if the notification mode is simply returned to the previous predetermined effect state, the execution of the specific effect is restricted, so the actual It is possible to prevent the player from associating an aspect higher than the notification aspect, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature aB13. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. A game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) that controls the game time operation to be performed;
A suspension notification means (a function of executing a process corresponding to a suspension command in the performance control device 143) that performs suspension notification (a suspension image) so that the player can at least recognize the number of suspensions of the game before execution;
Equipped with
According to any one of features aB1 to aB12, the specific notification is characterized in that the notification mode of the suspension notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode). gaming machines.

When specific notification is performed using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and the effect state is likely to change while the specific notification is being executed. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information is the target of the expectation level etc. suggested by the specific notification, it is assumed that there will be a large impact if the execution of the specific notification is canceled due to the switching of the production state. Ru. By applying any one of the features aB1 to aB12 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aB14. When transitioning from the previous predetermined production state to the other production state in a situation where the notification mode of the suspension notification corresponding to specific special information (the suspension information of the suspension image HW) is set to the specific mode, the specific special Feature aB13, characterized in that it includes means for setting the notification mode of the suspension notification corresponding to the information to the normal mode (a function of setting the display mode of the suspension image HW to the normal display mode HMa). Game machine.

In the above configuration, when the production state is switched, the suspension notification that had been in a specific mode is changed to a normal mode, so it is easy for players to feel that their status has been downgraded, and that their expectations have decreased. It's easy to misunderstand. By applying any one of the features aB1 to aB12 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Note that for each configuration of features aB1 to aB14, features aA1 to aA14, aB1 to aB14, aC1 to aC9, aD1 to aD10, aE1 to aE19, aF1 to aF12 , features aG1 to aG15, features aH1 to aH11, and features aI1 to aI12. It is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic aC group>
The feature aC group is a feature of a group of inventions extracted from each embodiment, each modification, or a combination thereof described above, and is mainly extracted based on modification 1 of the first embodiment described above. It is.

Feature aC1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Granting a benefit that allows the player to receive a benefit based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. means (a function of executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , a game time control means (a function of executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game time operation is performed;
In order to enable the player to at least recognize the number of pending games before execution, a pending notification (a pending image) is sent to the predetermined notifying means or a notifying device different from the predetermined notifying means (symbol display device 75, a pending lamp). a suspension notification means (a function for executing suspension command corresponding processing in the production control device 143);
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. A destination specifying means for executing a destination specifying process to be specified at a previous timing (a function of executing a pending prefetch process in the main controller 162);
Specific mode means (specific mode means) capable of executing specific mode processing for changing the notification mode of the suspension notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the destination specifying process; In the first modification of the first embodiment, a function of executing a setting process for a pending notice and a first execution process for a pending notice in the production control device 143);
Equipped with
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when switching from production mode A to production mode B), the system is configured to shift to a restricted state in which execution of the specific mode or the suspension notification is restricted. ,
Setting means (setting means) for setting a notification mode after the restriction state with respect to the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restriction state based on the result of the destination specifying process executed during the restriction state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a second setting process for a pending notice by the production control device 143 in the first modification of the first embodiment.

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a specific format based on the result of so-called suspension look-ahead, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations for the result corresponding to the grant even before the start of the game round. can. Under such a configuration, a restriction state may be provided for restricting execution of a specific mode or suspension notification for a pending notification that has already been set as a specific mode. However, if new special information is acquired during the restricted state, assuming that such special information is not changed to the specific aspect, the player's expectations regarding the special information acquired during the restricted state will be There is a concern that it may not be possible to evoke a sense of emotion.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, the notification mode of the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state can be changed to a specific mode after the restricted state ends. It is possible to arouse players' expectations regarding special information. In this case, the change to the specific mode after the restricted state is performed based on the result of the destination identification process (pending look-ahead processing) executed during the restricted state, so the destination identification process is performed in the same way as when not in the restricted state. be able to. In other words, since there is no need to change the configuration of the destination identification process, the notification mode of the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restriction state can be changed after the restriction state, while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated. becomes possible.

Feature aC2. The destination specifying means is configured to perform the destination specifying process on the acquired special information in accordance with the acquisition timing of the special information, regardless of whether or not it is in the restricted state. The gaming machine according to feature aC1.

According to the above configuration, the destination identification process can be performed in accordance with the acquisition timing of special information both in the case of the restricted state and in the case of the non-restricted state. There is no need to distinguish between processes. Therefore, it becomes possible to change the notification mode of the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restriction state after the restriction state, while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature aC3. The gaming machine according to feature aC1 or feature aC2, wherein the setting means executes the setting when the restriction state ends or after the restriction state ends.

For example, when setting the notification mode after the restriction state based on the result of destination identification processing executed during the restriction state, if the configuration is configured to perform the setting during the restriction state, it will correspond to the notification for hold with the notification mode set. If a game session with special information is executed during a restricted state, the suspension notification may end without being reflected in the setting of the notification mode, and the setting may be wasted. In this regard, in this configuration, since the notification mode is set at the end of the restriction state or after the end of the restriction state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such waste and perform efficient processing.

Feature aC4. The restricted state restricts execution of the specific aspect,
Regarding the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state, the notification mode during the restricted state is the normal mode, or a predetermined mode (black display mode) different from both the normal mode and the specific mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features aC1 to aC3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a means for forcibly setting the display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 to the normal display mode HMa or the black display mode. .

In the above configuration, in the restricted state where execution of the specific mode is restricted, the notification for suspension is performed in the normal mode or in a predetermined mode that is different from both the normal mode and the specific mode, so that the player can recognize the number of pending games. While doing so, it is possible to disable certain aspects. By applying any one of the features aC1 to aC3 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aC5. When special information is acquired during the restriction state, predetermined information (occurrence pending during the restriction period) is provided so that it can be understood after the restriction state that the special information was acquired during the restriction state. The gaming machine according to any one of features aC1 to aC4, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to store information (information on this matter) in a predetermined storage unit (reservation storage area 344c of the RAM 344).

According to the above configuration, even if after the end of the restricted state, the special information acquired before entering the restricted state and the special information acquired during the restricted state are mixed, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit The special information acquired during the restricted state can be identified based on the information. As a result, the setting means according to feature aC1 can distinguish between special information acquired during the restricted state and special information that is not, and process only the special information acquired during the restricted state. It becomes possible.

Feature aC6. As the performance state, a plurality of performance states including a first performance state (performance mode A) and a second performance state (performance mode B) are set,
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when a predetermined operation is performed by the performance operation unit 36), a performance state transition means (performance state transition means) for transitioning from one performance state to another performance state among a plurality of types of performance states. (a function of executing a production mode switching process in the control device 143),
The gaming machine according to any one of features aC1 to aC5, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to shift to the restriction state when the first performance state shifts to the second performance state.

In the above configuration, when the performance state is switched, the state shifts to the restriction state. In this case, since it is considered that the player will play the game in the performance state after switching, it is assumed that the special information will be acquired during the restricted state. By applying any one of the features aC1 to aC5 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aC7. The gaming machine according to feature aC6, wherein the second performance state is a performance state in which the ease with which the specific mode process is executed is different from the first performance state.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease of changing to a specific mode differs depending on the presentation state, if the presentation state is switched while maintaining the specific mode, there is a risk that the expectations suggested by the specific mode before and after the switching will not match. In this case, such inconsistency in expectations can be suppressed by restricting execution of specific modes and suspension notifications upon transition from the first performance state to the second performance state. However, even if the above restrictions are applied to the suspension notification that was in a specific mode before transitioning to the second performance state, the new suspension notification that is performed by acquiring special information in the second performance state Concerns arise as to how notifications should be handled. By applying any one of the features aC1 to aC6 to such a structure, each of the features can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

In addition, in this feature, "the second performance state is a performance state in which the ease with which the specific mode process is executed is different from the first performance state" includes both the first performance state and the second performance state. The specific notification can be executed not only when the execution frequency (execution probability) of the specific notification is different in each performance state, but also when the specific notification is executed in one of the first performance state and the second performance state. It can be understood that configurations that are not executed are also included.

Feature aC8. The gaming machine according to feature aC6 or feature aC7, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that the restriction state ends when the second performance state ends.

In the above configuration, the restriction state is canceled when the second performance state ends, so regarding the suspension notification of special information acquired during the second performance state, during the second performance state, a specific mode or suspension notification is issued. It is possible to restrict the execution of , and then set it to a specific mode in response to the end of the second performance state.

Feature aC9. An execution notification unit (execution display area D)
If a game round of special information acquired during the restricted state is played during the restricted state, the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the special information and performed by the execution notification unit. , comprising means (a function of executing the processes of steps Sa2901 to Sa2903) for setting a specific mode different from the normal mode based on the result of the destination specifying process performed during the restricted state. The gaming machine according to any one of features aC1 to aC8.

According to the above configuration, regarding the suspension notification whose notification mode is restricted from being changed due to transition to the restricted state, the change to the specific mode is permitted when the game progresses to the game round of the suspension notification. Therefore, even if a game session of the special information acquired during the restricted state is executed during the restricted state, the degree of expectation regarding the special information can be suggested.

Note that for each configuration of features aC1 to aC9, features aA1 to aA14, aB1 to aB14, aC1 to aC9, aD1 to aD10, aE1 to aE19, aF1 to aF12 , features aG1 to aG15, features aH1 to aH11, and features aI1 to aI12. It is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic aD group>
The feature aD group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on Modification 2 of the first embodiment. .

Feature aD1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Granting a benefit that allows the player to receive a benefit based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. means (a function of executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means indicates that the game return operation is ended. A game time control means (a function of executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game time operation is performed as one time;
In order to enable the player to at least recognize the number of pending games before execution, a pending notification (a pending image) is sent to the predetermined notifying means or a notifying device different from the predetermined notifying means (symbol display device 75, a pending lamp). a suspension notification means (a function for executing suspension command corresponding processing in the production control device 143);
Specifying that it is possible to execute a specific mode process of changing the notification mode of the suspension notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) based on a predetermined execution trigger (prereading result). A mode means (a function of executing a setting process for a pending notice in the production control device 143 and a process for first execution of a pending notice),
Equipped with
In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. has been
A plurality of types of states are set including a first state (performance mode A) and a second state (performance mode B) in which the ease with which the specific mode process is executed differs from the first state,
When the specific mode process is executed in the first state and the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to one of a plurality of types, and then the transition to the second state is made, the notification mode of the suspension notification is changed to the second state. Mode determination for determining whether or not the notification mode in the first state is a predetermined mode that allows players to recognize that they are of the same rank (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with means (a function for executing the production mode switching process by the production control device 143 in the second modification of the first embodiment).

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the suspension notification is set as a specific mode, and a plurality of types of modes are set in the specific mode so that the degree of expectation for the provision response result is different. Therefore, by making the suspension notification in one of the specific modes, it is possible to suggest the level of expectation, and it is possible to suitably arouse the player's sense of expectation for the result of grant correspondence. Further, in this configuration, a plurality of types of states are set including a first state and a second state in which the first state is different in ease of change to a specific mode. Since switching between these states is performed, it is possible to change the player's mood during the game and prevent him from getting bored with the game.

Under such a configuration, when transitioning from the first state to the second state in a situation where suspension notification of a specific mode is being performed, if the specific mode is maintained, the corresponding expectation level may change to the second state depending on the type. The state will be far different from before the transition, and there is a risk of misunderstanding among players. In this regard, in this configuration, when such a transition occurs, the player recognizes that the notification mode of the suspension notification after the transition to the second state is the same as the notification mode in the first state. It is determined whether or not this mode is possible. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a mismatch of expectations, and it becomes possible to suitably perform suspension notification after transition to the second state.

In addition, in the "second state in which the ease of execution of the specific mode process is different from the first state" in this feature, the second state is set as a state in which it is possible to change the suspension notification to the specific mode. It can be understood that this includes not only a configuration in which the second state is set as a state in which the change to a specific mode of suspension notification is not executed.

Feature aD2. The gaming machine according to feature aD1, wherein the second state is a state in which the specific mode processing is less likely to be executed than the first state.

In the above configuration, in the second state, the notification for suspension is less likely to be in a specific manner than in the first state, so the expectation level for the grant response result when the notification manner for the suspension notification is changed to a specific manner When compared, it is assumed that the second state is higher than the first state. In this case, the transition from the first state to the second state is a transition from a state in which the degree of expectation for the grant response result for a specific aspect is low to a state in which the expectation level is high. By applying the above configuration, it becomes possible to suppress inconsistencies in expectations and appropriately perform suspension notification after transition to the second state.

In addition, in this feature, "the second state is a state in which the specific mode processing is more difficult to be executed than the first state" means that the probability that the suspension notification is in the specific mode in the second state is the first. In addition to a configuration in which the second state is set to be lower than that of the second state, it can be understood that a configuration in which the second state is set as a state in which the change to a specific mode of suspension notification is not executed is also included.

Feature aD3. When the notification mode of the suspension notification when transitioning to the second state is higher than a predetermined notification mode (upper limit display mode), the mode determination means sets the notification mode of the suspension notification to the predetermined notification mode. If it is determined that the notification mode of the suspension notification is not allowed to be set as the predetermined notification mode and the notification mode of the suspension notification when transitioning to the second state is below the predetermined notification format, the notification format of the suspension notification is changed to the predetermined notification format. The gaming machine according to feature aD1 or feature aD2, characterized in that it is determined that the mode is allowed.

In the above configuration, by comparing the notification mode at the time of transition to the second state and the predetermined notification mode set corresponding to the second state, it is determined whether the notification mode is the same as the notification mode in the first state. is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not each aspect should be of the same rank based on the corresponding expectation level in the second state, and it is possible to suitably perform suspension notifications after transitioning to the second state. Become.

Note that in this feature, the "predetermined notification mode" can also be expressed as "the predetermined notification mode set corresponding to the second state."

Feature aD4. Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information (fluctuation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the attachment determination, and the special information is subject to the attachment determination. A destination specifying means (a function of executing pending prefetching processing in the main control device 162) is provided to execute a destination specifying process to be specified at a timing before becoming a target,
The specific mode means is configured to execute the specific mode process based on the result of the previous specifying process,
Any of features aD1 to aD3, characterized in that the mode determining means makes the determination based on the result of the destination specifying process regarding special information to which the suspension notification that is the target of determination by the mode determining means corresponds. A gaming machine described in Crab.

In the above configuration, the change to the specific mode is performed based on the result of the pre-specifying process (so-called pre-reading result). When the mode determining means determines whether or not the mode is equivalent, the above-mentioned determination is made based on the pre-read result of the suspension notification that is the target of the determination. As a result, the pre-reading result of the suspension notification, that is, the notification result in the game round that will be executed when the special information of the suspension notification becomes the determination target of the provision determination means, and the game round in the game round. Based on the performance, it can be determined whether or not to use an equivalent mode.

Feature aD5. A plurality of types of upper limit modes (upper limit display modes) are set corresponding to the results of the destination identification process (return determination table),
The mode determining means includes:
A grasping means (a function of executing the process of step Sa3105) for grasping the result of the destination specifying process with respect to the special information corresponding to the suspension notification to be judged by the mode judging means;
Means for making the determination based on the upper limit aspect corresponding to the result ascertained by the ascertaining means among the plurality of types of aspects (a function for executing the process of step Sa3106);
The gaming machine according to feature aD4, comprising:

In the above configuration, multiple types of upper limit modes are set corresponding to the prefetch results, and when determining whether or not to use the same mode by the mode determination means, the prefetch results of the suspension notification that is the target of the determination are The above determination is made by applying the corresponding upper limit mode. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not the notification mode of the suspension notification in the case of transitioning to the second state is set to be the same mode without exceeding the expectation level corresponding to the first state.

Feature aD6. When executing the specific mode process, the specific mode means executes the suspension notification in a first specific mode (blue display mode HMb) that is one of the plurality of modes, and then Means for changing the notification mode of the hold notification to a second specific mode (green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) higher than the first specific mode (a means for changing the notification mode for the hold notice in the production control device 143) The gaming machine according to any one of features aD1 to aD5, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing a setting process.

In the above configuration, after the notification mode of the reservation notification is set to a specific mode, the notification mode is changed to a higher level mode in stages. In such a configuration, when processing is performed to change the notification mode of the suspension notification to a specific mode in the first state, for example, if a transition to the second state occurs in the early stages after the notification mode is set to the specific mode. , it is assumed that the specific aspect at that time will be a relatively lower-level aspect (an aspect with low expectations), and conversely, if the above transition occurs in the final stage, it is assumed that the specific aspect at that time will be a relatively higher-ranking aspect (an aspect with low expectations). It is assumed that this will be the case. In other words, depending on the timing of transition to the second state, there is a difference in which specific mode is used in the suspension notification. In this way, by applying any of the configurations from feature aD1 to feature aD5 to the configuration, it is possible to decide whether or not to use the same mode depending on the notification mode each time, and the transition to the second state It becomes possible to suitably carry out subsequent suspension notification.

In addition, in this feature, "the mode determining means determines whether or not the mode determining means uses a predetermined mode that allows the player to recognize that the player is on the same level as the notification mode in the first mode immediately before transitioning to the second state. The computer may further include a feature of ``a means for determining.''

Feature aD7. The second state is a state in which the specific aspect process is less likely to be executed than the first state,
When the specific mode processing is executed in the second state and the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to one of a plurality of types of modes, and the transition is made to the first state, the determination by the mode determining means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features aD1 to aD6, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a means for non-execution (a function of skipping the processing of steps Sa3105 to step Sa3107 when a negative determination is made in step Sa3104).

In the above configuration, the suspension notification transitions from the second state where it is relatively difficult to be considered as a specific mode to the first state where it is relatively easy to be considered as a specific mode, that is, there is a high expectation for the result of granting response to the specific mode. In the case of switching from a state to a lower state, the configuration is such that it is not determined whether or not the state is in an appositional manner. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the opportunity for the notification mode of the hold notification to be maintained from being excessively limited, and also to reduce the processing load.

Feature aD8. When it is determined by the mode determining means to change the notification mode to the predetermined mode, changing means changes the notification mode of the suspension notification that is subject to the determination from the normal mode to the predetermined mode (executes the process of step Sa3110) The gaming machine according to any one of features aD1 to aD7, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of

In the above configuration, when changing the notification mode of the suspension notification to the peer mode, the mode is first changed to the normal mode and then changed to the peer mode. In this case, the notification mode of the suspension notification can be configured to switch to the normal mode when switching from the first state to the second state, regardless of whether or not the apposition mode is used. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness in the case where the specific mode is changed to the normal mode because it is determined that the mode is not an appositive mode. In addition, by configuring the configuration to change to a specific mode after becoming the normal mode, it is possible to specify the hold notification that has been set to the normal mode after transitioning to the second state, including when it is determined that the mode is not of the same rank. It is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the mode will be changed, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation for the suspension notification.

Feature aD9. A specific effect means (a function that executes the processing of steps Sa1603 to Step Sa1605) that executes a specific effect (change suggestion effect) that suggests that the notification mode of the suspension notification changes to a higher level notification mode;
When the notification mode of the suspension notification is changed to the predetermined mode by the changing means, means for restricting the execution of the specific effect (a function for restricting the execution of the change suggestion effect); ,
The gaming machine according to feature aD8, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since it is suggested that the notification mode of the hold notification will change to a higher level notification mode due to the specific effect, a sense of expectation for the change to the higher level notification mode is aroused, and the game to the hold notification is aroused. It is possible to increase the attention of people. In such a configuration, for example, if a specific performance is performed when changing to a mode of the same rank, the player will associate the notification mode of the first state that is stored as a standard and the notification mode of a higher rank. It is assumed that this will happen. In this case, there is a concern that an unnatural impression may be created, as if the specific effect had simply returned to its original state. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the notification mode is changed to a higher level notification mode, when changing from the normal mode to the same mode, the execution of the specific effect is restricted, so it is preferable to prevent such inconvenience from occurring. It becomes possible to suppress the

Feature aD10. When it is determined by the mode determining means that the predetermined mode is not selected, means (step The gaming machine according to any one of features aD1 to aD9, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing the process of Sa3108).

In the above configuration, when it is determined that the mode is not equivalent, the notification mode of the pending notification that is the subject of the determination is set to the normal mode or the subordinate notification mode, so that the notification mode of the pending notification when transitioning to the second state is It is possible to prevent the notification mode from exceeding the corresponding expectation level in the first state, and it becomes possible to suitably perform suspension notification after transition to the second state.

Note that for each configuration of the features aD1 to aD10, features aA1 to aA14, aB1 to aB14, aC1 to aC9, aD1 to aD10, aE1 to aE19, aF1 to aF12 , features aG1 to aG15, features aH1 to aH11, and features aI1 to aI12. It is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic aE group>
The feature aE group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on Modification 3 of the first embodiment. .

Feature aE1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
A special gaming state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being a grant correspondence result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. special game state means (a function of executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , a game time control means (a function of executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game time operation is performed;
In order to enable the player to at least recognize the number of pending games before execution, a pending notification (a pending image) is sent to the predetermined notifying means or a notifying device different from the predetermined notifying means (symbol display device 75, a pending lamp). a suspension notification means (a function for executing suspension command corresponding processing in the production control device 143);
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. A destination specifying means for executing a destination specifying process to be specified at a previous timing (a function of executing a pending prefetch process in the main controller 162);
Specifying mode means (holding in the production control device 143) that can set the notification mode of the suspension notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the destination specifying process. a function of executing a setting process for a notice, a function for executing a first execution process of a pending notice),
Apart from the special gaming state, multiple types of gaming states (normal gaming state, high certainty gaming state, time-saving gaming state) are set as gaming states,
When the determination result of the grant determining means becomes the grant corresponding result and the special gaming state is executed, a state transition means (in the main controller 162) for transitioning to one of the plurality of gaming states function to execute transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode),
Regarding the notification for reservation that was set to a specific mode before the special gaming state, if the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the notification mode after the special gaming state is set to the special mode. A specifying means for making the notification mode different from the notification mode before the gaming state (a function of executing setting processing for advance notice return by the production control device 143 in the third modification of the first embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a specific format based on the result of so-called suspension look-ahead, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the grant corresponding result, and to suitably adjust the player's expectations. can be evoked. In addition, in this configuration, when a plurality of types of game states are set as the game state, the determination result of the grant determination means becomes the grant corresponding result, and a special game state is executed, one of the plurality of game states will be transferred to the gaming state. In such a configuration where multiple types of gaming states are provided, even if the special information used for awarding determination is the same, differences may occur in the awarding determination results and game round presentations performed in the game round depending on the gaming state. There is. In this regard, in this configuration, regarding the suspension notification set in a specific mode before the execution of the special gaming state, if the gaming state before and after the execution of the special gaming state is different, the notification mode after the special gaming state is changed to a special mode. Since the notification format is different from the one before the gaming state, even if the award determination result, game rendition, etc. change due to the difference in the gaming state, it is possible to prevent the suspension notification from misleading the player. It becomes possible to suitably perform suspension notification in the gaming state after the transition.

Feature aE2. When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the specifying means is configured to determine whether the notification for reservation is set in a specific mode before the special gaming state, or when the gaming state after the special gaming state is different. The gaming machine according to feature aE1, further comprising means for setting the notification mode to the normal mode (a function of executing the process of step Sa3417 after a negative determination is made in step Sa3504).

In the above configuration, when the gaming state after the special gaming state is different from the gaming state before the special gaming state, the mode is changed to the normal mode and the suspension notification is performed. As a result, it is possible to suitably prevent players from being misled by the suspension notification that is not consistent with the actual level of expectation after the special game state. Further, by uniformly using the normal mode, it is possible to eliminate the need for detailed adjustment of the notification mode in accordance with changes in the degree of expectation, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature aE3. The identifying means is
a first means as a means for setting the normal mode;
After the notification mode is set to the normal mode by the first means, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the suspension notification that has been set to the normal mode is set to a specific mode, and based on the result, the notification mode of the suspension notification is determined. a second means for setting (a function for executing the third execution process of the pending notice);
The gaming machine according to feature aE2, characterized by comprising:

Changing the notification mode of the suspension notification which was set to a specific mode before the special gaming state to the normal mode after the special gaming state based on the difference between the gaming state after the special gaming state and the gaming state before the special gaming state. Although this can absorb fluctuations in award determination results, game rendition, etc. due to changes in the gaming state, there is a concern that it will not be possible to notify or suggest the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the suspension notification. In this regard, according to this configuration, since the suspension notification that is set to the normal mode is given an opportunity to change to the specific mode, it can be promoted to the specific mode after the fact, and the expectation level is notified. It becomes possible to do the same.

Feature aE4. An execution notification unit (execution display area D)
The identifying means is
a first means as a means for setting the normal mode;
In the game round in which the suspension notification is set to the normal mode by the first means, it is determined whether the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the suspension notification is to be set to a specific mode different from the normal mode, and the result is a second means for setting a notification mode of the predetermined notification based on (a function for executing a third execution process of a pending notice);
The gaming machine according to feature aE2 or feature aE3, characterized by comprising:

Changing the notification mode of the suspension notification which was set to a specific mode before the special gaming state to the normal mode after the special gaming state based on the difference between the gaming state after the special gaming state and the gaming state before the special gaming state. Although this can absorb fluctuations in award determination results, game rendition, etc. due to changes in the gaming state, there is a concern that it will not be possible to notify or suggest the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the suspension notification. In this regard, in this configuration, regarding the suspension notification set to the normal mode, an opportunity to change to the specific mode is given as the game progresses to the game round of the suspension notification. Therefore, even if the notification mode is changed from the specific mode to the normal mode, it can be promoted to the specific mode after the fact, and it becomes possible to notify the level of expectation.

Feature aE5. When a game round is executed, the game round is executed based on the special information (pending information) that was the subject of the grant determination that triggered the game round, or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information. Equipped with a game round performance setting means (a function for executing special symbol fluctuation display processing in the performance control device 143) for setting the game round performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed,
The second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game run performance setting device. The gaming machine described in aE4.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or specific information used for setting the game run performance by the game run performance setting means. As a result, when the game state after the special game state is different from the game state before the special game state, the notification mode of the predetermined notification can be changed while adapting to the game round performance actually performed in the game round after the special game state. can be changed in a specific manner.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above-mentioned feature aE2, "the second means sets the notification mode of the predetermined notification in a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game cycle effect setting means. The second means determines whether or not to use the special information or the specific information referred to by the game run production setting means regardless of the information stored in the predetermined storage section. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode."

Feature aE6. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. has been
It is configured such that information corresponding to the notification mode of the suspension notification set as a specific mode before the execution of the special gaming state can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (return area 344f of the RAM 344),
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the specifying means stores information in the predetermined memory regarding the suspension notification set in a specific mode before the special gaming state. A feature characterized in that it is provided with a mode setting means (a function of executing setting processing for advance notice return in the production control device 143) for setting a notification mode after the special gaming state based on information stored in the section. The gaming machine according to any one of features aE1 to aE5.

For example, if the configuration is such that the notification mode after the special gaming state is set based on the result of pending lookahead performed before the special gaming state, there is a concern that the notification mode will be set to a different notification mode from the notification mode before the special gaming state. be. In this regard, in this configuration, when a special gaming state is executed in a situation where a specific mode of suspension notification exists, information on the notification mode at that time is stored, and the gaming state after the special gaming state is changed to the one before the special gaming state. If the game state is the same as the game state, the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the stored information. This makes it possible to suitably restore the notification mode after the special gaming state to the original mode before the special gaming state.

In addition, in this feature, "a mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special gaming state based on information stored in the predetermined storage unit with respect to the suspension notification set to a specific mode before the special gaming state" ” to “Regarding the suspension notification that was set to a specific mode before the special gaming state, the notification after the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit, regardless of the result of the destination specifying process.” It can also be expressed as "aspect setting means for setting an aspect".

Feature aE7. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. has been
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the specifying means determines whether or not the special gaming state is correct for the suspension notification set in a specific mode before the special gaming state. Setting a mode in which the subsequent notification mode is set to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that allows the player to recognize that the player is of the same rank as the notice mode before the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features aE1 to aE6, characterized in that the game machine is equipped with a means (a function of executing a setting process for advance notice return in the production control device 143).

In the above configuration, if the gaming state after the special gaming state is the same as the gaming state before the special gaming state, the notification mode after the special gaming state is recognized as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the special gaming state. In order to make it possible to do so, it is possible to arouse expectations in the same way after the special gaming state with respect to the hold notification that aroused the player's expectations by changing to a specific mode before the special gaming state. .

Feature aE8. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. has been
The identifying means is
If the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the notification mode after the special gaming state is changed to the normal mode for the suspension notification that was set to the specific mode before the special gaming state. A first means of setting the mode (a function of executing the process of step Sa3417 after making a negative determination in step Sa3504);
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the notification mode after the special gaming state is changed to the notification mode after the special gaming state for the suspension notification that was set to the specific mode before the special gaming state. A second means (effect control device) for setting a notification mode before the special game state to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that allows players to recognize that they are of the same rank. 143);
Equipped with
The second means includes means (a function of executing the process of step Sa3507) capable of setting the notification mode after the special gaming state to the normal mode and then to the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features aE1 to aE7.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode after the special game state is made to be the same as the notification mode before the special game state, it is first changed to the normal mode and then changed to the same mode. In this case, regardless of whether or not the gaming state after the special gaming state is the same as the gaming state before the special gaming state, as the special gaming state is executed, the notification mode of the suspension notification changes to the specific mode. The mode is changed from to the normal mode. This makes it possible to reduce unnaturalness when the mode is changed to the normal mode due to a difference in the gaming state. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the mode changes to a specific mode after the normal mode, the hold notification that is set to the normal mode changes to the specific mode in the gaming state after the special gaming state, including when the gaming state is different. It is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the notification will be held, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation for the suspension notification.

Feature aE9. The specifying means determines whether or not a game state before the special game state and a game state after the special game state are the same in the special game state or when the special game state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features aE1 to aE8, characterized in that the gaming machine includes a state determining means (a function for executing the process of step Sa3416).

In the above configuration, the equality determination as to whether or not the gaming states are the same is performed during execution of the special gaming state or when the special gaming state ends. As a result, it is possible to quickly respond after the special game state as to what form the notification form for reservation notification, which was made to be a specific form before the special game state, should take after the special game state. Therefore, after the special game state, even if the number of reservations prior to the reservation notification is small, the notification mode of the reservation notification can be suitably adjusted.

Feature aE10. Variable switchable between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first state. Ball entry means (variable winning device 65);
A switching control means (a function of executing a big winning opening opening/closing process in the main control device 162) that executes switching control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state; ,
Equipped with
The special game state is a state in which the switching control is performed at least once,
The gaming machine according to feature aE9, wherein the game state determining means performs the determination during a period in which the variable ball entry means is in the second state.

When the variable ball entry means is in the first state in the special game state, the processing load is relatively high, as it is necessary to perform performances based on the entry of game balls into the variable ball entry means. It is assumed that If such a period is used to determine equality, there is a concern that it will result in an even higher load. In this regard, in this configuration, since the equality determination is performed using the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the second state, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature aE11. The grant determination means performs the grant determination based on first information (value of jackpot random number counter C1) included in special information,
A game round performance (reach performance) performed in the game round based on second information (value of a fluctuation type counter CS) included in the special information or specific information (fluctuation pattern) derived from the second information. Equipped with a game turn effect setting means (a function for executing special figure fluctuation display processing in the effect control device 143) to set,
The destination specifying process includes converting the second information included in the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means or the specific information corresponding to the second information to the first information included in the predetermined special information. is specified at a timing before it becomes the subject of the grant determination,
The plurality of types of gaming states correspond to a first gaming state (one of the normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, and high-precision gaming state) and predetermined second information (variation type counter CS with a value of 80). A second gaming state (a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or a high-precision gaming state, which is different from the first gaming state) in which the gaming performance or specific information is different from the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features aE1 to aE9.

In the above configuration, the game round effect is set based on the second information included in the special information, and even if the value of the second information is the same in the first game state and the second game state, the corresponding game performance is set based on the second information included in the special information. It is configured so that the rendition is different. Therefore, if the gaming state after the special gaming state is different from the gaming state before the special gaming state, if the notification mode after the special gaming state in the reservation notification is made the same as the notification mode before the special gaming state, the special gaming state There is a possibility that the game rendition suggested by the suspension notification before and after the special game state will not match. By applying any one of the features aE1 to aE9 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aE12. The gaming machine according to any one of features aE1 to aE10, further comprising means for not executing the suspension notification in the special gaming state (a function of executing the process of step Sa3411).

When changing the notification mode of the suspension notification upon the end of the special gaming state, if the suspension notification that had been in effect is suddenly changed to another mode at the end of the special gaming state, the player may feel unnatural. There are concerns about giving an impression. For example, if the notification mode of the suspension notification is downgraded to a normal mode or a lower level notification mode, it is assumed that this will be easily noticed by the player and give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, since the notification for reservation is not executed in the special gaming state, when changing the notification mode, it is necessary to interpose a period in which the notification for reservation itself, including other notifications for reservation, is not performed. Can be done. As a result, changes in the notification mode are prevented from being noticeable, and unnaturalness can be alleviated. Further, since the specific notification is not executed, there is also the advantage that it becomes easier to attract the attention of the player to the performance for the special game state.

Feature aE13. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
A special gaming state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being a grant correspondence result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. special game state means (a function for executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , a game time control means (a function of executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game time operation is performed;
In order to enable the player to at least recognize the number of pending games before execution, a pending notification (a pending image) is sent to the predetermined notifying means or a notifying device different from the predetermined notifying means (symbol display device 75, a pending lamp). a suspension notification means (a function for executing suspension command corresponding processing in the production control device 143);
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. A destination specifying means for executing a destination specifying process to be specified at a previous timing (a function of executing a pending prefetch process in the main controller 162);
Specifying mode means (holding in the production control device 143) that can set the notification mode of the suspension notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the destination specifying process. a function of executing a setting process for a notice, a function for executing a first execution process of a pending notice),
Apart from the special gaming state, multiple types of gaming states (normal gaming state, high certainty gaming state, time-saving gaming state) are set as gaming states,
When the determination result of the grant determining means becomes the grant corresponding result and the special gaming state is executed, a state transition means (in the main controller 162) for transitioning to one of the plurality of gaming states function to execute transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode),
Regarding the suspension notification that was set to a specific mode before the special gaming state, when the notification mode after the special gaming state is the same as the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state. and a specifying means (a function of executing a setting process for advance notice return by the production control device 143 in the third modification of the first embodiment),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a specific format based on the result of so-called suspension look-ahead, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the grant corresponding result, and to suitably adjust the player's expectations. can be evoked. In addition, in this configuration, when a plurality of types of game states are set as the game state, the determination result of the grant determination means becomes the grant corresponding result, and a special game state is executed, one of the plurality of game states will be transferred to the gaming state. In such a configuration where multiple types of gaming states are provided, even if the special information used for awarding determination is the same, differences may occur in the awarding determination results and game round presentations performed in the game round depending on the gaming state. There is. In this regard, in this configuration, regarding the suspension notification set in a specific mode before the execution of the special gaming state, the notification mode in the gaming state after the special gaming state is different from the gaming state before and after the execution of the special gaming state. In order to make the notifications different depending on whether they are the same or not, it is possible to set the notification mode based on changes in the award judgment results and game rendition caused by differences in the gaming state, and to set the notification mode for suspension in the gaming state after the transition. It becomes possible to carry out the process suitably.

Feature aE14. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. has been
It is configured such that information corresponding to the notification mode of the suspension notification set as a specific mode before the execution of the special gaming state can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (return area 344f of the RAM 344),
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the specifying means stores information in the predetermined memory regarding the suspension notification set in a specific mode before the special gaming state. A feature characterized in that it is provided with a mode setting means (a function of executing setting processing for advance notice return in the production control device 143) for setting a notification mode after the special gaming state based on information stored in the section. The gaming machine described in aE13.

For example, if the configuration is such that the notification mode after the special gaming state is set based on the result of pending lookahead performed before the special gaming state, there is a concern that the notification mode will be set to a different notification mode from the notification mode before the special gaming state. be. In this regard, in this configuration, when a special gaming state is executed in a situation where a specific mode of suspension notification exists, information on the notification mode at that time is stored, and the gaming state after the special gaming state is changed to the one before the special gaming state. If the game state is the same as the game state, the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the stored information. This makes it possible to suitably restore the notification mode after the special gaming state to the original mode before the special gaming state.

In addition, in this feature, "a mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special gaming state based on information stored in the predetermined storage unit with respect to the suspension notification set to a specific mode before the special gaming state" ” to “Regarding the suspension notification that was set to a specific mode before the special gaming state, the notification after the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit, regardless of the result of the destination specifying process.” It can also be expressed as "aspect setting means for setting an aspect".

Feature aE15. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. has been
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the specifying means determines whether or not the special gaming state is correct for the suspension notification set in a specific mode before the special gaming state. Setting a mode in which the subsequent notification mode is set to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that allows the player to recognize that the player is of the same rank as the notice mode before the special game state. The gaming machine according to feature aE13 or feature aE14, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a means (a function of executing a setting process for advance notice return in the production control device 143).

In the above configuration, if the gaming state after the special gaming state is the same as the gaming state before the special gaming state, the notification mode after the special gaming state is recognized as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the special gaming state. In order to make it possible to do so, it is possible to arouse expectations in the same way after the special gaming state with respect to the hold notification that aroused the player's expectations by changing to a specific mode before the special gaming state. .

Feature aE16. When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the specifying means is configured to determine whether the notification for reservation is set in a specific mode before the special gaming state, or when the gaming state after the special gaming state is different. The gaming machine according to any one of features aE13 to aE15, further comprising means for setting the notification mode to the normal mode (a function of executing the process of step Sa3417 after a negative determination is made in step Sa3504). .

In the above configuration, when the gaming state after the special gaming state is different from the gaming state before the special gaming state, the mode is changed to the normal mode and the suspension notification is performed. As a result, it is possible to suitably prevent players from being misled by the suspension notification that is not consistent with the actual level of expectation after the special game state. Further, by uniformly using the normal mode, it is possible to eliminate the need for detailed adjustment of the notification mode in accordance with changes in the degree of expectation, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature aE17. An execution notification unit (execution display area D)
The identifying means is
a first means as a means for setting the normal mode;
In the game round in which the suspension notification is set to the normal mode by the first means, it is determined whether the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the suspension notification is to be set to a specific mode different from the normal mode, and the result is a second means for setting a notification mode of the predetermined notification based on (a function for executing a third execution process of a pending notice);
The gaming machine according to feature aE16, characterized by comprising:

Changing the notification mode of the suspension notification which was set to a specific mode before the special gaming state to the normal mode after the special gaming state based on the difference between the gaming state after the special gaming state and the gaming state before the special gaming state. Although this can absorb fluctuations in award determination results, game rendition, etc. due to changes in the gaming state, there is a concern that it will not be possible to notify or suggest the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the suspension notification. In this regard, in this configuration, regarding the suspension notification set to the normal mode, an opportunity to change to the specific mode is given as the game progresses to the game round of the suspension notification. Therefore, even if the notification mode is changed from the specific mode to the normal mode, it can be promoted to the specific mode after the fact, and it becomes possible to notify the level of expectation.

Feature aE18. When a game round is executed, the game round is executed based on the special information (pending information) that was the subject of the award determination that triggered the game round, or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information. Equipped with a game time performance setting means (a function for executing special symbol fluctuation display processing in the performance control device 143) for setting the game time performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed,
The second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game run performance setting device. The gaming machine described in aE17.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or specific information used for setting the game run performance by the game run performance setting means. As a result, when the game state after the special game state is different from the game state before the special game state, the notification mode of the predetermined notification can be changed while adapting to the game round performance actually performed in the game round after the special game state. can be changed in a specific manner.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above-mentioned feature aE2, "the second means sets the notification mode of the predetermined notification in a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game cycle effect setting means. The second means determines whether or not to use the special information or the specific information referred to by the game run production setting means regardless of the information stored in the predetermined storage section. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode."

Feature aE19. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. has been
The identifying means is
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the notification mode after the special gaming state is changed to the notification mode after the special gaming state for the suspension notification that was set to the specific mode before the special gaming state. A first means (effect control device) for setting a notification mode before the special game state to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that allows players to recognize that they are of the same rank. 143);
If the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the notification mode after the special gaming state is changed to the normal mode for the suspension notification that was set to the specific mode before the special gaming state. a second means for setting the mode (a function of executing the process of step Sa3417 after making a negative determination in step Sa3504);
Equipped with
The first means includes means (a function of executing the process of step Sa3507) capable of setting the notification mode after the special gaming state to the normal mode and then to the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features aE13 to aE18.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode after the special game state is made to be the same as the notification mode before the special game state, it is first changed to the normal mode and then changed to the same mode. In this case, regardless of whether or not the gaming state after the special gaming state is the same as the gaming state before the special gaming state, as the special gaming state is executed, the notification mode of the suspension notification changes to the specific mode. The mode is changed from to the normal mode. This makes it possible to reduce unnaturalness when the mode is changed to the normal mode due to a difference in the gaming state. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the mode changes to a specific mode after the normal mode, the hold notification that is set to the normal mode changes to the specific mode in the gaming state after the special gaming state, including when the gaming state is different. It is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the notification will be held, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation for the suspension notification.

Note that it is possible to apply the configurations of the features aE9 to aE12 to the features aE13 to aE19. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying these configurations.

Note that for each configuration of features aE1 to aE19, features aA1 to aA14, aB1 to aB14, aC1 to aC9, aD1 to aD10, aE1 to aE19, aF1 to aF12 , features aG1 to aG15, features aH1 to aH11, and features aI1 to aI12. It is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic aF group>
The feature aF group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on Modification 4 of the first embodiment. .

Feature aF1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquisition information storage means (retention ball storage area 314b) for storing special information (retention information) acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
A specific notification means (effect control) that executes a specific notification (display of a pending image) corresponding to the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the provision determination. (a function of executing the first execution process of the pending notice in the device 143);
Equipped with
Regarding the predetermined special information, information (fluctuation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the judgment result when the predetermined special information is subject to the provision judgment, before the special information becomes the subject of the provision judgment. A first destination specifying means (a function of executing the first pending prefetching process by the production control device 143 in the fourth modification of the first embodiment) that specifies at a predetermined timing (timing of acquiring pending information);
Judgment when a predetermined event (opening/closing execution mode, etc.) occurs during the execution of specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information, and the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the provision determination regarding the predetermined special information. A second destination specifying means for specifying information (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the result at a specific timing (such as the end timing of the opening/closing execution mode) after the predetermined event (in the fourth modification of the first embodiment) (a function of executing the second pending prefetching process by the control device 143);
Equipped with
The specific notification means is
A first means for setting a notification mode of a specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information before the predetermined event based on the identification result of the first destination identification means (execution of a setting process for a pending notice in the production control device 143) function) and
A second means for setting a notification mode of a specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information after the predetermined event based on the identification result of the second destination identification means (execution of setting processing for advance notice return in the production control device 143) function) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of so-called look-ahead processing, the specific notification can indicate the level of expectation for the result corresponding to the grant, and suitably arouse the player's sense of expectation. Can be done. In such a configuration, the state changes with the occurrence of a predetermined event, and even if the value of the special information used for the provision determination is the same, there may be a difference in the results of the provision determination before and after the predetermined event. In this regard, in this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs during execution of a specific notification, the pre-reading process is executed again after the predetermined event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, and based on the result, the specific notification is issued. Set the notification mode. Therefore, the notification mode of the specific notification performed before the predetermined event can be adjusted to a mode suitable after the predetermined event, and it becomes possible to suitably perform the specific notification after the predetermined event.

Feature aF2. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , comprising a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game time operation to be performed,
The gaming machine according to feature aF1, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, a predetermined event is likely to occur during execution of the specific notification. By applying the configuration of the feature aF1 to such a configuration, the feature can be made to function effectively and the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aF3. The awarding information (random value corresponding to a jackpot) or the determination condition (winning probability) in the awarding determination means may be different between before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. The gaming machine according to feature aF1 or feature aF2.

In the above configuration, even if the value of the special information is the same, a difference may occur in the result of the provision determination before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. For this reason, if a specific notification is made after a predetermined event in a notification mode before the predetermined event, there is a concern that a situation will be suggested that is different from the notification result (result of grant determination) that is actually notified in the game round. By applying the configuration of feature aF1 or feature aF2 to such a configuration, notification after a predetermined event can be performed by adjusting the notification mode to match the actual notification result in the game round. , it becomes possible to suitably perform specific notification after a predetermined event.

Feature aF4. The gaming machine according to feature aF3, wherein the second destination specifying means performs the specification by applying the provision information or the determination condition corresponding to after the predetermined event.

In the above configuration, when prefetching is executed again after a predetermined event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, the prefetching is performed by applying the attached information and judgment conditions that correspond to the state after the predetermined event. . As a result, it is possible to adjust the notification mode to match the actual notification result in the game round regarding the specific notification that was performed before the predetermined event, and to perform the notification after the predetermined event. It becomes possible to perform notification appropriately.

Feature aF5. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) so that the game time operation is performed;
A game round performance setting means (performance control device 143) that sets a game round performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed in a game round based on special information (reservation information) or specific information (fluctuation pattern) derived from the special information. function to execute special figure fluctuation display processing),
Equipped with
The gaming cycle performance corresponding to predetermined special information or predetermined specific information derived from the predetermined special information (variation pattern with a value of 80) may be different before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. The gaming machine according to any one of features aF1 to aF4.

In the above configuration, even if the value of the special information or the specific information is the same, a difference may occur in the game run effect set by the game run setting means before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. For this reason, if a specific notification is made after a predetermined event in a notification mode before the predetermined event, there is a concern that a situation may be suggested that is different from the game round performance that is actually performed in the game round. By applying the configuration described in any one of features aF1 to aF4 above to such a configuration, the notification mode can be changed so that the specific notification performed before the predetermined event is consistent with the actual game rendition. It is possible to perform notification after a predetermined event by adjusting the amount of time, and it becomes possible to suitably perform specific notification after a predetermined event.

Feature aF6. The first destination specifying means and the second destination specifying means are means for specifying, as information corresponding to the determination result, a game round performance corresponding to the predetermined special information or specific information corresponding to the predetermined special information. Equipped with
According to feature aF5, the second destination specifying means specifies a game run effect corresponding to the predetermined special information or specific information corresponding to the predetermined special information in response to the predetermined event. Game machine.

In the above configuration, when pre-reading processing is executed again after a predetermined event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, the game rendition and the specific information are pre-read in accordance with the state after the predetermined event. As a result, it is possible to adjust the notification mode to match the actual game play with respect to the specific notification that was performed before the predetermined event, and to make the notification after the predetermined event. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature aF7. Any one of features aF1 to aF6, wherein the second means sets a notification mode after the predetermined event based on a notification mode before the predetermined event and a identification result of the second destination specifying means. The gaming machine described in .

For example, if the configuration is such that the notification mode of the specific notification changes frequently with the occurrence of a predetermined event, there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable. In this regard, in this configuration, the notification mode after the predetermined event is set by taking into consideration not only the identification result of the second destination specifying means but also the notification mode before the predetermined event. In light of the identification result of the second destination identification means, if there is no problem in using the same notification mode after the predetermined event, specific notification can be carried out by taking over the notification mode before the predetermined event. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notification mode from changing excessively after the predetermined event, and it becomes possible to perform specific notification after the predetermined event in a natural manner.

Feature aF8. The specific notification includes multiple types of modes (normal display mode HMa, blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set,
The second means determines that the notification mode after the predetermined event is the same as the notification mode before the predetermined event based on the notification mode before the predetermined event and the identification result of the second destination specifying means. A mode determining means (a function that executes the processes of steps Sa4703 to Sa4705) for determining whether or not a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that can be recognized as The gaming machine according to feature aF7.

In the above configuration, a plurality of types of notification modes are set as notification modes of the specific notification, so that the degree of expectation for a result corresponding to provision differs. In such a configuration in which the expectation level is set stepwise and a large number of notification modes are provided, the range of expectation levels that one notification mode corresponds to is narrow, so the notification mode before the predetermined event is used to If a later specific notification is made, a difference is likely to occur in the level of expectation suggested before and after the predetermined event. In this regard, in this configuration, based on the notification mode before the predetermined event and the identification result of the second party specifying means, the notification mode after the predetermined event is recognized as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the predetermined event. Therefore, even in a situation where a large number of notification modes are set, it is possible to suitably perform a specific notification after a predetermined event by matching expectations.

Feature aF9. The second means is configured to change the notification mode after the predetermined event to a normal mode (normal display mode HMa) or a lower level notification than the notification mode before the predetermined event, when the mode determining means determines that the predetermined mode is not selected. The gaming machine according to feature aF8, further comprising means for setting a mode (a function of executing the process of step Sa3417 after a negative determination is made in step Sa4706).

In the above configuration, when it is determined that the mode is not equivalent, the notification mode of the specific notification subject to the determination is set to the normal mode or the lower level notification mode, so the notification mode after the predetermined event corresponds to the one before the predetermined event. Exceeding expectations can be suppressed, and specific notification after a predetermined event can be suitably performed.

Feature aF10. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. A game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) that controls the game time operation to be performed;
A suspension notification means (a function of executing a process corresponding to a suspension command in the performance control device 143) that performs suspension notification (a suspension image) so that the player can at least recognize the number of suspensions of the game before execution;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features aF1 to aF9, wherein the specific notification is the suspension notification.

When a specific notification is performed using a pending notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and a predetermined event is likely to occur during the execution of the specific notification. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information is the object of the expectation level suggested by the specific notification, it is assumed that the impact will be large if there is a difference in the expectation level before and after the predetermined event. By applying any one of the features aF1 to aF9 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aF11. A special gaming state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being a grant correspondence result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. a special gaming state (a function of executing the big prize opening/closing process in the main controller 162),
Apart from the special gaming state, multiple types of gaming states (normal gaming state, high certainty gaming state, time-saving gaming state) are set as gaming states,
When the determination result of the grant determining means becomes the grant corresponding result and the special gaming state is executed, a state transition means (in the main controller 162) for transitioning to one of the plurality of gaming states function to execute transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features aF1 to aF10, wherein the predetermined event is the special gaming state.

There are gaming machines that use the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity to transition to a gaming state such as a normal gaming state, a high-precision gaming state, or a time-saving gaming state. In such gaming machines, even if the value of the special information used for grant determination is the same in the game state before and after the special game state, the result of the grant determination before and after the special game state is different. Differences may occur. By applying any one of the features aF1 to aF10 to such a structure, each of the features can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aF12. Feature aF11 characterized in that, when the special gaming state is entered during the execution of specific notification, a means for not executing the specific notification in the special gaming state (a function of executing the process of step Sa3411) is provided. The gaming machine described in .

When changing the notification mode of a specific notification upon the end of a special gaming state, if the specific notification that had been in progress is suddenly changed to another mode at the end of the special gaming state, it may give the player an unnatural impression. There are concerns that it may be affected. For example, when the notification mode of a specific notification is downgraded to a normal mode or a lower-level notification mode, it is likely that this will be easily noticed by the player and give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, since specific notification is not performed in the special gaming state, it is possible to interpose a period in which specific notification itself is not performed when changing the notification mode. As a result, changes in the notification mode are prevented from being noticeable, and unnaturalness can be alleviated. Further, since the specific notification is not executed, there is also the advantage that it becomes easier to attract the attention of the player to the performance for the special game state.

Note that for each configuration of features aF1 to aF12, features aA1 to aA14, aB1 to aB14, aC1 to aC9, aD1 to aD10, aE1 to aE19, aF1 to aF12 , features aG1 to aG15, features aH1 to aH11, and features aI1 to aI12. It is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic aG group>
The feature aG group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on modifications 5 to 6 of the first embodiment. It is something that

Feature aG1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Granting a benefit that allows the player to receive a benefit based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. means (a function of executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. A destination specifying means for executing a destination specifying process to be specified at a previous timing (a function of executing a pending prefetch process in the main controller 162);
A first specific notification means (for a reservation notice in the production control device 143) that causes a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) to execute a specific notification (pending notice production) based on the result of the destination specification process. a function to execute the setting process and the first execution process of the pending notice);
Equipped with
The first specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to one of multiple types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe). It is equipped with a first notification mode setting means (a function of executing a setting process for a pending notice in the production control device 143), and is configured to execute the specific notification based on the setting result of the first notification mode setting means. Ori,
If a predetermined abnormality (power outage state) occurs during execution of the specific notification, a second specific notification means (a modification of the first embodiment) re-executes the specific notification after the predetermined abnormality is resolved. In Example 5, the effect control device 143 executes the process for returning the suspended notice, and in the sixth modification of the first embodiment, the effect control device 143 executes the effect setting process).
The second specific notification means may set the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed after the predetermined abnormality is resolved to the notification mode of the specific notification before the predetermined abnormality occurs, and the notification mode of the specific notification before the predetermined abnormality occurs. A second notification mode setting means (Modification 5 to Modification of the first embodiment A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with the function of executing display mode setting processing by the production control device 143 in Example 6.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of so-called look-ahead processing, the specific notification can indicate the level of expectation for the result corresponding to the grant, and suitably arouse the player's sense of expectation. Can be done. At that time, multiple types of notification modes are set as the notification mode of the specific notification, so by setting one of these multiple types of notification and executing the specific notification, the above expectation degree is assigned a magnitude and suggested. be able to. Under such a configuration, if a predetermined abnormality occurs in a situation where specific notification is being performed, and the abnormality is subsequently resolved, the specific notification that was being executed before the abnormality occurred will be re-executed. . Thereby, the specific notification can be restored after the abnormality is resolved, and it is suppressed that the specific notification disappears due to the occurrence of the abnormality. At that time, the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is set based on the notification mode before the abnormality occurrence, the look-ahead result performed before the fault occurrence, or the look-ahead result performed anew after the fault occurrence. It becomes possible to suitably restore the specific notification that was being performed.

Feature aG2. The gaming machine according to feature aG1, characterized in that, if the predetermined abnormality occurs during execution of specific notification, the specific notification is not executed.

In a configuration in which a specific notification is not executed due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the player is likely to feel anxious that not only the specific notification but also the level of expectation attached to the specific notification has disappeared. By applying the configuration of feature aG1 to such a configuration, the feature can be made to function effectively and the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aG3. The second notification mode setting means performs the setting at a predetermined timing during a period from when the predetermined abnormality is resolved until the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes subject to the provision determination by the provision determination means. The gaming machine according to feature aG1 or feature aG2, which performs the following.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is set in the period from the resolution of the abnormality to the start of the game round of the special information that triggered the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to restore the notification mode of the specific information to the mode before the occurrence of the abnormality before the start of the game round of special information, and it becomes possible to suggest the level of expectation before the game round.

Feature aG4. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the notification mode of the specific notification before a predetermined abnormality occurs,
The configuration is such that information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification (information regarding the pending image) can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (backup RAM 345),
The gaming machine according to any one of features aG1 to aG3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to retain information stored in the predetermined storage section when the predetermined abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the information stored in the storage unit is retained without being lost when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification can be determined based on the information in the storage section, and it becomes possible to suitably perform the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved.

Feature aG5. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the notification mode of the specific notification before a predetermined abnormality occurs,
In the specific notification, the plurality of types of notification modes are set such that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different,
If the notification mode of the specific notification before the predetermined abnormality occurs is a notification mode higher than a predetermined predetermined mode (green display mode HMc), the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is set to the predetermined notification mode. The notification mode is set to the following notification mode (a function to execute the process of step Sa5407), or the specific notification is not executed (a function to not execute the suspended notice performance after the abnormality is resolved). The gaming machine according to any one of features aG1 to aG4.

For example, if there is a change in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means due to the influence of an abnormality, there will be an inconsistency between the pre-reading results performed before the abnormality occurrence and the results of the attachment determination performed after the abnormality is resolved. . In such a case, the specific notification indicates a high level of expectation before the abnormality occurs, and if it is re-executed even after the abnormality is resolved, the notification result (result of grant judgment) in the game round and the execution in the game round will be different. There is a concern that the game presentation presented will not match the level of expectation suggested by the specific notification, giving an unpleasant impression to the player. In this regard, in the above configuration, if the notification mode of the specific notification performed at the time of the occurrence of an abnormality is in a mode higher than the predetermined level, indicating a certain degree of expectation, the specific notification is limited to a lower level notification mode. Either re-execute or disable specific notification itself. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific notification from suggesting an expectation level that does not match the notification results etc. in the game round, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature aG6. When the predetermined abnormality occurs, the special information stored in the acquired information storage means can be retained,
If the special information that triggered the specific notification is subject to the provision determination by the provision determination means after the predetermined abnormality is resolved, the notification mode is set to a notification mode equal to or less than the predetermined mode by the identification means. A setting means (a function for executing a fourth execution process of a pending notice in the production control device 143) for setting a notification mode of a specific notification or a specific notification determined to be non-execution based on the determination result of the provision determination unit. The gaming machine according to feature aG5.

In the above configuration, even if the specific notification is restricted to a lower notification mode and is re-executed after the predetermined resolution, or if the specific notification is not executed, the special information that triggered the specific notification is subject to addition determination. As a result, the notification mode of the specific notification may be reset, or the specific notification that was set to be non-executable may be executed. For this reason, it is avoided that the suggested level of expectation remains low or that the specific notification completely disappears. At this time, since the notification mode is reset based on the result of the grant determination, it is possible to execute the specific notification in an appropriate mode that matches the notification result etc. in the game round.

Feature aG7. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the result of the destination specifying process executed before a predetermined abnormality occurs;
It is configured such that information (fluctuation patterns, etc.) corresponding to the result of the destination identification process can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (RAM 344),
The gaming machine according to any one of features aG1 to aG6, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to retain information stored in the predetermined storage section when the predetermined abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, information corresponding to the prefetch result is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the information stored in the storage unit is retained without being lost when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification can be determined based on the information in the storage section, and it becomes possible to suitably perform the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved.

Feature aG8. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the result of the destination specifying process executed before a predetermined abnormality occurs;
In the specific notification, the plurality of types of notification modes are set such that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different,
If the identification result of the destination identification means is a predetermined result (win result) before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, the notification mode of the specific notification is changed to a higher notification mode (red display mode) than the predetermined mode (green display mode HMc). mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) is allowed,
Either the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is set to be limited to the notification mode below the predetermined mode (function of executing the process of step Sa6303), or the notification mode of the specific notification that is executed before the predetermined abnormality occurs. Features aG1 to Features characterized by comprising a specifying means for not executing the specific notification when the result of the destination specifying process is a predetermined result (a function of not executing the pending notice performance after the abnormality is resolved) The gaming machine according to any one of aG7.

For example, if there is a change in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means due to the influence of an abnormality, there will be an inconsistency between the pre-reading results performed before the abnormality occurrence and the results of the attachment determination performed after the abnormality is resolved. . In such a case, the specific notification indicates a high level of expectation before the abnormality occurs, and if it is re-executed even after the abnormality is resolved, the notification result (result of grant judgment) in the game round and the execution in the game round will be different. There is a concern that the game presentation presented will not match the level of expectation suggested by the specific notification, giving an unpleasant impression to the player. In this regard, in the above configuration, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is limited to a predetermined form or less, or the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is not executed if the look-ahead result before the abnormality occurs is the predetermined result. , it is possible to prevent the specific notification from suggesting an expectation level that does not match the notification results, etc. in the game round, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature aG9. When the predetermined abnormality occurs, the special information stored in the acquired information storage means can be retained,
If the special information that triggered the specific notification is subject to the provision determination by the provision determination means after the predetermined abnormality is resolved, the notification mode is set to a notification mode equal to or less than the predetermined mode by the identification means. A setting means (a function for executing a fourth execution process of a pending notice in the production control device 143) for setting a notification mode of a specific notification or a specific notification determined to be non-execution based on the determination result of the provision determination unit. The gaming machine according to feature aG8.

In the above configuration, even if the specific notification is restricted to a lower notification mode and is re-executed after the predetermined resolution, or if the specific notification is not executed, the special information that triggered the specific notification is subject to addition determination. As a result, the notification mode of the specific notification may be reset, or the specific notification that was set to be non-executable may be executed. For this reason, it is avoided that the suggested level of expectation remains low or that the specific notification completely disappears. At this time, since the notification mode is reset based on the result of the grant determination, it is possible to execute the specific notification in an appropriate mode that matches the notification result etc. in the game round.

Feature aG10. If a predetermined abnormality occurs during the execution of the specific notification, and the result of the destination identification process performed before the abnormality occurs cannot be determined after the predetermined abnormality is resolved, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved. The gaming machine according to any one of features aG1 to aG9, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a means for restricting execution of (a function of moving to step Sa6311 when a negative determination is made in step Sa6308).

In the above configuration, when an abnormality occurs during the execution of a specific notification, if the look-ahead result that is the basis of the notification cannot be identified after the abnormality is resolved, the execution of the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved, so that false expectations It is possible to suppress the suggestion of degree.

Feature aG11. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the result of the destination identification process performed after the predetermined abnormality is resolved,
A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , comprising a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game time operation to be performed,
It is equipped with a suspension notification means (a function for executing a suspension command corresponding process in the production control device 143) that issues a suspension notification (a suspension image) in accordance with the number of games whose execution is suspended,
The first specific notification means sets the notification mode of the suspension notification as the specific notification in a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode),
In a situation where a plurality of the suspension notifications are being performed, specific information (change location information) that makes it possible to grasp the suspension notification for which the specific notification is being performed is stored in a predetermined storage unit (RAM 314, RAM 344, backup It is configured so that it can be stored in RAM345),
The gaming machine according to any one of features aG1 to aG10, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to retain information stored in the predetermined storage section when the predetermined abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, which hold notification is being used for specific notification is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and this information is backed up when an abnormality occurs. It is possible to suitably grasp whether a specific notification has been made in the specific notification.

Feature aG12. After the predetermined abnormality is resolved, based on the specific information held in the predetermined storage unit, grasp the suspension notification for which the specific notification was made before the predetermined abnormality occurred; The gaming machine according to feature aG11, wherein the specific processing is executed for the suspension notification that has been received.

In the above configuration, the target identification process is executed after the abnormality is resolved for the pending notifications for which the specific notification was performed before the abnormality occurred, so even the pending notifications for which the specific notification was not performed before the abnormality occurred. Specific notification is performed after the abnormality is resolved, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression to the player. Furthermore, compared to the case where destination identification processing is performed for all pending notifications that are performed after an error has been resolved, the number of executions of destination identification processing can be reduced, making it possible to reduce the processing load upon recovery. .

Feature aG13. After the predetermined abnormality is resolved, based on the specific information held in the predetermined storage unit, grasp the pending notification for which the specific notification was not made before the predetermined abnormality occurred, and The gaming machine according to feature aG11 or feature aG12, further comprising means for setting a notification mode of the grasped suspension notification to a normal mode.

According to the above configuration, specific notification is suppressed from being performed after the abnormality is resolved for pending notifications for which specific notification was not performed before the abnormality occurs, and it is possible to match the notification mode before and after the abnormality occurs. Become.

Feature aG14. The gaming machine according to any one of features aG1 to aG13, wherein the predetermined abnormality is a power outage state.

If a power outage occurs during execution of a specific notification, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, resulting in a situation in which the specific notification that was being performed until then suddenly disappears. In this case, after the player returns from the power outage state, it is assumed that the player becomes anxious as to whether the level of expectation suggested before the power outage will remain even after the power is restored. By applying any of the configurations of features aG1 to aG113 to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably re-execute specific notification after power is restored, and to make each of these features function effectively. Can be done.

Note that the "power-off state" of this feature can also be expressed as "a power-off state in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine from an external power source (commercial power source)."

Feature aG15. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , comprising a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game time operation to be performed,
It is equipped with a suspension notifying means (a function of executing a process corresponding to a pending command in the production control device 143) that issues a pending notification (a pending image) so that the player can at least recognize the number of pending games before execution;
The specific notification is such that the notification mode of the suspension notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode),
The gaming machine according to any one of features aG1 to aG14, wherein the plurality of types of notification modes are set in the specific mode.

When a specific notification is performed using a pending notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and an abnormality is likely to occur during the execution of the specific notification. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information is the target of the expectation level etc. suggested by the specific notification, it is assumed that the impact will be large if the specific notification cannot be continued due to the occurrence of an abnormality. By applying any one of the features aG1 to aG14 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Note that for each configuration of features aG1 to aG15, features aA1 to aA14, aB1 to aB14, aC1 to aC9, aD1 to aD10, aE1 to aE19, aF1 to aF12 , features aG1 to aG15, features aH1 to aH11, and features aI1 to aI12. It is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic aH group>
The feature aH group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on modification 7 of the first embodiment. .

Feature aH1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Granting a benefit that allows the player to receive a benefit based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. means (a function of executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. A destination specifying means for executing a destination specifying process to be specified at a previous timing (a function of executing a pending prefetch process in the main controller 162);
Specific notification means (pending notice in the performance control device 143) that can execute a specific notification (pending notice performance) on a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75, reservation lamp section) based on the result of the destination specifying process. function to execute the setting process for the first execution of the pending notice),
If a predetermined condition is met (if the first mode switching lottery is won in Modification 7), the transition from one of the multiple types of performance states (performance mode A, performance mode B) to another A production state switching means (a function for executing production mode switching processing by the production control device 143 in the seventh modification of the first embodiment) that executes processing for switching to the production state;
Switching restriction means that is capable of restricting the performance state switching means from switching the performance state when specific notification is being executed (by the performance control device 143 in modification example 7 of the first embodiment) function to execute mode switching judgment processing),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of so-called look-ahead processing, the specific notification can indicate the level of expectation for the result corresponding to the grant, and suitably arouse the player's sense of expectation. Can be done. Further, since a plurality of types of performance states are provided and switching between these performance states is performed, it is possible to change the player's mood during the game and prevent him from getting bored with the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the presentation state is switched while a specific notification is being executed, the attention to the specific notification may decrease due to being distracted by the change in the presentation state, or conversely, the user may not be able to concentrate on the specific notification. As a result, there is a concern that the performance state may be changed without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, in this configuration, since the switching of the performance state is restricted when the specific notification is being executed, it is possible to suppress the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the performance state from overlapping. Thereby, the specific notification and the switching of the performance state can be executed in such a way that it is easy for the player to pay attention to each of them, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. In addition, if the performance state after switching is not suitable for the specific notification being executed, advance adjustment is required to make the two compatible when designing the performance, but with this configuration, such adjustment is not necessary. This has the advantage of reducing the burden during design.

Feature aH2. The plurality of types of performance states include a first performance state (performance mode A) and a second performance state (performance mode B) in which the ease with which specific notification is executed differs from the first performance state. ,
The gaming machine according to feature aH1, wherein the switching restriction means includes means for restricting switching to the second performance state when specific notification is being executed in the first performance state.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease with which a specific notification is executed differs depending on the performance state, if the performance state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, the level of expectation suggested by the specific notification will be different before and after the performance state is switched. There is a risk. In this case, there is a concern that the level of expectation suggested by the specific notification and the actually notified result of the award determination in the performance state after switching may be different, giving an unpleasant impression to the player. By applying the configuration of feature aH1 to such a configuration, the occurrence of the discrepancy can be avoided, and it is possible to suitably suppress giving an unpleasant impression to the player.

In addition, in this feature, "a second presentation state in which the ease of execution of specific notification is different from the first presentation state" includes only a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which specific notification can be executed. It can be understood that this also includes a configuration in which the second state is set as a production state in which specific notification is not performed.

Feature aH3. The gaming machine according to feature aH2, wherein the second performance state is a performance state set so that specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first performance state.

If the likelihood of execution of the specific notification in the second presentation state is lower than that in the first presentation state, if you switch from the first presentation state to the second presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed, the apparent expectation level There is a concern that this will increase the player's expectations and show the player a higher level of expectation than the actual level. In this regard, in this configuration, from the first performance state where the ease of execution of the specific notification is relatively high (the degree of expectation to which the specific notification corresponds is relatively low), the likelihood of execution of the specific notification is low (the degree of expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low). When switching to the second performance state (where the corresponding expectation level is relatively high), if a specific notification is being executed, the execution of the switching is restricted, so it is preferable that a higher expectation level than the actual one is suggested. It becomes possible to suppress the

In addition, in this feature, "the second performance state is a performance state set so that specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first performance state" means the probability that the specific notification will be executed in the second performance state. It can be understood that this includes a configuration in which the second performance state is set to be lower than that in the first performance state, as well as a configuration in which the second performance state is set as a performance state in which specific notification is not executed.

Feature aH4. A feature characterized in that the switching restriction means includes means (a function of executing the process of step Sa7207) for restricting the switching of the production state based on the result of the destination specifying process that triggered the specific notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features aH1 to aH3.

In the above configuration, switching of the production state is restricted based on the result of the prefetch process that triggered the specific notification. For example, when there is a high possibility that a specific notification will be given, such as when a jackpot has been pre-read, based on the pre-reading, the performance state will be maintained until the end of the game of the special information for which the pre-reading was performed. It is possible to adopt a configuration that limits switching between the two. In this case, the switching can be quickly restricted, and it is possible to suitably prevent the execution of the specific notification from overlapping with the switching of the presentation state. Further, with this configuration, the following effects can be expected. If the pre-reading result is a jackpot or the like, it is assumed that an inciting performance such as a preview performance that arouses the player's expectations will be performed even before the special information is subject to award determination. If the performance state is switched during execution of the promotion performance, there is a risk that the promotion performance may become difficult to understand from the player's perspective. At this time, by restricting the switching of the performance state based on the prediction of a jackpot, etc., it is possible to prevent the performance state from switching during the promotion performance, and it is possible to suitably suppress the performance from becoming difficult to understand. Become.

Further, for example, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which switching of the performance state is basically not allowed during execution of specific notification, but switching of the performance state is allowed in special cases such as when a jackpot is predicted in advance. In this case, even though the switching of the production state is not normally performed, the switching occurs, which causes a break in the rules from the player's perspective, and can suggest a jackpot or the like. In other words, it becomes possible to utilize the switching of the presentation state as one of the presentations suggesting the degree of expectation.

Note that the "means for restricting switching" of this feature can also be expressed as "means for varying whether or not to restrict switching."

Feature aH5. The switching restriction means sets a predetermined degree of expectation that the result of the destination specifying process that triggered the specific notification will be a predetermined first result (pre-reading result of a jackpot) corresponding to the award corresponding result or the award corresponding result. It is provided with a means (a function to execute the process of step Sa7207) for restricting the switching of the performance state based on whether or not it is a predetermined second result (pre-read result of SPSP reach performance) corresponding to the degree of expectation. The gaming machine described in characteristic feature aH4.

Each of the above effects of feature aH4 can be achieved by restricting or allowing switching of the performance state when the look-ahead result is a jackpot result (first result) or a highly anticipated result (second result). It becomes possible to perform the function suitably.

Feature aH6. The specific notification includes a plurality of types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features aH1 to aH5, characterized in that the switching restriction means includes means (step Sa7211) for restricting switching of the performance state based on the notification mode of the specific notification.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which switching of production states is uniformly restricted while specific notifications are being executed, there is a risk that switching of production states may be excessively restricted or the frequency of execution of specific notifications may be suppressed. There is a concern that the significance of providing multiple types of performance states and the significance of having a function to execute specific notifications will be diminished. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the switching of the presentation state is restricted based on the notification mode of the specific notification being executed, for example, in the case of a specific notification that corresponds to an expectation level below a certain level, the switching of the presentation state is not restricted. , it becomes possible to allow such switching. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive restrictions on switching the performance state and executing specific notification, and it is possible to suitably secure such opportunities.

Feature aH7. The limiting means restricts switching of the production state when the notification mode of the specific notification is a notification mode higher than the predetermined mode (green display mode HMc), and the notification mode of the specific notification is a mode below the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to feature aH6, wherein the gaming machine allows switching of presentation states in the case of

According to the above configuration, it is possible to restrict switching of the production state only when specific notification of a predetermined mode or more is being executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive restrictions on switching the performance state and executing specific notification, and it is possible to suitably secure such opportunities.

Feature aH8. The plurality of types of performance states include a first performance state (performance mode A) and a second performance state (performance mode B) that is set so that the execution frequency of specific notification is lower than the first performance state. It is
The specific notification includes a plurality of types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. is set,
The switching restriction means is
When a specific notification is being executed in the first presentation state, a first means for restricting switching to the second presentation state (executes processing when an affirmative determination is made in step Sa7206) regardless of the notification mode of the specific notification. function) and
If a specific notification is being executed in the second performance state, a second means for restricting switching to the first performance state based on the notification mode of the specific notification (a negative determination is made in step Sa7206, and the processing in step Sa7211 is function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features aH1 to aH7, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, switching from a performance state (first performance state) in which the level of expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low to a performance state (second performance state) in which the level of expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high In this case, since the switching of the performance state is uniformly restricted, it is possible to suitably suppress the suggestion of a higher level of expectation than the actual level. Conversely, switching from a performance state (second performance state) in which the degree of expectation corresponding to a specific notification is relatively high to a performance state (first performance state) in which the degree of expectation corresponding to a specific notification is relatively low. In this case, since the switching of the presentation state is restricted to only some notification modes, the switching of the presentation state is prevented from being excessively restricted, and it is possible to suitably secure the opportunity for the switching. .

Feature aH9. The performance state switching means is
A switching determination means (a function that executes the process of step Sa7102) that determines whether or not to switch the production state based on a predetermined opportunity (switching lottery timing);
a switching execution unit (a function of executing the process of step Sa7106) that executes the switching of the production state when the switching determination unit determines that the switching is to be performed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features aH1 to aH8, wherein the switching restriction means limits at least one of the determination by the switching determination means and the execution by the switching execution means.

In the above configuration, when the switching of the presentation state is restricted, at least one of the switching determination of whether to switch the presentation state and the execution process of whether or not to execute the switching is restricted. It becomes possible to limit the amount appropriately.

Feature aH10. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , comprising a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game time operation to be performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features aH1 to aH9, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, the effect state is likely to change while the specific notification is being executed. By applying any one of the features aH1 to aH9 to such a structure, each of the features can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aH11. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , comprising a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game time operation to be performed,
It is equipped with a suspension notifying means (a function of executing a process corresponding to a pending command in the production control device 143) that issues a pending notification (a pending image) so that the player can at least recognize the number of pending games before execution;
According to any one of features aH1 to aH10, the specific notification is characterized in that the notification mode of the suspension notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode). gaming machines.

When a specific notification is performed using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and the effect state is likely to change while the specific notification is being executed. In addition, because it becomes clear which special information is targeted by the level of expectation suggested by a specific notification, it is expected that the impact of changes in the level of expectation suggested by changes in production status will be large. . By applying any one of the features aH1 to aH10 to such a structure, each of the features can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

Note that for each configuration of features aH1 to aH11, features aA1 to aA14, aB1 to aB14, aC1 to aC9, aD1 to aD10, aE1 to aE19, aF1 to aF12 , features aG1 to aG15, features aH1 to aH11, and features aI1 to aI12. It is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic aI group>
The feature aI group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on modification 8 of the first embodiment. .

Feature aI1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Granting a benefit that allows the player to receive a benefit based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. means (a function of executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. A destination specifying means for executing a destination specifying process to be specified at a previous timing (a function of executing a pending prefetch process in the main controller 162);
Specific notification means (pending notice in the performance control device 143) that can execute a specific notification (pending notice performance) on a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75, reservation lamp section) based on the result of the destination specifying process. function to execute the setting process for the first execution of the pending notice),
Performance state switching means (in modification 8 of the first embodiment) for switching the performance state from one performance state to another performance state among a plurality of types of performance states (performance mode A, performance mode B) (a function of executing the production mode switching process by the production control device 143);
Equipped with
The performance state switching means is
If a predetermined first condition is satisfied (if an affirmative determination is made in the determination process of step Sa8109 in modification 8 of the first embodiment), a specific device that knows that the production state will be switched thereafter. a first means (a function of executing the process of step Sa8111 in modification 8 of the first embodiment);
If a predetermined second condition different from the predetermined first condition is satisfied in the specific state (if an affirmative determination is made in the determination process of step Sa8115 in modification 8 of the first embodiment), the effect is a second means for performing state switching (a function for performing the process of step Sa8117 in modification 8 of the first embodiment);
Equipped with
It is provided with a restriction means (a function of executing the process of step Sa8203 in Modification 8 of the first embodiment) capable of restricting the execution of the specific notification when the specific state is present. A gaming machine featuring:

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of so-called look-ahead processing, the specific notification can indicate the level of expectation for the result corresponding to the grant, and suitably arouse the player's sense of expectation. Can be done. Further, since a plurality of types of performance states are provided and switching between these performance states is performed, it is possible to change the player's mood during the game and prevent him from getting bored with the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the presentation state is switched while a specific notification is being executed, the user may be distracted by the change in presentation state and pay less attention to the specific notification, or conversely, the user may not be concentrating on the specific notification. As a result, there is a concern that the performance state may be changed without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, execution of the specific notification is restricted in a specific state in which it is known that the presentation state will be switched thereafter, so it is possible to suppress switching of the presentation state while the specific notification is being executed. Thereby, the specific notification and the switching of the performance state can be executed in such a way that it is easy for the player to pay attention to each of them, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. In addition, if the performance state after switching is not suitable for the specific notification being executed, advance adjustment is required to make the two compatible when designing the performance, but with this configuration, such adjustment is not necessary. This has the advantage of reducing the burden during design.

Feature aI2. The limiting means is characterized by comprising means (a function of executing processing corresponding to a suspended command in the production control device 143) capable of restricting the execution of specific notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature aI1.

With the above configuration, execution of specific notification can be restricted to special information acquired during a period in a specific state where switching of the production state is waited. As a result, the range of special information subject to specific notification restrictions is widened, and it is possible to prevent the opportunities for specific notification from being excessively restricted.

Feature aI3. Feature aI1 or feature characterized in that the limiting means is capable of limiting the execution of specific notification corresponding to the special information, regardless of the result of the previous specifying process for the special information acquired during the specific state. The gaming machine described in aI2.

According to the above configuration, execution of specific notification can be forcibly restricted regardless of the result of the prefetch process. Thereby, it is possible to suitably suppress the effect state from switching during execution of specific notification. Further, since the execution restriction of specific notification is not affected by the result of the prefetch process, even in the specific state (during the standby period for specific notification), the prefetch process can proceed in the same way as in the non-specific state. That is, since there is no need to change the configuration of the prefetch process (destination identification process), it is possible to restrict specific notification during the specific state while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature aI4. The plurality of types of performance states include a first performance state (performance mode A) and a second performance state (performance mode B) in which the ease with which a specific notification is executed differs from the first performance state. ,
Features aI1 to aI3 are characterized in that the limiting means is capable of limiting execution of specific notification when the switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state is in the specified state. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease with which a specific notification is executed differs depending on the performance state, if the performance state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, the level of expectation suggested by the specific notification will be different before and after the performance state is switched. There is a risk. In this case, there is a concern that the level of expectation suggested by the specific notification and the actually notified result of the award determination in the performance state after switching may be different, giving an unpleasant impression to the player. By applying any one of the features aI1 to aI3 to such a structure, the occurrence of the discrepancy can be avoided, and it is possible to suitably suppress giving an unpleasant impression to the player.

In addition, in this feature, "a second presentation state in which the ease of execution of specific notification is different from the first presentation state" includes only a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which specific notification can be executed. It can be understood that this also includes a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which specific notification is not performed.

Feature aI5. The gaming machine according to feature aI4, wherein the second performance state is a performance state set so that specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first performance state.

If the likelihood of execution of the specific notification in the second presentation state is lower than that in the first presentation state, if you switch from the first presentation state to the second presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed, the apparent expectation level There is a concern that this will increase the player's expectations and show the player a higher level of expectation than the actual level. In this regard, in this configuration, from the first performance state where the ease of execution of the specific notification is relatively high (the degree of expectation to which the specific notification corresponds is relatively low), the likelihood of execution of the specific notification is low (the degree of expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low). Execution of the specific notification is restricted when the specific state is for switching to the second performance state (with which the corresponding expectation level is relatively high). Thereby, switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state during execution of specific notification is suppressed, and it becomes possible to suitably suppress the suggestion of a higher level of expectation than the actual one.

In addition, in this feature, "the second performance state is a performance state set so that specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first performance state" means the probability that the specific notification will be executed in the second performance state. It can be understood that this includes a configuration in which the second performance state is set to be lower than that in the first performance state, as well as a configuration in which the second performance state is set as a performance state in which specific notification is not executed.

Feature aI6. When the specific notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state is restricted by the limiting means, the specific means (production control) executes the specific notification corresponding to the special information after the specific state or after the production state is switched. The gaming machine according to any one of features aI1 to aI5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a second setting process for a pending notice in the device 143 and a first execution process for a pending notice.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification whose execution is restricted due to the specific state is executed after the specific state or after the production state is switched, the execution of the specific notification regarding the special information acquired during the specific state remains restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation level from being suggested.

Feature aI7. The specifying means is configured to perform specific notification after a specific state or after a change in presentation state based on the result of the previous specifying process performed during the specific state, regarding the special information whose execution of specific notification is restricted by the limiting means. The gaming machine according to feature aI6, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a means for executing the process (a function of executing the process of step Sa8302).

According to the above configuration, the specific notification after the production state is switched is performed based on the prefetch results performed during the specific state, so the specific notification can be performed without having to perform the prefetch process again after the production state is switched. be able to. Thereby, the existing configuration can be used as is for the prefetch process (previous identification process), and it is possible to suppress the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature aI8. The specifying means is configured to perform specific notification after the specific state or after the production state is switched, based on the result of the previous specifying process performed during the specific state, regarding the special information for which execution of specific notification is restricted by the limiting means. is provided with a specific determination means (a function of executing the process of step Sa8307) for determining whether or not to execute the process, and is configured to execute a specific notification when the specific determination means determines to execute the process,
The gaming machine according to feature aI6 or feature aI7, wherein the specific determination means makes the determination by applying a determination condition (execution winning probability) that is set corresponding to the performance state after switching.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to perform a specific notification after the specific state or after the switching of the production state, and when it is determined to perform the specific notification, the specific notification is executed. At that time, the above judgment is based on the judgment condition set in accordance with the production state after the switch, rather than the judgment condition when the special information was acquired (the judgment condition set in correspondence with the production state before the switch). Terms and conditions apply. Thereby, even if the performance state before switching and the performance state after switching are different in the ease with which specific notification is executed, specific notification can be suitably performed after the specific state or after the performance state is switched.

Feature aI9. The notification mode of the specific notification includes a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. ) is set and
When performing a specific notification after a specific state or after a change in production state, the specifying means applies lottery conditions (scenario lottery table, etc.) set in correspondence to the production state after the change, and selects the plurality of types. The gaming machine according to any one of features aI6 to aI8, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a means for drawing a lottery for one of the features (a function of executing the processing of steps Sa8310 to Sa8313).

In the above configuration, since a plurality of types of notification modes are set as the notification mode of the specific notification, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by assigning a degree of magnitude, and it is possible to more appropriately arouse the player's sense of expectation. Under such a configuration, in order to perform a specific notification after a specific state or after a change in performance state, a notification mode is selected by lottery by applying lottery conditions set in correspondence with the performance state after switching. Even when the expectation level corresponding to each notification mode is different between the performance state before switching and the performance state after switching, it is possible to appropriately perform specific notification after a specific state or after switching of a performance state.

Feature aI10. When special information is acquired during the specific state, predetermined information (standby occurrence information) is provided so that it can be understood after the specific state that the acquired special information was acquired during the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features aI6 to aI9, wherein the gaming machine is configured to store the following information in a predetermined storage unit (reservation storage area 344c of the RAM 344).

According to the above configuration, after the specific state or after the performance state is switched, even if the special information acquired before the specific state and the special information acquired during the specific state are mixed, the special information is stored in the predetermined storage section. Special information acquired during a particular state can be identified based on the stored predetermined information. This makes it possible to distinguish between special information acquired during a specific state and special information that is not, and to process only the special information acquired during a specific state.

Feature aI11. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , comprising a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game time operation to be performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features aI1 to aI10, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the production state tend to overlap. By applying any one of the features aI1 to aI10 to such a structure, each of the features can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aI12. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , comprising a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game time operation to be performed,
It is equipped with a suspension notifying means (a function of executing a process corresponding to a pending command in the production control device 143) that issues a pending notification (a pending image) so that the player can at least recognize the number of pending games before execution;
The specific notification is characterized in that the notification mode of the suspension notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode), as described in any one of features aI1 to feature aI11. gaming machines.

When specific notification is performed using the hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the presentation state tend to overlap. In addition, because it becomes clear which special information is targeted by the level of expectation suggested by a specific notification, it is expected that the impact of changes in the level of expectation suggested by changes in production status will be large. . By applying any one of the features aI1 to aI11 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Note that for each configuration of the features aI1 to aI12, features aA1 to aA14, aB1 to aB14, aC1 to aC9, aD1 to aD10, aE1 to aE19, aF1 to aF12 , features aG1 to aG15, features aH1 to aH11, and features aI1 to aI12. It is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

It should be noted that it is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown for each configuration of other feature groups to each configuration of the feature aA group to feature aI group detailed above. It is also possible to apply a combination of ideas. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Belt-type game machine using a ball (reel-type game machine using a ball): Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, The game is played with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is started, and the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to a player is generated, and the invention further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a loading process for taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a feeding device that performs a loading process for taking in game balls from the ball tray, and dispensing game balls into the ball tray. 1. A gaming machine comprising a payout device that performs the start operation, and configured such that the operation of the starting operating means becomes effective when game balls are thrown in by the throwing device.

<Feature bA group ~ Feature bN group>
The inventions described in the following feature bA group to feature bN group are extracted from the above-described second embodiment and each modification thereof.

<Characteristic bA group>
The feature bA group is a group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly includes the second embodiment and modifications 1 to 1 of the second embodiment. This is extracted based on Example 10.

The invention described in feature bA group is, ``For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and based on the fact that the lottery result becomes a specific result, Regarding the background technology that states, ``There is a system that allows the player to enter a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)," There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature bA1. A special judgment means (special drawing correctness judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (special drawing correctness judgment) based on establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning in the first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63). function to perform judgment), and
A special game state transition means that is capable of shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the result of the special determination is a specific result (jackpot result); A function of executing a gaming state transition process in the main control device 162);
A game in which a game repetition operation is started based on the execution of the special determination, and a game round is controlled so that the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one game round. Time control means (function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, function of executing the special figure fluctuation display process in the production control device 143),
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
Transition determining means for determining whether or not to transition to a specific gaming state (second time saving game by the main controller 162 according to the second embodiment, modification 1 and modification 2 of the second embodiment) A function to execute the state transition process, a function to execute the third time saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the third to fifth modifications, and a function to execute the third time saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the sixth to tenth modifications. A function of executing a process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state, a process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state),
When the result of the transition determination is a transition corresponding result corresponding to transition to a specific gaming state, a specific gaming state transition means (a third Embodiment 2, the function of executing the process for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the first and second modifications of the second embodiment, and the main function according to the third to fifth modifications. (a function for the control device 162 to execute a process for transitioning to a third time-saving gaming state, a function for executing a process for transitioning to a time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modifications 6 to 10, etc.);
Equipped with
The conditions for ending the specific gaming state include that the number of games played after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit,
Number updating means for updating the number of game times after transition to a specific gaming state or the remaining number of gaming times in a specific gaming state (Second Embodiment, Modifications 1 to Modifications of the Second Embodiment) 5, the main controller 162 according to Modifications 6 to 10 executes the high-frequency support mode update process, etc.) Prepare,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in one game round, after the update by the number of times updating means is performed, the transition determination by the transition determination means is performed.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which the game transitions based on the result of the special determination being a specific result, the specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. This specific gaming state ends when the number of games played after entering the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit, so in the control performed during the execution period of the gaming period, the transition to the specific gaming state is terminated. Processing is performed to update the number of games played since then and the remaining number of games played in a specific game state.

Furthermore, the above configuration has a specific gaming state to which the game transitions without going through the special gaming state. Since the conventional specific gaming state is transferred via the special gaming state, it has been possible to process transition determination as to whether or not to transfer to the specific gaming state within the special gaming state. In other words, it was possible to perform the transition determination separately from the gaming session, but when transitioning to a specific gaming state without passing through the special gaming state, the state immediately before shifting to the specific gaming state is the gaming session. , it is necessary to incorporate the transition determination process into the control performed during the execution period of the game.

In other words, in the control performed during the execution period of a game, it is necessary to update the number of times to end a specific gaming state and to determine whether to transition to a specific gaming state. Depending on the processing order, there is a concern that control of a specific gaming state may not be carried out suitably. In this regard, in this configuration, the order is to update the number of times and then execute the transition determination, so immediately after transitioning to a specific gaming state in a certain game, the number of times is updated in the same game. can be suppressed. In other words, if a transition to a specific gaming state is made in a certain gaming session, it can be controlled so that the number of updates starts from the next gaming session, so the remaining number of times after transitioning to the specific gaming condition can be appropriately controlled. This makes it possible to appropriately control the gaming state.

Feature bA2. The transition determination means executes the transition determination based on whether a predetermined transition condition (reaching a ceiling number of times, winning a special out-of-ball result, hitting a specific ball entry section, etc.) is satisfied. It is configured to take the result of the transition determination as the transition compatible result when the transition condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to feature bA1, characterized in that the transition condition is configured to be satisfied in a game round in a specific gaming state.

In this configuration, an opportunity to shift to a specific gaming state can be established during a stay in a specific gaming state. In such a case, the order in which the number of games is updated and then the transition determination is performed has the effect that, in addition to being able to appropriately secure the remaining number of times after transitioning to the specific gaming state described in feature bA1 above, If the game round in which the transition opportunity was established is the last game round of the preceding specific gaming state (the game round in which the upper limit has been reached), the preceding specific gaming state is ended, and then the subsequent specified game round based on the establishment of the transition trigger The effect of being able to shift to a gaming state can be expected.

Moreover, since the end of the preceding specific gaming state and the transition to the subsequent specific gaming state can be performed within the same gaming session, the preceding specific gaming state can be It is possible to realize a seamless transition from to a subsequent specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to create a state equivalent to adding the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state, and to suitably arouse the player's joy when he or she is able to transition to the subsequent specific gaming state. becomes possible.

Feature bA3. It is configured such that predetermined information (first support flag, second support flag, third support flag, etc.) corresponding to a specific gaming state can be stored in a predetermined storage means (various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314),
A transition is made to a specific gaming state based on the predetermined information being in a first state (such as a state set in the various flag storage areas 314e), and the predetermined information in the first state is in the first state. The specific gaming state is configured to end based on a second state different from the above (such as a state where the various flags are not set in the various flag storage areas 314e),
Termination determination means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied (high-frequency support mode update/ (a function of executing termination processing, a function of executing high-frequency support mode update processing by the main controller 162 according to Modifications 6 to 10, etc.);
Termination processing execution means (second embodiment, The main controller 162 according to Modifications 1 to 5 of the second embodiment executes the high-frequency support mode update/termination process, and the main controller 162 according to Modifications 6 to 10 functions to execute frequent support mode update processing, etc.) and
Equipped with
Feature bA1 or The gaming machine described in feature bA2.

In the above configuration, after the number of times has been updated, it is recognized that the specific gaming state has ended or should be ended internally based on the result, and then a transition determination is made as to whether or not to transition to the specific gaming state. . As a result, in the case where the game round in which the transition opportunity is established is the final game round of the preceding specific gaming state, after the preceding specific gaming state is ended, the transition to the subsequent specific gaming state within the same gaming round is made. be able to.

In addition, even if the game round in which the transition trigger is established is not the end game round of the preceding specific gaming state, if the configuration allows the transition to the subsequent specific gaming state in the middle of the preceding specific gaming state, the internal After finishing the preceding specific gaming state, it is possible to move to the subsequent specific gaming state. This makes it possible to smoothly switch from the preceding specific gaming state to the subsequent specific gaming state.

Feature bA4. It is configured such that predetermined information (first support flag, second support flag, third support flag) corresponding to a specific gaming state can be stored in a predetermined storage means (various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314),
A transition is made to a specific gaming state based on the predetermined information being in a first state (such as a state set in the various flag storage areas 314e), and the predetermined information in the first state is in the first state. The specific gaming state is configured to end based on a second state different from the above (such as a state where the various flags are not set in the various flag storage areas 314e),
termination processing execution means (second embodiment, second The main controller 162 according to the first to fifth modifications of the embodiment executes the high-frequency support mode update/termination process, and the main controller 162 according to the sixth to tenth modifications performs high-frequency support. function to execute mode update processing, etc.),
Restricting means for restricting the transition by the specific gaming state transition means in a situation where the predetermined information is in the first state (Second Embodiment, Modification 1 of the Second Embodiment, Modification) 3. Feature bA1 characterized in that it has a function of restricting the transition to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state by the main control device 162 in Modifications 6 and 8 to 10. The gaming machine according to any one of features bA3.

In the above configuration, transition to a subsequent specific gaming state during the preceding specific gaming state is restricted. As a result, priority can be given to continuation of the preceding specific gaming state, and it is possible to prevent frequent transitions between gaming states, complicating the gameplay, and reducing ease of play. However, on the other hand, there is a possibility that the chances of transitioning to a specific gaming state may be suppressed. In this regard, since the order is to update the number of times and then execute the transition determination, the final game of the preceding specific gaming state (the game that reached the upper limit number of times) will not be transferred to the subsequent specific gaming state. can be tolerated. This makes it possible to increase the chances of transition to a specific gaming state compared to a case where transition to a subsequent specific gaming state is restricted in all specific gaming states.

Feature bA5. The transition determination means executes the transition determination based on whether or not a predetermined transition condition (reaching a ceiling number of times, winning a special out-of-ball result, entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) is satisfied; It is configured to take the result of the transition determination as the transition compatible result when the transition condition is satisfied,
The transition condition includes that the number of gaming times in which the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (missing result) that does not correspond to transition to the special gaming state becomes a specific number (ceiling number),
The specific gaming state is a predetermined specific gaming state that is set so that the playing times that reach the upper limit can be the same as the playing times that reach the specific number of times (4R probability variable jackpot result in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA4, characterized in that the gaming machine includes a high-precision gaming state that is triggered by A, a first time-saving gaming state that is triggered by 4R normal jackpot result A, etc.).

The above configuration has a specific gaming state to which the transition occurs based on the cumulative number of non-specific results (so-called losing results) that do not correspond to transition to the special gaming state in the special judgment reaching a specific number of times. , has a predetermined specific gaming state that is set so that the gaming session that reaches the upper limit number of times can be the same gaming session that reaches the specific number of times. In this case, if a predetermined specific gaming state is carried out as the preceding specific gaming state, the cumulative number of non-specific results will automatically reach the specific number in the final game, and the specific number of results will be reached from the predetermined specific gaming state. It is possible to shift to a specific gaming state triggered by this. In other words, even if a predetermined specific gaming state ends without being able to obtain a specific result, the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state will be added by transitioning to the specific gaming state triggered by reaching the specific number of times. From the player's perspective, the chance of winning a specific result in a specific gaming state is greatly increased compared to the case where there is no addition of the remaining number of times. As a result, not only can a predetermined specific gaming state be enjoyed in anticipation of being selected as a specific gaming state, but also the appeal of the predetermined specific gaming state (appealing power to players) can be increased, and the desire to play can be increased. It becomes possible to suitably arouse.

Feature bA6. The gaming machine according to feature bA5, wherein the predetermined specific gaming state is a specific gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) that transitions via a special gaming state.

According to this configuration, when the special gaming state is transitioned to a predetermined specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, even if the predetermined specific gaming state ends without being able to obtain a specific result, the specific number of times the player can reach the specific number of times is not reached. The remaining number of times in the specific gaming state can be increased by transitioning to the specific gaming state as a trigger. As a result, after the special gaming state ends, it is possible to increase the chance of winning a specific result and transitioning to the special gaming state again while maintaining the advantageous specific gaming state, making it possible to improve interest. .

Feature bA7. The transition determination means executes the transition determination based on whether a predetermined transition condition (reaching a ceiling number of times, winning a special out-of-ball result, hitting a specific ball entry section, etc.) is satisfied. It is configured to take the result of the transition determination as the transition compatible result when the transition condition is satisfied,
The transition condition may be that the result of the special judgment is a predetermined result (special deviant result) that is different from the specified result, or the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result that does not correspond to transition to the special gaming state (deviant result). Features bA1 to BA1 characterized in that the result of a specific determination (missing type determination, transition lottery, etc.) made in the game round in which the result is a predetermined result (special losing result, transition lottery winning result, etc.) The gaming machine according to any one of feature bA4.

In the above configuration, the special judgment results in a predetermined result that is different from the specified result (so-called jackpot result), or the specific judgment made in the game round where the special judgment resulted in a non-specified result (so-called losing result) results in the predetermined result. It has a specific gaming state that it transitions to based on that. In this case, if the game round that resulted in the predetermined result in the special judgment or specific judgment is the last game round in the specified gaming state, the transition to the specific gaming state triggered by winning the predetermined result will be permitted. . That is, if a predetermined result can be achieved in the special judgment or specific judgment in the final game round of the specific gaming state, the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state can be added. Generally speaking, the player's psychology during the final game of a specific gaming state is that the player has a strong sense of anxiety about the end of the specific gaming state, and tends to feel discouraged. The final game round can function as a chance game round, and it becomes possible to suitably stimulate the player's desire to play. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the game until the end of the specific game state, and it is possible to improve interest.

Feature bA8. The transition determination means executes the transition determination based on whether or not a predetermined transition condition (reaching a ceiling number of times, winning a special out-of-ball result, entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) is satisfied; It is configured to take the result of the transition determination as the transition compatible result when the transition condition is satisfied,
Means for setting the upper limit number of times when transitioning to a specific gaming state (function for executing transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 162 according to Modifications 2 to 10 of the second embodiment) and,
Means for resetting the upper limit number of times when the transition condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state (a process for transitioning to a second time-saving gaming state by the main controller 162 according to the second modification of the second embodiment) Functions to be executed, functions for executing the process for transition to the third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the fourth and fifth modifications, and determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the seventh modification The gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA7, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a process for determining a transition to a third time-saving gaming state, and a function for executing a process for transitioning to a time-saving gaming state.

In the above configuration, when the transition condition is satisfied during the specific gaming state, the upper limit number of times of the specific gaming state is reset. In other words, when a transition condition is satisfied in the middle of a preceding specific gaming state, a transition to a subsequent specific gaming state is permitted, but as in feature bA1 above, the order in which the number of updates is executed and then the transition determination is executed is By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately secure the remaining number of times after moving to the subsequent specific gaming state.

Feature bA9. It is configured to control the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (normal processing by the main controller 162, etc.) at a predetermined period,
The game according to any one of features bA1 to bA8, characterized in that the update by the number of times updating means and the transition determination by the transition determination means can be executed in one processing time of the periodic processing. Machine.

In the above configuration, the progress of the game is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing, and the update of the number of times and the transition determination are performed in the same processing cycle, so the transition from the preceding specific gaming state to the subsequent specific gaming state When transitioning to , it is possible to suitably suppress intervening game rounds in the normal gaming state.

Feature bA10. Equipped with a predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 63) into which a game ball can enter,
The specific gaming state is one in which the ball enters the predetermined ball entering means more easily than the normal gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA9, wherein the special judgment means is capable of executing the special judgment based on the ball entering the predetermined ball entry means.

In the above-mentioned configuration, when transitioning to the specific game state, the ball enters the predetermined ball entry means more easily than in the normal game state, and the player is more likely to receive a special judgment. By applying any one of the features bA1 to bA9 to such a structure, each of the features can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

Feature bA11. A special judgment means (special drawing correctness judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (special drawing correctness judgment) based on establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning in the first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63). function to perform judgment), and
A special game state transition means that is capable of shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the result of the special determination is a specific result (jackpot result); A function of executing a gaming state transition process in the main control device 162);
A game in which a game repetition operation is started based on the execution of the special determination, and a game round is controlled so that the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one game round. Time control means (function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, function of executing the special figure fluctuation display process in the production control device 143),
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
Transition determining means for determining whether or not to transition to a specific gaming state (second time saving game by the main controller 162 according to the second embodiment, modification 1 and modification 2 of the second embodiment) A function to execute the state transition process, a function to execute the third time saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the third to fifth modifications, and a function to execute the third time saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the sixth to tenth modifications. A function of executing a process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state, a process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state),
When the result of the transition determination is a transition corresponding result corresponding to transition to a specific gaming state, a specific gaming state transition means (a third Embodiment 2, the function of executing the process for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the first and second modifications of the second embodiment, and the main function according to the third to fifth modifications. (a function for the control device 162 to execute a process for transitioning to a third time-saving gaming state, a function for executing a process for transitioning to a time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modifications 6 to 10, etc.);
Termination process execution means (second embodiment, second The main controller 162 according to Modifications 1 to 5 of the embodiment executes the high-frequency support mode update/termination process, and the main controller 162 according to Modifications 6 to 10 executes the high-frequency support mode. function to execute update processing, etc.) and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, in one game round, the transition determination means is configured to perform the transition determination after the termination process execution means performs the process.

In the above configuration, the specific gaming state includes a specific gaming state to which the game transitions without going through the special gaming state. Since the conventional specific gaming state is transferred via the special gaming state, it has been possible to process transition determination as to whether or not to transfer to the specific gaming state within the special gaming state. In other words, it was possible to perform the transition determination separately from the gaming session, but when transitioning to a specific gaming state without passing through the special gaming state, the state immediately before shifting to the specific gaming state is the gaming session. , it is necessary to incorporate the transition determination process into the control performed during the execution period of the game.

In addition, in the control performed during the execution period of a game, it is determined whether or not a predetermined termination condition corresponding to the termination of a specific gaming state is satisfied, and the specific gaming condition is terminated or recognized as the one that should be terminated. It is also necessary to perform termination processing to do so. In other words, in the control performed during the execution period of a game, it is necessary to perform both a transition determination to determine whether to transition to a specific gaming state and a termination process to end the specific gaming state. There is a concern that control of a specific gaming state may not be suitably implemented depending on the processing order.

In this regard, in this configuration, since the transition determination is executed after executing the termination process, when the trigger for transition to a subsequent specific gaming state is established during a specific gaming state, the preceding specific gaming state After completing the game, it is possible to move to a subsequent specific gaming state. This prevents a plurality of specific gaming states from overlapping, making it possible to suitably control the gaming states. Furthermore, since the end of the preceding specific gaming state and the transition to the subsequent specific gaming state can be processed in the same game round, the preceding specific gaming state can be processed without intervening the transition to the normal gaming state. It is possible to switch to a subsequent specific gaming state. As a result, even under the circumstances where the above-mentioned switching occurs, it is possible to continue to maintain a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to realize a configuration that is excellent in ease of playing the game.

Feature bA12. The transition determination means executes the transition determination based on whether a predetermined transition condition (reaching a ceiling number of times, winning a special out-of-ball result, hitting a specific ball entry section, etc.) is satisfied. It is configured to take the result of the transition determination as the transition compatible result when the transition condition is satisfied,
The conditions for ending the specific gaming state include that the number of games played after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit;
Means for setting the upper limit number of times when transitioning to a specific gaming state (function for executing transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 162 according to Modifications 2 to 10 of the second embodiment) and,
Means for resetting the upper limit number of times when the transition condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state (a process for transitioning to a second time-saving gaming state by the main controller 162 according to the second modification of the second embodiment) Functions to be executed, functions for executing the process for transition to the third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the fourth and fifth modifications, and determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the seventh modification processing, a process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state, and a function of executing the process for transitioning to the time-saving gaming state);
The gaming machine according to feature bA11, comprising:

In the above configuration, when the transition condition is satisfied during the specific gaming state, the upper limit number of times of the specific gaming state is reset. In other words, when the transition condition is satisfied in the middle of the preceding specific gaming state, the transition to the subsequent specific gaming state is permitted, so it is necessary to perform a process of switching from the middle of the preceding specific gaming state to the subsequent specific gaming state. Become. In such a configuration, by executing the termination process first and then executing the transition determination as described in feature bA11 above, it is possible to smoothly switch from the preceding specific gaming state to the subsequent specific gaming state. becomes possible.

Note that it is possible to apply the configuration of any one of the features bA1 to bA10 to the feature bA11 or bA12. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying these configurations.

Note that for each configuration of the features bA1 to bA12, features bA1 to bA12, bB1 to bB10, bC1 to bC9, bD1 to bD6, bE1 to bE10, bF1 to bF10 , features bG1 to features bG8, features bH1 to features bH8, features bI1 to features bI11, features bJ1 to features bJ10, features bK1 to features bK10, features bL1 to features bL9, features bM1 to features bM10, features bN1 to features bN7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in configuration (1) individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bB group>
The feature bB group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and mainly includes the second embodiment and modification 1 to modification of the second embodiment. This is extracted based on Example 10.

The invention described in feature bB group is, ``For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and based on the fact that the lottery result becomes a specific result, Regarding the background technology that states, ``There is a system that allows the player to enter a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)," There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature bB1. Variable that can be switched between a first mode (open state) in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. Ball entry means (second operating port 63);
a first determination means (a function in the main controller 162 that executes the special pattern validity determination) that executes a first determination (special pattern validity determination) based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means;
Privilege awarding means (playing state in the main controller 162) capable of awarding a predetermined privilege (opening/closing execution mode, etc.) to the player based on the result of the first determination being a specific result (jackpot result, etc.) functions to execute migration processing, etc.),
A second judgment means (executes the normal pattern correctness judgment in the main controller 162) that executes the second judgment (normal pattern correctness judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (passage of the game ball through the through gate 64) function) and
Based on the result of the second determination being a predetermined result (support winning result), switching control for changing the variable ball entrance means from the second mode to the first mode, and then changing it to the second mode is performed. Variable ball entry control means (a function to execute electric role support processing in the main control device 162) that executes variable ball entry control (accessory object opening/closing game) that is performed once;
A game round operation is started based on the second determination being made, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the second determination is defined as one game round (normal game round). A game time control means (a function for executing the standard game time control process in the main control device 162),
Equipped with
It has a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state (normal gaming state, etc.) and a second gaming state (second time-saving gaming state, etc.) as gaming states,
A situation where the first gaming state changes to the second gaming state (a situation where the normal gaming state changes to the second time saving gaming state, a situation where the normal gaming state changes to the third time saving gaming state, a situation where the second time saving gaming state changes from the normal gaming state) a situation where the game changes from the third time-saving game state to the normal game state, a situation where the first time-saving game state changes to the normal game state, a situation where the game changes from the second time-saving game state or a third time-saving game state. Specific termination means (second embodiment, second embodiment, A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the processes of steps Sb1311 to Sb1315, step Sb3509, step Sb4107, and step Sb5811 by the main control device 162 according to the first to tenth modifications of the form.

In the above configuration, the first determination is made based on the ball entering the variable ball entering means, and when the result becomes a specific result, a predetermined benefit is granted. In addition, a second determination is made separately from the first determination, a game round is executed to notify the result, and the result of the second determination becomes a predetermined result, so that the variable ball entry means Variable ball entry control is executed. Here, in a gaming machine with such a configuration, the above-mentioned game times and variable ball entry control differ depending on the type of game state, and for example, the game times, etc. in the game state after the change are different from those in the game state before the change. Some games are also executed in a manner advantageous to the player. In such a case, for example, if the second determination is made immediately before the gaming state changes, the determination will be started under the gaming state before the change, and the player will not be able to play the game based on the determination result. It will be carried out in a manner that is disadvantageous to the In this regard, in this configuration, if a game round is being executed in a situation where the first game state changes to the second game state, the game round is forcibly terminated, so the second determination under the second game state is performed. can be executed promptly. Thereby, it is possible to speed up the start timing of the game round corresponding to the second gaming state, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

In addition, in this feature, "when a game round is being executed in a situation where the first gaming state changes to the second gaming state", "when the first gaming state is in progress in a situation where the first gaming state changes to the second gaming state" It can also be expressed as ``when a game session started during the state is being executed.''

Feature bB2. The benefit granting means includes a special game state transition means (main control (a function of executing gaming state transition processing in the device 162),
The specific ending means is capable of ending a game round in progress when the game round is being executed in a situation where the first game state changes to the second game state without going through a special game state. The gaming machine according to feature bB1.

For example, if the game state changes through the special game state, such as the first game state → special game state → second game state, the game cycle started in the first game state or the variable ball entry control Since the game can be ended in the special gaming state, it is possible to suppress its influence on the second gaming state. However, if the first gaming state changes to the second gaming state without passing through the special gaming state, it is not possible to secure a period to absorb the gaming times started in the first gaming state. There is a concern that the game rounds corresponding to the gaming state will be more likely to continue in the second gaming state. By applying the configuration of the feature bB1 to such a case, it becomes possible to suitably exhibit the above effects.

Feature bB3. When the termination is performed by the specific termination means, when the result of the second determination in the game round to be terminated is the predetermined result, means for changing the result to a result different from the predetermined result (out-of-print result); (a function of executing the process of step Sb1313 by the main control device 162).The gaming machine according to feature bB1 or feature bB2.

In the above configuration, when a game round is forced to end due to a change in the game state, the result of the second determination that triggered the game round is a predetermined result corresponding to executing variable ball entry control. In this case, the result is changed to another one that does not cause variable ball entry control to be executed. Thereby, after the game round is forcibly ended, the next game round can be started without using the variable ball entry control. Accordingly, the start timing of the game round corresponding to the second gaming state (game state after the change) can be brought forward, and it becomes possible to respond more quickly to changes in the gaming state.

Feature bB4. The game cycle control means controls the game cycle so that after the game cycle operation is performed, a specific notification (stop display of the regular figure) is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the second determination. and
According to any one of features bB1 to feature bB3, the game device is configured to be able to restrict the termination by the specific termination means when specific notification is being executed in a situation where the gaming state changes. gaming machines.

For example, if specific notification (specific determination result notification) is being executed and the notification is forcibly terminated, the notification period will be shortened. As a result, there is a concern that the visibility of the specific notification will decrease, making it difficult to grasp the result of the second determination. In this regard, in this configuration, if the specific notification is being executed, forced termination due to a change in the gaming state is restricted. Thereby, an appropriate notification period can be ensured, and visibility of specific notification can be prevented from being impaired.

Note that when this feature is applied to the above feature bB3, the following effects can be achieved. For example, in a configuration that executes forced termination due to a change in the game state even while specific notification is being executed, when the result of the second determination is changed from the predetermined result to a different result, the result before the change is handled. A specific notification (notification that a predetermined result has been achieved) is executed, and then the notification is terminated by forced termination. That is, after the predetermined result, which is the result before the change, is notified until the execution timing of forced termination, the game round itself ends due to the forced termination, so the result after the change is not notified. This may lead to a situation where variable ball entry control is not performed even though a predetermined result has been reported, which may reduce the players' confidence in the gaming machine or the gaming hall. In this regard, feature bB4 does not exceptionally forcefully terminate a specific notification while it is being executed, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconsistency between the result indicated by the specific notification and the result of the second judgment after the change. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which variable ball entry control is not performed in a state where a predetermined result is notified.

Feature bB5. A first game reuse operation is started based on the first determination being made, and after the first game reuse operation ends, a predetermined notification (stop display of the special figure) corresponding to the result of the first determination is made. The first game round control means (the special figure game round control process in the main control device 162) controls the first game round (special figure game round) to be played. function) and
a second game time control means for controlling a second game time as the game time;
A transition means (second Embodiment, Function of executing the process for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the first and second modifications of the second embodiment, and the main control according to the third to fifth modifications A function of executing the process for transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state by the device 162, a process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state, and a function for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modifications 6 to 10. processing, functions to execute time-saving gaming state transition processing, etc.);
Equipped with
The transition means includes a predetermined timing before the end of the predetermined notification in the first game round in which the predetermined transition condition is satisfied (the start timing of the final display in the special figure game round, the intermediate timing of the final display, the start of the variable display) The gaming machine according to any one of features bB1 to bB4, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to make a transition to a specific gaming state at a timing during a variable display, etc.).

When the predetermined notification (notification of the special judgment result) ends in the first game round where the transition condition is met, the first first game round after transitioning to the second game state starts as the next first game round. be done. At this time, in the above configuration, the transition to the second gaming state is performed before the predetermined notification ends in the first gaming round in which the transition condition is satisfied, so that after the transition to the second gaming state, the first game Grace period until the game is played (a period during which the game state has moved to the second game state, but the first game after the shift to the second game state has not yet been played) can be ensured. If the second game round is ended in response to the transition to the second gaming state, if the next second game round is started during the grace period, the first game round will be completed after the transition to the second gaming state. The second game round can be started prior to the second game round. As a result, the start timing of the variable ball entry control is brought forward, and it becomes possible to quickly create a situation in which the ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means after the transition to the second gaming state.

Feature bB6. The second game cycle control means starts a second game cycle operation based on the second determination, and after the second game cycle operation is finished, the second game cycle control means controls the second game cycle operation according to the result of the second determination. Control is performed such that the second notification (stop display of the common map) is performed as one of the second game rounds (the regular map game rounds), and the second game round is performed.
The period from the predetermined timing to the start of the first game round after the transition to the second gaming state is the period of the second notification in the second game round that is subject to the termination by the specific termination means. Means capable of making the length longer than etc.) The gaming machine according to feature bB5.

In the above configuration, the period (grace period) from when the transition to the second gaming state is performed at a predetermined timing until the first first gaming round after the transition to the second gaming state is started is the specific termination means. It is configured to be longer than the execution period of the second notification in the second game round that was subject to termination. In this case, since the second notification of the second game round that is subject to termination ends in the middle of the grace period, the next second game round will start before the end of the grace period. Since the subsequent second game round is played under the second game state, the second game round corresponding to the second game state can be started prior to the first first game round. This makes it possible to advance the start timing of the variable ball entry control after the transition to the second gaming state, and to quickly create a situation where the ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means.

Note that when this feature is applied to the feature bB5, the "predetermined notification" in the feature bB5 can be replaced with the "first notification".

Feature bB7. Means for making the first notification period in the first game round in which the predetermined transition condition is satisfied longer than the first notification period in the predetermined first game round in which the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied (second implementation) described in feature bB5 or feature bB6, characterized in that the main control device 162 according to modifications 1 to 10 of the second embodiment has a function of setting a specific confirmed display time, etc. gaming machines.

In the above configuration, in order to make the period of the first notification in the first game round in which the transition condition to the second gaming state is satisfied longer than the period of the first notification in the other first game rounds, the grace period is lengthened. can be achieved.

In addition, when this feature is applied to feature bB6, "In order to realize the configuration of feature bB6 above in which the grace period is longer than the second notification period, unreasonable shortening of the second notification period is avoided. This makes it possible to realize the configuration of feature bB6 above while suppressing the occurrence of the inconvenience that the result of specific determination becomes difficult to visually recognize due to shortening of the notification period.'' You can expect good results.

Feature bB8. The benefit granting means is for a special game state in which the player can be shifted to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the first determination being a specific result. Equipped with a transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the main control device 162),
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
Recited in any one of features bB1 to feature bB7, characterized in that one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the other of the first gaming state and the second gaming state is a specific gaming state. gaming machines.

In the above configuration, when the gaming state changes between the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state, the forced termination of the gaming round is carried out. That is, since the above-mentioned termination is executed by the specific termination means in response to changes in the game times and the aspect of variable ball entry control, it is possible to suitably exhibit the above-mentioned effects of the characteristics bB1 to bB7. Become.

Feature bB9. The benefit granting means is for a special game state in which the player can be shifted to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the first determination being a specific result. Equipped with a transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the main control device 162),
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features bB1 to bB7, wherein the first gaming state is a normal gaming state and the second gaming state is a specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, when there is a transition from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state, the specific ending means executes the end of the gaming round. That is, since the above-mentioned termination by the specific termination means is executed in response to the switching from a situation in which the game cycle or variable ball entry control is performed in an unfavorable manner to a situation in which it is performed in an advantageous manner, the characteristics bB1 to bB7 described above are executed. It becomes possible to suitably exhibit each of the above-mentioned effects.

Note that the above feature bB8 or feature bB9 "has a specific gaming state (high-frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state". "The game state has a specific game state (high-frequency support mode) in which at least one of the game times and variable ball entry control is executed in a manner more advantageous to the player than the normal game state." You can also.

Feature bB10. It has multiple types of specific gaming states (first time-saving gaming state, second time-saving gaming state, third time-saving gaming state, etc.) as specific gaming states,
When a game round is being executed in a situation where a predetermined specific gaming state changes to another specific gaming state different from the predetermined specific gaming state, the ending by the specific ending means is restricted. The gaming machine according to feature bB8 or feature bB9.

In the case of a change from one specific gaming state to another specific gaming state, the game times and variable ball entry control have already been executed in a manner corresponding to the specific gaming state before the change. If a game round is ended midway in such a situation, there is a risk that the start of a game round corresponding to the changed game state will be delayed. In this regard, in this configuration, when switching from one specific gaming state to another specific gaming state, the ending of the gaming round by the specific ending means is restricted, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences.

Note that for each configuration of the features bB1 to bB10, features bA1 to bA12, bB1 to bB10, bC1 to bC9, bD1 to bD6, bE1 to bE10, bF1 to bF10 , features bG1 to features bG8, features bH1 to features bH8, features bI1 to features bI11, features bJ1 to features bJ10, features bK1 to features bK10, features bL1 to features bL9, features bM1 to features bM10, features bN1 to features bN7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in configuration (1) individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bC group>
The characteristic bC group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and mainly includes the second embodiment and modifications 1 to modification of the second embodiment. This is extracted based on Example 10.

The invention described in feature bC group is, ``For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and the lottery result is a specific result. Regarding the background technology that states, ``There is a system that allows the player to enter a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)," There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature bC1. Ball entry means (first operating port 62) into which a game ball can enter;
Variable that can be switched between a first mode (open state) in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. Ball entry means (second operating port 63);
A special judgment means (a function of executing the special pattern correctness judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (special pattern correctness judgment) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering means or the variable ball entering means; ,
A special gaming state transition means capable of shifting to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the result of the special determination is a specific result (jackpot result). (Function to execute gaming state transition processing in main controller 162);
A first game round operation is started based on the special determination being made, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is defined as one of the first game rounds (special figure game round); First game round control means that controls so that the first game round is played (function to execute special figure game round control processing in main control device 162, function to execute special figure fluctuation display processing in production control device 143) and,
A specific determination means (a function in the main controller 162 that executes a determination of the validity of a standard figure) for executing a specific determination (determination of the validity of a standard figure) based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition (passage of a game ball through the through gate 64) and,
Based on the fact that the result of the specific determination is a predetermined result (support winning result), switching control for changing the variable ball entry means from the second mode to the first mode, and then changing it to the second mode is performed at least once. Variable ball entry control means (a function to execute electric role support processing in the main control device 162) that executes variable ball entry control (accessory object opening/closing game) that is performed twice;
A second game round operation is started based on the specific determination being made, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the specific determination is defined as one of the second game rounds (general figure game round); A second game round control means (a function of executing the standard game round control process in the main control device 162) that controls so that the second game round is played;
Equipped with
The game state includes a specific game state (high-frequency support mode) in which at least one of the second game round and the variable ball entry control is executed in a manner more advantageous to the player than the normal game state;
If a predetermined transition condition (reaching the ceiling number of times, winning a special winning result, entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) is met, it is possible to move to a specific gaming state without going through the special gaming state. A specific game state transition means (a function for executing the second time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to Modifications 1 and 2 of the second embodiment, Modifications 3 to 5) The main control device 162 according to Modifications 6 to 10 executes the process for transitioning to the third time-saving game state by the main control device 162, the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving game state, and the function of determining the transition to the third time-saving game state. (a function to execute transition determination processing, time-saving gaming state transition processing);
To make the first second game round after shifting to the specific gaming state precede the first first gaming round after shifting to the specific gaming state when shifting to the specific gaming state. (processing of steps Sb1311 to Sb1315, step Sb3509, step Sb4107, and step Sb5811 by the main controller 162 according to the second embodiment and modifications 1 to 10 of the second embodiment) , a function to execute processing for starting final display),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

The above configuration has a specific game state in which at least one of the game times and the variable ball entry control is executed in a manner more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Therefore, by shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state, it becomes more likely that the ball will enter the variable ball entry means, and the player will be more likely to receive a special judgment, allowing him to proceed with the game advantageously. Furthermore, in the above configuration, the transition to the specific gaming state is executed without passing through the special gaming state. In other words, when the above transition condition is satisfied in a certain first game round, after the end of that game round, the next game round is immediately started as the first first game round after transitioning to the specific game state. . Under such a premise, in the above configuration, when transitioning to a specific gaming state, the first second game after transitioning to the specific gaming state is the first first game after transitioning to the specific gaming state It is designed to be carried out in advance of the This makes it possible to advance the start timing of the variable ball entry control after transition to the specific game state, and to quickly create a situation where the ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means.

Feature bC2. The first game time control means controls so that a predetermined notification (stop display of special symbols) is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination,
The specific game state transition means includes a predetermined timing before the end of the predetermined notification in the first game round in which the transition condition is satisfied (the start timing of the final display in the special figure game round, the intermediate timing of the final display, the fluctuation) The gaming machine according to feature bC1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to shift to a specific gaming state at a display start timing, a timing during a variable display, etc.).

When the predetermined notification (notification of the special judgment result) ends in the first game round in which the transition condition is met, the first first game round after transitioning to the specific game state starts as the next first game round. be done. In this case, in the above configuration, since the transition to the specific gaming state is performed before the predetermined notification ends in the first gaming round in which the transition condition is satisfied, after the transition to the specific gaming state, the first gaming round Securing a grace period (a period in which the gaming state has shifted to a specific gaming state, but the first game after shifting to the specific gaming state has not yet been played) until the game is played. be able to. If the second game round is started using this grace period, the second game round can be started before the first game round after transitioning to the specific game state, and the configuration of feature bC1 can be started. This can be a preferred embodiment for realization.

Feature bC3. The game ball is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means than when the game ball enters the ball entry means (the jackpot type determination of the second special drawing is The gaming machine according to feature bC1 or feature bC2, characterized in that the gaming machine has a configuration that is more preferential than the jackpot type determination of the first special drawing.

In the above configuration, since it is more advantageous for the player to cause the ball to enter the variable ball entry means than to cause the ball to enter the ball entry means, the benefit of the specific game state for the player is determined by special judgment. This occurs not only in that the frequency of receiving the ball increases, but also in that it becomes easier to play games on the advantageous side based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means. In this case, as a player, after transitioning to the specific gaming state, the player wants to prevent the disadvantageous side from playing the game based on the ball entering the ball entering means as much as possible, but the player wants to prevent the game from being played on the disadvantageous side based on the ball entering the ball entering means on the advantageous side. By speeding up the timing of ball entry, it becomes possible to correspondingly reduce the number of times and possibility of games based on ball entry into the ball entry means. This makes it possible to suitably realize a configuration in which the game after transition to the specific gaming state is played in a manner that meets the player's wishes.

Feature bC4. Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means or the variable ball entry means;
acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Equipped with
The special determination means performs the special determination based on special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
When the special information acquired based on the ball entering the ball entering means and the special information acquired based on the ball entering the variable ball entering means are stored in the acquired information storage means, Priority means (function of executing data setting processing by the main controller 162) that allows the special judgment regarding the special information acquired based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means to be performed with priority; The gaming machine according to any one of features bC1 to bC3, characterized by comprising:

In the above structure, the special judgment means makes a special judgment based on the special information acquired by the ball entering the ball entering means or the variable ball entering means. By applying this configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain special information corresponding to the ball entering the variable ball entering means after the transition to the special gaming state. In addition, in the above configuration, when both special information based on the ball entering the ball entering means and special information based on the ball entering the variable ball entering means are acquired, a special judgment is made regarding the latter special information. is executed with priority, so when the special information corresponding to the ball entering the variable ball entering means is acquired, the special information corresponding to the ball entering the ball entering means remains in the acquired information storage means. Even if the ball enters the variable ball entry means, a special judgment is executed based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means. That is, according to this configuration, after the transition to the special gaming state, it is possible to bring forward the execution timing of the special determination based on the ball entering the variable ball entering means.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above-mentioned feature bC3, the timing at which a game is played based on the entry of a ball into the variable entry means, which is advantageous for the player, can be brought forward, and It becomes possible to reduce the number of times and the possibility that games on the disadvantageous side will be played.

Feature bC5. The specifying means causes the second game round operation in the first second game round to end before the first first game round is performed when a transition is made to a specific game state. (a function of setting a specific confirmed display time by the main controller 162 according to modification 1 of the second embodiment) according to any one of features bC1 to feature bC4. .

In the above configuration, since the game repetition operation in the first second game round is completed before the first first game round is played after the transition to the specific game state, after the first second game round is completed. The variable ball entry control can be easily executed before the start of the first game round. This makes it possible to easily execute a game round based on the ball entering the variable ball entering means as the first game round after transitioning to the specific game state.

Feature bC6. The second game time control means controls so that a specific notification (stop display of the common map) is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific determination,
The specifying means may cause the specific notification in the first second game round to end prior to the first first game round when the game enters a specific gaming state. (a function of setting a specific confirmed display time by the main controller 162 according to Modification 1 of the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, since the specific notification (notification of the specific determination result) in the first second game round ends before the first first game round is played after the transition to the specific gaming state, the first second game round is completed. It becomes possible to execute the variable ball entry control after the game round ends before the start of the first game round. This makes it possible to carry out a game round based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means as the first game round after shifting to the specific game state.

Feature bC7. The first game time control means controls so that a predetermined notification (stop display of special symbols) is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination,
The specific game state transition means includes a predetermined timing before the end of the predetermined notification in the first game round in which the transition condition is satisfied (start timing of the final display in the special figure game round, intermediate timing of the final display, fluctuation) It is configured so that the transition to a specific gaming state is performed at the start timing of the display, the timing during the fluctuating display, etc.),
comprising specific notification execution means for executing a specific notification (displaying a right-handed hitting notification image 477a and a target guide image 477b) to prompt the ball to enter the variable ball entry device;
The specific notification execution means includes a specific timing in a period from the predetermined timing until the first first game round is played (timing after transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state and before starting the accessory opening/closing game, Feature bC1 to feature bC1, characterized in that the specific notification is configured to be able to be executed at any timing during a period from when the second time-saving gaming state is entered until the final display time has elapsed. The gaming machine according to any one of feature bC6.

When the predetermined notification (notification of the special judgment result) ends in the first game round in which the transition condition is met, the first first game round after transitioning to the specific game state starts as the next first game round. be done. In this case, in the above configuration, since the transition to the specific gaming state is performed before the predetermined notification ends in the first gaming round in which the transition condition is satisfied, after the transition to the specific gaming state, the first gaming round Securing a grace period (a period in which the gaming state has shifted to a specific gaming state, but the first game after shifting to the specific gaming state has not yet been played) until the game is played. be able to. In the case where the first second game round after transitioning to a specific gaming state is played prior to the first first game round after transitioning to a specific gaming state, the variable ball entering means is used during the grace period. By giving a specific notification to encourage the ball to enter, it becomes possible to more appropriately promote the prompt entry of the ball into the variable ball entry means.

Feature bC8. The specifying means is characterized in that it is possible to cause the first second game round to be played prior to the first first game round when the normal game state shifts to the specific game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features bC1 to bC7.

In the above configuration, when the transition is from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state, the first second game after the transition to the specific gaming state is the first first game after the transition to the specific gaming state. Processing is performed in advance. That is, since the above-mentioned processing is executed in response to switching from a situation in which game times and variable ball entry control are performed in an unfavorable manner to a situation in which it is performed in an advantageous manner, the above-mentioned effects of the characteristics bC1 to bC7 are It becomes possible to suitably exhibit the function.

Feature bC9. Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means or the variable ball entry means;
acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Equipped with
The special determination means performs the special determination based on special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
When the special information corresponding to the next first game round is stored in the acquired information storage means and a specific game state is entered, the first second game round precedes the first first game round. The gaming machine according to any one of features bC1 to bC8, characterized in that the gaming machine can be configured to be played as follows.

If special information corresponding to the next first game round for which the transition condition was met is stored in the acquired information storage means, no new ball enters the variable ball entry means. Also, after the end of the first game round in which the transition conditions were met, the first game round after transitioning to the specific game state (the first game round after the above) will start immediately, but the main game The configuration is such that even in such a case, the first second game round is played before the first first game round is played. Thereby, each structure of the said feature bC1 to feature bC9 can be made to function effectively, and each said effect can be demonstrated suitably.

Note that for each configuration of features bC1 to bC9, features bA1 to bA12, bB1 to bB10, bC1 to bC9, bD1 to bD6, bE1 to bE10, bF1 to bF10 , features bG1 to features bG8, features bH1 to features bH8, features bI1 to features bI11, features bJ1 to features bJ10, features bK1 to features bK10, features bL1 to features bL9, features bM1 to features bM10, features bN1 to features bN7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in configuration (1) individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bD group>
The feature bD group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and mainly includes the second embodiment and modification 1 to modification of the second embodiment. This is extracted based on Example 10.

In addition, the invention described in feature bD group is, ``For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and the lottery result is a specific result. Regarding the background technology that states, ``There is a system that allows the player to enter a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)," There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature bD1. A special judgment means (special drawing correctness judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (special drawing correctness judgment) based on establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning in the first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63). function to perform judgment), and
A special game state transition means that is capable of shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the result of the special determination is a specific result (jackpot result); A function of executing a gaming state transition process in the main control device 162);
A pattern display means (special pattern display section 43, pattern display device 75) capable of variably displaying the pattern;
A game round is performed by starting variable display of symbols in the symbol display means based on the execution of the special determination, and stopping and displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the special determination as one game round. A game time control means (a function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure fluctuation display process in the production control device 143),
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
If a predetermined transition condition (reaching the ceiling number of times, winning a special winning result, entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) is met, it is possible to move to a specific gaming state without going through the special gaming state. A specific game state transition means (a function for executing a second time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment, modification 1 and modification 2 of the second embodiment, modification) A function for executing the process for transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Examples 3 to 5, and a process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modifications 6 to 10. , a function for executing the third time-saving gaming state transition determination process, and the time-saving gaming state transition process);
A period setting means (second period setting means) capable of setting a stop display period during which the stop display is performed in a game round in which the transition condition is satisfied to a period different from the stop display period in a predetermined game round in which the transition condition is not satisfied. (a function of setting a specific confirmed display time by the main controller 162 according to the embodiment and the modification 1 to modification 10 of the second embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which the game transitions based on the result of the special determination being a specific result, the specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. Further, in the above configuration, the specific gaming state includes a gaming state to which the game transitions without going through the special gaming state. A transition to this specific gaming state occurs when a predetermined transition condition is met, but in order to allow the player to smoothly start playing in the specific gaming state, it is important to It is desirable to notify the player of the transition to a specific gaming state before a gaming session begins. In this case, if the transition is via a special gaming state like the conventional specific gaming state, the period of the special gaming state (for example, the period of the ending effect in the special gaming state, etc.) is used to specify the specific gaming state. It is possible to make notifications corresponding to the transition to a gaming state, etc., but in the case of a specific gaming state that transitions without going through a special gaming state, the specific gaming Since the first game after entering the state is immediately played, it is difficult to secure a period for executing such notification. In this regard, in this configuration, the stop display period during which the symbols are stopped and displayed in the game round where the transition condition is met is different from the stop display period in other game rounds where the transition condition is not met, so that the transition to a specific game state is When this occurs, by using the special stop display period, it becomes possible to suitably secure the execution period for the above-mentioned notification.

Feature bD2. The period setting means is capable of setting the stop display period of a game round in which the transition condition is satisfied to a longer period than the stop display period of a predetermined game round in which the transition condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature bD1.

In the above configuration, since the stop display period of the game round where the transition condition is satisfied is made longer than the stop display period of the other game round where the transition condition is not satisfied, it becomes possible to suitably secure the execution period of the above-mentioned notification. .

Feature bD3. The period setting means, when transitioning from a normal gaming state to a specific gaming state, sets the stop display period of a game round in which the transition condition is satisfied to be longer than the stop display period of a predetermined game round in which the transition condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature bD2, characterized in that it can be set for a long period of time.

In the above configuration, in the case of transition from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state, the stop display period of the game round where the transition condition is satisfied is made longer than the stop display period of the other game round where the transition condition is not satisfied. In this case, the longer stop display period in the game round in which the transition condition is satisfied can ensure the player's preparation period for switching to the specific game state. Such a configuration is particularly effective when, for example, the recommended firing strength of the game ball is different between the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state, and the operation mode of the player in playing the game in each gaming state is different. Become.

Feature bD4. Specific notification execution means (performance control device 143) that executes specific notification (start performance of the second time-saving game state or third time-saving game state, ceiling reaching performance, etc.) corresponding to the establishment of the transition condition or transition to a specific game state. Equipped with a function to execute the second transition production setting process, special figure fluctuation display process, etc.),
The gaming machine according to feature bD2 or feature bD3, wherein the specific notification execution means includes means for executing the specific notification during at least a part of the stop display period of the game round in which the transition condition is satisfied. .

In order to notify the transition to a specific gaming state in advance, it may be possible to make use of the variable display period of symbols in the game round in which the transition condition is satisfied, and to provide notification corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, etc. However, with this configuration, the player's interest tends to shift to a specific gaming state in the middle of a game round, and there is a concern that the degree of attention to the game round may be lost. In this regard, in this configuration, the stop display period of the game round where the transition condition is met is made longer than the stop display period of the other game rounds where the transition condition is not met, and at least a part of that period is used to make the above notification. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably balance the degree of attention to the game round with the securing of the period for the above-mentioned notification.

Feature bD5. The specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification after the stop display is started during the stop display period of the game round in which the transition condition is satisfied. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the result of the special judgment by stopping display of the symbols and then inform the transition to the specific gaming state, so that the player can grasp both the result of the special judgment and the transition to the specific gaming state. This can be a preferred embodiment.

Feature bD6. Equipped with a predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 63) into which a game ball can enter,
The specific gaming state is one in which the ball enters the predetermined ball entering means more easily than the normal gaming state,
The special determination means is capable of executing the special determination based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means,
comprising a predetermined notification executing means for executing a predetermined notification (displaying a right-handed hitting notification image 477a and a target guide image 477b) to prompt the ball to enter the predetermined ball entering means;
Any one of features bD2 to feature bD5, characterized in that the predetermined notification execution means includes means for executing the predetermined notification during at least part of the stop display period of the game round in which the transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

In the above configuration, the specific game state is a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means, and the predetermined notification that prompts the ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means is a long stop in the game round in which the transition condition is satisfied. This is done using a small portion of the display period. As a result, it is possible to encourage the ball to enter the prescribed ball entry means before the first game round after transitioning to the specific gaming state, allowing the player to smoothly and suitably start playing in the specific gaming state. becomes possible.

Note that for each configuration of features bD1 to feature bD6, features bA1 to feature bA12, feature bB1 to feature bB10, feature bC1 to feature bC9, feature bD1 to feature bD6, feature bE1 to feature bE10, feature bF1 to feature bF10 , features bG1 to features bG8, features bH1 to features bH8, features bI1 to features bI11, features bJ1 to features bJ10, features bK1 to features bK10, features bL1 to features bL9, features bM1 to features bM10, features bN1 to features bN7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in configuration (1) individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bE group>
The feature bE group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on modification 3 of the second embodiment. .

The invention described in feature group bE is, ``For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and based on the fact that the lottery result becomes a specific result, Regarding the background technology that states, ``There is a system that allows the player to enter a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)," There is still room for improvement in improving the interest of games.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature bE1. A special judgment means (special drawing correctness judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (special drawing correctness judgment) based on establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning in the first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63). function to perform judgment), and
A special game state transition means that is capable of shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the result of the special determination is a specific result (jackpot result); A function of executing gaming state transition processing in the main control device 162);
A game in which a game repetition operation is started based on the execution of the special determination, and a game round is controlled so that the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one game round. Time control means (function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, function of executing the special figure fluctuation display process in the production control device 143),
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and different from the special gaming state,
The conditions for ending the specific gaming state include that the number of games played after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit,
Specific conditions (winning a special winning result, entering a specific ball entry club, When a ball (ball, etc.) is established, a specific process may be executed so that the specific gaming state is re-transferred to after the end of the specific gaming state, or the remaining number of play times in the specific gaming state is increased. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with possible identifying means (such as a function for executing processing for transitioning to a third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the third modification of the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which the game transitions based on the result of the special determination being a specific result, the specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. This specific gaming state ends on the condition that the number of games played after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number of times. Under such a premise, in the above configuration, if a specific condition is satisfied in a specific game round in a specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is re-entered after the specific gaming state ends, or the specific gaming state is It is configured such that the number of remaining game times in the state is increased. Therefore, by meeting specific conditions in a specific game, the period during which you can play a specific gaming state will be extended, giving you a chance to win a specific result and move to a special gaming state while maintaining an advantageous specific gaming state. can be increased. As a result, it is possible to add a game that aims not only to win a specific result in a specific gaming state, but also to satisfy a specific condition in a specific game round, expanding the range of ways to enjoy the game and improving interest. becomes possible.

Feature bE2. The specifying means is capable of re-transferring to the specific gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state if a specific condition is satisfied in a specific gaming round in the specific gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature bE1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the end of the previous specific gaming state and the transition to the subsequent specific gaming state can be executed in the same game round.

In the above configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied in a specific gaming session, the end of the specific gaming state and the re-transition to the specific gaming state are performed in the same gaming session. As a result, it is possible to switch from the preceding specific gaming state to the subsequent specific gaming state without intervening the game times in the normal gaming state, and the state is equivalent to the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state being added. It becomes possible to do this.

Feature bE3. The configuration is such that it is impossible for the player to recognize the end of the previous specific gaming state, or it is difficult for the player to recognize the end of the specific gaming state when the re-transition is not performed.
Predetermined notification execution means for executing a predetermined notification (additional performance) that allows the player to recognize that the remaining number of game times in a specific gaming state has increased in the same game round or the next game round. The gaming machine according to feature bE2, characterized in that it is equipped with (a function of executing special symbol fluctuation display processing in the production control device 143).

In the above configuration, the end of the preceding specific gaming state is made impossible or difficult for the player to recognize, and the specific gaming state is set in the gaming round in which the transition to the subsequent specific gaming state is made or in the next gaming round. A predetermined notification is made so that the remaining number of times has increased. This makes it possible for the player to easily feel that the remaining number of games has been added.

Feature bE4. The specifying means is configured such that when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific game in a specific gaming state, the system re-enters the specific gaming state without passing through the special gaming state, or the remaining number of times is increased. Features bE1 to bE3 are characterized in that the features bE1 to bE3 include a means for executing the third time-saving gaming state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the third modification of the second embodiment. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

With the above configuration, it is possible to re-transfer to the specific gaming state and increase (additional) the remaining number of games without going through the special gaming state. In other words, since it is not necessary to win a specific result for re-transfer to a specific gaming state, etc., the probability of the re-transition, etc. described above (the probability of the specific condition being met) is calculated by the probability of transition to the special gaming state (probability of the specific result). (probability of winning). This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in game design, for example by making the former probability higher than the latter probability. In addition, by re-transferring to a specific gaming state without passing through the special gaming state, the specific gaming state before the specific condition is met and the specific gaming state after the specific condition is met are largely separated. This can be suppressed. This makes it easier for the player to feel a sense of unity regarding the specific gaming state of both players, and makes it easier to give the impression that the specific gaming state is extended.

Feature bE5. Restricting means for restricting the execution of the specific processing when a specific condition is satisfied in a different gaming session than the specific gaming session in a specific gaming state (in the third modification of the second embodiment) The gaming machine according to any one of features bE1 to bE4, characterized in that the main control device 162 has a function of executing processing for transitioning to a third time-saving gaming state.

According to the above configuration, re-transition to a specific gaming state is performed only when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific gaming session. In other words, in order to realize the re-transition, etc., it is not only necessary to satisfy specific conditions, but also the timing, so the difficulty level of the re-transfer, etc. is appropriately increased, and the It becomes possible to suitably bring out the joy and sense of accomplishment of the players. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to a specific game round.

Feature bE6. The gaming machine according to feature bE5, wherein the specific gaming session is a gaming session on the latter half of the specific gaming state.

As the number of remaining games in a specific gaming state decreases, the expected value of winning a specific result in the specific gaming state decreases, so there is a concern that the closer a player gets to the end of a specific gaming state, the less the player will have a sense of expectation. be. In this regard, in this configuration, since a specific game round is set in the latter half of a specific gaming state, it is possible for players to re-transfer to a specific gaming state even if their expectations for a specific result are low. can be provided. This makes it possible to liven up the second half of the game in the specific game state and maintain the sense of anticipation.

Feature bE7. The game according to feature bE5 or feature bE6, which is characterized by having a means (a function of executing the process of step Sb3802 by the production control device 143) for executing a specific notification (chance notification image 478) in a specific game round. Machine.

In the above configuration, since a specific notification that is not performed in other game rounds is given in a specific game round, the player can understand that it is a specific game round through the specific notification. As a result, the player can play the game with enthusiasm during a specific game round, and it is possible to suitably increase the level of attention to the game.

In addition, this feature is "equipped with a means to execute a specific notification (chance notification image 478) that is not executed in the other game rounds in a specific game round (a function to execute the process of step Sb3802 by the production control device 143). ”, and this feature may further include a configuration such that “the specific notification is configured not to be executed in the other game times”.

Feature bE8. The specific condition is that the result of the special judgment is a predetermined judgment result (special deviant result) different from the specific result, or the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (deviant result) that does not correspond to transition to the special gaming state. ), the result of a specific determination (e.g., failure type determination, transition lottery, etc.) becomes a predetermined determination result (special failure result, transition lottery winning result, etc.) Features bE1 to The gaming machine according to any one of feature bE7.

In the above configuration, the result of the special determination becomes a predetermined determination result different from the specific result, or the result of the specific determination performed when the result of the special determination becomes a non-specific result becomes the predetermined determination result. Since the specific condition is met, it is possible to determine whether the result of the special determination is the specific result and to determine whether the specific condition is met in one game round. Therefore, a specific game round can function as a chance game round (a game round that is more advantageous than other game rounds) where you can receive both of these judgments, and the expectation and attention level for the relevant game round can be appropriately increased. It is possible to increase it.

Feature bE9. A feature characterized in that the probability that the special judgment in a specific gaming state or the specific judgment results in the predetermined judgment result is set higher than the probability that the specific result will be obtained in the special judgment in the specific gaming state. The gaming machine described in bE8.

In the above configuration, since the probability of a predetermined determination result is set higher than the probability of a specific result, expectations for the specific condition to be met are increased, and the degree of attention to a specific game round is increased. becomes possible.

Feature bE10. A special judgment means (special drawing correctness judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (special drawing correctness judgment) based on establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning in the first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63). function to perform judgment), and
A special game state transition means that is capable of shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the result of the special determination is a specific result (jackpot result); A function of executing a gaming state transition process in the main control device 162);
If the result of the special determination in the first predetermined situation (the last game round in the first time-saving gaming state) is a predetermined result (special result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state, the first predetermined situation In a second predetermined situation different from the above (a special figure game round other than the final game round in the first time-saving game state), the result of the special determination is made to be more advantageous to the player than when the predetermined result becomes the predetermined result. (a function for executing processing for transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the third modification of the second embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

With conventional gaming machines, since the game was an alternative between getting a specific result or not, when playing the game, the player could only have expectations for getting a specific result, and there was a concern that the game would become monotonous. there were. In this regard, with this configuration, even if the result of the special judgment is a predetermined result that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state (a so-called missed result), it can be advantageous, so even if the specific result is not obtained, expectations can be maintained. It is possible to be stimulated and to diversify the game. In this case, even if the result is incorrect, the advantage is limited to when the situation at that time is the first predetermined situation, so it is possible to prevent the advantage of obtaining a specific result from being excessively impaired. . In other words, it is possible to maintain the fun of a game in which the player aims to achieve a specific result, while also realizing a gameplay experience that does not end with disappointment even when the specific result is not achieved, thereby making it possible to improve the level of interest.

It is possible to apply the configurations of the features bE1 to bE9 described above to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying these configurations.

Note that for each configuration of the features bE1 to bE10, features bA1 to bA12, bB1 to bB10, bC1 to bC9, bD1 to bD6, bE1 to bE10, bF1 to bF10 , features bG1 to features bG8, features bH1 to features bH8, features bI1 to features bI11, features bJ1 to features bJ10, features bK1 to features bK10, features bL1 to features bL9, features bM1 to features bM10, features bN1 to features bN7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in configuration (1) individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bF group>
The feature bF group is a group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly includes modifications 3, 6, 8 to 8 of the second embodiment. This is extracted based on Example 12.

The invention described in feature bF group is, ``For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and based on the fact that the lottery result becomes a specific result, Regarding the background technology that states, ``There is a system that allows the player to enter a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)," There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature bF1. Special judgment means (win/fail judgment processing in the main controller 162) that executes a special judgment (special map correct/fail judgment) based on establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning at the first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63) etc.) and
A special game state transition means that is capable of shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the result of the special determination is a specific result (jackpot result); A function of executing a gaming state transition process in the main control device 162);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
A transition means for a specific gaming state (a second Embodiment, Function of executing the process for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the first and second modifications of the second embodiment, and the main control according to the third to fifth modifications (a function of executing the process for transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state by the device 162, a function of executing the process for transitioning to the time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modifications 6 to 10, etc.);
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, when the transition is performed by the specific gaming state transition means, or when the transition is performed, a specific signal (an external signal corresponding to a special out-of-order result such as Modification 3, Modification) 11, the first external signal A of Modification 12, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine (Modification 3, Modification 6, Modification of Second Embodiment) 8 to the function of executing the process of step Sb3511 by the main controller 162 according to Modification 10, the function of outputting the first external signal in Modification 11, the function of outputting the first external signal A of Modification 12, etc.) and,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which the game transitions based on the result of the special determination being a specific result, the specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. Furthermore, with the above configuration, it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state without going through the special gaming state. If it is a specific gaming state that transitions via a special gaming state like the conventional specific gaming state, the occurrence can be recognized on the gaming hall side, but regarding a specific gaming state that transitions without going through a special gaming state. There is a concern that the game hall may not be able to detect the occurrence of such problems. In this regard, this feature outputs a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine in response to the establishment of such a transition trigger (predetermined condition) to a specific gaming state and the transition to the specific gaming state, so the gaming hall side can output a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to suitably perform the above understanding.

Feature bF2. Restricting the transition to a specific gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined situation (a situation in which the game is in a first time-saving gaming state, a situation in which it is in a second time-saving gaming state, a situation in which it is in a restricted gaming period, etc.). (a function of executing the process for transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the third modification of the second embodiment, according to the sixth modification, and the eighth to the tenth modification) The main controller 162 has a function of executing a process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state,
It is configured such that the output of the specific signal by the external output means is executed in a situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied in the predetermined situation and the transition restriction means performs the restriction. (By executing the process of step Sb3511 in the main control device 162 according to Modification 3, Modification 6, Modification 8 to Modification 10 of the second embodiment, the external signal corresponding to the special deviation result is The gaming machine according to feature bF1, characterized in that:

In the above configuration, even if the predetermined condition is met, in a predetermined situation, the transition to a specific gaming state is restricted. In the case where such a restriction is implemented, it is conceivable to stop outputting the specific signal in response to the fact that a transition to a specific gaming state does not occur. From the viewpoint of ensuring consistency with the subsequent gaming state, it is more logical not to output a specific signal than to output it.

However, with such a configuration, there is a concern that the game hall cannot grasp the actual number of times a predetermined condition is met in a game, and it becomes difficult to determine whether the probability of the condition being met is generally trending in accordance with the designed probability. be. In particular, as a result of the suspension of the output of a specific signal, the number of notifications to the gaming hall side will be thinned out, and the number of times that the gaming hall side will know will be lower than the actual number. Even if a certain act has been committed, there may be a delay in discovering it.

In this regard, in this configuration, even if the transition to a specific gaming state is restricted when a predetermined condition is met, the specific signal is intentionally output, so the actual number of times the condition is met is The hall side can understand the situation appropriately. This makes it easier to discover when the probability of the transition condition being satisfied is fraudulently increased, and it becomes possible to enhance the effectiveness of deterring fraud.

Feature bF3. The external output means is
means for outputting a specific signal of the first aspect when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific situation different from the predetermined situation (such as a situation not in the first time-saving game state);
means for outputting a specific signal in a second mode different from the first mode when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the predetermined situation;
The gaming machine according to feature bF2, comprising:

In the above configuration, different types of specific signals are output when transition to a specific gaming state is permitted and when transition to a specific gaming state is restricted, so that when a predetermined condition is satisfied on the gaming hall side, Not only that, but also whether or not the state should be shifted to a specific gaming state can be determined from one specific signal. This makes it possible to immediately determine that there is no abnormality in the gaming machine when the specific gaming state is not entered even though the predetermined condition is satisfied.

Feature bF4. It is configured such that the predetermined condition can be satisfied in relation to the result of the special judgment (if the result of the winning lottery or the winning type judgment becomes a special winning result, the condition for transition to the third time-saving gaming state is satisfied) configuration),
Equipped with a specific external signal output means (a function for executing the process of step Sb3511 by the main controller 162) capable of outputting a specific external signal (lottery result signal) corresponding to the result of the special determination to the outside of the gaming machine,
Feature bF1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to output the specific signal using the specific external signal (configuration that outputs an external signal corresponding to a special winning result using a lottery result signal). The gaming machine according to any one of features bF3.

According to the above configuration, the specific signal can be output using the existing terminal and existing wiring for notifying the result of the special determination, so compared to the case where a dedicated signal is output as the specific signal, it is possible to output the specific signal in the gaming machine. The number of output terminals etc. can be kept small. Furthermore, if the management control device on the gaming hall side is already equipped with an input terminal or the like for receiving notification of the result of the special determination, it can be used to receive the specific signal.

Note that the feature "configured to be able to output the specific signal using the specific external signal" means "the specific external signal output means is configured to output the specific external signal by using the specific external signal". a first means capable of outputting a specific external signal of the first aspect when outputting a signal (a function of outputting a lottery result signal for jackpot or normal loss); A second means as the external output means (a lottery result signal for a special loss It is also possible to express this as "having the ability to output

Feature bF5. It is configured such that the predetermined condition can be satisfied in relation to the result of the special judgment (if the result of the winning lottery or the winning type judgment becomes a special winning result, the condition for transition to the third time-saving gaming state is satisfied) configuration),
A game in which a game repetition operation is started based on the execution of the special determination, and a game round is controlled so that the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one game round. Time control means (function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, function of executing the special figure fluctuation display process in the production control device 143),
A predetermined external signal output means capable of outputting a predetermined external signal (a game run execution signal, a game run start signal, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine corresponding to each game run (modification 3 of the second embodiment, A function of executing the process of step Sb3511 by the main controller 162 according to Modifications 6 and 8 to 10);
Equipped with
Feature bF1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to output the specific signal using the predetermined external signal (configuration that outputs an external signal corresponding to a special winning result using a lottery result signal). The gaming machine according to any one of features bF3.

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to output a specific signal using a predetermined external signal outputted to the outside of the gaming machine corresponding to each game round. This not only simplifies the configuration by omitting signal terminals and signal wiring for specific signals, but also avoids adding input terminals in the management control device on the gaming hall side. In addition, since a specific signal can be output at the same time as a predetermined external signal, the number of signal outputs from the gaming machine can be reduced, and the processing load required for signal exchange between the gaming machine and the management control device on the gaming hall side can be reduced. It becomes possible to reduce the

Note that the feature "configured to be able to output the specific signal using the predetermined external signal" means "the predetermined external signal output means is configured to output the specific signal using the predetermined external signal". a first means capable of outputting a predetermined external signal of a first aspect when outputting a signal; and a second means different from the first aspect when outputting a predetermined external signal in a situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied. and a second means as the external output means capable of outputting a predetermined external signal of the aspect as the specific signal.

Feature bF6. Any one of features bF2 to feature bF5, characterized in that the game machine is equipped with a means capable of outputting a predetermined output signal (time-saving state signal, high-frequency support signal, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine in the case of the predetermined situation. A gaming machine described in Crab.

In the above configuration, a predetermined output signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine when a predetermined situation exists in which transition to a specific gaming state is restricted. As a result, in a situation where a specific signal indicating that a predetermined condition has been met does not shift to a specific gaming state, the management control device on the gaming hall side can refer to the above-mentioned predetermined output signal to determine whether the cause is the predetermined one. You can easily identify whether the situation is correct or not. In other words, on the gaming hall side, by referring to the predetermined output signal, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormality in the gaming machine when it does not shift to a specific gaming state even though a specific signal is being output. It becomes possible to do it easily.

Feature bF7. A game in which a game repetition operation is started based on the execution of the special determination, and a game round is controlled so that the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one game round. Equipped with a time control means (a function to execute the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, a function to execute the special figure fluctuation display process in the production control device 143),
The predetermined situation is configured to end based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition (reaching an upper limit number of times, etc.),
The external output means is capable of outputting the specific signal at the end timing of the predetermined situation or at a predetermined timing after the end timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a game round in which the end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature bF6, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured as follows.

For example, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined situation, the transition to a specific gaming state is restricted, while in a predetermined situation, if the predetermined condition is satisfied in the final game round, the transition to a specific gaming state is allowed. is possible. In such a case, if a specific signal is output earlier than the end timing of the predetermined situation, the management control device on the gaming hall side will assume that the specific gaming state has been entered even though the predetermined conditions have been met in the predetermined situation. There is a perceived concern. In this regard, in this configuration, the specific signal is output at the end timing of the predetermined situation or at a predetermined timing after the end timing, so that the management control device is made to know that the predetermined situation has ended. It is possible to make the player understand that the predetermined condition has been satisfied after the game has been completed, and it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing unnatural behavior even if the player shifts to a specific gaming state thereafter.

Feature bF8. The external output means is
A first means (usually a big hit (a function that outputs the first external signal when the result is the same);
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the transition is performed by the specific gaming state transition means, or a second means (special exception) capable of outputting a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the transition is performed. (a function that outputs the first external signal when the result is the same);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature bF1, wherein the second means is capable of outputting a specific signal from the predetermined output terminal.

In the above configuration, a specific signal corresponding to the establishment of a predetermined condition or a transition to a specific gaming state is output by using the same output terminal that outputs an external signal when a transition to a special gaming state is in progress. be done. As a result, even if the hall equipment is compatible only with a specific gaming state that transitions to via the special gaming state, it becomes possible to recognize the specific gaming state that transitions to without passing through the special gaming state.

Feature bF9. The first means is capable of outputting a signal in a predetermined manner (a first external signal that is turned on during the opening/closing execution mode),
The second means is capable of outputting, as the specific signal, a signal in a mode different from the predetermined mode (a first external signal that remains on for a predetermined period shorter than the period of the opening/closing execution mode). The gaming machine according to feature bF8.

In the above configuration, external output is performed from the predetermined output terminal with different signal formats depending on the case of transition to a special gaming state and the case of establishment of a predetermined condition. This makes it possible to distinguish and recognize both external signals even if they are output from the same output terminal.

Feature bF10. The external output means is capable of outputting a signal (second external signal) to the outside of the gaming machine from an output terminal different from the predetermined output terminal at least in a situation where the game enters a specific gaming state or is in a specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature bF8 or feature bF9, further comprising a third means (a function of outputting a second external signal).

In the above configuration, a signal is output from an output terminal that is different from the predetermined output terminal to which a signal is externally output when a special gaming state is in effect or when a predetermined condition is met, and the transition to a specific gaming state or during its execution is handled. The signal is output externally. This makes it possible for the hall equipment to recognize the transition to a specific gaming state or the specific gaming state.

Note that for each configuration of the features bF1 to bF10, features bA1 to bA12, bB1 to bB10, bC1 to bC9, bD1 to bD6, bE1 to bE10, bF1 to bF10 , features bG1 to features bG8, features bH1 to features bH8, features bI1 to features bI11, features bJ1 to features bJ10, features bK1 to features bK10, features bL1 to features bL9, features bM1 to features bM10, features bN1 to features bN7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in configuration (1) individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bG group>
The feature bG group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on modification 4 of the second embodiment. .

In addition, the invention described in feature group bG is, ``For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and the lottery result is a specific result. Regarding the background technology that states, ``There is a system that allows the player to enter a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)," There is still room for improvement in improving the interest of games.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature bG1. Special judgment means (win/fail judgment processing in the main controller 162) that executes a special judgment (special map correct/fail judgment) based on establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning at the first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63) etc.) and
A special game state transition means that is capable of shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the result of the special determination is a specific result (jackpot result); A function of executing gaming state transition processing in the main control device 162);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and different from the special gaming state,
As a specific gaming state, a first specific state that can be transitioned to via a special gaming state when a predetermined first condition is satisfied (such as when a 4R normal jackpot result is obtained in Modification 4 of the second embodiment) A special game is executed when a game state (first time-saving game state) and a predetermined second condition different from the first condition are satisfied (such as when the result is a special miss, when the ball enters a specific ball entry section, etc.) It has multiple types of specific gaming states including a second specific gaming state (third time-saving gaming state) that can be transitioned to without passing through the state,
The configuration is such that the second condition can be satisfied in the first specific gaming state,
Specifying means capable of making it more disadvantageous for the player when the second condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state than when the second condition is not satisfied (modification example of the second embodiment) A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function for executing processing for transitioning to a third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to No. 4.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which the game transitions based on the result of the special determination being a specific result, the specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. Further, as such specific gaming states, there are provided a first specific gaming state to which the game transitions via the special gaming state, and a second specific gaming state to which the game transitions to without passing through the special gaming state. Then, in the situation where the first specific gaming state is, the second condition that is the trigger for transition to the second specific gaming state can be satisfied, and when such a condition occurs and the transition to the second specific gaming state occurs, The configuration is such that the situation is more disadvantageous than the case where the transition to the second specific gaming state does not occur.

With such a configuration, when moving to the first specific gaming state after passing through the special gaming state, the player can experience the thrill of being demoted to a disadvantageous state depending on the subsequent game development. It is possible to add more fun than just aiming to win a specific result. However, while such a thrill can be provided, if the player is too disappointed when he or she is demoted to a disadvantageous state, there is a concern that the player's subsequent desire to play will be dampened, which will have the opposite effect. In this regard, in this configuration, when the second condition is satisfied, the player shifts to the second specific gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, so the player is less disappointed than when the player shifts to the normal gaming state. can do. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game in which the player can enjoy the above-mentioned thrill while preventing the player's desire to play from being significantly impaired.

Feature bG2. A game in which a game repetition operation is started based on the execution of the special determination, and a game round is controlled so that the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one game round. Time control means (function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, function of executing the special figure fluctuation display process in the production control device 143),
The conditions for ending the specific gaming state include that the number of games played after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit,
The upper limit number of times for the second specific gaming state is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) smaller than the upper limit number of times for the first specific gaming state (for example, 1000 times),
The gaming machine according to feature bG1, wherein the specifying means causes a transition to a second specific gaming state when the second condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, by satisfying the second condition during the first specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is switched to the second specific gaming state in which the number of times the specific gaming state can be played is smaller. In this case, even when shifting to the second specific gaming state, the specific gaming state can be continued up to the upper limit number of times, and it is possible to leave a chance of winning a specific result in the specific gaming state. This makes it possible to reduce the player's disappointment when the second condition is satisfied, while giving the player a sense of excitement that he may fall into a disadvantageous situation if the second condition is satisfied.

Feature bG3. Upper limit number setting means for setting the upper limit number of times in response to a transition to a specific gaming state (a function for executing processing for transitioning to a third time-saving gaming state by the main controller 162 according to Modification 4 of the second embodiment) ),
The upper limit number of times setting means is configured to set the upper limit number setting means to set the upper limit number setting means to set the upper limit number of times setting means to set the upper limit number setting means to set the upper limit number of times setting means to set the upper limit number of times setting means when the second condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state, regardless of the remaining number of gaming times in the first specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature bG2, further comprising means for setting the predetermined number of times as the upper limit number of times (a function of executing the process of step Sb4108 in the main control device 162).

In the above configuration, the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state when the second condition is satisfied is uniformly set to the number of times remaining in the specific gaming state, regardless of the number of playing times in the first specific gaming state (remaining number of times in the first specific gaming state). 2 Set to the upper limit number of times in a specific gaming state. Therefore, the later the timing of establishing the second condition in the first specific gaming state is, the greater the total number of times the specific gaming state can be played, which is advantageous for the player. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the fun of avoiding the fulfillment of the second condition when proceeding with the game in the first specific gaming state, and it becomes possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature bG4. When in the first specific gaming state or when the remaining number of times up to the upper limit number in the first specific gaming state is a predetermined number or more, the remaining number of times in the first specific gaming state can be hidden. The gaming machine according to feature bG2 or feature bG3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a means (a function of displaying the status notification image 450 instead of the remaining number of times image 472).

For example, with a configuration that clearly indicates the remaining number of times in the first specific gaming state, the player can grasp the number of remaining times before the second condition is satisfied, so that the second condition is satisfied. When the remaining number of times in the second specific game state is set as the remaining number of times in the specific game state, the player can easily specify how many times the number of times has decreased as a result. In this regard, in the above configuration, by making the remaining number of times in the first specific gaming state invisible, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of times before the second condition is satisfied. This makes it difficult for the player to specify the decrease in the remaining number of games when the transition to the second specific gaming state occurs, and even if the decrease becomes large, the player will be greatly disappointed and his or her desire to play will decrease. can be suppressed.

Feature bG5. When the second condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state and the transition to the second specific gaming state occurs, a predetermined notification that allows the player to recognize the remaining number of times in the second specific gaming state (remaining number of times image 472) The gaming machine according to feature bG4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with means for executing (a function of executing the process of step Sb4403 in the production control device 143).

In the above configuration, while the remaining number of times is hidden while staying in the first specific gaming state, the remaining number of times is clearly shown when moving to the second specific gaming state. As a result, the player can easily understand that the second condition has been satisfied and the game has moved to the second specific gaming state, and the number of times that the specific gaming state remains after moving to the second specific gaming state.

Feature bG6. The second condition is that the result of the special judgment is a predetermined judgment result (special failure result) different from the specified result, or the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (a failure result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state. Feature bG1 characterized in that the result of a specific determination (missing type determination, transition lottery, etc.) that is performed when the result is a predetermined determination result (special losing result, transition lottery winning result, etc.) The gaming machine according to any one of features bG5.

In the above configuration, the result of the special determination becomes a predetermined determination result different from the specific result, or the result of the specific determination performed when the result of the special determination becomes a non-specific result becomes the predetermined determination result. Since the specific condition is met, it can be configured such that it is determined in each game whether or not the player is demoted to a disadvantageous state. This makes it possible to experience the thrill of being demoted in each game round, and to enhance the game in which the player enjoys such a thrill.

Feature bG7. The configuration is such that the second condition can be satisfied in a normal gaming state,
It is characterized by being equipped with a means (a function of shifting to the third time-saving gaming state A in the main control device 162) capable of shifting to the second specific gaming state when the second condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features bG1 to bG6.

In the above configuration, the second condition can be satisfied not only during the first specific gaming state but also during the normal gaming state, and if the second condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state, the transition to the second specific gaming state is made. It is configured as follows. Since the second specific gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, if the second condition is satisfied during the first specific gaming state, it will be disadvantageous, but if the second condition is satisfied during the normal gaming state. It is possible to realize an advantageous configuration. In other words, even if the second condition is the same, the advantages and disadvantages can be reversed depending on the gaming state when it is satisfied, so it is possible to prevent the game from being fixed to a game that only avoids the second condition from being satisfied, and to increase the variety of games. It will be possible to achieve this goal.

Feature bG8. The conditions for ending the specific gaming state include that the number of games played after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit,
Upper limit number setting means for setting the upper limit number of times in response to a transition to a specific gaming state (a function for executing processing for transitioning to a third time-saving gaming state by the main controller 162 according to Modification 4 of the second embodiment) ),
The upper limit number setting means sets a higher upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) when the second condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state than when the second condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature bG7, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with means (a function of executing the process of step Sb4106 in the main control device 162).

Since the second specific gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, it is advantageous for the player even if there is a transition from the normal gaming state to the second specific gaming state, but with the above configuration, it is not limited to that. When the second condition is satisfied during the normal gaming state, the upper limit number of times is set to be larger than when the second condition is satisfied during the first specific gaming state. This makes it possible to highlight its superiority, and it becomes possible to enhance the fun of aiming to satisfy the second condition in the normal game state.

Note that for each configuration of features bG1 to bG8, features bA1 to bA12, bB1 to bB10, bC1 to bC9, bD1 to bD6, bE1 to bE10, bF1 to bF10 , features bG1 to features bG8, features bH1 to features bH8, features bI1 to features bI11, features bJ1 to features bJ10, features bK1 to features bK10, features bL1 to features bL9, features bM1 to features bM10, features bN1 to features bN7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in configuration (1) individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bH group>
The feature bH group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on modification 5 of the second embodiment. .

In addition, the invention described in characteristic bH group is, ``For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and based on the fact that the lottery result becomes a specific result, Regarding the background technology that states, ``There is a system that allows the player to enter a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)," There is still room for improvement in terms of increasing attention to the game.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature bH1. Special judgment means (win/fail judgment processing in the main controller 162) that executes a special judgment (special map correct/fail judgment) based on establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning at the first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63) etc.) and
A special game state transition means that is capable of shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the result of the special determination is a specific result (jackpot result); A function of executing a gaming state transition process in the main control device 162);
A game in which a game repetition operation is started based on the execution of the special determination, and a game round is controlled so that the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one game round. A time control means (a function for executing special figure game time control processing in the main control device 162),
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
The conditions for ending the specific gaming state include that the number of games played after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit,
If the specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the specific gaming state is in a permissible state (the number of games in the third time-saving gaming state is greater than the remaining number of times in the first time-saving gaming state) (in the event of a special failure result, Means capable of increasing the number of remaining game times in a specific game state (such as when a ball enters a specific ball entry section) Equipped with a function to execute processing for transitioning to a gaming state),
As the specific gaming state, there are multiple types of specific gaming states (a first time-saving gaming state A, a first time-saving gaming state B) with different game times, ranges or periods of game times corresponding to the permissible state. A gaming machine with special features.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which the game transitions based on the result of the special determination being a specific result, the specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. If a specific condition is satisfied in a situation where this specific gaming state is a permissible state, the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state is increased (additional), allowing the player to proceed with the game more advantageously. It is possible.

In such a configuration, for example, if the number of remaining game rounds increases when a specific condition is met is fixed, the player can decide at what timing the specific condition should be met to increase the remaining number of game rounds. There is a risk that this will be known in advance and interest in other game sessions will fade. In this regard, in the above configuration, there are multiple types of specific gaming states with different game times, ranges of game times, or periods in which an increase in the remaining number of times is allowed, so at what timing is the specific condition satisfied? If you do so, it will not be uniformly determined whether the remaining number of times will increase or not. This prevents the player's interest from concentrating on the same game round in each particular game state, making it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game throughout the particular game state.

Feature bH2. In each specific gaming state, the player is configured to be unable or difficult to identify the gaming times, range or period of gaming times corresponding to the permissible state (first time-saving gaming state A and first time-saving gaming state B). The gaming machine according to feature bH1, characterized by a configuration that makes discrimination impossible or difficult.

For example, in the case of a configuration in which the game times, etc. that become an acceptable state are clarified, even if multiple types of specific gaming states with different gaming times, etc. that become an allowed state are set, attention will be paid to each specific gaming state. Since the number of games to be played becomes clear, there is a concern that the effect of preventing the player's interest from being biased toward a specific number of games may not be effectively achieved. In this regard, with the above configuration, since it is impossible or difficult for the player to identify the game rounds, etc. that are in the permissible state, it is difficult for the player to identify which game rounds, etc. are in the permissible state in each specific game state. It is possible to enjoy the game while making predictions, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game throughout the specific game state.

Feature bH3. The specific gaming states include a first type specific gaming state (first time-saving gaming state A) where the upper limit number of times is a first number of times (for example, 70 times), and a second number of times where the upper limit number of times is greater than the first number of times (for example, It has multiple types of specific gaming states including a second type specific gaming state (first time-saving gaming state B) of 100 times),
The game according to feature bH1 or feature bH2, characterized in that at least in the first type specific game state and the second type specific game state, the game times, ranges or periods of game times corresponding to the permissible state are different. Machine.

In the above configuration, as specific game states in which the number of game times etc. that are allowed are different, there is a first type specific game state where the upper limit number of times is set to the first number of times, and a second type number of times where the upper limit number of times is set to a higher number of times. A second type specific game state is provided. As a result, it is possible to diversify not only when a specific condition should be established, but also by when a specific condition should be established for each specific gaming state, increasing the level of interest. It becomes possible.

Feature bH4. In the second type specific game state, the permissible state is entered in a game time (for example, the 71st to 100th game time) after the game time corresponding to the first time (for example, the 70th special figure game time). The gaming machine according to feature bH3, characterized in that the gaming machine includes a corresponding gaming session, a range or a period of gaming sessions.

In the above configuration, the game times, etc. that are allowed in the second type specific gaming state are included in the game times after the upper limit number of times (first number of times) of the first type specific gaming state. In this case, assuming that the specific gaming state to which the transition was made is the Type 1 specific gaming state, the specific gaming state will end when the first count is reached, but on the other hand, the specific gaming state to which the transition to Assuming that the game is in the second type specific gaming state, if the specific condition is satisfied in the game after the first number of plays, the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state can be increased, which is a desirable situation for the player. For this reason, in the case of transitioning to a specific gaming state, when the number of gaming times approaches the first number, there is a feeling of anxiety that the specific gaming state will end, and there is a feeling of anxiety that the specific gaming state after the first number of times has been exceeded. By establishing this, the game can be played in a conflict with the expectation that the number of remaining games will be increased efficiently, and it is possible to suitably increase the level of interest.

Feature bH5. If the specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the specific gaming state is in a non-permissible state (the number of gaming sessions in the third time-saving gaming state is less than the remaining number of gaming sessions in the first time-saving gaming state), the number of gaming sessions in the specific gaming state It is configured so that the increase in the remaining number of times is limited,
In the first type specific gaming state and the second type specific gaming state, the gaming times, range or period of gaming times corresponding to the non-permissible state include common gaming times, range of gaming times (1st to 20th times). The gaming machine according to feature bH3 or feature bH4, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to include a game period) or a period.

In the above configuration, a common game time, range or period of game times is set in each specific gaming state as a non-permissible state in which the remaining number of times is not added even if the specific condition is met. In this common game round, the remaining number of times will not be increased regardless of which specific gaming state the player has transitioned to, so the player can play without worrying about the type of specific gaming state or the fulfillment of specific conditions. , it becomes possible to secure a period in which the player can concentrate on playing a game aiming at a specific result.

Feature bH6. The player is configured to be unable or difficult to distinguish between the first type specific gaming state and the second type specific gaming state (impossible or difficult to distinguish between the first time saving gaming state A and the first time saving gaming state B). The gaming machine according to any one of features bH3 to bH5, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the player to predict whether the specific gaming state to which the transition has been made is the first type specific gaming state or the second type specific gaming state, and the above characteristics bH3 to bH5 are described above. It becomes possible to suitably exhibit each effect.

Feature bH7. If a specific condition is met in the permissible state of a specific gaming state and the remaining number of gaming sessions is increased, and if the specific condition is met again in that specific gaming state, the increase in the remaining number of gaming sessions is restricted. The gaming machine according to any one of features bH1 to bH6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with means (a function for executing the process of step Sb4801 by the main control device 162).

In the above configuration, the additional number of remaining times based on the fulfillment of the specific condition is limited to only once in the specific gaming state to which the specific condition has been transitioned, so the timing at which the specific condition is satisfied has a large effect on subsequent games. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably exhibit the effects of the features bH1 to bH6.

Feature bH8. The specific condition is that the result of the special judgment is a predetermined judgment result (special deviant result) different from the specific result, or the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (deviant result) that does not correspond to transition to the special gaming state. ), the result of a specific determination (missing type determination, transition lottery, etc.) becomes a predetermined determination result (special losing result, transition lottery winning result, etc.) Features bH1 to The gaming machine according to any one of feature bH7.

In the above configuration, the result of the special determination becomes a predetermined determination result different from the specific result, or the result of the specific determination performed when the result of the special determination becomes a non-specific result becomes the predetermined determination result. Since the specific condition is met, it is possible to determine whether the result of the special determination is the specific result and to determine whether the specific condition is met in one game round. Therefore, in a situation where a specific gaming state is a permissible state, a player can play with both the challenge of winning a specific result and the challenge of increasing the remaining number of times in a specific gaming state. , it becomes possible to play under more advantageous conditions than if only the latter were the case. This makes it possible to suitably increase the player's desire to play in a specific gaming state.

Note that for each configuration of the features bH1 to bH8, features bA1 to bA12, bB1 to bB10, bC1 to bC9, bD1 to bD6, bE1 to bE10, bF1 to bF10 , features bG1 to features bG8, features bH1 to features bH8, features bI1 to features bI11, features bJ1 to features bJ10, features bK1 to features bK10, features bL1 to features bL9, features bM1 to features bM10, features bN1 to features bN7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in configuration (1) individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bI group>
The feature bI group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly applies to modification 6, modification 8, and modification 9 of the second embodiment. It is extracted based on

In addition, the invention described in feature bI group is, ``For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and based on the fact that the lottery result becomes a specific result, Regarding the background technology that states, ``There is a system that allows the player to enter a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)," There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature bI1. A special judgment means (special drawing correctness judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (special drawing correctness judgment) based on establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning in the first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63). function to perform judgment), and
A special game state transition means that is capable of shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the result of the special determination is a specific result (jackpot result); A function of executing a gaming state transition process in the main control device 162);
A game in which a game repetition operation is started based on the execution of the special determination, and a game round is controlled so that the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one game round. Time control means (function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, function of executing the special figure fluctuation display process in the production control device 143),
It is possible to update predetermined update information (number of losing games, internal point information, etc.) based on a predetermined update trigger (the result of a win/fail lottery, winning a point lottery, etc.) An updating means (a function for executing the process of step Sb5504 by the main controller 162 according to the sixth, eighth, and ninth modifications of the second embodiment, etc.);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
The specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (second time-saving gaming state) that can be transitioned to based on the update result of the updating means being a predetermined result (ceiling number of times, predetermined number of points, etc.); The result is a predetermined judgment result (special winning result) different from the specified result, or the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (missing result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state. A second specific gaming state (a third time-saving gaming state) that can be transferred based on the result of a specific determination (loss type determination, transition lottery, etc.) being a predetermined determination result (special losing result, transition lottery winning result, etc.) ) and has multiple types of specific gaming states, including
A first transition determination means that makes a first transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a first specific gaming state based on the update result of the update means (main part according to Modification 6 and Modification 9 of the second embodiment) (a function for the control device 162 to execute a process for determining transition to the third time-saving gaming state, a function for executing a process A for determining transition to the third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to modification 8, etc.);
A second transition determination means for making a second transition determination as to whether to transition to a second specific gaming state based on the result of the special determination or the specific determination (Modification 6 and Modification 9 of the second embodiment) (a function of executing a process for determining transition to the second time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modification 8, a function of executing a process A for determining transition to the second time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modification 8, etc.) ,
Equipped with
In one game round, after the first transition determination means has made the first transition determination, the second transition determination means can make the second transition determination. (The function of executing the process of step Sb5303 after executing the process of step Sb5302 in the sixth modification of the second embodiment, (a function of executing the process of step Sb6504, a function of executing the process of step Sb7203 after executing the process of step Sb7201 in modification 9, etc.).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which the game transitions based on the result of the special determination being a specific result, the specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. In addition, as such a specific gaming state, there is a first specific gaming state that transitions to based on the result of update information updated by a predetermined update trigger, and the result of the special determination is a predetermined determination result that is different from the specific result. Or, it has a second specific game state to which the state shifts based on the fact that the result of the specific determination made in the game round in which the result of the special determination is a non-specific result becomes a predetermined determination result. In such a gaming machine, the conditions for transition to the first specific gaming state and the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state may be satisfied in the same game round. In this regard, in the above configuration, the first transition determination is made as to whether or not to transition to the first specific gaming state, and then the second transition determination is made as to whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state. Based on the result of the determination, it can be determined whether or not to adopt the result of the second transition determination, making it possible to suitably control the gaming state.

Feature bI2. If the result of the first transition determination is a result corresponding to transition to a first specific gaming state, and the result of the second transition determination is a result corresponding to transition to a second specific gaming state, Means capable of restricting the transition to the second specific gaming state or restricting the execution of the second transition determination (main controller according to Modification 6 and Modification 8 of the second embodiment) 162, and a function of executing the process of step Sb7202 by the main control device 162 according to modification 9).

In the above configuration, if a transition to the first specific gaming state is determined in the first transition determination that is performed first, a transition to the second specific gaming state is determined in the second transition determination that is performed thereafter. However, it is invalidated or the execution of the second transition determination itself is restricted. Thereby, when the conditions for transition to the first specific gaming state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in the same game round, priority can be given to the transition to the first specific gaming state.

Feature bI3. The gaming machine according to feature bI2, wherein the predetermined update information is the number of times the special determination result is the non-specific result.

The first specific gaming state changes based on the updated result of the number of times the special judgment result becomes a non-specific result (cumulative number of missed gaming times). 1. It has the characteristic of being able to predict the transition to a specific gaming state. For this reason, if the update result is a predetermined result but the game is not shifted to the first specific gaming state, the player is likely to notice that the game has not shifted to the first specific gaming state. On the other hand, since the second specific gaming state is shifted based on the result of special determination or specific determination, the player cannot predict the transition to the second specific gaming state in advance. Based on these characteristics, if the conditions for transitioning to the first specific gaming state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in the same game round, the transition to the first specific gaming state is prioritized. , it becomes possible to adjust the specific gaming state of the transfer destination while suppressing the player's awareness.

Feature bI4. The gaming machine according to feature bI2 or feature bI3, wherein the first specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, by giving priority to the transition to the first specific gaming state when the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in the same game round, It becomes possible to shift to a specific gaming state on the advantageous side.

Feature bI5. If the result of the second transition determination is a result corresponding to transition to a second specific gaming state, and the result of the first transition determination is a result corresponding to transition to a first specific gaming state, The gaming machine according to feature bI1, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a means capable of causing the second specific gaming state to also be shifted to the second specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, if a transition to the second specific gaming state is determined in the second transition determination performed later, even if transition to the first specific gaming state is determined in the previous first transition determination. , the result is invalidated. Thereby, when the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in the same game round, it is possible to prioritize the transition to the second specific gaming state.

Feature bI6. The gaming machine according to feature bI5, wherein the second specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in the same game round, by giving priority to the transition to the second specific gaming state, It becomes possible to shift to a specific gaming state on the advantageous side.

Feature bI7. A first means for executing a predetermined first notification (ceiling reaching effect) when the update result of the updating means becomes a predetermined result or when transitioning to a first specific game state (ceiling reaching effect by the effect control device 143). function to execute the performance), and
A second means (production control device 143) for executing a predetermined second notification (special reach out production) when the result of the special judgment or the specific judgment becomes a predetermined judgment result or when transitioning to a second specific gaming state function to execute a special out-of-reach effect),
Equipped with
The first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation, during fluctuation display) before the execution timing of the first notification and the second notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features bI2 to bI6.

In the above configuration, the first notification is executed when the update result of the updating means becomes a predetermined result or when transitioning to the first specific gaming state, and when the result of the special judgment or specific judgment becomes the predetermined judgment result or Since the second notification is executed when transitioning to the second specific gaming state, it is possible to notify the player of the transition to the first specific gaming state or the transition to the second specific gaming state through these notifications. In this case, since the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timing of the first notification and the second notification, the conditions for transition to the first specific gaming state and the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state are When the above is established in the same game, each of the above notifications can be executed based on the adjustment result of the specific gaming state to be transferred. This makes it possible to suppress notifications that are inconsistent with the type of specific gaming state to be transitioned to.

Feature bI8. The game time control means controls the game time so that notification corresponding to the notification result is performed in a predetermined notification period (determined display time) after the game reuse operation is performed;
Specific gaming state transition means (second The embodiment is equipped with a function of executing processing for transitioning to a time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modifications 6, 8, and 9,
The specific game state transition means is configured to select any specific timing in the period from the end of the game play operation to the start of the next game time (the start timing of the final display in the special figure game game, the final display The gaming machine according to any one of features bI1 to bI7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute the transition at a timing in the middle of the display, a timing at which the confirmation display ends, etc.

When the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state, it is assumed that the player notices that the player is in the specific gaming state from the behavior of the gaming machine. For this reason, for example, if a transition to a specific gaming state is made at the start or in the middle of a game repeat operation in a gaming round, the transition to the specific gaming state will occur even before the special judgment result is announced. There is a concern that the player's interest will shift to the game, and the role of the game session will not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, in this configuration, since the transition to the specific gaming state is performed after the game repeat operation is completed, it is possible to alert the player to the transition to the specific gaming state after notifying the result of the special determination. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game round from being lost.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above feature bI3, "the conditions for transition to the first specific gaming state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific gaming state are such that the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (so-called an out-of-order result)." ), but in such a configuration, if the transition to a specific gaming state based on the establishment of each transition condition is performed at the start of a game cycle or in the middle of a game cycle operation, a special judgment will occur. Even before the results of the game are announced, there is a concern that the player may become unaware of the specific gaming state and grasp the result in advance, and the role of the gaming session will not be properly fulfilled. By applying this feature to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the possibility of knowing in advance the result of an error.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above feature bI7, "In a configuration in which the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timing of the first notification and the second notification, each of those transition determinations This is done at a relatively early stage in the game round.In this case, if the configuration is such that the transition to the specific gaming state is made immediately after each of these transition determinations is executed, the transition to the specific gaming state will be performed before the results of the special determination are announced. Despite this, there is a concern that the player's interest may shift to the transition to a specific gaming state, and the role of the gaming session may not be properly fulfilled. Even if each transition determination has been completed before, the transition to a specific gaming state based on the results of each transition determination is performed after waiting for the start of result notification.This allows the behavior of the gaming machine to change. Even if the player notices a specific gaming state from the start, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the gaming round until the results are announced, and then the interest shifts to the specific gaming state.Thus, the degree of attention to the gaming round is lost. It is possible to exhibit the effect of the above-mentioned feature bI7 while suppressing the occurrence of damage.

Feature bI9. The conditions for ending the specific gaming state include that the number of games played after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit;
Number updating means for updating the number of game times after transitioning to a specific gaming state or the remaining number of gaming times in a specific gaming state (according to Modification 6, Modification 8, and Modification 9 of the second embodiment) a function of executing the process of step Sb5504 by the main controller 162),
In one game round, after the update by the number of times updating means is performed, the first transition determination is performed by the first transition determination means, and then the second transition determination is performed by the second transition determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features bI1 to bI8, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to allow the game to be played.

According to the above configuration, in order to execute the first transition determination and the second transition determination after updating the number of games in the specific gaming state and the remaining number of gaming times in which the specific gaming state can be played, for example, the first transition determination When the second transition condition is satisfied in the final game round of the gaming state, it is possible to end the first specific gaming state in the final gaming round and then shift to the second specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to shift from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state without intervening the game times in the normal gaming state, and the state is equivalent to increasing the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state. becomes possible.

Feature bI10. It is configured to control the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (normal processing by the main controller 162, etc.) at a predetermined period,
The update by the number of times update means, the first transition determination by the first transition determination means, and the second transition determination by the second transition determination means are configured to be able to be executed in one processing time of the periodic processing. The gaming machine according to feature bI9.

In the above configuration, the progress of the game is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing, and the update of the number of times and each transition determination are performed in the same processing cycle, so the subsequent specific gaming state is When transitioning to the gaming state, it is possible to suitably suppress intervening gaming rounds in the normal gaming state.

Feature bI11. A special judgment means (special drawing correctness judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (special drawing correctness judgment) based on establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning in the first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63). function to perform judgment), and
A special game state transition means that is capable of shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the result of the special determination is a specific result (jackpot result); A function of executing a gaming state transition process in the main control device 162);
A game in which a game repetition operation is started based on the execution of the special determination, and a game round is controlled so that the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one game round. Time control means (function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, function of executing the special figure fluctuation display process in the production control device 143),
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
As a specific game state, a first transition condition that can be transitioned to based on the establishment of a predetermined first transition condition (reaching a ceiling number of times, reaching a predetermined number of points, etc., winning a special winning result, winning a transition lottery, etc.) A specific gaming state (second time-saving gaming state or third time-saving gaming state B) and a predetermined second transition condition (winning a special winning result, winning a transition lottery, etc., or reaching a ceiling number of times, reaching a predetermined number of points) A second specific gaming state (a third time-saving gaming state A or a second time-saving gaming state) that can be transitioned to based on the establishment of (such as the arrival of)
A first transition determination means that makes a first transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the first specific gaming state (the main controller 162 according to Modification 6 and Modification 9 of the second embodiment (a function of executing the transition determination process A of the third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to modification 8),
A second transition determination means for making a second transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state (the second time-saving gaming state is controlled by the main controller 162 according to Modification 6 and Modification 9 of the second embodiment) (a function of executing the transition determination process A of the second time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to modification 8),
Equipped with
In one game round, after the first transition determination means has made the first transition determination, the second transition determination means can make the second transition determination. (The function of executing the process of step Sb5303 after executing the process of step Sb5302 in the sixth modification of the second embodiment, (a function of executing the process of step Sb6504, a function of executing the process of step Sb7203 after executing the process of step Sb7201 in modification 9, etc.).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which the game transitions based on the result of the special determination being a specific result, the specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. In addition, such specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state that transitions when the first transition condition is satisfied, and a second specific gaming state that transitions when the second transition condition is satisfied. In this way, in a gaming machine that is provided with a plurality of specific gaming states that transition based on different transition conditions, each of these transition conditions may be satisfied in the same game round. In this regard, in the above configuration, the first transition determination is made as to whether or not to transition to the first specific gaming state, and then the second transition determination is made as to whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state. Based on the result of the determination, it can be determined whether or not to adopt the result of the second transition determination, making it possible to suitably control the gaming state.

It is possible to apply the configurations of features bI2 to bI10 described above to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying these configurations.

Note that for each configuration of the features bI1 to bI11, features bA1 to bA12, bB1 to bB10, bC1 to bC9, bD1 to bD6, bE1 to bE10, bF1 to bF10. , features bG1 to features bG8, features bH1 to features bH8, features bI1 to features bI11, features bJ1 to features bJ10, features bK1 to features bK10, features bL1 to features bL9, features bM1 to features bM10, features bN1 to features bN7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in configuration (1) individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bJ group>
The feature bJ group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and mainly applies to modification 7, modification 8, and modification 10 of the second embodiment. It is extracted based on

The invention described in feature bJ group is, ``For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and based on the fact that the lottery result becomes a specific result, Regarding the background technology that states, ``There is a system that allows the player to enter a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)," There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature bJ1. A special judgment means (special drawing correctness judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (special drawing correctness judgment) based on establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning in the first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63). function to perform judgment), and
A special game state transition means that is capable of shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the result of the special determination is a specific result (jackpot result); A function of executing a gaming state transition process in the main control device 162);
A game in which a game repetition operation is started based on the execution of the special determination, and a game round is controlled so that the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one game round. Time control means (function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, function of executing the special figure fluctuation display process in the production control device 143),
An update that allows predetermined update information (number of losing games, number of points, etc.) to be updated based on a predetermined update trigger (the result of a winning lottery becomes a losing result, winning a point lottery, etc.) Means (Function to execute the process of step Sb5504 by the main controller 162 according to the seventh and eighth modifications of the second embodiment, function to execute the process of step Sb7604 by the main controller 162 according to the tenth modification) etc.) and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
The specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (second time-saving gaming state) that can be transitioned to based on the update result of the updating means being a predetermined result (ceiling number of times, predetermined number of points, etc.); The result is a predetermined judgment result (special winning result) different from the specified result, or the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (missing result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state. A second specific gaming state (third time-saving gaming state) that can be transitioned to based on the result of a specific determination (loss type determination, transition lottery, etc.) being a predetermined determination result (special losing result, winning the transition lottery, etc.) It has multiple types of specific gaming states, including
A first transition determination means that makes a first transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a first specific gaming state based on the update result of the update means (main part according to Modification 7 and Modification 10 of the second embodiment) (a function of executing a process for determining transition to the second time-saving gaming state by the control device 162, a function of executing a process B for determining transition to the second time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to modification 8, etc.),
A second transition determination means (Modification 7 and Modification 10 of the second embodiment) that performs a second transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a second specific gaming state based on the result of the special determination or the specific determination. (a function of executing processing for determining transition to the third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modification 8, a function of executing processing B for determining transition of the third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modification 8, etc.) ,
Equipped with
In one game round, after the second transition determination by the second transition determination means is executed, the first transition determination by the first transition determination means is configured to be executed. (The function of executing the process of step Sb6102 after executing the process of step Sb6101 in the seventh modification of the second embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step Sb6505 after executing the process of step Sb6505 in the case of an affirmative determination in step Sb6502 in the eighth modification) (a function of executing the process of step Sb6506, a function of executing the process of step Sb7502 after executing the process of step Sb7501 in modification 10, etc.).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which the game transitions based on the result of the special determination being a specific result, the specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. In addition, as such a specific gaming state, there is a first specific gaming state that transitions to based on the result of update information updated by a predetermined update trigger, and the result of the special determination is a predetermined determination result that is different from the specific result. Or, it has a second specific game state to which the state shifts based on the fact that the result of the specific determination made in the game round in which the result of the special determination is a non-specific result becomes a predetermined determination result. In such a gaming machine, the conditions for transition to the first specific gaming state and the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state may be satisfied in the same game round. In this regard, in the above configuration, the second transition determination is made as to whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state, and then the first transition determination is made as to whether or not to transition to the first specific gaming state. Based on the result of the determination, it can be determined whether or not to adopt the result of the first transition determination, making it possible to suitably control the gaming state.

Feature bJ2. If the result of the second transition determination is a result corresponding to transition to a second specific gaming state, and the result of the first transition determination is a result corresponding to transition to a first specific gaming state, (step Sb6601 by the main controller 162 according to Modification 8 of the second embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature bJ1, further comprising a function of executing the process of step Sb7601 by the main control device 162 according to modification 10.

In the above configuration, if a transition to the second specific gaming state is determined in the second transition determination that is performed first, a transition to the first specific gaming state is determined in the first transition determination that is performed thereafter. However, it is invalidated or the execution of the first transition determination itself is restricted. Thereby, when the conditions for transition to the first specific gaming state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific gaming state can be satisfied in the same game, priority can be given to transitioning to the second specific gaming state.

Feature bJ3. Means capable of restricting the updating by the updating means (main controller 162 according to modification 10) when the result of the second transition determination is a result corresponding to transition to the second specific gaming state The gaming machine according to feature bJ2, further comprising a function of executing the process of step Sb7601.

For example, based on the fact that both the conditions for transition to the first specific gaming state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in the same game, the transition to the first specific gaming state is invalidated and the transition to the second specific gaming state is disabled. If the configuration is such that the game is shifted to a specific gaming state, there is a concern that the player will not be able to enjoy the benefits of the first specific gaming state. In this regard, in the above configuration, when a transition to the second specific gaming state is determined in the second transition determination, execution of the update by the updating means is restricted. This restricts the update result of the updating means from becoming the predetermined result in a game round in which the condition for transition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, and by extension, the condition for transition to the first specific gaming state and the second It is avoided that the condition for transition to a specific gaming state is satisfied in the same game round. Therefore, it becomes possible to prioritize the transition to the second specific gaming state while suppressing the player from not being able to enjoy the benefits of the first specific gaming state.

Feature bJ4. A means capable of restricting the updating by the updating means when in a second specific gaming state (a function of executing the processing of step Sb7602 and step Sb7603 by the main control device 162 according to modification 10). The gaming machine according to feature bJ3.

In the above configuration, when the update by the update means is restricted based on the determination of transition to the second specific gaming state in the second transition determination, the restriction remains even after transition to the second specific gaming state. Continued. Thereby, the updating by the updating means can be restarted after the second specific gaming state ends, and it can be suppressed that the transition condition for the first specific gaming state is satisfied in the middle of the second specific gaming state.

Feature bJ5. The gaming machine according to any one of features bJ2 to bJ4, characterized in that the second specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in the same game round, by giving priority to the transition to the second specific gaming state, It becomes possible to shift to a specific gaming state on the advantageous side.

Feature bJ6. If the result of the first transition determination is a result corresponding to transition to a first specific gaming state, and the result of the second transition determination is a result corresponding to transition to a second specific gaming state, described in feature bJ1, which is characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing the processing of steps Sb6303 and Sb6304 by the main control device 162 according to modification 7) that allows the game to enter the first specific gaming state. gaming machines.

In the above configuration, if a transition to the first specific gaming state is determined in the first transition determination performed later, even if transition to the second specific gaming state is determined in the previous second transition determination. , the result is invalidated. As a result, when the conditions for transition to the first specific gaming state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific gaming state can be satisfied in the same game, priority can be given to the transition to the first specific gaming state.

Feature bJ7. The gaming machine according to feature bJ6, wherein the predetermined update information is the number of times the special determination result is the non-specific result.

The first specific gaming state changes based on the updated result of the number of times the special judgment result becomes a non-specific result (cumulative number of missed gaming times). 1. It has the characteristic of being able to predict the transition to a specific gaming state. For this reason, if the update result is a predetermined result but the game is not shifted to the first specific gaming state, the player is likely to notice that the game has not shifted to the first specific gaming state. On the other hand, since the second specific gaming state is shifted based on the result of special determination or specific determination, the player cannot predict the transition to the second specific gaming state in advance. Based on these characteristics, if the conditions for transitioning to the first specific gaming state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in the same game round, the transition to the first specific gaming state is prioritized. , it becomes possible to adjust the specific gaming state of the transfer destination while suppressing the player's awareness.

Feature bJ8. A first means for executing a predetermined first notification (ceiling reaching effect) when the update result of the updating means becomes a predetermined result or when transitioning to a first specific game state (ceiling reaching effect by the effect control device 143). function to execute the performance), and
A second means (production control device 143) for executing a predetermined second notification (special reach out production) when the result of the special judgment or the specific judgment becomes a predetermined judgment result or when transitioning to a second specific gaming state function to execute a special out-of-reach effect),
Equipped with
The first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation, during fluctuation display) before the execution timing of the first notification and the second notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features bJ2 to bJ7.

In the above configuration, the first notification is executed when the update result of the updating means becomes a predetermined result or when transitioning to the first specific gaming state, and when the result of the special judgment or specific judgment becomes the predetermined judgment result or Since the second notification is executed when transitioning to the second specific gaming state, it is possible to notify the player of the transition to the first specific gaming state or the transition to the second specific gaming state through these notifications. In this case, since the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timing of the first notification and the second notification, the conditions for transition to the first specific gaming state and the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state are When the above can be realized in the same game, each of the above-mentioned notifications can be executed based on the adjustment result of the specific gaming state to be transitioned to. This makes it possible to suppress notifications that are inconsistent with the type of specific gaming state to be transitioned to.

Feature bJ9. The conditions for ending the specific gaming state include that the number of games played after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit,
Number updating means for updating the number of game times after transitioning to a specific gaming state or the remaining number of gaming times in a specific gaming state (according to Modification Example 7, Modification Example 8, and Modification Example 10 of the second embodiment) a function of executing the process of step Sb5504 by the main controller 162),
In one game round, after the update by the number of times updating means is performed, the first transition determination is performed by the first transition determination means, and then the second transition determination is performed by the second transition determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features bJ1 to bJ8, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to allow the game to be played.

According to the above configuration, in order to execute the first transition determination and the second transition determination after updating the number of games in the specific gaming state and the remaining number of gaming times in which the specific gaming state can be played, for example, the first transition determination When the second transition condition is satisfied in the final game round of the gaming state, it is possible to end the first specific gaming state in the final gaming round and then shift to the second specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to shift from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state without intervening the game times in the normal gaming state, and the state is equivalent to increasing the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state. becomes possible.

Feature bJ10. It is configured to control the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (normal processing by the main control device 162, etc.) at a predetermined period,
The update by the number of times update means, the first transition determination by the first transition determination means, and the second transition determination by the second transition determination means are configured to be able to be executed in the same processing time of the periodic process. The gaming machine according to feature bJ9.

In the above configuration, the progress of the game is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing, and the update of the number of times and each transition determination are performed in the same processing cycle, so the subsequent specific gaming state is When transitioning to the gaming state, it is possible to suitably suppress intervening gaming rounds in the normal gaming state.

Note that for each configuration of the features bJ1 to bJ10, features bA1 to bA12, bB1 to bB10, bC1 to bC9, bD1 to bD6, bE1 to bE10, bF1 to bF10 , features bG1 to features bG8, features bH1 to features bH8, features bI1 to features bI11, features bJ1 to features bJ10, features bK1 to features bK10, features bL1 to features bL9, features bM1 to features bM10, features bN1 to features bN7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in configuration (1) individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bK group>
The feature bK group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on modification 6 and modification 8 of the second embodiment. It is something that

The invention described in feature bK group is, ``For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and the lottery result is a specific result. Regarding the background technology that states, ``There is a system that allows the player to enter a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)," There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature bK1. A special judgment means (special drawing correctness judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (special drawing correctness judgment) based on establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning in the first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63). function to perform judgment), and
A special game state transition means that is capable of shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the result of the special determination is a specific result (jackpot result); A function of executing gaming state transition processing in the main control device 162);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
As a specific game state, a first transition condition that can be transitioned to based on the establishment of a predetermined first transition condition (reaching a ceiling number of times, reaching a predetermined number of points, etc., winning a special winning result, winning a transition lottery, etc.) A specific gaming state (second time-saving gaming state or third time-saving gaming state B) and a predetermined second transition condition that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state and different from the first transition condition ( A second specific gaming state (third time-saving gaming state A or third time-saving gaming state A or a It has multiple types of specific gaming states including:
If the second transition condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state, it is possible to restrict the transition to the second specific gaming state (affirmative determination in step Sb5603, negative determination in step Sb5604). A gaming machine characterized by: (a flow when making a determination, etc.).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which the game transitions based on the result of the special determination being a specific result, the specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. Further, as such specific gaming states, there is a first specific gaming state to which the first transition condition is satisfied, and a second specific gaming state which is more disadvantageous than the first specific gaming state and which is to be transitioned to by the establishment of the second transition condition. 2 specific gaming states. In such a case, if the second transition condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state, the transition to the second specific gaming state is restricted, so it is possible to prevent the player from being treated disadvantageously. , it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

Feature bK2. A game in which a game repetition operation is started based on the execution of the special determination, and a game round is controlled so that the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one game round. Time control means (function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, function of executing the special figure fluctuation display process in the production control device 143),
A first transition determination means (Step Sb5302, Step Sb6503 by the main controller 162 according to Modification 6 and Modification 8 of the second embodiment) that performs a first transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the first specific gaming state. The function of executing the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state, or the process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state of step Sb6505 by the main control device 162 according to Modification 8 of the second embodiment. function) and
A second transition determination means (Step Sb5303, Step Sb6504 by the main controller 162 according to Modification 6 and Modification 8 of the second embodiment) that performs a second transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state. The function of executing the process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state, or the main control device 162 according to Modification 8 of the second embodiment executes the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state of step Sb6506. functions, etc.) and
Equipped with
In one game round, after the first transition determination means has made the first transition determination, the second transition determination means can make the second transition determination. (The function of executing the process of step Sb5303 after executing the process of step Sb5302 in the sixth modification of the second embodiment, The gaming machine according to feature bK1, characterized by a function of executing the process of step Sb6504, a function of executing the process of step Sb6506 after executing the process of step Sb6505 when an affirmative determination is made in step Sb6502, etc.

In a gaming machine that is provided with a plurality of specific gaming states that transition to based on different transition conditions, each of these transition conditions may be satisfied in the same game round. In view of such a situation, this feature restricts the transition to the second specific gaming state when the second transition condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state, and then After making a first transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a state, a second transition determination is made as to whether or not to transition to a second specific gaming state. According to such a configuration, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game round, after it is determined to transition to the first specific gaming state by the first transition determination, the first transition condition is Even if it is determined in the second transition determination that the second transition condition is met, the above restriction prevents transition to the second specific gaming state. Thereby, the transition to the first specific gaming state on the advantageous side is implemented, and it becomes possible to control the gaming state appropriately.

Feature bK3. A predetermined notification execution means (performance control) capable of executing a predetermined notification (ceiling reaching performance, special reaching out performance) corresponding to the establishment of the first transition condition or transition to the first specific gaming state in a game round. (a function of executing a game replay effect by the device 143),
The first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation, during fluctuation display) before the execution timing of the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification execution means. The gaming machine according to feature bK2.

In the above configuration, it becomes possible to notify the player of the establishment of the first transition condition or the transition to the first specific gaming state by carrying out a predetermined notification in each gaming session. In this case, since the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timing of the above-mentioned predetermined notification, each of the transition Based on the result of the determination, it can be determined whether or not to perform the predetermined notification. That is, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game round and the transition to the first specific gaming state is implemented, the above-mentioned predetermined notification can be suitably implemented. Become.

Feature bK4. A specific notification execution means (performance control) capable of executing a specific notification (special out-of-reach performance, ceiling reaching performance) corresponding to the establishment of the second transition condition or transition to the second specific gaming state in a game round. The device 143 has a function of executing a game replay based on the fluctuation pattern from the main control device 162,
The first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation, during fluctuation display) before the execution timing of the specific notification by the specific notification execution means. The gaming machine according to feature bK2 or feature bK3.

In the above-mentioned configuration, it becomes possible to notify the player of the establishment of the second transition condition or the transition to the second specific gaming state by carrying out the specific notification in the game round. In this case, since the configuration is such that the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timing of the above-mentioned specific notification, each of the transition Based on the result of the determination, it can be determined whether or not to perform specific notification. As a result, even if the second transition condition is met, if the first transition condition is also met at the same time and the transition to the second specific gaming state is restricted, implementation of the specific notification can be canceled. can. Therefore, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game, it is possible to suppress notifications that are inconsistent with the type of specific gaming state to be transitioned to.

Feature bK5. The gaming machine according to any one of features bK2 to bK4, wherein the first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be executed when a game round is started.

In the above configuration, since the first transition determination and the second transition determination are executed at the start of the game round, the notification corresponding to the establishment of the first transition condition and the notification corresponding to the establishment of the second transition condition are made in the game round. In this case, it becomes possible to control whether or not to implement each of these notifications based on the results of each of the above transition determinations. Thereby, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game round, it is possible to suppress notification that is inconsistent with the type of specific gaming state to be transitioned to. It is also effective when notifying the establishment of the first transition condition or the second transition condition based on the result of a game round.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above feature bK3 and feature bK4, "not only when the above-mentioned predetermined notification and specific notification are executed in the middle of a game round, but also when each of these notifications is executed at the beginning of a game round. In addition, in a gaming machine configured to set the game replay effect to be executed in a game round at the start of the game round, the game replay effect to be executed in the game round can be suitably handled. Even when the above-mentioned predetermined notification or specific notification is incorporated, it is possible to respond flexibly.''

Feature bK6. The game time control means controls the game time so that notification corresponding to the notification result is performed in a predetermined notification period (determined display time) after the game reuse operation is performed;
Specific gaming state transition means (second The embodiment is equipped with a function of executing processing for transitioning to a time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modifications 6 and 8,
The specific game state transition means is configured to select any specific timing in the period from the end of the game play operation to the start of the next game time (the start timing of the final display in the special figure game game, the final display The gaming machine according to any one of features bK2 to bK5, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute the transition at a timing in the middle of the display, a timing at which the confirmation display ends, etc.

When the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state, it is assumed that the player notices the specific gaming state from the behavior of the gaming machine. For this reason, for example, if a transition to a specific gaming state is made at the start or in the middle of a game repeat operation in a gaming round, the transition to the specific gaming state will occur even before the special judgment result is announced. There is a concern that the player's interest will shift to the game, and the role of the game session will not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, in this configuration, since the transition to the specific gaming state is performed after the game repeat operation is completed, it is possible to alert the player to the transition to the specific gaming state after notifying the result of the special determination. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game round from being lost.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above-mentioned feature bK3 and feature bK4, "In a configuration in which the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timing of the above-mentioned predetermined notification or specific notification, each of those transition determinations may be performed at a relatively early stage in a game round.For example, in a configuration where the settings for executing a predetermined notification are made at the start of a game round, each of the above transition determinations also needs to be performed at the start of a game round. In such a case, if the configuration is such that the transition to the specific gaming state is made immediately upon executing each of these transition determinations, the specific gaming state may be changed even before the results of the special determination are announced. There is a concern that the player's interest will shift to the transition to the game, and the role of the game round will not be properly fulfilled.In this regard, in this configuration, each transition determination is completed before the special determination result is announced. Even so, the transition to a specific gaming state based on the results of each transition determination is performed after waiting for the start of result notification.This allows the player to notice the specific gaming state from the behavior of the gaming machine. Even if there is a problem, the structure can be configured such that the attention is focused on the gaming session until the result is announced, and then the interest shifts to the specific gaming state.Thus, while suppressing the loss of attention to the gaming session, the above-mentioned features can be configured. It becomes possible to exhibit the above-mentioned effects of bK3 or feature bK4.''

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above feature bK5, "Once the first transition determination and the second transition determination are completed, all that is left is to transition to the specific gaming state, so the first transition determination In a configuration in which the second transition determination is performed at the start of a game round, it is natural to perform the transition to a specific gaming state at the start of a gaming round. However, the transition to a specific gaming state is performed at the start of a gaming round. There is a concern that the player's attention may shift to the transition to the specific gaming state even before the result of the special judgment is announced, and the role of the gaming round may not be properly fulfilled. In this configuration, even if each of the above transition determinations is made at the start of a game round, the transition to a specific gaming state based on the results of each transition determination is performed after waiting for the start of result notification. As a result, even if the player notices a specific gaming state from the behavior of the gaming machine, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the gaming round until the result is announced, and then the player's interest shifts to the specific gaming state. , it is possible to exhibit the above-mentioned effect of the above-mentioned feature bK5 while suppressing loss of attention to the game round.

Feature bK7. The first transition condition and the second transition condition can be satisfied in a game round in which the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (missing result) that does not correspond to transition to a special gaming state. The gaming machine described in feature bK6.

In the above configuration, the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the game round in which the special determination result is a non-specific result (so-called losing result); however, in such a configuration, each of the transition conditions is satisfied. If the transition to a specific gaming state based on There is a concern that the outcome of the game may be known in advance and the role of the game session will not be properly fulfilled. By applying the feature bK6 to such a configuration, it is possible to exert the effects of the features bK2 to bK5 while suppressing the possibility of knowing the deviation result in advance.

Feature bK8. The conditions for ending the specific gaming state include that the number of games played after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit,
A number updating means (a function of executing the process of step Sb5301 in the main control device 162) for updating the number of gaming times after transitioning to a specific gaming state or the remaining number of gaming times in the specific gaming state,
In one game round, after the update by the number of times updating means is performed, the first transition determination is performed by the first transition determination means, and then the second transition determination is performed by the second transition determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features bK2 to bK7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to allow the game to be played.

According to the above configuration, since the first transition determination and the second transition determination are executed after updating the remaining number of game times in which the specific game state can be played, for example, in the final game time of the first specific game state. When the second transition condition is satisfied, the first specific gaming state can be ended in the final game round, and then the second specific gaming state can be entered. As a result, it is possible to shift from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state without intervening the gaming times in the normal gaming state, and the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state is essentially added. becomes possible.

Features bK9. It is configured to control the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (normal processing by the main controller 162, etc.) at a predetermined period,
The update by the number of times update means, the first transition determination by the first transition determination means, and the second transition determination by the second transition determination means are configured to be able to be executed in one processing time of the periodic processing. The gaming machine according to feature bK8.

In the above configuration, the progress of the game is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing, and the update of the number of times and each transition determination are performed in the same processing cycle, so the subsequent specific gaming state is When transitioning to the gaming state, it is possible to suitably suppress intervening gaming rounds in the normal gaming state.

Feature bK10. The conditions for ending the specific gaming state include that the number of games played after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit,
The gaming machine according to any one of features bK1 to bK9, wherein the upper limit number of times of the first specific gaming state is greater than the upper limit number of times of the second specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the upper limit number of times (remaining number of times) of the first specific gaming state is greater than the upper limit number of times of the second specific gaming state, and the first specific gaming state is more convenient for the player than the second specific gaming state. It is advantageous. By applying any one of the features bK1 to bK9 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Note that for each configuration of the features bK1 to bK10, features bA1 to bA12, bB1 to bB10, bC1 to bC9, bD1 to bD6, bE1 to bE10, bF1 to bF10 , features bG1 to features bG8, features bH1 to features bH8, features bI1 to features bI11, features bJ1 to features bJ10, features bK1 to features bK10, features bL1 to features bL9, features bM1 to features bM10, features bN1 to features bN7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in configuration (1) individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bL group>
The feature bL group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on modification 7 of the second embodiment. .

The invention described in feature bL group is, ``For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and the lottery result is a specific result. Regarding the background technology that states, ``There is a system that allows the player to enter a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)," There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature bL1. A special judgment means (special drawing correctness judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (special drawing correctness judgment) based on establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning in the first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63). function to perform judgment), and
A special game state transition means that is capable of shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the result of the special determination is a specific result (jackpot result); A function of executing gaming state transition processing in the main control device 162);
A game in which a game repetition operation is started based on the execution of the special determination, and a game round is controlled so that the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one game round. Time control means (function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, function of executing the special figure fluctuation display process in the production control device 143),
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
The specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state (second time-saving gaming state) that can be transitioned to based on the establishment of a predetermined first transition condition (reaching a ceiling number of times, reaching a predetermined number of points, etc.); A transition is possible based on the establishment of a predetermined second transition condition (winning a special winning result, winning a transition lottery, etc.) that is more disadvantageous to the player than a specific gaming state and is different from the first transition condition. It has multiple types of specific gaming states including a second specific gaming state (third time-saving gaming state),
A first transition determination means (such as a function for executing a process for determining transition to the second time-saving gaming state by the main controller 162) that performs a first transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the first specific gaming state;
A second transition determination means (such as a function for executing a process for determining transition to the third time-saving gaming state by the main controller 162) that performs a second transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state;
Equipped with
If the first transition condition is satisfied in the second specific gaming state, it is possible to allow the transition to the first specific gaming state (flow when an affirmative determination is made in step Sb6301),
In one game round, after the second transition determination means has made the second transition determination, the first transition determination means can make the first transition determination. (a function of executing the process of step Sb6102 after executing the process of step Sb6101 in the main control device 162 according to modification 7 of the second embodiment, etc.).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which the game transitions based on the result of the special determination being a specific result, the specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. Further, as such specific gaming states, there is a first specific gaming state to which the first transition condition is satisfied, and a second specific gaming state which is more disadvantageous than the first specific gaming state and which is to be transitioned to by the establishment of the second transition condition. 2 specific gaming states. In this way, in a gaming machine that is provided with a plurality of specific gaming states that transition based on different transition conditions, each of these transition conditions may be satisfied in the same game round.

In view of such a situation, in the above configuration, if the first transition condition is satisfied in the second specific gaming state, the transition to the first specific gaming state is allowed, and the second specific gaming state is After making a second transition determination as to whether to transition to the state, a first transition determination as to whether to transition to the first specific gaming state is performed. According to such a configuration, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game round, even if it is determined to transition to the second specific gaming state by the second transition determination, the subsequent By determining that the first transition determination is to make the transition to the first specific gaming state, the result of the previous second transition determination can be canceled. Thereby, the transition to the first specific gaming state on the advantageous side is implemented, and it becomes possible to control the gaming state appropriately.

Feature bL2. A predetermined notification execution means (performance control) capable of executing a predetermined notification (ceiling reaching performance, special reaching out performance) corresponding to the establishment of the first transition condition or transition to the first specific gaming state in a game round. (a function of executing a game replay effect by the device 143),
The first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation, during fluctuation display) before the execution timing of the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification execution means. The gaming machine according to feature bL1.

In the above configuration, it becomes possible to notify the player of the establishment of the first transition condition or the transition to the first specific gaming state by carrying out a predetermined notification in each gaming session. In this case, since the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timing of the above-mentioned predetermined notification, each of the transition Based on the result of the determination, it can be determined whether or not to perform the predetermined notification. That is, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game round and the transition to the first specific gaming state is implemented, the above-mentioned predetermined notification can be suitably implemented. Become.

Feature bL3. A specific notification execution means (performance control) capable of executing a specific notification (special out-of-reach performance, ceiling reaching performance) corresponding to the establishment of the second transition condition or transition to the second specific gaming state in a game round. The device 143 has a function of executing a game replay based on the fluctuation pattern from the main control device 162,
The first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation, during fluctuation display) before the execution timing of the specific notification by the specific notification execution means. The gaming machine according to feature bL1 or feature bL2.

In the above-mentioned configuration, it becomes possible to notify the player of the establishment of the second transition condition or the transition to the second specific gaming state by carrying out the specific notification in the game round. In this case, since the configuration is such that the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timing of the above-mentioned specific notification, each of the transition Based on the result of the determination, it can be determined whether or not to perform specific notification. As a result, even if the second transition condition is met, if the first transition condition is also met at the same time and the transition to the second specific gaming state is restricted, implementation of the specific notification can be canceled. can. Therefore, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game, it is possible to suppress notifications that are inconsistent with the type of specific gaming state to be transitioned to.

Feature bL4. The gaming machine according to any one of features bL1 to bL3, wherein the first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be executed when a game round is started.

In the above configuration, since the first transition determination and the second transition determination are executed at the start of the game round, the notification corresponding to the establishment of the first transition condition and the notification corresponding to the establishment of the second transition condition are made in the game round. In this case, it becomes possible to control whether or not to implement each of these notifications based on the results of each of the above transition determinations. Thereby, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game round, it is possible to suppress notification that is inconsistent with the type of specific gaming state to be transitioned to. It is also effective when notifying the establishment of the first transition condition or the second transition condition based on the result of a game round.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above feature bL2 and feature bL3, "not only when the above prescribed notification and specific notification are executed in the middle of the game round, but also when each of these notifications is executed at the beginning of the game round. In addition, in a gaming machine configured to set the game replay effect to be executed in a game round at the start of the game round, the game replay effect to be executed in the game round can be suitably handled. Even when the above-mentioned predetermined notification or specific notification is incorporated, it is possible to respond flexibly.''

Feature bL5. The game time control means controls the game time so that notification corresponding to the notification result is performed in a predetermined notification period (determined display time) after the game reuse operation is performed;
Specific gaming state transition means (second The embodiment is equipped with a function of executing processing for transitioning to a time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to modification 7,
The specific game state transition means is configured to select any specific timing in the period from the end of the game cycle operation to the start of the next game cycle (the start timing of the final display in the special figure game cycle, the final display The gaming machine according to any one of features bL1 to bL4, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute the transition at a timing in the middle of the display, a timing at which the confirmation display ends, etc.

When the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state, it is assumed that the player notices the specific gaming state from the behavior of the gaming machine. For this reason, for example, if a transition to a specific gaming state is made at the start or in the middle of a game repeat operation in a gaming round, the transition to the specific gaming state will occur even before the special judgment result is announced. There is a concern that the player's interest will shift to the game, and the role of the game session will not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, in this configuration, since the transition to the specific gaming state is performed after the game repeat operation is completed, it is possible to alert the player to the transition to the specific gaming state after notifying the result of the special determination. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game round from being lost.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above-mentioned feature bL2 and feature bL3, "In a configuration in which the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timing of the above-mentioned predetermined notification or specific notification, each of those transition determinations will be performed at a relatively early stage in the game round.In this case, if the configuration is such that the transition to the specific gaming state is performed immediately after each of these transition determinations is executed, the transition to the specific gaming state will be performed before the result of the special determination is announced. Despite this, there is a concern that the player's interest may shift to the transition to a specific gaming state, and the role of the gaming session may not be properly fulfilled. Even if each transition determination has been completed before the transition, the transition to a specific gaming state based on the results of each transition determination is performed after waiting for the start of result notification.This allows the gaming machine to Even if the player notices a specific gaming state based on the player's behavior, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the gaming session until the result is announced, and then the interest shifts to the specific gaming situation.Thus, the degree of attention to the gaming session can be reduced. It is possible to exhibit the above-mentioned effects of the feature bL2 or feature bL3 while suppressing the damage."

In addition, when this feature is applied to the feature bL4 above, "Once the first transition determination and the second transition determination are completed, all that is left is to transition to the specific gaming state, so the first transition determination In a configuration in which the second transition determination is performed at the start of a game round, it is natural to perform the transition to a specific gaming state at the start of a gaming round. However, the transition to a specific gaming state is performed at the start of a gaming round. There is a concern that the player's attention may shift to the transition to the specific gaming state even before the result of the special judgment is announced, and the role of the gaming round may not be properly fulfilled. In this configuration, even if each of the above transition determinations is made at the start of a game round, the transition to a specific gaming state based on the results of each transition determination is performed after waiting for the start of result notification. As a result, even if the player notices a specific gaming state from the behavior of the gaming machine, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the gaming round until the result is announced, and then the player's interest shifts to the specific gaming state.Thus, It is possible to exhibit the above-mentioned effects of the feature bL4 while suppressing the loss of attention to the game round.

Feature bL6. The first transition condition and the second transition condition can be satisfied in a game round in which the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (missing result) that does not correspond to transition to a special gaming state. The gaming machine described in characteristic feature bL5.

In the above configuration, the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the game round in which the special determination result is a non-specific result (so-called losing result); however, in such a configuration, each of the transition conditions is satisfied. If the transition to a specific gaming state based on There is a concern that the outcome of the game may be known in advance and the role of the game session will not be properly fulfilled. By applying the feature bL5 to such a configuration, it is possible to exhibit the effects of the features bL1 to bL4 while suppressing the possibility of knowing the deviation result in advance.

Feature bL7. The conditions for ending the specific gaming state include that the number of games played after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit,
A number updating means (a function of executing the process of step Sb5301 in the main control device 162) for updating the number of gaming times after transitioning to a specific gaming state or the remaining number of gaming times in the specific gaming state,
In one game round, after the update by the number of times updating means is performed, the second transition determination is performed by the second transition determination means, and then the first transition determination is performed by the first transition determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features bL1 to bL6, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to allow the game to be played.

According to the above configuration, in order to execute the first transition determination and the second transition determination after updating the number of games in the specific gaming state and the remaining number of gaming times in which the specific gaming state can be played, for example, the first transition determination When the second transition condition is satisfied in the final game round of the gaming state, it is possible to end the first specific gaming state in the final gaming round and then shift to the second specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to shift from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state without intervening the game times in the normal gaming state, and the state is equivalent to increasing the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state. becomes possible.

Feature bL8. It is configured to control the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (normal processing by the main controller 162, etc.) at a predetermined period,
The update by the number of times update means, the first transition determination by the first transition determination means, and the second transition determination by the second transition determination means are configured to be able to be executed in one processing time of the periodic processing. The gaming machine according to feature bL7.

In the above configuration, the progress of the game is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing, and the update of the number of times and each transition determination are performed in the same processing cycle, so the subsequent specific gaming state is When transitioning to the gaming state, it is possible to suitably suppress intervening gaming rounds in the normal gaming state.

Feature bL9. The conditions for ending the specific gaming state include that the number of games played after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit;
The gaming machine according to any one of features bL1 to bL8, wherein the upper limit number of times of the first specific gaming state is greater than the upper limit number of times of the second specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the upper limit number of times (remaining number of times) of the first specific gaming state is greater than the upper limit number of times of the second specific gaming state, and the first specific gaming state is more convenient for the player than the second specific gaming state. It is advantageous. By applying any one of the features bL1 to bL8 to such a structure, each of the features can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

Note that for each configuration of the features bL1 to bL9, features bA1 to bA12, bB1 to bB10, bC1 to bC9, bD1 to bD6, bE1 to bE10, bF1 to bF10 , features bG1 to features bG8, features bH1 to features bH8, features bI1 to features bI11, features bJ1 to features bJ10, features bK1 to features bK10, features bL1 to features bL9, features bM1 to features bM10, features bN1 to features bN7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in configuration (1) individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bM group>
The feature bM group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on modification 10 of the second embodiment. .

In addition, the invention described in feature bM group is, ``For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and based on the fact that the lottery result becomes a specific result, Regarding the background technology that states, ``There is a system that allows the player to enter a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)," There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature bM1. A special judgment means (special drawing correctness judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (special drawing correctness judgment) based on establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning in the first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63). function to perform judgment), and
A special game state transition means that is capable of shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the result of the special determination is a specific result (jackpot result); A function of executing a gaming state transition process in the main control device 162);
Equipped with
The game states include a first game state (second time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and different from the special game state, and a second game state (third time-saving game state, first time-saving game state). game state),
An update that allows predetermined update information (number of losing games, number of points, etc.) to be updated based on a predetermined update trigger (the result of a winning lottery becomes a losing result, winning a point lottery, etc.) means (a function for executing the process of step Sb7604 by the main controller 162 according to Modification 10 of the second embodiment, etc.);
Transition means (transition to a second time-saving gaming state by the main controller 162) that allows the transition to the first gaming state based on the update result of the updating means becoming a predetermined result (ceiling number of times, predetermined number of points, etc.) functions for executing judgment processing, time-saving gaming state transition processing, etc.);
Update restriction means capable of restricting the update by the update means when in the second gaming state (the main control device 162 according to the tenth modification of the second embodiment executes the processing of steps Sb7602 and Sb7603) functions to be executed, etc.) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which the transition occurs based on the result of the special determination being a specific result, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are provided as gaming states that are more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. ing. Among these, the first gaming state is transitioned based on the result of update information updated by a predetermined update trigger becoming a predetermined result.

Here, depending on the timing of transition to the second gaming state, the update result of the updating means may become a predetermined result during the second gaming state. In this case, in order to avoid overlapping execution of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, it is possible to disable reaching a predetermined result under such a situation. However, there is a concern that the games that have been repeated aiming for the updated result to be a predetermined result will come to nothing, making the player feel uncomfortable. In this regard, in this configuration, since the updating by the updating means is restricted when the second gaming state is in effect, it is possible to suppress the update result of the updating means from becoming a predetermined result in the middle of the second gaming state. As a result, reaching a predetermined result is prevented from being invalidated, and it becomes possible to appropriately control the gaming state.

Feature bM2. Means capable of canceling the restriction by the update restriction means when the second gaming state ends (a function for executing the process of step Sb7602 by the main control device 162 according to Modification 10 of the second embodiment) etc.) The gaming machine according to feature bM1.

According to the above configuration, when the second gaming state ends, the updating by the updating means is restarted. Thereby, the player can play the game again aiming at the predetermined result from the continuation of the updated result before shifting to the second gaming state.

Feature bM3. A game in which a game repetition operation is started based on the execution of the special determination, and a game round is controlled so that a game round is performed with a notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination as one game round. Time control means (a function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure fluctuation display process in the production control device 143),
A second gaming state transition means (for determining transition to the third time-saving gaming state by the main controller 162) that can transition to the second gaming state when a predetermined transition trigger (resulting in a special winning result) is established. processing, a function to execute time-saving gaming state transition processing, etc.),
Means capable of restricting the update by the update means in a predetermined game round in which the predetermined transition trigger (resulting in a special losing result) is established (main controller according to Modification 10 of the second embodiment) 162 to execute the process of step Sb7601);
The gaming machine according to feature bM1 or feature bM2, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, execution of updating by the updating means is restricted in a game round in which the conditions for transition to the second gaming state are satisfied. As a result, a situation has arisen in which both the trigger for transition to the second gaming state and the update result of the updating means becoming a predetermined result (trigger for transition to the first gaming state) can be established in the same game round. In this case, it is possible to carry over reaching a predetermined result (transition to the first gaming state) while prioritizing the transition to the second gaming state. Therefore, the transition to the first gaming state can be avoided and the transition to the second gaming state can be made, and it is possible to suppress the overlapping of both gaming states.

In addition, in the above configuration, since the updating of the update information is restarted upon the end of the second gaming state, the updated result becomes the predetermined result, so it is possible to shift to the first gaming state after the end of the second gaming state. Can be done. In other words, if the transition trigger for each of these gaming states can be established in the same game round, it is possible to sequentially transition to the second gaming state and the first gaming state, and both of these gaming states The configuration can be such that the player can enjoy the benefits of the above.

Feature bM4. Transition determining means for determining whether or not to transition to the second gaming state (function for executing processing for determining transition to the third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modification 10 of the second embodiment) etc.),
In one game round, the update unit is configured to perform the update after the transition determination unit has made the transition determination (the process in step Sb7604 is executed after the process in step Sb7501 is executed). The gaming machine according to feature bM3, characterized in that:

In the above configuration, the update processing of the update information is executed after the transition to the second gaming state is determined. Therefore, a situation has arisen in which both the trigger for transition to the second gaming state and the fact that the update result of the updating means becomes a predetermined result (trigger for transition to the first gaming state) can occur in the same game round. In this case, it is possible to switch whether or not to update the update information based on the result of the determination of transition to the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a preferable configuration in which updating of the update information is restricted in a game round in which the condition for transition to the second gaming state is satisfied as in the feature bM3 described above.

Feature bM5. A game in which a game repetition operation is started based on the execution of the special determination, and a game round is controlled so that a game round is performed with a notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination as one game round. Equipped with a time control means (a function to execute the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, a function to execute the special figure fluctuation display process in the production control device 143),
A game in which the result of the special judgment is a predetermined judgment result (special outcome) that is different from the specified result, or the result of the special judgment is a non-specified result (missing result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state. A transition for a second gaming state that can be made to transition to a second gaming state based on the result of a specific determination (determination of winning type, transition lottery, etc.) made in the previous round becoming a predetermined determination result (special winning result). According to any one of the features bM1 to bM4, characterized in that the main control device 162 includes a process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state, a function for executing the process for transitioning to the time-saving gaming state, etc. Game machine.

In the above configuration, the result of the special determination becomes a predetermined determination result different from the specific result, or the result of the specific determination performed in the game round in which the result of the special determination was a non-specific result becomes the predetermined determination result. The system is configured to shift to a second gaming state based on the game. In a configuration where the transition to the second gaming state is triggered by the special determination itself or a specific determination linked to the result of the special determination, the timing of transition to the second gaming state is random, so During the state, an event may occur in which the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result. By applying the structure of the feature bM1 to such a case, the occurrence of the above phenomenon is suppressed, and it becomes possible to control the gaming state appropriately.

Feature bM6. It has a third gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and different from the special gaming state,
The second gaming state can be transitioned to without going through the special gaming state, and the third gaming state can be transitioning to through the special gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features bM1 to bM5, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the updating by the updating means is permitted when the game is in a third gaming state.

Regarding the third gaming state that is transferred via the special gaming state, it is possible to adjust the updating result of the updating means during the third gaming state so that it does not become a predetermined result at the design stage of the gaming machine. Based on such characteristics, in the above configuration, updating of update information is restricted in the second gaming state, but such restrictions are not imposed in the third gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the update of the update information from being excessively stagnant, and to prevent a large delay from occurring in the transition to the first gaming state.

In addition, this feature has a third gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and different from the special gaming state, and the predetermined update information is The transition to the third gaming state is performed in a state where the predetermined initial value (value corresponding to the ceiling number of times) is set, or the predetermined update information is changed to the predetermined initial value in correspondence with the transition to the third gaming state. According to any one of features bM1 to feature bM5, the game is configured such that the update by the update means is permitted when the game is in a third gaming state. It can also be expressed as "gaming machine."

Feature bM7. The termination condition of the third gaming state includes that the number of gaming times after transitioning to the third gaming state becomes a specific number of times (sixth upper limit number of times or seventh upper limit number of times),
The first gaming state is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the first gaming state based on the result of the update by the updating means performed for the game after the special gaming state ends being a predetermined result. The gaming machine described in feature bM6.

In the above configuration, the third gaming state ends when the number of games played after transitioning to the third gaming state reaches a specific number, and the update information by the updating means is updated after the special gaming state ends. It is configured to be played as a game. In this case, by setting the specific number of times, which is the upper limit number of times of the third gaming state, to a number smaller than the number of gaming times required for the update result of the update information to become the predetermined result, the third gaming state is ended. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the update result reaches a predetermined result. That is, since it is possible to avoid the update result of the update means becoming a predetermined result during the third gaming state, this can be a preferable aspect in realizing the configuration of the feature bM6.

Feature bM8. Equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function of displaying the number of misses image 475 by the production control device 143) capable of executing a specific notification (display of the number of misses image 475) corresponding to the update result of the updating means,
The specific notification executing means is characterized in that, when the updating by the updating unit is restricted, the specific notification execution means is equipped with a means capable of holding the notification content of the specific notification in the state immediately before the restriction was performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features bM1 to bM7.

In the above configuration, by executing a specific notification corresponding to the update result of the update means, the player can grasp the intermediate progress of the update information and the remaining time until a predetermined result is reached, and proceed with the subsequent game. This information can be used as useful information. At that time, if the update is restricted due to being in the second gaming state, the specific notification will be made in a manner that maintains the state immediately before the restriction, so in addition to not updating, The player can easily understand what will remain when the update is restarted due to the lifting of the restriction, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion.

Feature bM9. According to any one of features bM1 to feature bM8, the predetermined update information is the number of times the special determination result is a non-specific result (missing result) that does not correspond to transition to a special gaming state. gaming machines.

The first gaming state changes based on the updated result of the number of times the special judgment result was a non-specific result (cumulative number of missed gaming times). It has the characteristic of being able to predict the transition to the gaming state. For this reason, if the update result becomes a predetermined result in the middle of the second gaming state, there is a concern that if the transition is not made to the first gaming state, the player may easily notice that the transition to the first gaming state has not been made. . If the configuration of feature bM1 above is applied to such a configuration and the occurrence of the event in which the update result becomes a predetermined result during the second gaming state, which is the original cause, can be avoided, the transition to the first gaming state will not occur. It is possible to suppress the arousal of distrust in the user, and it becomes possible to suitably exhibit the above-mentioned effects of feature bM1.

Feature bM10. Equipped with a predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 63) into which a game ball can enter,
In the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the ball enters the predetermined ball entering means more easily than in the normal gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features bM1 to bM9, wherein the special judgment means is capable of executing the special judgment based on the ball entering the predetermined ball entry means.

In the above configuration, when the game shifts to the first game state or the second game state, the ball enters the predetermined ball entry means more easily than in the normal game state, and is more likely to receive a special judgment. By applying any one of the features bM1 to bM9 to such a structure, each of the features can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

Note that for each configuration of features bM1 to feature bM10, features bA1 to feature bA12, feature bB1 to feature bB10, feature bC1 to feature bC9, feature bD1 to feature bD6, feature bE1 to feature bE10, feature bF1 to feature bF10, Any one of features bG1 to feature bG8, feature bH1 to feature bH8, feature bI1 to feature bI11, feature bJ1 to feature bJ10, feature bK1 to feature bK10, feature bL1 to feature bL9, feature bM1 to feature bM10, feature bN1 to feature bN7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in configuration 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bN group>
The feature bN group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on modifications 6 to 10 of the second embodiment. It is something that

In addition, the invention described in feature bN group is ``For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and based on the fact that the lottery result becomes a specific result, Regarding the background technology that states, ``There is a system that allows the player to enter a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)," There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature bN1. A special judgment means (special drawing correctness judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (special drawing correctness judgment) based on establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning in the first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63). function to perform judgment), and
A special game state transition means that is capable of shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the result of the special determination is a specific result (jackpot result); A function of executing gaming state transition processing in the main control device 162);
A game in which a game repetition operation is started based on the execution of the special determination, and a game round is controlled so that the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one game round. Time control means (function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, function of executing the special figure fluctuation display process in the production control device 143),
An update that allows predetermined update information (number of losing games, number of points, etc.) to be updated based on a predetermined update trigger (the result of a winning lottery becomes a losing result, winning a point lottery, etc.) Means (a function of executing the process of step Sb5504 by the main controller 162 according to modifications 7 to 9 of the second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step Sb7604 by the main controller 162 according to the tenth modification) etc.) and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
The specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (second time-saving gaming state) that can be transitioned to based on the update result of the updating means being a predetermined result (ceiling number of times, predetermined number of points, etc.); The result is a predetermined judgment result (special winning result) different from the specified result, or the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (missing result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state. A second specific gaming state (a third time-saving gaming state) that can be transferred based on the result of a specific determination (loss type determination, transition lottery, etc.) being a predetermined determination result (special losing result, transition lottery winning result, etc.) ) and has multiple types of specific gaming states, including
Notification settings for setting a predetermined notification (special out-of-reach performance, etc.) when the result of the special judgment or the specific judgment becomes a predetermined judgment result, or when the transition is made or made to a second specific gaming state. Means (a function of executing the process of step Sb3313 by the main control device 162 according to modifications 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, a function of setting a game repeat performance by the performance control device 143),
Equipped with
In one game round, the updating means is configured to perform the updating by the updating means before the setting by the notification setting means (steps in Modifications 6 to 9 of the second embodiment) A game characterized by a configuration in which the process in step Sb3313 is executed after the process in step Sb5504 is executed, and a configuration in which the process in step Sb3313 is executed after the process in step Sb7604 is executed in modification 10 of the second embodiment. Machine.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which the game transitions based on the result of the special determination being a specific result, the specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. In addition, as such a specific gaming state, there is a first specific gaming state that transitions to based on the result of update information updated by a predetermined update trigger, and the result of the special determination is a predetermined determination result that is different from the specific result. Or, it has a second specific game state to which the state shifts based on the fact that the result of the specific determination made in the game round in which the result of the special determination is a non-specific result becomes a predetermined determination result. In this case, both the result of the special determination or specific determination becoming the predetermined determination result and the update result of the updating means becoming the predetermined result may occur in the same game, and multiple specific game states In order to avoid duplication, it is conceivable to adjust the specific gaming state of the transfer destination to the first specific gaming state.

In this case, for example, if it is configured to set a predetermined notification corresponding to the transition to the second specific gaming state or the establishment of the transition condition to the second specific gaming state before updating the update information, the transition destination There is a possibility that the above-mentioned predetermined notification corresponding to the transition to the second specific gaming state, etc. may be performed in the gaming round, even though the actual transition to the first specific gaming state is due to the adjustment. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the update information is updated prior to the predetermined notification setting process, the gaming machine can grasp that the update result has become the predetermined result before setting the predetermined notification execution. , execution of the above-mentioned predetermined notification can be canceled based on the adjustment result of the migration destination. As a result, it is possible to adjust the specific gaming state to which the transition destination is made while suppressing notifications that do not match the type of the specific gaming state to which the actual transition is made in the gaming round, and to appropriately control the gaming state. becomes possible.

In addition, if the result of the special judgment or specific judgment becomes the predetermined judgment result in a game round in which the update result of the updating means does not become the predetermined result, execution of the predetermined notification is set after the update information is updated. That is, when only the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, the corresponding notification can be appropriately performed.

Feature bN2. Means capable of shifting to a first specific gaming state (second implementation The main control device 162 according to Modifications 6, 8, and 9 of the form executes a process for determining transition to the second time-saving gaming state and a process for determining transition to the third time-saving gaming state). The gaming machine according to feature bN1.

In the above configuration, when both the result of the special determination or the specific determination becomes the predetermined determination result and the update result of the updating means becomes the predetermined result in the same game round, the first specific game state is configured so that migration to is prioritized. By applying the feature bN1 in such a case, it is possible to avoid notification corresponding to the second specific gaming state from being performed.

Feature bN3. The gaming machine according to feature bN1 or feature bN2, wherein the predetermined update information is the number of times the special determination result is the non-specific result.

The first specific gaming state changes based on the updated result of the number of times the special judgment result becomes a non-specific result (cumulative number of missed gaming times). 1. It has the characteristic of being able to predict the transition to a specific gaming state. For this reason, if the update result becomes the predetermined result in the middle of the second specific gaming state, if the transition is not made to the first specific gaming state, the player is likely to notice that the transition to the first specific gaming state has not been made. There are concerns. Considering these circumstances, it becomes possible for both the result of the special judgment or specific judgment to become the predetermined judgment result and the update result of the updating means to become the predetermined result in the same game round. In this case, it is preferable to give priority to the transition to the first specific gaming state. In such a case, by applying the configuration of feature bN1 above, the transition to the first specific gaming state can be performed while suppressing notifications that are inconsistent with the type of specific gaming state to which the actual transition is made in the gaming round. It becomes possible to prioritize.

Feature bN4. The gaming machine according to any one of features bN1 to bN3, characterized in that the first specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when a situation is reached in which both the result of the special determination or specific determination becomes the predetermined determination result and the update result of the updating means becomes the predetermined result in the same game round. In addition, by prioritizing the transition to the first specific gaming state, it is possible to shift to the more advantageous specific gaming state. In such a case, by applying the configuration of feature bN1 above, the transition to the first specific gaming state can be performed while suppressing notifications that are inconsistent with the type of specific gaming state to which the actual transition is made in the gaming round. It becomes possible to prioritize.

Feature bN5. The gaming machine according to any one of features bN1 to feature bN4, wherein the update is performed by the update means when a game round is started.

In the above configuration, since the update information is updated at the start of the game round, it becomes possible to set the execution of the predetermined notification at the start of the game round. This makes it possible to cope with the case where the predetermined notification is given at the beginning of the game round or throughout the game round, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the predetermined notification.

Feature bN6. Equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function of displaying the number of failures image 475 by the production control device 143) capable of executing a specific notification (the number of failures image 475) corresponding to the update result of the updating means,
The specific notification execution means is configured to update the notification content of the specific notification based on the update of the predetermined update information by the update unit (updating the display content of the number-of-misses image 475 by the production control device 143). function),
The game time control means controls the game time so that notification corresponding to the notification result is performed in a predetermined notification period (determined display time) after the game reuse operation is performed;
The notification update means is configured to update at any predetermined timing (a special figure game time) in a period from the end of the game reuse operation of the game time in which the update by the update means is performed until the start of the next game time. Features bN1 to bN5 are characterized in that they include means capable of updating the notification content at the start timing of the confirmation display, the middle timing of the confirmation display, the end timing of the confirmation display, etc.) The gaming machine described in any of the above.

In the above configuration, by executing a specific notification corresponding to the update result of the update means, the player can grasp the intermediate progress of the update information and the remaining time until a predetermined result is reached, and proceed with the subsequent game. This information can be used as useful information. In this case, the configuration is such that the predetermined notification is set after the update information is updated as in feature bN1 above, in other words, the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state necessary for setting the predetermined notification are satisfied. In a configuration in which the update information is updated prior to the determination as to whether or not the update information is updated, the update information may be updated at a relatively early stage in the game round. In such a case, if the content of the specific notification is updated immediately in response to the update information being updated, the player's interest in the updated result may be lost even before the special judgment result is notified. There is a concern that the role of the gaming session may not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the update information has already been updated, it will be reflected in the specific notification after waiting for the special judgment result notification to start, so the special judgment result will not be reflected in the specific notification. It is possible to draw attention to the game until the game is played. Therefore, it is possible to exhibit the above-mentioned effect of the above-mentioned feature bN1 while suppressing the loss of attention to the game round.

Note that this feature may further include a configuration in which "the predetermined update information is the number of times the result of the special determination is the non-specific result." In this case, the update information may be updated at a relatively early stage in the game.In such a case, the content of the specific notification may be updated immediately in response to the update information being updated. In this case, there is a concern that a player may be able to determine that the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (so-called a wrong result) even before the result of the special judgment is announced. In the configuration, even if the update information has already been updated, it is reflected in the specific notification after waiting for the special judgment result notification to start, so it is possible to determine in advance whether the result is an incorrect result. It is possible to achieve the above effect of the feature bN1 while suppressing the above effects.

Feature bN7. The game time control means controls the game time so that notification corresponding to the notification result is performed in a predetermined notification period (determined display time) after the game reuse operation is performed;
When the update result of the updating means becomes a predetermined result, the transition to the first specific gaming state occurs in any specific period from the end of the game cycle operation to the start of the next game cycle. Any one of features bN1 to feature bN6 is configured to be performed at timing (start timing of confirmation display in special figure game round, timing in the middle of confirmation display, end timing of confirmation display, etc.). The game machine described.

A configuration in which the predetermined notification is set after the update information is updated as in feature bN1 above, in other words, it is determined whether or not the transition condition to the second specific gaming state necessary for setting the predetermined notification is satisfied. In a configuration in which update information is updated before a determination is made, update processing of update information may be performed at a relatively early stage in a game round. In such a case, if you immediately shift to the first specific gaming state based on the updated result being the predetermined result, the behavior of the gaming machine may change even before the special judgment result is announced. As a result of the player noticing that he/she is in the first specific gaming state and losing his or her attention, there is a concern that the role of the gaming round may not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the update information has already been updated, the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed after waiting for the notification of the result of the special determination to start. It is possible to draw attention to the game rounds until the results are announced. Therefore, it is possible to exhibit the above-mentioned effect of the above-mentioned feature bN1 while suppressing the loss of attention to the game round.

Note that for each configuration of the features bN1 to bN7, features bA1 to bA12, bB1 to bB10, bC1 to bC9, bD1 to bD6, bE1 to bE10, bF1 to bF10 , features bG1 to features bG8, features bH1 to features bH8, features bI1 to features bI11, features bJ1 to features bJ10, features bK1 to features bK10, features bL1 to features bL9, features bM1 to features bM10, features bN1 to features bN7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in configuration (1) individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Note that it is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the respective configurations of other feature bA groups to feature bN groups to each structure of the feature bA group to feature bN group detailed above. However, it is also possible to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Belt-type game machine using a ball (reel-type game machine using a ball): Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, The game is played with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is started, and the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A special game state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated, and the present invention further includes a charging device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a loading process for taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a charging device that performs a loading process for taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a system for dispensing game balls into the ball tray. 1. A gaming machine comprising a payout device that performs the start operation, and configured such that the operation of the starting operating means becomes effective when game balls are thrown in by the throwing device.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 143... Performance control device, 162... Main control device.

Claims (1)

a firing means capable of firing a game ball based on a predetermined firing operation;
a specific determination means that executes a specific determination based on establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
a benefit granting means capable of granting a predetermined benefit to the player based on the result of the specific determination;
A display means capable of variably displaying a pattern;
A game round is performed by starting variable display of symbols on the display means based on the specific determination, and displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the specific determination as one game round. a game time control means for controlling the game time so that the game time is played;
Equipped with
It has a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
a transition means capable of transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state without passing through the provision of the predetermined benefit when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
means for enabling the stop display period during which the stop display is performed in a predetermined game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied to be longer than the stop display period in a specific game round in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied;
Equipped with
A game in which a game ball is fired by a first firing operation in the first game state is recommended, and a game in which a game ball is fired by a second firing operation different from the first firing operation in the second game state is recommended. It is configured as follows.
The transition means enables the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state to be performed at a first timing before the end of the stop display in the predetermined gaming round ,
It is characterized by comprising means for enabling specific notification corresponding to the second firing operation to be executed at a second timing after the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. A gaming machine that does.

Images